Tower 7

Tower 7
Application for static and dynamic structural analysis,

concrete, steel and timber design
An instruction manual for operating with the program
(updated for Build 7041)
Copyright (c) Radimpex * http://www.radimpex.rs * e-mail: info@radimpex.rs * Tel. 011 3809-158
Contents
1. INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................... 1
1.1
Required Computer Configuration .............................................................. 1
1.2
Program Installation ................................................................................. 6
1.2.1
Local Program Installation .............................................................................. 7
1.2.2
Network Installation .................................................................................... 15
1.3
Program Uninstallation ........................................................................... 21
1.4
Starting the Program .............................................................................. 22
1.5
Basic Concept and Organisation of the Program ......................................... 23
2. GRAPHIC INTERFACE ............................................................................... 24

2.1
Screen Appearance ................................................................................ 24
2.2
Arrangement and Size of Windows for Drawing .......................................... 26
2.3
Operating with windows.......................................................................... 29
2.4
Activating Commands ............................................................................. 31
2.4.1
Repeating and Interrupting Commands.......................................................... 32
2.4.2
Choosing subcommands from command bar................................................... 32
2.4.3
Transparent Commands ............................................................................... 33
2.4.4
Operating with Dialog Boxes ........................................................................ 33
2.5
Selecting Points ..................................................................................... 42
2.5.1
Free Point Selecting .................................................................................... 45
2.5.2
Orthogonal and polar points selection ............................................................ 45
2.5.3
Relative entering of a point by assigning a single coordinate ............................ 47
2.5.4
Point Selecting by Assigning Coordinates ....................................................... 48
2.5.5
Point Selecting by Precise Targeting (OSNAP Criteria) ................................... 50
2.5.6
Choosing Points by Selecting ........................................................................ 53
2.6
Drawing the Polygonal Line ..................................................................... 53
2.6.1
Drawing the Arbitrary Polygonal Line ............................................................. 55
2.6.2
Drawing the Rectangle ................................................................................ 56
2.6.3
Drawing the Circle ...................................................................................... 58
2.6.4
Placing the Polygonal Line along the Perimeter of a Drawn Contour ................... 59
2.6.5
Offset ........................................................................................................ 60
2.7
Zooming Parts of Drawings ..................................................................... 61
2.7.1
Zoom Window ............................................................................................ 61
2.7.2
Zoom previous ........................................................................................... 62
2.7.3
Pan ........................................................................................................... 62
2.7.4
Zoom Dynamic ........................................................................................... 63
2.7.5
Zoom All .................................................................................................... 63
2.7.6
Mouse Wheel Dynamic Zoom ........................................................................ 64
2.8
Selecting the elements of a drawing ......................................................... 64
2.9
Commands for Manipulating the Elements of Drawings ............................... 73
2.9.1
Delete ....................................................................................................... 73
2.9.2
Copy ......................................................................................................... 73
2.9.3
Array......................................................................................................... 74
2.9.4
Mirror ........................................................................................................ 77
2.9.5
Rotate ....................................................................................................... 77
2.9.6
Move ......................................................................................................... 78
2.9.7
Trim .......................................................................................................... 78
2.9.8
Extend ...................................................................................................... 79
2.9.9
Stretch ...................................................................................................... 79
2.9.10 3D Array .................................................................................................... 80

2.9.11 3D Mirror ................................................................................................... 81
2.9.12 3D Rotation................................................................................................ 81
2.9.13 Restoring the Drawings (Undo/Redo) ............................................................ 81
2.9.14 Join Contours ............................................................................................. 82
2.9.15 Divide Contours .......................................................................................... 83
2.10 Visibility ............................................................................................... 83

2.10.1 Adjusting the Visibility by Types of Elements .................................................. 84
2.10.2 Adjusting the Visibility by Selecting (Hiding) .................................................. 96
2.11 Commands for Operating with Levels (menu Level) ............................... 100
2.11.1 Editing the Levels (Edit).............................................................................. 101
2.11.2 Selecting the Current Level ......................................................................... 104
2.11.3 Local Coordinate System of Levels ............................................................... 105
2.11.4 Inserting the Previously Created Floor Structure onto a Level (Insert) .............. 106
2.11.5 Replacing the Geometry of the Floor Structures (Replacement) ....................... 108
2.11.6 Export of the construction part in a new model (Export) ................................. 109
2.11.7 Generating the Space Model (Generate) ....................................................... 111
2.12 Commands for Operating with Frames (menu Disposition) ...................... 113
2.12.1 Creating a New Frame (New) ...................................................................... 114
2.12.2 Changing the frame name (Rename) ............................................................ 115
2.12.3 Selecting the Current Frame........................................................................ 117
2.12.4 Local Coordinate System of a Frame ............................................................ 118
2.12.5 Cylindrical Frames ..................................................................................... 119
2.12.6 Commands for Manipulating the Frames ....................................................... 123
2.12.7 Generating the frames ................................................................................ 123
2.13 3D Graphic Control (menu 3D View) .................................................... 124

2.13.1 Rotation of Isometric Presentation (Orbit) ..................................................... 125
2.13.2 Rendered View of the Model (Render) ........................................................... 125
2.13.3 Camera View (Camera) .............................................................................. 125
2.13.4 Changing the Position of the Camera (Camera Position) .................................. 127
2.13.5 Orthogonal Projections of Isometric Presentation ........................................... 129
2.13.6 Position of the current 2D view ("Current 2D view") ....................................... 130
2.13.7 Current 2D View Only ................................................................................. 131
2.14 Commands for Changing the Current Presentation in 2D View Window

(menu 2D View) ................................................................................ 132
2.14.1 Create View .............................................................................................. 132
2.14.2 Edit View .................................................................................................. 134
2.14.3 Selecting the Current Auxiliary View ............................................................. 137
2.14.4 View picking (Ctrl+W) ................................................................................ 138
2.14.5 Exporting assemblies to plane model (Export) ............................................... 140
2.14.6 Projections of Defined Views ....................................................................... 140
2.14.7 Selecting the Points in Defined Views ........................................................... 141
2.14.8 Visibility of Designed Floor Structures ........................................................... 141
2.14.9 Showing the recent views ........................................................................... 144
3. ENTERING DATA .................................................................................... 145

3.1
Structure ............................................................................................ 145
3.1.1
Slab/Wall .................................................................................................. 149
3.1.2
Hole ......................................................................................................... 156
3.1.3
Boundary Conditions .................................................................................. 156
3.1.4
Beam ....................................................................................................... 170
3.1.5
Releasing the Influences ............................................................................. 217
3.1.6
Editing of influence releases ........................................................................ 225
3.1.7
Bypassing Beams ....................................................................................... 226
3.1.8
Database of massive and thin-wall cross sections .......................................... 227
3.1.9
Generate thin-wall section girder ................................................................. 232
3.1.10 Area Support ............................................................................................. 235

3.1.11 Linear Support .......................................................................................... 238
3.1.12 Point Support ............................................................................................ 242
3.1.13 3D Surfaces .............................................................................................. 248
3.1.13.1
Sphere .............................................................................................. 251
3.1.13.2
Cone ................................................................................................. 252
3.1.13.3
Tunnel ............................................................................................... 253
3.1.13.4
Helix ................................................................................................. 253
3.1.13.5
Existing Surface .................................................................................. 254
3.1.13.6
Edit Surface ....................................................................................... 255
3.1.14 Stage Construction .................................................................................... 258

3.1.14.1
Defining the Construction Stages .......................................................... 262
3.1.14.2
Changing the Construction Stage .......................................................... 264
3.1.15 Link ......................................................................................................... 274
3.2
Loading .............................................................................................. 276
3.2.1
Defining the Load Cases ............................................................................. 279
3.2.2
Defining the Load Combinations................................................................... 282
3.2.3
Area Load ................................................................................................. 294
3.2.3.1
Area Load on Evolved Surfaces ............................................................. 302
3.2.4
Linear Load ............................................................................................... 309
3.2.5
Point Load................................................................................................. 315
3.2.6
Support Displacement ................................................................................ 317
3.2.7
Slab Temperature ...................................................................................... 318
3.2.8
Beam Temperature .................................................................................... 319
3.2.9
Axial strain ............................................................................................... 320
3.2.10 Moving Load .............................................................................................. 323

3.2.11 Influence Line ........................................................................................... 336
3.2.12 Prestressing .............................................................................................. 338
3.2.12.1
Defining the Ends of the Assigned Prestressing Line ................................ 345
3.2.12.2
Prestress Losses ................................................................................. 345
3.2.13 Resultant .................................................................................................. 348

3.2.14 Load Converter .......................................................................................... 349
3.3
Changing and Controlling the Previously Entered Data .............................. 353
3.3.1
Modify Sets ............................................................................................... 353
3.3.2
Changing the Local Coordinate System of Linear Elements (Change L.C.S.)....... 356
3.3.3
Changing the local coordinate system of point support ................................... 359
3.3.4
Set Control ............................................................................................... 361
3.3.5
Input Data Control ..................................................................................... 367
3.3.6
Geometry Control ...................................................................................... 374
3.3.7
Diagonal line of surface entities ................................................................... 379
3.3.8
Information ............................................................................................... 380
3.4
Commands for Entering the Elements of Drawings other than Parts of the
Structure ............................................................................................ 383
3.4.1
Auxiliary Axes ........................................................................................... 384
3.4.1.1
Defining the Axes ................................................................................ 388
3.4.1.2
Deleting the Axes ................................................................................ 389
3.4.1.3
Changing the Distances between the Axes ............................................. 389
3.4.1.4
Moving the Axes ................................................................................. 390
3.4.1.5
Changing the Name of the Axes ............................................................ 390
3.4.1.6
Generating axes automatically .............................................................. 392
3.4.2
Selecting the Layer for Drawing ................................................................... 393
3.4.3
Drawing the Construction Lines ................................................................... 393
3.4.4
Writing the Text......................................................................................... 394
3.4.5
Dimensioning the Drawing .......................................................................... 396
3.4.6
Item mark ................................................................................................ 398
3.5
3.4.6.1
Item marking ..................................................................................... 398
3.4.6.2
Automatic item marking....................................................................... 401
Adjusting the Parameters Used by the Program in its Operating

(Setup menu) ................................................................................... 405
3.5.1
Settings .................................................................................................... 405
3.5.2
Functionality ............................................................................................. 414
3.5.3
Toolbars ................................................................................................... 427
3.5.4
Shortcuts .................................................................................................. 431
3.5.5
Export of configuration files ......................................................................... 434
3.5.6
Import of configuration files ........................................................................ 434
3.6
Commands for Operating with Data Files ................................................ 435
3.6.1
Opening a New Data File (New) ................................................................... 436
3.6.2
Reading-in the Data Files (Open) ................................................................. 437
3.6.3
Saving the Changes in the Drawing (Save) ................................................... 438
3.6.4
Saving the Data Files under Another Name ................................................... 438
3.6.5
Import...................................................................................................... 439
3.6.6
Importing the Drawings from AutoCAD (DXF Import) ..................................... 441
3.6.7
Exporting geometry to DXF format (DXF Export) ............................................ 444
3.6.8
Project Description ..................................................................................... 445
3.6.9
Ending the Program Operation ..................................................................... 448
3.7
Transfer into Other Program Modules ..................................................... 448
4. FORMING THE FINITE ELEMENT MESH ................................................... 449

4.1
Basic Concepts .................................................................................... 449
4.2
Generating the Finite Element Mesh ....................................................... 450
4.3
Errors that Interrupt the Generating Process ........................................... 453
4.4
Quality Control of Generated Finite Element Mesh .................................... 454
4.5
Correcting the Generated Finite Element Mesh......................................... 455
4.5.1
Increasing the Mesh Density ....................................................................... 455
4.5.2
Decreasing the Mesh Density....................................................................... 457
4.5.3
Node Displacement .................................................................................... 458
4.6
Beam division out of slab ...................................................................... 459
4.7
Miscellaneous Commands ..................................................................... 461
5. Stability Design ...................................................................................... 462

6. MODE ANALYSIS .................................................................................... 467
6.1
Calculation .......................................................................................... 467
6.2
Errors Interrupting the Calculation Process.............................................. 473
6.3
The selection of the current tone ........................................................... 475
6.4
Current Mode View............................................................................... 477
6.5
Current Mode Animation ....................................................................... 477
6.6
Controlling the Established Masses ......................................................... 478
7. CALCULATING THE MODEL ..................................................................... 484

7.1
Module Operation Purpose and Description .............................................. 484
7.2
Errors Interrupting the Calculation Process.............................................. 487
7.3
Calculation Methods ............................................................................. 490
7.3.1
Theory I ................................................................................................... 490
7.3.2
Theory II .................................................................................................. 490
7.3.3
Structural analysis with non-linear elements ................................................. 491
7.3.4
Seismic Analysis ........................................................................................ 492
7.3.4.1
EUROCODE ........................................................................................ 496
7.3.4.2
Russian Regulations (SNIP Code) .......................................................... 504
7.3.4.3
Swiss Regulations (SIA) ....................................................................... 509
7.3.4.4
Any spectral curve .............................................................................. 513
8. POST-PROCESSING ................................................................................ 516

8.1
Purpose and Description of Module Operation .......................................... 516
8.2
Selecting the Current Load Case ............................................................ 521
8.2.1
Creating SRSS combinations ....................................................................... 523
8.2.2
Creating the combinations .......................................................................... 525
8.2.3
Envelopes of Influences .............................................................................. 525
8.3
Deformed Model View ........................................................................... 529
8.4
Reaction Sums .................................................................................... 531
8.5
Influences in Plate/Wall ........................................................................ 532
8.5.1
Denoting the Isolines (Legend) .................................................................... 544
8.5.2
Influences in Arbitrary Cross-section (Section) .............................................. 546
8.5.3
Influences in Slabs for user defined LCS ....................................................... 552
8.5.4
Relative deflection in slabs .......................................................................... 555
8.5.5
Additional marking influences in surface entities ............................................ 558
8.6
Influences in Beams ............................................................................. 559
8.6.1
Individual Diagrams ................................................................................... 560
8.6.2
Diagrams in all Beams ................................................................................ 569
8.6.3
Diagrams in Cross-section........................................................................... 571
8.6.4
Presenting the Influences in Beams by Isolines (Legend) ................................ 575
8.6.5
Additional marking influences in linear entities .............................................. 578
8.6.6
Relative beam deflection ............................................................................. 579
8.7
Influences in Area Supports (soil) .......................................................... 582
8.7.1
Reaction resultant of surface support ........................................................... 584
8.8
Influences in Linear Supports ................................................................ 588
8.9
Support Reactions ................................................................................ 590
8.10 Influences in Secondary Elements .......................................................... 594

8.11 Proxy entity ........................................................................................ 598
8.11.1 Creating the proxy entity ............................................................................ 599
8.11.2 Influences in the proxy entity ...................................................................... 601
8.12 Influence Line ..................................................................................... 602

8.13 Scaling the Influences .......................................................................... 610
8.14 Scaling the Diagrams ........................................................................... 611
8.15 Bill of quantities ................................................................................... 612
8.16 Structural Design Results Textual Representation .................................... 616
8.17 Generating the report for entity groups .................................................. 628
8.18 Removing the Presented Influences from the Screen Instantly (Reset) ....... 639
8.19 Numbering the Finite Element Mesh Nodes.............................................. 640
8.20 Set Control ......................................................................................... 640
8.21 Creating the Design Documentation ....................................................... 643
8.21.1 Export of Graphic Blocks ............................................................................. 643
8.21.2 Exporting blocks from dialog boxes .............................................................. 651
8.21.3 Defining the Paper Format (Page format) ...................................................... 651
8.21.4 Structure of Graphical Document ................................................................. 671
8.21.5 Generating the Textual Reports ................................................................... 673
8.21.6 Commands for Operating with Blocks in Tree................................................. 688
8.21.7 Graphic Block Signatures ............................................................................ 701
8.21.8 Commands for Operating with Paper Sheets .................................................. 702

8.21.9 Page Break in Design Documentation ........................................................... 705
8.21.10 Commands for Operating with Graphic Blocks on Paper .................................. 706
8.21.11 Importing graphic blocks and textual reports from other projects..................... 711
8.21.12 Saving the project documentation ................................................................ 713
8.21.13 Printing the Design Documentation .............................................................. 713
8.21.14 Export into RTF.......................................................................................... 714
8.21.15 Returning to Post-processing Module ............................................................ 715
8.21.16 Recovering corrupted documents ................................................................. 715
8.21.17 Current Report Language ............................................................................ 715
8.21.18 Exporting the block to the clipboard ............................................................. 717
8.21.19 Exporting the block visible part to the clipboard ............................................. 718
8.21.20 Exporting the block to Bitmap or AutoCAD .DXF ............................................. 718
8.21.21 Exporting textual results to the file with *.txt extension ............................... 721
8.21.22 Printing Individual Drawings Directly ............................................................ 721
9. Concrete Design ..................................................................................... 723

9.1
Selecting the Codes for Design (Codes) .................................................. 723
9.2
Defining the Load Combining Pattern...................................................... 725
9.3
Slab Design ......................................................................................... 732
9.3.1
Input Data ................................................................................................ 733
9.3.1.1
Input data Global ............................................................................. 734
9.3.1.2
Input data Local ............................................................................... 737
9.3.2
Calculating the Required Reinforcement ........................................................ 739
9.3.3
Presenting the Design Results ..................................................................... 740
9.3.4
Adopting the Reinforcement ........................................................................ 752
9.3.5
Generating Automatically the Areas with Adopted Reinforcement in Slabs ......... 763
9.3.6
Manipulating the Reinforcement Regions ....................................................... 765
9.3.7
Creating the Textual Report ........................................................................ 766
9.3.8
Exporting the Adopted Reinforcement into ArmCAD ........................................ 771
9.3.9
Plates Fissures Design ................................................................................ 773
9.3.10 Plates Flexion Design.................................................................................. 776

9.3.11 Slab punching verification ........................................................................... 780
9.4
Beam Design ....................................................................................... 795
9.4.1
Input Data ................................................................................................ 795
9.4.1.1
Input data Global ............................................................................. 796
9.4.1.2
Input data - Local ............................................................................... 802
9.4.2
Calculating the Required Reinforcement ........................................................ 811
9.4.3
Presenting the Design Results ..................................................................... 812
9.4.4
Adopting the Reinforcement ........................................................................ 814
9.4.5
Generating the textual report ...................................................................... 853
9.4.6
Exporting the Adopted Reinforcement into ArmCAD ........................................ 857
9.4.7
Beams Fissure Design ................................................................................ 862
9.4.8
Beams Flexion Design ................................................................................ 863
9.4.9
Beams Flexions and Fissures Representation ................................................. 864
9.4.10 Interaction diagram of the beam .................................................................. 867
9.5
Designing the Earthquake Walls ............................................................. 874
9.6
Dimensioning a series of walls ............................................................... 889
9.7
Cross-section Calculation ...................................................................... 895
9.8
Masonry wall stress control ................................................................... 898
10. Steel Section Design ............................................................................ 903

10.1 Selecting the Codes for Design .............................................................. 904
10.2 Governing load .................................................................................... 905
10.3 Stress control ...................................................................................... 907
10.4 Input Data .......................................................................................... 910
10.5 Stability Control ................................................................................... 913
10.6 Viewing results .................................................................................... 913
10.7 Report ................................................................................................ 917
10.8 Report for a single section .................................................................... 919
10.9 Stability control - calculator .................................................................. 920
11. Wood Constructions Dimensioning process .......................................... 922
11.1 Dimensioning process Regulation Choice ................................................. 923
11.2 Governing load .................................................................................... 927
11.3 Input Data .......................................................................................... 932
11.4 Stability Control ................................................................................... 937
11.5 Results Representation ......................................................................... 949
11.6 Report ................................................................................................ 952
11.7 One Section Report .............................................................................. 954
11.8 Stability control - calculator .................................................................. 955
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
Required Computer Configuration
Tower 7 program is a completely independent graphical program which operates

under the following operating systems:, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7.
Minimal configuration of the computer is practically determined by minimal requirements of
these operating systems and thus the program shall operate on all computers on which these
operating programs are installed and operating. However, for more serious operation with this
program, as more as possible available RAM memory is desirable.
Disk Space
Upon installing, the program itself occupies approximately 50 MB of the disk space and thus
that is the theoretical minimum of the necessary free space. However, for the operation itself
of the program, much more space will be required and its size depends on the size and number
of the problems to be calculated. The size of free disk space also influences the total available
virtual memory of the computer, which will be discussed later in this text.
Memory
In Windows surrounding, the programs use the so-called virtual memory for their operation.
The virtual memory consists of RAM (standard operating memory of the computer) and of the
so-called swap file reserved disk space. Since the capacity of the operating memory is
relatively small, Windows automatically reserves certain disk space (swap file), which
physically represents increase of operating memory. Those two memories operate together
and they represent one entirety virtual memory.
Since RAM memory is exceptionally fast, a conclusion can be drawn that working with a
program on a computer with more RAM memory will be faster and more comfortable. As we
have already said at the beginning of this manual, for more serious operation with the program
the computer should have a minimum of 1 GB RAM memory while even more is desirable.
The required total quantity of virtual memory for program operation depends solely on the
complexity and on the size of the problems to be solved. Since the program needs the largest
quantity of free virtual memory for calculation of influences using the method of finite
elements, you may face a case in which, upon activating the calculations, the program issues a
warning that there is not enough virtual memory. Since the quantity of RAM memory is fixed,
i.e. there is as much of it as has been installed on the computer, practically the size of the
virtual memory depends solely on free disk space, and the solution to such problem is in
reserving a larger disk space for the swap file. If the disk has several partitions, or if there are
several disks in the computer, the Windows should be ordered to form the swap file on the disk
(partition) having the largest free space.
The procedure for checking the adjustment of size of space on the disk for creating the swap
file will be presented in the following text.
2
Adjusting Virtual Memory - Windows XP
Activate option Settings Control Panel System from the Start menu.
Click the mouse button on option Advanced to open this data file.
Activate command field Settings.
To change the data on size of virtual memory activate command field Change....
In displayed edit boxes assign data as in figure. Activate command field Set" for accepting
new values and then by option OK first exit this window and then all other windows of the
System command.
For calculating extremely large examples, only limitation of Windows concerning maximal
allocation of memory of 2 GB can be an obstacle. This limit can be shifted in Windows XP
operating system from 2 GB to 3 GB. It is best to create a new configuration for startup of
Windows XP-a and then to adjust the parameters to that new configuration. This is performed
in the following way:
Activate option: Programs Accessories Command Prompt from Start menu.
It is necessary to assign the following instruction on the command bar:
4
bootcfg /copy /d "Windows XP - 3GB" /id 1
Thus, one more configuration of the operating system which is based on configuration number
1 but named Windows XP - 3GB is created.
Next, enter the following:
bootcfg /raw /3gb /id 2
In this way, we have added the option for support of the 3 GB size of virtual memory to the
previously created configuration Windows XP - 3GB.
In order to check if everything has been performed properly type:
bootcfg
After this, the following data should be displayed on the screen:
Boot Loader Settings
-------------------timeout: 30
default: multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT
Boot Entries
-----------Boot entry ID: 1
Friendly Name: "Microsoft Windows XP Professional"
Path:
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT
OS Load Options: /fastdetect
Boot entry ID: 2
Friendly Name: "Windows XP - 3GB"
Path:
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT
OS Load Options: /3gb
To return to Windows type the following command from command bar command prompta:
Exit
During the next boot of Windows, two cofigurations will appear. If you select "Windows XP 3GB" the Tower program will be able to use 3GB memory. In this way, you will be able to
calculate even exceptionally large examples. For more detailed information, you can consult
Help sistem for Windows XP.
Graphic Card
Operation of the program is supported in all standard resolutions provided for Windows
applications. However, since in the course of its operation the program also uses the rendered
three-dimensional view of the model, it is necessary for your card to have an installed driver
which supports 16-bit or 32-bit colours. If that is not the case, upon startup the program will
issue an adequate warning,
If you activate option Settings Control Panel from the Start menu you will obtain
control of the installed driver.
In the opened window, double-click the mouse button to activate icon Display, after which
the Display Properties dialog box opens
Click the mouse button on option Settings to open this card file.
In order to be able to start the program at all, set either High Color (16 bit) or True Color (32
bit) in list Colors.
Output Devices
Among the output devices for printing, the program supports all devices that are supported by
Windows operating system itself and by the installed drivers.
1.2
Program Installation
For correct installation of the program, it is necessary to have the installation CD

and a corresponding hard lock. Since both local and network versions of our programs exist
and also various types of hard locks (single, network, time-limited), you also need to know the
serial number of installation. The role of this serial number is to prepare installation for your
hard lock from the universal installation CD.
Each user has a unique serial number of installation and it determines both the type of
installation and the regime of program operation. In case you subsequently purchase any of
the program modules, you will receive a new serial number while the earlier one will no longer
be valid.
You can install the program only if you own the right to install the program, which means that
you must have the right to access Administrator system. Unlike installation, the program
usage has no restrictions.
Important:
Since Windows has special treatment of USB devices, in case you received an USB hard lock
with your program, do not put it onto the computer before Towers installation program
demands from you to do so. Even if by mistake you do so, immediately stop the Windows
automatic procedure of driver installation. Of course, this warning applies only to first-time use
of USB hard lock on a computer. After first installation of Tower program on the computer,
you can freely put on and remove the USB hard lock from the computer.
1.2.1
Local Program Installation
All files required for installation of Tower 7 are zipped into one self-extracting archive,
which, during the installation of the program, temporary extracts the file in the computer
memory. If you install the 32-bit version of the program from the installation CD, run the file
\Tower7\Tower7_win32_Setup.exe, or if it is a 64-bit version of the program run
\Tower7\Tower7_x64_Setup.exe. Dialog box of the following appearance will open:
Select "Install" and all necessary files will be extracted in the computer memory and program
installation will begin.
Since the presence of a corresponding hard lock is necessary during the installation, by this
message the program reminds you to check the presence of the hard lock on the computer.
A lamp lighting on the USB hard lock will indicate

that it has been correctly placed
When you have placed the hard lock, activate command field OK, after which the installation
will start. In case that we are not dealing with the first installation of the program on the given
computer, the program will skip the previously described procedure and it will immediately
start the program installation. A dialog box as follows will appear on the screen:
Choose the installation language from the closed list, and then activate command field OK.
9
To continue the installation, activate command field Next.
In the central part of the dialog box there is a contract, which regulates the conditions for
program use. Study it carefully, and only in case you agree with it turn on the switch I
accept the agreement. After that, command field Next will also be available, and when
activated, the installation procedure will continue.
In this dialog box, whether we are dealing with local or network installation of the program is
defined. Click the mouse button on icon Local to set this type of installation as the current
one and actrivate the command field Next.
10
In edit box Licence owner, type the exact name of your company since this information
be written at the bottom of each page of your design. It should be mentioned that you
obligated by the contract to write the correct name of the licence user. You will have
possibility to define completely arbitrarily the complete data on the designer as well as on
user of your services in the title of the design documentation (see Chapter 8.21.3).
will
are
the
the
Carefully assign the correct serial number of the installation, which you obtained from your
distributor, in edit box Program registration number. Next, activate command field
Next.
The position on the disk where the program is to be installed is assigned in this dialog box. If
you are not satisfied with the offered path, you have the possibility to assign a completely
arbitrary position on the disk in edit box Installation folder, or you can click on command
field to the right of this edit box to select the desired path.
Create icon on the desktop - if this check box is on, the program will make a desktop icon
that can be used to run.
Install for all users - If the computer is used by multiple users, turning on this check box
will install the program for all of them. Each of these users, with Tower 7 installed this way, will
have their own configuration files.
Once you have determined the position on the disk, activate command field Next to continue
the installation.
If the program is installed for the first time and your computer has Tower 6 already installed,
configuration files used in it can be taken over. In this case, after activating button "Next" in
the dialog for selection of installation directory, a new dialog will be displayed:
Selecting button "Yes" means that during the installation of the program all configuration files
created in Tower 6 will be copied in the appropriate folder of Tower 7.
11
In case that the program has been already previously installed in the assigned directory for
installation, the program will issue a warning and it will enable you to either keep the existing
data files or to replace them with new ones.
To simplify your choice of one of the actions provided by the program we present a list of data
bases in which data available for change during operation with the program are stored:
Tower.$dis -
configuration data file with colours of entities set by command Settings
Tower.$vis
configuration data file with adjusted visibility states within command

Visibility
Tower.$mtr
data base with library of materials which is used in defining the

characteristics of beams, plates, walls and columns
Tower.$prf
data file with library of steel profiles which is used in defining the
characteristics of cross-sections of beams and columns
Tower.$dim01 -
data file with data on quality of materials used by the program in

dimensioning concrete sections for all standards. These data are updated
by command Design Concrete Codes.
Tower.$sk
base of spectral curves which can be created by the option of seismic

analysis Any spectral curve
Tower.$vet
base of winds which can be created within command for assigning surface
load along curved surfaces
Tower.$po
base of defined patterns of moving loads
Tower.$ks -
data file with configured palette of colours used within command Set
Control.
Tower.$har -
base of standard papers used in creating design documentation
Tower.$gig -
configurations of parameters which are defined within the command

Generating the report for entity groups
Tower.$mtz -
a database of defined massive and thin wall cross sections
Tower.$net -
a meshes library
Tower.$pec -
parameters for seismic analysis by EUROCODE
Tower.$pl -
defined configurations of reinforcement legends
Tower.$ppz -
defined configurations for for generating item plan
Tower.$tb -
a database in which the last used icon arrangement is memorized
12
Tower.$utl -
a configurations of the moving load schemes which are defined via the
command Influence line
Tower.$bmd -
database containing the library of materials which are used during

designing timber structures for the regulation EUROCODE.
Tower.$acc -
database containing the keys combinations for starting fast certain

commands. The keys combinations are defined via the command
Shortcuts.
Tower.$ppd -
Configuration file with entity information display settings
Tower.$zgl -
Saved data configurations of boundary conditions in slabs
Tower.$ogr -
Saved data configurations of influence releases in beams
These files are stored in the directory C: \ Documents and Settings \ User Name \ Application
Data \ Radimpex \ Tower7 in Windows XP, or in C: \ Users \ User Name \ AppData \ Roaming
\ Radimpex \ Tower7 in operating systems Windows Vista and Windows 7.
If you have adapted all bases to your own needs during previous work with the program, we
recommend you to activate command field Yes, which will result only in innovation of
executive programs while the configuration data files will remain unchanged.
If you want to keep only certain configuration files, you must activate the command field
Choice, upon which the following dialog box will open up.
The dialog box which alllows you to select the configuration

files you wish to keep
The list displays all configuration files which are delivered with the program. Other
configuration files are not delivered but are created in course of operating with the program,
and they are not deleted during the installation process. The name and a short description of
its meaning is written for each displayed configuration file.
Now you are required to mark in the list all configuration files you wish to keep. Clicking on the
check box in the
column wil result either in placing or removing the symbol indicating
that the given configuration file has been selected. Once you have activated the command field
All, all configuration files are selected from the list, whereas upon activating the command
field None, all configuration files are deselected.
13
The placed symbols in the

column clearly indicate which
configuration files will be preserved
Once you have activated the command field OK, the current dialog box will close and the
program installation procedure may continue.
The program now presents all parameters that you have set during the installation and if you
are satisfied with them click on command field Next after which the process of installation
itself will begin. Soon information on successfully performed installation will be displayed on
the screen.
14
By activating the command field OK, installation program will end its operation.
In case the hard lock is not connected to the computer, the computer will stop the procedure
and it will issue an adequate warning.
However, if the hard lock is connected to the computer, but you have made an error while
assigning the registration number, command field Next will be unavailable for activating.
The program will write the information in the dialog box itself that a wrong registration number
was assigned.
In this case there is nothing left for you to do but to return to the dialog box for assigning the
registration number by command field Back and to assign it correctly.
15
1.2.2
Network Installation
The program can operate on all computers in the network only if at least one of the
protocols: TCP/IP, NETBIOS or IPX is established among them. The procedure of network
installation is performed in two steps. In the first step, the server installation is installed on the
disk and in the second step, client installation is performed from the server disk to all
terminals on which the program is to be performed. In addition, HASP License Manager, the
program which controls the operation of network hard lock, must be active all the time on the
server.
Since the server serves only for placing the hard lock and for storing executive programs, the
performances of the server do not influence the speed of program operation at all. It is much
more important that the network itself is fast enough to check the presence of the hard lock as
fast as possible.
Server Installation on Windows Network
Since the performances of the server do not influence the speed of program operation, you can
declare any of the computers in the network to be the server. This means that it is important
that server installation is performed on this computer, that the network hard lock is connected
to it and that the HASP License Manager is active on it. Since during installation the program
writes a series of data necessary for operation of the executive program in the Registry it is
necessay that you log on the server as the Administrator.
To
install
a
32-bit
version
of
the
program
to
a
server,
run
\Tower7\Tower7_win32_Setup.exe from the installation CD, and for 64-bit version run
\Tower7\Tower7_x64_Setup.exe, and perform the exact same procedure as for a single
installation (see section 1.2.1). Certainly in this case, the icon Network should be chosen
for the type of installation.
After the server installation, the server will have a new directory with it. The default
installation path is C:\Tower 7 Server for 32-bit version and C:\Tower 7 x64 Server for
64-bit version of the program. All necessary files for client installation of the program can be
found
in
this
directory,
zipped
into
one
self-extracting
archive
named
Tower7_win32_ClientSetup for 32-bit, and Tower7_x64_ClientSetup for 64-bit
version of the program.
Besides this archive, the server installation directory also contains the file "NETHASP.INI" which
is automatically generated during the network installation. This file contains configuration
parameters for the establishment of communication with a hardlock. Users with standard
16
network should not have any reason to modify this file. The presence of this file allows certain
atypical client installations.
The most important part of NETHASP.INI file is the line that begins with:
NH_SERVER_ADDR =
The content of this variable defines the name or IP address of the computer with attached
network hardlock. This field is automatically filled with the name of the computer on which the
network installation is performed. If for any reason you need to change this information in
order to perform the client installation, you can do it with any text editor (for example notepad.exe).
If you want to enter server name, the syntax is:
NH_SERVER_ADDR = server_name;
(for example: NH_SERVER_ADDR = SERVER01;)
If you want to enter server IP address, the syntax is:
NH_SERVER_ADDR = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx;
(for example: NH_SERVER_ADDR = 192.168.0.56;)
HASP License Manager installation
After you have completed the server installation program, you must install the HASP License
Manager program onto the server. From the installation CD, start the program
\Hasp\LMSETUP.EXE.
By activating the command field Next, the following dialog box appears on the screen:
17
Two modes of installation are offered Application (nhsrvw32.exe) which installs HASP
License Manager as a Windows application, and Service (nhsrvice.exe) which installs
HASP License Manager as a Windows service.
HASP License Manager installation as a Windows application
If you choose Application (nhsrvw32.exe) as a mode of installation and activate the
command field Next, a dialog box will be displayed in which you may customize (or accept
the proposed) HASP License Manager installation folder.
By activating the command field Next, a dialog box will be displayed in which you may
choose to place the program in the Startup Folder and start it automatically every time the
Windows is started. If you do not choose this option, then HASP License Manager must be
started each time with: Start Programs HASP License Manager HASP License
Manager.
18
By activating the command field Next in this, but also in several other dialog boxes, HASP
License Manager installation will come to an end.
HASP License Manager installation as a Windows service
This mode of installation enables HASP License Manager automatic startup every time you
restart the computer and prior to the Log-in procedure. This mode is specially suited for real
servers as they eliminate the need for any kind of administration.
Operating HASP License Manager
The easiest way to know that HASP License Manager is active is the presence of the icon in
the Taskbar:
The red icon signals that HASP License Manager is active

By double-clicking on this icon, a maximised HASP License Manager window will be
displayed:
By activating the command field Exit, HASP License Manager window can be minimized
again. In case that this program has not been started on the server, you will not be able to
access the network hardlock from either of the computers connected in the network which will
inevitably make the operation of execution program impossible.
19
It should be noted here that if you want to execute the program on the server as well, you
must execute the client installation program on it too, same as in all other computers in the
network.
The client installation
From the computer on which you want to work with the program, you need to go to the server
disk, into the server installation directory that was created in the previous step, and run
Tower7_win32_ClientSetup for 32-bit version, or Tower7_x64_ClientSetup for 64-bit
version of the program. Notice that client installation is not performed from the installation CD,
but rather from the server disk, specifically from the directory in which the server installation
had been performed. If you have not changed the default path offered by the installation
program in course of the server installation, then it is located on the server disk in the folder
C:\Tower 7 Server\.
For the continuation of the client installation, activate the command field Next.
Select a certain type of client installation in this dialog box. In case you select the Client
installation WITHOUT copying executable files from server to workstation, none of
the executable files will be copied onto the client machine. Instead, the program will be started
by calling executable files directly from the server. This variant is suited for small, fast and
unburdened networks and its main advantage is that it enables far easier update and
installations of latest program versions. In other words, if the latest version is installed onto
the server, all clients will automatically get this latest version too.
20
In case you select the Client installation WITH copying executable files from server to
workstation, then all executable files will be copied onto the client machine. This variant is
suited for networks with a large number of users or heavily burdened networks. Its main
advantage is that it does not cause an increase in network communication nor it blocks the
server during the startup which is the reason the program starts faster. In order to install a
latest version, after the server installation, you must perform again the client installation on
each computer.
After selecting a certain type of client installation, activate the command field Next.
Assign the place on the disk where the client installation will be installed in this dialog box, and
then activate the command field Next.
The program now displays all the parameters that you have assigned in course of the client
installation, and if you are satisfied with them, activate the command field Next. After this,
the procedure of the program installation will start. Soon the information about the successful
installation will be displayed on the screen.
21
The previously described procedure of the client installation can be performed on all other
computers in the network in which you want to use the program.
Installing the 64-bit version of the program on the server with 32-bit operating system.
Temporarily switch Hasp key to a computer with a 64-bit operating system. Execute a network
installation of the 64-bit version of the program and you will receive a directory named C: \
Server Tower 7 x64. Copy the entire folder to server with 32-bit operating system, and after
copying you can delete it from your computer with a 64-bit operating system. Return the HASP
key to the server with 32-bit operating system. Edit the file NETHASP.INI located in the server
installation directory. You have to make a modification with any text editor (notepad.exe can
do it) in the line: NH_SERVER_ADDR = XXX; enter or name or IP address of the server of a
computer on which HASP key stands.
1.3
Program Uninstallation
In case you wish to delete the installation of the program, activate option
Settings Control Panel from Start menu.
In the opened window, double-click the mouse on icon Add/Remove Programs to activate
it, and a dialog box as follows will open.
22
From the displayed list of all installed programs select program Tower7 and activate
command field Change/Remove. In case you wish to remove server installation, select
program Tower7 Server, and in case of client installation select program: Tower7 Client.
Since this is a destructive action, the program will demand confirmation.
Activate command field Yes, to start the uninstallation process, and soon information on
successfully performed uninstallation of the program will be displayed on the screen.
Activate command field OK, to remove definitely the Tower7 program from the computer,
and Windows will return to the basic appearance of the dialog box for uninstallation of
previously installed programs.
1.4
Starting the Program
Since in the course of its operation the program constantly checks presence of the
hardlock be sure to place the latter onto the UBS port of your computer prior to starting the
program. The program itself is started from the Start menu when option: Programs
23
Radimpex Tower7 is chosen. In case of client installation, choose option: Programs
Radimpex Tower7 Client.
In both cases, first the entrance skin and next the appearance of Tower program will soon be
displayed on the screen.
1.5
Basic Concept and Organisation of the

Program
The Tower program serves for structural and dynamic analysis of plane and space
structures. The calculation is performed by finite element method while the geometry of the
model is defined graphically, by drawing only the contour of structural elements and loads. The
program consists of four interconnected modules:
Data Input
Mesh Generation
Structural Analysis
Post-Processing
After stating the program, the first module: Data Input is always entered. The principle of
operation with the program is to first assign in module Data Input all input data necessary
for problem defining. Next, we go to module Mesh Generation, from where, after generating
the finite element mesh, option for calculation is chosen. Upon completed calculation,
calculated influences are analysed, structural elements are dimensioned and design
documentation is formed in module Post-Processing. To go from one module into another it is
necessary to choose adequate option from the drop-menu Mode.
Before we start with detailed explanation about how 3D graphic interface operates, we shall
clarify basic notions concerning the space model which are used in the program:
Level is a horizontal plane placed on a certain altitude by assigning its global Z coordinate.
Structural elements which are placed onto levels are called Floors.
Frame is a vertical part of the model which can comprise beams, columns and walls. The only
condition is that all frame members are in a vertical plane whose position is determined by two
points in the disposition of the model. In case of cylindrical frames, their position in the
disposition of the model is defined by an arc.
24
2. GRAPHIC INTERFACE
2.1
Screen Appearance
In all program modules the appearance of the screen is the same, i.e. it is divided
into the following regions:
horizontal menu
region of icons
status line
command bar
region of drawings
list of levels
Appearance of screen in module Data Input

Horizontal menu is a region in the second row of the screen from the top. In this region,
names of certain groups of commands are written.
Region of icons is space with icons arranged below the horizontal menu and along right-hand
edge of the screen.
Status line is at the very bottom of the screen and that is where certain information on
program status is written. The status line is divided into five fields in which the following
information is displayed:
-
Information on serial number and name of current case of load

Information on coordinates determined by current position of the mouse
Information on units of measures that are currently valid
Region with icons that define the state of calculating the model which is being worked
with.If you move the mouse pointer to any of these icons, you will receive information both
on meaning of the given icon and on its state. Available icons offer following information:
Whether the mesh of finite elements is generated or not. If the mesh is generated,
you will also get information on number of nodes on the whole model.
Whether the model is calculated or not. In case it is, you will also get information if
the calculation was carried out according to first or second order theory.
25
Whether the modal analysis was carried out or not.
Whether the stability calculation was carried out or not.
- Information on the Author of the program: Copyright Radimpex
Command bar is a region one line high immediately above the status line. This line changes
its content and it becomes a command bar only when one of the commands is activated.
During waiting status, when none of the commands have been chosen, the name of the
module in which the program currently operates is displayed on this line. Such appearance of
the command bar means at the same time that the program is waiting for a command.
Region of drawings represents the remaining (central) part of the screen. Region of
drawings consists of three windows each of which has its own name and clearly defined
purpose:
3D View -
This window is used for 3D drawing and 3D appearance of the whole space
structure is always shown in it.
2D View This window is used for 2D drawing and individual planar parts of the space
structure are shown in it.
Disposition - In this window, the position of frames is schematically shown in the plan of
the building.
List of levels is positioned immediately above window 3D View and it is used for operating
with levels, i.e. with horizontal planes which are determined by their name and global Z
coordinate which determines its position in space.
While the mouse pointer is in the region of drawings, it is in the form of a small cross, which
means that that is the drawing part of the screen, while in all other positions the mouse
pointer is in the shape of an arrow. The shape of the mouse pointer in the region of drawings
can be changed by alternate activation of function key F4.
Appearance of mouse pointer when function key F4 is activated

If the function key F4 is activated again, the shape of the mouse pointer will return to its
original state.
In case an action has been performed erroneously during operation with the program, a
message about the error may appear in region of drawings.
26
This type of messages will remain on the screen all until you move your mouse pointer outside
the borders of the window with the message about the error, or until you press any key.
2.2
Arrangement and Size of Windows for Drawing
As we have already said in the previous chapter, the region of windows consists of
three windows while each of them has its name and clearly defined purpose. In the top left
corner of each window its name is written and in every moment one of the windows is
currently active. If you click the mouse over the region with the name of a window, the focus
changes, i.e. that window becomes currently active. The indicator that the window is opened is
the way its name is written which makes it clearly different from the other two windows.
A click on the mouse over the name of the window 2D View

set the focus on this window
A double-click on the mouse over the name of the window leads to maximal enlargement of
that window.
27
A double-click on the mouse over the name of the window 2D View

led to its maximal enlargement
The next double-click on the mouse over the name of the maximally enlarged window leads to
return to usual arrangement of windows in the region of drawings.
Usual arrangement of windows in the region of drawings

You can easily adjust the arrangement of the windows according to your needs if you choose
adequate commands from the drop-menu Window. If you choose one of the commands from
the menu Window: 2D View, 3D View or Disposition, that window will be placed into
right-hand part of the region of drawings, and this window will have larger dimensions than
the other two. For example, if you choose command Window 3D View the screen will
look as follows:
28
Choice of command 3D View from drop-menu Window,

led to this arrangement of windows
The command Maximize Left works as a switch, which means that by selecting it, it is
alternately switched on i.e. off. When it is switched on, the arrangement of windows obtains
such a position that the large window is displayed along the left edge of the drawing area.
The largest window was placed along the left edge of the screen
after setting the command Maximize Left from drop-menu
Window to switched-on state
If you activate this command again it will switch off and the windows will return to default
position when the large window is along the right edge of the range of drawings.
Window size can be automatically adjusted to the different types of monitors. If your monitor
display ratio is 4:3, you should choose the option "Standard Monitor" from the drop-down
menu "Window", and if it is one of the newer monitors (display ratios 16:9, 16:10, etc.) than
you should choose the option "Wide monitor."
You can call all operations with windows as transparent ones, i.e. while any other command is
running.
29
2.3
Operating with windows
The content of windows 3D View and Layout is always the same. Threedimensional appearance of the whole model is always shown in window 3D View, while
schematic presentation of the position of frames in the plan of the building is shown in window
Disposition. In contrast to these windows, the content of window 2D View can be changed
and either the content of the currently active level or content of currently active frame can be
presented. The name of the active level is written in the list of levels while the currently active
frame in the disposition window is always clearly emphasized a particular color in order to
make it different from other frames.
In this example currently active level is the one called Foundation

And it is on level Z=0,00, and the last left frame in direction of
global Y axis is the currently active frame
If the focus is set on window Disposition, then the currently active frame will be shown in
window 2D View.
A click on mouse button over name of window Disposition led to presentation

of content of currently active frame in window 2D View
A click on mouse button over list of levels will lead to presentation of content of currently
active level in window 2D View. Since the focus can not be set on list of levels but only on
30
one of the three windows, a click on mouse over the list of levels will automatically set the
window 2D View as the active window.
A click on mouse button over list of levels leads to presentation

of content of that level in window 2D View and sets
window 2D View as the active window
In order the see clearly in every moment what is currently presented in window 2D View,
either name of the currently active frame or name of level and its coordinate, depending on
what has been chosen to be presented in window 2D View, is written in the continuation of
the name of the window.
Comment Foundation 0.00 clearly shows that in window

2D View the content of level named Foundation
which is on level Z=0.00 is presented
We mention that in window 2D View, beside all structural elements which belong to the given
plane (horizontal or vertical), all structural elements adjacent to or penetrating through that
plane are also presented. Presentation of these structural elements is very significant both
because it enables more clear perception of the presented part of the space structure and
because these members can be selected by OSNAP criterion for selecting points (see Chapter
2.5.5).
31
Symbols shown in window 2D View determine position of all beams

and linear supports which perforate through currently active frame
Finally, we mention that in window 2D View, beside presentation of frames and levels, a
plane presentation of completely arbitrarily chosen part of space model can also be set, which
will be discussed in more detail in further text (see Chapter 2.14).
2.4
Activating Commands
All command in the program can be equally activated from the horizontal menu as
well as by choosing the icon planned for execution of the given command. While the pointer is
in the position to point at any of the icons, after a certain time a small window, in which the
meaning of the given icon is written, will open on the screen.
When the pointer is placed to point at a certain icon the name

of the icon is written on the screen
This option will be especially helpful at the beginning of operation with the computer.
Since each of the windows has its own specific purpose, all commands in the program cannot
be executed equally in all windows. Disregarding the currently active window, the program will
still allow you to start each of the commands, but when selecting points in individual windows
32
the program will perform control if the choice of that point is possible and, if necessary, it will
issue a corresponding warning.
Since the horizontal menu does not contain all commands which the program uses, a click on
the right mouse button over the name of each window opens the drop-down menu which
contains commands that are specifically connected only to the given window.
A click on the right mouse button over the name of Disposition window
sets the focus on this window and opens the drop-down menu with
commands specifically connected only to this window
2.4.1
Repeating and Interrupting Commands
Often the need arises to repeat the choice of a command which has just ended. In
these cases you do not have to activate the same command again, but it is sufficient to press
the key Enter or to right-click.
Each command can be interrupted in course of its execution. Execution of any command can
be interrupted by pressing the key Esc, after which the program will again be in the status of
waiting for a new command to be executed. Commands can also be interrupted by pressing
the key Enter, or by a click on the right mouse button.
2.4.2
Choosing subcommands from command bar
Most of the commands in the program have their subcommands (options), which
enable the command to be executed in several ways. By choosing a certain subcommand the
User decides in which way will the given command be executed. All options contained in a
command are on the command bar. In order to explain the organisation of command bar in a
simpler way we shall use the appearance of the latter when command Slab/Wall is
activated.
<-> Slab First Point (Contour/Rectangle/cIrcle/Offset/<End>/Set):
At the beginning of the command bar a message is written by which the program denotes what
kind of action is expected from the User. In this case the User is expected to assign the
starting (first) point of the line which defines the geometry of the plate. Further course of
command execution is changed by choosing any of the subcommands which are written in
33
brackets behind the command (the subcommands are separated by slashes /). The
subcommands are chosen either by assigning the significant letter (capital letter in the name
of subcommand) of that subcommand from the keyboard or by a click on the mouse over the
name of that subcommand on the command bar.
Some sub-options on the command bar may be written between parentheses (that denotes
that that is the option which is understood, so when the key Enter is pressed or when the
right mouse button is clicked the sub-option will automatically be activated. In this example it
is the sub-option <End>.
In case you activate any of the sub-options by mistake, you can return to the previous form of
the command if you press the key Esc.
2.4.3
Transparent Commands
Some commands in the program can be started during execution of some other
command. Commands activated in this way are called transparent commands since they do
not interrupt execution of the previously activated command. That is, after completed
operation of the transparent command, the program will return you to the place from where
the former has been activated. This group of commands consists of the following:
- Commands for zooming (Zoom All, Zoom Window, Zoom Previous, Zoom
Dynamic, Pan),
- Commands for determining the state of visibility of certain elements of the drawing
(Visibility, Hiding),
- Command for choice of reference point (Reference Point),
- Command for orthogonal drawing (Ortho Mode),
- command for quick selection of the component that will be displayed in the 2D view (The
selection of views (Ctrl + W)),
- command for displaying information about entities (Information),
- Command for precise targeting of points in the drawing (Osnap),
- All commands which serve for changing the contents of presentation in the windows (2D
View and 3D View).
Clearly all these commands can also be activated individually, and not only while some other
command is being executed.
2.4.4
Operating with Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes serve for more comfortable and clearer entering of various textual and
numerical data. In this part of the instructions we shall only explain the basic principles of
operating with the dialog boxes, and later on, in course of explaining individual commands of
the program, we shall describe each of them in more detail.
The following ways of assigning and selecting data in dialog boxes are planned:
Command fields
Fields for entering textual and numerical data (Edit boxes)
Lists with offered options (List boxes)
Tabular lists of data
Fields switches (Check boxes)
Fields switches (Radio buttons)
34
Command Fields
Command fields are rectangular in shape and only one command, i.e. action to be performed
is written in each command field. These fields are activated by a simple click on the mouse
button over their name. There are always at least two command fields: OK and Cancel in
each dialog box. Both are used to end the operation with the dialog box, where Cancel
denotes quitting and OK acceptance of previously carried out actions in the dialog box.
Fields for Entering Textual and Numerical Data (Edit Boxes)
Fields for entering textual and numerical data are used for entering letters and numbers. The
field is shaped as an elongated rectangle with its height equal to that of one row of text. The
name of the edit box, showing what kind of data is expected to be entered, is usually written in
front of an edit box. To enter data into an edit box, click the mouse button onto the rectangle
to focus it and then enter the desired value from the keyboard.
Standard edit boxes for numerical data entering

In certain cases, when the edit box is intended for assigning numerical values within range
defined by the program, edit boxes which, beside the possibility of assigning the value from
the keyboard, also have the possibility of selecting one of the offered values from the list, are
then usually used.
Edit box with offered list of values
35
If you click the mouse over the arrows you progress toward the top or to the bottom of the list
with offered values. A click on the mouse inside the edit box itself will focus it, and the field
will be ready for entering the desired data directly from the keyboard.
Lists with Offered Options (List Boxes)
Fields with a list of offered options appear when the User is expected to select the value of a
parameter that has a limited number of known values. Opened and closed lists of data are
used in dialog boxes. The difference between these two lists is in that the closed list uses
smaller space in the dialog box.
Closed list box

If you click on the arrow on the right side of the closed list, the whole list will be shown on the
screen, and now one of the members from that list should be selected by a click on the mouse.
Opened list box

Since opened lists may have arbitrary length while the space on the screen for showing their
contents is limited, on the right side of the list there is a vertical scroll bar for scrolling
(changing contents) the list. Above and underneath this bar there are two arrows, one pointing
36
upward and the other downward. If you click the mouse over the arrows you progress toward
the beginning or to the end of the list. Active row can also be selected by direct click on the
mouse over any parameter in the list.
Tabular Lists of Data
In contrast to previously described list boxes, tabular lists of data have several columns within
one row, i.e. several parameters.
Tabular list of data

Some of the parameters in columns do not have a fixed value, but they operate like edit
boxes. If you click the mouse on any of the displayed parameters you can change its value in
the way already explained for operating with edit boxes.
In lists like this one row at a time is always currently active. Currently active row is denoted by
a different color, and if you click the mouse within any position in the given row, it becomes
further active. Moving along tables like this is also possible by cursor arrows.
Fields Switches (Check boxes)
This type of switches is used for commands and variables having only two possible states,
switched-on and switched-off. The sign of the check box is a small empty box with the
meaning of the given switch usually written in continuation. If you click consecutively over the
name of the switch, it alternatively becomes switched-on or switched-off. Empty square means
that the parameter is set to switched-off state, and the existence of symbol , means that
the parameter is set to switched-on state.
37
The presented check box is set to switched-on state

Command fields are also often used as check boxes in the program. In these cases the small
rectangle is not used but if you consecutively click on the name of such switch its appearance
will become concave or convex.
Concave appearance of the switch means

that it is set to switched-on
Fields Switches (Radio buttons)
These switches are used as a way of selecting one of the offered options, in case when only
one of them can be active. That is why these switches are always grouped and clearly
separated from the remaining part of the dialog box.
38
These groups of data are clearly separated

one from another so that only one switch
can be selected (set onto switched-on state)
These switches are also set to switched-on state by a click on the mouse and the indicator that
the switch has been selected is a blackened small circle while all other circles within that group
remain empty.
Branching Tree Organisation of Data in Dialog Boxes
Due to a large scope of data which are to be assigned in some dialog boxes, the latter are
organised by a branching tree. In this way the same space in a dialog box is used for entering
various groups of data.
In the top left corner of this dialog box there is a tree

with branching structure
Before each of the names, on the first level of division, there is a symbol + denoting that a
subdivision exists on the given level.
39
A click over symbol + will open the tree downward

During the state when the title is opened downward, symbol + is replaced by symbol - .
Opened subtitles can also have their own subdivision so that symbol + can also be in front of
them. Subtitles having no symbol before their name in the tree represent an end of the branch
in that part of the tree, so that if you click the mouse over their name in the remaining part of
the dialog box, data which relate only to that branch will appear.
If you click the mouse over branch with no subdivision in the tree the
parameters of that branch will appear in the dialog box
If you click the mouse over symbol - will close the given branch, and symbol + will appear
again in front of the title of that branch. Instead of clicking the mouse over the correspondent
graphical symbol, the effect of opening and closing the branch of the tree can also be attained
by double-clicking the mouse directly over the given title.
40
Organsation of Data in Dialog Boxes by Card Files
In case when a large number of large number of data need to be entered, in addition to
previously described structure of the branching tree, organisation of data by card files is also
used in certain dialog boxes.
Presented dialog box consists of 12 independent card files

If you click the mouse over the name of the card file, part of the dialog box in which data
corresponding to the given card file are contained opens.
When the mouse was clicked over name Units this card file opened
Since several card files can be opened at the same time in a dialog box, the content is changed
using scroll bars.
41
Arrows indicate scroll bars by which the content of data

in the dialog box is changed
If you click again on the name of the opened card file, the card file will close.
Graphic Control in Dialog Boxes
To simplify control of entered data, there is a space planned for graphic control in most dialog
boxes.
Space planned for graphic control of entered data

Due to limitation of space planned for drawings, zooming of drawings is enabled in dialog
boxes. The zooming procedure itself is performed by pressing the corresponding mouse button
while key Ctrl is pressed (see Chapter 2.7).
42
Zoomed part of a drawing in a dialog box

Selection of views to the drawings in dialog boxes is done by using icons that are in a toolbar
located at the edge of the drawing area.
2.5
Selecting Points
The program offers several ways of selecting points, which all can be
simultaneously used, i.e. combined. All that will be presented in this part of the instructions
may be equally used in all commands in the program, when points in the drawing are to be
selected.
A point can be selected in one of the following ways: free point selecting by clicking the
mouse, precise point targeting by OSNAP criterion, and by assigning absolute and relative
coordinates from the command bar. For selecting points by clicking the mouse, disregarding
whether free point selecting or precise targeting by OSNAP criterion is in question, current
focus of the window is not relevant since a click on the given window will automatically set that
window as the active one. However, when selecting points by assigning absolute and relevant
coordinates from the command bar, it is very important which window is currently active
because the coordinates will relate to the given window and to the coordinate system which is
valid in that window. In case the focus is on window 2D View it is also important whether a
frame or one of the levels is presented, because these two have different local coordinate
systems. In the following text we shall present all specificities which apply to each of the
windows.
43
Window 3D View
Since this window is used for three-dimensional presentation of the whole model, threedimensional points are always selected in this window. If you bring the mouse pointer into the
region of this window, instead of shape of a small cross which it has on other parts of the
region of drawings the pointer will become in the shape of short lines in the direction of global
coordinate axes, which at the same time means that selection of 3D points is expected in this
window.
Shape of pointer when it is in region of window 3D View

Points are selected either by assigning 3D coordinates from the command bar or by assigned
OSNAP criterion. Free point selecting is not possible in this window since a mouse click into
empty cannot determine the position of the given point in space. If you try to select a point
freely using the mouse, the program will deny such entry and it will issue the following
warning:
In window 3D View, global, right-oriented coordinate system applies, and when selecting a
point from the keyboard all three coordinates separated by commas (X,Y,Z) have to be
assigned. In case when 3D View window is focused and only two coordinates are assigned on
the command bar, the program will deny entry of such point and it will issue the following
message:
Points can also be selected by precise targeting using OSNAP criterion in specially defined
views in 3D View window (see Chapter 2.13.5). For example, if you set the front view
(option Front in drop-down menu which opens by a click on the right mouse button over
name of window 3D View) as the current view, the point which is the closest one to the
defined view will always be selected by OSNAP criterion.
44
Since the front view is in question, the program selected the point of intersection
with the smallest Y coordinate (the point closest to the selected view),
although there are two more points like that along the depth
Window Disposition
In contrast to 3D View and 2D View windows, the Disposition window is a real window for
drawing only when commands for operating with frames and command for placing auxiliary
axes are activated. In all other commands it will not be possible to select points in this window
and then its role will solely be in simultaneous change of the current frame and therefore the
change in presentation of view in 2D View window in the course of drawing. While in such
operating regime, the mouse pointer attains the shape of an arrow when in region of
Disposition window, which clearly indicates that in that window selection of a frame which is
to be set as the current one instead of entering a point is expected. In course of execution of
drawing commands, when selection of a point is expected, a click on selected frame will not
leave the focus on window Disposition but the program will automatically set either 2D
View window or 3D View window as current one, depending on which one was active before
the current frame was changed.
Within commands for operating with frames, when the Disposition window becomes a real
drawing window, it acts in accordance with all rules of planar drawing in the building plan,
where right-oriented global coordinate system applies.
Window 2D View
In this window, selection of points which completely corresponds to plane drawing is applied,
while the local coordinate system changes depending on whether one of the levels or one of
the existing frames was selected as a current view. If the points are selected with the mouse,
the selected points will belong to the plane determined by the presented level or frame, But if
the points are selected by assigning coordinates from the keyboard, then the local coordinate
system of the given level or of the given frame will apply.
When 2D View is focused, usually only two coordinates are assigned from the keyboard and
then they represent local X and Y coordinates, while value 0 will be adopted for local Z
coordinate. A point selected in this way will surely belong to the plane determined by current
view in 2D View window. However, it is also possible to select a point in 2D View window
by assigning three coordinates from the keyboard. The first two coordinates will be interpreted
as Local X and Y coordinates, while the third one represents local Z coordinate. In that case, a
point will be selected depending on the local coordinate system which is currently valid in 2D
View window.
45
2.5.1
Free Point Selecting
Free point selecting means selecting points in a drawing by the mouse. When the
mouse pointer is moved along the region of 2D View window, the program constantly reads
the current coordinates and writes them on the status line. This type of point selecting will
surely not be used frequently since it does not enable exact but only approximate point
selecting from the drawing. It should be mentioned that in course of free point selecting it is
necessary that the pointer is shaped as a cross.
2.5.2
Orthogonal and polar points selection
Orthogonal and polar points selection can be applied only in case of drawing
polyline segments in 2D View and Disposition windows, when the selected point with the
previously assigned point defines the geometry of a given segment.
When the orthogonal mode is turned on, you can draw only horizontal and
vertical polyline segments.
Polar points selection differs from the orthogonal points selection in the fact that
polyline segments can be defined under any angle assigned. In other words,
around each angle assigned, there are very narrow zones in which only points
from the direction of a given angle can be selected. Outside these zones the
program behaves in the same way as during free selection of points.
By right-clicking the icon, a dialog box in which all the required parameters must be defined
will open.
The way of selecting points, as well as the icon image, is defined via the radio buttons
Orthogonal mode and Polar mode. If you select the Polar mode, the parametres in
part of the dialog box Angles of polar mode become available for editing too.
46
Part of the dialog box for defining

the angles of polar mode
Any of the offered angles can be selected for the increment from the combo box. For example,
if you select an angle of 45, you will be able to draw polyline segments under the following
angles: 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270 and 315.
Assigning completely arbitrary angles is also made possible: first, by activating the command
field
Add and then, by adding a new row in which a desired angle is entered.
Additional angles of 33 and 50

have been assigned
In addition to the previously described way, it is also possible to take angles directly from the
drawing. Activating the command field Input from 2d view will result in taking directly
from the drawing and by selecting two points, you will define direction, the inclination of which
together with the horizontal line defines the desired angle. The value taken in this way is
automatically inserted in the combo box.
47
The angle taken from the drawing

By activating the command field
Delete, the selected row is removed from the combo
box, whereas by using the check boxes Additional angles, you define whether these angles
will be used during polar points selection.
The check box Active is used for turning on that is, turning off, the selected mode of
drawing. The indicator that the selected mode of drawing has been turned on is a dim icon,
whereas the indicator that the selected mode of drawing has been turned off is a lit icon. The
selected mode of drawing can also be activated by left-clicking the icon as well as by pressing
the function key F8.
Assigning polyline segments by using the polar

mode of drawing
2.5.3
Relative entering of a point by assigning a single

coordinate
Relative entering of a point by assigning a single coordinate can be applied in case

of drawing polyline segments in 2D View and Disposition windows. In other words after
entering the first point, it is necessary that you lead the mouse pointer into desired direction
and assign the segment length from the keyboard also, this way its geometry is completely
defined. The described way of entering a point is most frequently used in combination with
orthogonal or polar mode of drawing, when it is quite simple to draw a polyline segment with
the desired length under any angle.
48
Drawing polyline segments in the direction of the current

mouse position by assigning its length
2.5.4
Point Selecting by Assigning Coordinates
Instead by free selecting from the drawing the position of a point can exactly be
determined if its coordinates are assigned from the keyboard. Surely this way of selecting will
be used more frequently than the previously described one since all elements of the drawing
must have exact dimensions because of calculations.
The points can be selected by assigning absolute (coordinates in relation to global or to local
system) or relative (coordinates in relation to a reference point) coordinates. It should be
mentioned that the reference point is always the last point to be assigned, unless the program
is explicitly required to change it.
Reference point is always marked by short lines on left and

bottom edges of 2D View window
These lines represent X and Y coordinates of the reference point, and their position is
automatically placed on the position of the last assigned point during execution of drawing
commands.
To change the reference point command Reference Point is used, which is
transparent, i.e. which can be activated while other command are being executed.
When you select this command, the program will require from the command bar the position of
the new reference point to be determined:
Reference Point <7.56, 24.14>:_
49
Coordinates of the point, which was the reference point immediately before the command was
activated, are between the parentheses. The new reference point can also be assigned in any
of the ways explained in this Chapter: by free selecting from the drawing, by assigning its
coordinates, or by precise targeting on the drawing using OSNAP criterion. Relative coordinate,
which is assigned after changing the reference point, will be calculated in regard to the newly
set reference point.
Both absolute and relative coordinates can also be assigned both in rectangular and in polar
coordinate system. Coordinates of pointes can be assigned in one of the following ways:
Absolute Rectangular Coordinates
When points are selected by assigning absolute coordinates from the command bar, it is very
important which window is currently active since the coordinates will be in regard to the given
window and to the coordinate system which is valid in that window.
Coordinates are assigned in rectangular coordinate system in which the origin of ordinate
(point 0,0,0) is a permanent reference point. Coordinates X, Y and Z are separated by commas
when entered.
Absolute Polar Coordinates
When this type of coordinates is assigned a point is determined by its distance from the local
origin of ordinate (0,0) of the current view in 2D View window and by the angle between this
distance and the positive direction of local X axis. Therefore, points can be selected in this way
only in 2D View window. The data about the distance is first assigned and next the data
about the angle and these data have to be separated by sign <. It should be mentioned that
the value of the angle increases anticlockwise. For example, if you assign: 5.0<60 from the
keyboard, a point having the following rectangular coordinates will be selected:
X=5*Cos(60)=2,5
Y=5*Sin(60)=4,33
Relative Rectangular Coordinates
Everything previously stated about the absolute rectangular coordinates also applies here,
except that in front the coordinates a sign @, which denotes that the coordinate is assigned
in regard to the currently valid reference point, has to be assigned.
If 2D View window is focused and the coordinates of the reference point are: X=2, and
Y=1, when relative coordinate @2.5,-3.0 is assigned from the keyboard, a point with the
following absolute coordinates will be selected:
X=2+2.5=4.5
Y=1-3=-2.
Relative Polar Coordinates
Since these coordinatres are also set in regard to active reference point, a sign @ has to be
assigned in front of them also. If in the current window 2D View the coordinates of a
reference point are X=4,0 and Y=2,0, and you assign: @1.41<45, the absolute
rectangular coordinates of the defined point will be as follows:
X=4,0+1.41* Cos(45 )=5,0
Y=2.0+1,41* Sin(45 )=3,0.
50
2.5.5
Point Selecting by Precise Targeting (OSNAP

Criteria)
Beside the previously described ways of point selecting, option of targeting the
points precisely is also very important in the program. You will surely use this way in the
course of your work.
Command Osnap operates as a switch, i.e. when selected, it is alternatively set
to switched-on or switched-off state. The indicator that the command is set to
switched-on state is a concave icon, and the shape of the cursor becomes a target
in the form of a cross with a small rectangle in its centre instead of an empty
cross. You can also activate command Osnap if you press the function key F3.
We shall explain the way OSNAP criterion functions on an example of a point of intersection.
When it is necessary to select exactly the point of intersection between two entities, set
Intersection as the active OSNAP criterion and bring the mouse pointer into the vicinity of
the desired point. At the moment when the mouse reaches such position that the given point
of intersection is within the target (small rectangle on the cross of the pointer) a red marker
X appears on the screen showing that a mouse click in this position will select exactly that
point of intersection.
A click on mouse button in the position when a graphic marker appears on

the screen will select a point corresponding to the given OSNAP criterion
Since the program comprises seven OSNAP criteria, and several of them can be set as active
at the same time, the precise point selecting functions in such way that while the pointer is
moving along the region of drawing the program constantly analyses which point could be
selected for the given position of the mouse pointer and for currently active OSNAP criteria. In
case when the position of the mouse pointer corresponds to one of the active OSNAP criteria,
the program shows a corresponding marker on the screen. Therefore, it is possible to select
the point only if one of the active OSNAP criteria corresponds to the position of the mouse
pointer, so a corresponding graphic marker is displayed on the screen. Otherwise, free point
selecting will be disabled and a corresponding warning will be displayed on the screen:
Disregarding that the program allows several OSNAP criteria to be active at the same time, the
selection of points is unique, i.e. only one graphic marker always appears on the screen. Thus,
51
if for example, the position of the pointer is such that it is possible to select both the nearest
point and the point of intersection, the program will always select the point of intersection
because that is the more important OSNAP criterion.
The Osnap command belongs to a group of transparent commands which means that it can
be activated in any moment in course of program operation. Which OSNAP criteria will be set
as active ones is regulated in a dialog box which opens by clicking the right mouse button over
Osnap icon.
Dialog box for setting OSNAP criteria

The program includes seven criteria and a graphic symbol, which appears on the screen when
a given criterion is selected, is drawn in front of each of them. The following OSNAP criteria are
available:
Endpoint
This criterion is used when it is necessary to select an endpoint of a line segment. If you
select this criterion, target a part of this segment and click the left mouse button.
Depending on which half of the segment is within the target, the selected point will be on
one end or another.
Midpoint
This criterion operates in a similar way as the previously described one, except that the
program does not select the endpoint, but the midpoint of a selected line segment. This
means that it is sufficient to target any part of the line segment and the program will
automatically select its midpoint.
Centre Point
When this criterion is selected, it is sufficient to select by target any part of the arc segment
of a line or a circle and the program will select its centre point.
Nearest
This criterion is used to select the nearest point from a part of a line or arc in the target. A
point that determines the position of a point entity can be selected by this criterion.
Perpendicular
This criterion is used to select a point on a straight line or on an arc within the pointer
target, which is attained when a perpendicular line is drawn from the Reference point (the
last one which was assigned) to the selected line or arc.
52
Tangent
This criterion is used when a point on an arc, which with a previously selected point forms a
tangent to the given arc, is to be selected.
Intersection
This criterion is used when a point, which is at the intersection of two drawn objects, is to
be selected. To achieve this, bring the pointer target into position so that it contains the
surrounding of the intersection point and click the left mouse button.
The offered criteria function as switches, and if you click the mouse over their name they can
be set to switched-on or switched-off state. Concave appearance of the written criterion
denotes that it is set to switched-on state. If command fields Select All and All off, all
criteria will be set at the same time to switched on or to switched-off state.
Entering a free point when OSNAP criteria is turned on is now possible in the Tower 6
program. This program feature becomes active when, the switch
Free point in the dialog
box for defining OSNAP criteria is on.
The switch
Free point
In course of moving the mouse pointer around the drawing area, the program constantly
analyzes whether the points located inside the cursor square can be selected for some of the
currently active OSNAP criteria. If this is not the case, and this switch is on, the point above
which is the cursor can be selected as a free point.
Note:
In case that none of Osnap criteria is set as active, by setting command Osnap to switchedon state, the pointer will maintain the shape of an empty cross same as in free point selecting.
Note:
While in procedure of point selecting, the program constantly writes on the status line the
coordinates that correspond to the current position of the mouse pointer. In case any of the
active OSNAP criteria is selected by the position of the mouse pointer, coordinate of exactly
that point is written on the status line.
53
2.5.6
Choosing Points by Selecting
In commands used for entering point entities, beside all previously described ways
for individual point selecting, the program also enables serial point selecting. As an example,
let us take command Point Support, and when it is activated the command bar attains the
following form:
<1> Point Support (Choice/Deselect/End/Set):
Now the User is expected to either select one by one those points which shall determine the
position of the given point support in one of the previously described ways, or to enter the
procedure of serial point selecting by activating sub-option Choice.
<0. sel.> Select (All / Window / Polygon / Selection groups / Recent selection / Deselect /
<End >):
The selecting procedure will include the starting points and endpoints of all linear entities, all
refraction points on the contour of surface entities, as well as the position of all point entities
on the model. In addition, the selection will also include all points in which the entities
intersect as well as all points in which the assigned auxiliary axes intersect (see Chapter
3.4.1).
We shall not discuss the selecting procedure here since it will be described in detail in Chapter
2.8.
2.6
Drawing the Polygonal Line
In the base of almost all drawing commands is drawing a completely arbitrary

polygonal line. All principles of operation that will be explained in detail in this part of the
manual refer to almost all commands in the program. For purpose of demonstration and to
make all explanations more obvious in this Chapter, we shall use command Beam. When this
command is activated, the command bar will attain its standard form for drawing an arbitrary
polygonal line.
<-> Beam First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / < End > / Set):
The polygonal line may consist of an arbitrary number of straight and arched segments, so the
program will require from the command bar the refraction points that define the beginning and
the end of segments to be entered one after the other. Of course, any of the ways of point
selecting described in the previous Chapter can b e used. In continuation of the message with
which the program points out that the first point of the line is expected to be entered, suboptions of this command, by which drawing of special types of polygonal line is realised, are
written in brackets.
The sub-option End is located between the symbols < >, which means that it is an
implicitly included command and is activated by right-clicking or pressing the Enter key on
the keyboard. In order to facilitate calling the sub-options from the command bar, the Tower
6 program remembers the last activated sub-option and during reactivating the command,
the program shows it as an implicitly included one. For example, when you activate the suboption for drawing a rectangle, every time you activate this command it will remain implicitly
included unless, of course, you select another sub-option.
<-> Beam First Point (Contour / <Rectangle> / cIrcle / Offset / End / Set):
Selection of points that define the polygonal line can be simultaneously performed in windows
for 2D and 3D view of the model. In course of drawing, in 2D View window you can
54
transparently change its content by selecting the current frame in Disposition window or the
current level in the list of levels. That is, you can select one point on the polygonal line, let us
say, 3D View window, the next one in 2D View window in which one of the frames is
currently displayed, and then again from 2D View window but this time with view of some
level in it, etc.
It should be mentioned that when drawing the polygonal line the program always previously
projects the previously chosen point onto the current view level, so it is capable to drag
correctly the geometry of the segment that is currently being drawn.
As the first point of the polygonal line, the presented point

from the end left frame was chosen
Level 0.00 is now set as the current level, and the program projected
the previously selected point onto level of the current view
Z=0,00 and presented correct DRAG mode
55
2.6.1
Drawing the Arbitrary Polygonal Line
Since an arbitrary polygonal line may consist of arbitrary number of straight and
arched segments, after choosing the first point, the program will require from the command
bar the next point to be assigned.
<-> Next Point (Arc / <End> /Set):
Sub-option Arc, by which arch geometry of a polygonal line segment can be defined, is now
offered also on the command bar. This means that if the first segment of a polygonal line is
straight, a point, which forms a straight segment of a polygonal line with the previously
assigned point, should be chosen, in the drawing and in case you want the first segment to be
arched, activate sub-option Arc. If you have chosen an arc segment, the program will change
the form of the command bar:
Arc Endpoint:
Since the geometry of an arc segment is defined by three points, after choosing the endpoint,
the program will require from the command bar a point on the arc to be determined.
Arc Point:
In the procedure of arc point determining, by moving the mouse pointer along the region of
drawing, the program constantly draws in DRAG mode the geometry of the arc segment that
corresponds to the current position of mouse pointer.
Disregarding whether you have decided on arc or straight geometry of the first segment, upon
defining its shape, one more sub-option will appear on the command bar:
<-> Next Point (Arc / Back / <End> / Set):
That is the Back sub-option, and the program deletes defining the geometry of the previous
segment and returns us one step back if this command is activated. It is clear that this option
is used only in case when you make a mistake, i.e. choose a point incorrectly.
After geometry of the second segment of the polygonal line is assigned also, one more suboption appears on the command bar:
<-> Next Point (Arc / Back / Close / <End> / Set):
That is the Close sub-option, and the polygonal line becomes closed when this command is
activated. This means that the Close sub-option appears on the command bar only after the
second segment of the polygonal line has been assigned, since a closed contour can be defined
by at least three segments. If this sub-option is selected, the procedure of defining the
geometry of a polygonal line will automatically end.
Further procedure is exactly the same so the program will not change the content of the
command bar, i.e. it will constantly require the following point to be entered, all until you press
the Enter or right-click (selection of sub-option End, and thus define the end of polygonal
line defining.
56
2.6.2
Drawing the Rectangle
Each rectangle can be drawn by the procedure for defining the arbitrary polygonal
line, by assigning all of his four corners. However, since the rectangle is a frequent form in civil
engineering, a special sub-option, within the command for constructing the polygonal line, is
planned for the rectangle.
If you select Rectangle sub-option, you enter the procedure for defining the rectangle.
<-> First Corner (Center / Band / Set):
The program offers three ways for defining the geometry of a rectangle. The first way consists
in choosing two points which determine one diagonal of the rectangle, while the other two
ways can be started by selecting sub-options Center and Band from the command bar,
after entering the procedure of defining the rectangle.
In the first way the program expects you to assign a point that determines the first corner of
the rectangle. After choosing this point the program will require from you to assign the
opposite corner of the rectangle:
<-> Opposite Corner (Set):
While moving the mouse, the program will constantly be drawing in DRAG mode a rectangle
the diagonal of which is determined by current position of the mouse pointer. When the second
corner of the rectangle is chosen, the command is ended.
When points 1 and 2 are selected the diagonal is determined

and thus also the geometry of the rectangle
Surely you have noticed that when sub-option Rectangle is selected, sub-option Center
also appears on the command bar. This is a convenient way to define an arbitrary rectangle
when we wish its centre point (intersection of diagonals) to be in a certain position on the
drawing. When you select this sub-option, the program first requires from the command bar a
point in which the rectangle diagonals will intersect to be determined:
<-> Rectangle Center Point (Set):
57
After choosing the point which determines the centre of the rectangle, the program will require
one of its corners to be determined.
<-> Angle (Set):
In this case also, the program constantly draws in DRAG mode a rectangle whose geometry
corresponds to the current position of the mouse pointer.
The geometry of the rectangle is determined by choosing the

centre (point 1) and one of the corners (point 2)
There is one more way in the program for drawing the rectangle. That is, when you enter the
procedure of rectangle drawing by selecting sub-option Rectangle from the command bar,
in addition to sub-option Center, sub-option Band also appears on the command bar. If
you activate this command the program will require from the command bar the centre line of
the rectangle to be determined first by assigning two points.
<-> First Point (Set):
<-> Second point (Set):
Once you have determined the centre line of the rectangle, the program will be drawing in
drag mode the rectangle the geometry of which corresponds to the current position of the
mouse pointer, and from the command bar the program will require a point on the drawing,
which determines the band width, to be chosen.
<-> Width (Set):
58
Chosen points 1 and 2 determine centre line of the rectangle,

while point 3 determines one of its corners
Note:
Since an infinite number of planes can be placed through two points, when option of drawing
the rectangle is used, choosing points in 3D View window will not determine as single-valued
the plane to which the drawn rectangle should belong. Thus, in procedure of drawing the
rectangle chose points exclusively in 2D View window where the plane to which the
rectangle should belong is determined as single-valued. An exception from this rule is drawing
the rectangle by Band sub-option, since three points are assigned in this procedure, and this
number of points determines the position in space of a plane as single-valued.
2.6.3
Drawing the Circle
Same as the rectangle, the circle is a relatively frequent form in civil engineering,
so there is a special sub-option in the program, within the command for drawing the polygonal
line, for circle constructing.
<-> Beam First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / < End > /Set):
When sub-option cIrcle is selected, the program will require from the command bar a point
that defines its centre to be determined first, and then a point on the circle (radius):
<-> Circle Centre Point (Set):_
<-> Circle Point (Set):_
While determining a point on the circle, the program will draw in DRAG mode circles geometry
of which corresponds to current position of the mouse pointer.
59
Chosen point 1 determines the centre, while point 2 the radius of the circle
Note:
Since the geometry of a circle is also determined by choosing only two points which will not
determine the plane to which the circle should belong as single-valued, same as in drawing the
rectangle, choose points exclusively in 2D View window.
Note:
The program automatically disassembles each drawn circle, which represents a linear element,
into two arc segments interconnected along a horizontal line that passes through the centre of
the circle. Therefore, when it is necessary to select a whole linear entity in shape of a circle, it
is necessary to select both of its arc segments.
2.6.4
Placing the Polygonal Line along the Perimeter of a

Drawn Contour
If you select Contour sub-option, which appears in the command bar when
commands for drawing the polygonal line are activated, the contour is automatically drawn
along the perimeter of the selected contour.
This option has multiple purpose, and one of them is, for example, when beams should be
placed along the perimeter of a plane which has already been drawn, or when it is necessary
to place linear load along previously drawn beams in the model. When this command is
activated the command bar attains the following form:
<0 sel.> Contour - Select (All / Window / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent selection /
Deselect / < End > / Set):
This is a standard form of command bar in the procedure of selecting, and all possibilities
offered by the program in such operating regime will be described in detail in Chapter 2.8.
This means that the User is now expected to select one or more contours of surface or linear
entities, along which a polygonal line which is being created will be placed.
If Contour sub-option was activated within commands for creating surface entities, only
contours of previously created surface entities will be available in the procedure of selecting.
The reason is in that in general case of selecting and arbitrarily selected segments of linear
60
elements, it is not always possible to create a closed polygonal line, which is a condition for
determining correct geometry of surface entity.
If however the Contour sub-option is activated within any of the commands for drawing
linear entities, both contours of surface entities and arbitrarily selected segments of previously
created linear entities will be available.
2.6.5
Offset
Choosing this sub-option, the command bar obtains the following form:
<0 sel.> Offset Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
selection / Deselect / <End>):
Namely, you are expected to select the entities, which geometry will be offset. The right
mouse button click will mark the select procedure end, after which the program will require the
interval assignment needed for the offset ending.
Distance:
The distance may be assigned either using a keyboard or even choosing two points from the
drawing. At the end, the program will require the choice of the point that will define the page,
which needs the offset.
Point on side to offset:
By choosing the page for the offset, this command will end, and the entity geometry, which is
set, will be defined by the offset geometry of previous selected entities.
Selecting the previous drawn plate contours, the linear supports are
selected within offset (the assigned distance is 20 cm)
61
2.7
Zooming Parts of Drawings
In the course of program operating, it is often necessary to enlarge or to reduce the

view of parts of drawings. That is why a whole system of commands which enable various
operations is developed in the program, all with the intention of getting a clearer the view. All
ZOOM commands are transparent, i.e. they can be activated even while other commands are
being executed. ZOOM commands function in exactly the same way and have exactly the same
role in all three windows.
The effect of ZOOM commands is basically similar to that of the film camera zoom objective.
That is, they neither enlarge nor reduce physically anything on the drawing, but they only
bring closer or move away a part of the drawing thus making it virtually larger or smaller.
Beside the possibility to enlarge or reduce certain parts of a drawing, other ways of presenting
can be obtained by ZOOM commands, and each of these commands will be individually
explained.
Since the commands for zooming parts of a drawing are frequently used, they can also be
activated by pressing keys specially designed for this purpose. Key Ctrl is planned for fast
activating Zoom Window, Zoom All and Zoom previous commands. If you press this
key a message indicating which actions are possible at this moment appears on the command
bar.
CTRL+left mouse button=Zoom window / CTRL + middle mouse button=Zoom all /
CTRL+right mouse button= Zoom previous
This means that while the key Ctrl is pressed, if you click the left mouse button the selected
point will be interpreted as the first corner of a rectangular region which is to be enlarged, if
you right-click command Zoom previous will be activated, while if you click the middle mouse
button command Zoom All will be activated.
In addition to these three zooms, command for moving the current view on the screen is also
frequently used, so a click on the middle mouse key command Pan is automatically
activated.
2.7.1
Zoom Window
An arbitrary region in the drawing can be enlarged by this command. The desired
region is defined by a rectangular window, and then the program enlarges its
content to the size of the whole screen.
When you choose this command, the program will require from the command bar the
rectangular region which is to be enlarged to be defined:
First Corner:_
Opposite Corner:_
Command Zoom Window can be activated even without directly selecting it from the dropdown menu, or by clicking the mouse button over its icon. If you press the Ctrl key and click
the left mouse button, this command will automatically be activated and the point assigned by
the mouse will be interpreted as the first corner of a rectangular region which is to be zoomed.
62
2.7.2
Zoom previous
The program saves all previously assigned zooms so by selecting this command it
is always possible to get the previous view on the screen.
It should be mentioned that you can also activate this command if you press the key Ctrl
and right-click.
2.7.3
Pan
Various parts of drawings, without changing the previously selected enlargement,
can be displayed on the screen by the use of this command. In that way, an effect
of moving a magnifying glass over the drawing at a constant distance is obtained.
When this command is activated, the pointer changes its usual shape.
Hand-shaped pointed indicates that translatory motion

of current view is expected
If you press the left mouse button without releasing, the drawing will translate in direction of
the pointer movement all until the left mouse button is released. When the left mouse button
is released the command will not end but the program will still be waiting for the current view
to be also changed in the same way, all until the end of this command is indicated by pressing
the Enter key or by clicking the right mouse button.
You can also directly activate this command if you press the middle mouse button. Without
releasing this button, the change of current view will be determined by change of mouse
pointer position. As soon as you release the middle mouse button this command ends and that
is practically the only difference in the way this command functions when it is activated by the
icon or in this way, by pressing the middle mouse button.
63
2.7.4
Zoom Dynamic
This command is used to both enlarge and to reduce the current view on the
screen. When this command is activated, the pointer changes its standard shape.
Pointer shaped as magnifying glass indicates that the

program is in Zoom Dynamic command
If you move the mouse pointer upward, while the left mouse button is pressed, parts of the
drawing are enlarged, and they are reduced if you move the mouse pointer downward. Upon
releasing the left mouse button, the program will still require the new enlargement or
reduction to be assigned, all until you press the Enter key or right-click which indicates the
end of this command.
2.7.5
Zoom All
When this command is selected, the view of the whole drawing is displayed on the
screen. The size of this view is determined if a percentage of empty space
assigned by the program is added to the overall size of all elements of the drawing
which are currently visible.
It should be mentioned that you can also activate this command if you press Ctrl key and
click the middle mouse button.
Note:
Since no point is selected only in commands Zoom All and Zoom previous, it is important
only in case of these two commands which window is focused immediately before they are
activated. In all other commands for zooming at the same time when a point is selected the
given window will be focused. Therefore, if you desire to zoom-all, for instance in 3D View
window, and that is not the currently active window, first you have to set the focus on 3D
View window, and next activate command Zoom All. The same also applies to command
Zoom previous since each window has its own list of previous zooms.
64
2.7.6
Mouse Wheel Dynamic Zoom
In the zooming procedure, another option has been added, which will, due to its
efficiency, in zooming, probably be most frequently in use. Namely, by scrolling the mouse
wheel, the drawing can dynamically be enlarged and reduced. By scrolling the mouse wheel
upwards, the drawing is enlarged, and scrolling it downwards, the drawing is reduced in
relation to the central point that is determined by current mouse position.
2.8
Selecting the elements of a drawing
Within many commands in the program, especially in those used for manipulating
the elements of a drawing, one or more elements of the drawing need to be selected. New
elements can be added to a selected group of elements, but previously selected elements can
also be removed from that group. In selecting the elements of a drawing the program helps
the User by marking all selected elements by a broken line.
The message on the command bar by which the program requires some elements of a drawing
to be selected is universal, and is as follows:
<0 sel.> Selecting (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
In the selecting procedure the pointer attains the shape of a select-box (small square for
selecting), and now the User is expected to apply one of the ways of selecting offered by the
program. After some elements have been selected, the procedure does not end, but the
program further requires from the command bar new elements to be selected, while at the
very beginning of the command bar, a message on the number of elements selected so far, is
written in parentheses.
<3 sel.> Selecting (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
In the selecting procedure, it is possible to select simultaneously in windows for 2D and 3D
view of the model. During the selecting operation, the exclusive role of the Disposition
window is to enable the current frame, and thus the current view to be changed in 2D View
window (same applies to the list of levels). While the program is in the selecting procedure, if
the pointer is brought into region of Disposition window it will be in the shape of an arrow
which clearly indicates that no element is expected to be selected but only the current frame to
be changed if necessary.
In 3D View window, the pointer is in the shape of a circle during the selecting procedure,
which again indicates that an entity is expected to be selected in the space view. In addition,
selecting is also enabled in specially designed views, but in such selecting all entities are
selected along the depth.
65
In current view of the front faade (Front option) when the end right column is selected,
all seven columns along the depth are simultaneously selected
In current view from top (Top option), if a rectangular region as shown is assigned,
all structural elements in the front half of the building are selected
It should be mentioned that structural elements that penetrate the given plane of the view
cannot be selected in 2D View window, and they are shown as symbols. An exception are
only commands Trim and Extend, when such symbols can be selected only as boundaries
for extending or trimming the entities which belong to the given plane of view.
The selecting procedure is interrupted when sub-option End is selected from the command
bar, after which the program will continue the further course of the command within which the
selecting was performed. Operations planned by the activated command will be performed only
on selected elements.
When corresponding sub-options are selected from the command bar, the program offers
various ways of selecting, which can be combined simultaneously, and we shall present all
possibilities offered by the program in the selecting procedure in the following text in this part
of the manual.
Selecting All Entities
If sub-option All is selected from the command bar, all entities currently visible on the
drawing will be selected. What will be selected depends exclusively on whether the focus was
on window for 2D or 3D view of the model immediately before this sub-option was activated.
Thus, if the focus is on 3D View window, and sub-option All is chosen, all currently visible
entities on the model will be selected. However, if the focus is on 2D View window, only
elements currently displayed in 2D View window will be selected when sub-option All is
chosen.
66
Individual Selecting
This is the simplest way of selecting and it consists in taking any part of the desired element
into the select box on the pointer and clicking the left mouse button. For elements of a
drawing, which represent surfaces, an arbitrary part of its contour should be taken into the
select box which results in selecting the whole surface.
A broken line is drawn along the contour of the selected

surface, and its inside always becomes empty
If a point common to several elements of the drawing is taken by the select box, the program
will select all elements that originate from that point.
Both the horizontal and vertical beams are selected by

one click on the mouse button
When selecting point elements, the very point that determines the position of the point entity
should be taken into the select box.
In case you click the left mouse button, and no element is taken into the select box, the
program will interpret that point as the first corner of the window end it will enter the
procedure of selecting by window.
67
Opposite Corner:
In this procedure all rules for selecting by window that will be presented in the following text
can be applied.
Selecting by Window
This way of selecting is enabled by activating sub-option Window from the command bar.
When this sub-option is selected, the program first requires one corner of a rectangular
window to be determined, and next the opposite corner along the diagonal:
First Corner:
Opposite Corner:
When determining the diagonal corner of the window, the program draws in DRAG mode a
rectangle, the geometry of which is determined by the current position of the mouse pointer.
Depending on whether the window is assigned from left to right, or from right to left, the
selecting procedure operates in two different ways. If you select from left to right, only those
elements, which are within the inside of the assigned rectangular region together with their
complete geometry, will be selected. However, if the window is assigned from right to left
(crossing), all elements of the drawing whose at least one part is inside the assigned
rectangular region will be selected.
If a window like the one above is assigned

from left to right, no elements will be selected
When a same window is assigned but now

from right to left (crossing) the plate and both
beams will be selected
Selecting by Polygon
When the Polygon sub-option is selected, the command bar attains its standard form used
in commands for drawing the polygonal line:
First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End>):
The procedure for drawing the polygonal line completely corresponds to explanations given in
Chapter 2.6, except that if you select the End sub-option, or right-click, the polygonal line
automatically closes.
The criterion for selecting by this option is exactly the same as in selecting by window, when it
is assigned from left to right. All entities, which are within the inside of the assigned polygon
together with their complete geometry, will be selected.
68
Selecting by Intersection Line
This option enables you to select all entities intersected by an assigned line. When sub-option
Section is selected, the program first requires the first point of the intersection line to be
determined, and then the second point of the intersection line.
First Point:
Second Pont:
Immediately after the second point is assigned, the program will perform selection of all
entities intersected by the assigned line.
Extra Selecting
When you click the mouse button over sub-option eXtras, a drop-down menu opens from
which any option for extra selecting included in the program can be selected.
The presented options are quite exotic and probably will not be
used frequently, but in some cases may be extremely helpful
To which entities does the effect of commands from the eXtras menu refer depends on
whether the focus was on window for 2D or 3D view of the model immediately before any of
these commands were activated. If the focus is on 3D View window, the command will act
onto entities in the model, while if the focus is on 2D View window, it will act only onto
currently displayed elements in 2D View window.
The following options are available in the menu:
Invert
In order for this option to be available, it is necessary that at least one entity be selected
before choosing this option. When this option is selected, selecting is inversed, i.e. that
what was selected becomes deselected and that what was not selected, becomes selected.
Set
In order for this option to be available, only one entity has to be previously selected. After
selecting this option, the program will automatically select all entities of that type having
the same set of numerical data. For example, if we have numerous beams with various
cross sections in a model, when we select one of them and we choose this option, the
program will select all other beams in the model that have same geometrical characteristics
69
as the originally selected beam. It should be noted that this option is also availabe for
working with loads. If you select this option, after selecting a load, the program will select
all loads of the same type and having the same intensity as the previously selected load and
which are displayed in the currently active window.
Co-linear
In order for this option to be available, it is necessary that only one linear entity be selected
before choosing this option. In case when several linear entities have been selected, this
option will be available only when they all are in the same direction, i.e. that they are
collinear. When sub-option Co-linear is selected, all linear entities that are in the same
direction (that belong to the same line) as the selected ones will be selected.
Coplanar
In order for this option to be available, it is necessary to previously select a minimal set of
entities which define one plane. In order for the plane to be singularly determined it is
necessary to select the following: two linear, one linear and one point, three points or only
one surface entity. Once this option is selected, the program will automatically select all
other entities that belong to a plane in space defined in this way.
On Same Circle
In order for this option to be available, it is necessary that entities, which belong to the
same arc, previously be selected. It should be mentioned that beside by selecting an arc
segment of a surface and linear entity, the geometry of an arc can be defined by selecting
three point entities. When this sub-option is selected, all elements belonging to a circle with
a radius which is same as that in previously selected entities will be selected.
Entity
In order to make this option available, it is necessary to select at least one element in the
drawing. Upon selecting it, the program will select all elements in the drawing which are of
the same type as the previously selected element. For example, if a beam is selected upon
activating this option, all beams which are displayed in the currently active window will be
selected.
Back
This option is used to exit the extra selecting procedure and to return to the basic form of
the command bar in selecting procedure.
Selection groups
Using the Selection groups option you can save up to 256 different groups of selected
drawing elements. Elements that belong to one of the saved groups can be quickly reselected
by clicking the groups name in the dialog box that opens after activating this option from the
command line.
70
Creating a new selection group from the currently selected drawing elements is done with the
button
Add. Clicking this button opens a new dialog box that specifies the name of the
group.
From the dialogue you exit by activating the button "OK", and new group name appears in the
list. In case you have set a name that already exists, the program will display an appropriate
warning message.
If one or more groups have been selected in the moment of pressing the "Add" button,
program will display the following warning after entering the group name.
71
By activating the button "No", a new selection group made from currently selected drawing
elements will be saved under the assigned name. By activating the button "Yes", all entities
belonging to the selected groups will be added to currently selected entities.
Selecting a single group from the list is done by clicking the mouse on its name. For the
multiple selection you should hold down the left mouse button while moving the cursor over
the names of desired groups. Also, for multiple selection you can use Shift and Ctrl keyboard
keys combined with the left mouse button. Selected groups are highlighted in the list.
The name of the selected group can be changed by the "Rename" button. Its activation opens
the same dialog as for creating a new group name.
Using the button

Delete, selected groups are removed from the list, while using buttons
Up and
Down selected group changes its position in the list by moving one place up
or down.
After "Selection groups" dialog, all drawing elements of highlighted groups will be selected.
Rescent selection
The command line option "Rescent selection" reselects drawing elements that have been
previously selected within any command.
72
Deselecting the Previously Selected Elements
If you select an element which has already been selected, it will not become deselected but
this repeated selecting will be ignored. For selecting the previously selected elements, i.e.
removing them from the list of selected elements, sub-option Deselect is planned on the
command bar.
<3 sel.> Deselect (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / <End>):
Exactly the same sub-options as in selection procedure are still present on the command bar,
except that it is clearly written at the beginning of the command bar that the program is now
in the procedure of deselecting the previously selected entities. The way of deselecting as well
as the way of operating with previously described sub-options is exactly the same and the only
difference is in that deselecting reacts only to previously selected entities by removing them
from the list of selected entities. Upon completed deselecting, if you select sub-option End,
i.e. right-click the program will return the program to the basic form of command bar in the
procedure of selecting the entities.
Deselection can also be performed without activating the previously described sub-option from
the command bar. If you constantly keep the key Shift pressed down, individual selecting
and selecting by windows will practically mean deselect ion.
Note:
A segment of a linear entity is determined by assigning points while it is being drawn, and not
by points of intersection with other elements in the drawing. Thus the whole segment of a
linear entity, as it was drawn and not only one of its parts which is determined by points of
intersection with other elements.
In this example the whole horizontal beam is selected simply

because it was drawn by selecting points 1 and 2
In case that you wish to select only a part of linear entity determined by points of intersection
with other entities, previously you have to make a series of new segments from originally one
segment of linear entity using command Divide Contours (see Chapter 2.9.15)
73
Note:
Elements of a drawing which are drawn one over the other in such way that their geometry
coincides partially or completely, will be selected together if selecting is performed in the
position of overlapping. A typical example for this case is when the surface load is distributed
over the whole plate, or when beams and walls are placed along the contour of a plate. In both
cases all elements that overlap will be selected, which you may not desire. In these cases,
visibility of elements which will not be selected should be deleted (see Chapter 2.10).
2.9
Commands for Manipulating the Elements of

Drawings
This group of commands enables various corrections in previously drawn elements

of drawings. It is possible to correct absolutely all entities, disregarding whether they
represent a part of a structure or not. In the basis of all commands in this group, is to first
select the elements of a drawing and only then to perform on those elements the operations
planned by the given command. Since the procedure of selecting the elements of drawings is
explained in detail in Chapter 2.8, in the following presentation of each of these commands
we shall not go into repeated explanation of this procedure.
2.9.1
Delete
Selecting this command enables deleting the arbitrarily selected elements of a
drawing.
When this command is activated, the command bar attains its standard form of requiring the
elements to be selected:
<0 sel.> Delete Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
After selecting, if you press the Enter key or right-click, the selected elements will be
deleted. You should be careful with this command to avoid undesired loss of some elements of
a drawing.
2.9.2
Copy
This command is used for copying selected objects into any other position in the
drawing, where the original remains unchanged. Once the selection has been
completed, the program will request from the command bar that, by selecting two
points, you assign a vector which defines the direction, orientation and distance of
the copied entities from the original.
Displacement Vector Start Point:

Displacement Vector End Point:
Once you have defined the copying vector, the program will request from the command bar
that you either assign a number of copies or select a sub-option Multiple:
Number of Copies (Multiple) <1>:
Right-clicking will mark accepting the offered value of the number of copies 1, which is
enclosed in square brackets. Of course, it is also possible that, from the keyboard, you assign
74
an arbitrary number of copies, where every one of them will be at a distance defined by the
assigned copying vector.
Using the sub-option Multiple enables you to create an arbitrary number of copies of the
selected objects by assigning different copying vectors. Once you have activated this suboption, the program will draw the first copy at the assigned place and further request from the
command bar that you assign another copying vector by selecting the second point.
Displacement Vector End Point (<End>):
This message will remain on the command bar as long as you mark the completion of the
command by selecting the sub-option End.
2.9.3
Array
This command has double action and it can be used for simultaneous copying in
two arbitrarily selected directions or for multiple copying along the arc.
After completing the selection of the elements, the program will require from the command bar
the type of series that will be used in copying to be selected.
Array Type (<Rectangular> / Polar):
Orthogonal series means copying the selected entities simultaneously in two arbitrarily
selected directions, while polar series copying along an arched path. The further course of this
command will be determined by selecting one of the two options offered.
Orthogonal Type of Series
After selecting the Rectangular the program will require from the command bar the number
of columns, i.e. the number of copies in one row, to be assigned.
Number of Columns () <1>:
The term column is used here because the program understands the direction of the X-axis,
which can be of course subsequently changed while assigning the displacement vector, as the
first direction of copying. After assigning the number of columns the program will require the
distance between them to be assigned:
Distance:
If you assign the distance from the keyboard, the program will understand that a horizontal
displacement vector has been assigned, and the positive value will determine the sense of the
vector in the direction of positive X-axis. Instead of assigning from the keyboard, you can
determine the distance by selecting two points in the drawing. After selecting the first point,
the program will require from the command bar the second point to be selected.
Vector Second Point:
By selecting the second point, both the distance and the sense of the displacement vector will
be determined. By moving the mouse pointer along the drawing, the program will be drawing
in DRAG mode the current position of all assigned copies in the direction which we
conditionally call row in the program. Therefore, a row does not necessarily denote the
horizontal direction but it may be any completely arbitrary direction.
75
Regardless whether you have assigned the distance from the keyboard or by selecting two
points in the drawing, the program will repeat the previously posed series of questions, but
this time for copying in the other direction:
Number of Rows (...) <1>:
Distance:
Same as in copying in the first direction, you can assign the distance between the rows either
from the keyboard or by selecting two points in the drawing. If you assign the distance
between rows from the keyboard, the program will understand that displacement vector in the
direction of Y-axis, and the positive value will determine the sense of the displacement vector
in the direction of positive Y-axis. By selecting two points in the drawing you can assign
completely arbitrary intensity and direction of the displacement vector in the other direction.
The series shown is formed by assigning

displacement vectors 1 and 2 in direction of
global axes (number of columns =2,
number of rows=4)
The series shown is formed by assigning

displacement vectors 1 and 2 in arbitrary
directions (number of columns =2,
number of rows=4)
Polar type of series

After selecting the option Polar, program the program will first require from the command
bar whether the entities copied along the arc should be rotated with respect to the assigned
centre of rotation or not.
With Rotation (<Yes>/No):
Depending on your answer to the posed question, two cases may occur.
Polar series with rotation (number of elements

in series=12, angle to fill =360)
Polar series without rotation (number of

elements in series=12, angle to fill =360)
In case you also want the selected elements to be rotated, the problem is singularly
determined and it will be reduced to pure rotation of the entities, where the selected entities
will be arranged along the arc in their rotated positions.
76
However, if you do not want rotation, but you want the selected elements to be arranged along
the arc without rotating them, then, in order to determine the problem fully, it is necessary to
also assign a point in the drawing which will be rotated.
Rotation Base Point:
Only a point assigned in this way will fully determine the problem which is now reduced first to
multiple rotation of the assigned point, and then to multiple translatory copying in regard to
assigned point. The newly formed entities in arc series will be at a same distance from the
rotated point as is the distance between the original and the selected reference point for
rotation.
Disregarding which of the two previously presented ways you select, the further course of the
command is the same.
Now the program will require from the command bar the number of copies in arc series to be
assigned.
Number of Items:
It should be mentioned that the number assigned includes the selected entity. This means that
if, for example, you desire to attain 3 more new entities which will be copied along the
assigned arc you should reply to this question by assigning number 4.
Array Center Point:
By selecting this command the centre of rotation is practically determined, i.e. the centre of
the arc along which the newly formed entities will be arranged.
Angle to Fill <360>:
You can assign the angle from the keyboard, where the positive value increases anticlockwise,
or by selecting a point in the drawing. While moving your mouse pointer over the drawing, the
program will be drawing in DRAG mode the current position of all entities depending on the
current value of the angle determined by the position of the mouse pointer and by the
assigned number of copies in the series.
Note:
Copying in a polar series is a pure surface transformation, so that all selected entities and the
base point of the series have to belong to the same plane. In case a base point, which does
not belong to the same plane as the selected entities, is selected, the program will issue a
corresponding warning and it will stop the further course of the command.
Command 3D Array is used for creating space series.
77
2.9.4
Mirror
This command is used for mirror (axial-symmetrical) copying of the selected part
of a drawing.
After completed selection of the elements of a drawing, the User is requested to assign two
points which determine the beginning and the end of the axis about which the copying will be
executed:
First Point of Mirror Line:
Second Point of Mirror Line:
At the very end of this procedure, two possibilities are offered to the user:
Delete Old Objects (<No>/Yes):
Selecting the Yes option will denote a positive answer which will result in deleting the
elements which were selected for copying, while selecting the No option will denote a
negative answer and the selected elements will remain within the drawing.
2.9.5
Rotate
This command is used to change the angle of rotation of certain parts of a
drawing.
After completed selection of the objects which need to be rotated, the program will require
from the command bar first the base point and next the angle of rotation to be determined:
Rotation Base Point:
Angle of Rotation:
The angle of rotation can be assigned either from the keyboard (the angle is assigned in
degrees and it increases anticlockwise) or by selecting a point in the drawing which forms the
desired angle together with the previously selected base point. When the latter way is used,
the selected elements are being drawn in DRAG mode in such way that the angle of rotation is
determined by the current position of the mouse pointer.
After the angle is assigned, a message appears on the command bar the sense of which is the
same as in Mirror command.
Delete Old Objects (<Yes>/No):
Thus a positive answer deletes selected elements (original), while the negative one leaves
them within the drawing. Here, if you right-click the positive answer Yes will be accepted.
78
Note:
Since pure plane rotation is performed by command Rotate, in order for the command to be
executed it is necessary that both the selected entities and the centre of rotation belong to the
same plane. For that reason selecting the entities in window 3D View will be disabled, and
when assigning the centre of rotation only selection of a point belonging to same plane as the
selected entities will be allowed. Otherwise, the program will issue a corresponding warning
and it will deny executing the Rotate command.
Command 3D Rotation is used for space rotation of an entity.
2.9.6
Move
This command is very similar to command Copy but in this case the original is
deleted and thus an effect of moving parts of drawing from one place to another is
attained.
Same as in Copy command, first the elements are selected and next two points in the
drawing which determine the beginning and the end of the displacement vector are selected.
2.9.7
Trim
This command enables parts of a line between two points of intersection with
other elements in a drawing to be trimmed.
The command operates in such way that first the elements of a drawing which intersect with a
given linear entity and thus create borders for trimming the linear entity are selected.
<0 sel.> Trim Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
The selecting procedure is a standard one, and both surface and point entities can be joined to
the group of selected elements, although trimming is planned only for linear entities. This
means that the selected surface and the point entity can only be used as boundaries in regard
to which the trimming of linear entities will be executed. After this selection of elements, a
message appears on the command bar requiring that parts of a polygonal line (or parts of an
arc) which are to be removed be selected, and the pointer attains its standard shape of a
select box (small square).
Cutout (<End>):
At this moment only individual selecting is enabled, i.e. a part of the polygonal line which is to
be removed should be taken into the select box and the left mouse button clicked. The
segment will be removed from the drawing at once, and the program will require from the
79
command bar a new part of the polygonal line to be selected, all until you right-click and thus
end the command.
It should be mentioned that only parts of the polygonal line, which are intersected by other
selected elements of the drawing, and not whole segments of a polygonal line can be removed
from the drawing by this command. Command Delete is used to remove the whole, nonintersected segment of a polygonal line.
2.9.8
Extend
This command enables the existing segments of polygonal line to be extended to
selected element of the drawing. It is clear that the segments of a polygonal line
can be extended only to those elements of the drawing with which is possible to
attain the intersection point after extending the selected segment.
After selecting the command, first it is necessary to select the elements of the drawing to
which the segments of a polygonal line, which will be selected later, will be extended:
<0 sel.> Extend - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
Both surface and point entities can be joined to this group of selected elements, which can be
used in this command only as boundaries for extending. After selecting this group of elements
in the drawing, the program will require from the command bar a segment of the line, which
should be extended, to be taken into the select box.
Select Object to Extend (<End>):
The program will extend the selected segment of a polygonal line to the nearest element
selected as a boundary to which the line is extended. Arc segments can also be selected for
extending, and they are extended according to the arc (curvilinear) law.
The program will constantly require from the command bar new segments of the polygonal
line, which are to be extended, to be selected, until you right-click and thus denote the end of
the command.
2.9.9
Stretch
In contrast to Move command, which translationally changes the position of all
points on the selected entity, this command is used to stretch the geometry in
such way that only selected points on the contour are displaced translationally by
the assigned displacement vector.
After selecting this command, all points whose position we want to change should be selected
by the selecting procedure. The term point here means all refraction points on the contour of
surface and linear entities, as well as points which determine the position of the point entities
themselves.
<0 sel.> Stretch - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
It should be mentioned that in the procedure of selecting by a window, it is necessary to take
only the part of the drawing to which the desired point belongs, since selecting all points on
the contour of an entity results with the same effect as when command Move is activated. If
you right-click the end of the selecting procedure will be denoted and the program will require
from the command bar the displacement vector to be determined by selecting two points.
80

2.9.10 3D Array
Same as in command Array for 2D copying in series, after completed selection of
entities, the program will require from the command bar the type of series to be
selected.
Array Type (<Rectangular> / Polar):
Orthogonal Type of Series
Since this command enables simultaneous copying in the direction of global coordinate axes
only, the program first poses a series of questions on the number of elements in a series for
each of the directions of global coordinate axes.
Number of Columns (X) <1>:
Number of Rows (Y) <1>:
Number of Levels (Z) <1>:
The introduced terms column, row and level represent elements in a series which are
attained by copying in the direction of the global X, Y, and Z-axes, so the name of the
corresponding axis is written in the brackets. With the next series of questions, the program
requests the distance between the elements in a series to be determined:
Distance Between Columns (X) :
Distance Between Rows (Y) :
Distance Between Levels (Z) :
Instead of assigning from the keyboard, you can determine the distance by selecting two
points in the drawing. After selecting the first point, the program will require from the
command bar the second point to be selected.
Vector Second Point:
Polar Type of Series
The sense and course of this command are exactly the same as in command Array, for
creating two-dimensional polar series. The only difference is in that in Array command the
copying is performed along the arc with respect to the assigned point, and thus the elements
of the series and the assigned centre point of the series do not have to belong to the same
plane. However, in this command, copying along the arc series is performed in regard to
arbitrarily assigned axis in space. Therefore, the program will require from the command bar
the axis about which the rotation is performed to be defined by selecting two points instead of
by base point of the series.
Array Center Point:
Second Point on Axis of Rotation:
81
In this way you can also select the elements of a drawing which do not belong to the same
planes.
2.9.11 3D Mirror
The only difference between this command and the command Mirror is in that
here we are dealing with copying in regard to the assigned plane and not around
the assigned axis. For that reason, after selecting all entities for copying, the
program will require from the command bar the plane of copying to be defined by
three non-collinear points.
First Surface Point:
Second Surface Point (Back):
Third Surface Point (Back):
Sub-option Back on the command bar offers the possibility to return one step back when
selecting the points, something similar as in the procedure of drawing the polygonal line. After
completed procedure of defining the arbitrary plane in space in regard to which copying of
selected objects will be performed, the program will pose from the command bar the last
question about deleting old objects.
Delete Old Oblects (<No> / Yes):
2.9.12 3D Rotation
This command also is derived from related command Rotate. The only difference
between these two commands is in that here we are dealing with rotation in
regard to an assigned axis and not in regard to assigned point. For that reason,
after selecting all entities for 3D rotation, the program will require the axis with
respect to which the rotation is performed, to be defined by two arbitrarily
selected pointes.
Array Center Point:
Second Point on Axis of Rotation:
After defining the axis of rotation, the further course of this command is exactly the same as in
command for plane rotation.
Angle of Rotation:
Delete Old Oblects (<Yes> / No):
2.9.13 Restoring the Drawings (Undo/Redo)

In case a mistake has been made, the program is provided with a mechanism which
is used to restore the content of the drawing and to return to the state immediately before the
mistake has been made. In addition, there is also a mechanism for moving forward if you have
activated the command for moving backward by mistake. Each of the performed actions is
saved in the program during its execution, so that moving backward, or forward is enabled for
all performed actions in the program from the moment it was started and during the operation
with the given file. Command Undo is used for moving backward, while command Redo is
used for moving forward.
82
Command for moving backward Undo. This command is activated when keys
Ctrl and Z are pressed simultaneously.
Command for moving forward Redo. This command is activated when keys
Ctrl and Y are pressed simultaneously.
It should be mentioned that the previous zooms of a drawing cannot be restored with by this
mechanism since command Zoom-previous is planned for this use.
2.9.14 Join Contours

When command Join Contours is used, two related surfaces having common
edges of osculation, but only on condition that a same set of numerical data is joined to them,
can be merged. In addition, two related linear entities, having a common point of osculation
and same direction collinear entities, can also be merged. Of course, the condition that a
same set of numerical data is joined to those linear entities has to be fulfilled in this case also.
Here the term familiar elements means: two plates, two beams, two linear supports, etc.
When this command is selected, a message, which enables entering into standard selecting
procedure, appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Join Contours - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section /eXtras / selection Groups /
Recent selection / Deselect / <End>):
Now the User is expected to select all entities whose contours need to be merged. After
completed selection, the program will execute this operation for all linear and surface elements
which satisfy the conditions set for merging their contours.
Two plates are merged into one new plate by command Join Contours
Two beams are merged into one new beam by command Join Contours
83
2.9.15 Divide Contours

Command Divide Contours is effective only on linear elements, and it has the
opposite effect from the previously described command for merging contours. When this
command is selected, the program requires from the command bar the point, which
determines the position of dividing the linear entity into two new linear entities, to be
determined.
Input Division Points (Choise / Deselect / <End>):
In addition to individual selection of points, by activating the sub-option Choise the program
also enables mass selection of points (see Chapter 2.5.6).
<0 sel.> Select (All/Window/Polygon/selection Groups/Recent selection/Deselect/<End>):
After completed procedure of selecting the points, the program will divide all linear entities, to
which the assigned point belongs, into two new linear entities.
One beam is divided into three new beams by command Divide Contours
Note:
Since in the course of calculating the program automatically places nodes in all places where
linear entities and other parts of the model intersect, this command should only be used in
case when only one part of a linear entity, which is determined by points of intersection with
other entities, needs to be selected. In all other cases it is better not to use this option since
you will attain unnecessary large number of elements in the drawing which may only slow
down the program operation.
2.10
Visibility
The group of commands described in this Chapter offers you the possibility to hide
those elements of a drawing which you do not wish to see on the screen at a certain moment
during operating with the program. What will, and what will not be visible can be assigned
either by the type of element of the drawing, e.g. you want all plates in the model to be
currently invisible, or by selecting the given entity, when only that entity becomes invisible.
Command Visibility is used to regulate visibility by types of elements, while command,
Hiding is used to regulate the visibility only of selected elements of the drawing.
When determining the criterion what will, and what will not be visible, the criterion of state of
visibility by types of elements of the drawing is the dominant one. For example, let use say
that there are three beams in a model, and that we have used the command Hide to delete
the visibility of one of them only. If by command Visibility we delete visibility of all beams,
then all three beams will be invisible although the visibility was deleted to only one of them by
command Hide.
84
2.10.1 Adjusting the Visibility by Types of Elements

When either the presented icon or the command Visibility, which is contained
within the drop-down menu View, a dialog box, in which visibility of elements of
a drawing is regulated, opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for adjusting the visibility

by types of elements in a drawing
When command field OK is activated, the dialog box disappears from the screen, and the
drawing attains new appearance depending on the assigned parameters. The elements of the
drawing whose visibility has been deleted still remain within the drawing, but are not
displayed.
For each element of the drawing there is a separate part within this dialog box where manner
of visibility of that element is adjusted.
Part of the dialog box reserved for adjusting

the visibility of plates and walls
85
The icon of each of the structural elements and load determines whether the given element will
be visible or not. These icons operate as switches and they are set to switched-on or
switched-off state if you consecutively click the mouse over them. If the icon is concave it
means that the given element is visible while if it is convex it means that the element is
invisible.
Convex icon indicates that visibility of all plates and walls in the model is deleted
In each of these separate parts there are switches (radio-buttons) which are used to regulate
the manner of visibility of each of the members of the structure and load, separately. Of
course, selecting the manner of visibility of the elements is enabled only if the corresponding
icon is set to the switched-on state (concave). These parameters are grouped in vertical
columns within which only one of the parameters can be set to switched-on state. The
parameters are selected, i.e. set to switched-on state by a click on the mouse button over the
name of desired parameter. The indicator for selected parameter is a small black circle, while
the rest of the circles within that group (column) remain empty.
Group switch that determines the visibility of the slabs

Possible states of visibility will be explained in the following text for all types of elements.
86
Slab
Contour
Only the contour of a plate is drawn while its inside remains empty.
Hatch
The drawn plate contour is filled by corresponding hatching.
Set
The whole surface of the plate is hatched by numbers which correspond to the serial
number of the set of numerical data joined to that surface when it was being drawn. When
this manner of visibility is selected, sets of numerical data joined to the given plate are
easily controlled.
Diagonal
Slab diagonal is displayed. The program automatically defines its position in such a way
that from two diagonals of the slab surrounding rectangle it selects the one whose length
exceeds more over the slab surface. The diagonal position can be subsequently modified
via the command Diagonal line of surface entities.
Item mark - This check box becomes available only when displaying diagonal is on. Its
state defines whether slab item mark will be displayed in the middle of the diagonal.
This switch will obviously make sense only in case that there are slabs to which item
marks have been assigned.
Description - This check box becomes available only when displaying diagonal is on. Its
state defines whether slab description will be displayed in the middle of the diagonal.
Set - This check box becomes available only when displaying diagonal is on. Its state
defines whether the set number of numerical data added to a given slab will be
displayed in the middle of the diagonal. Due to visibility, this number is written in the
assigned color between symbols < and >.
Orthotropy - The state of this check box determines whether an arrow symbol, which
determines the assigned direction of orthotropy, will appear within the contour of
orthotropic plates. This switch will only have sense, of course, if there are orthotropic
plates on the model.
Boundary conditior - The state of this check box determines whether the line of assigned
boundary conditions in the plate will be shown in the drawing or not. This switch will only
have sense, of course, if Release is set the model.
Walls - The state of this check box determines whether walls will appear on the screen.
The term wall refers to all slabs which form an angle of more than 45 degrees with the
horizontal plane.
Slabs - The state of this check box determines whether slabs will appear on the screen.
The term slab refers to all slabs which form an angle which is less than or equal to 45
degrees with the horizontal plane.
3D If this check box is turned on, 3D window shows panel diagonals, Set, Description,
and Tags, of course, only if they are already displayed in 2D window. This check box has
the same purpose with other entities.
87
Beam
Contour
Only polygonal line in adequate color is drawn.
Set
Same as in previously described manner of visibility, a polygonal line in adequate color is
drawn, but the serial number of the set of numerical data joined to the given beam is
written at the middle of each segment of the polygonal line. The numbers are written in
adequate colours and are within parentheses: {1}.
Description
By setting this switch to the switched-on state, in the middle of every beam, information
that points out to the beam cross-section shape will be copied instead of the numeric data
ordinal number set.
Local Axes - The state of this check box determines whether arrows, which determine the
position of local coordinate system of the beam, are shown in the middle of each beam.
Nodes - The state of this check box determines whether nodes, which represent the
beginnings and the ends of beams, will be visible in the model or not.
Item mark - The state of this check box defines whether the item mark will be displayed in
the middle of each beam. This switch will obviously make sense only in case that there are
beams to which item marks have been assigned.
Columns - The state of this check box determines whether columns will appear on the
screen. The term column refers to all beams which form an angle of more than 45
Beams - The state of this check box determines whether beams will appear on the screen.
The term beam refers to all beams which form an angle which is less than or equal to 45
3D - If this check box is turned on in the 3D window, Set or Description or the Position
mark is printed by beams and, of course if their presentation is turned on for the 2D
window.
Area Support
Contour
Only the contour of an area support is drawn while its inside remains empty.
Hatch
The drawn contour of area support is filled by corresponding hatching.
Set
The whole surface of the area support is hatched by numbers which correspond to the
serial number of the set of numerical data joined to that area support when it was being
drawn. When this manner of visibility is selected, sets of numerical data joined to the given
area support are easily controlled.
Diagonal
Area support diagonal is displayed. The program automatically defines its position in such
a way that from two diagonals of the area support surrounding rectangle it selects the one
whose length exceeds more over the area support surface. The diagonal position can be
subsequently modified via the command Diagonal line of surface entities.
88
Item mark - This check box becomes available only when displaying diagonal is on. Its
state defines whether the area support item mark will be displayed in the middle of the
diagonal. This switch will obviously make sense only in case that there are area
supports to which item marks have been assigned.
Set - This check box becomes available only when displaying diagonal is on. Its state
defines whether the set number of numerical data added to a given area support will be
displayed in the middle of the diagonal. Due to visibility, this number is written in the
assigned color between symbols l and l .
3D - If this check box is turned on in the 3D window diagonals are drawn and Set or the
Position mark is printed on the area supports of course if their displaying is turned on
for the 2D window.
Linear Support
Contour
Only a polygonal line in adequate color is drawn.
Set
Same as in previously manner of visibility, a polygonal line in adequate color is drawn, but
the serial number of the set of numerical data joined to the given linear support is written
at the middle of each segment of the polygonal line. The numbers are written in adequate
colours and are within brackets: [1].
position of the local coordinate system of the linear support, are shown in the middle of
each of these linear supports.
the middle of each linear support. This switch will obviously make sense only in case that
there are linear supports to which item marks have been assigned.
3D - If this check box is turned on in the 3D window Set or the Position mark is printed by
the linear supports, of course, if its displaying is turned on for the 2D window.
Point Support
Contour
Only graphic symbols, which determine the position of assigned point supports, are drawn.
Set
Corresponding symbols are also drawn, but the serial number of the set of numerical data
joined to the given point support is written beside them. The serial numbers of sets are
written within brackets: [1].
position of the local coordinate system of the point support, are shown in the position of
each of the placed point supports.
the middle of each point support. This switch will obviously make sense only in case that
there are point supports to which item marks have been assigned.
89
3D - If this check box is turned on in the 3D window Set or the Position mark is printed by
point supports, of course, if its displaying is turned on for the 2D window.
Link
Set - When this check box is turned on, in the middle of the link contours the ordinal
number of associated numerical data set is displayed.
Local axis State of this check box determines whether arrows that determine the position
of its local coordinate system will be displayed in the middle of the link contour.
3D - If this check box is turned on, the serial number of the links sets are displayed in the
3D window.
Area Load
Contour
Only the contour of an area load is drawn while its inside remains empty.
Hatch
The drawn contour of area load is filled by corresponding hatching.
Intensity
This manner of visibility is used to display the assigned load intensity. The drawn surface is
hatched by adequate color, same as in Hatch visibility manner, but the load intensity is
also written in the middle of the surface. If the load is not uniformly distributed, assigned
load intensities are written beside all points on the contour.
3D - If this check box is turned on in the 3D window the intensity is printed by the area
loads, of course if it displaying is turned on for the 2D window.
Linear Load
Contour
Only a polygonal line in adequate color is drawn. In case the load vector belongs to the
plane of current view in 2D View window, arrow symbols which indicate the direction and
sense of load action are drawn along the assigned line.
Intensity
This manner of visibility is used to display the assigned load intensity. In the middle of
each segment of the polygonal line which denotes linear load, assigned intensity of
distributed forces and moments is written. Mark p is used for forces and mark m for
moments.
3D - If this check box is turned on in the 3D window the intensity is printed by the linear
load, of course if its displaying is turned on for the 2D window.
Point Load
Contour
Only graphic symbols, which determine the position of assigned concentrated forces and
moments, are drawn.
Intensity
When this manner of visibility is selected, intensities of assigned point load will be written
beside symbols of point load. Concentrated forces are marked by P= and moments by
M=.
90
3D - If this check box is turned on in the 3D window the intensity is printed by the point
loads, of course if its displaying is turned on for the 2D window.
Slab Temperature
Contour
Only the contour of the area onto which the temperature influences act is drawn while its
inside remains empty.
Hatch
The drawn contour of temperature influences is filled by corresponding hatching.
Intensity
This manner of visibility is used to display the assigned intensity of temperature influences
in plates. The drawn area is filled by corresponding hatching, same as in visibility manner
Hatch, but the intensity of assigned temperature influences is also written in the middle
of the area. Mark to= is adopted for temeparature change while for temperature
difference mark dt= is adopted.
Beam Temperature
Contour
Only a polygonal line in adequate color is drawn.
Intensity
This manner of visibility is used to display the assigned intensity of temperature influences
in beams. The assigned intensity of temperature influences in the beam is written in the
middle of each segment of the polygonal line. Mark to= is adopted for temeparature
change while for temperature difference marks dt2= and dt3= are adopted.
Node Displacement
Contour
Only graphic symbols, which determine the position of assigned support displacements, are
drawn.
Intensity
When this manner of visibility is selected, in addition to symbols, intensities of assigned
support displacements will also be written. Mark u= is introduced for displacements, and
= for rotations.
Prestress
Prestressing - The state of this check box determines whether the line of prestressing
cables will be visible or not.
position of the local coordinate system of a segment of the prestressing line, are shown in
the middle of each of these segments. This check box will be available to be changed only
if prestressing is set as visible.
Intensity State of this check box determines whether intensity of the prestressing force
will be displayed in the middle of the cable route.
91
Moving Load
Moving Load - The state of this check box determines whether the assigned line along
which the moving load moves will be visible or not.
position of the local coordinate system of a segment of assigned path of movable load, are
shown in the middle of each of these segments. This check box will be available to be
changed only if movable load is set as visible.
Axial strain
Contour
A polyline is drawn in appropriate color.
Intensity
The assigned intensity of axial strain is written in the middle of each polyline segment.
P= symbol has been adopted as the intensity of axial strain.
Proxy entity
Proxy entity- The state of this check box defines whether the proxy entity will be visible or
not.
Local Axes - The state of this check box defines whether arrows which define the position
of its local coordinate system will be displayed in the middle of each proxy entity. This
check box will become available for editing only when proxy entity visibility is on.
Item mark index
Item mark index - The state of this check box defines whether indexes which
unambiguously define each entity will be displayed alongside co-linear entities item marks.
Index number is separated from the item mark by a small line: *-n. This switch will
obviously make sense only in case that there are co-linear entities to which item mark with
index number has been assigned.
Earthquake walls
Earthquake walls - State of this check box determines

using commands "Earthquake walls", "Concrete design wall stress control" will be displayed (the sections
Earthquake walls has been performed, intersections and
walls, and symbols of the dimensioned masonry walls).
whether all entities obtained by

the array of walls" and "Masonry
on which dimensioning of the
axis of the dimensioned array of
Section Symbols
Slab - The state of this check box determines whether symbols, which indicate the
positions in which the plates intersect with or osculate the current view plate, will be
displayed in 2D View window.
Wall - The state of this check box determines whether symbols, which indicate the
positions in which the walls intersect with or osculate the current view plate, will be
92
Beam - The state of this check box determines whether symbols, which indicate the
positions in which the beams intersect with or osculate the current view plate, will be
Area Support - The state of this check box determines whether symbols, which indicate the
positions in which the area supports intersect with or osculate the current view plate, will
be displayed in 2D View window.
Linear Support - The state of this check box determines whether symbols, which indicate
the positions in which the linear supports intersect with or osculate the current view plate,
will be displayed in 2D View window.
Link - State of this check box determines whether "2D view" will display symbols that
indicate places where the beginning and end point of link (nodes) are touching the current
display plane.
Proxy entity The state of this check box defines whether symbols which indicate places
into which proxy entities are penetrating or adjoining the current view plane will be
Section afore
The state of this check box defines whether symbols will be displayed in 2D View
window, in places where structural elements which are located in front of the current view
plane are penetrating or adjoining a given plane.
Item mark The state of this check box defines whether the item marks of structural
elements which are located in front of the current view plane and are penetrating or
adjoining a given plane will be displayed in 2D View window. This check box will
become available for editing only if the check box Section afore is on.
Section from behind

The state of this check box defines whether symbols will be displayed in 2D View
window, in places where structural elements which are located behind the current view
plane are penetrating or adjoining a given plane.
Item mark The state of this check box defines whether the item marks of structural
elements which are located behind the current view plane and are penetrating or
adjoining a given plane will be displayed in 2D View window. This check box will
become available for editing only if the check box Section from behind is on.
Auxiliary level
Construction Lines - The state of this check box determines whether the auxiliary axes,
assigned by command Axes will be visible or not.
Show axes spacing - The state of this check box defines whether the spacing between
adjacent axes will be displayed on the screen. Horizontal spacing between the placed
vertical axes is displayed at the top of the drawing area whereas vertical spacing
between the placed horizontal axes is displayed along the right edge of the drawing
area.
Mesh of curved surfaces - The state of this check box defines whether auxiliary mesh
indicating the shape and domain of spreading of the assigned curved surfaces will be
93
Layer - The state of this check box determines whether all elements of the drawing
constructed by commands: Line, Text and Dimensions will be visible or not. Since the
program includes eight layers, these eight check boxes regulate which of the auxiliary
entities will be visible depending on the layer in which it has been drawn.
Boundary conditions and releases
Static
The symbols of only static boundary conditions and static influence releases are
in corresponding colors.
displayed
Seismic
The symbols of only seismic boundary conditions and seismic influence releases are
displayed in corresponding colors.
Static and seismic

The symbols of all boundary conditions and all influence releases are displayed in
corresponding colors.
Visibility of Elements of a Drawing from Post-Processing Module

The next group of check boxes regulates the visibility of elements in a drawing which appear
only in the module for processing the results of calculations. Within Visibility command they
are present in all modules, however when they are set to switched-on or switched-off state,
changes on the drawing will appear only in the post-processing module.
FEM The state of this check box determines whether the generated mesh of finite element
swill be visible on the screen or not.
Node Numbers The state of this check box determines whether serial numbers of nodes
on mesh of finite elements will be written on the screen or not. This check box will be
available to be changed only when the mesh of finite elements is set as visible.
3D - The state of this check box determines whether the network of finite elements is
going to be visible in the 3D window. The check box will be available only for the change if
the check box "FEM" is turned on.
All Visible/ All Invisible

Command fields All Visible and All Invisible, used to set the visibility of all elements in a
drawing to switched-on or switched-off state, are in the bottom right part of the dialog box.
Operating with List of Visibility State
Since you will often change the visibility states of elements of drawings, depending on current
needs, in the course of operating with the program, saving visibility states is enabled within
this command. When you adapt a certain visibility state which you consider to be relatively
typical and which will frequently be used in the course of operating with the program, activate
command Save.
94
It is now necessary to assign a textual description, which will associate you with the posed
question on visibility state, in the edit box, and to activate command field OK. In case you
have assigned a name that already exists in the list of visibility types, the program will issue a
corresponding message.
The closed list in the bottom left corner of the dialog box Visibility is used to select any of the
previously saved visibility states.
Closed list for selecting any of the previously saved visibility states
If you click the mouse on the arrow on the right side of this closed list the contents of the list
opens and now it is sufficient to click the mouse over the row where the contents of the
visibility state to be established is described. It should be mentioned that the visibility state
Default, defined by the program, is always in the list and it cannot be deleted. In each of the
program modules the Default visibility is different and it corresponds to the purpose of the
given module.
Command field
Delete enables arbitrarily selected visibility state to be deleted from the
list. The course of the procedure is to first click the mouse button over visibility state, which is
to be deleted in the list and then to activate command field
Delete.
95
Selecting Quickly the Previously Saved Visibility States
Any of the previously saved visibility states can be selected even without activating the
command Visibility. When you right-click over icon Visibility, the list with all previously
saved visibility states opens automatically.
Appearance of the dialog boxwhich opens when you

right-click over icon Visibility
It is now sufficient to click the mouse on the desired row in the list and to activate command
field OK. After that, the selected visibility state will be established on the drawing.
Deleting Quickly the Visibility of Individual Elements on the Drawing
Deleting and setting the visibility of individual elements can be also achieved by direct click on
the right mouse button over the corresponding icon. For example, if the beams are visible, a
click on the right mouse button over the icon Beam will make them invisible. Another click on
the right mouse button over the same icon will make the drawn beams visible.
A click on the right mouse button will result in

deleting its visibility on the screen
This way of establishing and deleting the visibility is transparent (same as command Visibility
itself), i.e. it can be activated, while other commands are being executed. A click on the right
mouse button is enabled over following icons: Slab/Wall, Beam, Area Support, Linear
Support, Point Support, Link, Area Load, Linear Load, Point Load, Boundary
conditions, Support displacement, Slab temperature, Beam temperature, Axial strain,
Moving load, Prestressing, Proxy entity, Axes, Line, Text and Dimensions. A click
on the right mouse button over commands Line, Text and Dimensions will result in
deleting the visibility of all layers, or in establishing visibility of all layers.
96
Application of Visibility Command
If control of input of only certain elements is desired, visibility of all other elements can be
deleted in order to achieve a clearer image.
When a drawing contains many different elements in a small area, and comfortable
selection of certain points and elements is not quite possible. In this case visibility of certain
elements should be deleted and thus make the input easier.
The contents and appearance of a drawing for printing is adjusted by this command.
Finally, it is important to remember that all visibility customizations which are currently in use
are being memorized for all three modules (Data Input, Mesh Generation and PostProcessing) and set as the current ones in case of restarting the program.
Also, during saving the database, all current visibility customizations for all three modules are
also being saved. This way, during loading the database, it is possible to set the visibility
customization which was last used at the moment of saving it as the current one.
2.10.2 Adjusting the Visibility by Selecting (Hiding)

Command Hiding has multiple applications, and the largest one is when it is used
to bind certain groups of structural elements into independent wholes. Thus, certain wholes of
the model can be alternatively displayed on the screen (only columns visible, only floor
structures visible, only walls visible, etc.). This is very convenient, especially when calculation
results are analysed, since only influences within currently visible group of entities are
analysed.
When command Hiding is selected, the standard procedure of selecting the elements in a
drawing is entered.
<0 sel.> Hiding - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
This means that now you are expected to select all elements on the drawing, which are not to
be visible within this group of visibility.
All entities, the visibility of which needs to be deleted, are selected
97
After completed selecting, the program will require from the command bar the name of the
given group of hidden elements to be assigned.
Group Name <>:
By assigning the name of the group, it will be saved in the base and you will always be able to
establish it as the current group. However, if you do not want to save the defined group in the
base because you need it for single use only, then you have the possibility to assign a name to
it, planned by the program, for temporary groups of visibility: Noname, if you click the key
Enter, or right-click. When you define another group of visibility that you do not want to
save in the base, the visibility group previously joined to name Noname will be destroyed.
Thus you can operate with visibility groups saved in this way all until you exit the program or
until you define a new group of hidden elements with the same name. Regardless of whether
you have assigned a name to the group of hidden elements or not, the command will be
completed, and only those entities which belong to the created group will be visible on the
screen.
Only structural elements that belong to the roof

are visible in the defined group
When you click the right mouse button over icon Hiding, a dialog box with a list of all groups
of hidden elements saved so far in the program base opens.
The dialog box for working with visibility groups

This dialog box is used for selecting a single group or a combination of several visibility groups
for simultaneous viewing.
98
In order to enable viewing simultaneously the contents of several visibility groups, it is
necessary to perform their selection in the box.
Groups Columns and Roof have been selected

Once you have activated the command field OK, the program will close the dialog box and
display all entities located in the selected groups in the drawing.
Entities belonging to the Roof group
Entities belonging to the Columns group
Viewing simultaneously both groups

Activating the command field All Visible will result in deselecting all previously selected
visibility groups in the list, thereby all elements in the drawing which have previously been
hidden will now show.
99
Selecting the command field All Visible has resulted in bringing back
all previously hidden entities in the drawing
When command Edit Hidden within drop-down menu View is selected, a dialog box for
updating the previously defined groups of hidden elements opens.
In addition to all previously defined groups of hidden elements saved in the base, the list also
contains a temporary group Noname, clearly if it has been previously defined as such. In this
way you have the possibility to rename the group Noname and to store it in to base thus
making it equal to other groups.
You can change the name of a certain group if you first select by mouse the row in which the
given group is presented, and then assign a new name in edit box New Group name. You
will confirm the entering if you either press the key Enter, or key Tab.
The group is deleted from the base if the former is selected in the list so that that row
becomes clearly marked and by selecting the command field
Delete.
Command fields
Up and
Down enable you to change the sequence in the list. The
currently selected group is moved one place up or one place down in the list, respectively, if
you select one of these command fields.
When the check box Draw Hidden Objects is set to switched-on state, the currently hidden
entities on the drawing are not totally invisible but are drawn in such way that they clearly
indicate that they are currently not available for any selection.
100
The displayed hidden entities serve for easy perception of the

position of visible entities in regard to the rest of the model
2.11
Commands for Operating with Levels (menu

Level)
If you right-click over the level list, a drop-down menu containing commands for
operating with levels opens.
Drop-down menu for operating with levels

As we have already said at the beginning of this manual, the term level means a horizontal
plane the position of which is determined in space by global Z-axis. The role of a level is to
either establish a given plane for drawing by selecting that level in 2D View window or to
place a floor at a height determined by the given level by entering the previously created file.
101
2.11.1 Editing the Levels (Edit)

This command is used to define the position of horizontal planes which are at a
given height. When command Edit is selected, a dialog box as the following one opens.
Appearance of the edit box for editing the levels

This dialog box enables establishing new levels, deleting the existing ones, as well as changing
their elevation. All established levels are shown in the list box, and their position in vertical
sense is always shown graphically in the right part of the dialog box. The way of operating with
this command is very similar to that with establishing the auxiliary axes (see Chapter 3.4.1).
Since at least one level has to be defined in every model, the presented list always contains at
least one row with data. Each level is determined by its name (column Name), by its global
elevation coordinate (column Z) and relative height in regard to the lower level (column h).
In addition, the information on whether the level is full or empty, i.e. whether any element is
placed on that horizontal plane or not, is present before each name of a level, in the end left
column. Existence of symbol clearly indicates that the given level is full, i.e. that some
structural elements and/or loads are already on that level.
Establishing the Levels
All levels that are being established stand in an ascending sequence where the
the lowest and the last one the highest Z coordinate. The course of the
establishing the levels consists of assigning the appropriate instruction
Command: which is confirmed by pressing the key Enter. There are
establishing the levels depending on assigned instruction:
first level has

procedure of
in edit box
four ways of
By assigning individually the absolute Z coordinate. For example, if you assign value 5.5
in the edit box, and you confirm it when you press the Enter key, then the level with
global elevation coordinate 5.5 will be established.
By assigning individually the relative Z coordinate in relation to the reference level. One of
the levels is always the reference level and that row is clearly marked by a different color in
the list box. The program for reference level automatically declares the last level established
as the reference one, and if you click the mouse within any of the items in the row
containing information on the given level it becomes the reference level. Character @ has
to be assigned before the corresponding coordinate in the edit box, to indicate clearly that
relative coordinates are dealt with. For example if you assign value@5.5 in the edit box, a
level that is at a distance 5.5 from the reference level will be established.
102
By assigning serially the absolute Z coordinates. The first assigned number represents the
number of distances, while the second represents the magnitude of the distance. These two
numbers have to be separated by a sign *. For example if you assign number 4*3.5 in
the edit box, four levels having the following global Z coordinates: 3.5 7.0 10.5 14, will
be established.
By assigning serially the relative Z coordinates. The procedure is almost the same as in
assigning serially the absolute coordinates, except that the first level is not established in
regard to the origin of coordinates but in regard to the reference level. If a level at a
distance 10 from the origin of coordinates is set as the reference level and, for example,
you assign @3*2.2 in the edit box, three levels, at distances 12.2 14.4 and 16.6 from
the origin of coordinates will then be established.
Levels can be placed by selecting a point in the drawing where a Z coordinate of the selected
point will represent the Z coordinate of the added level. The command field Pick has been
envisaged for this purpose.
The command field for placing levels

by selecting points in the drawing
Once you have activated this command field, the program will close the dialog box and request
from the command bar that you select points in the drawing in which you want to place levels.
Points input (Deselect / <End>):
This message will remain on the command bar as long as you mark the end of the procedure
of entering points either by selecting the sub-option End or by right-clicking upon which the
dialog box will open again. As many levels will be added to the box as there are selected points
with different Z coordinates.
The levels can be established also by activating the command field
Add, where the new
level is added immediately above the currently active one. The program itself adopts the
elevation coordinate of the new level, but it can be changed, which will be explained in more
detail in further text.
Deleting the Levels
When command field
Delete is activated, the reference level is removed. This means that
it is necessary to first select from the list box the row containing the information on the given
level and then to activate command level
Delete. Since at least one level has to be
103
defined in each model, in case there is only one defined model in the list, command field
Delete will be unavailable.
Changing the Distance between Levels
The distance between any two adjacent levels is changed directly in the list box. It is only
necessary to select the given value in column h with the mouse pointer and to assign the
new value from the keyboard. When the new value is assigned, the selected distance will be
corrected and all levels above will thus be shifted without changing the distance between
them. It should be mentioned that values in column h represent distances downward, and
therefore that value cannot be changed for the lowest level (that value is always 0.00).
Shifting the Levels
The position of any of the previously established levels can be changed by changing the value
in column Z. The essential difference between this operation and the operation of changing
the distance between two levels is in that by shifting the selected level the position of other
levels does not change.
Editing the Title of Levels
A name (e.g. Attic, Ground Floor, Floor I, etc) can be assigned to each of the levels by
assigning a completely arbitrary text in column Name. Assigning a title to levels is not
obligatory, and the only role of this operation is to enable finding the desired level faster.
Graphic Presentation of Levels
The position of all established levels is presented in the right part of the dialog box. In case the
presentation is not clear, it is possible to apply one of the ways of zooming, included in the
program, in this part of the window:
CTRL+ left mouse button =
CTRL+ middle mouse button =
CTRL+ right mouse button =
Middle mouse key =
Zoom Window
Zoom All
Zoom Previous
Pan
You can exit the dialog box with quitting all previously performed actions by activating
command field Cancel, while all previously performed actions are accepted and control
whether any deleted or shifted levels contained any structural elements or loads is controlled
by activating command field OK. Deleting a level which already contains entities at the same
time means deleting these entities. In addition, changing the position of a full level mans
changing the position of all entities which belonged to it. Since such actions may be
destructive, in these cases the program will issue an appropriate warning.
An affirmative answer will result in updating the geometry of the model in accordance with
newly assigned data, while if command field Cancel is selected it will mean quitting and
returning to dialog box for editing the levels.
104
The exception is the deletion of the level containing only line entities. In such situation, the
program displays a different message when exiting the dialog for editing levels:
An affirmative answer will result in deletion of all levels and entities that belong to them, while
the selection of the button "No" deletes levels but line entities remain in the model.
Finally, it should be mentioned that the program creates on the model a corresponding global
auxiliary Z-axis for each of the levels established in this dialog box (see Chapter 3.4.1). These
axes will be visible in window 2D View when any of the frames is set as current view in this
window. Of course, the reverse procedure does not apply, i.e. when any of the global auxiliary
Z-axes is deleted it does not mean that the level at the corresponding height is deleted.
Note:
Since the plate is an extremely important structural member, a convention that each horizontal
plate in the model has to belong to one of the levels has been adopted in the program. For
that reason, for each newly created horizontal plate the program will create itself a level which
corresponds to the horizontal plane to which the given plate belongs. To clarify such behavior
let us look at the following example. Let us have only a single created level on elevation
Z=0,00 in the model, and a horizontal plate established on that level. If we copy this plate in
the direction of global Z coordinate at a distance 3 m, then in addition to the plate copied on
level Z=3,00, we shall attain an automatically created level also on elevation Z=3,00.
2.11.2 Selecting the Current Level

The information on currently active level is always written in the list of levels. The
name (if assigned) and obligatorily elevation coordinate of the level are used for its
identification. If you desire to change the current level click the mouse on the arrow on the
right side of the list of levels , after which a drop list containing all previously created
levels in the model opens.
A symbol in the opened list clearly indicates which

level is the currently active one
105
Now it is necessary to select the desired level from the list and it will be set as the current one.
Comment in continuation of name of window 2D View: I floor 3.00

clearly indicates the current content of window 2D View
In case when the list of levels is focused, i.e. when one of the levels is presented in 2D View
window, the current view can be quickly changed by the following keys:
Home
End
Press
one.
Press
one.
Press
Press
this cursor arrow to establish the first level above the current level as the active
this cursor arrow to establish the first level below the current level as the active
this key to establish the top level as the current one.
this key to establish the lowest level as the current one.
2.11.3 Local Coordinate System of Levels

The local coordinate system of a level is such that its X, Y and Z local axes coincide
with the direction and sense of global axes, and the local origin of coordinates is translated in
direction of global Z-axis at a distance equal to elevation coordinate of that level.
Local coordinate system of a level

Therefore, if the focus is on window 2D View, and a level with elevation coordinate Z=3 is
presented in that window, if we assign absolute coordinates: 2,4,6 from the keyboard, a point
with the following global coordinates: X=2; Y=4; Z=3+6=9 will be selected.
106
However, if we assign relative coordinates : @1,2,3 from the keyboard, and the reference
point on the level established at height Z=3 has local coordinates X=4; Y=5 , a point with
the following global coordinates: X=4+1=5; Y=5+2=7; Z=3+3=6 will then be selected.
2.11.4 Inserting the Previously Created Floor Structure onto

a Level (Insert)
Commands Insert, Replacement and Generate have special application in
creating space models which represent buildings. In such models it may be very practical to
analyse the influences in floor structures due to vertical load in separate data files, and later to
easily assemble the whole space model from individual parts of the structure created in this
way.
By command Insert you have the possibility to declare the content of any of the previously
created data files as a floor structure and to insert it into the model onto the current level.
Since in the course of inserting the content of the selected data file its global origin of
coordinates translates into the local origin of coordinates of the current level, this means that it
is very important that you set the appropriate level as the current level before selecting the
Insert command. After selecting this command a dialog box as the following one opens.
Appearance of a dialog box for entering floor structures

As default the program presents all data files with extension *.twp which means that
disregarding their content any of Towers data files can be selected for entering. Of course,
selecting a data file, in which an arbitrary space model instead of the content of the desired
floor structure is defined, doesnt make sense. For such entering of previously created models
the Import command, within drop-down menu "File", is planned (see Chapter 3.6.5). The
program will not prevent inserting any model onto the current level, but it is only sensible to
insert floor structures.
In addition to Towers data files, you can select any of the Planets data files (Planet is
the name of our old program which served for calculation of influences in floor structures). In
this case, it is necessary to select Planet (*.plw) as file type from the closed list File Type
and all files with extension *.plw will appear in the current directory.
When you have selected the desired floor structure, click the mouse on command field Open
and soon the program will open a dialog box for mapping the entered load:
107
Appearance of the dialog box for mapping the load

from the entered floor structure
Since in addition to structural elements, the program enables entering the load on the floor
structures, now it is necessary to determine which case of loading from the entered floor
structure should and which should not be joined to the model that is being created. The
displayed list has as many rows as is the number of cases of loading in the floor structure
which is being entered. All cases from the entered floor structure are presented in the left part
of the list, and data, which will determine which of these cases of loading will be entered and
which not, in the right part. This means that it is necessary to place each of the entered cases
of loading into corresponding case of loading of the model which is being created. The
procedure is as follows: click the mouse button on arrow , located at the end of each row
to open a drop list and select from it the case of loading on the model into which you wish to
place the given case of loading from the floor structure.
The content of closed lists is the same within each row. Option 0. None is in the first place,
followed by all cases of loading that exist in the model that is being created, and finally, the
same number of options New Load Case as is the number of cases of loading in the floor
structure which is being entered. Thus all situations that may occur are covered. That is, the
loading in the floor structure may be ignored, it may be joined to other loads within any
already existing load cases in the model, or it may be joined to completely new case of loading
in the model.
Selecting the option 0. None means that when it is selected, its load case from the floor
structure, presented in the given row, will not be entered. If any other data from the list is
selected, the given load case will be entered and it will be joined to the load case on the model
which is determined by the data from the list.
108
The program sets the option 0. None in all entered cases of loading as default, except in case
when the name of the entered load case coincides exactly with the name of any of the existing
load cases in the model.
In case option New Load Case is selected, the program, in addition to all loads that have
been entered, joins the name of the entered load case to the new load case.
2.11.5 Replacing the Geometry of the Floor Structures

(Replacement)
By using command Replacement you have the possibility to automatically join
the geometry of one floor structure to any of the previously created levels in the model. This
command has a special application when your building has exactly the same content on
several levels. This command enables you to define the content of one level only once, and
then to easily multiply it, i.e. to join to all other levels that are to have the same content, by
this command. The same rule applies disregarding whether you have designed the content of
such a level by drawing or by entering some of the previously created floor structures. This
command can also be used in subsequent changing of content in a model whose content
repeats on several different levels. In that case it is sufficient to correct the mistake in one of
the levels and then to join the corrected content to the remaining levels.
Since the command multiplies the content of the current level, it is very important to set the
level whose content you desire to copy as the current level before selecting this command.
When command Replacement is selected, a dialog box as follows opens:
Appearance of a dialog box for replacing the

geometry of floor structures
The number of rows in the displayed list is the same as the number of created levels in the
whole model. Each level is determined by its title (column Name) and by its global elevation
coordinate (column Z). The row in which data for the current level are presented is
emphasised by a different color and thus clearly separated from the rest of the list. Existence
of symbol on the left side of the list indicates that that level is full, i.e. that some structural
elements and/or loads have been already previously joined to that level.
Now you are expected to select by a click on the mouse button, one of the levels whose
content needs to be replaced by the content of the current level. If you click the mouse button
over one of the rows that level will be selected while the selection of the previously selected
row will be removed. This means that if we simply click the mouse button we can select only
one of the levels in the list. In case you wish to join the content of the current level to a group
of levels, keys Shift and Ctrl should be used for multi-selection. If you press and hold down
the key Ctrl and clock the mouse button on any of the levels, that level will be selected while
the previously selected levels will still remain selected. In this procedure, if you click the
mouse button over the previously selected level, it will result in deselecting of that level.
Multiple selection of levels by key Shift is performed in a way similar as in previously
described in which key Ctrl is used, except that here, if you click the mouse button within the
109
given row, all remaining rows in the list, which are between the previously selected row and
the row which has just been selected, will be selected in addition to the given row.
Selecting the command fields Select All and Deselect All results in selecting and
deselecting all levels in the list, respectively.
When you have selected all levels to which you wish to join the content of the currently active
level, activate command field OK. Since levels which are already full, i.e. which already
contain some structural elements and/or loads, can also be selected in this procedure, this
command may be a destructive one. For that reason, in this case, the program issues an
appropriate warning and requires repeated confirmation for execution of this command.
2.11.6 Export of the construction part in a new model

(Export)
By using command "Export" you have the option to save a part of the construction
in a separate file. If export is done from the post-processing mode, you can require from the
program to reduce all loads acting on the rest of the structure, including its own weight, to the
part of the structure that is being exported. After its selection from the menu that pops up
after right mouse click on the level list, a dialog will appear:
Combo box is used to select a part of the construction to export:

- Current assembly only - Only the current assembly will be exported, that is, the current
contents of "2D view" window.
- Current assembly an all above/afore - Current contents of "2D View" window will be
exported and all elements that are above the current assembly (if it is a level) or in front of the
current assembly (if it is a frame).
- Current assembly and all below/behind - Current contents of "2D View" window will be
exported and all elements that are below the current assembly (if it is a level) or behind the
current assembly (if it is a frame).
If a custom view is displayed in "2D View", the only available option will be "Only the current
assembly", while export of compound assembly view is not possible.
110
Using the parameters at the bottom of the dialog, you can define the way of saving structural
elements that do not belong to the current assembly.
Entities located above/afore
Convert to forces - When this check box is turned on, all the construction elements that are
found in front of / above of the current set are converted into force and they are applied to the
structural elements of the current assembly. Also, all loads acting on these elements are
transferred to the structural elements of the current assembly. This check box is available only
if the model is calculated, and the export is being done from the post-processing mode.
Convert to supports - When this check box is turned on, at the section point of the currently
displayed plane with panels and pillars that are in front / above it (indirect elements), the
program will put linear and point supports in newly created model.
It should be emphasized that parameters in this part of the dialog will not be available if option
"Current assembly an all above/afore" is not selected in the combo box.
Entities positioned below/behind
Convert to forces - When this check box is turned on, all the construction elements that
under / behind the current assembly are converted into force and they are applied to
structural elements of the current assembly. Also, all loads acting on these elements
transferred to the structural elements of the current set. This check box is available only if
model is calculated, and the export is done from the post-processing mode.
are
the
are
the
Convert to supports - When this check box is turned on, at the section point of the currently
displayed plane with panels and pillars that are under / behind it (indirect elements), the
program will put linear and point supports in newly created model.
It should be emphasized that parameters in this part of the dialog will not be available if option
"Current assembly and all below/behind" is not selected in the combo box.
Pressing the "OK" button opens the next dialog:
Here it is necessary to enter a file name, and then, by pressing the "Save" button, to save the
part of the construction that is being exported.
If the model contains beams and walls that do not belong to the current assembly (indirect
elements), and do not break in it, during the export of the construction part, they will be
111
exported in the whole, ie. the program will not break them at the current assembly level. It
should be particularly cautious if the rest of the structure is transferred to the new model as a
load. For example, if you export the current assembly and all under, when all above it becomes
a load, these elements will be exported in the whole and their parts that are above of the
current assembly will be converted into force, so the influence of its own weight above the
current assembly in the new model will be doubled. If it comes to this situation the program
will display the appropriate warning:
2.11.7 Generating the Space Model (Generate)

In essence, generating represents replacement of linear and point supports, which
are placed on the floor structures, by corresponding vertical walls and columns. Practically, this
procedure enables spatial connection of floor structures by walls, and/or columns.
When command Generate is selected, the procedure of connecting the floor structures into
a space model begins. The procedure is carried out in accordance with the following rules:
In course of generating, the program attempts to replace each of the established point and
linear supports by a vertical beam element (column) and wall, respectively. The only
condition that should be met for the point support to be replaced by a column, and for the
linear support to be replaced by a wall, is that a structural element, which will support the
generated element, exists under the vertical element generated in such way.
If there is no structural element under the point support or the linear support which would
support the generated vertical element, then the point support or the linear support remains
a true support.
Since the sets of numerical data for point and linear supports contain practically double
data, i.e. data on support conditions when they are supports and data on them when they
are beams, i.e. walls, the generated columns attain a set of numerical data of beams, and
the generated walls attain a set of numerical data of walls. If these elements remain
supports in the space model also, only that portion of data which is related to support
conditions will apply to them.
All point and linear supports replaced in the procedure of generating the spatial model by
corresponding columns and walls, respectively, are removed from the composition of the
floor structure at the given level and they no longer exist in the model as supports.
From all previously presented it can be concluded that it is very important for the efficiency of
this command that the geometry of the floor structures is extremely accurately drawn, i.e. that
all structural elements in vertical sense take their exact position. In order to understand the
sense of this sentence we shall explain the mathematical algorithm of generating the vertical
elements which develops downward. If a point support is in question, the program places a
vertical line downward through the point which determines the position of that support in
space, and searches for the first intersection between that line and any of the structural
elements: plate, beam, point or linear support. For that reason, we may approach the case
when a column is not generated at all or when it is generated in the wrong position due to
incorrect geometry.
112
The column will not be generated because

there is nothing to support it due to noncoinciding in vertical sense
The column will be generated but in wrong

position due to non-coinciding in elevation
sense
Similar to previously presented occurs in linear supports. Here the program places a vertical
plane downward through the line which determines the position of the given linear support in
space, and also searches for the first intersection between that plane and any of the structural
elements. If the linear support does not reach the structural element with its entire length, the
wall is created only on the part where the vertical plane found the intersection, and on the
remaining part the linear support is shortened and remains as such.
Position of linear supports before generating
Appearance of a generated wall
In linear supports also, poor geometry may result in a wall that is not generated at all, or a
wall that is generated but with poor geometry. Here poor geometry means unexpected position
of entities.
Position of linear supports before generating
Appearance of a generated wall (indented)
When the lack of coinciding in geometry is such that the support is not generated at all, such
error can be relatively easily noticed by visual inspection of the position of all point and linear
supports on the model. However, cases when vertical elements are generated, but in the
wrong position or with wrong geometry, represent a very serious problem for detecting the
error. Firstly, that lack of coinciding can be so small that it can be noticed only when that part
of the model is enormously magnified. Drawing errors like this will specially stand out when
generating the mesh of finite elements and they will result in unnecessarily large number of
finite elements or it will not be possible to generate the mesh of finite elements at all.
113
Drawing errors may also occur in the course of placing the point and linear supports in the
vicinity some other structural element. In such cases the program will generate correct vertical
elements, columns and walls, bur they will have irregular position in relation to other structural
elements which will surely create a problem later in the course of generating the mesh of finite
elements.
Since it is easier to correct the drawing errors in a model which is not connected into one
spatial whole, it is recommended to check both the coincidence of all point and linear supports
in vertical sense and the distances between all structural elements on each of the created
levels by command Geometry Control (see Chapter 3.3.6) before generating the vertical
elements. If in a regime like this, the program detects that there are no drawing errors, you
may freely start generating the space model without any fear that you will late have problems
in generating the mesh of finite elements.
2.12
Commands for Operating with Frames (menu

Disposition)
As we have already said at the beginning of this manual, The Disposition window
serves for defining and presenting the position of vertical assemblies of the structure called
frames in the program. The position of each frame in the model is determined by a straight or
arc segment of a polygonal line, and by its name. When you right-click over the title of the
window Disposition, a drop-down menu, comprising commands for operating with frames,
opens.
Appearance of the drop-down menu for operating with frames

Drop-down menu with commands for working with frames can be opened with a left mouse
click on the arrows located on the right end of the window title "Disposition".
114
An arrow for the opening of the drop-down menu
2.12.1 Creating a New Frame (New)

By using the command New, you have the possibility to define a completely
arbitrary position of a new frame in the disposition plan of the building. When this command is
selected, you enter the procedure of defining a completely arbitrary polygonal line.
First Frame Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End>):
All explanations given in Chapter 2.6 for drawing an arbitrary polygonal line also apply here.
Since each of the frames in the model can be represented by only one segment of the
polygonal line (straight or arc), in case you define a polygonal line consisting of several
segments the program will create the same number of new frames. A name assigned by the
program, written in the middle of the line which represents the position of a frame in the
disposition plan of the building, will be joined to each of the created frames in accordance with
the following rules.
H_n V_n I_n C_n -
The name joined by the program to all frames whose position is determined by a
straight line in the direction of global X-axis (horizontal frames)
straight line in the direction of global Y-axis (vertical frames)
straight line whose direction coincides neither with the direction of global X-axis nor
with direction of global Y-axis (oblique frames)
The name joined by the program to all frames whose position is determined either by
a straight an arc or by a full circle (cylindrical frames)
Designation n in the name of each of the names assigned by the program represents the
serial number of the frame within the given group of vertical, horizontal, oblique or cylindrical
frames. Names assigned in this way can be changed subsequently which will be dealt with in
more detail in the next Chapter.
When determining the position of the frame in the plan of the building, the points can be
selected in all three windows and not only in the Disposition window. Furthermore, by
selecting the sub-option Contour you have the possibility to select the contour of any of the
already existing linear and surface entities in windows for 2D and 3D presentation of the
model. This means that the position of a new frame can be determined by drawing an arbitrary
space polygonal line, in such way that a vertical plane will be placed through each of the
115
segments of such polygonal line, and the intersection of that plane with the horizontal plane
will determine the line which determines the position of that frame in the plan of the building.
Since the vertical plane which passes through the frame is infinite, assigning several
unconnected but collinear frames (frames whose position is in the same direction in the plan of
the building), practically represents the same frame. The same also applies to arc frames
which are unconnected but belong to the same circle. They will have the same name, when
one of them is selected all others, which are in the same direction or belong to the same circle,
will automatically be selected, and the complete content of the whole frame will always be
presented in 2D View window.
The frame created consists of one segment
The frame created consists of two collinear

segments
The frame created consists of one arc

segment
The frame created consists of three arc

segments
In all previously presented cases only one frame is in question, disregarding whether its
position is determined by one or by several collinear segments.
2.12.2 Changing the frame name (Rename)

Using the command Rename enables you to subsequently change the program assigned names of created frames according to your specific request. Once you have selected
it, the command bar will obtain the following layout:
<0 sel.> Rename Frame - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups
/ Recent selection / Deselect / <End> / Style / reFresh indexes):
Because the special nature of this procedure requires selecting frame symbols, only window
Disposition will be available for working. In addition to the single selection, multiple selection
is also possible, where the assigned name is added to all selected frames. Once the selection
has been completed, the program will request from the command bar that you assign a new
name to the selected frame.
New Name: H_1
116
The displayed mark H_1 represents the old name of the selected frame or frames if they all
had the same name. If several frames with different names are selected, no marks will be
written on the command bar. The need for writing the old name of the frame stems from the
fact that it is frequently necessary to add a new mark to the already existing name which in
this way facilitates the process considerably. This command is circular, which means that
selecting frames and changing frames names will keep being performed as long as you mark
the end of the procedure by activating the sub-option End from the command bar.
Using the sub-option Style enables you to define the frame labeling style. Once you have
selected this sub-option from the command bar, a dialog box of the following layout will open
up:
The dialog box for defining the frame

labeling style - the layout
If the check box User defined prefixes is off, default names (H_n, V_n, K_n, C_n) will be
added to the frames. Once you have turned this check box on, edit boxes - in which you
personally can define prefixes for frame names will become available for entering. Next to
each edit box, the frame type to which the prefix refers to is written (Horizontal, Vertical,
Inclined and Cylindrical).
The check box Delete manually the assigned frame names is used for removing all
manually modified frame names and replacing them either with default names or names which
have been assigned in this dialog box. In other words, when this check box is on and the check
box User-defined prefixes is off, all manually modified frame names will be replaced with
default names. When this check box is on and the check box User-defined prefixes is also on,
all manually modified frame names will be replaced with names which have been assigned in
this dialog box. If the check box Delete manually the assigned frame names is off, changing
the labeling style in this dialog box will not affect manually assigned frame labels.
After such modifications which disturb the sequence of indexes in frame names (deleting
symbols, adding frames, changing frame names etc.), the program does not execute the
automatic indexation. If you want to perform index updating, you must select the sub-option
Refresh indexes from the command bar and, as a result, corresponding indexes will be
added to all frames depending on their position in the drawing.
117
Frame labels before index updating
Frame labels after index updating
2.12.3 Selecting the Current Frame

The current frame is simply changed if you click the mouse button over the line
which determines its position within the disposition plan of the building. The symbol of the line
which determines the position becomes clearly marked, and content of that frame is presented
in 2D View window.
The comment in continuation of the name of window 2D View: H_2

clearly indicates the current content of window 2D View
A marker , which changes its place when the current frame is changed, is also displayed
constantly in the Disposition window, thus clearly indicating the direction of viewing the
current frame.
When the window Disposition is focused, the current frame can also be changed by cursor
arrows. When the current frame is changed in this way, the frames are arranged so that first
the horizontal ones, next the vertical, followed by oblique and finally the cylindrical ones are
lined up.
Home
End
When
When
one
When
When
you press this cursor arrow the next immediate frame is set as the current one
you press this cursor arrow the previous immediate frame is set as the current
you press this key the first frame is set as the current one
you press this key the last frame is set as the current one
118
2.12.4 Local Coordinate System of a Frame

The local coordinate system of a frame is determined by its direction in the
disposition plan. The local X-axis is in the direction of the frame direction, local Y-axis is always
vertical (in direction of global Z-axis), while the direction of local Z-axis is in the direction of a
line perpendicular to the plane of the frame. Local origin of coordinates of the frame is always
in the position of the projection of the global origin of coordinates perpendicular to the
direction of the frame.
Local coordinate system of a frame

within the disposition of the building
Positive sense of the local X-axis is determined by the position of the frame within the
disposition and it is always in the sense of one of the global coordinate axes, depending on
which projection of the frame onto these axes is dominant, i.e. longer. In the limit case, when
the position of the frame in disposition is on the line of symmetry between the global
coordinate axes (45 angle), positive sense of global X-axis is then adopted as the positive
sense of local X-axis. Positive sense of local Y-axis is always in the sense of positive global
Z-axis, while the positive sense of local Z-axis is such that right-oriented local coordinate
system of the frame is always formed. Since in 2D View window the frame is always
presented in such way that the sense of its local X-axis is directed to right, and the positive
sense of local Y-axis upward, the direction of wieving each of the frames in the disposition of
the building is also determined singularly when its content is presented in 2D View window.
Presentation of positive senses of local X coordinates axes,

frames and direction of viewing them for all possible
positions within the disposition of the building
From the previously presented figure, in accordance with the rule of right-oriented local
coordinate system, it can be clearly seen that the positive sense of the local Z-axis of each of
the presented frames in 2D View window is always oriented toward us, i.e. it originates from
the screen toward the eye of the observer.
119
2.12.5 Cylindrical Frames

In case when a frame, whose position in the disposition is determined by an arc
segment, is set as the current frame, then its content is presented in developed form in
2D View window.
Developed form of the current cylindrical frame is

presented in 2D View window
Local X-axis of the cylindrical frame increases in anticlockwise sense, while the local Y-axis is
vertical, i.e. in the direction of global Z-axis. Local origin of coordinates of each cylindrical
frame is at the intersection of the circle to which the given arc frame belongs and the line
which originates from its centre in direction of positive global X-axis.
Local coordinate system of cylindrical frames

This means that the local X-axis is in the direction of the tangent, while the local Z-axis is in
the direction of the line perpendicular to the tangent of the circle in the given point. Since all
cylindrical frames in 2D View window are presented in developed form and are viewed from
outside toward its centre, the positive sense of local Z-axis is always directed toward us, i.e. it
originates from the screen toward the eye of the observer.
In contrast to simple frames, in which the region of drawing in 2D window is unlimited, the
region of drawing in cylindrical frames is limited by the size of full circle to which the given arc
frame belongs. For that reason, the boundaries of the full circle, i.e. boundaries from 0 to 2,
are clearly marked by vertical lines in 2D View window.
120
Each selected point in window 2D View, when a developed form of cylindrical frame is
presented in that window, will present a point on the cylindrical plane, disregarding whether it
has been assigned by a mouse click or by assigning the coordinates from the keyboard.
Clearly, when the coordinates are assigned from the keyboard the local coordinate system of
the cylindrical frame be valid. Therefore, when any straight line is drawn in the developed
cylindrical frame it will represent a curved line in space except if the given line is vertical, i.e.
in the direction of global Z-axis (only in that case a straight line will remain straight in the
space model also).
Since the left and right boundaries (boundaries 0 and 2) in the developed cylinder practically
represent one and the same generatrix of the cylinder, and the origin of coordinates of a
cylindrical frame is always clearly defined, drawing and presenting an entity whose geometry
intersects with the origin of coordinates could create problems. For that reason the boundaries
for drawing are widened by another 2, both in the directions of positive and negative local Xaxis of the cylindrical frame.
Total allowed region of drawing in direction of global X-axis

of a cylindrical frame ranges from 2 to +4
Thus, when an entity on a cylindrical frame is presented, the following rule applies: All entities
the overall boundary of which does not intersect with the origin of coordinates are drawn in
their exact position within the boundaries of full circle (region: 0 - 2); those entities the
overall boundary of which intersects with the origin of coordinates are always presented with
their majority within region 0 - 2, while their remaining part is presented in one of the
widened regions, depending on the position of the entity in regard to the origin of coordinates.
The smaller part of the wall is presented

in region from 2 to 4
The smaller part of the wall is presented

in region from -2 to 0
121
This means that the program always tries to place the larger part of overall size of each of the
entities, which are on a cylindrical frame within the basic region of drawing (boundary from 0
do 2). If there were no regions widened in this way, the entities, which intersect with the
origin of coordinates of a cylindrical frame, would have to be presented separately, although
they represent one whole.
Appearance of a wall intersected by origin of coordinates of a cylindrical

frame in case there are no widened regions for drawing
The following rules apply in the course of drawing in 2D View window when a developed form
of cylindrical frame is presented in that window:
Points can be selected only in regions planned for drawing, from -2 to +4.
Points are selected in widened regions for drawing (region from -2 to 0 and region from
2 to +4), also a point from the cylindrical surface of the given frame will be selected, and
the position of that point in horizontal sense will be determined by the value of local X
coordinate. Each selected point in the widened region can be replaced by a same point in
the basic region of drawing (region from 0 to +2). Points selected in the right region of
drawing have a local coordinate X increased by the value of circumference of the circle (2r)
in regard to the same point in the basic region of drawing. In the same way, selected points
in the left widened region of drawing have local X-coordinate decreased by the value of
circumference of the circle (2r) in regard to the same point in the basic region of drawing.
Since the program does not allow the larger part of overall size of the drawn entity to be in
the widened regions, After completed drawing the position of the overall size of the drawn
entity in regard to the origin of coordinates of the cylindrical frame is checked. If the larger
part of the overall size is in a widened area, the program corrects the assigned local X-axes
(either increases or decreases them by the value of circumference of the circle: 2r), in
order to place the larger part into the basic region of drawing (region from 0 to 2). Also,
in case that the whole overall size of the building is in one of the widened regions, the
program will move it into the basic region of drawing by correcting the local X coordinates.
Clearly, the position of the entity in space remains the same during all these
transformations.
Since the program supports drawing only the straight and arc segments of a polygonal line,
it is not permitted to draw arc segments of a polygonal line on developed cylinder (an arc
on a cylindrical surface cannot be represented by any curved line known in mathematics).
In that case, such segments will be deleted and will not be accepted by the program.
122
It is not permitted to draw lines that are longer than the circumference of the cylinder.
If you wish to draw a full circle by drawing a horizontal line from boundary 0 to 2, It will
automatically be divided into two arcs along the middle. Two arcs assigned in this way will
form a full circle in space.
When the developed form of cylindrical frame is presented in 2D View window, only global
Z-axes can be presented and established. Only these axes have sense in cylindrical frames
since they practically present horizontal planes established at certain elevations.
The content of a cylindrical frame can also be presented in 2D View window by command for
defining the arbitrary views (see Chapter 2.14.1). When you activate command Create
View, and select sub-option <Select> from the command bar, if you select any entity which
belongs to the cylindrical frame the developed form of the given cylindrical frame will be set in
2D View window. All previously presented rules for editing the cylindrical frames apply to this
case also.
Although a symbol of a cylindrical frame is not created in the disposition

plan, the content of the central cylindrical frame is set for current
view by command for defining the auxiliary views
Since cylindrical surfaces are practically described by a series of straight segments, the density
of the mesh by which the cylindrical surfaces are described may have a very important role for
accuracy of the geometry. For that reason, cylindrical frames can also be selected for editing
by command Edit Surface (see Chapter 3.1.12). Clearly, in this procedure only parameters,
which determine the density of the mesh by which the cylindrical surface is approximated, will
be available to be changed.
123
Changing the parameters nr and dH affects the density of

the mesh by which a cylindrical surface is approximated
2.12.6 Commands for Manipulating the Frames

Since the symbol of the frame in the disposition of the building is clearly separated
from the content of the given vertical, i.e. cylindrical plane, both vertical and cylindrical
assemblies, which are not presented by their symbol in the Disposition window, may exist in
the model. Frame symbols in the Disposition window practically serve only for easier coping
with the space model and for setting quickly the content of the current frame in Disposition
window. For that reason, there are two groups of commands for manipulating the frames
within the program.
The first group comprises those commands which effect both the entities belonging to the
frames and their symbols in the disposition: Delete, Copy, Mirror, Move, Rotate
and Array.
The second group of commands serves only for manipulating the frame symbols without any
effect on entities which belong to the given frame. This group comprises the following
commands: Trim Symbol, Extend Symbol and Delete Symbol.
Operating with these commands functions in exactly the same way as in corresponding
commands from the Modify menu, (see Chapter 2.9), except that in these commands, only
frame symbols in the Disposition window can be selected in the selecting procedure.
2.12.7 Generating the frames

By command Frame Generation, you have the possibility to automatically create
those frame symbols which will determine the position of vertical and cylindrical assemblies in
the plan of the building. When you select this command, a dialog box as the following one
opens.
124
The method of generating the frame symbols is selected by setting the appropriate switch onto
switched-on state. By selecting any of these two criteria, the frame symbols will always be
generated for vertical and cylindrical walls, while one of the following rules will be applied to
beams:
Beam-connected Columns in accordance with this criterion, a frame symbol will be
created for all vertical assemblies which contain at least two columns interconnected by a
beam.
All Beams in accordance with this criterion, a vertical plane is set through each of the
beams in the model, and the intersection of this plane with the horizontal determines the
position of the frame symbol in the disposition of the building. This means that, in
accordance with this criterion, each of the beams in the model will belong to one of the
generated frame symbols.
When you select the appropriate criterion and activate command field OK, the process of
generating the frame symbols begins. The program will not affect the existing symbols, but it
will create only new symbols in the Disposition window.
2.13
3D Graphic Control (menu 3D View)
When you right-click over the name of the window 3D View, a drop-down menu,
with commands that enable easier graphic control of entered data, opens.
Appearance of the drop-down menu for 3D graphic control

The drop-down menu for 3D graphics control can be opened by the left mouse click on
the arrows located on the right end of the window title "3D View".
All these commands are transparent ones, i.e. they can be activated even in when some other
commands are being executed. Before we start explaining the way these commands operate,
we will explain first what kind of presentations is planned in the program. The presentation
that is understood by itself is the isometric presentation, and walking with camera through the
inside of the building is also planned. When the dimensions of structural elements are in
question, wire presentation is planned (structural elements are presented only by simple lines)
and it is also possible to require the rendered view, i.e. presentation of true dimensions of
structural elements with transparency of their materials.
125
2.13.1 Rotation of Isometric Presentation (Orbit)

Since the Orbit command is only intended for rotation of isometric presentation,
it will not be available to be activated only if camera presentation is set instead of isometric
presentation. After choosing it, the pointer get the new look
which indicates that model
rotation will be performed both on a horizontal and on the vertical axis of the screen,
depending on the direction of mouse movement. Rotation of the model is done by pressing the
left mouse button, and then moving it in the desired direction without releasing the button.
The end of this transparent command will be denoted when you press the key Enter, or
right-click, and the newly selected position of the isometric presentation will remain on the
screen all until you change it either by selecting command Orbit again, or by selecting
command Default. Command Default is also contained in the drop-down menu of 3D
View window, and it always places the building into position for isometric presentation
planned by the program. Activating the key Esc will denote quitting from the executed
rotation in space of the building, and it will return the building into the position immediately
before command Orbit was activated.
2.13.2 Rendered View of the Model (Render)

Commands within the drop-down menu Render, operate as switches, i.e. only
one of the four options offered can be active. Existence of symbol before the name of one
of the options offered in the menu denotes which of then has been set to the switched-on
state. The following ways of presenting the structural elements and loads are planned by the
program:
Wireframe In this way of presenting, all entities are presented by thin lines, while surface
entities are presented only by their contour line.
Lite Render In this presentation also, all entities are presented by thin lines, but the
surfaces are coloured by a color defined for each type of surface element. This type of
presentation practically corresponds to full render except that the depths of structural
elements are ignored.
Full Render All structural elements are presented in their actual dimensions and by the
assigned transparency of material
Full Render set control colors here also, all structural elements are displayed in their
actual dimensions and by the assigned transparency of material, but this time, for their
viewing, it is possible to use colors which have been defined via the command Set Control
(see chapter 3.3.4).
Commands Lite Render, Full Render and Full Render set control colors have the same
effect on isometric presentation and on camera presentation, while the camera presentation
cannot be required from the program for wireframe presentation.
2.13.3 Camera View (Camera)

Command Camera also operates as a switch, i.e. it determines whether isometric
presentation or camera presentation will be displayed in 3D View window. It should be
mentioned that the camera view cannot be selected when Wireframe is set as the current
way of presentation.
126
Swiched-off state of command Camera

results in isometric presentation of the model
in 3D View window
Swiched-on state of command Camera

results in camera presentation of the model
in 3D View window
When the command Camera is set to switched-on state, the presentation is determined by
the position of the camera and the direction of its view. The initial state of the position of the
camera is assigned by the program, while the position of the camera can be changed by the
mouse and by pressing certain keys.
Moving forward -
Moving the mouse pointer upward while the left mouse button is
pressed and constantly held down results in moving the camera
translationally forward along the assigned direction. The same is
achieved if the key W is pressed.
Moving backward Moving the mouse pointer downward while the left mouse button is
translationally backward along the assigned direction. The same is
achieved if the key S is pressed.
Moving to the left Moving the mouse pointer to the right while the middle mouse button is
translationally to the left along the assigned direction. The same is
achieved if the key X is pressed.
Moving to the right Moving the mouse pointer to the left while the middle mouse button is
translationally to the right along the assigned direction. The same is
achieved if the key Z is pressed.
Moving upward Moving the mouse pointer downward while the middle mouse button is
translationally upward along the assigned direction. The same is
achieved if the key A is pressed.
Moving downward Moving the mouse pointer upward while the middle mouse button is
translationally downward along the assigned direction. The same is
achieved if the key Q is pressed.
Rotation to the left Moving the mouse pointer to the right while the right mouse button is
pressed and constantly held down results in rotation of the camera to
the left about its vertical axis.The same is achieved if the key P is
pressed.
Rotation to the right - Moving the mouse pointer to the left while the right mouse button is
pressed and constantly held down results in rotation of the camera to
the right about its vertical axis. The same is achieved if the key O is
pressed.
Rotation upward Moving the mouse pointer downward while the right mouse button is
pressed and constantly held down results in rotation of the camera
upward about its horizontal axis. The same is achieved if the key K is
pressed.
Rotation downward - Moving the mouse pointer upward while the right mouse button is
pressed and constantly held down results in rotation of the camera
127
downward about its horizontal axis. The same is achieved if the key I
is pressed.
The intensity of moving in the assigned direction is determined by the length of moving the
mouse, while in case keys are used the intensity is assigned by the program (initial value for
translatory motion is set to 1 m, while value=15 is adopted for rotation of the camera). If you
press keys + and - on the numerical part of the keyboard, you can increase or decrease
the movement step assigned by the program. If you press the key *, on the numerical part
of the keyboard, the movement steps will be reset to the initial value.
2.13.4 Changing the Position of the Camera (Camera

Position)
In addition to the previously described way to change the position and the view of
the camera, by walking through the building, by using command Camera Position you have
the possibility to quickly put the camera into the desired position.
Appearance of the dialog box for adjusting the camera position

In the central part of the dialog box, there are four windows in which the appearance of the
model is presented. The plan (disposition) of the model is presented in the bottom left window,
the front faade is presented in the top left window, while the left faade is presented in the
top right window. In these three windows the model is always presented in wireframe
presentation, and the camera position is determined in these windows. The view which
corresponds to the current camera position is presented in the bottom right window. The type
of view in this window may be either wireframe or rendered, depending on the state of the
check box Full Render. If this check box is set to the switched-on state, the wireframe view
will be replaced by rendered view in the bottom right window.
128
State of check box Full Render determines the type of

3D model presentation in the dialog box
In windows planned for presenting the model in projections (disposition, front and left
facades), there are arrows which determine the position of camera in space singularly. The
camera position is determined by the beginning of the arrow, and the sense of its look is
determined by the end of that arrow. In addition to position of the camera, its view width in
horizontal sense is also presented in the disposition plan. The arrow which determines the
position and the direction of the cameras view represents the line of symmetry of that angle.
A series of parameters which will effect the way of rendered view can be adjusted by a group
of edit boxes in the right part of the dialog box:
dx = Value of the movement step in translatory change of camera position when its position
is changed within 3D View window by keys defined by the program
xm= Maximal value of the movement step in translatory change of camera position when
its position is changed within 3D View window by mouse
d=
Value of the movement step in rotational change of camera position, when its position
is changed within 3D View window by keys defined by the program
m= Maximal value of the movement step in rotational change of camera position, when its
position is changed within 3D View window by mouse
d=
Value of view width in horizontal sense
The camera position is changed by moving its beginning. The moving procedure consists in
bringing the mouse pointer into the position to point at the beginning of the arrow in one of
the projections and pressing the left mouse button. While holding the mouse button down, the
mouse pointer should be brought into the desired position, and only then it should be released.
While moving the mouse pointer, the program constantly draws the arrow in DRAG mode, so
that its geometry corresponds to the current position of the mouse pointer. The direction of
camera view is changed in the same way, except that now the end of the arrow should be
selected with the mouse. It should be mentioned that the length of the arrow has no effect to
the view itself, since the end of the arrow only determines the view direction.
In addition to such way of changing the position and the direction of view, the program
enables the position of the arrow to be translationally changed by stretching the beginning and
the end of the arrow. In this procedure the mouse pointer should be brought to the point in the
middle of the arrow, the left mouse button should be pressed and without releasing it the
pointer should be brought into the desired position, and only then the left mouse button should
129
be released. In this procedure also the program constantly draws the arrow in DRAG mode, so
that its position always corresponds to the current position of the mouse pointer.
When the position of the camera is changed in one projection, this will automatically be
reflected in the other two projections. When the switch Full Drag is set to switched-on state,
you have the possibility not only to drag the arrow which determines the camera position by
moving the mouse pointer but also the current view by camera in 3D View window.
Since the model is drawn as large as possible in the projection windows to enable clear
presentation, you will not always be able to place the camera far enough from the building. For
this purpose, in these three windows, it is possible to apply one of the zooming ways planned
by the program:
CTRL+ left mouse button =
Zoom Window
CTRL+ middle mouse button = Zoom All
CTRL+ right mouse button=
Zoom Previous
Middle mouse button =
Pan
By activating command field OK the dialog box closes, and presentation which corresponds
to the defined camera view appears in 3D View window.
2.13.5 Orthogonal Projections of Isometric Presentation

In addition to possibility of rotation of the building in isometric presentation,
presentation of views defined by the program can be required from the program by the
following group of commands:
Front -
View from the front (in direction of positive global Y-axis)
Back -
View from the back (in direction of negative global Y-axis)
Left -
View from the left (in direction of positive global X-axis)
Right -
View from the right (in direction of negative global X-axis)
Top -
View from above (in direction of negative global Z-axis)
Bottom -
View from below (in direction of positive global Z-axis)
Default -
Isometric presentation of the building planned by the program
Commands fron this group operate as switches, i.e. only one of the previously listed views can
be currently active. Symbol in front of the name of command in the drop-down menu
indicates the currently active view.
130
Option Front in isometric presentation of the model

If the camera presentation is set instead of the isometric presentation as the current
presentation, by selecting one of the defined views the camera will be placed into the initial
position which corresponds to the given defined view. Furthermore, by the mouse or by the
keys defined by the program, you can move in desired direction from this initial position.
Option Front in camera presentation
2.13.6 Position of the current 2D view ("Current 2D view")

The command "Current 2D view" works as a switch - it can be turned on or off.
The existence of the symbol in front of its name in the menu that opens with the right
mouse click on the window title "3D view", indicates that it is set to ON state. In this case only
entities that are currently displayed in "2D view" are also drawn here, while all other model
elements are drawn as inactive. This way current "2D view" window elements visually standout
from the rest of the spatial model.
131
All entities that are not visible in "2D view" window are shown as inactive
in the "3D view" window, so that you can clearly see the position of the
middle longitudinal frames in comparison to other parts of the structure
This option helps to easily understand what current display in "2D view" window presents, or
where the group of entities is located in relation to other parts of the spatial model.
2.13.7 Current 2D View Only

Command Current 2D View Only also operates as a switch, i.e. it can be set to
switched-on and to switched-off state. Existence of symbol before the name of this
command in the menu denotes that it has been set to the switched-on state, and as a result,
only entities which belong to the current view in 2D View window are presented in 3D View
window.
Only entities which belong to the current longitudinal frame

are visible in 3D View window
It should be mentioned that setting this command onto the switched-on state automatically
excludes the command Current 2D View Only, and vice versa. This means that only one of
these two views can be activated at one moment.
132
2.14
Commands for Changing the Current

Presentation in 2D View Window
(menu 2D View)
We have seen in the previously presented part of the manual that either current
level or current frame may be set as the current view in 2D View window. However, since the
orientation of the program is to use planar drawing as much as possible in creating complex
space structures, the program comprises a whole system of commands for defining completely
arbitrary views. Commands from this group are contained in the menu which opens when you
right-click over the name of the window 2D View.
Appearance of 2D View drop-down menu

Drop-down menu with commands for working with current 2D view can be opened also
with left mouse click on the arrow located on the right end of the window title "2D view".
2.14.1 Create View

When this command is selected, the procedure of defining a completely arbitrary
plane of view is entered.
<0 point> First Surface Point (<Select>):
The program requires from the command bar the first point which defines the desired plane to
be selected, and if you select sub-option Select you can enter the procedure of defining the
plane of view by selecting the existing entities, which can determine the position of the given
plane.
<0 sel.> Surface - Select (<Select Point>):
If sub-option Select Point is selected, you will be returned to the initial form of the
command bar when selecting a point was required. This means that two ways of defining the
desired plane are planned by the program. The first one is by selecting three non-collinear
points, and the second one is by selecting the existing entities. Surely, these two ways can be
inter-combined, and the program will constantly require from the command bar a new point to
be selected, or the entities to be selected, all until the condition that the plane is singularly
determined is satisfied. In case you make such selection of points and entities that a plane, in
133
which all selected entities or points are contained, cannot be created, the program will issue a
corresponding warning.
When the program founds that a sufficient number of elements which define one plane has
been assigned, it will graphically present that plane, and from the command bar it will require
the name of the given view to be determined.
View Name <>:
On the basis of the displayed plane you can easily conclude whether it has been correctly
defined or not. In case you have made a mistake when selecting the points or entities and thus
defined the wrong plane, you can quit the command if you pres the key Esc. If the expected
plane is presented on the screen, then you have two possibilities. By assigning the name of the
view it will be saved in the base, and you will always be able to set it as the current view in
2D View window. However, if you do not wish to save the defined view in the base because
you need it for single-use only, if you press the key Enter, or if you right-click you have the
possibility to join to it the name defined by the program for temporary views: Noname. If
you define again the view plane which you do not wish to save in the base, the view previously
joined to name Noname will be destroyed. This means that with views saved in this way you
will be able to operate all until you either exit the program or define a new view with the same
name.
Disregarding whether you have assigned a name to the view or not, the command will be
completed, and the defined plane of view, i.e. all entities that belong to the given plane, will be
displayed in 2D View window. Either the name Noname assigned by the program or the
name by which you have saved the given view in the base will be written in continuation of the
name of the window 2D View.
View Noname in the plane of the front side of a double pitch roof is defined
It should be mentioned that curved surfaces could also be selected in the procedure of defining
the view plane. Selecting any entity which has an evoluator (see Chapter 3.1.10) will result
in developed presentation of all entities which belong to that same curved surface.
134
Selecting a spherical plate resulted in its developed

presentation in 2D View window
In addition, selecting any entity which belongs to a cylindrical frame will result in creating a
view which completely corresponds to the presentation which would be obtained in 2D view
window if the given cylindrical frame was set as the current one (see Chapter 2.12.3). In this
way the content of cylindrical frames can be obtained in 2D View window although their
symbol has not been created in the disposition of the building.
By selecting one of the entities which belong to the central

cylindrical frame, the view which completely corresponds to
the developed form of the given cylindrical frame is defined
2.14.2 Edit View

Creating compound views is now possible in the Tower program. Compound
view is a mixture of several levels and/or auxuliary views which are displayed sumultaneously
in 2D View window, with the top-down direction of viewing. For this reason, entities
belonging to auxuliary views are not displayed with its real geometry in compound view but
their projections onto a horizontal plane are displayed. Compound views are most frequently
used for viewing results when it is necessary to show simultaneously influences in several
mutually connected structural elements. For instance, a compound view may consist of several
inclined views comprising roof sides or assemblies comprising the staircase with landings.
135
Compound views are created via the command Edit view list. Once you have selected this
command, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for editing viewing list - the layout

All views which have been saved in the database are displayed in the list, as well as the
temporary Noname view if it has been previously defined.
Changing the name of a view is performed directly in the list by entering a new name in the
column Name. If the view Noname is renamed, it will be saved in the database under the
new name and it wil become equal to other views in the list.
Deleting the selected view from the database is performed by activating the command field
Delete.
Using the command fields
Up and
Down enables you to change the sequence of
defined views in the list. In other words, by activating one of these command fields, the
currently selected view is moved one place up or down in the list .
Once you have activated the command field New compound, a dialog box for creating
compound views will open up:
The dialog box for creating compound

views - the layout
136
In addition to the auxuliary views which are saved in the database, all placed levels are
displayed in the box. Clicking on the check boxes which are located in the column Select will
result in selecting views and levels which are going to comprise the compound view.
The placed symbols in the column Select

clearly indicate which auxuliary views and levels
are going to comprise the compound view
The program automatically writes the names of all selected views and levels in the edit box
View name, separating them by the symbol +. The name of a compound view created in
this way can be changed by entering a desired text in a given edit box.
Selecting the command field OK will result in returning to the command main dialog box in
which the name of the created compound view is now displayed.
The created compound view is displayed in the box

The image of the entire roof is placed in front of the compound views in the box so that
they differentiate clearly from auxuliary views in front of which is placed the image of one side
of the roof
.
When a compound view is selected in the box, the command field Edit becomes available
too. This command field enables customizing parameters of a given compound view and by
activating it, exactly the same dialog box opens as when creating a new compound view, which
is why it will not be explained here again.
137
display the view which has been selected in the box in the 2D View window.
The compound view of the roof is displayed in the 2D View window

Finally, it is important to remember that in compound views entering a point is not possible,
which is why they cannot be used for defining geometry of structural elements. The only
exception to the rule is the command Section which is located in the Post-Processing
module and for which entering points is allowed in compound views.
2.14.3 Selecting the Current Auxiliary View

Any of the previously defined views can be completely equally presented in 2D
View window, in accordance with exactly the same rules as when a current level or a current
frame is set as the current view in this window. Right-click over the name of the window 2D
View to open the drop-down menu and then activate command Custom View .
Opened list with names of defined views

A list with names of all previously defined views will open on the right side of this command, so
if you simply click the mouse button over the desired view you can obtain its content 2D
View window.
138
Auxiliary view Roof 1 is selected as current presentation

in 2D View window
2.14.4 View picking (Ctrl+W)

This command has been envisaged to facilitate the selection of the assembly to be
displayed in the 2D view window, primarily in the situations where assemblies frequently
change (for example, during controling the obtained results). Upon selecting it either from the
drop-down menu View or by pressing the Ctrl and W keys simultaneously, a dialog box
of the following layout will open up:
139
Dialog box for selecting views

A list of assemblies to be selected for viewing is displayed in the dialog box. Right-clicking on
the dialog box will result in opening a drop-down menu which is used for selecting a type of
assembly to be displayed in the list.
The drop-down menu for selecting

types of assemblies
Selecting an assembly is performed by mouse-clicking on its name in the list, soon after which
it is displayed in the 2D view window, much in the same way as if it was selected using one
of the standard commands for selecting assemblies.
The dialog box can be placed anywhere on the screen and it is also possible to change its
dimensions.
It is worth noting that a command can be activated also when the dialog box is active, that is,
viewing it on the screen would not affect operating with the program. Also, it should be added
that the command View picking is transparent, which means that it can be activated even
when another command has been activated.
140
2.14.5 Exporting assemblies to plane model (Export)

This command operates in exactly the same way as teh same-name command
which has been described in detail in chapter 2.11.6, which is why it will not be here
explained again.
2.14.6 Projections of Defined Views

When any of the defined views is set as the current view in 2D View window,
instead of usual presentation of the given view, it is possible to obtain its projection onto one
of the possible global planes of projection (commands: Front, Right and Top in dropdown menu of 2D View window). Depending on the plane which determines the given view, a
case may arise when some of these projections defined by the program make no sense. A
typical example is if we for any reason define for instance a view plane which is horizontal,
then none of its projections will make sense. Also, if we define as the view plane the vertical
plane whose perpendicular vector is in direction of global Y-axis for example, the projections
Top and Right will make no sense since nothing will be visible, while the option Front will
result in a projection which completely corresponds to the defined view. When command
Default is selected, the previously established projection is deleted and the presentation in
the plane of the defined view returns. All four commands: Front, Right, Top, and
Default, operate as switches, i.e. one of them is always set onto the switched-on state.
Symbol , placed before one of these commands clearly indicates which of the view
projections is currently active, i.e. displayed in 2D View window.
If any of the projections is displayed in the 2D view window, the program will write in
brackets, in the continuation of the window name, the projection name (Front), (Right) or
(Top), next to the name of the current view. It is worth mentioning that in course of saving the
database, the last used projection of the current view is also memorized.
It will be the best to explain the application of projections of defined views in an example of a
view defined in the plane of the pitch on the front side of a double pitch roof of the presented
hall. When this view is selected, it will be presented in a way that all distances between the
entities correspond to the actual lengths in that plane. If however we require projection from
above (option Top in drop-down menu) for such view, those distances will be reduced and
they will correspond to their projection on the horizontal plane.
Default presentation of defined view Roof1
Projection Top of defined view Roof1
The reduction in horizontal projection of the given view can be clearly seen from the distance
between the horizontal axes which are assigned in the direction of purlins.
141
2.14.7 Selecting the Points in Defined Views

If the points are selected by mouse in 2D View window when any of the defined
views is presented in that window, points belonging to the given inclined plane, disregarding
whether the default presentation of that view or any of the projections is in question, are
always selected. The only difference is in lengths which the selected points determine between
themselves. In default presentation those distances represent actual lengths of the elements,
while in the case of projected presentation they represent the projection of the distances onto
the given plane of view.
If the points are selected by assigning the coordinates, the local coordinate system of the
defined view applies. If default presentation is in question, local X and Y axes will belong to the
view plane, while if presentation projected to one of the global planes is in question, local X
and Y axes will belong to the given projection plane.
In case when the defined view is determined by selecting the entity which has the evoluator
(curved surfaces), selecting the points by mouse in a view defined in this way will always
select the points which belong to the curved surface, and the distances between points
selected in this way will represent the projection of their actual length onto the base plane of
the curved surface. The base plane and operating with curved surfaces in general will be dealt
with in more detail in Chapter 3.1.12.
2.14.8 Visibility of Designed Floor Structures

This option offered by the program has several applications. One of the basic ones
is when you desire to create the geometry of a new floor structure on the basis of the content
of any of the previously created floor structures or when you desire to check the horizontal
distance between entities which are on different levels (coincidence in vertical sense). Two
commands are planned for this purpose. One of them is used to define what is being projected
onto the currently active level (command: Levels Plan View), while the other is used to set
on or to set off the visibility of the projected entities in 2D View window (command: Levels
Visibility which operates as a switch). Both these commands will be available for activating
only if the content of the currently active level or auxiliary view with the option Top switched
on (projection on the horizontal plane) is displayed in 2D View window.
When command Levels Plan View is selected, a dialog box as the following one opens.
Appearance of the dialog box within command Levels Plan View

The appearance of this dialog box and the way of operating with it is very similar as in
command Replacement (see Chapter 2.11.5). It is necessary to select in this dialog box
one or more floor structures whose content will be presented simultaneously in 2D View
window, together with the content of the currently active level. The way the desired floor
structures are selected and deselected is exactly the same as in command Replacement, so it
142
will not be explained again here. Which of the entities from the selected levels is to be
projected onto the current level is determined by the state of the switches offered in the right
part of the dialog box. The program does not provide for projecting the complete content of
the selected floor structures, but only for projecting the following entities: plates, beams,
surface, linear and point supports. This means that those floor structures which are to be
projected onto the given current level, as well as structural elements which are to be projected
are selected in this dialog box.
After completed selection of desired floor structures and selection of entities which are to be
projected, if the command field OK is activated, the list of all selected floor structures will be
saved for the current level, while the state of the switches which determine what is to be
projected from the selected levels will apply to the whole model. This means that the list of
selected floor structures is saved for each current level separately, while the state of the
switches which determine what is to be projected applies universally to all levels in the model.
In addition, the visibility state of the given structural elements does not affect the choice of
what is to be projected. In other words, although a structural element is invisible, it will be
projected and presented in 2D View window at Users demand.
The content of the projected entities from selected floor structures will appear in 2D View
window only after command Levels Visibility has been activated and set to switched-on
state (This command operates as a switch). Existence of a symbol before its name in the
drop-down menu means that it is set to the switched-on state, and only then the entities
projected from all floor structures which have been selected to be projected onto the current
level appear in 2D View window.
Levels Visibility Off
Levels Visibility On
In the previously presented figure, when the switch Levels Visibility was set to switched-on
state, all projected entities from level 0.00, in addition to the content of the level 4.25, were
displayed in 2D View window, since only that level was selected previously to be projected to
level 4.25 by command Levels Plan View.
This means that by command Levels Plan View as the current level, a list of floor structures
whose selected structural elements are to be projected onto that level, is defined while the
switch Levels Visibility is used to determine whether the projected entities will or will not be
displayed in window 2D View. Therefore, in order that all projected entities from other floor
structures be displayed in 2D View window, it is not sufficient to select the floor structures,
which are to be projected on the current level, by command Levels Plan View, but it is also
necessary to set the switch Levels Visibility onto the switched-on state.
The so-called projected entities are presented by construction lines which cannot be selected
for manipulation (deleting, copying, etc.), but will be of great use for selecting points by
OSNAP criterion. The way the projected entities are presented (color, line type, etc.) is
determined for each of the projected structural elements in configuration of the program, by
command Settings (see Chapter 3.5.1).
143
Application of the Option for Projecting Floor Structures
As we have already said at the very beginning of this part of the manual, projecting the floor
structures has several applications, but one of the basic ones is when we desire to create the
content of a new floor structure on the basis of the content of a previously created one having
similar geometry. In that case, we shall set as the current level that level at which we desire to
create the new floor structure, and then, by command Levels Plan View, we shall select from
the list that level which contains the previously created similar floor structure. Clearly, in order
for the content of projected entities to appear in 2D View window, we have to set the switch
Levels Visibility to switched-on state. Now, we can easily utilise the geometry of projected
entities by using the OSNAP criterion.
On the basis of geometry of entities projected from previously created

floor structures on level 6.00, we can easily create necessary
geometry of the current level 3.00 by using OSNAP criterion
Projecting the content of other levels onto the current level will also have special application in
geometry control before generating vertical structural elements (see Chapter 2.11.7). In
case point and linear supports do not coincide in vertical sense, when they are replaced by
corresponding columns and walls respectively, this may result in a series of problems both in
the course of generating vertical entities and later in course of generating the mesh of finite
elements. For that reason, for any level it is necessary to select all remaining floor structures
in the model for projecting by command Levels Plan View and to set the switch Levels
Visibility to switched-on state. When such presentation is displayed in 2D View window, by
activating command Geometry Control the program will mark all distances smaller than the
assigned ones which will clearly evidence all undesired non-coinciding of the structural
elements in vertical sense. This will be explained in more detail in Chapter 3.3.6 Geometry
Control.
144
All other floor structures are projected to level 0.00 so when

command Geometry Control is activated, vertical coinciding
of all entities in the model will be checked
2.14.9 Showing the recent views

The command "Showing the recent views" works as a switch - it can be turned
on or off. The existence of the symbol "" in front of its name in the menu that opens with
right mouse click on the window title "2D view", indicates that it is set to ON state. Then, next
to the window title "2D view", the names are printed of all assemblies that were shown in 2D
window from the opening of the current file.
The names of all the components that were shown in 2D window

The main purpose of the view history is a quick selection of one of previously shown
assemblies for their re-displaying in the 2D window. Clicking the mouse on any name in the
view history activates the appropriate assembly and it becomes displayed in the 2D window.
145
3. ENTERING DATA
3.1
Structure
Commands classified in this group (drop-down menu Structure) serve for

entering the structural elements of the model. Since all these members influence the
subsequent calculations, sets of numerical data such as: plate thickness, material quality,
characteristics of beam cross-sections, support characteristics, etc., are also joined to the
drawn elements.
In order to simplify the drawing procedures, they are organised in such way that there are
practically only two ways for drawing the structural elements, one surface and linear elements
and the other for point elements. The procedure of drawing the surface and linear elements is
based on the procedure for drawing the arbitrary polygonal line, which is described in detail in
Chapter 2.6. The only difference is in that for surface elements the polygonal line has to be
closed while for the linear elements it may be either closed or opened. The procedure for
drawing point elements is completely independent and it is reduced to selecting the points (see
Chapter 2.5).
In defining the position of structural elements it should be borne in mind that in course of
calculations each surface element (plate) will be replaced by a mesh of finite elements which
geometrically belongs to the same plane as does the polygonal line which determines its
contour. In addition, each linear structural element (beam, linear support, etc.) will be
modelled by a linear finite element which geometrically exactly coincides with the position of
the polygonal line by which its contour is determined. This means that the mesh of finite
elements by which the mathematical model for calculating the structure is created does not
have its dimension in direction perpendicular to the direction of the mesh, and its rigidity is
described by sets of numerical data which are joined to structural elements.
A conclusion can be drawn from the previously presented that the polygonal line which
determines the geometry and the position of structural elements in space should be placed in
the centroid of cross-section of the given element. However, there is also another, much more
significant condition that if certain structural elements should act together, their meshes of
finite elements also have to be connected, i.e. they should have common nodes.
We shall clarify the previously said on a simple example of interaction between a plate and a
beam within it.
If in a case like this we were be guided by the rule to determine the geometry of both the plate
and the beam by drawing the polygonal line which is in their centroid, we would obtain a mesh
which is not connected, which is surely undesirable. Therefore, the geometry of surface
elements (plates) should be defined by a polygonal line their medial plane, and the position of
the beams not in their centroids but in the centroid of the plate in order to obtain a connected
mesh of finite elements.
146
Incorrect modelling
Correct modelling
Eccentric position of the beam centroid in regard to the line that determines its position in
space is defined by distance e in the set of numerical data.
We shall explain the correct way to determine the position of structural elements in another
example. Let us take as an example a rectangular plate with beams placed along its border
and supported by four corner columns.
For interaction of plates and beams, the previously presented rule that the geometry of beams
should be defined by a polygonal line in the medial plane of the plate also applies in this
example. This means that here we shall analyse only correct assigning of the position of
structural elements in horizontal sense. This means that we have assumed that the polygonal
lines which determine the position of the plate and the beams belong to the same plane.
Here a mistake would be made also if we were to determine the position of structural elements
by assigning a polygonal line in their centroid.
Incorrect modelling
In addition to the fact that the beams would not be supported by the columns directly, their
displaced position in relation to the contour of the plate would result in unnecessary large
number of finite elements. Generally, persisting in accuracy in drawing the geometry of a
model to the level of 10-20 cm practically does not make any sense, since such drawing would
require unnecessary large number of finite elements which would slow down both the
calculations and the subsequent data processing.
147
Correct modelling
As far as numerical data are concerned, they are assigned in the dialog boxes, while their
content and form depend on the type of structural element which is being assigned. The way
of operating with these dialog boxes is more or less the same for almost all structural elements
and here we shall present the basic rules that apply in operating with sets of data.
A set of numerical data is a serried of data which define the characteristics of a structural
element. Since in one model there may be several same structural elements with different
characteristics, defining several various sets of data is enabled. Each of these sets is
determined by its serial number from 1 to n, for a given type of structural element.
Each structural element has a reference to a certain serial number of sets of data, so that
subsequent change of numerical data within any of the sets of data will automatically reflect
in all structural elements having a reference to the given serial number of set of data.
Within all commands for placing the structural elements, the serial number of the current
set of data, i.e. of the set of data which will be joined to the structural element which is
being drawn, is written at the beginning of the command bar, in the parentheses.
When each command is called for the first time, there will be a sign <-> in angular
brackets, which indicates that none of the sets of numerical data for the given structural
element has been defined.
The current set of data can be changed in any moment of drawing the structural element by
activating the sub-option Set which is constantly present on the command bar.
If the procedure of drawing the structural elements is completed and none of the sets of
data have been defined so far (sign <-> is in the angular brackets), the program will
automatically open the dialog box for numerical data defining.
Sets of numerical data are determined by a serial number from 1 to n, and their data
are placed into lists within dialog boxes. The data on serial number of the set of data
(column Set) is in the first column of each list.
Data within one row in a list correspond to one set. The data in the list are simply replaced
if the mouse arrow pointer is placed in a position to point at the existing value and by a click
on the left mouse button. The selected field becomes marked, which indicates that the
program is ready to accept new values. If some sets of data also exist outside the list of
sets within a dialog box, they always correspond to the active set of data. An active set of
data is the row in the list box which is denoted by a special color.
You can change the active set of data if you click the mouse button over the arbitrary item
within a row in the list box which contains its data.
148
A black arrow on the left side of the dialog box indicates the set of data which was the
current one immediately before entering the dialog box for numerical data defining.
Command fields
Add and
Delete are provided for adding new sets of data, i.e. for
removing some of the existing ones. By activating command list,
Add a new set of data
is added to the list, with a serial number larger by one than the last set in the list
previously. Depending on the state of check box With Copy, two cases may occur. If this
check box is set to switched-off state, default data assigned by the program will be joined to
the newly added set of data, while if it is set to the switched-on state, data which
correspond to the previously active set of data (the set whose data in the list are
emphasised by a special color) will be joined to the newly added set of data. Surely, these
values may be corrected subsequently by the User.
Since the command
Delete is destructive, only those sets, which have not been joined
previously to any of the previously established structural elements in the model, can be
deleted. If a set of data that is not in the last place in the list is selected to be deleted, the
serial numbers of sets, which are after this set in the list, will be renumbered. Such
renumbering will not result in uncontrolled changes in the drawing, since the corresponding
elements of the drawing will obtain new serial numbers which correspond to characteristics of
previously joined sets of numerical data.
It is always possible to change the sequence of data in the list. The sequence is changed by
command fields
Up and
Down, and when they are activated, the currently active row
in the list moves one place up, or one place down, respectively. Such renumbering will not
result in uncontrolled changes in the drawing, since the corresponding elements of the drawing
will obtain new serial numbers of sets of numerical data.
When command field OK is activated, the correctness of data, which are joined to all sets
in the list, is first controlled and in case any of the data is not correct a warning is issued
and the exit from the dialog box is disabled. In case all data are correct, the dialog box
closes and the set which was active immediately before command field OK was activated
(the row in the list emphasised by a special color), is declared as the current set. Its serial
number is written in angular brackets at the beginning of the command bar, i.e. those data
will be joined to the element which is being drawn.
You can quit all actions performed in the dialog box by command Cancel.
Note:
The sequence of drawing the structural elements is completely arbitrary and depends
exclusively upon Users choice and his habits.
Note:
The principle of superposition does not apply to structural elements, i.e. in case when two
familiar elements overlap totally or partially, characteristics of the element that was the last
one to be drawn will be adopted. Here term familiar elements mean for example two plates,
two beams, etc.
149
Note:
If you draw linear structural elements by a polygonal line, which consists of several segments,
that means that exactly the same number of linear structural elements with the same set of
characteristics has been entered. In other words, a linear element, which has been drawn from
several segments, will not be treated as one but as several elements. The previous will be
confirmed if you set the switch Set to the switched-on state by command Visibility for a
given linear structural element. The same serial number of the set of data for the whole drawn
polygonal line will be written in the middle of each drawn segment. By same analogy, if you
desire to remove the whole linear structural element by command Delete, you have to select
all segments of the polygonal line by which the element has been drawn.
3.1.1
Slab/Wall
By selecting this icon, the procedure of defining a completely arbitrary plate/wall is
entered. The procedure for assigning the plates and the walls is the same, so
everything we say concerning the plates in this part of the manual also applies to
walls. After activating the command, the command bar obtains the following
appearance:
<-> Slab First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End> / Set):_
The content of the command bar clearly indicates that the User is expected to draw a
polygonal line which is to define a completely arbitrary contour of the plate/wall. The
procedure of drawing the polygonal line is explained in detail in Chapter 2.6, so it will not be
repeated here. Since the plates are surface elements, when the points are selected, care
should be taken that all selected points belong to the same plane, and that the drawn
segments of the polygonal line do not intersect. In the opposite case, the program will issue an
appropriate warning about the mistake.
By selecting sub-option Set a dialog box for selecting the set of characteristics to be joined
to the plate/wall opens.
150
Appearance of a dialog box for numerical

data on plates defining
Characteristics of a plate are defined by its depth (d), eccentricity (e), material quality and
type of design behavior. A whole, named a data set, is composed of all these data. The serial
number of a data set is presented in column Set, data on slab thickness in column d m,
data on distance between the top edge of the plate and the no-dimensional plane by which the
plate is represented in the model in column e m, and the name of material the
characteristics of which are joined to the given data set is presented in column Material. It
is possible to change only the data on plate thickness and its eccentric position in relation to
the medial plane of the plate.
Eccentric Position of Plates
Data e m does not influence the plate characteristics in course of calculations, but it only
serves for a better rendered view of the model and it will also have certain importance in
exporting the adopted reinforcement from Tower program to program ArmCAD for drawing
the reinforcement details. This means that disregarding the assigned value of the eccentric
position of the plate in regard to the plane which determines its position in space, the
calculation results will be the same, but the reinforcement exported to ArmCAD program will
be shaped differently depending on the exact position of the top and bottom edge of the plate
in relation to other structural elements.
The program adopts in default one half of the plate thickness as this data, which corresponds
to the plate being placed symmetrically in regard to the assigned medial plane.
Symmetric position of top and bottom edges of the plate

in regard to the assigned plane (e=d/2)
Maximal value which may be assigned for parameter e is the total thickness of the given
plate, so that the plane of centre of gravity must not be outside the overall dimensions of the
plane. Assigning the eccentric position of plates will have specific use in plates the thicknesses
of which are different and which are used in modelling the capitals.
151
Symmetric position (e1=d1/2;

e2=d2/2)
Top edge flush (e1=e2=d1/2)
Since the parameter value e represents the distance between the top edge of the plate and
the plane of centroid, and the top edge of the plate is directed to the positive sense of local
Z-axis, it is necessary to know the orientation of local coordinate system of plates in order to
assign it correctly.
Local Coordinate System of a Plate
Local X and Y-axes of each plate belong to that plate, while the local Z-axis is in direction of a
line perpendicular to the plane to which the plate belongs. Since a plate may have completely
arbitrary position in space, in order to simplify the perception of the local coordinate system of
plates, a convention has been introduced that it exactly corresponds to local coordinate system
for drawing in 2D View window. Therefore, if a current level is displayed in 2D View
window, the local coordinate system of plates which belong to the given level corresponds
exactly to the local coordinate system for selecting the points in 2D View window, when the
content of current level is presented in that window. The same analogy applies when a current
frame is presented in 2D View window, i.e. arbitrarily defined oblique view. In all these
cases, the local Z-axis is oriented toward the eye of the observer, i.e. the top edge of the plate
is closer to the observers eye.
Material Characteristics
Since the plates are surface elements that can be simultaneously stressed both to bending and
to plane stress state, the quality of material is described by assigning characteristics for both
stress states. In other words, the material can be defined in such way that it has certain
characteristics when it is subjected to bending and different characteristics when it is stressed
in its own plane. The material quality is described by assigning the following characteristics in
appropriate edit boxes:
Et Em m -
Youngs modulus of elasticity for stressing perpendicular to the plate plane

Poissons ratio for stressing perpendicular to the plate plane
Bulk density
coefficient of thermal expansion
Youngs modulus of elasticity for stressing in the plate plane
Poissons ratio for stressing in the plate plane
It is clear that for usual materials that are used in civil engineering such as concrete, steel,
their characteristics are the same both when the plates are stressed in direction perpendicular
to their plane and when they are stressed in their plane. This means that defining the material
characteristics in this way should only be comprehended as a possibility for some special types
of modelling the structure.
The procedure of joining the material characteristics to a certain set of data is carried out as
follows: click the mouse button on the arbitrary place in the list within the row containing the
set of data to which we desire to assign the material characteristics (that line should become
marked by a special color) and activate command field Material.
152
Appearance of the dialog box for material selecting

For better convenience and view of a large number of materials, data in this dialog is
organized in tabs. The first four tabs are reserved for standard types of materials: "Concrete",
"Steel", "Timber" and "Masonry". Tab "Other" is intended for adding a new material that
does not belong to any of these groups, while tab "All materials" shows all materials that are
currently stored in the database, regardless of their type.
In the presented list, data that define characteristics of one material correspond to one row.
The name of material is assigned in column Name, type of material to which it belongs in
column Type, while the characteristics that determine that material: E kN/m2, ,
kN/m3, t 1/C, Em kN/m2 and m are assigned in the remaining columns.
Units of measure in which the given values are assigned are written in parentheses in the
heading of each of these columns. The black arrow to the left of the list indicates the material
which was previously joined to the set for which we are now changing the material.
Any material can be either added to the list or removed from it by command fields
Add
and
Delete respectively, while the sequence of materials in the list is changed by
command fields
Up and
Down. Thus, the User can arrange the table of materials
according to his own desire which will be used by the program constantly during its operating.
It should be mentioned that the library of materials is universal for the entire program, and it
will be called also in course of defining the materials for other structural elements.
You can change any value in the table if you click the mouse button on that value and if you
assign the new value from the keyboard. Only the data in column Type, which determines to
which type does the given material belong, is an exception. This data is not set, but it depends
on a tab for adding new materials. Thus, for example, in the "Concrete" tab you can only add
materials of a type concrete. If the material is added in "All materials" tab, it will have the
same type as the material that was currently selected at the time of its inclusion.
Determining the type of material will only have its role in subsequent dimensioning of the
structural elements. Since the name of the material may be completely arbitrary, its character
can only be determined by the assigned type. This means that the given structural element will
be processed in the dimensioning procedure in accordance with the algorithms defined by the
program for the given type of materials depending only on the selected type of materials. If
the material does not belong to any provided type (Concrete, Steel, Timber, Masonry) it should
be added with its type set to "Other".
153
Command field Cancel is planned for quitting all previously performed changes in this dialog
box, and when you click the mouse button on command field OK this will result in removal of
this list from the screen, while the characteristics of the active material (the row indicated by a
special color) will be joined to the active set of data.
The name of the selected material is written in column Material,while

the type of the selected material is written above the edit boxes
in which the values taken over from the library are set
You can of course subsequently change the data taken over from the library of materials by
changing directly the value taken over in the appropriate edit box.
Multiple set selection and quick assignment of materials
In this dialog it is now possible to select multiple sets in order to assign the same material to
all of them. First, with the right mouse click on the cell in the column "Material" select the
desired material, and then with the left mouse clicks, select all sets to which you want to
assign the chosen material.
Material of set 5 is selected, and it will be assigned to sets 2, 4 and 6
154
The selected material is marked red, while the selected sets are marked green. To complete
the operation it is necessary to press the right mouse button once again, after which the
required material will be assigned to all selected sets.
Material of set 5 is assigned to sets 2, 4 and 6

The Way of Calculating
The program incorporates two types of plate elements that are used in calculations, i.e. the
program offers the possibility for executing the calculations in accordance with both the theory
of thin plates and theory of thick plates. The only difference between these two algorithms is in
that in accordance with the theory of thick plates the action of shearing forces in plates is
taken into account. Which theory will be applied depends on the state of radio buttons Thin
Slabs and Thick Slabs. It is recommended to calculate all walls and floor structures in
accordance with the theory of thin plates, while the foundation plates having significant
thickness should be calculated according to the theory of thick plates.
Orthotropic Plates
The previously described procedure of selecting the material applies to isotropic materials, i.e.
materials the elastic properties of which are the same in all directions (E=E1=E2; =1=2).
However, in practise you may need to model the orthotropic plates (special case of anisotropic
plates), i.e. plates that do not have same characteristics in two orthogonal directions. The
state of the switch Orthotropy, which is available to be changed only when theory of thin
plates is considered, regulates whether the given set of data defines isotropic or orthotropic
material.
155
In case when the switch Orthotropy is set to the switched-on state, it is possible to define
in edit boxes E2, G and additional parameters which, together with the previously
assigned parameters E and (now E=E1 and =1) fully determine the characteristics of
orthotropic material.
E
E2
G
Youngs modulus of elasticity for principal direction 1 (E1)

Poissons ratio for principal direction 1 (1)
Youngs modulus of elasticity for direction 2 (E2 E1)
Shearing modulus for orthotropic material
Angle between principal direction 1 and local X-axis of the plate
The value of Poissons ratio 2 is calculated by the program from the condition:
2*E1=1*E2.
It should be mentioned that the principal direction 1 means the stronger direction, i.e. the
direction in which the plate has larger load-bearing capacity.
On the basis of assigned parameters, the program calculates the elements of the matrix which
describes the elastic properties of orthotropic materials.
For isotropic materials, where E=E1=E2 and =1=2, the elements of the same matrix are
calculated according to the following scheme.
It should be mentioned as very significant that when shearing modulus G is being entered,
the formula applied for isotropic materials does not apply for orthotropic materials.
156
3.1.2
Hole
By selecting this command, the procedure for placing holes in surface structural
elements is entered. The command bar attains its standard form for defining an
arbitrary polygonal line which determines the contour of the hole:
Hole First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offest / <End>):

The procedure for drawing the contour of the hole is identical to that for other surface
structural elements. After closing the polygonal line, the program will make holes in all surface
elements that are visible at that moment. This will be explained in an example. If you have a
drawn plate subjected to surface load, in course of drawing the hole two cases may occur
depending on what is visible at that moment. If both the plate and the surface load are visible,
the placed hole will drill both surfaces. If for example you switch-off the visibility of the plate
before placing the hole, the hole will only drill the surface load that is visible, while the plate
maintains the same shape. Clearly this principle also applies to all other surface elements and
state of their visibility at the moment of placing the hole.
The placed holes represent regular surface elements that can be selected for deleting, copying,
moving, etc. If the holes are deleted, the parts of surface elements that were drilled to make
the hole will be returned. In case a hole is placed in such way that one part of it overlaps any
previously placed hole, the program makes a union of those two holes, i.e. a contour that
defines both holes.
You will not be able to select the hole by the command for manipulating the drawn entities
only in case when it is placed in such way that it intersects the contour of the surface element.
In such cases the hole is not treated as a regular surface element, but it only changes the
contour of the surface element over which it has been placed.
3.1.3
Boundary Conditions
In practice, there is quite often a need to set boundary conditions which affect
slabs and walls, along the assigned line. In this way, it is quite simple and easy to
model pinned joints of slabs and walls, fissures in slabs, dilatations, etc. Once you
have selected the command Boundary conditions which is located in the dropdown menu Structure, the command bar will obtain its standard layout for
drawing polyline.
Boundary conditions first point (Contour / Rectangle./ cIrcle / Offset / <End> / SlabWall /
Orthotropic Slabs):
Upon the completion of defining the geometry of polyline, by right-clicking you will mark the
selection of sub-option End and the dialog box for defining boundary conditions will appear
on the screen.
157
Layout of the dialog for defining

the boundary conditions
In the upper left part of the dialog displays the geometry of the drawn polyline, and the upper
right part displays the impact whose behavior can be defined. One column has impacts
corresponding to the left side, and the other has impacts that correspond to the right side of
the polyline. Since it is difficult to determine which is the left and which is the right side of a
polyline, green color marks the left, and red color marks the right side. Clicking the mouse on
the icon next to the name of each impact opens a menu with options for defining its behavior.
158
Total release of influence - Selecting this option completely removes the connection
that transfers this influence from one side of boundary condition to another.
Connection with partial loosening - Selecting this option partially reduces stiffness to
the connection that transmits that impact (stiffness degree of the connection is
expressed as a percentage - 100% corresponds to the total transfer of the impact and
0% corresponds to the total absence of connections). After selecting this option, the
button
becomes enabled. Its activation opens the dialog box of the following
appearance:
This is the place to assign the desired percentage of the stiffness connection reduction.
After entering the value in the edit box you can exit the dialog box by selecting the
button "OK". The default value of the connection stiffness degree is 50%.
Elasto-plastic connections - Selecting this option, the connection that transmits that
impact gets elastoplastic behavior, i.e. in one interval of the strain the connection is
elastic and when it crosses those borders, it becomes plastic. After selecting this option,
the button
appearance:
becomes enabled. Its activation opens the dialog box of the following
159
When you turn on checkboxes Elastic limit (>=0) and Elastic limit (<=0), edit
boxes, which are next to them, become available. Upper (positive) or lower (negative)
boundary value of the given impact are assigned in them. If the set values are exceeded,
the connection becomes plastic. "OK" button is unavailable until at least one plastification
boundary is defined. If only one plastification boundary is defined, the program will
behave as another boundary is infinite. If elastoplastic behavior is selected for some
impact, and you dont start the dialog for boundary defining, the program will behave as
the given connection is without releasing.
Both elastic limits are defined
Only upper elastic limit is defined
"Limit the element's average force" - Plastification of the connection occurs when
impact in one connection reaches the assigned boundary value. There are two ways of
modeling plastification. The first way is that the entire boundary condition becomes
plastic at once at the moment when the average value of force in the boundary condition
as a whole reaches the boundary assigned value. The second way of plastification is
when cancellation of connections in a boundary condition is done independently by each
node on the boundary condition when the value of the force at that point reaches the
boundary value. This way it is possible that only on one part of the line of the boundary
conditions becomes plastic. The default way is that plastification happens on the entire
boundary condition as a whole and then the checkbox "Limit the element's average force"
is enabled.
160
Elasto-plastic connection with partial loosening Selecting this option models
connections as a combination of elastoplastic connection and the partial impact relief.
Reducing the connection stiffness at the partial impact relief applies to the range of the
strain values in which plastification of connection has not already happened. Activating
the button
opens a dialog box in which all necessary data are defined.
Without releases Selecting this option means that the connection for the transmission
of that impact from one side to another side of the boundary condition is complete.
When you assign the desired behavior to one impact column, the preview image shows a
symbol on the appropriate side in the color of that column. The layout of a symbol depends on
the assigned behavioral impact. In this way it is easy to determine what is left and what is
right, and from which side of the boundary condition is impact behavior defined.
161
The placed small lines clearly indicate

on which side of polyline the selected
influence will be released
Each segment of the drawn polyline has its clearly defined local coordinate system, and the
offered impacts have the labels of the local axis.
Local coordinate system of the boundary conditions

Local axis "1" is always in the direction of an assigned segment of the polyline, local axis "3" is
perpendicular to the axis "1" and lies in the plane to which this particular segment of the
boundary conditions belongs, while the axis "2" in the direction of the normal to the flat of the
panel to which the drawn polyline segment belongs. Therefore, the offered impacts for the
release have the following meanings:
M1
M2
M3
T1
V2
N3
Bending moment around the local axis 1

Shearing force in the direction of the local axis 1
Shearing force in the direction of the local axis 2
Normal force in the direction of the local axis 3
162
Ways of selecting a certain type of influences and on which side influences should be released
can best be explained on the example of modeling pinned joint of slab and wall.
Pinned joint on the left of the wall
Pinned joint on the right of the wall
Pinned joint on both sides of the wall
Pinned joint with peripheral walls
In all the previously displayed pictures, only M1 influence has been released - on the side to
which small lines are directed.
The program envisages an option of placing line of fictitious joint in slab/wall. This is
performed by exiting the dialog box without a single influence released. The influences in
slab/wall which are located on different sides of this line of fictitious joint are not averaged,
which during processing results leads to obtaining a surge in influences in that particular place.
Line of fictitious joint is represented in the drawing by two parallel intermittent lines.
The check box Bypassing is used for assigning a bypass route for walls from different
directions. In the drawing, a bypass route is marked by small triangles which are distributed
evenly along the assigned line.
163
The displayed triangles indicate that

a bypass route has been assigned
At the geometric place of wall joint, there is no bond formed between walls of different
directions. However, there is an option of retaining bond between the wall in front of and the
wall behind the place of geometric joint. It is possible to adjust influence releases at the place
of the bond between the wall in front and the wall behind. For instance, if neither influence has
been released, a full continuity of wall in front and behind will be obtained. Similarly, if all
influences have been released, a complete separation of wall to a front part and a back part
will be obtained.
Bypass route for walls

The radio buttons and the combo box which are located in the central part of the dialog box
are used for defining the nature of the assigned boundary conditions. When the radio button
Unique boundary condition for static and seismic model is on, as the name clearly
164
suggests, the assigned boundary conditions are used during both structural and dynamic
analysis. Different parameters for each type of analysis can be defined when the radio button
Boundary condition with different properties for static and seismic model is on. The
next thing to do is select the option Properties for static model from the combo box and
assign parameters which will be applied during structural analysis and further select the option
Properties for seismic model from the box and assign parameters which will be applied
during dynamic analysis.
The contents of the combo box which

is used for defining the dual nature
of boundary conditions
Conditions in the starting and end point of each assigned line are defined in part of the dialog
box Conditions in nodes. There are three behaviors to be assigned:
- Auto - on the basis of the model geometry, the program defines whether the assigned
boundary conditions will be applied to a given apex.
- Apply - the assigned boundary conditions are applied to a given apex.
- Do not apply - the assigned boundary conditions are not applied to a given apex.
Each of the three behaviors is represented in the drawing by a special symbol:
165
The current state of all the parameters in the dialog box can be saved in the configuration
base. Button
opens the dialog of the following appearance:
Now it is necessary to enter the name of the configuration and exit the dialog box by activating
the button "OK". Selecting a saved configuration from a combobox allows it to be set as the
current one. By activating the button
current configuration is deleted from the database,
whereby appropriate notification is issued by the program:
After activating button "OK", program will close the dialog, and along the drawn polyline place
symbols that indicate selected behavior of the impacts on both sides of the polyline.
On the drawing, in the middle of each segment of the polyline, the types of impact and the
symbol are printed, indicating the assigned behavior. For example, the impact M1:
M1=0
Total relief of the Impact (elimination of connections)
M1=%
Partial relief of the impact
M1=<>
Elastoplastic connection
M1=<%>
Elastoplastic connections with partial release
166
Along the assigned lines of the boundary conditions the impact name is printed
with a symbol to indicate the assigned behavior
If the mouse pointer is positioned above the symbols of relief that are drawn along the line at
which the boundary conditions are set, while the command is active, the small window will
open that displays the name of all the impacts that have changed the behavior with the symbol
indicating the assigned behavior.
Total release of influence
Connection with partial loosening
Elasto-plastic connection
Elasto-plastic connection with partial

loosening
If selected behavior is applied only during static analysis, in front of the impact there will be a
title "ST", and if the default behavior is applied only during the dynamic analysis in the front of
the impact there will be a title "SE". In the case of setting the same behavior for both types of
calculation only impact titles will be displayed.
167
Selected behavior of the influence is applied

only during static analysis
Selected behavior of the influence is applied

only during dynamic analysis
Selected behavior of one influence is applied

during static and the second during dynamic
analysis
The same behavior of the impact is selected

during the static and dynamic analysis
It should be noted that this program option will be available only for moving the mouse inside
the 2D View window regardless of the fact which part of the structure is displayed in it.
In order to facilitate modeling the bond between slabs and walls, once you have activated the
command Boundary conditions, the sub-option for automatic modeling bond on the entire
model will appear on the command bar. In other words, by selecting the sub-option SlabWall, a dialog box of the following layout opens up:
The dialog box for placing automatically the bond

between slabs and walls - the layout
Turning on one of the offered switches enables selecting the bond between slabs and walls.
168
In slabs:
Pinned joint only with peripheral walls - at the joint between slabs and peripheral
(external) walls, the program will automatically place lines of boundary conditions with
released moment around local axis 1 (M1).
Pinned joint with all walls - at the joint between slabs and all walls, the program will
automatically place lines of boundary conditions with released moment around local axis 1
(M1).
Fictitious - at the joint with wall - at the joint between slabs and all walls, the program will
automatically place lines of fictitious joint.
On the walls:
Fictitious - at the joint with slab - at the joint between walls and all slabs, the program will
automatically place lines of fictitious joint.
Walls bypassing in seismic in joints of all walls, the program will place boundary
conditions which will break joints between two walls in seismic model, thus enabling their
independent moving. In static model, a fictitious boundary condition will be placed in these
joints.
The boundary conditions on the edges of masonry walls If this option is selected, the
program on the edges of masonry walls sets appropriate boundary conditions for their real
behavior under static and seismic calculation.
Automatically set boundary conditions on masonry walls
Pinned joint only with peripheral walls
Pinned joint with all walls
169
Fictitious - at the joint with wall
Fictitious - at the joint with slab
With large models, this option of automatic modeling can save a great deal of time and effort.
Once you have selected the sub-option Orthotropic Slabs, the command bar will obtain the
following layout:
<0 sel.> Boundary conditions for orthotropic Slabs Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section /
eXtras / selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End>):
Now you are required to select all those orthotropic slabs for which you want the program to
place automatically all necessary boundary conditions. Right-clicking will mark the end of the
procedure of selecting upon which the program will automatically place all the required
boundary conditions in all previously selected slabs and the command bar will obtain its
original layout within this command.
Automatically placed boundary conditions in all orthotropic slabs

Because the assigned orthotropic direction defines the direction of carrying given slab,
boundary conditions are placed according to the following rule: Slab sides which are to be
intersected by the assigned orthotropic direction transmit all influences except the bending
moment, whereas sides which are parallel to the the direction of carrying are released from
transmitting all influences.
170
A way of placing boundary conditions for orthotropic slabs

Note:
The polygonal line which defines the position at which the assigned boundary conditions act
has to clearly belong to only one plate or wall. For that reason, after defining the geometry of
that polygonal line has been completed, the program will check if the assigned polygonal line is
correct, and if not, an appropriate warning will be issued.
A typical example of incorrect polygonal line assigning is if you select from the command bar
several plates at various levels by sub-option Contour.
In case you place the line of boundary conditions at the connection of the plate and the wall
exactly, a dilemma remains whether it belongs to the plate or to the wall. In that case, the
program controls if one of these two entities is currently presented in 2D View window, and
if so, it joins the placed line of boundary conditions to that entity. However, if the line of
boundary conditions is drawn in window 3D View, at the connection of the plate and the wall
exactly, and neither of these elements is currently presented in2D View, then the program
requires from the command bar the plane to which it belongs to be determined.
<0 sel.> Select Plane - Select (Window / Polygon / Section / <End>):
Now it is necessary to select one of the entities at the connection of which the line of boundary
conditions is to be placed.
3.1.4
Beam
By selecting this icon, the procedure of assigning a beam is entered, and the
command bar obtains its standard form for drawing the polygonal line.
<-> Beam First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End> / Set):
171
When you open the sub-option Set, which is constantly present in the command bar, a
dialog box for defining the numerical data that are to be joined to the beam that is being
drawn opens.
Basic appearance of the dialog box for defining the beam sets
Each set of beams is described by the following parameters:
- Material quality (E, , , t)
- Geometrical characteristics of cross-sections (A1, A2, A3, I1, I2, I3)
Parameters that define the material quality have the same meaning as in plates. Here it is also
possible to activate command field Material to open a dialog box containing the table of
materials and to take over the characteristics that are offered for various materials.
Library of materials
It is clear that in calculating the beam elements, the data defined here: Em andm for
plane stress state will not be considered.
The geometry of a cross-section is determined by six geometrical characteristics which refer to
local coordinate system of the beam.
172
Local coordinate system of a beam

The line drawn in the figure which determines the position of the beam represents local axis
1 of the beam, local axis 2 is perpendicular to local axis 1 so that together they form a
vertical plane, while local axis 3 is in direction of a normal to the vertical plane formed by
local axes 1 and 2.
Disregarding the completely arbitrary position of the beam in

space, by taking the position to observe the beam in the direction
of its local axis 1, in sense from its beginning to its end, the
program will establish the beam local system in a way that its
position will always be as in this figure.
It is very important to know the position of the local coordinate system of each of the beams
assigned in the model, since the results of the calculations will always be presented by section
forces which act in the direction of local axes of each of the beams. It should be mentioned
here that the position of the local coordinate system could be changed (rotated) by command
Change L.C.S., which will be discussed in more detail in chapter 3.3.2..
Geometrical characteristics of beam cross-section have the following meanings:
A1 - Beam cross-section area that resists the force acting in direction local axis 1 (actual
cross-section area)
A2 - Beam cross-section area that resists the force acting in direction local axis 2 (shearing
area of section for direction of local axis 2)
A3 - Beam cross-section area that resists the force acting in direction local axis 3 (shearing
area of section for direction of local axis 3)
I1 - Moment of inertia of section that resists rotation about the local axis 1 of the beam
(torsional moment of inertia)
(moment of inertia for bending about local axis 2)
(moment of inertia for bending about local axis 3)
Non-linear members
In addition to the six previously described geometric characteristics, a data on the nature of
beam element is also included in the data set. In other words, the program will by default take
it that a beam element is stressed onto complex bending. However, it is also possible to define
a special type of beam element which can accept only axial tensile and pressure forces.
173
Right-clicking over the field in column P/T will result in opening a drop-down menu from
which it is possible to choose one of the offered options:
The drop-down menu which opens up after right-clicking over the field in column P/T
Ordinary beam an implicitly included beam element which is stressed onto complex
bending.
(P) Truss element nonlinear (withstand pressure only) truss member which can
accept only axial pressure force.
(T) Truss element nonlinear (withstand tension only) truss member which can
accept only axial tensile force (cables).
(P/T) Truss element truss member which can accept only axial tensile or pressure force.
Those beam elements which can accept both axial tensile and pressure force (P/T) should
always be used with truss types of structure, whereas beams which can accept either only
pressure force (P) or tensile force (T) should always be used in cases of modelling special
types of structures. The mere condition that some of the beam elements must not accept ither
pressure force or tensile force requires the iterative analysis, which can be time-consuming for
large models. This will be discussed in more detail later on, in the chapter which describes
different types of analyses.
174
Beam offset
Whether beams will be calculated with offset is defined for each particular beam set. This piece
of data is equally applied in structural and modal analysis.
Check boxes for defining offset for each particular beam set
By setting the check box O (Beam offset) to switched-on state, you have the possibility to
require from the program to model the beam-ends that enter other structural elements beams
and plates) with higher (realistic) rigidity. With this procedure, assigned characteristics are
joined to the beam in the part between intersection points with other structural elements
(clear span), while it obtains higher rigidity along the intersection line, depending on the
dimensions of the element with which it intersects. In such calculation method, the results are
presented only in clear spans of the beams.
Beam offset - OFF
Beam offset - ON
It should be mentioned that when calculating the clear spans, the eccentric position of
structural elements in relation to the system axis, if assigned, is also taken into account.
175
Approximate eccentricity
The way to calculate eccentrically placed beams is defined for each particular beam set. It is
possible to turn on the check boxes AE even for tapered beams.
The check boxes AE which are used for defining ways to calculate
eccentrically placed beams
The way the program behaves when the check boxes Approximate eccentricity are on or off
will be discussed in more detail later on in the text.
Shaping the Cross-sections
In order to avoid tough calculating of cross-section geometrical characteristics, the program
enables calculation of these values automatically for almost all shapes of cross-sections. When
command field Section is activated, a dialog box as the following one opens.
Appearance of a dialog box for shaping the cross-section of a beam
176
Before we start explaining how to operate with this dialog box, we shall mention that beside
the role of calculating the cross-section geometrical characteristics, it also plays a role to
define exactly all necessary data for dimensioning in module for processing the calculation
results.
Also, another thing worth noting is that, in addition to the types of cross-sections which are
most frequently used for concrete structures, it is also possible to define both single-part and
multi-part steel sections as well as to select and edit some of the previously created massive
and thin-wall cross sections (see chapter 3.1.7).
In the top left corner of this dialog box, there is a window which is used for selecting a type of
cross-section. Cross-sections types can be divided into two groups: those which are defined by
assigning their dimensions and those which are defined by selecting from the profile database,
i.e. by selecting from the massive and thin-wall cross sections database.
The first ten types (Rectangle, T-Section, I- Section, Trapezoidal, Triangle, Circular, Tube, Box,
Any Open and Unsymmetrical I - Section) belong to the first group of sections. To select any of
these sections, simply click the mouse button over its name and its image, with clearly marked
meanings of dimensions which should be assigned in edit boxes, will appear in the window to
the right of the list.
A T- Section, which is to be assigned by its dimensions, is selected

You can select the sections contained in the library of steel sections if you click the mouse
button on a small square where there is a sign + before the name Steel Sections. After
that, a classification on second level opens.
177
Opened list of steel sections

You have surely noticed that now, in the previously selected square, instead of sign +, sign
- , which indicates that the sub-classification is open (if you click the mouse button over the
square containing sign - , this will result in reverse action, i.e. the sub-classification will
close), appeared. In front of the newly opened sub-titles (I Sections, IPE Sections, ...),
there are also small squares which denote that these sub-titles also have their own sub-titles.
For example, if you click the mouse button on the square in front of the sub-title I Sections,
the third level of classification, containing all steel profiles for which there are data in the
library, opens.
Opened base I Sections

You can select the steel sections on the third level of classification if you simply click the
mouse button over their name to open the window to the right of this list, in which the shape
of the selected section with all necessary figured dimensions is presented.
178
One steel section from base I Sections is selected

Selecting the massive and thin-wall cross sections from the massive and thin-wall cross
sections database is performed in much the same way.
One massive cross section has been selected from the database
Using the command field
Edit enables you to change the parameters of the selected
massive or thin wall cross section from this dialog box, in much the same way as within the
command Database of massive and thin wall cross sections (see chapter 3.1.7).
179
Editing the Steel Section Library
The User can edit the steel section library which is delivered together with the program. When
the command field Steel Sections is activated, a dialog box for editing the steel section
base opens.
Appearance of a dialog box for editing the steel sections from the steel section library
Since the program enables existence of several section bases, the name of the currently active
base: Tower is written in the heading of this dialog box. To create a new section base, first
you have to create a copy of the existing base by command field
Save As.
Assign the new name of the base in edit box File name and activate command field Save.
When you return to the basic dialog box for editing the steel section base, perform all
necessary changes and you will obtain the desired content of the new base. A dialog box for
entering any of the previously created steel section bases opens by command field
Open.
180
In addition to databases that are created in Tower, now it is available for download also
database created in Metal Studio.
Merge - Button which can be used to merge two profile bases, that is, insertion of all profiles
from some database to the currently active. This button opens a dialog for the selection of a
profile database that will be merged with the current one.
In addition to databases that are created in Tower, connecting can be done with databases
created in Metal Studio. When a database is selected from the list, the button "Open" should
be pressed. A dialog for selecting the way for adding the profile to the current base will pop up.
For the families of profiles with the same name in both databases, we can select one of two
available methods:
Merge
By selecting this button, the profiles are added into the family with the
same name in the currently active database.
181
Rename
By selecting this button, the program will rename the profile family, which
has the same name as an existing family, and add it to the current
database.
The program will obey the assigned current base of steel sections in course of its operation,
and thus all steel sections from the assigned current base will be offered in the lists for
selecting the steel sections.
A list of all types of sections that exist in the currently active base
is presented in the left corner of the dialog box
When any of the sections is selected, a table with numerical data on all sections of the selected
type appears in the lower part of the dialog box.
For the selected type of sections, a corresponding table of sections

is presented in the lower part of the dialog box
182
In the presented table, characteristics of one of the profiles correspond to each of the rows. It
should be mentioned that these tables differ from each other depending on the type selected
for editing. Each section is determined by its sign and by a series of numerical data assigned in
corresponding columns. The sign of the data, followed by the unit measure in which that data
is expressed within brackets is written in the heading of each column. In order to make clearer
the meaning of the data which refer to the section dimensions, all values necessary for the
given section are schematically given by figured dimensions in the image in top right corner of
the dialog box. Since the number of numerical data that determine a steel section is
considerably large (all values necessary for dimensioning are also assigned), in the bottom
part of the list there is also a horizontal scroll bar which enables positioning to the right end of
the list. It is clear that all data in the tables can be changed. The meaning of the data which
refer to the dimensions is clear from the image, while the meaning of the following: A1, A2,
A3, I1, I2 and I3 is exactly the same as in main dialog box for defining the sets of beams. The
only difference is in L Sections and L Sections Cold-Formed, where it is necessary to assign
moments of inertia in relation to principal axes 1 and 2 (inclination of principal axes is
determined by angle , i.e. by data tg in the table) instead of moments of inertia in
relation to local axes 1 and 2.
Disregarding the fact that the libraries contain almost all types of sections, you can arrange
the section tables for each selected type from the table yourself according to your desire by a
group of command fields in the lower part of the dialog box.
Group of commands for editing the selected table of sections

You can add a new section to the table by command field
Add (the role of the check box
With Copy is exactly the same as in other dialog boxes). The newly added section will be
placed at the end of the list and now all corresponding data should be assigned for it in all
columns. You can remove an arbitrarily selected section from the library by command field
Delete, while you have the possibility to arrange the sequence of the sections in the table
according to your desire by command fields
Up and
Down.
In addition to the possibility to arrange a table for each type of sections from the list, the
program enables editing the list of section types by a group of command fields on the right
side of the list of section types.
183
Group of commands for editing the list of section types

When the command field
Add is selected, a dialog box for defining the names and types
of sections that are to be added to the section list opens.
The name of the group of sections can be assigned completely arbitrarily, on condition that it
does not exist already in the list, while the section type is selected from a closed list. In
accordance with the type selected from the list, each of the sections from the group will be
treated in accordance with the behavior assigned for it, both in course of drawing and in the
event that it is dimensioned in the module for calculation data processing. After selecting the
command field OK, the program returns to the basic dialog box for editing the base of
sections, while the newly added group of sections is placed at the end of the list.
184
A new group of sections is added at the end of the list

In case you set the check box With Copy to the switched-on state before activating the
command field
Add, this means that you wish to make a copy of the currently selected
group of sections under another name.
In this case you can only change the name of the group of sections while the type of sections
has already been determined.
The role of command fields
Delete,
Up and
Down is the same as in operating
with the section table except that now they refer to arranging the list of section types.
Rename - Pressing this button opens a dialog box where you can change the profile name of
the group that is selected from the list.
The new name is entered in the edit box "Section Group Name" Pressing the "OK" button,
the program returns to the main dialog box for editing a profile, in which the selected profile
group now displays with the new name.
When you have completed editing the base of sections, if you activate the command field
OK, the program will return you to the basic appearance of the dialog box for shaping the
185
cross-sections. In the list of sections, the program will obey that content of the section
database that is currently set as the active one.
Adding the Sections to the List
In the previous part of this manual, we have explained how to select the sections from the
section library, and how to define the sections for which their dimensions need to be defined.
In order to join any of these sections to the current set of data, it is necessary to assign their
dimensions in appropriate edit boxes and to activate command field
Add. After this
operation, the name of the selected section appears in the list in the bottom left corner of the
dialog box, and its appearance is presented in the figure in the bottom right part of the dialog
box.
A selected rectangular section b/d=20/40 cm is added into the list of sections

When the selected section is joined in this way to the current set of beam data, its centroid is
automatically placed into the origin of coordinates determined by intersection of local axes 2
and 3 of the given beam. However, by assigning the values in columns 3 (distance
between the centroid and the local origin of coordinates in the direction of local axis 3) and
2 (distance between the centroid and the local origin of coordinates in the direction of local
axis 2) the section can be translationally moved in regard to local origin of coordinates of the
beam. By assigning a value in column , the section can be rotated by an assigned angle
(positive sense of the angle is in anticlockwise sense). In addition to these two
transformations, by setting the check box Mirror onto the switched-on state (if you
consecutively click the mouse button on this column the symbol will alternatively be placed
or removed) we can obtain a mirror image of the selected section (copying is performed about
the local axis 2 of the section).
In case that a multi-part section needs to be defined, the previously described procedure
should be repeated as many times as is the number of individual elements contained in the
multi-part section. This means that the next section is selected in the top part of the dialog
box, and then the command field
Add is activated again. Since the centroid of the newly
added section is also placed in the local origin of coordinates, by assigning the corresponding
values in columns 3, 2, , and by setting the check box Mirror to the switched-on
state if necessary, you will place the section in the correct place. In the image in the lower
right part of the dialog box, the current section is always marked by red color (the current
section is that section the data of which are denoted by special color). The current section can
be removed from the list of sections by command field
Delete.
186
For usual shapes of multi-part sections consisting of and L sections, the program offers a
possibility to add them simultaneously to the list of sections. More exactly, when any section
which belongs either to group or to group L of sections by its type is selected from the
section base, additional possibilities are offered in the right part of the dialog box.
For selected section, the program also offers the option

of creating the multi-part section automatically
In default, the program sets the switch Single to switched-on state, which corresponds to
the previously described procedure of inserting the selected section individually into the list.
When any other switch among the ones offered is set to switched-on state, the selected shape
of the multi-part section with figured dimensions of the distances that determine their interposition appears in the image.
A combination of two sections is offered

By assigning the value in edit box a= and by activating the command field
sections will be thus added into the section list simultaneously.
Add, both
187
The selected multi-part section is added to the list of sections simultaneously

On the basis of the assigned distance between the sections, program determines the exact
position of the centroid in relation to the local origin of coordinates of the beam for each of the
added sections, in columns 3 and2.
All previously presented also applies when any of the sections that belong to the L group of
sections is selected from the base.
The program also offers the option for creating the multi-part
sections for selected L sections automatically
This means that the procedure is the same except that for the L sections the program offers
a much larger assortment of possible shapes of multi-part sections.
188
Changing Data on Sections Previously Inserted into the List
In case you have made a mistake in course of adding the sections to the list, the program will
enable you to correct it. The procedure of correcting the mistake is performed as follows: click
the mouse button over the section list to set the active section which needs to be corrected
(that row in the section list should become emphasised by a special color).
A section for which previously assigned data are to be changed

is selected in the list
After selecting, appearance of the selected section will appear in the image in the upper part of
the dialog box, while all previously assigned numerical values will appear in edit boxes to the
right of this image. New data should now be assigned in the edit boxes, and after that, the
geometry of the selected section will immediately be corrected.
Changed dimensions of section previously inserted into the list
189
Averaging the Sections
As we have already said, the position of the section in relation to the line that determines its
position in the drawing is regulated by assigning the values in columns 3 and 2. Since
these values represent the distance of the centroid of each of the sections inserted into the list
in relation to the local coordinate system of the beam, for certain shapes of cross-sections,
such calculations of the distance may be strenuous. For that reason, a special option for
determining the exact position of the cross-section, which is entered by command field
Alignment is planned by the program.
Appearance of the dialog box for averaging the sections

Namely, the basic idea is to determine the exact position of the section in relation to the local
coordinate system by assigning the distance to any of the points on the contour instead by
assigning the distance to the centroid.
This procedure functions so that first the known distance is assigned in edit box e=, and
next, one of the offered commands for averaging is activated:
Top
Bottom Left Right -
after this command is selected, the section will be moved in such way that its
top be placed at the assigned distance e from the local coordinate system of
the beam.
bottom be placed at the assigned distance e from the local coordinate system
of the beam.
left edge be placed at the assigned distance e from the local coordinate system
of the beam.
right edge be placed at the assigned distance e from the local coordinate
system of the beam.
As an example, let us take a beam in a plate. If the top edge of a rectangular section of a
beam b/d=20/40 should be flush with the top edge of the plate d=16 thick, then it is
necessary to assign half of the plate thickness (e=8) in the edit box e= and to activate
command field Top.
190
Distance e=8 is assigned and command field

Top is activated
In the drawing in the right part of the dialog box, the program always dimensions the distance
between the local coordinate system of the beam and all four overall points of the section, so
you can have a complete insight into the accuracy of the action performed. It should be
mentioned that the sections can be averaged in several steps, i.e. each activating of one of the
offered command fields for averaging does not cancel the previously assigned averaging.
Distance e=0 is assigned and command field

Left is activated
New assigned averaging in horizontal sense did not violate the previously assigned averaging
in vertical sense.
Command field Set at Centroid is used for cancelling the previously assigned averaging and
it sets the centroid of the section in default position, so that it coincides with the local
coordinate system of the beam. The currently assigned value in edit box e=, does not
influence activating of this command field.
191
Activating the command field Set at Centroid,

placed the section into default position
In case a multi-part section is selected for averaging, switch Whole Section will then also
be available.
Multi-part section is selected for averaging

The procedure of averaging the multi-part section is exactly the same as in single-part
sections, except that here the state of the switch Whole Section determines whether the
performed action of averaging will relate only to the current section (the current section is
denoted by red color in the drawing) or to the whole section. This means that if the switch
Whole Section is set to switched-on state, then the program will move all individual parts of
the multi-part section in order to satisfy the criteria assigned for averaging.
192
If the switch Whole Section is set to the switched-on state,

overall points of the whole multi-part section will be
dimensioned in the drawing
Using the edit box enables you to rotate the cross section by the assigned angle (the
positive direction of the angle increases in the counter-clockwise direction).
Edit box for cross-section rotation

This option is particularly applied when the multi-part section needs to be rotated for the
desired angle. In such cases, it is certainly necessary previously to set the Whole
Sectioncheck box on the switched-on state.
By assigning the 90, the whole section

is set into the desired position
193
After the procedure of averaging, both for single-part and multi-part sections, is completed, by
activating command field OK, this dialog box closes and the program will return you to the
basic appearance of the dialog box for defining the beam cross-section shape.
The program will accept all assigned data on averaging,

and it will set the values that correspond to required
averaging in columns 3 and 2
It should be mentioned that if the cross-section is placed eccentrically in relation to the local
axis of the beam, this would also influence the results of the calculations.
Joining the Defined Data on Cross-section to the Current Set of Data for Beams
When all necessary sections (in case of single-part sections the list contains only one row of
data) have been added to the list, it is then necessary to activate command field OK, after
which the dialog box for shaping the cross-sections will close, and the content of the basic
dialog box for defining the sets of beams will appear on the screen.
Rectangular shape of cross-section is joined to the current set of data
194
In addition, all calculated geometrical characteristics of the shaped section would be placed in
edit boxes A1, A2, A3, I1, I2 and I3. In case you subsequently accidentally change
from the keyboard any of these calculated values, the program will place a symbol * in the
top left corner of the figure, indicating that such intervention has been performed by the User
and that the assigned data to not correspond fully to the figure.
Symbol * in the figure indicates that the assigned torsional moment of inertia
does not correspond to the presented section
The program generates description for each particular beam set on the basis of the assigned
cross section geometry and displays it in the column Section. This description can be
modified at all times - by clicking on a given field and entering the desired text from the
keyboard.
A new cross section description has been assigned to the beam set
with ordinal number 2nd
The description of beam set is written in majority of textual reports and displaying it in the
drawing that is, in graphic blocks which are exported to project documentation, can also be
assigned. This way makes it possible to see which beam belongs to which set at every
moment.
195
Tapered Beams
The program also comprises the option of modelling the tapered beams. This option will be
available only for single-part cross-sections belonging to the group of sections that can be
defined by assigning their dimensions (rectangular, T-section, I-section, trapezoidal, circular,
pipe section, box section, open section and asymmetrical I-section). First, the basic shape of
the cross-section is selected by command Section, and next, command field Tapered is
activated.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the tapered beam

The basic appearance of the cross-section is schematically drawn in the upper left part of the
dialog box, and to the right of the former, section dimensions assigned in the dialog box for
shaping the cross-section are given. 3D image of the whole beam is presented in the right part
of the dialog box. Changing views is done by using icons that are in the toolbar located at the
edge of the drawing area. Specially defined views like these serve to enable easier perception
of the assigned change of the cross-section along the beam.
Selecting icon
turns on the view of the front side of the beam
196
The change of the cross-section dimensions along the beam is assigned from section to section
in characteristic points. You have the possibility to add an arbitrary number of intermediate
sections in which the dimensions are changed to the sections at the beginning and at the end
of the beam in the section list contained in the bottom left part of the dialog box, by command
field
Add.
List of characteristic sections along the beam

In column Section, the beginning and the end of the beam are denoted by letters S and
E respectively, and each newly added intermediate section is denoted by its serial number.
The position of an intermediate section is defined by a data in column dL, either by its
relative distance from the beginning of the beam, or by absolute distance in relation to the
previous section from the list. Method of defining the position of the section is determined by
the state of the switch "Relative" and "Absolute", located under the section list.
The state of switches Relative and Absolute determines the way

of defining the position of the intermediate sections
Shifting from one system of defining the section position to another will be available only if
none of the intermediate sections is inserted into the list. On the contrary, the program will
issue an appropriate warning.
197
By activating the command field OK, the program destroys the previously assigned data on
position and dimensions of the section and it sets the selected switch to the switched-on state.
In case that the position of the section is determined relatively in regard to the beam length,
its relative distance from the beginning of the beam will be written in column dL for each of
the sections. The data in this column must be then in an ascending sequence and they can be
changed only for intermediate sections, while the sections at the beginning and at the end of
the beam have a constant value 0 and 1 respectively. If however you choose to define the
position of the intermediate sections by absolute distances, the distance of the given section in
regard to the previous one (above) in the list is then assigned in column dL, in units written
in the heading of that list.
When the switch Absolute is set to switched-on state, the position

of intermediate sections is defined in units of length
Since the same beam set can be joined to beams having various lengths, at least one section
in the list has to be at an unknown distance from the previous section. The sign for the
unknown distance is sign ? written in column dL. Only one distance in the section list can
be unknown of course, since in the opposite case the position of the section cannot be
calculated for an arbitrary length of the beam to which this set of data is joined.
In the section list, one section is always currently active in each moment, and the data on
section dimensions in the edit box on the right side of the image refer to beam dimensions in
the given cross-section. The currently active cross-section is denoted in the list by a special
color, while in 3D drawing by a red line along the contour of the cross-section.
198
Cross-section 1, placed in the middle of the beam, is currently active

Therefore, the dimensions of a cross-section are changed by assigning new values for
characteristic sections to the dimensions that are being changed in corresponding edit boxes.
By assigning the value d=100 in the middle of the beam,

a tapered beam is shaped
Linear change of dimensions between two consecutive cross-sections is understood by the
program. However, if the switch Arched Taper is set to the switched-on state, you can
require from the program the change to comply with the curvilinear law.
199
By setting the switch Arched Taper to switched-on state,

curvilinear change of cross-section along the beam is defined
Since the arched change is defined by an arc through three points, this switch will be available
only in case if the change along the beam is defined in only three cross-sections. In all other
cases, arched change will not be possible.
Data in columns 3 and 2 in the section list, have the same meaning as in shaping the
beam cross-sections, except that here the determine the distance of the centroid of the given
cross-section in relation to local axis that determines the position of the beam in the model.
The role of command field Alignment is also the same, that is, it offers the possibility to
assign a known distance of one of the overall points, instead of distance of the centroid, in
relation to the local coordinate system of the beam.
Dialog box for averaging the tapered cross-section

If the switch Whole Section is set to switched-off state, the performed averaging action
applies only to the current section in the section list, but if it is set to switched-on state, all
sections along the beam will be shifted in such way as to satisfy the assigned averaging.
200
The top edge of all sections is assigned to be at a 10 cm distance

from the local coordinate system by averaging
By activating command field OK, values that correspond to the assigned averaging will be
set in columns 3 and 2 for all cross-sections in the list.
Top edge is averaged along the whole length of the beam

Above the 3D view of the entire beam, there is a command field Changing member
orientation.
201
The command field for changing member orientation

Once you activate this command field, the function of changing member orientation is rotated
and as a result what used to be at the beginnning is now at the end and vice versa. In this
way, the same effect is achieved as when each beam of a given set is rotated through 180
around its middle point in the plane where local axes 1 and 3 are located.
Changed member orientation

You have the possibility to rotate all sections in the list about local axis 1 by an assigned
angle in edit box =, while by switch Mirror you can mirror-copy them about the local axis
2.
By activating the command field OK the program will control the correctness of the assigned
data, and in case any mistakes were made it will issue an appropriate warning. In case the
data were correctly assigned, this dialog box will be closed and the basic appearance of the
dialog box for defining the sets of beams will appear on the screen.
202
Curvilinear change of cross-section is joined to the current set of beams

For a set of data defined in this way, comment Tapered will appear in column Section,
while instead of the appearance of the cross-section of the beam, its 3d image will be
presented in the right part of the dialog box.
Composite Cross-sections
Command field Composite will be available to be activated only in case a multi-part crosssection is defined as the current set of data. When this command field is selected, a dialog box
with the appearance as follows opens.
Dialog box for defining composite materials

The list in the left part of the dialog box contains the same number of rows, as is the number
of individual parts within the given multi-part cross-section. The name of the given crosssection is written in column Section, while the name of the material the characteristics of
which are joined to that cross-section is written in column Material. Characteristics for the
current cross-section in the list (the current cross-section is indicated in the list by a special
color, while it is clearly emphasised by red color in the drawing) are presented in edit boxes in
the right part of the dialog box. This means that it is necessary to select a cross-section in the
list, the material of which we desire to change (that row should become indicated by a special
color), and then to activate the command field Material. The procedure of selecting the
material from the library is the same as previously presented, and the only difference is in that
the characteristics of the selected material are joined to the current cross-section.
203
The presented multi-part cross-section represents a combination

of two steel sections and a concrete plate
Since in most cases in practice the system line that determines the position of the beam in
space needs to be placed into the centroid of the perfect cross-section, if you set the switch
Apply at centroid of virtual section to switched-on state, that will be performed
automatically by the program.
Treat as composite coupled material - This check box is available only if all sections have
the same material. When it is turned on, a multi segment section is treated as coupled.
After activating the command field OK, the program will return to the basic appearance of
the dialog box for defining the sets of beams, while comment Composite will be written for
the given set of data in column Material.
Multi-part cross-section consisting of composite materials

is joined to the current set of beams
Beam Nodes
If the drawn beam intersects any previously drawn beam, or the contour of some other
structural element, in course of calculating it will automatically be divided into two new beams,
i.e. an intermediate node will be inserted into the position of the point of intersection.
However, since constant search for points of intersection of the beam with other structural
elements would considerably slow down the program operating, the beginning and the end of
each beam in the drawing are determined by selection of points in the course of drawing the
beam. The beginning and the end of each beam will be clearly indicated in the drawing by
setting the switches Set and Nodes within command onto switched-on state Visibility.
204
Beginning and end of a beam

in a drawing
Beginning and end of a beam in course of

calculations
If you desire to have the same state in the drawing, as is the state in course of calculations,
you can easily achieve that by command Divide Contours (see Chapter 2.9.15). The need
to separate the contours may occur when you desire to select only one segment of the drawn
line between the points of intersection with other parts of the structure.
Since the lower chord was drawn by assigning points 1 and 2,

the whole lower chord is automatically selected
All previously said does not apply only to non-intersecting beams, i.e. those beams to which a
feature, that they are connected with other parts of the model only in the assigned end points
of each segment of the beam, has been assigned to the specific request by the User (this will
be discussed in more detail in Chapter 3.1.6).
Since the sets of tapered beams refer to arbitrary length of a beam determined by its start
point and by its end point, in case when tapered beam intersects with some other structural
element, the option of separating the contours may damage its assigned characteristics.
205
Appearance of a tapered beam before

separating the contours
Appearance of a tapered beam after

separating the contours
It should be mentioned that in course of calculating, the program will take into account the
tapered beams which obtain intermediate nodes at intersection with other structural elements.
In those cases the newly formed beams will attain such characteristics that they will fully
correspond to the desired appearance, i.e. they will be calculated with characteristics that
correspond to their rendered view on the screen.
A conclusion can be drawn from everything previously said that the option of separating the
contours should be used only cases when it is really necessary to select only one part of the
drawn beam between its points of intersection with other parts of the structure, or to assign an
intermediate node. In all other cases, it is better not to use this option since you will obtain
unnecessary large number of elements in the drawing which will only slow down the operation
of the program.
Local Coordinate System of Beams
By setting the switch Local Axes to switched-on state, within command Visibility, you have
the possibility to see in the middle of each of the assigned beams the orientation of its local
coordinate system.
Presentation of local coordinate system of a cantilever

column with abrupt change of cross-section
When selecting the beams for manipulation within commands from menu Modify, the
assigned transformation will relate to both the geometry of the beams and to their local
coordinate system. The only exceptions are commands Mirror and 3D Mirror, since axial or
planar copying of all three axes would not provide regular, right-oriented coordinate system in
the newly created beams. Since the position of the local axis 1 is always singularly
206
determined, obtaining the mirror image of one of the two remaining local axes is favoured in
these transformations, while the position of the third axis results from the only possible
position for obtaining the right-oriented local coordinate system.
When command Mirror is applied to the presented cantilever column, the newly created
column will not obtain the expected shape of mirror image concerning its abrupt change of
cross-section.
A mirror image of selected column with abrupt change of

cross-section cannot be obtained by axial copying
If you desire the abrupt change of cross section to be also assigned as a mirror image, you can
orient the local axis 2 of the right column inward by command Change L.C.S..
A mirror image concerning the shape of the abrupt change of cross-section

is obtained by changing subsequently the sense of local axis 2
You would obtain the same effect if you rotated the left column by 180 by command 3D
Rotation. Thus, the local axis of the newly created column would be oriented inward, which
would result in desired presentation of abrupt change of cross-section, as a mirror image.
207
Trussed Bars
During modelling truss structures, the option (P/T) Truss element is frequently used. This
option enables setting a given beam set as a truss member type.
An example of a truss modeled with trussed type of bars

Bending moments will be released at the ends of all trussed bars in course of calculations, so
that the value of bending moment diagram will always be equal to zero at their beginnings and
at their ends.
Diagram of bending moment M3 in trussed type bars

Local bending moment obtained along trussed bars result from selfweight that was assigned to
act simultaneously with assigned concentrated load.
The same effect would have been obtained if you had not declared the given set of beams to
be a trussed type of bar, but that you have instead subsequently released the bending
moment M3 on all ends of the beams by command Release (see Chapter 3.1.5).
208
Modelling of a trussed structure with beam elements

with pin joints placed at the ends
It is recommended that you always use the option of trussed bars, especially in space trusses
since the procedure is much simpler and more obvious than in the option of releasing the
moments at its ends.
Modelling the Beams within Plates (Girders)
The cross-section of a beam that interacts with a plate (girder) needs to be placed eccentrically
in regard to the line which determines its position in space. This means that is necessary to
make the top edge of the beam flush with top edge of the plate by option Alignment.
By assigning the value e=8 and by activating command field Top,

the top edge of the beam will become flush with
top edge of the plate d=16 cm thick
In addition, it is also necessary to decrease the calculated value of torsional moment of inertia
I1 to a sufficiently small value (1E-009) in order to avoid unrealistically large influences in
beams within the plate due to torques.
209
The program clearly indicates by symbol * that the assigned torsional moment
of inertia does not correspond to the assigned cross-section dimensions
By such modelling, the influences due to torsion in beams will be passed over to plate bending,
which is realistic behavior for such type of structures.
When the calculation itself of eccentrically placed beams is concerned, two possibilities are now
offered: either that they are actually placed eccentrically with respect to the line determining
their position in space or that they are included in the calculation as centrically placed
disregarding their assigned eccentric position within the finite element mesh. The state of the
switch Approx. eccentricity determines the method in which the eccentrically placed beams
will be calculated.
Switch Approx. eccentricity, used to determine the method of calculating

the eccentrically placed beams
If the check box Approx. eccentricity is set to switched-on state, the beam will then be
placed centrically with respect to the line determining its position in space, while its eccentric
position will be described by increasing the moment of inertia with respect to the axis for which
the cross-section centroid is placed centrically. In this way, the eccentric behavior of the beam
is approximately described, but the results obtained in this way will apply to the whole beam,
and thus they will be immediately available for the option of automatic beam design also. We
recommend this method of calculating the eccentrically placed beams since it provides
210
sufficient accuracy for usual cases in practice, and in addition, you can also directly apply
automatic beam and plate design.
If the check box Approx. eccentricity is set to switched-off state, then the beam will actually
be eccentrically placed, and the calculated influences in beam will correspond only to the
influence in the web of the corresponding T-section, which is formed by plate-beam
interaction. Namely, the exact effective width of the plate, which interacts with the assigned
eccentric beam, will be determined by the program itself on the basis of the rigidities of the
beam and the plates. In eccentric beams established in this way, normal compression/tension
forces in addition to bending moments will appear due to vertical loading. Since it is
understood in such calculation that, in course of plate design, the normal forces appearing in
them should be taken into account, or that the belonging influences from the plate are reduced
to the centroid of the substituting T-section, it is recommended only to advanced users for
more accurate analyses of beam-plate interaction.
All previously presented will be illustrated in an example of a simple model consisting of a
plate, wall and columns. The model is subjected to uniformly distributed load on the plate and
to concentrated forces at the ends of the cantilevers.
The cross-sections of the beams are defined by sets 1 and 2, where Set-1 is a beam centrically
placed with respect to the reference axis, while Set-2 is a beam eccentrically placed with
respect to the reference axis.
211
Positions of beam cross sections with respect to the plate

The beam the cross section of which is defined in Set-1 is defined in such way that its centroid
coincides with the reference axis, while the beam the cross section of which is defined in Set-2
is eccentrically placed with respect to the reference axis.
In the program, the influences in structural elements are found with respect to the centroid,
i.e. central line of the beam (marked by Cen.Lin. in the figure). Set-2 beam interacting with
the plate forms a T-section and in the conventional analysis it would have a considerably
greater moment of inertia compared to the Set-1beam, in which the plate is in the middle of
its height. Therefore, the deformations will not be identical in both beams, i.e. due to
realistically grater rigidity this beam will draw onto itself greater influences due to plate self
weight on the cantilever.
Static influences presented by the program in Set-2 beam are those influences that are
accepted by the web in the T-section, that is only a part of the total static influences accepted
by the whole T-section. Total influences in T-section beam can be determined by observing the
resultant of the influences in the web (determined as influences in Set-2 beam) and in the
plate (more exactly, in the interacting width of the plate).
The problem of adopting the Interacting plate width in T-sections was analysed in literature
and it is presented by empirical expressions by which this value is determined:
b= br + 20 d = 0.2 + 20 x 0.2 =4.2 m
b= br + 0.25 lo = br + 0.25 x ( 0.75 x 5 ) = 0.2 + 0.25 x 0.75 x 5 = 1.1375m
These values are obtained by analysis of plate stress results, and they are only approximate
values, while the possibilities of the Tower program are such that the same analysis can be
simply performed thus obtaining the exact values for the rigidity of the system.
The analysis of influences in T-section beam (consisting of Set-2 beam) and the part of the
plate will present static influences that depend on adopted interacting width b. The analysis
of interacting width can be performed on a concrete example.
Set- 2 beam and the interacting plate width
212
The stress diagram in Ny plate is presented in the figure. If the option Section is used to
select the end points at the beginning and at the end of the beam and by adopting the width
1,125 , by option Area, the value of equivalent normal force in the interacting width is
obtained.
Diagram of normal forces in Ny plate and of

the resulting influences along the assigned width section
Diagram of bending moments in My plate and of

the resulting influences along the assigned width section
213
Diagrams of normal force and bending moment in Set-2 beam

The resulting influences in T section beam, in the position where it is supported by the wall,
reduced to the plate axis will be as follows:
M= Ms + M2 + N2 x 0.3 = -34.68 250.23 + (-418.59 ) x 0.3 = 410.87 kNm
This moment is greater that the moment in Set-1 beam (that is only a rectangular section) and
due to the smaller rigidity its value is: -345.18 kNm.
However, due to absence of symmetry, these influences cannot be directly compared, but
instead only the total moment in the plate and in the beams at the edge above the wall, which
supports the cantilever, can be compared.
Let us compare the resultant of influences above the wall (it is found as the resultant of
influences due to moments and normal forced reduced to the middle of the plate):
The total moment above the wall should be:
Due to active load (two forces 200 kN each)
Due to self-weight of the elements:
Weight of beams in cantilevers:
Weight of plate:
Total:
200x2x2 =
800 kNm
2x2x0.8x0.2x25 =
5x0.2x2x25x1 =
16kNm
50 kNm
866kNm
From the Tower program the results are obtained with respect to the centroid (central) lines
presented in the figure:
214
The resulting influences from the program are reduced to central lines
Diagram of normal forces Ny and bending moments My in plate and the resulting influences
along the section (along the middle) and with 5m width (total area of the plate),
by option Area, the total normal force and bending moment in the plate is obtained
The values red from the Tower program are presented in the following table.
The red values of influences in beams and in plate are as follows:
M2
MP
M1
N2
NP
Influence
-250.23
-151.13
-345.18
-418.59
431.59
N1
-8.74
The resulting influences in the plane of the plate axis are as follows:
M = MP + M1 + M2 + N2 x 0.3 = ( -151.13 ) + ( -345.18 ) + ( - 250.23 ) + ( -418.59 ) x 0.3 =
-872.117 kNm
215
The negative sign is in accordance with the orientation of the moment vector in the figure, and
it shows that the moment is in the opposite sense than the one presented in the figure, i.e. it
tensions the upper chord.
Compared to theoretical value equal to 866, a relative error in the moment intensity equal to:
( 872.117 866 ) /866 = 0.00706 , i.e. 0.7%, is obtained.
In the previous example, we have shown that the Tower program offers the possibility of
analysing the interacting width, that the accuracy of the results is satisfactory (relative error
0.7%) but that the specificities of the system of a beam coupled with a plate must be taken
into account in the analysis of the results.
Way of Calculating the Eccentrically Placed Beams
The treatment of eccentrically placed beams with respect to the line determining their position
in space, will be explained in two simple examples.
Example of axially compressed cantilever column

with abrupt change of cross-section
The dimensions of the top part of the column are b/d=40/40cm and its centroid is on the line
that determines its position in space. The dimensions of the bottom part of the column are
b/d=80/40cm and it is positioned eccentrically so that its right edge is aligned with the edge of
the top part (e=80/2-40/2=20 cm is assigned). In calculating, the normal force remained
constant along the entire height of the column N1=10 KN, but a bending moment M2 = 10 x
0.2 = 2.0 kNm, resulting from its eccentric position, was obtained in its bottom part.
216
Diagram of bending moment M3

To be precise, since the influences are presented in the cross-section centroid, and the force
was assigned to act in direction of the line determining the position of the column, a
corresponding bending moment is obtained due to eccentric position of the bottom part of the
column and the compression force.
This effect will also be demonstrated on an example of a simple beam with two fixed supports.
An example of exccentrically positioned symple beam subject to bending

The beam has a constant cross-section b/d=20/40 cm, but it is positioned eccentrically in
regard to the line determining its position in space (e=10 cm is assigned). If the beam were
not eccentrically placed, the bending moment would be:
M3 = q x l2 / 8 = -8 x 102 / 8 = 100 kNm.
However, due to eccentric position of the beam, a constant tensile force acts along it, which
will result in raising the moment diagram in the centroid of the beam cross section.
217
Diagram of bending moment M3

The cause of such behavior is the fact that the centroid line of the beam is shifted eccentrically
in relation to assigned supports and line along which the load acts. In case that horizontal
displacement is not restrained in one of the supports, an effect like this would not appear,
since it would not be possible for the normal tensile force to appear in such model.
Positioning the beams eccentrically will have special application in modelling the beams within
a plate. In all other cases be cautious, and bare in mind that the calculation results are
presented in the centroids of the beams.
3.1.5
Releasing the Influences
Since rigid corners are always automatically assigned at the ends of the beams
when the latter are being drawn, arbitrary boundary conditions can be assigned at the ends of
previously drawn beams by command Release, within drop-down menu Structure. When
this command is selected, a dialog box appears on the screen, and the command bar obtains
the following appearance:
<0 sel.> Release Select (All / Window / <End>):
Now the User is expected to first select in the dialog box one or more influences to be
released, and then to indicate in the select box that part of the beam for which he desires to
change the influences at the end of the beam. Depending on the position at which the beam is
selected, the conditions determined by current state of the switches in the dialog box will be
assigned on the closer part of the beam.
In addition to such individual selecting of one of the ends of the beams, the program also
enables mass selecting of beams where both ends of all selected beams will be selected. The
procedure of mass selecting is performed in exactly the same way as in other commands (see
Chapter 2.8).
Six icons in the dialog box operate as switches, to be
precise, they may be set to either switched-on or to
switched-off state.
218
If you click the mouse consecutively over these icons, they will be set alternatively either to
switched-on or to switched-off state. Concave icon means that it is set to switched-on state,
i.e. the given influence will be released, while the convex icon means that it is set to switchedoff state. The icons have the following meaning:
M1 - Releasing the torque about local axis 1 of the beam
M2 - Releasing the bending moment about local axis2 of the beam
M3 - Releasing the bending moment about local axis 3 of the beam
N1 - Releasing the longitudinal force in direction of local axis 1 of the beam
V2 - Releasing the shearing force in direction of local axis 2 of the beam
T3 - Releasing the shearing force in direction of local axis 3 of the beam
In 3D View window, the program will denote all nodes that belong to the released ends of
the beams by a symbol of small circle, which will give only rough information that something
has been released in the given node. However, right information can be obtained in 2D View
for all released beam-ends. That is, depending on the selected influence to be released, a
corresponding symbol will be placed at the selected end of the beam. Since placing a special
symbol for each of the six possible influences to be released would result in overcrowded
content of the drawing, we have decided to pay special attention only to bending moments
M2 and M3. This means that only when released bending moments act in current view
plane of 2D View window, they will be denoted by a symbol of a small cross. All other
released influences, including bending moments which do not act in current view plane of 2D
View window, will always be denoted by the same symbol shaped as two mirror-copied
triangles.
The symbol of a circle is placed only in case when a moment acting in current view
plane of 2D View window is released at the given beam end.
The symbol of two triangles will be placed at all beam-ends in which at least one
influence, which does not correspond to the released bending moment in current view
plane, has been released.
Therefore, either only one of the two planned symbols, or both symbols at the same time, may
be placed at the end of the beam. Simultaneous existence of both symbols denotes that at the
given end of the beam both the bending moment in the current view plane and at least one
other influence.
219
Presentation of released influences on beam-ends

On the basis of the released symbols, it can be seen that at the top part of the column only
bending moment acting in the current view plane has been released, that in addition to the
bending moment in the current view plane some other influence has also been released at the
end of the first bar in the top chord, and that some other influence, other than bending
moment acting in the current view plane, has been released on the bottom end of the first
vertical web bar.
While the program is in course of executing the command Release, if you position the
mouse pointer at a released end of a beam, a small window, with written names of all released
influences, appears.
When the mouse pointer is positioned on the end of the first bar
in the top chord, it can clearly be seen that influences
M3 and V2 have been released at that end
Since the influences are released in relation to local beam axes, it will be useful in course of
releasing the influences to set the switch Local Axes on the switched-on state by command
Visibility, in the part of the dialog box where the type of beam visibility is regulated.
Everything previously presented will be explained in the best way on an example of releasing
the influences in the end left corner column, which belongs to both the horizontal and to the
vertical frame.
220
The marked corner column belongs both to longitudinal

and to transverse frame
Since the corner column is oriented in such way that its local axis 3 is perpendicular to the
plane of the transverse frame (in direction of global X-axis), releasing the bending moments
M3 at its top end means releasing the bending moment in the plane of the transverse frame.
The placed symbol of a circle clearly denotes

that the released bending moment M3 acts
in the plane of presented transverse frame
The placed symbol of a two triangles clearly

denotes that the released bending moment
M3 does not act in the plane of presented
transverse frame
If one node consists of several beams at all ends of which the bending moment in the current
view plane has been released, the program will place a symbol of a small circle in the node
itself that denotes a full hinge in the given node.
221
A symbol of a small circle in a node itself denotes that at the ends

of all beams that comprise that node the bending moment
in the current plane of view has been released
In case a mistake had been made, incorrectly released influence is cancelled by setting all
switches in the dialog box to switched-off state and by selecting the given beam end. Then
there will be no symbol at the selected end of the beam denoting that it is connected to the
remaining part of the structure by a rigid connection.
In case it is necessary to release any of the influences in a node that is within a beam, first it is
necessary to place an intermediate node, which will divide the given beam into two new
beams, at the desired position by command Divide Contours (see chapter 2.9.15). By
selecting one of the ends of the newly formed beams to be released, you have the possibility
to release the arbitrarily selected influence in the given node.
The option of separating the contours should be used also when it is necessary to release any
of the influences inside a beam element at intersection points with other parts of the model.
If the bottom chord beam is drawn by selecting points 1 and 2,

then it will be treated as one whole
Releasing the influences in the bottom chord beam at intersection points with diagonals and
verticals of the presented trussed structure will not be possible unless it is divided into a series
of small beams by command Divide Contours.
222
Defining the dual nature of releasing influences at the beam end one for structural and the
other for dynamic analysis - is now made possible within the Tower program. In the dialog
box within this command, there are two check boxes which are used for defining the nature of
releasing influences.
When the check box Static is only on, the assigned influence release will be applied only
during structural analysis whereas when the check box Seismic is only on, the assigned
influence release will be applied only during dynamic analysis. When both check boxes are on,
the assigned influence release will be applied during both structural and dynamic analyses.
The symbols, by which the assigned influence releases are represented, can be drawn in
different colors and different line thickness for dual (different influences have been released for
structural and dynamic analysis) and standard (the same influences have been released for
structural and dynamic analysis) influence release. These customizations are defined via the
command Settings.
The symbols of dual influence releases are represented by red color whereas
symbols of standard influence releases are represented by black color
Once you have led the mouse pointer into a position where it points to a released beam end, a
small window will appear in which the names of all released influences are written.
223
Only static influences have been released
Only seismic influences have been released
Both static and seismic influences have been

released
In Tower, in addition to the complete release, boundary conditions at the ends of beams can
be assigned a partial relief of impact and elastoplastic behavior with assigment of the
plastification boundaries.
By activating the button "Advanced type of release" a new dialog opens of the following
appearance:
On the left side of the dialogue, the impact whose behavior can be defined is displayed.
Clicking the icon next to each of them opens a list of options that define their behavior.
224
The meaning of each of the listed items is the same as in the definition of the boundary
conditions in the panel (Section 3.1.2).
Radio button and a combo box located on the right part of the dialog box are used to define
the nature of the assigned boundary conditions. When the radio button is set to "Unique
boundary condition for static and seismic model", as seen from the name, specify
boundary conditions are used in the static and the dynamic analysis. Various parameters for
each type of calculation can be defined when the radio button set to "Boundary condition
with different properties for static and seismic model" Then from the combo box first
choose "Properties for static model", select parameters that are going to be used in static
analysis, and then select "Properties for seismic model" and define the parameters that are
going to be used in dynamic analysis.
Combo box, which is located in the lower right of the dialog box, is used for selection of some
previously saved configurations with defined impact relief. New configuration cannot be saved
in this dialogue, but only in a dialogue of the command for impact relief editing.
Besides the symbol of relieved impact, the drawing displays the symbols that indicate the
assigned behavior of a given impact.
Total release of influence
Connection with partial loosening
225
Elasto-plastic connection
Elasto-plastic connection with partial

loosening
The same symbols will be displayed next to the name of the impact, in the window that
appears when the mouse pointer is positioned over the relieved end of the beam while the
command "Release" is active.
Note:
In case trussed structures are modelled, there is no need to use the command for releasing
the influences, since it is much easier to set the switch P/T onto switched-on state in the set
of data for the given beam. In this way, you will define considerably faster the trussed type of
beam that can only be subjected to axial load.
3.1.6
Editing of influence releases
By using the command "Editing of influence releases", which is located in the

drop-down menu "Structure", the boundary conditions assigned to ends of beams can be
changed. By selecting this command, command line gets the following form:
<0 sel.> Editing of influence releases - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras /
selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End>):
It is now necessary to select the beam whose boundary conditions are to be edited. After that
a dialog box will be displayed:
226
On the picture in the dialogue, the green point marks the beginning, while the red point marks
the end of the selected beam. To the right of this picture, there are two columns of impact data
which can be edited. For easier orientation, the column with the impact that corresponds to the
beginning of the beam is marked in green, while the column with the impact that corresponds
to the end of the beam is marked in red.
Selecting the data in this dialog box is the same as in the dialogue for defining the boundary
conditions of a panel (Section 3.1.3).
Assigned relief configuration can be saved in this dialog also. They can be used in this, and in
the dialog of "Relief of the impact" command as well as.
3.1.7
Bypassing Beams
As we have already said in 3.1.4, if the drawn beam intersects any other
previously drawn beam, or a contour of any structural element, in course of calculating it will
automatically be divided into two new beams, i.e. an intermediate node will be inserted at the
position of point of intersection. Since cases may occur in practice when it is needed that a
beam be connected with other structural elements, only at its beginning and at its end,
command Bypassing is planned for this purpose. By activating this command, the standard
procedure for selecting is entered.
<0 sel.> Bypassing Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Now the User is expected to select all beams to which the characteristic that they are
bypassing, i.e. that they are connected to the remaining part of the structure only in their start
points and their end points, needs to be joined. If you select the sub-option End, or if you
right-click, the end of the selecting procedure will be denoted and the following content will
appear on the command bar.
Bypassing Beams (<Yes> / No):
By selecting the sub-option Yes, all selected beams will be declared to be bypassing, while
sub-option No serves for cancelling the previously joined characteristic of bypassing to the
227
selected beams. In both cases, the command will be completed and all bypassing beams in the
drawing will be clearly emphasised.
The bypassing beams are most commonly used in steel trussed structures when the diagonals
bypass in space.
Bypassing beams are clearly emphasized by a broken line
3.1.8
Database of massive and thin-wall cross sections
The Tower program makes it possible to define cross sections af an arbitrary

geometry. Two family groups of cross section have been envisaged by the program: massive
and thin-wall. Both family groups of cross section can be used in beam elements but the main
use of thin-wall sections is for generating girders via the command Generate thin-wall section
girder which will be explained later.
The geometry of both massive and thin-wall cross sections is defined by drawing. Massive
cross sections are drawn using one of the commands for creating area entities (Slab, Area
support) whereas thin-wall cross sections are drawn using one of the commands for creating
linear entities (Beam, Linear support).
The geometry of massive cross section has been assigned

via the command Slab, whereas the geometry of thin-wall
cross section has been assigned using the command Beam
228
In order to be able to use thus created cross section, it is necessary to insert it into the
database of massive and thin-wall cross sections.
By activating the command Database of massive and thin-wall cross
sections which is located in the drop-down menu Structure, a dialog box of the
following layout opens up:
The dialog box Database of massive and thin-wall

cross sections - the layout
All massive cross sections which are currently stored in the database are displayed in the
central part of the dialog box, whereas commands which are used for working with them are
located in the right part of the dialog box.
Left and
Right enables you to change the position of
the selected cross section in the database, by moving to the left that is, to the right.
Add enables you to insert a new cross section in the database.
This is performed in the following way: once you have activated the command, taking directly
from the drawing will be possible and the program will request from the command bar that you
select a cross section.
<0 sel.> Area entity Select (<End>):
The selected cross section is inserted in the database in the first available position.
229
A new cross section has been inserted in the database

via the command field
Add
Once you have selected the command field
Copy , the program will insert a new cross
section in the cross section database by copying the geometry of the currently selected cross
section.
Either by double-clicking on a cross section or by activating the command field
Edit , the
program will open a dialog box for defining the added parameters of the currently selected
cross section.
The dialog box for defining parameters of the massive

cross section - the layout
The geometry of the currently selected cross section is displayed in the left part of the dialog
box. The program places a net of horizontal and vertical lines and labels their mutual spacing
in all refraction points of the cross section. Upon clicking on any of these lengths, it becomes
selected (marked by red color) and its value is displayed in the edit box Segment length.
Assigning a new value in the edit box enables you to change any selected length.
230
The edit box for changing the selected field length

Using the edit box Name enables you to assign an arbitrary name to the selected cross
section. In course of creating a beam set from a given cross section, the assigned name will be
written as its description. If the name has not been assigned, the text Massive will be
written.
The program also envisages the possibility of designing concrete beams which have been
created from the massive cross section. Since the geometry of cross section can be completely
arbitrary, it is necessary to define the reinforcement which is placed along each cross section
contour segment. The selected contour segment is marked by red color and its parameters are
displayed in the part of the dialog box Reinforcement at contour. In order to facilitate the
process of assigning parameters, the program adds a number to each contour segment. For
the current contour segment, this number is written together with the total number of
segments.
Ordinal number of the current contour segment

Reinforcement Aa1, Aa2, Aa3 or Aa4 can be added to the current segment by selecting from
the combo box whereas using the option No reinforcement enables you to define placing no
reinforcement along the current segment. Using the check boxes Bar belongs to the
segment beggining and Bar belongs to the segment ending enables you to define
whether boundary bars belong to the current segment or its adjoining segments. It should be
noted that, the counter-clockwise direction has been adopted as the segment direction.
Activating the command field OK will mean the acceptance of all the changes which have
been assigned and the program will return to the command main dialog box.
231

Delete , the currently selected cross section is removed
from the database, whereas using the command fields
and
, will result in changing
the current page that is, scrolling up or down, in case that it is not possible to display
simultaneously all cross sections.
Radio buttons Massive cross sections and Thin wall cross sections are used for defining
the family group of cross section which is currently displayed.
Radio buttons for selecting the family group of cross section

which is currently displayed
All the commands in this dialog box operate in much the same way for thin-wall cross sections
too. The only difference is that during editing thin-wall cross sections a slightly different dialog
box will open up:
The dialog box for defining the parameters of thin-wall

cross section - the layout
The edit box Thickness is used for assigning the current segment thickness, whereas the
thickness of all segments can be assigned in the edit box Thickness for all segments.
Other parameters have the same meaning as in massive cross section.
232
It should be noted that, designing beams which have been created from thin-wall cross
sections is not possible but this is not their chief purpose either.
All massive and thin-wall cross sections which are stored in the database will be available for
selection in the dialog box for defining the beam cross section.
Selecting massive and thin-wall cross sections from the combo box
Edit enables you to change the parameters of the selected
massive or thin-wall cross section from this dialog box.
3.1.9
Generate thin-wall section girder

Using this command enables you to generate an entire girder, either straight-lined
or arc one, from the selected thin-wall cross section, when the program creates a
slab of suitable geometry from each segment of a given cross section. Once you
have activated the command, the program will request from the command bar
that you enter the first point of the girder axis:
First point of axis:

Once you have assigned the axis first point, the command bar will obtain the following layout:
Second Point (Arc):
Now you are expected either to assign the second point of the girder axis or select the suboption Arc which marks the beginning of the procedure of defining the arc line.
Regardless of the fact whether you have assigned a straight line or arc line, the dialog box of
the same layout will open:
233
The dialog box for defining the parameters for generating

thin wall cross section girder - the layout
Thin wall cross sections which are stored in the database are displayed in the upper part of the
dialog box. Four cross sections are simultaneously displayed and moving from one to another
set, that is, returning to the previous set, is performed via the command fields
and
,
which are located in the top right corner of the dialog box. The selected cross section is
bordered with red color and is displayed in the central part of the dialog box.
The part of the dialog box in which the selected cross section is displayed
Activating the command field
Edit will result in opening a dialog box in which it is
possible to change the properties of the selected thin-wall cross section.
234
The dialog box for defining the parameters of

thin wall cross section - the layout
Working with this dialog box is exactly the same as with the dialog box within the command
Database of massive and thin-wall cross sections which is why it will not be explained here
again.
Activating the command field Alignment will result in opening a dialog box in which it is
possible to define the exact position of cross section in relation to the girder local coordinate
system.
The dialog box for aligning the cross section - the layout
This dialog box operates in exactly the same way as in the dialog box within the command for
defining the beam cross section.
The characteristics of the material from which a girder is created are displayed in the the edit
boxes placed along the right edge of the dialog box. These characteristics can be changed by
entering new values, whereas by using the command field Material it is possible to select
another material.
When the check box Create proxy element is on, the program will place a proxy entity
along the girder axis for all generated slabs.
The girder local coordinate system can be changed via the command field Change LCS.
Activating this command field will result in taking directly from the drawing. The program will
also request from the command bar that you assign a point which will define both the plane in
which local axes 1 and 2 lie and the direction of the local axis 2.
235
Change LCS (Point which defines axis 2 / <End>):
Since in some cases it is easier to define the plane in which local axes 1 and 3 lie, clicking the
sub-option Point which defines axis 2 will result in changing the contents of the command
bar.
Now the selected point will define the plane in which local axes 1 and 3 lie. Clicking again the
same sub-option will result in returning to the command bar previous layout. Once you have
selected the desired point, the program will return to the command main dialog box.
What the girder will look like in the drawing with the current state of parameters is displayed in
the window which is located along the left edge of the dialog box. The command fields which
are located below this window are used for changing the current view. They operate in much
the same way as the switches and have the same purpose as within the command of the same
name within the drop-down menu of 3D View window.
Activating the command field OK will result in closing the dialog box and generating the
girder from the selected thin-wall cross section in accordance with the assigned parameters.
The girder which has been generated via the command

Generate thin-wall section girder
3.1.10 Area Support

By selecting this icon the procedure for establishing area supports is entered. The
area supports are most commonly used in modelling the ground, i.e. in calculating
ground plates on elastic base.
The command bar attains the standard form for drawing a completely arbitrary polygonal line:
<-> Area Support First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End> / Set):
The procedure of entering is the same as for the plates, and the only difference is in the
appearance of the dialog box which appears in the screen when sub-option Set is activated
from the command bar.
236
Appearance of a dialog box for defining sets of numerical data

One set of area supports is determined by three parameters in the list box, which determine
whether the support displacement in the direction of its local axes is restrained, or not.
R1 - Displacement in direction of local axis 1 of the area support is restrained, i.e. obtaining
the support reaction in direction of its local axis 1 is enabled.
These three parameters operate as switches, i.e. their displacements can be either restrained
or free. If the sign is written in the corresponding field, it indicates that that displacement
is restrained. If you conecutively click the mouse button over these fields, the indicator is
alternatively placed or removed.
In addition to these three parameters, a set of data is also defined by three values in edit
boxes: K,R1, K,R2 and K,R3, which are to the right of the list box. The rigidity of the
supports against displacements in the direction of their local axes is determined by these three
values. In default, the program assigns a sufficiently large value (1E+10) to simulate absolute
rigidity. You can of course assign any arbitrary value for the displacement rigidity, clearly
under the condition that the given displacement restrained by setting the indicator to
switched-on state in the list box, otherwise, the given edit box will be frozen.
The local coordinate system of an area support corresponds fully to the previously described
local coordinate system of plates and walls (see Chapter 3.1.1).
Surely, this command will be used most commonly in course of modelling the ground
underneath the foundation plate. In that case, it is necessary to assign the subsoil coefficient
as the value of parameter K,R3. This data depends on the type of soil and it is obtained from
the soil mechanics survey. In case this parameter is not available, approximate value can be
adopted:
K,R3=,eff./ s,eff
,eff. - effective (expected) soil stress
s,eff - effective (expected)) settlement
237
For example, if ,eff=200 KN/m2, and s,eff=0,02 m, the approximate value of the subsoil
coefficient: K,R3=200/0.02=10000 KN/m3.
When the value of coefficients KR1 and KR2, which restrain displacements in direction of
local axes 1 and 2 respectively, is concerned, the same, if not even smaller rigidity than
the rigidity defined for displacement in direction of local axis 3, should be also assigned to
them.
In course of preparing the data for calculating, the program calculates the belonging area for
each node in the mesh of finite elements and assigns the corresponding rigidity to it. In this
way elastic behavior of soil is modelled in accordance Vinkler model.
Surface supports can have a nonlinear behavior. You can prevent the movement of a single
sign in the direction of any local axis of the support or setting the elastoplastic behavior by
entering plastification boundaries.
The combo box from which one selects support behavior

in the direction of a given local axis
+/-
In the direction of a given local axis, displacement in both directions has been
suppressed. This is a default behavior.
NL+
Displacement in the direction which is opposite to the direction of a given local axis
has been suppressed - only positive reaction can be obtained.
NL-
Displacement in the direction of a given local axis has been suppressed - only negative
reaction can be obtained.
Elasto-plastic behavior - With this option, elastoplastic behavior can be assigned to
the selected reaction of the area support. After selecting it, the button
becomes
available. Its activation opens the dialog box of the following appearance:
238
The meaning of all the parameters in this dialog box is the same as with the command
"Boundary conditions" (Section 3.1.3).
Note:
Do not assign the area supports beyond the overall dimensions of the plate since such model
will be irregular for calculating. In case of calculating the foundations comprising only beams
(grillage foundation, ground beams, etc.), model the soil by a linear support instead by area
support because the program will not be able to determine the belonging support rigidity in
nodes in mesh of finite elements for such model.
3.1.11 Linear Support

This command is used for assigning the linear supports in the model. By selecting
this command, the command bar attains its standard form for drawing the
polygonal line.
<-> Linear Support First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End> / Set):
The logic of entering is the same as in case of beams (it is also a linear element), except that
when sub-option Set is selected, a different appearance of the dialog box for defining the
sets of numerical data is obtained.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining sets of numerical data
239
Since the program enables the linear supports to be subsequently transformed into walls by
command Generate (see Chapter 2.11.7), one set of numerical data for linear supports is
classified into two equal parts. One part is applied when they are truly supports in the model
(data in the left part of the dialog box), and the other part which is joined to the wall in the
event that the wall is generated (data in the right part of the dialog box). Therefore, depending
on the role of the linear support, the program takes into account only that part of the data
which corresponds to its purpose in the model. In other words, if the given linear support is to
be subsequently transformed into a wall, the data in the left part of the dialog box will be
completely ignored by the program. It is clear that the opposite rule also applies. If the given
linear support in the model really has the role of a support, it is perfectly unimportant from the
aspect of the program what thickness and material quality are assigned for the wall.
Support Characteristics
Part of the dialog box for defining the support characteristics

One set of linear supports is determined by four parameters in the list box, which determine
whether displacement is restrained or not, i.e. the rotation of the supports in direction of its
local axes.
R1 - Displacement in direction of local axis 1 of the linear support is restrained, i.e.
obtaining the support reaction in direction of its local axis 1 is enabled.
M1 - Rotation about the local axis 1 of the linear support is restrained, i.e. obtaining the
fixing moment of the support in direction of its local axis 1 is enabled.
These four parameters operate as switches, i.e. their displacements (rotation in case of M1)
can be either restrained or free. In addition to these four parameters, a set of data is also
defined by four values in edit boxes: K,R1, K,R2, K,R3 and K,M1, which are to the
right of the list box. The rigidity of the supports against displacements and rotation in the
direction of their local axes is determined by these four values. In default, the program assigns
a sufficiently large value (1E+10) to simulate absolute rigidity.
240
The local coordinate system of a linear support corresponds fully to the previously described
local coordinate system of beams (see Chapter 3.1.4) and thus it can be changed
subsequently by command Change L.C.S.. The default position of the local coordinate system
for horizontal position of the linear support in the model is schematically presented in the
dialog box to simplify the orientation. By command Visibility, by setting the switch Local
Axes to switched-on state, in the part where visibility of linear supports is determined, the
program may be required to present the local axes in the drawing.
The soil can be modelled by linear supports in cases when grillage foundations and ground
beams are calculated. In this case the linear supports are placed beneath the ground beams,
and it is necessary to assign the subsoil coefficient, to the parameter that determines the
rigidity of vertical displacement (in default that is K,R2 parameter), in accordance with same
rules explained for area supports:
K,R2=,eff./ s,eff
In addition, it is also necessary to set the switch Soil to switched-on state, and to assign the
actual width of the strip, i.e. the width of the beam under which the linear support has been
assigned, in edit box b=. The assigned strip width influences the assigned value of the
subsoil coefficient since in course of calculations the strip width will be linearly multiplied by
the subsoil coefficient. Thus, the assigned subsoil coefficient will be properly corrected in the
course of calculations, and the assigned data on the strip width will be also used in the module
for processing the calculation results. Namely, when you require from the program the
stresses in soil beneath the assigned linear supports, the stress obtained by calculation will
automatically be divided by the belonging strip width and thus realistic values of stress will be
obtained.
Linear supports can have a nonlinear behavior. You can prevent the movement of a single sign
in the direction of any local axis of the support or setting the elastoplastic behavior by entering
plastification boundaries.

+/-
NL+
241
NL-
Elasto-plastic behavior- With this option, elastoplastic behavior can be assigned to the
selected reaction of the linear support. After selecting it the button
Its activation opens the dialog box of the following appearance:
becomes available.
Wall Characteristics
Part of the dialog box planned for defining the characteristics

of a wall in the event that the wall will be generated
In the right part of the dialog box there are data describing the characteristics of a wall that
might be generated in the procedure of generating the vertical entities. The thickness of the
generated wall is assigned in edit box d=, while characteristics of its material are assigned in
the remaining edit boxes. The role of command field Material, as well as the meaning of
data that define the material characteristics, are the same as in dialog box for defining the sets
for plates. After procedure of generating the vertical elements, new sets of numerical data,
which will be joined to other sets for plates and walls in the model, will be created.
242
3.1.12 Point Support

This command is used for assigning the point supports in the
position of the point supports is determined by entering a
command is selected, the command bar does not obtain
corresponds to form for entering the polygonal line, but to the
the point:
model. Since the

point, after this
the form which
form for entering
<_> Point Support (Choise / Deselect / <End> / Set):

Basically, there are two ways of assigning the point supports. The first way is when they are
assigned individually, i.e. points from the drawing are selected one by one. And the other is
when the supports are assigned serially. Assigning the point supports serially is enabled by
activating sub-option Choise from the command bar (see Chapter 2.5.6.).
<0 sel.> Select (All / Window / Polygon / selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect /
<End>):
Now the User is expected to select all nodes in which point supports need to be positioned. The
selecting and deselecting procedure is exactly the same as when entire elements in other (see
Chapter 2.8). The only difference is that instead of selecting the entities, their points of
intersection are now selected. When you select sub-option End or right-click, the program
returns to the basic form of command bar for individual point selecting. All selected points,
disregarding if they were selected individually or serially, will be temporarily marked by a small
circle in the drawing by the program.
All selected positions in which point supports with same characteristics

need to be assigned are denoted by a symbol of a small circle
After positions of all points, in which point supports having same characteristics need to be
placed, have been selected, a dialog box having the following appearance opens if sub-option
Set is selected from the command bar.
243
Appearance of a dialog box for defining the numerical data

Since the program enables the point supports to be subsequently transformed into columns by
command Generate (see Chapter 2.11.7), one set of numerical data for point supports is
classified into two equal parts. One part is applied when they are truly supports in the model
(data in the left part of the dialog box), and the other part, which is joined to the column in
the event that the column is generated (data in the right part of the dialog box). Therefore,
depending on the role of the point support, the program takes into account only that part of
the data which corresponds to its purpose in the model.
Support Characteristics
Part of the dialog box for defining the support characteristics

One set of point supports is determined by six parameters in the list box, which determine
whether the displacement i.e. the rotation of the supports in direction of its local axes is
restrained or not.
R1 - Displacement in direction of local axis 1 of the point support is restrained, i.e. obtaining
244
M1 - Rotation about the local axis 1 of the point support is restrained, i.e. obtaining the
These six parameters operate as switches, i.e. their displacements or rotations can be either
restrained or free. In addition, one set of data is also defined by six values in edit boxes:
K,R1, K,R2, K,R3, K,M1, K,M2 and K,M3 which are to the right of the list box.
The rigidity of the supports against displacements and rotation in the direction of their local
axes is determined by these six values. In default, the program assigns a sufficiently large
value (1E+10) to simulate absolute rigidity.
Point supports can have a nonlinear behavior. You can prevent the movement of a single sign
in the direction of any local axis of the support or setting the elastoplastic behavior by entering
plastification boundaries. Clicking on one of the icons which are located next to the edit boxes
for defining stiffness will result in opening the combo box from which one selects support
behavior in the direction of a given local axis.

+/-
NL+
NL-
Elasto-plastic behavior - With this option, elastoplastic behavior can be assigned to
the selected reaction of the point support. After selecting it, the button
available. Its activation opens the dialog box of the following appearance:
becomes
245
The difference between non-linear and default behavior can best be illustrated on the example
of continuous beam which is loaded with one concentrated force.
Deformed beam model with standard point supports
Deformed beam model. Moving of the opposite direction

of a given axis direction (NL+) has been prevented
in the direction of the support local axis 3
246
Depending on which displacements and rotations are restrained, i.e. which reactions and fixing
moments can be obtained by calculations, their 3D position is presented in the figure in the
middle of the dialog box.
Space planned for visualisation of the position

of possible reactions and fixing moments
When the command field OK is activated, the dialog box closes, and corresponding graphical
symbols appear in positions where the point supports were assigned.
The assigned point supports are always presented in 3D View window

by a symbol shaped as a small pyramid
Using the command Visibility, by setting the switch Local Axes to switched-on state, the
program can be required to present reaction directions for all restrained displacements and
rotations.
247
The presented arrows clearly indicate the direction

of restrained displacements and rotations
Two cases may occur when graphical symbols, shown in the position of assigned point
supports in 2D View window, are concerned. Namely, when a level is set as the current
presentation in 2D View window, they are always represented by a small square-shaped
symbol.
Symbol of point support when the current level is presented in 2D View window.
However, if a frame is presented as the current view in 2D View window, then a symbol
indicating the character of the point support is appears in it.
This symbol indicates that rotation and both displacements in the plane of the
presented current frame are restrained. This symbol is also placed when the local
axes of the point support do not belong to the plane of the presented current
frame, but only on condition that all three displacements and all three rotations are
restrained.
This symbol indicates that rotation and only one displacement in the plane of the
presented current frame are restrained.
This symbol indicates that only rotation in the plane of the presented current frame
is restrained.
This symbol indicates that both displacements in the plane of the presented
current frame are restrained while the rotation is allowed.
This symbol indicates that only one displacement in the plane of the presented
current frame is restrained while the rotation is allowed.
This symbol indicates that all displacements and all rotations in the given support
are not restrained, and that none of its local axes belongs to the plane of the
presented current frame.
248
Note:
In the Tower program, the point support local coordinate system does not belong to the set,
but to each individual support which has been placed in the model. By default, the program
places the local coordinate system of point supports in the direction of the global coordinate
system of the entire model. Its position can be changed via the command Change LCS.
Column Characteristics
Part of the dialog box planned for defining the characteristics

of a column in the event that the column will be generated
In the right part of the dialog box there are data describing the characteristics of walls that
might be generated in the procedure of generating the vertical entities. Since new sets of
numerical data will be created for the generated columns after the procedure of generating
vertical entities, these data are completely harmonised with the data assigned in defining the
sets of beams. The only difference is that here neither columns with abrupt change of crosssection, composite sections nor trussed types of bars can be defined here. Surely, such
characteristics can be subsequently joined to the generated columns, when they really become
beam structural elements.
3.1.13 3D Surfaces
Curved surfaces are used for establishing curved structural elements and loads in a
model. This means that curved surfaces are neither a part of the structure or that of a load but
they serve exclusively to determine the curvature of the entities in the model. Each curved
surfaces determined by its form projected onto the base and by the height in relation to the
assigned base plane. The following types of curved surfaces are planned by the program:
Sphere, Cone, Tunnel and Helix.
Projected form of a sphere to the

base plane is a full circle
Projected form of a cone to the

base plane is a full circle
249
Projected form of a tunnel the

base plane is a rectangle
Projected form of a the base

plane is a semicircle
Each of the curved surfaces planned by the program, in addition to being in vertical position,
may have a completely arbitrary position in space. The position of curved surfaces in space is
determined by the inclination of its base plane in space and by orientation of its height.
Base plane of a sphere is inclined

in space
Base plane of a sphere is

horizontal but its height is
assigned in negative sense
relative to the base plane
The procedure of creating the curved parts of the structure and load is performed in exactly
the same way for all types of curved surfaces:
- The given element of the structure is first drawn in its form projected to the base plane of
the figure the curvature of which the given element is to take on subsequently.
- The geometry of the given curved surface is defined by the corresponding command.
- Finally, all entities that are to take on the curvature of the previously defined curved surface
are selected.
After completing the previously described procedure, all selected entities attain such space
transformation that they belong with their complete geometry to the curved surface to which
they have been joined. Entities transformed in this way are called evolved. Evolved entities
need not necessarily fill up the entire curved surface, but only one part of it. Moreover, the
projected form of evolved entities to the base plane of the curved surface may be completely
arbitrary. The only condition for an entity to be evolved is that it belongs, together with its
entire geometry, within the overall size of the base plane of the given curved surface.
250
Evolved rectangular plate on a

sphere attains the presented
form
Both radially placed beams and a

circular plate are evolved at the
same time
Since the program also enables the developed form of the previously defined curved surface to
be assigned as the current view in 2D View window (see Chapters 2.14.1 and 2.14.7), in
some cases it may be easier to first define the geometry of the curved surface and then to
define immediately the curvilinear geometry of the given structural element or the load, by
selecting points in 2D View window. Since in course of defining the geometry of curved
surfaces the program requires the entities to be evolved to be selected, it will not be possible
to create a completely empty surface. In that case, draw in the base plane an auxiliary surface
or linear entity that will be evolved, and later on, when you define the auxiliary view of the
developed given surface by selecting it, you are free to delete it.
The view of the developed form of the curved

surface is defined by selecting the evolved
auxilliary plate
An empty curved surface is obtained by

deleting the previously evolved auxiliary plate
When a developed form of any of the previously defined curved surfaces is set as the current
view in 2D View window, then an auxiliary mesh that clearly defines the assigned form and
spread domain of the given curved surface is also presented in this window. In a view defined
in such way, selecting the points by mouse will always result in selecting the points that belong
to the given curved surface, while the distances between these points represent the projection
of their actual lengths to the base plane of the curved surface. When the points are selected by
assigning the coordinates, the local coordinate system, where the local X and Y-axes belong to
the base plane of the given curved surface while the local Z-axis is in direction of a line
perpendicular to the base plane, applies.
251
When points are selected in 2D View window, the rule that only those points which are within
the spread domain of the curved surface, i.e. within the assigned mesh of auxiliary lines can be
selected applies. In opposite case, the program issues an appropriate warning
It should be emphasised that the mesh of auxiliary lines has in no connection with the mesh of
finite elements that will be generated before calculations. It practically serves only as an
orientation to indicate where the given curved surface is positioned and how far it spreads in
space Moreover, this mesh can be used for precise selection of points by OSNAP criterion, and
its density determines the precision of defining the coordinates of evolved entities. When
creating a curved surface, the program itself assigns the density of the mesh of auxiliary lines
in default, which you can subsequently change by command
Edit Surface (see
Chapter3.1.12.6).
3.1.13.1
Sphere
When command 3D Surfaces Sphere is selected, the procedure of defining

the geometry of this curved surface is entered, in its base plane. Since the form of the sphere
in the base plane is a circle, the program will require from the command bar first the centre of
the circle and next its radius to be determined.
Sphere Base Center:
Sphere Base Point:
The inclination of the base plane in space will also be determined by selecting these two
points. In order to determine the geometry of the sphere completely, it remains to assign its
height in the direction of a line perpendicular to the base plane.
Sphere Height (hmax=3.0000) <3.0000>:
The height of the sphere can be determined either by selecting an arbitrary point in space or
by assigning its numerical value from the keyboard. A click on the right mouse button results
with acceptance of offered default value, which corresponds to the assigned radius of the
sphere. The assigned positive value determines the orientation of the sphere in the direction of
the positive vector in direction of a line perpendicular to its base plane, while the negative
value determines the opposite sense.
Since the geometry of the curved surface is now completely determined, the program enters
the procedure of selecting the entities which are to take on the curvature of the previously
assigned curved surface.
252
<0 sel.> 3D Surfaces Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
The selecting procedure is exactly the same as in other commands in the program (see
Chapter 2.8). A click on the right mouse button denotes the end of the selecting procedure,
after which the command will be ended, and the previously selected entities, which satisfy the
condition for evoluting, will be curved. Namely, the condition is that the geometry of the
selected entity projected to the base plane of the curved surface belongs with its entire
geometry within the overall size of the base plane.
The selected horizontal beam will not be evolved since it does not belong
with its entire geometry within the overall size of the base plane
Clearly the entities for evoluting need not be only in the base plane of the curved surface but
anywhere in space. The only condition is that their projection to the base plane of the curved
surface is within the overall size of the base plane.
A drastic example when a plate which is above the assigned sphere

is selected for evoluting, but its projection is still within
the overall size of the curved surface base plane
3.1.13.2
Cone
Command Cone operates in exactly the same way as the previously described
command for sphere creating. The only difference is in determining the height of the cone,
since a completely arbitrary height can be assigned for this form, while the height was limited
in case of the sphere by its radius.
253
3.1.13.3
Tunnel
Since the projected form of a tunnel to the base plane is rectangular, the
procedure of defining a rectangle is entered by command Tunnel.
First Point of Arch Base Median:
The way of drawing the rectangular projection of the tunnel to a base plane completely
corresponds to drawing the rectangle when sub-option Band is selected from the command
bar (see Chapter 2.6.2).
Second Point of Arch Base Median:
Arch Width:
The width of the tunnel can be determined either by selecting an arbitrary point in space, or by
assigning its numerical value from the keyboard. In both cases, selection of these three will
determine the inclination of the base plane in space at the same time. In order to determine
the geometry of the tunnel completely, it remains to assign its height in the direction of a line
perpendicular to the base plane.
Arch Height (hmax=3.0000) <3.0000>:
The height of the tunnel can be determined either by selecting an arbitrary point in space, or
by assigning its numerical value from the keyboard. A click on the right mouse button results
with acceptance of offered default value, which corresponds to one half of the assigned width
of the tunnel. The assigned positive value determines the orientation of the tunnel in the
direction of the positive vector in direction of a line perpendicular to its base plane, while the
negative value determines the opposite sense.
Since the geometry of the tunnel is now completely determined, the procedure of selecting the
entities which are to take on its curvature is exactly the same as in case of other curved
surfaces.
3.1.13.4
Helix
Since the projected appearance of a helix to the base plane is in the form of a
semicircle, the procedure of defining such geometry is entered by command Helix.
Three points that need to be assigned in determining the projected geometry

of a helix onto the base plane are marked in the drawing
254
Helix Base Centre Point:
After selecting the helix centre (point 1), the program will require the point which determines
the external radius to be determined (point 2).
Outer Circle Start Point (Inverse):
Here the start point is that point from which the height of the helix starts increasing, or
decreasing. Since a semicircle is assigned here, sub-option Inverse is also present on the
command bar. If this sub-option is selected consecutively, one of the two possible semicircles
are alternatively established, relative to the line determined by the position of points 1 and
2.
When you have selected the start point on the outer circle, the program will require a point
from the inner semicircle to be determined (point 3).
Inner Circle Point (Inverse):
Sub-option Inverse is still present on the command bar, and if you select it at this moment,
you can obtain a mirror image of the defined semicircle. Selecting these three points
determines at the same time the inclination of the base plane in space.
Angle (<180.0>):
Now it is necessary to determine the central angle of the helix. The expected value is the
central angle of 180, which if necessary can be changed. In order to fully define the geometry
of the helix, the only thing left to do is assign its height in the perpendicular direction of the of
the base plane.
Helix Height:
An arbitrary value can be assigned for the height of the helix, after which the program enters
the procedure of selecting the entities which are to take on its curvature in exactly the same as
in case of other curved surfaces.
3.1.13.5
Existing Surface
This command enables the curvature of any of the previously curved surfaces to
be joined to the selected entities. When command Existing Surface is selected, the
program will require from the command bar an entity having the evoluator, i.e. the entity
which has already been previously curved to be selected.
<0 sel.> 3D Surface - Select:
The selecting procedure is individual, i.e. only one of the evolved entities can be selected. After
completed selection of evolved entity, the program will take on the geometry of its curved
surface. Now you have practically approached the same situation as if you had created again
the geometry of that same surface by a corresponding command.
<0 sel.> 3D Surface Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
This means that now it is necessary to select all entities which should take on the curvature of
the given curved surface, in exactly the same way as in creating new curved surfaces.
255
This command has special application when by mistake all entities that should take on the
curvature of a surface are not selected while that curved surface is being created for the first
time.
3.1.13.6
Edit Surface
The command Edit Surface, enables you to change any of the parameters
that define the geometry of an arbitrary selected curved surface. The program will require
from the command bar one of the evolved entities, the surface of which you desire to edit to,
be selected.
<0 sel.> 3D Surface - Select:
After completion of individual selecting, the program will open the dialog box the appearance
of which depends on the type of curved surface the curvature of which was taken on by the
selected entity.
Appearance of the edit box for editing the sphere

Schematic presentation of the given curved surface, both in base plane and cross-section is
presented in the right part of the dialog box. It should be mentioned that, if the base plane of
the curved surface is oblique in space, in this dialog box it would be presented as if it were
horizontal.
Data that determine the given curved surface are presented in the left part of the dialog box.
If you click the mouse button on any of the edit boxes, the meaning of the given parameter
and the range of the values that can be assigned is written at the bottom of the dialog box.
Geometry of Curved Surface
Geometry of a sphere is determined by the radius in its base plane (r =) and this is the only
data that cannot be changed in this dialog box. The data on height of the sphere (h =) and
on the radius of the entire sphere (R =) are connected so that if one of them is changed this
affects the value of the other. Assigning the height of a sphere that is less than its radius in
the base plane practically means that the median plane of the entire sphere is not in the base
plane but somewhere below it. The same also applies when a value larger than the radius of
the sphere in the assigned base plane is assigned for the radius of the entire sphere.
256
Data on Mesh of Auxiliary Lines
We shall emphasise once again that the mesh of auxiliary lines is in no relation with the mesh
of finite elements that is to be generated before the calculations. The appearance of this
auxiliary mesh is affected by the following group of data.
nr number of radial divisions, i.e. the number of circular segments into which the given
sphere will be divided
nh number of tangential divisions, i.e. the number of concentric circles that will be
established on the sphere
Setting the check box 3D Equidistant Mesh to switched-on state, results in equal spacing
of mesh division in space, while the switched-off state indicates that the spacing of mesh
division will be equal in its projection to the base plane.
In case that several entities in the drawing has been evolved by a given curved surface, then
you have the possibility to join the changes made in check box Assign to All either to all
entities, or only to the selected one. In case that in the drawing there is only one entity which
belongs to the given curved surface, this check box will be inactive. Namely, since only one of
the evolved entities is selected within this command, when this check box is set to switched-on
state, the performed changes will be joined to all entities of the given curved surface.
However, in case that it is set to switched-off state, after exiting the dialog box a new curved
surface will be created in accordance with assigned data in this dialog box. The selected entity
will be evolved in accordance with newly assigned data, and all others will maintain the
geometry of the previously defined curved surface.
All previously given explanations for editing the sphere also apply to other types of curved
surfaces. In the following text only differences and specificities for each curved surface planned
by the program will be presented.
Appearance of the dialog box for editing the cone

The geometry of a cone is determined by the radius in its base plane (r =), and by a data on
the cone height (h =). While the radius cannot be changed, a completely arbitrary value can
be assigned to its height.
257
Appearance of the edit box for editing the tunnel

The role of the parameters that define the geometry of a tunnel is same as that in a sphere,
except that the meaning of the parameters, which define the density of the auxiliary mesh, is
different.
dL Spacing between concentric semicircles in longitudinal sense. This data is assigned in
units of length (m).
nr number of radial divisions, i.e. the number of parts into which the semicircle defining the
geometry of the tunnel will be divided in transverse sense.
Appearance of the edit box for editing the helix

The geometry of the helix is defined by its inner and outer radius in its base plane (R1= and
R2=), together with the data on the helix height (h=). The program will not allow for
radiuses assigning values which will change the geometry of the structural elements on the
helix, whereas it is allowed to assign an arbitrary value for the helix height.
Note:
Do not assign a mesh that is too dense because it can considerably slow down the program
operating. The density assigned in default is quite sufficient in most cases.
Note:
It should be mentioned that cylindrical frame can also be selected by command Edit Surface,
(see Chapter 2.12.5).
258
3.1.14 Stage Construction

The commands that will be described in this Chapter enable describing the
construction of buildings in stages. These commands will have special application in assembly
structures and in composite structures.
The construction stages should be comprehended as a possibility to define data for a series of
independent models in one file. An arbitrary number of stages can be defined within one
model. By setting one of these stages as the current one, only those drawings that belong to
this stage are presented in the drawing, while entities from other stages become currently
invisible. Command Stage Construction is used to open new stages and to set the current
stage.
Structure
In addition to the possibility to add new elements that did not exist in the previous stage, in
stage construction it as necessary to provide the possibility of removing those entities that did
exist in the previous stage. This will be explained in an example of assembling a one-storey
frame.
Stage 1: Erecting the columns
Stage 2: Erecting the beam with a placed prop
259
Faza 3: Removing the prop

Moreover, in composite structures, one entity almost regularly attains both different shapes of
cross-section and different characteristics of material in different stages. This will be clarified in
an example of simple beam with composite cross-section.
Stage 1: Beam cross-section consists of a steel section only
Stage 2: Beam cross-section consists of a steel section and a concrete plate
260
Stage 3: Beam cross-section consists of a steel section and a

concrete plate, but now with a reduced modulus of elasticity
due to analysis of concrete creep influences
In order to provide such flexible behavior of the model in various stages, a concept has been
adopted in the program that the base of entities is unique on the level of the entire model, i.e.
it applies in all defined construction stages. This means that each entity, disregarding if it
represents a part of the structure or a part of a load, there is a list of data that shows in which
stage that entity is present, and in which not. This practically means that by deleting an entity,
it will be excluded from the model, and thus it will not appear in any of the defined stages. The
same applies to the list of sets of numerical data, which is also unique for the entire model.
Namely, the change of numerical data refers to all entities to which it has been joined,
disregarding the stage within which the given entity appears. To change the parameters which
show in which stages the given entity appears command Construction Stage Change is
planned.
We shall clarify all previously stated in the previously presented of a single-storey frame and a
simple beam with composite cross-section. To remove the prop in stage 3, command
Delete should not be used, but it is necessary to define for the columns and their supports
that they appear in all three stages, for the beam that it appears in stages, 2 and3, while
for the prop and its support it should be assigned that they appear only in stage 2.
In the example of the simple beam with composite cross-section, in each of the stages it is
necessary to define a new beam which appears only in that stage, and a new set of numerical
data has to be joined to each of those beams. This means that the serial number 1 of the set
needs to be joined to the beam that appears only in stage 1, the serial number 2 of the set
needs to be joined to the beam that appears only in stage 2, while the serial number 3 of
the set needs to be joined to the beam that appears only in stage 3. In addition, the
characteristics of steel I section are joined to set of numerical data 1, characteristics of
composite cross-section consisting of steel profile and a concrete plate are joined to set of
numerical data 2, while the serial number 3 of data set is exactly the same as set 2
except that now, due to analysis of concrete creep influences, the modulus of elasticity of the
concrete plate is reduced to the required value.
Load
The list of load cases is unique for the entire model, i.e. same load cases apply to all defined
construction stages. As far as the entities that represent the load are concerned, exactly the
same rules as in structural elements apply to them also. This means that a data list, indicating
all stages in which a load case appears, is kept for each load entity. Therefore, a load is not
deleted from any of the stages by command Delete since this will result in deleting it even
261
from the stages in which it needs to act, but in which stages the selected load entity needs to
be present is assigned by command Construction Stage Change.
As we have already said at the beginning of this chapter, each of the defined construction
stages should be treated as an individual model, while all of these models have a common list
of defined load cases. This means that within the calculations for the entire model, that
number of individual calculations will be carried out as is the number of defined construction
stages. In calculating each of the stages, within each of the load cases, all loads that belong to
the given stage are applied to the model, as well as the loads assigned within the previous
stage, but with a negative sign (opposite sense of action). Corresponding influences calculated
in the previous stage are added to the calculation results obtained in each stage.
Therefore, the total load that acts in a stage is assigned in each stage, i.e. load from all
previous stages needs to be accumulated. Thus, in the course of calculating, each stage will be
only subjected to the difference of load that acts within it, and the results will correspond to
the realistic behavior of the structure. Such concept enables significantly easier work in
assigning the necessary by stages.
We shall explain all previously stated in an example of a simple beam subjected to uniformly
distributed load which increases by 2 kN/m in each stage.
Although this example does not make much sense in engineering practice, we have selected it
to explain the way the program functions. When calculated, the following results are obtained.
Stage I:
M1 = q1 * l2 / 8 = (- 3) * 82 / 8 = -24 kNm
Stage II:
M2 = (q2 - q1) * l2 / 8 + M1 = - 5 ( -3) * 82 / 8 + (-24) = -40 kNm
Stage III:
M3 = (q3 q2) * l2 / 8 + M2 = - 7 ( -5) * 82 / 8 + (-40) = -56 kNm
The same also applies for influences due to self-weight. Namely, since the program enables
calculating the load due to self-weight automatically (see Chapter 3.2.1), and the list of load
cases is common for all construction stages, such concept will not result in its multiple action
within each of the stages.
As an example, let us tale again the presented concrete simple beam with rectangular crosssection b/d=20/40cm. The requirement of calculating the load due to self-weight
automatically, within the same load case, practically means that within each of the stages the
beam is subjected to uniformly distributed load g = 0,2 * 0,4 * 25 = 2 kN/m.
262
Stage I:
M1 = g1 * l2 / 8 = (- 2) * 82 / 8 = -16 kNm
Stage II:
M2 = (g2 - g1) * l2 / 8 + M1 = - 2 ( -2) * 82 / 8 + (-16) = -16 kNm
Stage III:
M3 = (g3 g2) * l2 / 8 + M2 = - 2 ( -2) * 82 / 8 + (-16) = -16 kNm
This means that the self-weight will act only once within each of the stages.
3.1.14.1
Defining the Construction Stages
When command Stage Construction, within the drop-down menu Structure

is selected, a dialog box as the following one opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the construction stages

In the presented list in the left part of the dialog box, each of the defined stages is determined
by its serial number (column N) and by its name (column Stage Construction). The
name of the construction stage is assigned by a simple click on the mouse button over the
given field and by entering the desired content from the keyboard.
A new stage, with a serial number that is by one larger than the previous number in the list, is
inserted into the list by command field Add. When a new stage is being added, the
possibility of creating a new stage, with exactly the same content as any of the previously
defined ones, can be used. Namely, if you set the check box With Copy to switched-on
state, (a symbol should be presented in a small square), the newly added stage will then
have exactly the same content as the stage that was active immediately before activating
command field Add. In default, the check box With Copy is set to switched-on state since in
most cases in practice the new construction stage contains all elements from the previous
stage in addition to new contents. In case when the check box With Copy is set to switchedoff state, command field Add operates as in other dialog boxes, i.e. a new (empty)
construction stage will be opened.
Command field Delete operates as in all other dialog boxes, and in case you select a stage
with entities that exist only in that stage to be deleted, the program issues an appropriate
warning.
263
Selecting the command field OK will result in deleting the selected stage, while all entities
that exist only in that stage will be removed from the model. Command field Cancel is used
to quit from deleting.
Changing the sequence of stages in the list is enabled by command fields Up and Down.
The procedure is as follows: first click the mouse button within the row that contains the stage
the position of which in the list needs to be changed, and next activate the appropriate
button.
The current stage is selected by a simple click on the mouse button on any item from the list
box, within that row. That row becomes indicated by a special color, and thus the active stage
is denoted. If you click the mouse button on the command field OK, the dialog box
disappears from the screen, and all entities that are joined to the given construction stage (if
they exist) are established in the model. All entities that are to be drawn subsequently,
disregarding whether they represent a part of the structure or a part of the load, will be joined
to the established current construction stage.
Icon for changing the construction stage

The serial number of the current construction stage is always written in the icon, by which the
command Construction Stage Change is activated. Quick change of current construction
stage can also be achieved by selecting from the closed list that is opened by a click on the
mouse button over the arrow on the right side of the presented icon.
264
List for quick change of the current construction stage
3.1.14.2
Changing the Construction Stage

The command Construction Stage Change, enables you to change the data,
which indicate their belonging to certain stages, of arbitrarily selected entities.
When this command is selected, the standard procedure of selecting is entered.
<0 sel.> Construction Stage Change Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras /
After completed selection, if you right-click, the selection of sub-option End is indicated,
after which a dialog box as the following one appears.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the data

on belonging of selected data to individual stages
The presented dialog box has the same appearance as the dialog box for defining the
construction stages. Stages cannot be added to or removed from this dialog box, and it
contains that number of rows as is the number of defined construction stages. The existence of
symbol in column
indicates if the selected entities exist within the given stage or
not. If you consecutively click the mouse button on any item in a row, in which data for the
given stage are presented, will result in alternative setting or removing the indicator .
Existence of indicator denotes that the selected entities belong to the given stage.
265
In case that some of the selected entities belong to the given stage, and some do not, the
symbol will have pale (disabled) appearance
. Such appearance of the symbol indicates
that not all of the selected entities exist in the given stage, but only some of them. In case
that you do not change such appearance of the symbol by a click on the mouse button, that
means that the selected entities should maintain data on belonging to the given stage, same
as before this command was activated.
When you have performed all necessary changes, activate command field OK, after which
the dialog box will be closed, while the program will update the data concerning the belonging
of entities to individual stages for all selected entities.
The way of operating with the commands for defining the construction stages shall be
explained in the following two examples.
Example of a Single-storey Frame
We shall position both columns and their supports onto an empty drawing.
Columns and supports are positioned within current stage 1

By command Stage Construction now we shall first assign the name to stage 1, and next
we shall add the new stage by command field Add.
New stage is added using option With Copy
266
Since the check box With Copy was set to switched-on state, bio all previously assigned
elements from stage 1 will be included in stage II.
Initial state of stage 2, completely corresponds to the content of stage 1

We shall add the beam, the prop and its support to the drawing.
Since stage 2 is the current stage, the assigned

structural elements are joined only to that stage
We shall add the third stage by command Stage Construction.
267
The third stage is also added using the option With Copy

Since the prop and its support need to be removed only within stage 3, we must not delete it
by command Delete, since in that way these elements would be removed from stage 2
also. Therefore, we shall activate command Construction Stage Change, and select only
those two structural elements. After that, a dialog box with appearance as follows will open.
On the basis of the established symbols , it can be clearly seen

that both selected entities belong both to stages 2 and 3.
268
This means that now the previously selected prop and its support need to be removed only
from stage 3.
By a simple click on the mouse button within any item in the third row
the symbol will be removed from column
By activating the command field OK, the dialog box will be closed, and we shall have the
desired state for current stage 3 in the drawing.
Definitive appearance of the structure in the third stage

Example of a Simple Beam with Composite Cross-section
We shall position a beam and its support in an empty drawing. We shall define within the set of
beam 1 that its cross-section is determined by geometry of I-section, and that the material is
steel.
269
A steel I-section beam and both supports are established within current stage 1
By command Stage Construction now we shall first assign the name to stage 1, and next
we shall add the new stage by command field Add.
New stage is added using option With Copy

Since the check box With Copy was set to switched-on state, all previously assigned
elements from stage 1 will be included in stage II.
270

Since the cross-section of the beam now needs to be changed in order to make it composite
only within stage 2, we must not change it by command Modify Sets see Chapter 3.3.1),
since in that way the beam would be composite in stage 1 also, which we surely do not
desire. Moreover, deleting the existing beam in stage 2 would not solve the problem either,
since in that case the beam would also be removed from stage 1. Therefore, is necessary to
activate the command Construction Stage Change, and to select the beam only. After
that, a dialog box with appearance as follows will open.

that the selected beam belongs both to stages 1 and 2
This means that now the previously selected beam needs to be removed only from stage 2.
271
By a simple click on the mouse button within any item in the second row
By activating the command field OK, the dialog box will be closed, and only supports that
belong to stages I and II will appear in the drawing.
Now only supports exist within stage 2

We shall now add a new beam in the drawing, but we shall also add a new set of numerical
data to it. Within the added set of numerical data number 2, we shall define the composite
cross-section, consisting of a steel I-section and a concrete plate.
272

composite beam is joined only to that stage
The third stage will be added by command Stage Construction.
The third stage is also added using the option With Copy
273
Since now the cross-section of the beam needs to be changed, in such way to reduce the
modulus of elasticity of the concrete part of the composite cross-section, again we shall
activate command Construction Stage Change, and select the beam only. After that, a
dialog box with appearance as follows opens.

that the selected beam belongs both to stages 2 and 3
This means that now the selected beam needs to be removed only from stage 3.
By a simple click on the mouse button within any item in the third row,
By activating the command field OK, the dialog box will be closed, and only supports that
belong to stages I, II and III will appear in the drawing.
274
Now only supports exist within stage 3

We shall now add a new beam in the drawing, but we shall also add a new set of numerical
data to it. Within the added set of numerical data number 3, we shall define the composite
cross-section, which completely corresponds to set number 2, but we shall reduce the
modulus of elasticity of the concrete beam to the required value.

composite beam, with reduced modulus of elasticity
of concrete, is joined only to that stage
3.1.15 Link
By using the command Link, the entity is created that is used to connect two
nodes in the model, which does not have to be connected in some other way. The connection
that is established, can take many forms, from the simple solid through elastic to elastoplastic.
The connection can be established only by one or more degrees of freedom. By selecting the
command from the drop down menu "Structure" you enter the procedure of defining the
connection, and the command line gets the following form:
Defining a link entity - First point (<End> / Set)
Option "Set" opens a dialogue for defining the numerical data that will be associated to a
connection.
275
The dialog for defining sets of connections

Using the six check boxes, which are located in each row of the table, the connection type is
assigned to each of the six intersecting forces in the directions of the local coordinate system
connections.
R1 R2 R3 M1 M2 M3 -
translation in the direction of local axis "1" (connection transmits force)

rotation around the local axis "1" (connection transmits moment)
Each of these variables has a corresponding edit box in which you define the connection
translation stiffness (K,R1, K,R2, K,R3) or rotation (K,M1, K,M2, K,M3). These
edit boxes are on the right side of the table and they are available only if the corresponding
translation / rotation has been prevented.
Next to each of these edit boxes are buttons for the defining of the connection behavior in the
direction of assigned local axis.
Clicking any of them opens a drop-down menu with the following options:
+/-
In the direction of assigned local axis the complete connection is formed per
translation / rotation without restriction in intensity. This is the default behavior.
NL+
In the direction of assigned local axis a one-way connection is formed per translation /
rotation, but only in a positive direction of a assigned local axis.
276
NL-
In the direction of assigned local axis a one-way connection is formed per translation /
rotation, but only in the negative direction of a assigned local axis.
By using this option the elastoplastic behavior can be assigned. After selecting it the
button
becomes available. Its activation opens the dialog box of the following
appearance:
When check boxes "Elastic limit (> = 0)" and "Elastic limit (<= 0)" are turned on, edit
boxes that are around them became available. Upper or lower limit of given impact are
assigned in them. If the default values are exceeded plastification starts. "OK" button is
unavailable until at least one plastification boundary is defined. If you enter only one
plastification boundary, the program will behave as if the other boundary is infinite.
For easier orientation, a dialog picture schematically displays connection and its local
coordinate system. Local coordinate system of connections can be changed later by using the
command "Change LCS".
You can exit the dialog by pressing the "OK" button, and the connection that is created will be
associated with the data set that is, at that time, selected in the table. By assigning the first,
and then the end point of the connection, its creation ends, and it is placed in the drawing.
Endpoint:
3.2
Loading
All loads that are assigned in the program by commands from the drop-down menu
Load are joined to the current case of load. Load case means a state in the model, in which
an arbitrary number of loads act at the same moment. The information on the serial number
and name of the current load case is constantly written on the status line, in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Since there is often the need in practice to calculate separately the
influences due to action of various load cases (permanent, imposed, exceptional, etc.) the
program enables defining various load cases. From basic load cases, it is possible to make
subsequently arbitrary combinations of their simultaneous action.
In contrast to structural elements, numerical data on loads are not kept in set lists but a series
of necessary numerical data is directly joined to each drawn load. Since the loads are
remembered in the program by intensity and direction of the assigned action vector, such
organisation of saving the data enables the vector determining the sense of load action, in
277
addition to the position of load action, to be transformed within the commands for
manipulating the elements of a drawing (copying, mirror, rotation, etc.).
Mirror copying of the assigned load on the left part of the frame
by command Mirror, resulted in mirror image
of the load action vectors
The principle of superposition applies to all loads, i.e. related loads can be mutually overlapped
on the condition that the directions of action of their load vectors do not coincide. By related
loads we understand two surface, two linear or two point loads.
Superposition of two point loads enables simultaneous action

of both horizontal and vertical force in a same node
In case that in addition to the position of assigned load, the direction of the vectors of their
action also coincides, there will be no superposition of load, but the existing load will be
replaced by newly assigned load.
278
Assigning a new load over the existing load having the same direction
of the action vector, resulted in replacement of the existing load
by the newly assigned load in that part
In addition to standard loading by forces and moments, which can act on the surface along an
assigned line or in an assigned point on the model, temperature effects in plate and beam
elements, influences due to imposed load, support displacements, and prestress influences can
be also analysed by the program.
Note:
Surface, linear and point loads are presented in the drawing by corresponding graphical
symbols that are arrow-shaped. You can adjust the size of these arrows yourself by the
following function keys:
F9 Double click the mouse button on this function key to increase the arrows which
represent point loads in the drawing.
represent linear loads in the drawing.
represent surface loads in the drawing.
Press the key Alt, together with one of the previously listed function keys to achieve the
opposite result, i.e. to decrease the arrow symbols for the given type of load.
Function key F12 is used to delete the previously performed scaling, and to return to the
default size of the arrows planned by the program.
279
3.2.1
Defining the Load Cases
When command Load Case within the drop-down menu Load is selected, a
dialog box as the following one opens:
Basic appearance of a dialog box for defining the load cases

In the presented list, each of the defined load cases is determined by its serial number
(column N), by its name (column Name) and by the indicator (column g), which
indicates if the self-weight is included or not within the assigned load case.
The name of the load is assigned by a simple click on the mouse button over the given field
and by entering the desired name from the keyboard. Double-click the mouse button on field
within column g to result in alternative setting or removing the indicator . Existence of
the indicator indicates that the self-weight will be included in the given load case of the
model. The self-weight of plates and walls is calculated as a result of multiplying the assigned
bulk density of the joined material by its thickness: g = * d , while for beams it is calculated
from expression: g = * A1 , where A1 is the cross-section area of the beam. If a zero value
is assigned for bulk density of an element, the self-weight of that element will not be included
disregarding the existence of indicator .
If the mouse pointer is positioned over a serial number of some load in the list, and you press
the right button, a drop-down menu will open with the option "The load case has seismic
character".
280
By selecting this option, the load is assigned with "seismic character," which means that the
calculation for this load case will be done with seismic model. Next to the ordinal numbers of
all load cases whose seismic character is turned on, a special icon is placed in order to
differentiate them from other load cases.
The picture indicating that in this load case

the seismic character is turned on
A new load case, with a serial number that is by one larger than the previous number in the
list, is inserted into the list by command field Add. When a new load case is being added, the
possibility of creating a new load case, with exactly the same content as any of the previously
defined ones, can be used. Namely, if you set the check box With Copy to switched-on
state, (a symbol should be presented in a small square), the newly added load case will
then have exactly the same content as the load case that was active immediately before
activating command field Add. In addition to the name, and the state of parameter g, all
loads that were defined within the previously created load case will be joined to the newly
added load case in the drawing. Such possibility of adding new load cases by copying the
existing ones is applied when a new load case can be easily created with small changes in the
existing load case. In case when the check box With Copy is set to switched-off state,
command field Add operates as in other dialog boxes, i.e. a new (empty) load case will be
opened.
Command field Delete operates as in other dialog boxes, while in case you select a load case
that is not empty to be deleted (existence of indicator
in column
denotes that some
loads are joined to the given load case in the drawing) the program will issue a warning:
Selecting the command field Yes will result in deleting the selected load case, while all loads
that have been previously joined to it will be removed from the drawing, while command field
No is used to quit from deleting.
Changing the sequence of load in the list is enabled by command fields Up and Down. The
procedure is as follows: first click the mouse button within the row that contains the load the
position of which in the list needs to be changed, and next activate the appropriate button.
281
The active (current) load case is selected by a simple click on the mouse button on any item
from the list box, within that row. That row becomes indicated by a special color, and thus the
active load case is denoted. If you click the mouse button on the command field OK, the
dialog box disappears from the screen, the serial number and the name of the current load
case are written on the status bar, and all loads that are joined to the given load case (if they
exist) are drawn in the model. All loads that are to be drawn subsequently will be joined to the
established current load case.
The current load case can be changed from the closed list
in space planned for icons
The current load case can be changed in this list transparently, i.e. while other commands are
being executed. If the current load case is being changed during the procedure of assigning
any of the loads, then the given load will be joined to the load case that was the current load
case immediately before it was assigned.
Beside all defined load cases, issue 0. Total Load is in the first place in the list that opens
by a click on the mouse button over the arrow on its right side.
When case Total Load is set as the current case,

all loads defined in the drawing will be presented
282
When total load is set as the current load, it will not be possible to define new loads because it
would be unknown to which load case they should be joined. The role of setting the total load
as the current load is to check all assigned data on loading and to correct them if necessary.
Changing the load case can also be performed using the icons which are placed on the toolbar
on the right of the combo box for selecting the load case.
The icons for changing the load case

Clicking this icon will result in selecting the next load case the one which is located in
the combo box after the current load case.
Clicking this icon will result in selecting the previous load case the one which is located
in the combo box before the current load case.
This option is most frequently used when controling influence is performed by load cases in the
module for Post-Processing.
3.2.2
Defining the Load Combinations
If you desire to calculate the created model in accordance with the II order theory,
you will not be able to make linear combinations of the results obtained for basic load cases
calculated in accordance with the II order theory in the post processing module. For that
reason, a command for defining the combinations of simultaneous action of basic load cases
has been created in this module also. In case you require the model to be calculated in
accordance with the I order theory, all combinations, if assigned, will be ignored during the
calculations in this module, i.e. the calculations will be performed only for the basic load cases,
while the defined combinations will only be transferred into the post processing module. When
command Load Combination, within the drop-down menu Load, is selected, a dialog box
as the following one opens.
283
Appearance of a dialog box for defining the load combinations

All basic load cases that have been created before the moment of entering into the dialog box
are presented in the down part of the list box. A conclusion can be drawn from the previously
stated that this command should be activated only when all basic load cases have already
been defined. The role of the down list box will be explained in further text, when we explain
the way the possible combinations are created automatically, while the upper list box serves
for defining the combinations individually.
Defining the combinations individually
The upper list box has that number of columns, as is the number of basic load cases so far
assigned. Command field
Add is used for adding new combinations to the list, and it
operates in accordance with the same principle as in the other dialog boxes, while command
field
Delete enables removing the selected combination from the list. Command fields
Up and
Down serve for changing the position of the currently selected combination in
the list.
The part of the dialog box planned for presenting the created combinations
284
Combination of simultaneous action of basic load cases is defined within one row in such way
that values of multipliers (a multiplier cannot be assigned only for those load cases that are
reserved for constructing the influence line, since they cannot be included into any
combination) are assigned in columns with basic load cases included in the combination.
Namely, the combination will included all basic loads for which the multipliers have been
assigned in such way that the intensities of all loads within the selected basic load cases will be
multiplied by the assigned multipliers.
The program itself will generate the name of the combination on the basis of the assigned
values of the multiplier, but you can change it subsequently by editing the assigned values in
column Name.
On the basis of assigned multipliers, the program itself

generated the name of the combination
In cases when there is a large number of basic load cases, the list will be too narrow to
present simultaneously all columns that correspond to all assigned basic load cases. The
current view of columns in horizontal sense can in that case be changed by a horizontal scroll
bar at the bottom of this list box.
Defining the Combinations Automatically
Since in actual cases in practice the number of basic load cases can be extremely large, thus
the number of all required combinations of their simultaneous action may be such that a lot of
time is required to define them individually. In order to simplify the previous as much as
possible we have developed a procedure by which you can relatively simply define all
necessary combinations automatically.
Three columns, in which parameters, which are to determine the further course of defining the
combinations automatically, are assigned, are planned in the down list box for each basic load
case. The symbol is alternatively set and removed if you click the mouse within each of the
rows in column St. (Status). If the symbol exists in column St. it means that the given
load will be included in all combinations that are to be created automatically. If the field is
empty, it means that the given load will be included only in certain combinations, in
accordance with the conditions that will be assigned by the User. You will not be able to
change the status only for load cases reserved for constructing the influence line (for such
loads the whole row of data will be frozen, i.e. inactive for operating).
285
The nature of each load case is defined in column A. (Alternative). In other words, if symbol
is placed in this column, that means that the given load is of alternative nature and that, in
course of generating combinations, it will be taken both with a positive and negative symbol.
Since the number of possible combinations increases in this way, the program has envisaged a
restriction by which it is allowed to assign alternative effects for ten load cases maximum.
Information on the total number of combinations that can be created at that moment is written
below this list box.
The number of possible combinations is reduced from 31 to 16 by assigning

the condition that the first case should be included in all combinations
This number of combinations depends on the number of basic load cases, and before any
conditions are set, it will be extremely large, since it resulted from simple combining each with
each. However, since the loads used in structural analysis have a certain logical sense, i.e.
they correspond to certain natural phenomena, it can be easily concluded which loads can and
which cannot act simultaneously. For example, if we analyse the wind influence acting from left
to tight in one load case, and from right to left in the other, it is clear that these two loads
cannot act simultaneously. In practice, here are many examples like the previous one and they
sometime result from the standards for load analysis.
From everything previously stated, it can be concluded that it would be necessary to denote
clearly for each basic load case which of the other loads cannot simultaneously act with it, and
thus reduce the number of possible combinations. You can set these conditions if you first click
the mouse within the row that contains the load case for which you desire to set the conditions
to set it as the currently active load, and next activate command field Do not combine
with.
286
Appearance of the dialog box for setting

the conditions for combining
The condition for opening this dialog box is that the symbol , which denotes that the given
load is included in all combinations, is not set within the column St.
All basic load cases are presented in the list, while those cases for which the symbol is set
within the column St are specially marked by green symbol
on the left side of the list.
Symbols set in this way clearly indicate that those loads are included in all combinations, and
thus they cannot be comprised by these conditions. It will not be possible to include the load
case for which a dialog box for setting conditions is opened (an arrow
will be at the
beginning of the row that contains this load), or the load case reserved for constructing the
influence line in the special conditions for combining. For all other loads (loads that are not
marked on the left side of the list by any of the previously described symbols) you can set the
conditions, i.e. you can select which ones cannot act simultaneously with the load for which
the conditions are being set. If you click the mouse button over the load in the list which
cannot act simultaneously with the load for which this type of data is being defined, a symbol
will be set. A previously selected load case is deselected by a mouse button click over its
name, after which the symbol is removed.
287
Symbol denotes that a combination of simultaneous

action of 3 fourth and fifth load case cannot be created
When you have selected all loads that cannot act simultaneously with the load for which the
conditions are being set, activate command field OK, after which this dialog box will close,
and a new number of possible combinations, which now corresponds to newly assigned
conditions, will be written in the basic dialog box of this command.
A new number of possible combinations (12) is

obtained from the conditions set for combining
In practice, it frequently happens that loads with constant simultaneous effects are analyzed in
different cases. In order to reduce the number of load combinations in course of generation, it
is possible to define for each load case all the loads with which it has simulatneous effects, i.e.
all the loads without which it cannot be found in a combination. These conditions are one-way,
which means that, say a load A is assigned to be always combined with a load B, the load A
cannot appear in a combination without the load B. However, the load B may appear in a
combination without the load A. These conditions are set within the dialog box which opens
288
upon activating the command field Always combine with. It is worth noting that prior to
activating the command field, you should set as the current one the load case for which the
conditions are being assigned by clicking on the appropriate row in the list.
The dialog box for setting conditions

during combining the layout
All basic load cases are displayed in the list. The current load case (the one for which the
conditions are being defined) is marked by an arrow
. Clicking on a load case in the list
will enable selecting those loads that are simultaneously active with the current one, and a
suitable symbol
will be placed before their names. The same symbol is used to mark
those loads for which it has been prevously assigned to enter all combinations. From this it
follows that the current load case is impossible to find in any combination without these loads.
Deselecting a load is performed by clicking again, and as a result, the symbol is removed. The
only problem is that deselecting loads which enter all combinations is not possible.
289
The
symbol clearly indicates that the second load case
cannot appear in a combination without the third load case
By activating the command field OK, current dialog closes and in the main dialog of this
command will be displayed a new number of possible load-case combinations according to
given conditions.
Based on given conditions, a new number of possible

load-case combination is obtained
In the
column, the program places the
symbol in front of all load cases for which it
has been assigned that the current load case cannot be combined with, i.e. the
symbol in
front of all loads without which the current load case cannot appear in a combination.
290
The placed
symbol in the
column clearly indicates
the second load case cannot appear in a combination
without the third load case
It is possible to simultaneously select multiple load cases in order to assign them all the
combining criteria "Always combine with" or "Do not combine with". Selection is done as in all
other commands, using the Shift and Ctrl keys on the keyboard and the left mouse button.
Before you require from the program to create automatically combinations in accordance with
the assigned conditions for combining, it is also necessary to assign corresponding multipliers
in column Coeff. (Coefficient). The program assigns in default the value 1.0 as the value of
these coefficients for all basic load cases, but, of course, it is necessary to assign the actual
value of the multiplies for each of the basic load cases with which it is combined. In case you
assign the value 0 to the multiplier for any of the loads, it means that it is not included in
any of the combinations disregarding whether you have excluded them or not by the
conditions within other loads.
For the procedure of creating all possible combinations automatically it is necessary to activate
command field Generate combinations, after which the program will automatically fill in
the upper list box with all currently possible combinations, obeying all previously assigned
conditions. In such automatic creating, the program will determine a name, containing serial
numbers of all basic load cases, which are contained in the given combination, as well as the
intensities of the assigned multipliers to each combination. All combinations created in this way
will be completely equal with the individually created ones, i.e. you will be able to correct any
data within each of them.
In case previously created combinations exist in the upper list box, the program will issue a
warning and it will require the further course of this command to be determined.
Selecting the command field Change will result in replacing the existing combinations by the
newly created ones, command field Add will maintain old combinations and add newly
291
created ones to the end of the list, while the command field Cancel will denote quitting from
the action of creating the combinations automatically.
Appearance of a dialog box with automatically created combinations

The button
Delete all serves for removing all load combinations from the list.
Button "Sort" opens a drop-down menu with options for editing and sorting combination:
Drop-down menu with options for editing combination

Sort in descending order - The main criteria for sorting combinations are the numbers of
load cases that occur in them as well as the used safety factors. Selecting this option, the
combinations are listed from the highest to the lowest.
Sort in ascending order - Selecting this option combinations are listed from the lowest to the
highest.
292
Remove duplicates - When some of load combinations appear more than once in the list,
selecting this option eliminates all duplicates.
By using the button "Import of load-case combinations from other model" you can
import combinations from any previously created model. Its activation opens a dialog for file
selection:
After selecting a file, a dialog box for mapping basic load cases opens.
Shown list has as many rows as there are basic load cases in the selected file. The left column
shows the load cases from the specified file, while the right column determines which load
cases in the current file they correspond, that is, which load cases from the current file will
take their place in the imported combinations. By clicking the mouse on the arrow , which
is located at the end of each row, a drop-down list opens, and the load case of the current
model is selected, which will take the place of the load case from the selected file.
293
The content of this list is the same for each row. In the first place there is an option "0 None"
followed by all load cases that exist in the current model. Selecting the option "0 None" means
that none of the current load cases will take the place of the load case in the loaded
combination. Selecting one of load cases indicates that it, in loaded combination, will take the
place of the assigned load case, that is, in the loaded combination it will be assigned the safety
factor that stands with the load case in the selected file.
It should be emphasized that one load case from the current file can be assigned only one load
case from the selected file. Otherwise, the program displays an appropriate message.
In the bottom of the dialog all load combinations in the selected file are displayed, that is,
those that will be imported into the current model.
By selecting the button "OK" program closes the dialog for load case mapping and, with all
respect to all assigned parameters, imports the load combinations to the current model.
Activating the button "Saving load-combinations at the depot" saves all combinations
which are placed in the current model to a special place in the model file, from which it can be
restored at any time. If the saved combination is already in the warehouse, the program will
display an appropriate warning message.
294
By selecting the button "OK", old combinations are removed from the warehouse and those
currently in the list are saved.
Combinations are being loaded from the warehouse using the button "Importing load
combination from the depot" This button is available only when there are saved
combinations in the warehouse, and its activation opens the dialog for mapping load cases.
Working with this dialogue is the same as with dialog for combination import.
Saving the combination in the warehouse is used to preserve the created combinations in the
models where it is necessary to make some changes that delete them.
3.2.3
Area Load
By activating command Area Load, the standard procedure of drawing a
polygonal line, which will determine the contour of the area subjected to the load,
is entered.
Area Load First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End>):

It should be mentioned that a curved (evolved) surface upon which the load acts can also be
assigned in course of assigning the polygonal line. That can be achieved either by selecting
points in 2D View window, when a developed form of a curved surface is presented in it, or
by selecting a contour of any of the curved surfaces in the model by sub-option Contour.
After entering the polygonal line defining the contour of a plane or curved surface, the
program automatically opens a dialog box for defining the numerical data on area load.
295
Appearance of a dialog box for defining the numerical data on area load
Load Intensity
Numerical data on area load are determined by intensity and direction of the vector of its
action. Since in general case the load does not necessarily need to be uniformly distributed,
but arbitrarily trapezoidal, its intensity is defined by ordinates in three non-collinear points on
the assigned contour. In the upper left corner of the dialog box, in three edit boxes in column
T, points on the contour can be selected, while in three edit boxes in column q, load
intensities in those points are assigned.
Part reserved for defining the three non-collinear points

on the assigned contour
By selecting icon
from the toolbar located at the edge of the dialogue preview (see section
2.4.4), 3D view of the overall model will be replaced by the drawing of a given contour on
which the surface load is acting.
296
Numbering of the points from the assigned contour

can be clearly seen now in the drawing
After setting the intensity in any three chosen non-collinear points from the contour, selecting
the icon
you can again display the spatial model of the structure.
The assigned triangular distribution of load intensity

can be clearly seen from the content of the drawing
In most common cases in practice when it is necessary to assign uniformly distributed load,
assigned data in column T can be neglected, and it is sufficient to assign the desired value in
the first edit box, in column q. After that, the program will automatically join the same value
to the other points on the contour.
297
Assigning the value in first edit box, in column q,

resulted in defining the uniformly distributed load
Direction of Load Action Vector
The data on intensity of load action vector will be available to be changed only after assigning
the load intensity. The assigned load intensity is oriented by the program in default in direction
of the local Z-axis, while a completely arbitrary direction of load action vector can be assigned
by a series of data in the left part of the dialog box.
Part of the dialog box reserved for determining

the direction of load action vector
The way of assigning the direction of load action vector is determined by setting the
corresponding switch onto the switched-on state.
298
Local Coord. System
Load action vector is oriented in direction of one of the local axes of the assigned area
subjected to load. When this switch is set to switched-on state, three switched are
available for change X, Y and Z which determine in direction of which local axis will
the load vector be oriented. The local coordinate system of the area load is exactly the
same as for the other area elements in the program, i.e. it completely corresponds to the
local coordinate system for selecting points in 2D View window, when the given plane is
presented in that window. This means that the local X and Y-axes of each area belong in
the plane of the area itself, while the local Z-axis is in the direction of a line
perpendicular to the plane of the area.
Global Coord. System
Load action vector is oriented in direction of one of the global axes of the entire model.
When this switch is set to switched-on state, three switched are available for change X,
Y and Z which determine in direction of which global axis will the load vector be
oriented.
Any Direction
Load action vector is oriented in direction of arbitrarily oriented vector. When this switch
is set to switched-on state, you have the possibility to activate command field
Direction, and to determine the sense of load vector action vector by selecting two
arbitrary points in the drawing. By activating this command field, the program will
temporarily close the dialog box and it will require from the command bar first the
position of the first point and next the position of the second point of the load action
vector to be determined.
First Point:
Second Point:
After selecting the second point, the program will return to the dialog box for defining the
numerical data on loading, and it will write the standardised values of the assigned
vector in edit boxes X=, Y= and Z=.
Part planned for writing the value of standardised load vector

The data presented on standardised vector cannot be changed directly in the dialog box,
but they only serve as information on assigned direction of the load vector.
299
Wizard
In addition to the all previously described possibilities, the program has also envisaged
the possibility of simple defining the load which has been caused by various physical
phenomena such as: snow, water, pressure, etc. This option will specifically apply when
you assign a cylindrical or evolved area along which the load is effective. By turning the
switch Wizard on and selecting the command field , you will be allowed to open a
separate dialog box for defining some of the most common loads.
The dialog box for defining standard loads

on flat areas the layout
The procedure of assigning a load is much the same as on evolved surfaces, which will be
described in more detail in the next chapter. The only difference is that wind load cannot
be assigned on flat surfaces. Types of loads which can be defined on flat surfacesa are:
dead weight, snow load, gas pressure, water pressure and earth pressure.
Load per beam system
The surface load can be defined on the places where there are no panels but only beams. This
load turns into line or concentrated forces at the time of calculation, acting on the beams that
were previously assigned to it. The model saves and displays them as well as any other the
surface loads, and as such it to can be easily changed, which would not have been the case if a
permanent conversion of the line or point force had been made. The main purpose of this
option is to simplify the entry of loads that act on the beam and have a surface character, such
as wind loads, snow, roof weight, etc.
Parameters for defining this kind of surface load become available only when the check box
"Load is distributed over the linear system" is turned on.
300
Parameters for defining loads acting on the system of beams

Select entities - By using this button you exit to the drawing and select the beam on which
surface load is acting.
Uniformly distributed linear forces - If this switch is selected, the load is converted during
the calculation to the linear forces which act on the selected beams.
Concentrated forces - By selecting this switch the edit box "Division density" becomes
available. During calculation, the load is converted to concentrated forces, and in this edit box
distance between them is assigned.
Note: This is a special kind of entity because it is directly dependent on the position of some
other entity (beam). This connection between the data is not firm and during changes one or
the other side, can lead to conflicts. All geometric manipulation with such defined surface load
or beams (copy, move, rotate, mirror ...) can cause a situation where the data about the
position of the beam on which the load is transferred to, doesnt match the current position of
the beam in the real model. With the command for the control of the input data you can
determine the presence of these conflicts and also when starting the calculation, when the
input data control is done automatically. In that case, with the command for editing (Edit) it is
necessary to redefine a set of beams to which the load is transferred.
301
Graphic Control
The right part of the dialog box is reserved for control of entered data on area load.
Part of the dialog box planned for graphic control of assigned data
Structure - If this switch is set to switched-off state, only load which is currently being
assigned will be presented in the drawing, while if it is set to switched-on state, all structural
elements of the model will be presented in the drawing.
Setting the switch Structure to switched-off state

resulted in removing the structure from the drawing
Selection of views is done using icons from the toolbar located along the right edge of the
drawing area (see "2.4.4").
By activating the command field OK the command will be completed, and the assigned
numerical data will be joined to the drawn area subjected to load.
302
Graphic Symbols in the Drawing
In 3D View window, the assigned area load is presented in its realistic appearance with
actual position and sense of the arrows. Since the spacing between the arrows is determined
by distance in millimetres (see Chapter 3.5.1), drawing the area load in 3D View window
may last a long time if the current scale is small (see Chapter 3.5.2), and the area upon
which the load acts is large. In such cases it is necessary either to increase the spacing of the
arrows by command Settings, or to increase the current scale by command
Functionality. It should be mentioned that in the selecting procedure, in addition to
selecting the contour, it is also possible to select the arrow symbols.
In 2D View window, the area load is always represented only by hatched contour of the
assigned area upon which it acts. Setting the switch Intensity to switched-on state within
command Visibility, enables you to visualise the assigned intensity of area load in 2D View
window.
Note:
If you select more than one contour in course of assigning the area load by sub-option
Contour from the command bar, than it will be possible to assign only uniformly distributed
load to all selected contours in the dialog box.
3.2.3.1 Area Load on Evolved Surfaces

All aforementioned explanations apply both for flat and evolved surfaces. The only
difference is in whether the assigned points of application of the assigned area load will be
effective on a flat or on a curved surface. In addition to the all previously described
possibilities, the program has also envisaged the possibility of simple defining the load which
has been caused by various physical phenomena such as: snow, water, pressure, etc.
The switch Wizard has been envisaged for generating loads

due to various physical phenomena
The switch Wizard will not be active only if, for the surface along which the load is effective,
you have assigned a spiral curved surface, for which due to its specific geometry it is not
possible to generate loads automatically, as a result of various physical phenomena. By turning
the switch Wizard on and selecting the command field , you will be enabled to open a
separate dialog box for defining some of the most common loads on curved surfaces.
303
Dialog box for defining standard loads

on evolved surfaces
Depending on the form of the curved surface and on the selected type of load, the program
has the possibility to generate itself the load on the assigned curved surface. The data on the
assigned load are always defined in relation to the entire curved surface disregarding that the
assigned curved surface to which the load is applied may be on only a part of the entire curved
surface.
Input data on assigned load are defined in relation to the entire curved surface,
disregarding that the assigned curved surface to which the load is applied
may be on only a part of the entire curved surface
Any of the loads planned by the program is selected in the left part of the dialog box by setting
the corresponding switch to switched-on state. Depending on the selected type of surface, the
appearance of the entire curved surface and the nature of the selected type of load are
presented in the image in the right part of the dialog box. The form of the curved surface is
presented schematically and it always has the same shape although the position of the
assigned curved surface may be rotated in space. The following types of loading are planned
by the program:
Weight
This type of load can be assigned for the sphere, cone and tunnel. The load is defined by
assigning only one data g=. The vector acts in direction of negative global Z-axis and it has
304
a constant value in all points on the assigned surface. This load completely corresponds to the
assigned load in main dialog box when uniformly distributed load in direction of global Z-axis is
assigned.
Sphere
Cone
Tunnel
Snow
assigning only one data s=. The vector acts in direction of negative global Z-axis and in each
point on the surface, it has a different intensity, calculated from the assigned value of the load
in projection and from inclination of the given point on the surface.
Sphere
Cone
Tunnel
Pressure
assigning only one data p=. The vector acts in direction perpendicular to the curved surface
and it has a constant value in all points on the assigned surface. This load completely
corresponds to the assigned load in main dialog box when uniformly distributed load in
direction of local Z-axis is assigned.
Sphere
Cone
Tunnel
Hydrostatic
Water pressure can be assigned for the sphere, cone, tunnel and cylinder. This load is
conditionally called water load, but it can be also applied to any other liquid. The load is
defined by assigning the data h= representing the global Z coordinate of the top level of the
liquid and by data = that represents the bulk density of the liquid. The load vector acts in
direction of perpendicular to the curved surface and its intensity is determined by the assigned
bulk density of the liquid and by the height of water column in the given point.
305
Sphere
Cone
Tunnel
Cylinder
It should be emphasised that the liquid level is determined by data h= representing the
global Z coordinate, and in case that the liquid level is below the given curved surface, no
load will be generated on it.
Since the curved surface may not always be upright as in the image, but it may have a
completely arbitrary position in space, you can determine whether the water is inside or
outside the given curved surface to by the switch From Inside.
From Inside - OFF
From Inside - ON
Soil
Soil pressure can be assigned on the sphere, cone, tunnel and cylinder. Soil load is defined by
assigning the data h= representing the global Z coordinate of the top soil level, the data
= representing the bulk density of the soil and the data = representing the angle of
internal friction of the soil. The load vector has its radial and its tangential components,
expressed as functions of the height of top soil level in regard to the given point, the bulk
density and the angle of internal friction. In case that value zero is assigned to the angle of
internal friction, only radial component will exist which will completely correspond to the
character of the previously described water load.
306
Sphere
Cone
Tunnel
Cylinder
It should be emphasised that the soil level is determined by data h= representing the global
Z coordinate, and in case that the soil level is below the given curved surface, no load will be
generated on it.
The role of the switch From Inside has exactly the same sense as in water load.
Based on the assigned input data (h, , ) program generates load by Rankine's theory for the
Earth pressure:
p=h
Active Earth pressure - if this switch is selected
formula:
than it is calculated by the following
=tg2(/4 - /2)
Passive Earth pressure - if this switch is selected
formula:
than it is calculated by the following
=tg2(/4 + /2)
At rest lateral earth pressure - if this switch is selected
following formula:
than it is calculated by the
=1 - sin()
Wind
Wind load can be assigned to act on the sphere, cone, tunnel and cylinder. Since all input data
on wind load are assigned in regard to the base plane of the entire curved surface, owing to
the nature of the wind action the generated load will correspond to the actual state only in
case when the base plane of the entire surface subjected to wind action is horizontal. In all
other cases, the program will generate the load exactly on the basis of assigned input data,
but surely, it will not correspond to the nature of horizontal wind action.
The vector of generated load is always perpendicular to the surface in each of its points, and it
is determined by the intensity of the basic wind action (w=), by the angle at which the wind
acts in the base plane of the curved surface (=) and by the shape coefficients for the given
curved surface. The angle at which the wind acts is assigned in regard to the projected position
of global X-axis to the centre if the base plane, and it increases in the counter clockwise sense
(this angle is not assigned only for the tunnel, since in the program it is adopted that the wind
always acts in direction perpendicular to the lengthwise direction of the tunnel).
307
Sphere
Cone
Tunnel
Cylinder
Shape coefficients depend on the type of curved surface and they are always defined for the
entire surface. Shape coefficients are defined by two functions. The first function describes the
variation of load in the base plane of the curved surface and the second function determines
the variation of load along the height of the curved surface. An exception is the curved surface
called the tunnel in this program since only the function of wind load intensity variation along
its height is defined. These data are assigned in the lists in the lower part of the dialog box.
Lists in which the shape coefficients of load action are defined

Operation with these lists is identical as in other dialog boxes in the program. Namely, by
command fields
Add and
Delete new row is added and the currently selected row is
removed, respectively. Only data on initial and end positions of shape coefficients cannot be
deleted in the lists. If the command field Reset is activated, both lists of shape coefficients
will be emptied, and they will only contain the initial and the end value.
Since the lists with the shape coefficients depend on the regulations in accordance with which
the calculations are carried out, and they may contain a large number of data, you have the
possibility to create the base of shape coefficients that you will use according to need in
various models.
308
Part of the dialog box reserved for operating

with base of wind action shape coefficients
When command field Save is activated, a dialog box, in which you can assign an arbitrary
name with which the given lists of shape coefficients will be saved in the base, opens.
The closed list is planned for selecting any of the previously saved lists of shape coefficients,
while the command field Delete is used to delete the currently active lists of shape
coefficients from the base.
For the sphere, cone and cylinder the shape coefficients of
load action in the base plane are assigned in a table
containing columns and x (). Since the projected form
of these curved surfaces to the base plane is a circle, values
of the central angle ranging from 0 to 180 are assigned in
column , in arbitrarily chosen number of intervals, while
symmetrical values are assumed for the other half of the
circle. In column x (), the ordinate of load in radial sense
x () is assigned for each position of the point on the circle
determined by the value of the central angle . Value of the
angle =0 corresponds to the initial position determined by
the assigned angle , at which the wind load acts. Angle
increases in counter clockwise sense and each table has to
contain at least one initial value equal to 0, and one end
value equal to 180.
309
The shape of load action along the height of the sphere and
the tunnel is defined in a table containing columns and
y (). Since the vertical cross-section of these curved
surfaces is a semicircle, values of the central angle ranging
from 0 to 90 are assigned in column , in arbitrarily
chosen number of intervals, while symmetrical values are
assumed for the other half of the semicircle. In column
y (), the ordinate of load in radial is assigned for each
position of the point on the semicircle determined by the
value of the central angle .
The shape of load action along the height of the cone and the
cylinder is defined in a table containing columns h and
y (h). In column h, global Z coordinate is assigned in
arbitrarily chosen number of intervals, while in column y(h)
the load intensity on the given level coordinate. The change
of shape coefficient between two adjacent points along the
height is linear, and all ordinates above the first and the last
height in the list are constant. This means that if there is only
one row of data in the list, disregarding the assigned global
elevation coordinate, the intensity will always be constant
along the height of the curved surface.
Activating command field OK will result in returning to the basic dialog box for defining the
area load, and the actual appearance of the assigned load will appear in the figure.
Actual appearance of assigned load presented by option Wizard

The density of the arrows on the evolved surface depends on the density of auxiliary mesh
joined to the given curved surface (see Chapter 3.1.13.6).
3.2.4
Linear Load
By activating command Linear Load, the standard procedure of drawing the
polygonal line, that is to determine the position where the linear forces or
moments are applied, is entered.
Linear Load First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle/ Offset / <End>):
310
After entering the polygonal line, the program automatically opens a deilogue box for defining
numerical data on linear loading.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining

the numerical data on linear load
In case the polygonal line consists of several segments, or that several segments of a
polygonal line have been selected by choosing sub-option Contour from the command bar,
the assigned numerical data in this dialog box will be common to all segments of the polygonal
line.
Since both linear forces and linear moments can be assigned by this command, by setting one
of the offered switches to switched-on state the type of load, which is being assigned, is
selected.
By selecting a corresponding switch, the data entered

will represent either forces or moments
311
In case when both forces and moments act along the same line, such loading has to be
assigned in two steps. First the linear force, let us say, is assigned, and next the moment, over
the same polygonal line, by activating this command again.
Numerical data on intensity and direction of load vector action have the same meaning both
for forces and for moments. All explanations given in this part of the instructions apply both to
forces and to moments.
Load intensity
Numerical data on linear load are determined by intensity and direction of the vector of its
action. Since in general case the load may be arbitrarily trapezoidal, its intensity is defined by
assigning the values at the start (p1=) and at the end (p2=), of each segment of the
assigned polygonal line.
In most common cases in practice, when uniformly distributed load needs to be assigned, it is
sufficient to assign only the desired value in the first edit box p1=, and the program will
automatically assign the same value in edit box p2=.
Direction of Load Vector Action
Data on direction of load vector action will be available to be changed only after assigning the
load intensity. The assigned load intensity is oriented in direction of the global Z-axis by the
program in default, while you can assign a completely arbitrary direction of load vector action
with a series of data in the left part of the dialog box.
Part of the dialog box reserved for determining

the direction of load vector action
The way of assigning the direction of load vector action is determined by setting the
corresponding switch to switched-on state.
Local Coord. System
Load action vector is set in direction of one of the local axes of the assigned line
subjected to load. This switch will be available only in case when all assigned segments
of the polygonal line belong to the plane presented in 2D View window, immediately
before entering this dialog box. When this switch is set to switched-on state, three
switches X, Y and Z, which determine in direction of which local axis will the load
vector be oriented, are also available for change. The drawn segment of the polygonal
312
line determining the position of load action represents the local X-axis. The local Y-axis is
perpendicular to local X-axis so that together they form a plane that corresponds to the
current view in 2D View window, while the local Z-axis is in the direction perpendicular
to the plane presented in 2D View window. In case an arc segment of a polygonal line
is assigned, the local X-axis represents the tangential while the local Y-axis represents
the radial component of the load along the arc.
Global Coord. System
Load action vector is set in direction of one of the global axes of the entire model. When
this switch is set to switched-on state, three switched are available for change X, Y
and Z which determine in direction of which global axis will the load vector be oriented.
Any Direction
Load action vector is oriented in direction of arbitrarily oriented vector. When this switch
is set to switched-on state, you have the possibility to activate command field
Direction, and to determine the sense of load action vector by selecting two arbitrary
points in the drawing. By activating this command field, the program will temporarily
close the dialog box and it will require from the command bar first the position of the first
point and next the position of the end point of the load action vector to be determined.
First Point:
Second Point:
After selecting the second point, the program will return to the dialog box for defining the
numerical data on loading, and it will write the standardised values of the assigned
vector in edit boxes X=, Y= and Z=.
Part planned for writing the value of standardised load vector

The data presented on standardised vector cannot be changed directly in the dialog box,
but they only serve as information on assigned direction of the load vector.
Per projection
this check box is available only if the load acts in the direction of one of global axis or
arbitrary vector. Turning it on, linear forces are assigned to act on the projection
segments of the drawn polyline on the direction forming a right angle with the direction
of the acting of the load vector.
313
This is just a graphical representation of the position of the load that makes it easier to
enter specific load, such as snow for example. When calculating, program projects the
linear force on the polyline segments and calculate required intensity for each of them.
Without this option, the intensity would have to be "manually" calculated for each
segment, and then entered as a separate load for each of them.
Graphic Control
The right part of the dialog box is reserved for control of entered data on linear load. All
previously said for the graphics control of the surface load, also applies here, except that the
role of the icon
is different. After selecting it, the current "2D view" window content is
displayed on the drawing.
Icon
displays the current content of "2D view" on the drawing
This option is very convenient for control of entered load, when it belongs to the plane of
current presentation in 2D View window.
314
By activating the command field OK the command will be completed, and the assigned
numerical data will be joined to all drawn segments of the polygonal line.
In 3D View window, the assigned linear load is always presented in its realistic appearance
with actual position and sense of the arrows, while two cases may occur in 2D View window.
If the vector of assigned load belongs to the plane of current view in 2D View window, it will
be represented by arrows and if not so it will be represented only by a line along which the
assigned load acts.
Load belongs to the plane of current view

in 2D View window
Load does not belong to the plane of current view in 2D View window
Note:
It should be mentioned that in the selecting procedure, in addition to selecting the line along
which the load acts, it is also possible to select the arrow symbols.
315
3.2.5
Point Load
By activating the command Point Load, the standard procedure of selecting the
points in the drawing, that will determine the points in which the concentrated
loads or the concentrated moments are applied, is entered.
Point Load (Choice / Deselect / <End>):

After selecting all points in which the concentrated loads or the concentrated moments having
the same intensity and sense of action are to be applied, the program will automatically open a
dialog box for defining the numerical data on point load.

the numerical data on point load
The intensity of the load
Following switches determine the type of load:
Switches for the selection of the type of the load
316
Force - concentrated forces are assigned
Moment moments are assigned
Force and moment Force and moments are assigned. Pointed load at the same time can
have three components of the concentrated force and three moment components. These
components act in directions of a global coordinate system axis.
Edit boxes in which the components of the concentrated forces

and moments are assigned
Without arrows - When this check box is turned off, each component of the load is displayed
using a symbol that indicates its direction. Next to each symbol, the intensity of assigned
component is displayed. In the point of the load a colored circle is drawn, and next to it the
intensities of the load components are written, one below another.
Show as a resultant force - When this check box is turned on, the resultant of the assigned
components of concentrated force and the resultant moment of all assigned components are
displayed. Otherwise, each component is displayed separately.
Direction of the load vector
If options "Force" or "Moment" are selected, everything said in the previous section for linear
loads also applies here, except that in this case the load does not act along the line, but on the
locations of selected points from the model. If option "Force and moment" is selected, direction
of the load vector is determined by the given components of the concentrated force (moment).
In 3D View window, the assigned point load is always presented in its realistic appearance
with actual position and sense of the arrows while two cases may occur in 2D View window.
If the vector of assigned load belongs to the plane of current view in 2D View window, it will
be represented by arrows and if not so it will be represented only by a small circle that
determines the point in which the load is applied. There is a third special case for a
concentrated moment, when the moment vector is in direction perpendicular to the current
view plane. Then it is represented by an arc-shaped symbol clearly indicating the sense of
rotation.
317
Symbol for concentrated force when the load vector belongs to the current view plane
in 2D View window.
Symbol for concentrated force when the load vector does not belong to the current
view plane in 2D View window.
Symbol for concentrated moment when the load vector belongs to the current view
plane in 2D View window.
Symbol for concentrated moment when the load vector is perpendicular to the current
Symbol for concentrated moment when the load vector does not belong to the current
Note:
It should be mentioned that in the selecting procedure, in addition to selecting the point in
which the load is applied, it is also possible to select the arrow symbols.
3.2.6
Support Displacement
By command Support Displacement, displacement of any of the defined point

supports on the model can be assigned as loading. The command bar obtains its standard form
for selecting:
<0sel.> Support Displacement - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End>):
You are now expected to select all point supports to which the same displacement or rotation
will be joined. After completed selection, the dialog box with the following appearance will
open by selecting sub-option End from the command bar.
Appearance of a dialog box for defining

the numerical data on support displacement
Displacement and rotation are assigned in the direction of local axes of the given point
support, and it can only be assigned in the direction of restrained displacement, or rotation.
The following displacements and rotations are planned by the program:
u1
u2
u3
1
2
Support
Support
Support
Support
Support
displacement in direction of its local axis 1

rotation about its local axis 1
rotation about its local axis 2
318
3 Support rotation about its local axis 3
Since the displacements are assigned in the direction of local axes of a point support,
subsequent change of orientation of the local coordinate system of the point support will result
in changing the direction of the previously assigned displacement or rotation.
In case support displacement is assigned in the direction of unrestrained displacement, or
rotation, the program will not react immediately, but immediately before the calculations,
within the control of input data it will detect the support displacement assigned in this way as
an error in input data.
In 3D View window, the assigned support displacements are always presented by arrows
indicating the exact direction of the assigned displacement, or rotation, while two cases may
occur in 2D View window.
In case all assigned displacements, or rotations, for the given point support belong to the
plane of current view in 2D View window, they will be represented by arrows and if at least
one assigned displacement, or rotation does not belong to the given plane it will be
represented by a unique graphic symbol in shape of a rhomb.
Symbol of assigned support displacement when its vector belongs to the plane of
current view in 2D View window.
Symbol of assigned support rotation when its vector belongs to the plane of current
view in 2D View window.
Symbol of assigned support displacement when at least one assigned displacement,
or rotation does not belong to the plane of current view in 2D View window.
Note:
It should be mentioned that in the selecting procedure it is also possible to select the arrow
symbols.
3.2.7
Slab Temperature
By this command temperature influences in a plate/wall, can be joined to the

current load case. After this command is activated, the command bar attains its standard form
for drawing the arbitrary polygonal line that will determine the contour of the surface
subjected to temperature influences in a plate/wall.
Slab Temperature Load First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End>:
After entering the polygonal line that determines the contour of the surface subjected to
temperature influences, the program will automatically open a dialog box for defining the
numerical data.
319

on temperature influences in a plate/wall
Temperature influences are determined by two parameters having the following meaning:
to-
the magnitude of this parameter determines the temperature change i.e. influences due
to heating in the median plane of the plate
dt-
by assigning this value the temperature difference on the top and bottom side of the
plate is determined (positive value indicates that the temperature is higher on the
bottom edge of the plate)
In assigning the temperature influences in a plate/wall, it is important that the parameter t,

within material joined to the given plate/wall, has the actual value.
Note:
When assigning the contour of the surface subjected to temperature influences, there will be
no limitations. However, the control of input data, automatically performed before generating
the mesh of finite elements, i.e. before the calculations, issues a warning in case the assigned
contour is not within the plate/wall with its entire overall size (see Chapter 3.3.5).
3.2.8
Beam Temperature
By command Beam Temperature, it is possible to assign temperature influences

as a load in any of the beams in the model. The command bar attains its standard form for
selecting:
<0sel.> Beam Temperature - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Now you are expected to select all beams to which same temperature influences will be joined.
After completed selection, the dialog box with the following appearance will open by selecting
sub-option End from the command bar.

on temperature influences in beams
320
The meaning of the offered parameters is exactly the same as in temperature influences in
plates, except that here it is possible to assign the temperature change in direction of both
transverse local axes of the beam.
to-
the magnitude of this parameter determines the temperature change, i.e. the influences
due to heating along the neutral axis of the beam
dt2- the temperature difference on the sides of beam cross-section in direction of its local axis
2 is determined by assigning this value
dt3- the temperature difference on the sides of beam cross-section in direction of its local axis
3 is determined by assigning this value
For correct analysis of influences due to temperature influences, in addition to correctly
assigned data t, on the level of material joined to the given beam, it is also necessary that
the dimensions of the beam are correctly assigned, since they are used in calculating the
temperature changes.
Note:
In case you subsequently delete a beam in which you have assigned temperature influences,
the program will not react. However, the control of input data, automatically performed before
generating the mesh of finite elements, i.e. before the calculations, issues a warning in case
the assigned temperature influences do not act with their overall size along any of the beam.
3.2.9
Axial strain
The command Axial strain is located within the drop-down menu Load and is
used for assigning axial or tensile force to the selected beams. The analogous
process for this type of load would be assigning temperature correction in the
member axis. The intensity of the force being assigned is related to the nondeformed member. Due to the model deformation (change of spacing between the
nodes in which the member is connected to the structure), as a result value of the
axial force, a new value will be obtained in that member. Activating the command
will result in starting the procedure of selecting a beam:
<0 sel.> Axial strain Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
If you have selected beams which have different number of cross sections, some of them will
be discarded from the selection by the program (beams with the fewest sections will remain
for selection) followed by an appropriate message:
If all selected beams have the same cross section, a dialoge box of the following layout opens
up:
321
The dialog box for assigning axial strain - the layout

The layout of the cross section of the selected beams is displayed in the right part of the dialog
box, whereas the box with as many rows as there are independent parts within a given cross
section is displayed in the left part of the dialog box. The description and material is written for
each of them, whereas the desired axial strain is assigned in the column Force.
If the selected beams do not have the same cross section, the right part of the dialog box will
be empty and Various cross sections will be written instead of the cross section description.
The dialog box when selected beams have various

cross sections - the layout
The command Axial strain has a specific application in those structural elements which are
known as tie-beams. We shall show how this command operates on a simple example of
placing a tie-beam with the assigned force (5kN) at the cantilever end. The model is formed in
the same way as in the real life situation: first, the physical force is brought to the cantilever
end (phase I), and then the cantilever end is hooked to the tie-beam which is tied by assigning
axial strain (phase II).
322
Model in phase I
Model in phase II
After the analysis has been completed, in phase II, we will obtain the assigned force in the tiebeam and suitable forces in the cantilever.
The diagram of section forces N1 in phase II

323
The diagram of section forces M3 in phase II

The tie-beams which would subsequently be added, would also be assigned in two phases: in
the first phase, concentrated forces are brought onto the model, and in the second phase, a
tie-beam with the assigned axial strain is placed instead of concentrated forces. From this it
follows that, if there were two tie-beams on the model which are not tied at the same time, we
would have to have four phases. The rest of the load is brought on the structure in later
phases.
3.2.10 Moving Load

After activating the command field Moving Load, the standard procedure of
drawing a polygonal line that will determine the path along which the moving load moves is
entered.
Moving Load Starting Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End>):
After defining the polygonal line determining the path of the moving load, the program will
automatically open a dialog box for defining the numerical data on moving load.
Appearance of a dialog box for defining the numerical data on moving load
324
Numerical data determining the load pattern and the interval of the load moving along the
assigned path are joined to the assigned path of the moving load. The data on the load pattern
movement interval is assigned in edit box Step of moveable load:, and it practically
determines all possible positions of the moving load pattern along the assigned path. It should
be mentioned that this interval represents the arc length on arc parts of assigned path of load
movement, and in each of those positions the load will change its position depending on the
inclination of the tangent in the given point on the arc.
Scheme of moving load may consist of: concentrated force, concentrated moments, line force,
line moments and surface load. These data are assigned in the left corner of the dialog box in
corresponding card files. The way of operating with dialog boxes in which card files are used
can be seen in Chapter 2.4.4.
Concentrated forces
A click on the mouse button over the name of card file Concentrated forces,
resulted in presenting the content of that part of the dialog box
Data on point load are assigned within the presented table, where data in each of the rows
correspond to one concentrated force. The position and intensity of the concentrated force are
determined by assigned numerical data in corresponding columns:
P-
force intensity
X1 - coordinate of a point in which the concentrated force is applied in direction of local axis
1, of the path along which the moving load moves
Y1 - coordinate of a point in which the concentrated force is applied in direction of local axis
3, of the path along which the moving load moves
The coordinates determining the position of the forces are assigned in regard to the reference
point. By a reference point, we here understand all assigned positions in which the assigned
pattern of moving load can be found.
The convention on local coordinate system of the path along which the moving load moves is
the same as in beams (see Chapter 3.1.4.). The local coordinate system of the path along
which the moving load moves can be changed subsequently by command Change L.C.S. (see
Chapter 3.3.2).
The role of command fields
Add and Delete is the same as in other dialog boxes, i.e.
a new row of data is added, or the currently selected row is deleted by them.
325
In default, the program orients the assigned forces in the direction of global Z-axis of the
entire model. The value of standardised force vector for the current row of data is written in
three edit boxes X=, Y= and Z= below the previously mentioned table, so that the
direction of the vector action can be assigned either by changing these values directly in edit
boxes, or by activating command field Direction. When this command field is activated, the
program will temporarily close the dialog box and it will require from the command bar fist the
position of the first point, and next the second point of the concentrated force action vector to
be determined.
First Point:
Second Point:
After selecting the second point, the program will return to the dialog box and it will write the
standardised values of the assigned vector in edit boxes X=, Y= and Z=. It should be
mentioned that in these edit boxes, standardised values of the vector for the force, the data
for which are presented in the currently active row, are presented. This means that generally
each force can have a different direction of the load vector action.
Concentrated moments
The click of the mouse over the name files "Concentrated moments"
led to the display of the content of that part of the dialogue
Data of the concentrated moment is assigned in the displayed table. Data in each row
corresponds to one concentrated moment. The position and intensity of the concentrated
moment is determined by the assigned numerical data in the appropriate column:
Mx - The intensity of the concentrated moment component acting in the direction of the global
X axis.
My - The intensity of the concentrated moment component acting in the direction of the global
Y axis
Mz - The intensity of the concentrated moment component acting in the direction of the global
Z axis.
X1 - coordinates of the point where the concentrated moment acts in the direction of local
axis "1", on the moving load route.
326
Y1 - coordinates of the point where the concentrated moment acts in the direction of local
axis "3", on the moving load route.
The role of the buttons
Add and
Delete is the same as in other dialogs. Using them,
a new row of data is added, or the currently selected one is deleted.
Linear forces
A click on the mouse button over the name of card file Linear forces,
Only uniformly distributed load acting along a straight segment is planned by the program. The
data on linear load are assigned in a table containing the following columns:
p-
Intensity of linear uniformly distributed load
X1 - Coordinate of the initial point of the line along which the uniformly distributed linear load
acts, in direction of local axis 1 of the path along which the moving load moves
Y1 - Coordinate of the initial point of the line along which the uniformly distributed linear load
X2 - Coordinate of the end point of the line along which the uniformly distributed linear load
Y2 - Coordinate of the end point of the line along which the uniformly distributed linear load
All previously presented concerning the local coordinate system of the path along which the
moving load moves and concerning the direction of the point load action vector applies here.
This means that the program in default directs the vector of linear load action in direction of
negative global Z-axis of the entire model, where this data can be subsequently changed for
each linear load assigned in the table.
327
Line moments
Mouse click over the tab "Line moments"

led to the display of the content of that part of the dialogue
Program provides assigning of only equally divided linear moments that act on the straight
segment. Data of the linear moments is assigned in the table that contains the following
columns:
m-
intensity of the linear equally divided moment.
X1 - coordinates of the starting point of the line whereby the equally divided linear
momentum act, in the direction of local axis "1" route, on the moving load route.
Y1 - coordinates of the starting point of the line whereby the equally divided linear
X2 - coordinates of the starting point of the line whereby the equally divided linear
Y2 - coordinates of the starting point of the line whereby the equally divided linear
Only a moment around the line whereby it acts can be assigned, respectively the line that was
defined by the data in the columns X1, Y1, X2, Y2.
328
Area load
A click on the mouse button over the name of card file Area load,
The program plans only uniformly distributed load acting on rectangular area to be assigned.
The data on area load are assigned in a table containing the following columns:
q-
Intensity of uniformly distributed area load
X1 - Coordinate of the initial point of the diagonal line of the area onto which the area load
Y1 - Coordinate of the initial point of the diagonal line of the area onto which the area load
X2 - Coordinate of the opposite point of the diagonal line of the area onto which the area load
Y2 - Coordinate of the opposite point of the diagonal line of the area onto which the area load
The same convention concerning the local coordinate system and concerning the direction of
the load action vector also applies here.
Graphic Control
All assigned loads are graphically presented in the right part of the dialog box. To enable
easier control of the input data in the table, the load the data of which are contained in the
current row of the given table are presented by a special color in the drawing. Moreover, a
yellow arrow, in direction of local axis 1, indicating the sense the load pattern moves is
placed in the position of the reference point.
329
Space planned for graphic control of assigned pattern of moving load

Using the icons that are in a toolbar located along the right edge of the space allocated for the
graphics control of the given load scheme, you have the ability to replace a 3D view with one
of given other views (see "2.4.4").
Library of Load Patterns
Since defining the load pattern may be a strenuous task, and same patterns on different
structures are often applied in practice, the program enables the created patterns to be saved
in the base and to be used subsequently.
Part of the dialog box reserved for operating with the library of load patterns
When you have defined a desired load pattern, you have the possibility to save it permanently
by activating commands field Save.
330
By assigning the desired name and by activating command field OK, all assigned data will be
saved in the library of load patterns. From that moment on, the assigned name will be
appearing in the closed list, and by selecting it, all previously assigned data will be taken over.
Command field Delete is used to delete a selected pattern that has been previously placed
into the base, while command field Reset enables all previously defined data on the current
load pattern to be removed simultaneously.
After activating the command field OK, the dialog box will close and the command will be
completed. On the basis of the assigned data on the interval of movement of the moving load,
symbols determining all possible positions of the assigned pattern of moving load will be
presented in the drawing.
The symbol x placed along the assigned path determines

all possible positions of the pattern of moving load
It is worth noting that, the program does not permit the line along which the moving load goes
to be outside the structure. This option is quite useful, since this is the only way in which it is
possible to analyse cases in which a load is coming onto the structure.
Control of Moving Load
Since within one load case you may assign several paths of moving loads, where each of them
may have a different pattern of moving load, the command Moving Load Control enables
you to visually control both the appearance of the assigned load pattern and all its possible
positions along the assigned path. When this command is selected, the assigned pattern of the
moving load, in the position of the initial point of the path along which it moves, is presented
in the drawing, and the command bar obtains the following form:
Moving Load Control (Play / foRward / Back / First / Last / Adjust / <End>):
331
The assigned pattern of the moving load, in the position of the initial point
of the path along which it moves, is presented in the drawing
When sub-option Play is selected, the program creates an animation of movement of the
assigned pattern of moving load, placing it sequentially into all assigned positions along the
assigned movement path. The command bar attains a new form now:
Moving Load Control (<Stop>):
If the sub-option Stop is selected, the animation will stop, and the program will return to the
basic form of command bar within this command.
It should be mentioned that in case several paths of moving load exist, they will be sorted
according to their position and they will represent one whole. More exactly, the load will move
from the end position of one path to the initial position within the next path.
In order to enable easier insight into accuracy of assigned data on moving load, you can use all
transparent commands during the animation. In addition, you can change transparently the
content in 2D View window, by setting also the view of any part of the model in it.
By sub-option Adjust, you have the possibility to adjust the parameters influencing the
animation of movement of moving load in the opened dialog box.
Appearance of the dialog box for adjusting

the animation parameters
By assigning the data in edit box Timer, you can influence the speed of movement of the
pattern of moving load (when a smaller number is assigned the pause is shorter i.e. the
movement is faster), and by changing the position of the slider in the bottom part of the dialog
box you can change the current position of the moving load pattern.
332
Other sub-options on the command bar are used to change the position of the moving load:
foRward Moving load is moved by one interval forward
Back
Moving load is moved by one interval backward
First
Moving load is placed into initial position
Last
Moving load is placed into end position
Note:
In course of execution of this command, the load assigned within the moving load pattern will
always be visible, disregarding the state of visibility of given type of load set by command
Visibility. This command is very convenient in case when within a same load case, in addition
to moving load you have some other load acting with it simultaneously. Then, deleting the
visibility of area, linear and point load will result in clearer presentation, since only moving load
will be visible in the model.
Note:
In case the loads act outside the structure in any of the assigned positions, that will not cause
an error during the control of input data before the calculations, but simply these loads will not
be taken into account (see Chapter 3.3.5). This enables you to be considerably more relaxed
while assigning both the path and the pattern of the moving load.
Method of Calculating
Moving load has a special treatment in the program, and thus the load case having at least one
moving load is specially processed. Namely, in course of calculating, that number of load cases
will be created internally as is the number of assigned positions of the moving load pattern.
This means that a new load case, which will be separately calculated, will be created for each
assigned position of the moving load pattern. From all these calculated internal load cases, the
envelope of extreme influences and influences corresponding to them are saved. Therefore, in
the post processing module you will not be able to see the internally created load cases, but
instead of usual results you will obtain an envelope of extreme influences for a load case
containing at least one moving load.
Other loading that acts simultaneously with the assigned moving load is also separately
processed. Namely, when the envelope for all assigned positions of moving load is calculated,
a series of internal load cases for the given type of loading is then again created, and only one
load acting simultaneously with the moving load is assigned to each internal load case. Next,
an analysis is carried out in each point of the model to determine whether the given load
increases the obtained envelope of influences and if so, the previously calculated envelope is
increased by the value of the added influence.
This means that from a load case containing at least one moving load, the same number of
internal load cases as is the number of possible positions of moving load is created, increased
by the number of added loads that do not represent the moving load.
A typical example of such method of calculating is when within the same load case in addition
to moving load you assign the live load from the pedestrians in front and being the vehicles.
We shall clarify everything previously said in a simple example of a continuous girder. Within
the same load case, we shall analyse the influence of the moving load and of the live load from
the pedestrians in front and being the vehicles.
333
Input data
Since this problem is reduced to constructing an influence line, and in finding the critical
position of the moving load pattern for all influences and all sections along the girder, First we
shall present the results obtained by constructing the influence line and by finding the critical
position of the assigned pattern of moving load. To compare the results we shall analyse the
bending moments, obtained by constructing the influence line over the middle support and in
the middle of the whole girder.
By constructing the influence line for the support moment, the given critical position
of the moving load induced the extreme value Mz= -43.94 KNm
By constructing the influence line for the moment in span, the given critical position
of the moving load induced the extreme value Mz= 31.4 KNm
334
The problem will now be solved by the moving load, and the results obtained for various input
data will be analysed. Since a series of internal load cases is created for each possible position
of moving load and load due pedestrians that are calculated separately, negative load due to
pedestrians has to be assigned underneath the overall size of the vehicles also within the
assigned pattern of moving load. Thus, we have the possibility to assign the load due to
pedestrians along the whole girder, which will be cancelled beneath the vehicles in every
position of the moving load.
Appearance of the assigned pattern of moving load

The size of the interval for the load pattern movement that you will assign depends on the
geometry of the structure and your sense for expected accuracy of the results obtained. The
same applies to the load due to pedestrians, i.e. into how many parts will you divide the load
due to pedestrians along the whole length of the girder. Care should be taken not to
exaggerate here, since an interval of load pattern movement that is too small and a dense
division of load due to pedestrians will result to a large number of internal load cases, which
will slow down the calculations of the model.
In this example the value Step of moveable load: 1 m is adopted for interval of the moving
load pattern movement, which will result in creating 30 internal load cases since the length of
the girder is 30 m. The division of the load due to pedestrians along the whole girder will be
varied, and thus its influence on calculation results will be shown.
Only one load due to pedestrians along the whole girder is assigned
335
For such input data, internal number 30 + 1 = 31 of load cases is obtained. Load due to
pedestrians assigned in this way resulted in drastic discrepancy from exact results obtained by
constructing the influence line, especially for the moment in the middle of the girder.
An individual load due to pedestrians is assigned in each span

For such input data, internal number 30 + 3 = 33 of load cases is obtained. Results are more
than satisfactory.
Load due to pedestrians is divided along each meter along the girder
For such input data, internal number 30 + 30 = 60 of load cases is obtained. The same
accuracy as in previous case is obtained, so the number of internal load cases has been
unnecessarily increased.
A conclusion can be drawn from all previously stated that the load due to pedestrians should
be divided into sufficient number of parts instead of too large number of parts, and this
division should be in accordance with the geometry of the structure. This is especially
important in complex structures, where a number of internal load cases that is too large may
considerably slow down the calculations.
Using the moving load is surely much more practical than constructing the influence line, since
both the extreme values and the corresponding values of all influences in all sections of the
336
girder are obtained simultaneously. Results obtained in this way can also be used for
dimensioning the structure directly.
3.2.11 Influence Line

When command Influence Line is selected, the procedure of defining the
position and type of influence for which the influence line needs to be constructed.
Appearance of a dialog box for selecting

the influence for which the influence line
needs to be constructed
In the presented dialog box, the influence for which the desired influence line is to be
constructed is selected by setting the corresponding switch to switched-on state. It can clearly
be seen from the name of the switch that both any influence in a beam and any reaction of a
point load can be selected. The selected influences, of course, apply to the local coordinate
system of the beam/support.
When you have selected the desired influence and activated the command field OK, the
program will close the dialog box and it will require from the command bar the position for
which the influence line is required to be determined. If an influence concerning cross-section
forces and displacements in a beam is selected, a message appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Beam on which influence line is requested Select (<End>):
Now the User is expected to first select the beam, and next the position of the influence line on
the selected beam to be selected.
Point of the influence Line:
When selecting the position of the influence line, be sure to use the OSNAP criteria for precise
point targeting, since the program will accept only that point that belongs to the previously
selected beam. The program will place a corresponding symbol in the selected position and it
will write the name of the selected influence.
337
Constructing the influence line for bending moment M3,

in the middle of the entire girder is assigned
If you have selected any of the reactions for constructing the influence line, in that case the
program will issue a message on the command bar, which should be answered by selecting a
point support for the reaction of which constructing the influence line is requested.
<0 sel.> Point support on which influence line is requested Select (<End>):
The program will place a symbol for the influence line and it will write the name of the selected
reaction in the selected support.
Constructing the influence line for vertical reaction R3

of the left end point is assigned
In this procedure the program does not carry out the control if the displacement/rotation,
corresponding to the selected reaction for constructing the influence line, is restrained or not,
but it will surely detect such errors immediately before the calculating is requested, within
command Input Data Control (see Chapter 3.3.5).
Disregarding whether you have requested constructing of the
influences on the beam or for any of the reactions of the point
command, the program will automatically open a new load case,
the influence line. Assigning any other load is disabled within
influence line for any of the

support, after completing the
reserved only for constructing
this load case, and it will be
338
specially treated in commands for defining the basic load cases and combinations of their
simultaneous action.
It is not possible to delete the assigned influence line by command Delete. Instead, deleting
of the load case reserved for constructing the influence line should be demanded by command
Load Case.
3.2.12 Prestressing
Command Prestressing is used to place the cables for prestressing plates, walls
and beams in the model. Prestressing can be assigned within one or within several load cases.
Such concept enables you to analyse the influences due to prestressing on each cable
separately in case of prestressing with more than one cable route. Although the program
enables you to assign both prestressing and some other type of load within same load case, it
is recommended that you analyse the prestressing influences in separate load cases. In this
way, you will be able to analyse influences in the structure either with prestressing or without
it by subsequently creating the combinations of simultaneous action of various types of
loading.
When command Prestressing is selected, the command bar attains its standard form
corresponding to the procedure of drawing a polygonal line.
Prestress First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End>):
In case you desire to prestress beams, the assigned prestressing line has to belong, together
with its entire geometry, to the line determining the position of the given beam in the model.
In the same way, if you desire to prestress a plate or a wall, the assigned prestressing line has
to belong, together with its entire geometry, to the plane determining the position of the given
plate or wall respectively, in the model.
The assigned prestressing has its local coordinate system the convention of which is exactly
the same as for beams (see Chapter 3.1.4). This means that the local axis 1 is in direction
of the assigned prestressing line, local axis 2 is perpendicular to local axis 1 so that
together they form a vertical plane, while the local axis 3 is perpendicular to the plane
formed by local axes 1 and 2. The local coordinate system of the prestressing line can also
be changed subsequently by command "Change L.C.S. (see Chapter 3.3.2).
After entering the polygonal line, the program will open a dialog box for defining the numerical
data on prestressing.
339

the numerical data on prestressing
If the assigned prestressing line consists of several segments, the numerical data assigned in
this dialog box will refer to each drawn segment individually.
Eccentricity of the cable route in the direction of local axis 2 is assigned from section to
section, in characteristic points along the prestressing line. The way of assigning characteristic
points along the preload line is determined by selecting one of the two available switches,
which are located below the list of sections:
Relative - characteristic points are defined by entering their relative distance from the start of
the preload line, in the direction of the local axis 1.
Absolute - characteristic points are defined by entering their relative distance from the start
of the preload line, in the direction of the local axis 1.
In the list of cross-sections in the upper left corner of the dialog box, you have the possibility
to add an arbitrary number of intermediate cross sections, in which the position of cable route
is changed, in addition to cross sections at the beginning and at the end of the prestressing
line.
340
List of characteristic cross-sections

In column Section, the beginning and the end of the prestressing line are denoted by letters
S and E respectively, and each newly added intermediate cross-section is denoted by its
serial number. The position of intersection is defined by the data in the second column. If the
switch "relatively" is on the column title is "dx", and if the switch "absolutely" is on the column
title is "x [m]". The distance of the cable route in regard to local axis 1, in direction of local
axis 2 is assigned in column e2 for each of the cross-sections in the list.
To enable an easier insight into accuracy of the input data, the assigned shape of prestressing
route is graphically drawn in the lower part of the dialog box. In addition, the current crosssection is denoted by red color in the list.
The form of cable route between two adjacent sections is determined by selecting one of the
switches, which are located in the dialogue "Tendon Shape": "Linear", "Spline" and
"Polynomial curve".
341
Switches determining the shape of the cable route between

two consecutive cross-sections
When command field Section Generator, beneath the space planned for presentation of the
assigned shape of cable route, is selected, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.
Namely, now you have the possibility to generate one or more intermediate cross-sections, the
data on eccentric position of which correspond to the current shape of the cable route.
If the switch Generate One Section Only is set to switched-on state, only one intermediate
cross-section will be inserted into the list. When relative setting of intersection is selected, the
edit box in the dialog box is called "dx", and intersection is added to the list on a distance from
the start of the preload line which is calculated by dividing its length with the given value.
When the absolute setting of the intersection is selected, edit field in the dialog box is called
"Step", and the value entered in it presents the distance of the section from the beginning of
the preload line.
If the switch Generate only one section" is turned off, the number of sections that will be
added to the list depends on the value entered in the edit box. When relative setting of the
intersection is selected, the edit box is called "dx" and entered value presents equidistance
between all intersections that will be created in this procedure (If the value of "0.1" is set, this
means that the given preload line will be divided into 10 equal parts, and 9 intersections will
be inserted to the list of sections). When absolute setting of the intersection is selected, edit
box in the dialog is called "Step". Its value presents the distance between the intersections
342
that will be generated. Number of sections depends on the length of the preload line, and if it
is not divisible by the given value, the distance from the last added section to the end of the
preload line will be smaller than entered value.
After activating command field OK, the program will first check if there are any intermediate
sections in the cross-section list, and if so it will issue the following warning:
By selecting an appropriate command field, you can select one of the actions planned by the
program:
Yes
All previously assigned intermediate cross-sections in the cross-section list will

be deleted and newly created ones will come into their place
No
Existing intermediate cross-sections will be maintained in the cross-section list

and newly created ones will be added
Cancel -
Selecting this command field results in quitting the procedure of generating the
intermediate cross-sections and returning to the basic appearance of the dialog
box in this command
This option is very convenient when you desire to approximate the curvilinear cable route,
defined in several characteristic sections, by a corresponding rectilinear one. In such case, you
have to make sure that you have assigned a sufficient number of intermediate cross-sections
to be generated.
343
Parabolic cable route is approximated by a

corresponding rectilinear one
This command is also useful when you desire to subsequently change the cable rout in an
exact position of the cross-section after inspecting the calculation results.
The way of calculating of the loss of the preload line force along a assigned route, is
determined by selecting one of two specified the formula:
or
Below these groups of formula there are edit boxes group, in which the data required for the
calculation of the loss the preload line force are assigned. In front of each of them, there is a
textual description, which clearly indicates which data is entered in the edit field.
=
Friction coefficient
K=/k= The second parameter in this group depends on the selected formula. If the
selected formula is:
, it will be assigned "Friction wobble
coefficient: K=", and if the selected formula is:

assigned Friction wobble angle: k=.
ln=
Wedge slippage
Es=
Cable steel modulus of elasticity
, it will be
344
As=
Cable cross-section area
The intensity of prestressing force is assigned in the edit box P0=, whereas the edit boxes
e3,p= and e3,k= allow you to set the translatory motion onto the entire cable route in the
direction of the local axis 3. The edit box e3,p = is used for assigning the eccentricity of
the cable route in the direction of the local axis 3 at the beginning of the prestressing line,
whereas the edit box e3,k = is used for assigning the eccentricity of the cable route in the
direction of the local axis 3 at the end of the prestressing line. Such translatory motion of the
entire cable route has a special application in prestressing beams with box cross-section where
the cable routes are in their webs.
It should be mentioned that the load due to prestressing will be applied to the structure along
the assigned prestressing line in course of calculations, while the eccentric shape of cable route
in direction of local axes will only determine the intensity and direction of action of prestressing
forces.
In addition to prestressing force loss due to friction and to cable corrugation, the program also
comprises calculation of prestressing force loss due to wedge slippage. The procedure of
calculating the losses is be presented in detail in Chapter 3.2.12.2.
After selecting the command field OK, the command will be completed, and a symbol
denoting the position of the prestressing force application along all assigned segments will be
placed at the ends of each assigned segment of the polygonal line in the drawing.
The beginning and the end of the assigned prestressing line

are marked by small triangle symbols
Namely, the program in default assumes that each assigned segment of the polygonal line
represents an individual prestressing route, and that simultaneous tensioning of the cables on
both ends of each segment is under consideration.
345
Note:
In case when prestressing is performed with several cable routes, where their local axes 1
completely coincides in space, you cannot assign them within the same load case. A typical
example is when the same cable route runs through the webs of a box cross-section beams.
Then a cable route should be assigned in one web in one load case, and in the other web in the
load case. Within each of these loadings, the cable routes have to be translationally shifted in
the direction of the local axis 3, by a value equal to the distance between the web and the
system line determining the position of the beam in the model. By combining subsequently the
results of these two load cases, you can obtain the influences due to total prestressing in the
given beam.
3.2.12.1
Defining the Ends of the Assigned Prestressing Line
Command Anchor, enables you to join, if necessary, several assigned

segments of the prestressing line into one entirety. Moreover, you have the possibility to
denote the end of the assigned prestressing line as a position of the anchor (tensioning on one
end only), and not as a default place in which the prestressing force is applied. When this
command is selected, the command bar obtains the following form:
<0 sel.> Anchor Select (All / Window / <End> / Force):
Sub-option force, the name of which indicates the method in which the selected end of
prestressing line is to be defined, is at the end of the command bar. When this sub-option is
consecutively selected, it changes its name and thus it can obtain one of the three following
forms:
Force
When this name of the sub-option is set on the command bar, it means that the
selected end of the prestressing line will be denoted as the position in which the
prestressing force is applied. A symbol will be placed at the given end after
selecting.
Anchor
selected end of the prestressing line will be denoted as the position in which the
anchor is placed. A symbol will be placed at the given end after selecting.
Splice
selected end of the prestressing line will be denoted as the position in which two
segments of the cable route are spliced. After selecting, there will not be any
symbol at the given end.
This means that the User is expected first to assign the corresponding name of the previous
sub-option on the command bar, and next to engage in the select box that part of the
prestressing line on the end of which the selected condition is to be assigned. Depending on
the position in which the prestressing line is selected, the condition determined by the name of
the previous sub-option in the command bar will be set at the closer end. This command
practically functions in exactly the same way as the command for releasing the influences at
beam-ends (see Chapter 3.1.5.), except that the conditions that are set on the selected end
of the line are not adjusted in a dialog box but by the state of the sub-option on the command
bar.
3.2.12.2
Prestress Losses
This command enables you to visualise the prestressing force loss along the
assigned cable route. When it is selected, the command bar obtains the following form:
<0 sel.> Prestress Losses Select (Window / <End>):
346
It is now necessary to select one segment of the assignee cable route, after which the program
first controls if it has been correctly assigned, and if not so, it will issue a corresponding
warning.
Namely, the ends of the assigned prestressing line have to be denoted either as a position in
which the prestressing force is applied or as the position of the anchor (surely, placing two
anchors at the ends of the prestressing line is not possible). In case when the end of the
prestressing line is denoted as a splice, its end has to coincide with the beginning of the other
segment of the prestressing line, while the place of the cable in the splice has to be in the
same position in space. Therefore, several prestressing segments interconnected in such way
that their ends are denoted as a Splice are analysed as one entirety.
If the selected cable route meets the formal conditions of correctness, the program opens a
dialog box as the following one.
Appearance of a dialog box for presenting the prestressing force loss

In the left part of the dialog box, the assigned shape of cable route and the diagram of change
of prestressing force intensity along the assigned cable route are presented in two separate
charts. In case of a prestressing force loss due to wedge slippage, at the end at which the
prestressing force is applied, this part of the chart will be hatched.
In the upper right part of the dialog, the selected formula is displayed for the calculation of the
loss of the preloading force and all of the input data about the selected route of preloading. In
front of each of them, there is a textual description of the meaning of assigned data.
Below these data, two very important variables are written, which are calculated at the start of
this command:
347
- The cable length before tensioning:
- Total elastic elongation of the cable:
L=
L=
The way of calculating the loss of preload force due to friction and the curvature of the cable is
determined by selecting one of two specific formulas in the dialogue of command
"Prestressing" (section 3.2.12).
or
These two formulas differ only in whether the loss coefficient is used for unintentional angular
deviation "K" or unintentional deviation angle "k".
where:
P,x
P0
Kkx
Intensity of prestressing force in the observed section along the assigned cable route
Assigned prestressing force
Assigned friction coefficient
Sum of deviation angles of the cable route to the observed section
Friction wobble coefficient
Friction wobble angle
Distance between the observed section and the beginning of the cable route
The prestressing force loss due to wedge slippage is calculated in two steps. First, the length
on which the prestressing force loss due to wedge slippage spreads is calculated by solving
iteratively the following expression:
where:
le
ln
Es
As
P0
K-
Unknown length along which the prestressing force loss due to wedge slippage
spreads
Assigned wedge slippage
Assigned cable steel modulus of elasticity
Assigned cable cross-section
Average angle of deflection along the influence length le
On the basis of the calculated length le, the reduced intensity of the prestressing force in the
position where it is applied to the model is calculated from the following expression.
Pe = P0 1 x ( + K)
where:
348
Pe
P0
xK-
Reduced intensity of the prestressing force in the position where it is applied to the
model
Distance between the stressing end and current point
Average angle of deflection along the influence length le
In the upper right corner of the dialog box all assigned input data on selected prestressing
route are presented, while the information on both the eccentric position of the cables and on
prestressing force intensity in the given sections can be obtained in arbitrarily selected
intermediate sections in the presented list of sections. The method of operating with the list of
sections is exactly the same as in the dialog box for entering the numerical data on
prestressing, except that here the position of intermediate sections is not determined by its
relative distance from the beginning of the cable route, but instead by exact distance in units
of length.
Even in case you do not analyse the influences due to prestressing force loss, this command
will be helpful to determine the elevation coordinate of all points in which the cables need to be
fixed on site. By selecting this command in the module for processing the calculation results,
you have the possibility to print all presented results from this dialog box.
3.2.13 Resultant
The command Resultant is used to control the correctness of the input data on
loading intensity. When this command is activated, the program requires from the command
bar all loadings for which you desire to obtain the information on the intensity and the position
of the resultant to be selected.
<0 sel.> Loadings Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Upon completed selecting procedure, the program will open a dialog box with the information
about the intensity and the position of the resultant of all previously selected loadings.
It is clear that only surface, linear and point loadings will be available to be selected within this
command. By estimating the correctness of the presented results, you can easily detect
erroneously assigned loading data, if any. In case that not all selected loadings have the same
direction of action, the program will not be capable to calculate the position of the resultant.
349
3.2.14 Load Converter

The main role of this command is to facilitate entering of linear and concentrated
loads along beam structural elements that are not within plates/walls. Namely, since most of
the loadings acting onto the structures have surface character (snow, wind, roofing weight,
flooring weight, etc.), when entering the loading on beam structural elements that do not
belong to plates/walls, you have to calculate manually the load intensity belonging to each of
these beam elements. For that reason, the program provides the following procedure of data
entering, which will be illustrated in the example of wind acting on an inclined roof structure.
Front side of the roof on which wind pressure from above needs to be assigned
Although the roof structure consists only of beam elements, surface loading representing the
wind pressure normal to front side of the roof will first be assigned.
350
Assigned surface loading to front side of the roof simulating wind action
When command Load converter is selected, the program will require all surface loads that
need to be replaced by corresponding linear or point loads to be selected.
<0 sel.> Area loadings - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Upon completed selection of surface loading, the program will require all beam elements that
you desire to subject to replacing linear/concentrated forces to be selected.
<0 sel.> Beams Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
selection / Deselect / <End >):
Since both main and secondary joists, as well as wind bracings are comprised within the front
side of the roof, only those beams that will take over the wind load need now to be selected.
In our example, all longitudinal beams running in direction of global X-axis will be selected.
All beams that need to obtain equivalent loading are selected

Upon completed selection of longitudinal beams, the program will open a dialog box as the
following one.
351
Appearance of the dialog box within

command Load converter
By setting one of the two switches offered to switched-on state, you choose to convert the
linear load either to uniformly distributed or to concentrated load. In case you choose the
option of converting into concentrated forces, the edit box in which the spacing of
concentrated forces that are to be generated will also be available for data entering.
Edit box for defining the spacing

of concentrated forces
Surely, the correctness of force arrangement will be determined by the spacing assigned here,
although exaggeration should be avoided, since in that case an excessive number of entities
will appear in the model, which may slow down the operation of the program itself. It is
recommended to choose converting into uniformly distributed load whenever possible since
this will result in satisfactory accuracy in most cases.
When command field OK is selected the dialog box will be closed, and the previously selected
surface load will be removed and replaced by corresponding linear/point load. It is clear that
only those beams that are selected within this command will be subject to the loading, and
only on the condition that they belong to the same plane to which the selected surface loading
belongs.
352
Presentation of generated linear loading
Presentation of generated point loading

Surely, in this way the surface wind action can also be transferred only to those columns that
are on the front and the backside of the hall presented here.
This command can also be used in many other cases. We shall present only one more obvious
example, when buildings with prefabricated floor structures are being modeled. Since in those
cases, as a rule, we are not concerned with influences in prefabricated slabs, they do not need
to be entered into the model with the only aim to transfer the surface load onto other parts of
the structure. This means that here the surface load first needs to be assigned in the position
where the given prefabricated slab would be positioned (into void), and next to convert that
load into replacing linear or point load acting on beams placed in the direction in which the
given slab is supported. In this way the entering of the model geometry is drastically speeded
up, and in addition, the model itself will have a considerably smaller number of nodes in the
finite element mesh.
353
Note:
The Tower program has made it possible to convert the area load which has been assigned
on a curved surface to a series of concentrated forces along the selected beam elements. The
mere procedure of converting is exactly the same as in flat surfaces. The only difference is that
the option Uniformly distributed linear forces is now unavailable in the dialog box which
opens upon the completion of beam selection since due to the problem complexity, the area
load at its best cannot be displayed using the linear one.
3.3
Changing and Controlling the Previously

Entered Data
3.3.1
Modify Sets
Command Modify Sets, which is within the drop-down menu Modify, enables
the numerical data for arbitrarily selected elements of a drawing to be changed. By
activating this command, the standard procedure of selecting is entered.
<0 sel.> Modify Sets - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
The way the command functions is exactly the same, disregarding whether the selected
elements represent a part of the structure, or a load. Since only a certain type of numerical
data corresponds to each type of element in a drawing, heterogeneous types of entities cannot
be selected simultaneously in this procedure. Here by heterogeneous types of elements we
understand plates, beams, linear load, area load, etc. This means that mass change of data for
several selected elements is possible, but they all have to belong to the same type of
elements. In case that in the first step of selecting, heterogeneous elements are
simultaneously selected, among all selected elements the program will maintain only the
elements belonging to the same type, while all others will be removed from the selection. The
same also applies when an element of the drawing is selected in the position in which its
geometry coincides with some other entities. The program will then again select itself the
element that will be included in the procedure of changing the data. In such cases the visibility
of all elements of the drawing the geometry of which coincides with the geometry of elements
for which the numerical data need to be changed. Therefore, the easiest way is to first
individually select one of the elements of the given type, and then to use the methods of group
selecting in the next step. All types of elements that do not correspond to the type of the first
selected element will then be rejected.
A click on the right mouse button will mark the end of the selecting procedure, and depending
on the type of the selected element, a corresponding dialog box, in which the desired changes
can be made, will open.
354
Several plates with a same set of numerical data

have been selected
Now, two cases may occur here. If all selected entities have the same set of numerical data,
then on the left side of the list, a black arrow will clearly denote what is the serial number
of that set. However, if several elements with various sets are selected at the same time, the
black arrow symbols will be in front of the list, within all sets that are have been joined to
the selected elements.
Several plates with a different set

of numerical data have been selected
355
Moreover, all data in the list will be written as inactive, and all edit boxes will be empty. Such
state will remain all until you join the same set of numerical data to all selected entities by a
click on the mouse button over the list.
After changes performed in the dialog box, if you click the mouse button on command field
OK, the newly assigned data will be joined to the selected elements of the drawing, and the
program will still require from the command bar the elements for which the numerical data are
to be changed to be selected. A click on the right mouse button will denote the end of this
command.
The same logic also applies when elements of a drawing that represent load are selected. If all
selected loads have same numerical data, all previously assigned parameters will be written in
the dialog box.
Two area loads having same intensity and direction of action are selected
However, if several loads having different intensity, or direction of action, the data in the edit
box will then be empty, all until you assign them again. In that way, you will join the newly
selected data to all previously selected loads.
Two area loads having same direction of action but different intensities are selected
356
Data changing is also enabled for the elements of a drawing that are not a part of the
structure. These are various construction lines and texts, set by commands: Line, Text
and Dimensions (see Chapter 3.4). For lines and figure dimensions it is possible to change
the layer in which these entities have been drawn, while for the texts it is possible to change
all data that have been previously assigned: text content, layer, averaging, font, etc. Since the
program enables these auxiliary elements of a drawing to be set in the Disposition window
also, you will not be able to change their data by this command. This results from the basic
function of the Disposition window, to change the current frame in it, so a click on the mouse
button within this window, while command Modify Sets is active, will be interpreted as a
request for the current frame to be changed. Therefore, in order to change data on auxiliary
entities that are set in the Disposition window, you have to use a special command
Rename (see Chapter 2.12.2). Namely, in case that any of the auxiliary entities are
selected by this command instead of the frame symbol in the Disposition window, it will
function exactly the same as the command Modify Sets.
3.3.2
Changing the Local Coordinate System of Linear

Elements (Change L.C.S.)
Since the program in default determines the orientation of local coordinate system
of linear elements in the model, you have the possibility to change it subsequently by
command Change L.K.S., within the drop-down menu Modify. By selecting this command,
the standard procedure of selecting is entered.
<0 sel.> Change LCS Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
The selecting procedure will comprise only those linear elements upon which this command is
effective: beams, linear supports, moving load and prestressing. After completed selection, the
program will require from the command bar a point in the drawing, which will determine both
the plane to which the local axes 1 and 2 belong and the orientation of local axis 2, to be
selected.
Namely, since the direction and sense of local axis 1 are fully determined by the beginning
and the end of the line by which the position of the given linear element in space is assigned,
and since an infinite number of planes can be established through one straight line, the
selection of this point will singularly determine both the plane to which those two local axes
belong and the orientation of local axis 2. Then the local axis 3 will be set automatically in
order to satisfy rule of the coordinate system oriented to the right. Since in some cases it may
be easier to determine a plane to which axes 1 and 3 belong, a consecutive click on the
mouse over the sub-option Point which defines axis Axis 2 will result in the change of the
content on the command bar.
Change L.C.S. (Point which defines axis 3 / <End>):
Namely, the selected point will now determine the plane to which the local axes 1 and 3
belong. The next click over this sub-option will return us to the basic form of the command
bar. After selecting the desired point, the command will be completed.
In case of multiple selections, care should be taken that the choice of the point determines
correctly both the plane and the orientation of the local axes, for all selected elements. This
will be presented in an example of simultaneous change of the orientation of the local
coordinate system of all columns in a frame.
357
Local axes 1 and 2 of all columns are established

in vertical plane X-Z.
If we desire to change the orientation of the local coordinate system of the columns, so that
their local axes 1 and 2 belong to the vertical plane Y-Z, by setting the sub-option Point
which defines axis 3 as the current one, and by selecting any point within the plane of the
presented frame, the desired effect will be obtained. However, depending on the position of
the selected point, the orientation of the local axis 3 of the selected column will not be the
same.
When point 1 is selected, local axis 3 of all columns

will be oriented to the right
358
When point 1 is selected, local axis 3 of all columns

will be oriented to the left
When point 1 is selected, local axis 3 of the left column

will be oriented to the right, while that of the other two to the left
When point 1 is selected, local axis 3 of the right column

will be oriented to the left, while that of the other two to the right
359
This means that the sense of local axis 2, and the sense of local axis 3, is determined by
relative position of the selected point in regard to the local axis 1 of the given linear element.
It should be mentioned that the sense of local axis 1 cannot be subsequently changed, and it
is always set in the direction from the beginning toward the end of the line determining the
position of the given linear element in space.
Application of the Command
The orientation of the local coordinate system is extremely significant for all structural
elements. In beams, it has multiple significances since the calculation results are presented,
the dimensions of cross-sections are defined and influences on their ends are released all in
the direction of established local axes. In linear elements, the displacements and rotations are
restrained in the direction of the set local axes, so that the calculated support reactions will
also act in their direction. In moving load, the orientation of the local coordinate system
defines the plane subjected to this load, and in prestressing it defines the inclination of the
plane to which the cable route belongs (prestressing cables are always assigned to belong to
the plane determined by the position of local axes1 and 2).
Note:
In course of execution of this command, it is recommended to set the local axes of structural
elements, for which the local coordinate system is being changed, to be visible by command
Visibility. In that way, you will have a better insight into the correctness of the performed
changes.
3.3.3
Changing the local coordinate system of point

support
In addition to changing the local coordinate system of linear supports, the program
has also made it also possible to change the orientation of the local coordinate system of point
supports via the command Change LCS. Selecting this sub-option from the drop-down
menu Modify will result in starting the standard procedure of selecting.
<0 sel.> Change LCS. Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
If point supports have been selected, the program will request from the command bar that you
assign a point in the drawing which will define the direction and orientation of local axis 3.
Change LCS (Point which defines axis 3 / Radial / <End>):
It is worth noting that in the case of selecting a single point support, the command bar will not
contain the sub-option Radial.
Selecting the sub-option Point which defines axis 3 will result in changing the axis whose
orientation will be defined by the point being assigned. Clicking once on the sub-option wil
result in changing the local axis related to the option whereas clicking a second time will result
in returning to the previous state of the command bar.
The direction and orientation of the selected local axis (we shall assume that local axis 3 has
been selected) can be defined in two ways: radial and parallel. In radial defining, local axes 3
of all selected entities will be oriented towards the assigned point.
360
Radial defining of local axes orientation

In parallel defining, the assigned point defines the orientation of local axis 3 of only one point
support (the reference one), whereas local axes of other selected supports are parallel with it
and have the same orientation. The program will adopt the point support which has been
selected first as the reference one.
Parallel defining of local axes orientation

The selected way of defining is written on the command bar as the sub-options name. From
this it follows that, if Radial is written on the command bar, it means that the orientation of
local axis 3 is radially defined too. Switching to parallel defining is performed once you activate
this sub-option.
Once you have selected the point which defines the orientation of local axis 3, the program will
request from the command bar that you assign a point in the drawing which defines the plane
where local axis 3 lies.
Change LCS (Point which defines plane 2-3 / <End>):
As the name of the sub-option Point which defines plane 2-3 clearly suggests, the
selected point will define the plane where local axes 2 and 3 lie. Once you have selected this
sub-option, the command bar will obtain a new layout, that is, the point which is assigned will
define the plane where local axes 2 and 3 lie.
361
Change LCS (Point which defines plane 1-3 / <End>):
Clearly if, at the start of this procedure, another axis was selected, selecting the corresponding
plane would be perfomed via this sub-option.
Once you have selected the requested point, the command will end and the local coordinate
systems of all selected supports will obtain the assigned orientation.
LCS of all point supports has been changed in such a way

that local axes 2 have been oriented towards the circle center
whereas local axes 3 are perpendicular to the displayed plane
3.3.4
Set Control
Visualising the accuracy of the entered numerical data, i.e. the possibility to visually
control whether the correct sets of numerical data have been joined to all structural elements
represents an especially significant option in the program. Command Set Control, within the
drop-down menu that opens by a click on the right mouse button over the name of the window
3D View has been developed for that purpose. When this command is activated, for the given
type of structural elements (plates, beams, etc.), all entities that belong to the same set of
numerical data will be coloured into the same color by the program.
In 3D View window, the program coloured the same all plates

and walls to which the same set of numerical data has been joined
362
The command bar obtains the following content.
<All> Set Control Slab/Wall (Change set / Select / <End>):
The type of structural elements for which the control of entered numerical data will be
performed, and the serial numbers of the sets that will be coloured are determined in the
dialog box that is opened by activating the sub-option Select.
Appearance of the dialog box within command Set Control

You are now enabled to control the entered data, different types of structural elements
excluded, for three types of loads: area, linear and point. The combo box with all entities
(structural elements and loads) for which it is possible to control the entered data is displayed
in the left part of the dialog box. Of course, only those entities which are found in the model
will be available for the selection. For the selected entity, the combo box with all data sets
which have been created up till now is displayed in the right part of the dialog box.
Set control for beams is selected

The description of each set is displayed in the column Name, whereas, a color in which the
set elements will be viewed in the model is placed, for each particular set, in the column
Color. The program itself generates colors according to the criterion that they should
differentiate as much as possible for each set. However, it is also possible that you select a
desired color for each particular set.
363
A click on the mouse button over the arrow to the right of the color box
opened a dialog box for selecting arbitrary colours
If you select a load for controling the entered data - because loads are grouped according to
intensity - instead of the description, the intensity of load for each set will be displayed in the
column Name.
Controling sets for area load has been selected

Generating the Color Palette
In addition to determining each of the colours manually, you have the possibility to assign to
the program by command Generate Colours from which palette will the colours be
generated.
Dialog box for generating

the color palette
364
Once you have activated the command field OK, the program will return to the command
main dialog box and, as a result, new colors will be generated from the assigned color array
for each particular set in the box.
The check box Undertone is also located in the dialog box. If this check box is on, different
shades of the color which has been selected as the initial color will be added to all sets.
Different shades of color have been added to all sets

Operating with the List of Color Configuration
The program allows the selected colours for the sets of numerical data to be saved in the base
and to be used subsequently when needed. When command field Save is selected, a dialog
box for saving the currently selected colours in the base.
It is now necessary to assign in the edit box a textual description that will associate you with
the selected colours, and to activate the command field OK.
The closed list in the lower left corner of this dialog box is used for selecting any of the
previously saved color configurations.
365
Closed list for selecting any of the previously saved color configurations
If you click on the arrow to the right of this closed list, the content of the list opens, and now it
is sufficient to click the mouse button on the row in which the content of the state of colours
that are to be set. It should be mentioned that the list always contains the Default state of
colours defined by the program that cannot be deleted. Arbitrarily selected color configuration
can be deleted from the list by command field Delete.
Insight into Tables of Numerical Data Sets
In case when you desire to find out which data are defined for which set of numerical data, by
selecting the command field Set, a dialog box for defining the sets of numerical data for the
selected structural element opens.
Dialog box for defining the sets of numerical data on beams

These dialog boxes fully correspond to the dialog boxes used in establishing the given
structural elements on the model, so it is here also possible to perform subsequent corrections
of previously assigned input data.
Selecting the Sets to be Viewed
At the end of each row within the list of sets, there is a check box which controls if the given
set of a structural element will be coloured or not.
366
Check boxes controlling if the given set will be coloured in the drawing or not
Command fields Select All and Deselect All enable you to select and deselect
respectively, all sets of the given structural element to be viewed.
After selecting the command field OK, this dialog box will be closed, and the selected sets of
the given structural element will be coloured in corresponding colours in the screen.
From the content of the command bar it can be seen that

sets of beams 2 and 4 are selected to be coloured
Changing the Sets
In case certain mistakes have been made, i.e. in case that you have joined a wrong set of data
to ny of the structural elements, the program enables the sets to be changed within this
command also. Namely, when sub-option Change Set is selected, the following message
appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Modify Sets Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
The method of operating with this command is exactly the same as when the command with
the same name is activated individually (see Chapter 3.3.1). The only difference is in that
the end of this command will result in returning to the basic form of the command bar within
367
the command Set Control, and the colours of the beams will automatically be updated in
accordance with the new state.
Options for 2D view
The check box Show indirect elements is used for defining the way of viewing indirect
elements in 2D View window. If this check box is on, the symbols of indirect elements will be
drawn using colors which have been asigned in this dialog box, whereas if it is off, the symbols
of indirect elements will be drawn using the color which has been envisaged for inactive
elements.
The symbols of slabs in cross sections are displayed

using colors from controling the sets
3.3.5
Input Data Control
Basic testing of the correctness of the created model is performed by selecting the
command Input Data Control, within the drop-down menu Tools. Since the program is so
flexible in its operating that it allows completely arbitrary structures to be created, surely this
testing should only be understood conditionally, since it is almost impossible to detect all
mistakes that might have been made. Therefore, you should be cautious when creating the
model, since the program will not be able to detect the instability of the system until the
calculation module, in course of solving the system of equations. However, this command may
368
be useful for detecting some obvious mistakes. After activating the command, the program
immediately starts to test the input data.
Control of Structural Elements
The program first controls if the model contains at all the minimum of structural elements, i.e.
in order that the further control is performed, it is necessary that there are at least one plate
or one beam, and at least one support (area, linear or point) in the model. In case that more
than one construction stages are defined in the model, this condition applies to each of the
stages individually. If this minimum condition is not satisfied, further control is not performed
and the program will issue a warning in the opened dialog box that the model is incomplete.
Warning that the model is incomplete

When command field OK is activated, the dialog box will be closed, and now you should first
correct the mistakes and then activate again the command for the input data control.
If this first condition is satisfied, the program will not issue any warning about the
incompleteness of the model, and it will start testing each structural element individually. It
should be mentioned that the control is carried out for all established structural elements in
the model, disregarding their current visibility state.
The criteria, which are checked for each of the structural elements individually, are the
following ones:
Slab/Wall -
There is no criterion for correctness of plates and walls, i.e. all plates and all
walls established in the model are always correct
Release
Must belong to a plate or to a wall with their complete geometry
Beam
There is no criterion for correctness of established beams with uniform crosssection, i.e. all beams with uniform cross-section in a model are formally
always correct. Local instability of bars concerning releasing the influences
irregularly at their ends may be detected only in course of calculations. An
exception is the trussed type bar in which the program will detect the error if
any of the influences is released at its ends. However, in beams with nonuniform cross-section, a control whether the change of cross-section
dimensions is correctly assigned is carried out. In case of a linear change,
where the position of the intermediate cross-section is assigned by the
absolute distance from the beginning of the beam, a control whether the
assigned intermediate cross-section is within the given beam is carried out. If
it is outside the beam, than a wrong set of numerical data has been joined to
such beam. In case of beams with defined arc change of cross-section, a
369
control whether it is possible to apply the assigned arc change is carried out.
Namely, in case such position of intermediate sections and section dimensions
in them is assigned, that the arc, which is established through three assigned
points, causes negative dimensions, then a wrong set of numerical data has
been joined to such beam.
Arc change of the beam depth assigned in this way would result
in negative depth in the beam midpoint
Area Support -
must be underneath a plate/wall with its complete geometry
Linear Support - no criteria, i.e. always formally correct

Point Support - no criteria, i.e. always formally correct
3D Surfaces
no criteria, i.e. always formally correct
If all structural elements satisfy the set criteria, the program will start the control of the
assigned loads. However, in case there are any irregular structural elements in the model, the
program will open a dialog box in which all structural elements that do not satisfy the set
criteria will be clearly denoted. In case when several construction stages are defined, the stage
to which the structural elements with a mistake belong will also be denoted.
Warning about the incorrect structural elements

At the end of each row with the interpretation of the error, the program writes in brackets the
position of the given structural element, i.e. to which assembly it belongs. The title of the
level, frame or the auxiliary view may be written in brackets, depending on to which of these
assemblies the given structural element belongs. If the inappropriate structural element does
not belong to any of these assemblies, then comment 3D is written in the brackets.
370
By activating the command field OK, the dialog box will disappear from the screen, and the
program will clearly mark in the drawing all irregular structural elements.
The program clearly marks which structural elements

do not satisfy the performed control
In case that there are several defined construction stages in the model, the error markers will
then be placed only on those entities that belong to the current stage.
When you have corrected all detected errors, activate this command again, and in case there
are no more errors in the structure, the program will start to control the assigned loading. If
the program detects a mistake in the structure again, you will have to repeat this procedure all
until you correct them all.
Loading Control
Only when all structural elements satisfy the assigned criteria, testing of the assigned loading
will begin, where each of the assigned load cases is tested separately. Same as in the structure
control, the program first controls if at least one assigned load exists within the given load
case. If an empty load case is defined, i.e. not even one concrete load has been joined to it
(even self-weight is not included), the program will issue a warning.
Warning about empty load cases
371
An exception is the case when influences in the given model are analysed through defined
construction stages. In such cases, existence of empty loading within individual stages is
allowed.
By activating the command field OK, the dialog box will be closed, and now you should first
correct the mistakes and then activate again the command for the input data control. If this
first condition is satisfied, the program will not issue any warning about the empty load cases,
and it will start testing each load individually, in accordance with the following criteria:
Area Load -
Must belong to a plate/wall with its complete geometry
Linear Load -
Must belong to a plate /wall/beam with their complete geometry
Point Load -
Must belong to a plate/wall/beam with their complete geometry.
Support Displacement - Must be assigned on a point load with restrained displacement

(rotation), in the direction of assigned displacement (rotation)
Plate Temperature -
Must be within a plate/wall with their complete geometry
Beam Temperature -
Must be within a beam with their complete geometry. In case when

action of temperature difference is assigned, the cross-section
dimensions of the given beam have to be defined. It is not allowed to
assign the temperature difference to a beam the cross-section of
which is defined Any.
Moving Load -
Must belong to a plate/beam with its complete geometry. Depending

on the route length and on the assigned movement of the moving
load pattern, the required number of required internal load cases for
constructing the influence envelope is controlled. The program will
always issue a warning concerning the required number of internal
load cases, but it will not consider that as an error. This means that it
is up to you to estimate whether the number of internal load cases is
too large, depending on the size and complexity of the structure. You
will also obtain such a warning when calculating of the model is
demanded. The reason is more than obvious, since in large models,
the calculations may last too long and it may happen that it cannot
be carried out at all. Within the load case in which the moving load is
assigned, only area, linear and point load may act simultaneously
with it. In the opposite case, the program will issue a warning about
the error for every type of loading assigned in this way. In case when
several construction stages are defined on the model, the moving
load within same load case can be assigned only within one of the
stages.
Influence Line
The assigned position for constructing the influence line must be

either on a beam or on a point support. If it is on a beam, the
selected type of influences has to correspond to the influences that
can be obtained in a beam. If the influence line is on a point support,
then it must have restrained displacement (rotation) that corresponds
to the required influence.
Prestress
The system line of prestressing must be within a beam or a plate with

its complete geometry. The correctness of the assigned conditions
(Force/Anchor/Splice) at the ends of each assigned segment of the
prestressing line is controlled. If calculation of prestress losses is
372
assigned, a control is performed to establish if the entire prestressing
force had been accidentally cancelled due to those losses.
If all loadings satisfy the set criteria, the program will issue a message on successfully
performed input data control.
Information on successfully performed input data control

However, in case there are any irregular loadings in the model, the program will open a dialog
box in which all loadings that do not satisfy the set criteria will be clearly denoted. In case
when several construction stages are defined, the stage to which the loading elements with
errors belong, in addition to the load case, will also be denoted.
Warning about the incorrect loadings

By activating the command field OK, the dialog box will disappear from the screen, and the
program will clearly mark all irregular loadings.
373
The program clearly marks by special symbols those loadings

that do not satisfy the performed control
In case that there are several defined construction stages in the model, the error markers will
then be placed only on those loadings that belong to the current stage. Moreover, the error
markers will only be presented on those loadings that belong to the current load case.
When you have corrected all detected errors, activate this command again, and in case there
are no more errors in the loading, the program will issue a message on successfully performed
input data control.
Information on successfully performed input data control

If the program detects an error in the loading again, you will have to repeat this procedure all
until you correct them all.
Note:
The procedure of input data control is automatically performed also when you require the
mesh of finite elements to be generated. In case there are no area elements in the structure,
and thus the procedure of generating the mesh of finite elements is not performed, the input
data control will then be performed immediately before calculation. In case an error is
detected, the program will issue a corresponding warning, and it will stop the further course of
generating the mesh of finite elements/calculation.
374
3.3.6
Geometry Control
Since the program is graphically oriented, and that its basic role is the calculation of
static influences, it is surely important that the geometry of the model be precisely drawn. In
case that you draw inaccurately, you will face serious problems in subsequent procedure of
drawing the mesh of finite elements, and the calculation results, if you manage to obtain them
at all, may be incorrect. Drawing errors cannot be seen by the naked eye most commonly, and
thus they can be detected only by selecting the command Geometry Control, within the
drop-down menu Tools. Therefore, before you start with generating the mesh of finite
elements, or with calculating the model, you should unavoidably activate this command.
A value with which all mutual distances between elements in a drawing will be compared
should be assigned in edit box Distance Tolerance. In other words, we require from the
program to mark in the drawing all distances between entities that are less than the assigned
value. Which value will be assigned depends on the geometry of the model, i.e. on the
precision with which you desired to create the model. For example, if you know that there
should be no distance in the drawing less than 0.5 m, then you will assign: Distance
Tolerance =0.5.
Parameter Angle Tolerance refers to deviation of the lines in the drawing from vertical and
horizontal directions, i.e. the program is requested to mark all lines that deviate from the
horizontal/vertical direction by an angle that is less than the assigned one (if value 0 is
assigned to this parameter, the program will ignore all lines in the drawing that deviate from
horizontal/vertical direction).
When you assign these two parameters, and click the mouse button over the command field
OK, the program will analyse the geometry of the model, and in case no drawing errors were
detected, it will issue an appropriate warning.
In case drawing errors have been detected, the program will issue a warning about the
detected errors.
375
In addition, the program will mark by special markers in the drawing all distances that are less
than the assigned one, and all lines that deviate from the horizontal/vertical line by an angle
that is less than the assigned one.
The program denoted by special markers

all positions with drawing errors
The program will color into special color those line segments that deviate from the
vertical/horizontal position. The program denotes the distances that are less than the assigned
one by marking the points determine the given distance. Depending on what that point
represents, the program uses the following symbols for marking:
- All points representing a point entity, or a start/end point of the given line segment are
denoted by a small-square symbol.
- All points on the contour of linear and area entities, except those points that are their end
points, are denoted by a small-triangle symbol. This means that these points are within the
line segment that determines the contour of the given linear/area element.
- A point within any area is denoted by a small-circle symbol (the point belongs to the plane
of the area entity but it is not on its contour).
In the course of procedure of geometry control, the program may also detect those positions
that may be a result of a drawing error. Namely, this concerns line segment with distances
that are not less than the assigned tolerance, but their geometry indicates that there is an
entity with probably undesired geometry. The program will denote such segments also by a
special color defined for warnings. The program will issue warnings for the following cases:
- If in the model there are several connected arc segments, the circle centres of which are at
a small distance. Since you probably wanted these arcs to belong to the same circle, it is
possible that a drawing error occurred here.
376
- If there is an arc in the model, with a radius that is too small. Such warning is issued since
in the course of generating the mesh of finite elements such an arc will surely cause a large
number of finite elements.
- If in the model an evolved linear entity is established on a curved surface in such way that
its geometry does not represent a regular 3D line, or 3D arc. A typical example is if you set
a line segment that slightly deviates from its radial direction onto a spherical curved
surface. Since you probably wanted it to be in the radial direction exactly, it is possible that
a drawing error occurred here also.
With distances and directions marked in this way, all possible errors that occurred due to
imprecise drawing can easily be visualised.
The placed markers will be present in the drawing all until you correct the drawing errors and
activate this command again. However, if you consider that the detected drawing errors are
not too significant, you can remove the error markers by selecting command field Cancel,
within this command.
Two switches in the top of the dialog box for geometry control enable to assign which elements
of a drawing will be included into testing.
2D View Only
Only those entities that belong to the content of 2D View window

immediately before activating this command will be included in the
geometry control. The state of the switch Visible Only determines if
only currently visible entities from this window or all entities that belong
to it will be included in the geometry control.
2D View Only
All entities presented in 2D View window immediately before activating

this command will be included in the geometry control. The state of the
switch Visible Only determines if only currently visible entities from
this window or all entities that belong to it will be included in the
geometry control.
Visible Only
Those entities that are not currently presented in the selected window
will not be included in the geometry control. Namely, all entities that
have been declared as invisible, either by command Visibility, or by
command Hiding, will be excluded from the geometry control. In
addition, geometry control for load entities will be performed only within
the current load case.
Visible Only
All entities that belong to the selected window, disregarding the current
state of their visibility, will be included in the geometry control. In
addition, geometry control will also be performed for load entities that
are not included in the current load case.
This means that the switch 2D View Only, enables you to make a decision whether the
content of window for 2D or 3D view of the model will be included in the geometry control,
while the switch Visible Only enables you to determine whether all entities that belong to the
selected window, or only those that are currently presented in it, will be included in the
testing. It should be mentioned that the indirect elements, presented within 2D View
window, are not treated within the geometry control, since they are not entities but instead
they represent intersection of the given structural element with the currently presented view
In the lower part of the dialog box there is also a switch Automatically Fix Errors, which,
when set to switched on state, enables you to require from the program to correct the
detected drawing errors. Be careful when you use this option, since the program will not
377
always be able to correct all drawing errors that have been made. Moreover, in the procedure
of shifting the points, correction of one drawing error may cause a series of uncontrolled new
errors. The problems that cannot be solved by the program most commonly occur in surface
elements, when it is necessary to shift a point from the contour into a position which would
move the whole plane of the surface element outside its original plane in order to correct the
drawing error. The same applies to evolved surfaces and arc segments of linear entities. Such
way of solving the problem will practically require some artificial intelligence, which is
practically impossible to be solved automatically. Therefore, it is recommended that you
correct the drawing errors yourself, one by one. Whether you will perform that by deleting and
then drawing the given entity again, or by shifting their position, depends only up to you and
your habits. In any case, the easies way is to draw precisely while creating the model.
Analysis of Geometrical Errors
In case that the set markers do not indicate clearly enough what does the mistake involve, the
program offer the command Model Geometry Error Analysis. When this command is
activated, the program will require from the command bar the set error marker, or the
segment denoted as a warning, o be selected.
Mark Errors Select (<End>):
If you select a marker for a point, the program will then denote by a special color both the
selected marker and the marker next to it, which determine the distance smaller than
assigned. In addition, the contour of the entity to which the next marker belongs will also be
denoted by a special color. Thus, you can easily visualise the entity in regard to which the
selected point is at a smaller distance than assigned.
In case you select any of the segments marked as a warning, a dialog box with the meaning of
the warning opens.
By activating the command field OK, the dialog box with a warning will close, and the
program will require from the command bar the set markers to be further selected, all until
you denote the end of this command by selecting the sub-option End. The set symbols will
remain in the drawing all until you correct all drawing errors.
Application of the Command
Since it is extremely important that the geometry both of the structure and of the loading be
precisely drawn, it is recommended that you control the accuracy of the input data from time
to time while creating the model by command Geometry Control.
In case that you create the structure by generating its vertical elements by command
Generate (see Chapter 2.11.7), it is important to control the coincidence of all structural
elements in vertical sense immediately prior to the generating procedure.
In such cases, it is the best to start from the top of the building, and to set as visible, in 2D
View window, only the level immediately above the current level by command Levels Plan
View (see Chapter 2.14.8).
378
Select only linear and point supports to be projected to the current level, since only they will
be replaced by corresponding walls and columns in the procedure of generating the vertical
elements. Activate command Geometry Control now, and set to switched-on state switches
2D View Only and Visible Only.
If no drawing errors are detected by the program in such regime, then you can set the next
level below as the current level and repeat the previously described procedure, all up to the
lowest level in the model. If the program detects any drawing errors, correct the detected
drawing errors first and only then go to the next level below.
Only after the previously described procedure has been performed for all levels in the model,
from the top downward, you can begin with space model generating.
Disregarding by which method you have generated the geometry of the structure, first control
the accuracy of geometry concerning the drawing errors. Repeat the same procedure after you
have assigned all loadings, i.e. prior to approaching the module for generating the mesh of
finite elements.
When the command is being activated for the first time, set all switches to switched-off state,
in order to establish if there are any drawing errors at all in the entire model. If not so, the
program will issue an appropriate comment, while if there are any drawing errors, all irregular
entities will be marked in the drawing. Before you start correcting the drawing errors, first you
have to discover those entities between which the marked distance is less than the assigned
distance. The easies way to find this out is by selective deleting of the visibility of certain
elements of a drawing. By activating the command Geometry Control again, but this time
with setting the appropriate switches to switched-on state, you will easily find those entities
between which the marked distance is less than the assigned distance. Command Model
Geometry Error Analysis will surely be very helpful here.
379
Note:
Command Geometry Control is also automatically performed within the command for
generating the mesh of finite elements. In case it detects errors in the drawing the
consequence of which is that the mesh of finite elements cannot be generated at all, the
program will stop the generating procedure and it will issue an appropriate warning. It should
be emphasised that all detected drawing errors do not necessarily create problems as a rule
while generating the mesh. Some of them can be solved by the program itself. In any case, it
is the best that they do not exist at all.
Note:
In case when a point marker (small-triangle shaped symbol) is placed on the inside of an arc
segment, when largely zoomed, it may seem to you then that the given symbol does not
belong to the arc. The reason for this is in that the marker is always presented in its actual
position, while an arc is always approximated by a series of straight segments. This means
that the marked point surely belongs to the arc.
3.3.7
Diagonal line of surface entities
The command Visibility is used for viewing diagonal in each area structural
element (slabs and area supports) of a given model. The program automatically defines its
position in such a way that from two diagonals of the surrounding rectangle of the structural
element it selects the one whose length exceeds more over the area of the structural element.
Viewing slab diagonal has been turned on

Automatically defined position can be changed via the command Diagonal line
of surface entities. Once you have selected this command either from the dropdown menu Auxiliary level or by clicking on the displayed icon, the program will
request from the command bar that you select the diagonal whose position you
want to change.
<0 sel.> Diagonal line of surface entities Select (Window / <End>):
Once you have completed the selection, you must assign the diagonal new position by
selecting two points in the drawing.
First point:
Second point:
380
The program will remain in the procedure of selecting as long as you mark the end of the
command by selecting the sub-option End.
The slab diagonal position has been changed by selecting

two points in the drawing
3.3.8
Information
Characteristics of elements of the model can be displayed in the special dialog box
that appears when the mouse pointer is positioned over them. The user can choose the
amount and the method of presenting information in the dialogue. This possibility of the
program is activated by selecting "Information", which is located in the drop-down menu
"Auxiliary functions". Another way for calling this command is with the left mouse button click
while the cursor is over the icon. When the command is active, the icon is imprinted, or framed
with a blue square (way of displaying active icons depends on the operating system).
Dialog with information about entities

In the dialog box with information about entities, a table with two columns is shown. The left
column of the table displays the name of the information that is displayed in the right column.
For example, if the mouse pointer is positioned over slab, in the first row of the table, in the
left column will be written "Entity", and in the right column "Slab". When the left column has
381
written "Set", the right column will have written the number of the set that is assigned to a
slab, and so on.
If there are several entities on place the mouse cursor, the program will display characteristics
for the one of them in the dialog box. At the same time, the title of the dialogue will show the
total number of entities in the brackets that are under the mouse pointer, as well as the
number of entities whose information is currently displayed, such as "Information (1/4)". In
these cases, by pressing Q on the keyboard, the entity whose information is displayed can be
changed.
Display mode of dialogue with the information as well as its contents, is set in the dialog box
that opens with the right mouse click on the command icon.
Dialog box for adjusting the display of information

It simultaneously opens the information display dialog also. Its size and position can only be
changed in this mode of the display. The size of the dialogue is changed by moving the mouse
pointer over one of its edges, until it gets the form of arrows:
. Arrows indicate possible
directions of movement of the edge. When the pointer changes its appearance, press the left
button, then the mouse is moved until the page is not in the desired position, then release the
left mouse button. When the mouse pointer is positioned over one of the corners of the
dialogue, the position of both sites forming the angle can be also changed. The selection of
place on the screen, where the dialogue mode of presenting information will be opened, is
done in the way where the mouse pointer is first positioned over the part of the dialogue in
which its name is printed. Then the left mouse button is pressed and you should perform its
movement until the dialogue does not get to the desired position, and then release the button.
The upper table of dialog for adjustment of the information display, there are all entities whose
properties can be displayed. Using check boxes which are located in the column labeled "Sel",
382
you can determine if the program will display the information for that entity when the mouse
pointer is positioned over it. Right mouse click on that column opens a drop-down menu with
the options "All on" and "All off". Using them you can easily turn on or off display of
information for all entities.
The table below shows all the entity characteristics that are selected in the upper table, which
can be displayed in a dialog box with information. In the column "N" ordinal numbers of the
entities characteristic are written, while the second column lists their names. The name of the
selected entity is written as the title of this column. Characteristics that will be displayed in the
dialog box with the information are determined by the check boxes in the column "Sel". The
right mouse click on the name of this column also opens a drop-down menu with the options
"All on" and "All off".
Using them you can easily turn on or off display of information for all characteristics of the
selected entities. By using the check boxes in the column "Bol", you can determine which
characteristics of the selected entity will be displayed in bold. Right-click over this column also
opens a menu with options for quick turning check boxes on or off.
Changing the position of the selected characteristics of the selected entities for one place Up
in the table, is done by using
, while the change in position by one place down, is done by
using
.
On the left side of the dialog there are parameters for adjusting the way information are
displayed:
Font - a list from which a font for printing information is chosen.
Size - edit field that sets the size of the font for printing information.
Transparency - moving the slider adjusts the transparency of the information dialogue. The
current state of the dialogue transparency, expressed as a percentage, is shown in the box
behind the slider.
Auto-hide time the slider for setting the time after which the information dialogue
disappears from the screen when the mouse pointer is moved away from all entities. Minimum
time that can be selected is 0s and the maximum is 10s.
Show up timeout - the slider for setting the time after which the information dialogue
appears when mouse pointer is positioned over an entity. Minimum time that can be selected is
0s and maximum is 10s. The time that corresponds to the current position of the slider is
displayed in the box is its right side.
Dynamic change of window size - since different entities display different amount of
information, it is possible that adjusted dialog size is not enough for displaying all of it, or for
another entity there is too much empty space. When this check box is turned on, the program
automatically adjusts the height of the information dialogue, to the amount of displayed
information. If the check box is turned off, the dialogue will not change its size, regardless of
the amount of displayed data.
Non-moveable upper window side - when this check box is turned on, the information
dialog automatically resizes, but only its bottom side will move, while the upper will always
have the same position on the screen. This check box is available only when the check box
"Dynamic change the window size" is turned on.
Highlight the entity showing information for - when this check box is turned on, an entity
whose information is displayed is drawn in a thicker line to emphasizing it in relation to other
entities. Emphasizing is done only in the window where the mouse pointer is currently located.
383
Show highlighted in all views - when this check box is on, an entity whose information is
displayed in bold is drawn in 2D or 3D window, no matter where the mouse pointer is currently
located. This check box is available only when the check box "Emphasizing of entities whose
information appears" is turned on.
Show at the cursor position - when this check box is on, the information dialog is displayed
on the current position of the mouse. In general it aligns its upper left corner with the mouse
pointer. In situations where strict following of that rule would lead to dialog partially being
drawn out of the screen, another dialog corner will be aligned with mouse pointer. This may
happen when mouse pointer is near the edge of the screen.
Show only if Shift is pressed - when this check box is on, the information dialogue will be
displayed only if the Shift key is pressed on your keyboard.
Minimal refresh time - the slider for adjusting the time interval between two refreshments of
information dialog content. Minimum duration of interval that can be selected is 0ms and
maximum is 100ms. The duration of this time interval, which corresponds to the current
position of the slider is displayed in the field on its right side.
Reset window position - this button resets the information dialog position to its default
value.
- Saves the configuration with the current state of dialog parameters.
- Deleting the current configuration from the database.
From a closed list located on the left of the button
saved configurations.
, you can select any of the previously
By selecting the OK button, you can close the dialog box for adjusting the display of
information dialog, accepting all changes.
3.4
Commands for Entering the Elements of

Drawings other than Parts of the Structure
This group of commands comprises commands used to create elements of a

drawing other than parts of the structure, and therefore they have no effect on calculations of
the model. By these commands, which are within the drop-down menu Auxiliary level,
auxiliary axes can be established, arbitrary lines can be drawn, text can be written and
drawings can be dimensioned. All these entities can be equally established both in
Disposition window and in 2D View window, disregarding which part of the model is
currently presented it. Construction lines, texts and figure dimensions can also be placed on
specially defined auxiliary views obtained by selecting evolved structural elements (see
Ccapter 3.1.12). In those cases, these entities can be even outside the domain of the curved
surface.
384
Figure dimension and title are set within the auxiliary view Sphere
Entities established in this way cannot be selected within the given auxiliary view, but only in
the base plane of the given curved surface. This means that if you desire to move, or even
change the content of entities established in this way, you have to establish the base plane of
the given curved surface as the current view in 2D View window.
The base plane of a sphere is presented in 2D View window

The established entities practically exist in the base plane of the curved surface, and the
program only enables them to be presented within the defined auxiliary view.
3.4.1
Auxiliary Axes
In Chapter 2.5 we have described in detail the ways in which the points in a
drawing can be selected. One of the most practical ways is to select points by OSNAP criterion
(see Chapter 2.5.5). Since structural elements are almost always assigned in the direction of
some axes in the course of designing, it would be extremely practical to have auxiliary axes
drawn in such way in the drawing that they accompany the geometry of structural elements.
A whole system of commands was developed for this purpose, entered by
activating the command Axes.
385
Although we assume that you already know, we shall emphasise once again that these
horizontal and vertical axes have no connection with the mesh of finite elements, but instead
they only accompany the geometry of the structure to enable it to be defined more easily.
When command Axes is selected, one horizontal and one vertical axis that intersect in the
origin of coordinates (point 0,0,0) appear in the region of drawing and the command bar
obtains the following form.
Vertical axes (marK/Move/Delete/mOdify/Ref. axis/Generate/<End>/Other direction):
By selecting the command, the axes automatically become visible, disregarding the state of
parameter Construction Lines in the dialog box of command Visibility. Sub-options of
this command are written in brackets on the command bar, and if none of them is selected,
the User is expected to enter a new axis.
Since working either only with horizontal or only with vertical axes is possible at a time, which
axes are currently active - that is, to which axes all further operations will refer - is written at
the beginning of the command bar. Changing the currently active axes is performed by clicking
on the last viewed sub-option on the command bar Other direction. In other words, every
time you click on this sub-option, Horizontal axes or Vertical axes will be alternately set as
the currently active one.
The auxiliary axes can be equally established both in Disposition window and in 2D View
window, disregarding the currently defined view in it. For that reason, they are classified into
so-called global and local auxiliary axes. More exactly, global auxiliary axes are those axes that
are oriented in the direction global coordinate axes and they are unique (common) to entire
space model. This practically means that if you set the auxiliary X and Y-axes in 2D View
window when any of the levels is set as the current one, at the same time they will also apply
to all other horizontal planes at some other level also. Those same axes will also be presented
in the Disposition window.
Defined auxiliary axes in the direction of global X and Y axes,

Are common both to 2D View and to Disposition windows
When any of the frames, the longitudinal direction of which coincides with the direction of
global X and Y-axes within the disposition of the structure, is presented in 2D View window,
corresponding global auxiliary axes will also be presented in this window.
386
Vertical axes presented in 2D View window, when a transverse frame

is presented in that window, practically represent auxiliary axes
set in direction of global X-axis
Vertical axes presented in 2D View window, when a longitudinal frame

is presented in that window, practically represent auxiliary axes
set in direction of global Y-axis
The established auxiliary global Z-axes will also apply to all vertical planes presented in 2D
View window. This means that when any of the frames in the disposition of the building is set
as the current frame, disregarding whether their direction is or is not in the direction of the
global coordinate axes, the presented X-axes will correspond to the auxiliary global Z-axes.
387
X-axes presented in 2D View window are common to all frames,

disregarding their direction within the disposition of the building
Therefore, the global auxiliary axes are common to the entire model, and they are presented
in all view planes the normal vector of which is such that the assigned distance between the
global axes can be presented in actual size without any transformations.
Since it is planned by the program that the auxiliary axes can always be assigned in 2D View
window, disregarding the plane of current view, in case when the axes are assigned in the view
plane in which the corresponding global axes cannot be seen, the program will declare the
assigned axes as the local axes for the given view plane. A typical example is assigning Y-axes
in 2D View window when any of the frames, the position of which is oblique in regard to
global coordinate axes within the disposition plan, is set as the current frame.
The set local Y-axes will not be visible in any other 2D View, except in the one
the normal vector of which is the same as the normal vector
of the presented frame within the disposition plan of the building
Same as in global auxiliary axes, the rule that the assigned mutual distances between local
axes have to be maintained in all views applies here also. This means that the set local
auxiliary axes are adjoined to the plane in which they are assigned, and they will be presented
only in view planes having the same normal vector as the plane to which the assigned local
auxiliary axes belong.
388
3.4.1.1 Defining the Axes

As we have already mentioned, if none of the offered options is selected, the User
is expected to assign an axis, horizontal or vertical, depending on what is written at the end of
the command bar. Depending on which window is the currently active one, the axes will be
established in that window. Be cautious, especially when defining the auxiliary axes by
assigning the coordinates, since the assigned coordinates will refer to the currently active
window.
All axes that are being defined are numbered from 0 to n, separately for X, and
separately for Y direction (numbering of the axes is sorted by increasing coordinates). The
program itself establishes the axes numbered by 0, and they intersect the origin of
coordinates (point 0,0). The serial numbers of horizontal axes are written along the left border
of the drawing region, while the serial numbers of vertical axes are written along the bottom
border of the of the drawing region. The default names of the axes can be changed in the way
that will be described in Chapter 3.4.1.5.
Same principles apply both to vertical and to horizontal axes and they can be defined in one of
the following ways:
By selecting a free point in the drawing or by precise targeting by OSNAP criterion. If you
click the mouse button, X or Y axis will be set exactly through the selected point. Since
it is possible to establish the auxiliary axes in the Disposition window also, in the course of
execution of this command you will not be able to change the current frame transparently,
since each click within the Disposition window will be interpreted as a requirement for a
new axis to be assigned.
By assigning the absolute coordinates individually, i.e. the X or Y coordinates, depending
on whether horizontal axes (Y coordinate is assigned) or vertical axes (X coordinate is
assigned) are being established. If for example you assign from the keyboard a value: 5.5,
in case Y-axes are active, the program will then establish a vertical axis that is at a
distance 5.5 from the origin of coordinates. In case that X-axes are active, a horizontal
axis that is at a distance 5.5 from the origin of coordinates will be established.
By assigning individually the relative coordinates in regard to the reference point. One
horizontal and one vertical axis are always referent, and they are clearly denoted by a short
thickened line at the beginning of the given axis. The last axis established is automatically
declared by the program as the reference axis, and the User can establish an arbitrary axis
as the reference axis himself by sub-option Ref. axis. When this sub-option is selected,
the following message is written on the command bar:
Referent line for vertical axes (<End>):
The indicator obtains the form of a select-box, into which any part of the axis, that is to be
set as the reference axis, should be taken. Surely, a horizontal axis cannot be established
as a reference axis if the vertical axes are active, and vice versa. After selecting the axis,
the program will return to the basic form of the command bar and it will place a marker at
the beginning of the newly established reference axis.
In order to clearly indicate to the program that relative coordinates are concerned,
character @ has to be assigned before the corresponding coordinate. If for example you
assign from the keyboard a value: @5.5, in case Y-axes are active, the program will then
establish a vertical axis that is at a distance 5.5 from the vertical reference axis. In case
that X-axes are active, a horizontal axis that is at a distance 5.5 from the reference
horizontal axis will be established.
389
By assigning the absolute coordinates serially. The first number assigned represents the
number of distances, while the second number represents the magnitude of the distance.
These two numbers have to be separated by a sign *. If for example you assign from the
keyboard: 4*3.5, four horizontal/vertical axes will be established having the following
absolute coordinates: 3.5, 7.0, 10.5 and 14.
By assigning the relative coordinates serially. The procedure operates in almost exactly the
same way as in assigning the absolute coordinates serially, except that the first axis is not
established in regard to the origin of coordinates but in regard to the reference axis. If the
axis that is at a distance 10 from the origin of coordinates is set as the reference axis, and
for example you assign from the keyboard: @3*2.2, three axes that are at the following
distances: 12.2, 14.4 and 16.6 from the origin of coordinates will be assigned.
3.4.1.2 Deleting the Axes

In addition to defining the axes, command Axes enables various manipulations
with already established axes. Same as in defining the axes, all operations will refer to
currently active axes (horizontal X or vertical Y).
When sub-option Delete is selected, the indicator obtains the shape of the select box, and
the following message appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Deleting vertical axes (<End>):
Now the User is expected to select vertical or horizontal axes to be deleted, depending on
which axes are set as the current ones. The principle of selecting is the standard one, and thus
here both individual and group selecting are enabled. In case of individual selecting, any part
of the axis that is to be deleted should be taken into the small square. If the select box is
brought into such position that it does not intersect any of the axes, a click on the left mouse
button will be interpreted as assigning the first corner of a rectangular region, so the program
will require from the command bar the opposite corner to be assigned also:
Opposite Corner:_
All axes, horizontal or vertical, that pass through rectangular region defined in this way, will be
selected. In addition to this customary selecting by mouse, selecting from the keyboard, by
assigning the serial number of the axis that is to be deleted, is also enabled. As a reply to the
message from the command bar, that requires those axes that are to be deleted to be
selected, if for example you assign:
<0 sel.> Deleting vertical axes (<End>): 2
Axis number 2 will then be selected to be deleted, on the condition that it exists in the
drawing.
3.4.1.3 Changing the Distances between the Axes

In case an error has been made, the User is enabled to change the distance
between any two consecutive axes in the drawing by selecting the sub-option mOdify.
Horizontal distances between established vertical axes are written at the top of the region of
the drawing, while the vertical distances are written between the horizontal axes, along the
right side of the region of the drawing to enable easier control of accuracy of data input.
By selecting the sub-option mOdify, the program will require from the command bar the
distance between two consecutive horizontal or vertical axes to be selected:
Select distance between vertical axes (<End>):_
390
Selecting of the desired distance is performed either by a simple click on the mouse button
over the region of drawing between two consecutive axes (horizontal or vertical), or by
assigning from the keyboard the larger number of the line that defines that distance. In both
cases, the consecutive axes defining the selected distance will be marked, and a message
showing that the User is expected to assign a new value will appear on the command bar:
New distance between vertical axes <6.74>:
Information on the current state of the selected distance is written between angular brackets,
and the new value can be assigned either from the keyboard or by selecting a point on the
drawing that will determine the new position of the marked axis having a larger serial number.
By assigning the new value the selected distance will be corrected, and all axes having larger
serial numbers will be moved in such way that their mutual distances remain the same.
3.4.1.4 Moving the Axes

By selecting the sub-option Move from the command bar, it is possible to change
the position of any selected axis. The essential difference between this option and the option
for changing the distance between two axes is in that by moving the selected axis in this way,
the position of other axes remains the same.
By selecting the sub-option Move, the program issues a message on the command bar
stating that the User is expected to select the axis the position of which is to be changed:
Vertical axis translation (<End>):_
In this procedure, only one vertical or one horizontal axis can be selected by bringing the
mouse into such position that the select box intersects the desired axis. The axis can also be
selected by assigning its serial number from the keyboard. The selected axis will be marked,
and the program will now require from the command bar its new position to be assigned (n
denotes the serial number of the selected axis).
New position of vertical axis (<krAj>):_
Its position can be assigned by any of the previously described procedures for selecting the
points (selecting a point in the drawing, absolute coordinates, relative coordinates, etc.).
3.4.1.5 Changing the Name of the Axes

Selecting the sub-option marK from the command bar enables you to change the
assigned name of any of the placed axes in the drawing:
Vertical axis label (Style / <End>):
Now you are expected either to select the axis which you wish to rename or select the suboption Style. After the selection of the axis has been done, a new message will appear on the
command bar:
Vertical axis label n: 1
The displayed label n represents the ordinal number of the selected axis, whereas 1
represents its old name. Once you have assigned a new name for the selected axis and
pressed the Enter key, the name will be accepted and the program will return the previous
layout of the command bar. Selecting axes and changing their names can be performed until
you exit the command by selecting the sub-option End from the command bar.
391
Selecting the sub-option Style from the command bar will result in opening a dialog box of
the following layout:
The dialog box for defining the axis

labeling style the layout
All auxiliary axes that are oriented either in the direction of global X axis or in the direction of
global Z axis belong to some of the YOZ plane. The program assigns a label to each of these
planes. This label is used to mark on the screen all axes representing the cross-section of the
given YOZ plane and the current view plane. In this way it has been made possible that the
auxiliary axes that are oriented in the direction of global Y axis, belong to the same YOZ plane
but are located on different levels have the same label.
Similarly, all auxiliary axes that are oriented in the direction of global Z axis, belong to the
given YOZ plane and different frames which spread in the direction of global X axis will have
the same label.
The explanation for XOZ plane and XOY plane is analogous to the explanation for YOZ plane.
The labeling style of the given planes is defined by selecting one of the offered styles from the
same-named combo boxes, whereas selecting the labeling style of the auxiliary axes is
performed from the combo box Local Axes.
The content of one combo box

for selecting the labeling style
392
It has been assigned that the YOZ planes are marked by Roman numerals,
and XOZ planes by capital letteres of the alphabet
After selecting the labeling style Values, you are allowed to request from the program to
write next to each auxiliary axis its distance from the axis which goes through the coordinate
beginning of the current view plane. This labeling style is most frequently used for labeling
XOY plane, that is, horizontal auxiliary axes in frames, since these values represent elevation
coordinates of the selected axes.
Labeling an XOY plane via the style Values

The check box Delete existing axis labels is used to delete all manually assigned labels,
and write in their place the selected axes labels. If this check box is off, changing the labeling
style in this dialog box will not affect manually assigned axes labels.
3.4.1.6 Generating axes automatically

In addition to the familiar ways of placing construction lines, generating axes
automatically, based on the model geometry, is now made possible within the Tower
program. Generating axes automatically is performed by selecting the sub-option Generate
from the command bar. As a result, the program places construction lines as the currently
active direction in all refraction points of the structural elements contours. Changing the
currently active axes and reselecting the sub-option Generate will result in generating axes
393
automatically in the other direction. Generating axes automatically can be performed in 2D
View and Disposition windows.
3.4.2
Selecting the Layer for Drawing
Sub-option Layer is also always present within the commands for defining
construction lines, texts and figure dimensions. When activated, a dialog box for selecting the
current layer for drawing opens.
Appearance of the dialog box

for selecting the current layer
Eight layers, in which elements of a drawing other than the parts of structures can be drawn,
are planned by the program. A different color, that will determine in the drawing exactly to
which layer certain entities constructed by these commands belong, is planned for each of
these layers.
The current layer for drawing is selected by a simple click on the mouse button over the name
of that layer, so that the small circle before the selected level becomes blackened. When the
command field OK is activated, this dialog box will be closed, and a circle filled by color
corresponding to the layer that was set as the current layer will appear at the beginning of the
command bar. All elements of the drawing that will be drawn further on, will be drawn in color
of the current layer to which they will belong. Such organisation in the program enables you to
set certain texts, lines and figure dimensions onto various levels according to your desire.
Since the Visibility command enables the visibility of each layer individually to be
established and deleted, one of the basic applications of this method of drawing is more than
clear. Moreover, beside the color you can also define a different type of line and its thickness
for each of the layers in course of printing (see Chapter 3.5.1).
If you right-click over any of the icons that activate commands Line, Text and
Dimensions, all layer are set as visible or invisible alternatively. Selective defining of
visibility of each layer individually is achieved within command Visibility.
3.4.3
Drawing the Construction Lines

When this icon is selected, command Line, used to draw arbitrary lines in the
drawing that will not influence the calculation of the model, is entered.
Method of operating with this command is explained in detail in Chapter 2.6, so it will not be
repeated here. The lines are drawn in color corresponding to the current layer. This command
394
is used especially in complicated models when various construction lines need to be drawn for
defining their geometry.
Note:
In case you desire to establish the construction lines in the Disposition window, you have to
select the first point of a line in this window. It is clear that then all segments of a polygonal
line have to belong to this window. In case you select the first point of the polygonal line in the
window for 2D or 3D view of the model, a click on the mouse button within the Disposition
window will be interpreted as a requirement for the current frame to be changed.
3.4.4
Writing the Text

Command Text serves for writing various titles and comments in the drawing.
When this command is selected, the command bar obtains the following form:
Reference Point (Font <2 mm>/Angle<0>/Alignment<LD>/Layer/<End>):_

Namely, the User is expected to enter the reference point of the text. This point determines
the position of the text in the drawing, more precisely, the entered text will be aligned in
relation to this point, depending on the current alignment conditions. The method of selecting
the alignment conditions will be explained in further text. When you click the mouse button on
the reference point, the following message is written on the command bar:
Text:_
Now the program expects the User to enter the desired content of the text. While the text is
being entered, the program writes it in DRAG mode in the drawing, and thus the possibility of
entering incorrect text is reduced. The end of text entering is denoted by pressing the key
Enter, after which the entered text will be written in the drawing, in color corresponding to
the current layer (at the beginning of the command bar there is a circle-shaped symbol the
color of which indicates the set current layer), and it will be aligned in regard to the reference
point in accordance with the current alignment conditions.
In the drawing, the font size, the angle at which the text is being written, alignment conditions
and font type will correspond to the current state of regulating parameters. The current values
of these parameters are written in angular brackets next to each of the sub-options on the
command bar. The parameters are set before selecting the reference point, by sub-options on
the command bar that appear when the command Text is activated.
Reference Point (Font <2 mm>/Angle<0>/aliGnment<LD>/Layer/<End>):_
The program saves the current values of these parameters and it uses them in its operating all
until they are changed by the User.
Font Type and Font size
The font type and font size are selected by activating the sub-option Font, after which a
dialog box as the following one opens.
395
Appearance of the dialog box for selecting the fonts

The font type is selected in a closed list in the left part of the dialog box. All font types installed
within your Windows will be presented in your list of font types.
By assigning the desired values in edit boxes Size and Width Factor, you have the
possibility to affect the font size and its width to assigned height ratio. The font size is
assigned in millimetres, on the basis of which the program calculates itself the corresponding
size in drawing units. The method of calculating the relation between the assigned font sizes in
millimetres on paper and drawing units on the screen will be explained in detail in Chapter
3.5.2 together with the explanation of assigning the current scale. For now, let us leave it at
that that the font size should be assigned in millimetres.
Switches B , I and _ , enable you to define one of the styles of the selected font
type: bold, italic and underline fonts.
When command OK is activated, this dialog box will be closed, and the selected font will be
set as the current font. The selected font size in millimetres will be written in angular brackets
within sub-option Font on the command bar.
Angle of Text Writing
The angle at which the text is to be written in the drawing is selected by command Angle.
When this command is selected, the following message appears in the screen:
Angle <0>:
The User is now required to assign the angle in degrees (the current value is written in angular
brackets, and the value of the angle increases anticlockwise). The angle can be determined
both by assigning from the keyboard and by selecting two points in the drawing, while the
program will read from the drawing the angle of the line that passes through those two points.
When the first point in the drawing is selected, the program will require from the command bar
the second point to be entered.
Second Point:
The assigned value of the angle will be adopted by the program as the current value and the
program will return to the basic form of the command bar within the command Text.
Aligning the Text
The method of aligning the text in regard to the reference point is selected by activating the
sub-option Alignment from the command bar. Alignment can be performed both
horizontally and vertically. The text can be aligned horizontally in relation to both left and right
margins, or it can be cantered. The text can be aligned in vertical sense in relation to top,
bottom or centre. The current alignment condition is written in angular brackets, within this
sub-option on the command bar. It is denoted by first two letters and the first concerns
396
alignment in horizontal sense while the second concerns alignment in vertical sense. When
sub-option aliGnment is selected, the following message is written on the command bar:
Horizontal (<Left>/Centre/Right):_
The User is now expected to select alignment in horizontal sense ( the angle 0 is not
considered here as horizontal, but instead the angle at which the text is being written). If you
click the mouse button over one of the sub-options offered on the command bar, the method
of aligning in horizontal sense will be selected, and a new message with options offered for
alignment in vertical sense (direction perpendicular to writing direction) will appear on the
command bar.
Vertical (Up/Middle/<Down>):_
When the new alignment condition is selected, the program will return to the basic form of the
command bar for selecting the reference point, and newly defined alignment conditions will be
written in angular brackets.
3.4.5
Dimensioning the Drawing
Since the Tower program is graphically oriented and since it enables forming the
complete graphical documentation, in order to enable the clarity of input data, it is necessary
to dimension the drawn geometry of the model.
The procedure of dimensioning is very simple and it is achieved by selecting the
command Dimensions, after which the following message appears on the
command bar:
Input Point for Dimensioning (Choise / Deselect / <End> / Layer):
Now the User is expected to select all points the mutual distances between which need to be
dimensioned. In addition to selecting the points individually, you also have the possibility to
select all desired points by sub-option Choise.
<0 sel.> Select (All / Window / Polygon / selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect /
<End>:
The procedure of selecting the points is described in detail in Chapter 2.5. When all points in
the drawing have been selected, selecting the sub-option End will denote the end of the
procedure of point selecting and the program will now require from the command bar the
position of the dimension line to be determined.
Automatic Dimensioning Position (Points input / Horizontal / Vertical / Inclined / Layer):
It can be seen from the content of the command bar that in fact there are four individual
procedures for assigning the following: automatic, horizontal, vertical and inclined dimension
line (sub-option Points input is predicted for returning to the point selecting procedure).
In default, the program always offers the automatic dimension line to be set, while the
procedure for positioning the horizontal, vertical and inclined dimension line is entered by
selecting the corresponding sub-option from the command bar.
By positioning the automatic dimension line it is understood that the position of the mouse
pointer in regard to the points selected for dimensioning will determine whether horizontal or
vertical dimension line will be placed. The program will be constantly drawing in DRAG mode
the horizontal/vertical dimension line, depending on the current position of the mouse pointer.
397
The position of the mouse pointer in relation to points selected for dimensioning
determined the positioning of the horizontal dimension line
The position of the mouse pointer in relation to points selected for dimensioning
determined the positioning of the vertical dimension line
A click on the mouse button will result in the end of the dimensioning procedure, and a
horizontal/vertical dimension line will be placed in the selected position.
In case that you cannot select easily the desired type of dimension line in DRAG mode, by
selecting the corresponding sub-option you enter the procedure of explicit positioning the
horizontal/vertical dimension line. Selecting the sub-option Horizontal results in the
following appearance of the command bar.
Horizontal Dimension Position (Points input/Automatic/Vertical/Inclined/Layer):
In this case, the program always draws a horizontal dimension line in DRAG mode,
disregarding the relative position of the mouse pointer to the points selected for dimensioning.
The same also applies for explicit positioning of the vertical dimension line, by sub-option
Vertical. A point selected in the drawing will always result in setting a vertical line.
Command Inclined should be selected from the command bar, after which a message,
requiring from the User to assign the inclination angle of the dimension line, appears.
Inclined Dimension Angle (<0>/Points input/ Automatic/Horizontal/Vertical/Layer):
398
This angle can be assigned either from the keyboard in degrees (the positive angle increases
anticlockwise) or by selecting two points in the drawing. If a point in the drawing is selected,
the following message appears on the command bar:
Second Point:_
The inclination angle of the oblique dimension line is determined by selecting the second point
in the drawing, and the further course of the procedure is identical as in horizontal and vertical
dimensioning.
Inclined Dimension Position (<Back>):_
Namely, the position of the inclined line is determined by selecting a point in the drawing, and
all mutual distances between the points selected for dimensioning will be projected to the
assigned oblique direction.
Note:
Selecting a font, the number of decimals in labels, arrow type and size is performed within the
command Parameters (see chapter 3.5.1).
3.4.6
Item mark
A textual-numerical indicator that is, item mark, can be assigned to all structural
elements (slab/wall, beam/column and all supports). This indicator is written in all textual
reports. Similarly, it is possible to request viewing it on the screen and thus also in graphic
blocks which are exported to the project documentation. Item mark practically represents the
name of the element to which it has been added and it considerably facilitates work both
during drawing a model and creating the project documentation.
In course of itemising, the program defines the sequence of entities according to the
coordinates of their centroid. First, Z coordinates are compared, then Y coordinates and finally
X coordinates. Supposing all beams of one model are to be itemised: first, you must find all
beams whose centroid belongs to the plane with the shortest Z coordinate, and then, among
these, find all beams whose centroid belongs to the direction with the shortest Y coordinate
and finally, itemise these, starting from the beam whose centroid has the shortest X
coordinate. It is worth mentioning that entities belonging to the assigned model levels are
given preference and they should be itemised first, and then switch to itemising other entities.
The commands for working with item marks are located in the drop-down menu Auxiliary
level.
3.4.6.1 Item marking

The command Item marking is used for adding item marks to entities which
have been selected in the drawing, and upon its activating, the command bar will
obtain the following layout:
<0 sel.> Item mark edit Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / selection Groups / Recent
selection / Deselect / <End> / reFresh indexes / Deleting all marks):
It should be noted that only entities belonging to the same type - for example, beams only or
slabs only - can be selected simultaneously.
Once the selection has been completed, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
399
The dialog box for adding item

marks- the layout
The edit box Item description is used for assigning item mark to be added to all selected
entities.
The check box Include numbering is used for defining whether the program will add item
mark alongside item mark to each entity. When this check box is on, other parameters in this
dialog box become available for editing too.
The edit box Starting number is used for assigning the number from which numerating
items starts. If the assigned number is 0, numerating items will not be carried out that is, the
program will behave in the same way as when the check box Include numbering is off.
Once you turn the check box Group co-linear on, the program is requested to numerate the
co-linear entities with the same number.
It should be noted that the program will automatically add indexes which define them
unambiguously to all entities which have the same item mark and item mark. These indexes
are separated from the item marks by a small line (*-n), and viewing them is defined in the
dialog box within the command Visibility.
The command field Delete item marks is used for removing item marks which have been
previously added to selected entities.
Activating the command field OK will result in closing the dialog box and the program will
add the assigned item marks to all selected entities. Viewing item marks is defined in the
dialog box within the command Visibility, for each particular entity.
400
Item marks have been added to all selected beams

via the command Item marking
Using the command Item marking enables you to change item marks which have been
previously added to structural elements. If all selected entities have been itemised using the
same parameters, the program will display them in the dialog box:
All selected entities have

the same parameters
The parameters which are not same for all the selected entities wil be specially marked:
The parameters Item description

and Include numbering are not
same for all the selected entities
401
The message which contains the request for selecting entities will remain on the command bar
as long as you mark the completion of the command by selecting the sub-option End.
<0 sel.> Item mark edit Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / selection Groups / Recent
selection / Deselect / <End> / reFresh indexes / Deleting all marks):
Selecting the sub-option reFresh indexes from the command bar will result in updating
item marks. This option can prove extremely useful considering the fact that the sequence of
item marks and indexes can easily be disrupted (for instance, by deleting and adding new
entities, deleting the assigned item marks etc.)
The sub-option Deleting all marks is used for removing item marks of all model elements.
3.4.6.2 Automatic item marking

The command Automatic item marking is used for adding simultaneously item
marks to all structural elements of a model. Once you have activated it, a dialog
box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for generating item plan - the layout

In the upper part of the dialog box, there is a combo box containing all levels which have been
defined for a given model. Their names are written in the column Level name whereas their
Z coordinates are written in the column Z. The right part of the combo box is divided into
two parts: Beam and Slab. Item marks which will be added to all slabs/beams of a given
level are assigned in the columns Decription, whereas item mark from which numerating
starts for each level is assigned in the column Number. Upon right-clicking on the assigned
item mark, a drop-down menu offering two options will open up:
Apply to all an item mark is added to slabs/beams in all levels.
Remove to all item marks which have been assigned to slabs/beams of any level are now
removed.
402
The drop-down menu which opens up upon

right-clicking on the item mark
Once you activate the check boxes which are located in the column Cont., the program is
requested to start numerating beams from the next available number which has left after
numerating slabs. Supposing the assigned starting number for numerating slabs is on a level
101 and there are three slabs on this level. If the check box in the column Cont. is on,
numerating beams will start from number 104. When these check boxes are on, corresponding
fields for defining the starting number for numerating beams will be unavailable for editing.
The check boxes which are located in the column Item are used for defining whether
slabs/beams on a given level are itemised.
Upon right-clicking on any of these check boxes, a drop-down menu offering two options will
open up:
All on all check boxes in a given column are turned on
All off all check boxes in a given column are turned off
403
The drop-down menu which opens up upon right-clicking

on any of the check boxes
In the lower part of the dialog box, there are parameters for defining the way of itemising
other entities.
Parameters group for defining the way of itemising walls

For each of these entities, item mark is assigned in the corresponding edit box Decription,
whereas the starting number for numerating is assigned in the edit box Number. The check
box Itemising is used for defining whether their itemising will be carrried out.
When the check box Group co-linear is on, the program will add the same item mark to all
co-linear entities belonging to the same type (all beams, for example) and having the same
item mark. The program will also add indexes which unambiguously define them to all entities
having the same item mark and item mark.
404
The current state of parameters can be saved in the configuration database under the desired
name. For this purpose, the command field
has been envisaged, upon activating which the
following dialog box will open up:
The configuration name is assigned in the edit box, whereas activating the command field
OK will result in saving it in the database. The configuration name can also be defined by
selecting from a box any of the previously saved configurations. In this case, the previously
saved configuration will be copied and the program will issue an appropriate warning message
after exiting the dialog box:
All saved configurations are located in the combo box which also makes it possible to import
them at any moment.
The command field
is used for deleting the current configuration from the database.
Part of the dialog box for working with configurations

Once you have activated the command field OK , the program will close the dialog box and
itemise all elements in the model in accordance with the assigned parameters.
405
Item marks have been added to all entities in the model

via the command Automatic item marking
3.5
Adjusting the Parameters Used by the Program

in its Operating (Setup menu)
The global parameters used by the program in its operating are adjusted by
selecting the commands from this group. The values of parameters set in this way are saved
all until they are changed by activating one of these commands.
3.5.1
Settings
When command Settings within the drop-menu Setup is selected, a dialog box
for defining the parameters, which determine the method of presenting the drawings both in
the screen and on the paper after printing, used by the program in its operating, opens.
Appearance of the dialog box reserved for adjusting the color

and line thickness parameters
406
Since a large number of data needs to be presented in this dialog box, it is organised as a
branching tree (see Chapter 2.4.4). When one of the options offered in the tree and their
sub-options is selected, the middle part of the dialog box is changed. The lower part of the
dialog box is common to all parts of the data in the tree, and it functions in exactly the same
way disregarding which one of them is currently active.
Since a large quantity of data is assigned in the dialog box withing this command, in order to
both facilitate working with them and reduce chances of making errors, the Tower program
makes it possible to view simultaneously parameters for both Display and Paper.
The dialog box for customizing parameters - the layout

The state of all parameters that can be set in this dialog box can be permanently remembered
and saved with an arbitrarily assigned name. This means that when you set the parameters as
you desire, activate command field Save, and a dialog box with the following appearance will
open soon after:
The desired name should now be assigned ain the edit box and the command field OK should
be activated. In case that the desired name already exists in the parameter list, the program
will issue a corresponding warning.
407
An affirmative answer will result in loss of parameter states that have been previously joined
to the selected name, while a negative answer will result in quitting the save command.
All saved configurations are in the closed list on the left side of the command field Save.
Closed list for selecting any of the previously saved configurations

In addition to the configurations that you have created yourself, a configuration that is
delivered with the program and which is kept by the name Default will always be present in
the list. You can change the current configuration if you click the mouse button on the arrow to
the right of this list to open the list, and if you then select one of the configurations offered in
the open list by click on that configuration.
Command field Delete is used to delete the configuration which has been set as the current
configuration. This means that if you desire to remove permanently a configuration from the
configuration data file, first assign it as the current one, and then activate the command field
Delete. Since this command is destructive, the program will require this action to be
confirmed, and it will not delete the selected configuration all until it receives an affirmative
answer.
Taking parameters for viewing from the configuration database of another user is also
possible. For this purpose, the command field
Import has been envisaged, upon
activating which a new dialog box will open up:
408
The dialog box for importing parameters

configurations - the layout
In course of saving, parameters configurations are placed in the database Tower.$dis. Now
it is necessary to locate the desired database and execute taking configurations via the
command field Open. All configurations which have been located in the selected database
will be saved in the same-named database which the Tower 6 uses in course of its operation
and they will be available for selection from the combo box. If some of the taken
configurations happen to have the same name as the existing configurations, the asterisk
symbol * will be added to them.
When the command field OK is activated, the dialog box will close, and the program will use
the current configuration in its operating all until you set some other configuration as the
current one by selecting the command Settings again.
If you change the state of parameters in the card files of this dialog box without performing
the previously described action of saving the data in the configuration data file, the program
will obey the assigned parameters after exiting this dialog box and activating the command
field OK, but they will be permanently lost when the program is started again.
Appearance of the screen
In this part of the tree, it is possible to change parameters which define the appearance of the
screen itself. In that way, you can easily adjust the surrounding for your work according to
your desire.
409
Part of the dialog box reserved for adjusting the appearance of the screen
The appearance of the parameters set for the current item in the tree is presented in the right
part of the dialog box in order to enable you a better insight into the meaning of the offered
parameters. In case the meaning of any of the parameters is not clear to you, you can easily
find out its meaning by changing its color into another color.
The color of any of the offered parameters is changed by a click on the mouse button on the
corresponding command field in color that is currently valid for it.
Drop-down menu used for selecting the color of the screen background
In addition to colours, both the type and the thickness of the lines of some entities that are
presented in the screen can be adjusted in this part of the dialog box. The line type is
determined by a click on the arrow on the right side of this command field, and soon after, a
drop-down menu for selecting one of the line types planned by the program opens.
410
Drop-down menu used for selecting the line type

Line thickness is assigned in pixels, and it is achieved by assigning the desired value in the
appropriate edit box.
Edit box for selecting the line thickness on the screen

The size of the symbols is also determined in pixels, by assigning the desired value in
appropriate edit box.
411
Edit box for selecting the symbol size on the screen

Structure
The parameters that affect the way the structural elements are drawn, both on the screen and
on paper in course of printing are present in this part of the tree.
Part of the dialog box reserved for adjusting the parameters on structural elements
Double data are kept for all parameters, i.e. each parameter may have one value on the
screen and another value in printing. It should be mentioned that the line thickness on the
screen is assigned in pixels, while on paper in millimetres.
In addition to the previously described parameters, data on font types used for writing texts in
a drawing are assigned in this card file.
412
Part of the dialog box reserved for selecting the font type and font size
Next to each group of parameters which are used to define writing texts in the drawing, a
command field
texts.
has been added to enable adding the assigned parameters to all other
A command field for the fast change of parameters

Upon activating this command field, a dialog box of the following layout opens up:
413
The displayed check boxes are used to select parameters, and, upon activating the command
field OK, their current state will be added to all other texts.
It should be noted that adding parameters via this command is carried out separately for
screen and paper. Also, the parameters for the texts the size of which is assigned in
millimeters will not be added to the texts the size of which is assigned in pixels, and vice
versa. The texts to which the assigned changes would refer are written between brackets, next
to the name of the group of parameters Font, in the dialog box.
For surface structural elements, type of hatching can be selected.
Drop-down menu used for selecting the type of hatching

In addition to the type, each of the hatchings is also determined by the color of the hatching
and by the color of its background. By setting the switch Transparent onto switched-on
state, you have the possibility not to place the hatching over the background but to be
transparent instead (in that case the assigned background color will be ignored).
All previously presented for the structure, applies to all other elements of the drawing, so we
shall no longer deal with this dialog box.
414
3.5.2
Functionality
Selecting the command Functionality, enables you to adjust the group of

parameters that affect the method of program functioning.
Appearance of the dialog box within command Functionality

Due to large quantity of heterogeneous data, this dialog box is organised by card files (see
Chapter 2.4.4.). Each offered card file represents an entirety and here they shall be
described in detail.
Units
Appearance of the card file Units
415
Within this card file, you have the possibility to adjust the measurement system in which you
desire to operate. Namely, by selecting one of the values offered in the closed lists, you select
units of measure for length, forces and temperature. The units of measure do not have to be in
mutual accordance at all, and thus, for example, you can select ft (feet) for length, and kN
for forces. Moreover, you are completely free to change the current units of measure at any
moment of operating with the program. For example, you can create the model in one
measurement system, and inspect the results in another.
Such flexibility is enabled since all values assigned in the program are saved internally in the
metric measurement system (m, Kn, Celsius), so by changing the data in this dialog box
they are instantly recalculated and converted into the selected measurement system. The
currently active measurement system is always written in the status bar.
Part of the status bar reserved for presenting the current units of measure
By selecting from any of the three closed lists offered, you can select one of the units of
measure planned by the program.
List for selecting the units of measure for length
416
Within each of the offered length units, the basic unit is written in the first place while its
smaller parts are written in brackets. Smaller parts of the basic length unit of measure are
used only in assigning the geometry of beam cross-sections. If you select m cm, mm for
length units, this means that the whole geometry of the model will be expressed in metres,
while centimetres will be used only in assigning the beam cross-section dimensions. However,
if you select cm mm for length units, this means that the whole geometry of the model will
be expressed in centimetres while millimetres will be used only in assigning the beam crosssection dimensions.
Finally it should be mentioned that the change of length units will result in automatic alteration
of the figure dimensions in the drawing, if they have been previously set. Thus, they will
always correspond to the currently set length units of measure.
Language
Appearance of the card file Language

There are two closed lists within this card file, from which you can select one of the languages
planned by the program. The language that will be used by the program in course of operating
is selected from the closed list Application Language. This means that the surrounding of
the program will be in the selected language. What languages will be supported in this list
depends exclusively on the licence of the purchased program. Namely, since the price of the
program is not the same in all countries in which it is being sold, the purchased licence will
determine the content of this list.
After changing the application language and activating the command field OK, the program
will issue an appropriate message.
417
It can be clearly seen from the content of the presented message that it is necessary to exit
the program first, and then to start it again for the new language to be accepted.
Since in practice a case may occur that you design for a foreign market, it would surely be
very convenient to have the design documentation in the given language. By selecting the
desired language from the closed list Report Language, from then on, all texts generated
on paper will be written in the selected language. This means that the appearance of the
program remains in the same language, but the textual reports, as well as titles of all blocks of
drawings are created in one of the offered languages. In this list there are no limitations
concerning the purchased licence, so all languages planned by the program will be available.
3D scene illumination
From the combo box within this sub-dialog box, it is possible to select one of the three ways of
viewing the rendered model: Brighter scene, Normal ilumination and Dark scene.
These configurations differ in contrast, sharpness and illumination.
418
Animation
Appearance of card file Animation

Five sliders presented in this card file enable you to affect the animation method used by the
program in presenting the oscillating modes and the deformed model of the structure. You can
influence the value of these parameters if you place each of the sliders into the desired
position, from smaller to larger value. Command field Default is used to return the sliders
into the position defined by the program.
Export in ArmCAD
Selecting one of the two offered switches will result in defining the format of the database to
which the adopted reinforcement is exported in the ArmCAD program. The program will comply
419
with the state of these check boxes within the commands for exporting adopted reinforcement
in the ArmCAD (see chapters 9.3.8 and 9.4.6).
Auto save
Within this sub-dialog box, it is possible to customize saving automatically a database with
input data (extension *.twp) together with a database with created project documentation
(extension *.twp_d). The program will save these databses automatically only if the check
box Auto save on is on.
Time span of saving automatically is assigned in the edit box Time between saves,
whereas the path to the already existing folder in which these databases will be saved is
assigned in the edit box which is located right below it. Selecting a folder can be performed via
the dialog box which opens up once you activate the command field in the continuation of the
edit box.
The dialog box for selecting

folders - the layout
Any of the automatically saved databases can be recovered at any moment that is, saved in
the desired location on the disc for further use. The command field File recovery has been
420
envisaged for recovering databases with input data. Once you have activated this command
field, a dialog box with the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for recovering automatically

saved databases - the layout
In the central part of the dialog box, there is a combo box with automatically saved databases.
The program memorizes 10 databases maximum, and the same database can appear in the
combo box an arbitrary number of times, each time with a different time span. The program
saves the database into the first available position in the box. If all 10 positions in the box
have been occupied, it will search for those databases in which the Noname has been saved
and it will save the oldest copy. If there is no current database copies in the box, the program
will generally save the oldest copy.
The names of databases are displayed in the column Project, whereas date and time of
saving for each particular database are displayed in the column Time. If a given project has
not been saved before saving automatically, it will be assigned the Noname name.
The currently selected database is represented by a different color in the combo box, and
selecting it is carried out by simply clicking on the desired database name. In order to perform
recovering the selected database, it is necessary to activate the command field Recover,
upon which a new dialog box will open up:
The dialog box for saving databases - the layout

This is a standard dialog box for saving databases and it is used to save the recovered
database in the desired location on the disc for further use. If the recovered database with
input data is saved through the database from which it has been created, the program will
delete all databases with the results having the same name (in case there are any, of course).
421
By activating the command field Delete, the selected database copy is removed from the
combo box.
The command field Report recovery has been envisaged for recovering databases with
project documentation. Once you have activated this command field, a dialog box with the
following layout will open up:
Working with this dialog box is exactly the same as with the dialog box for recovering
databases with input data.
It should be noted that it is necessary to save the recovered database over the database from
which it has been created that is, under the same name and in the same folder in which all
other databases of a given project are located, so as to enable using it during working further
with the project.
Scale
Appearance of the card file Scale

In order to explain the role of this card file, first we have to clarify the basic concept of the
program concerning the scales of drawing and printing. In order to avoid tedious recalculating
of the scale of drawing, scale 1:1 is adopted in the program for everything that is being
422
drawn. More exactly, if a meter is selected as the current length unit, in that case 1 m
corresponds to one drawing unit. As a result, assigning any scale in the drawing will not
change the screen view with respect to the geometry of the model and loading. However, that
is not the case with texts, since their size is assigned in millimetres to enable readability. For
that reason it is necessary to assign a scale that will determine the size of all texts on the
screen in drawing units. This applies to all texts that are written by commands Text and
Dimensions, and also to texts representing serial numbers of sets of structural elements,
load intensities, etc. In addition to texts, this recalculating also applies to all symbols the size
of which is also assigned in millimetres (symbol for point support, point load, orthotropy
symbol, etc.).
When selecting the scale, you have the possibility to either select from the list, which opens by
a click on the right side to the edit box, one of the values offered or to assign the desired value
in the edit box.
After assigning the new scale and activating the command field OK, the dialog box will close,
and the program will determine the size of the texts and symbols in the screen in drawing
units on the basis of current overall size of the drawing. Since printing is organised in such way
that, disregarding the assigned scale in export of graphic blocks, the assigned size of the texts
and symbols in millimetres on paper is always obeyed, the change of scale will affect only the
screen view.
Since you will relatively frequently need to change the scale during your work with the
program, you have the possibility to place this combo box by command Toolbars (see
Chapter 3.5.3) also into the space planned for presenting the icons on the screen. This
means that you can change the scale even without entering this dialog box.
Mesh Density
Appearance of the card file Mesh Density

Since in the program the arcs are approximated by a series of straight segments, the fineness
of their division is determined by four presented sliders, when they are arched segments of
linear entities (arcs), when they are a part of 3D cylinder, 3D surface, or when the arc change
of an non-uniform cross-section beam is determined by an arc. You should into account that
exaggerated fineness of arcs will slow down the operation of the program so it is
recommended that instead of changing these values you use the default values.
423
By setting the check box Isolines from both sides to switched-on state, the program is
required to draw the isolines on both sides of the surface structural elements in 3D view of the
model, in the module for processing the calculation results. Namely, if this check box is set to
switched-off state, full isolines might not be visible in all parts since they are covered by the
back of the given surface element.
Isolines from both sides - OFF
Isolines from both sides - ON
Command field Default is used to return the sliders and all other parameters in this card file
to the values defined by the program.
Overlapping
Appearance of the card file Overlapping

Since the principle of superposition does not apply to structural elements, overlapping of
homogeneous elements is controlled within all commands for manipulating the elements of a
drawing copying, moving, etc.). In case of full or partial overlapping, the characteristics of the
last element drawn previously are adopted at the position of the overlapping, thus removing
the unnecessary elements of the drawing. Since constant checking may considerably slow
down the program operation, temporary overlapping of the beams only is allowed in the
drawing. The state of the check box Delete Overlapping Beams regulates whether the
beam duplicates will be removed from the drawing or not. In both cases, the model will be
correct when entering procedure of finite element mesh generating and the calculation itself of
the model. Namely, since the input data control is automatically activated both before finite
424
element mesh generating and before the calculation of the model, the program itself will
remove the duplicates in case that overlapping beams exist. However, it is recommended that
this check box be always set to switched-on state.
Results
Within this sub-dialog box, it is possible to customize certain parameters which affect the way
of viewing results:
Show area entities extremes this check box is used for defining whether, during viewing
influences in area entities, influence values and corresponding symbols will be written in points
in which extremes are located.
Show diagram values in 3D - this check box defines whether "3D View" will display numeric
values on the diagrams of displayed impacts, including linear and area entities.
Two colors for isolines and legend once you activate this check box, the program is
requested to display all results in just two colors one for positive and the other for negative
values.
Constant length of for principal stress arrows - when this check box is turned off, the
length of arrows that indicate the direction of principal stresses acting on some place in the
panel will be affected by the intensity of the stress at that point. If the check box is turned on,
all arrows will have the same length, which depends only on the size of the finite elements.
Default division number for surface entities this edit box is used for assigning the
starting number of divisions for viewing results in area entities. This means that an influence in
area entities will be displayed with this number of divisions as long as you do not assign
another value for its viewing within the command.
Default division number for concrete design this edit box is used for assigning the
starting number of divisions for viewing the results of concrete slabs designing.
Display length of bars in beam's addopted reinforcement diagram - when this check
box is turned on, the diagram of adopted reinforcement displays the length of iteration
segments.
425
Structural Analysis
Within this sub-dialog box, it is possible to define the way of analysing model. A more detailed
description of the options which are offered are located in the chapter 7.1.
Direct X
In this tab you can choose the version of DirectX that will be used in the program. If you turn
on the check box, DirectX 7 will be used, and if you turn it off, it will be DirectX 9. Below this
check box the version of currently active DirectX is displayed. Change of the state of this check
box does not immediately change the DirectX version. It is necessary to restart the program to
activate other DirectX version.
426
DirectX selection could be of importance if your computer has an older graphics card, in which
case the program will work faster with the old DirectX than with a new one.
Automatic answers reset
The command field Automatic answers reset

In the dialog boxes of some of the warnings which are displayed during operating with the
program, it can be requested not to display them any further and that the last given reply is
used in the future. Once you activate this command field, such customizing is cancelled in all
dialog boxes in which it has been previously assigned.
427
3.5.3
Toolbars
Using the command field Toolbars enables you to define the arrangement of
icons on the screen. Once you have activated this command field, a dialog box of
the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for defining the arrangement of icons

on the screen - the layout
In this dialog box, it is allowed to work with individual icons which are grouped logically and
further to assign the position of these groups within the selected toolbar. Selecting the toolbar
is performed from the combo box which is located in the top left corner of the dialog box.
The toolbar which is placed along the top edge of the screen
has been selected from the combo box
428
All icon groups belonging to the selected toolbar are displayed in the box. The arrangement of
icon groups in the box at the same time defines their position on the screen.
Icon groups belonging to the top toolbar

The position of the selected icon group in the box, and thus on the screen too, can be modified
via the command fields
(Up) and
(Down). Next to the each group name in the box, there
is a check box, the state of which defines whether a given icon group will appear on the
screen.
Add enables you to insert a new group in the combo box,
whereas using the command field
Delete enables you to remove the selected group
from the box. Since only empty groups can be deleted, during attempting to delete a group
which is not empty, the program will issue an appropriate warning message:
All icons belonging to the selected group are displayed in the lower left corner of the dialog
box, in the same sequence in which they will appear on the screen:
429
Icons belonging to the selected group File

The position of the selected icon in the group, and thus on the screen too, can be modified via
the command fields
(Up) and
(Down).
The selected icon can be removed from the group, by activating the command field
,
whereas any unarranged icon (unarranged icons are displayed in the right part of the dialog
box) can be added to the group by activating the command field
.
The command fields for inserting and discarding icons

It is worth noting that multiple selection is allowed in this dialog box and, as a result, it is
possible to simultaneously insert/discard several icons.
The program module, for which the arrangement of icons on the screen is being defined, is
selected from the combo box which is right above the unarranged icons. Which icons will
430
appear in the dialog box entirely depends on the selected module, since some of the
commands are not contained within all modules.
Module Data Input has been selected from the combo box
You have a complete freedom during arranging icon groups on the screen, with the only
exception that groups Load Case, Stage Construction, Scale and the group Influences
selection (which is contained within the Post-Processing module) can be placed only along
the top edge of the screen, because there are no icons in them but combo boxes which
physically cannot fit along the right edge of the screen. These groups cannot be deleted from
the top toolbar and, as a result, the command field
Delete is disabled every time some
of them is selected.
display on the screen the arrangement of icons which has been defined in it. If there is any
empty icon group, exiting the dialog box will not be permitted and the program will issue an
appropriate warning message.
431
3.5.4
Shortcuts
The command Shortcuts is used to add a combination of keys to be used for its
activation to any of the commands in the program. This command is located in the
drop-down menu Setup and, upon activating it, a dialog box of the following
layout will open up:
The dialog box for defining shortcuts the layout

All commands to which shortcuts can be added are displayed in the lower part of the dialog
box. Selecting a command is performed by clicking over its name, soon after which it is
marked with a different color. Since there is more than one command in the box, it has been
made possible to locate each one using the keyboard. During this procedure, you must first
mark the command using the mouse, and then enter the inital one or several letters of the
desired command from the keyboard.
In order to add a shortcut to the selected command, it is necessary to, either by clicking or
pressing the Tab key from the keyboard, place the focus on the edit box Shortcut input
and further assign in it the desired combination of keys.
432
The shortcut Ctrl+S has been added to the command Save

Upon activating the command field
Apply, this procedure will end and the name of the
command together with the shortcut that has been added to it is written in the upper part of
the dialog box.
The name of the command and the shortcut

that is added to it is displayed in the box
433
All letters and all numerals as well as their combinations can be assigned as shortcuts using
the keys Ctrl and Shift. If you attempt to assign a shortcut that is already being used, the
program will issue an appropriate warning message.
Another thing worth noting is that shortcuts for transparent commands can be assigned only
in combination with the Ctrl key. If you attempt to assign another combination, the program
will issue an appropriate warning message.
In order to remove a shortcut, you must first select the command to which it has been added
from the upper box, and then activate the command field
Delete.
The command field for deleting a selected shortcut
434
3.5.5
Export of configuration files
By using this command, the configuration files created during the work with the
program, can be exported in a file with ".tcf" extension. From it, they can be imported back at
any moment, on the same or some other computer. So the main purpose of this command is to
share configuration files between users, transferring them from a computer to a computer. By
selecting the command " Export of configuration files" from the drop down menu "Setup", a
dialog box will pop up:
Now you need to select a place on the computer where a file with exported configuration files
will be saved. You have to enter the file name in the edit box "File name" and save it by
activating the button "Save".
3.5.6
Import of configuration files
This command loads configuration files saved using "Export configuration files"
command. After selecting the command "Import of configuration files" from the drop down
menu "Setup", a dialog box will pop up:
When you select the desired input file, press the "Open" button, and a new dialog will appear.
This is the dialog for the selection of configuration files that you want to load into the program:
435
The first column displays ordinal numbers and the second one displays the names of all
configuration files that are contained in selected file. The selection of specific configuration files
that should be loaded into the program is done using the check boxes from the third table
column. Button "All" turns all check boxes on, while button "None" turns them all off. Button
"Inverse selection" makes all turned on check boxes to be turned off and all turned off to
turn on.
By activating the button "OK" the dialog closes, and the selected configuration files are loaded
into the program. A corresponding message is displayed upon the completed action:
To ensure that all imported configuration files are initialized and active, it is necessary to
restart the program.
3.6
Commands for Operating with Data Files
All data on one drawing (model) are saved in data files that are saved on the
computer hard disk. The name of the data file that is currently being operated with is in the
very top of the screen, in the first row from the top, in continuation of the name of the
program, in angular brackets. Every time the program is started, an empty drawing opens,
which is temporarily named Untitled by the program. All elements to be drawn will be kept
by this name all until you exit the program or activate any of the commands: New, Open
and Save. After selecting any of these commands, the program will automatically insert you
into the procedure of the command Save As, and all data on the so far created drawing will
be saved by the name you assign.
436
The names of the data files are assigned by the User while the extensions are named by the
program. Since in addition to input data and the finite element mesh the calculation results are
also saved in the data files, each model may have several data files. They all have a common
name, while the extensions assigned by the program are determined by the data contained in
them:
*.TWP -
Data on the drawing (model) created in Data Input module, and data on finite
element mesh generated in module Mesh Generation
*TWP_M - Data on modal analysis calculation results created in Mesh Generation module
*TWP_0 - Data on calculation results created in Structural Analysis module
*TWP_D - Data on graphical document created in Post-Processing module
3.6.1
Opening a New Data File (New)
In case when you have been working with some old data file and you desire to
create a completely new model, it is necessary to activate the command New within dropdown menu File. When this command is selected, the program analyses first the state of the
drawing which has been used in until that moment and checks if any changes have been made
in it. In case changes have been made, a dialog box opens giving a description of the changes
made and offering one of the possible actions to be selected.
Several cases may now occur, depending on whether the finite element mesh has been
generated, do the calculation results exist and do the changes made affect them. In all these
cases the program will inform you in its message, while the following actions can be performed
by selecting the offered command fields:
Yes -
The changes are saved in the data file by the current name, and in case that the
changes made influence the previously generated finite element mesh and the
calculation results, if they exist, these data will be destroyed (data file*.TWP_O will
be deleted from the computer hard disk). The reason for this is more than obvious,
since the data on finite element mesh and the calculation results have to correspond
to the drawing input data content.
No -
All the changes in the drawing will be ignored, i.e. they will not be saved.
Cancel - When this command field is selected, opening the new data file is quitted.
Such control is also performed when commands Open and Save, which are also contained
within the drop-down menu File, are activated, as well as when exiting the program or when
entering other modules of the program.
In case command field Yes or No is activated, the activated command New will continue
and the program will open an empty drawing to which it will assign a temporary name
Untitled. You can now create your model in an empty drawing like this, and the next time
you activate any of the commands that change the current drawing, the program will
437
automatically place you in the procedure of command Save As, where you will have the
possibility to save the created drawing by a name which you choose to assign.
3.6.2
Reading-in the Data Files (Open)
Any of
this command is
operating so far,
previous Chapter.
the previously formed data files can be red-in by command Open. When
selected, the program first analyses the state of the drawing used for
and performs the control on changes made, if any, as described in the
Soon after a dialog box with the following appearance opens:
Appearance of the dialog box for reading-in the files

The name of the current directory is in a closed list Look In in the top of the dialog box, while
all Towers input files (*.twp) contained in the current directory are presented in the central
part of the dialog box. The corresponding symbols are present in front of the names of the
Towers input files as well as in front of the names of the directories as follows:
Symbol denoting Towers input file
Symbol denoting the sub-directory
In order to enable the data file that you want to read-in to be found more easily, after
selecting it, the content of the drawing appears in the window in the right part of the dialog
box, while all descriptive data joined to the model by command Project Description (see
Chapter 3.6.8) below it. Moreover, the version of the program used to create the selected
model, as well as the model status concerning the calculation results are written above the
window planned for presenting the content of the drawing.
The procedure of reading-in the data file consists in selecting it by the mouse and by activating
the command field Open. Command field Cancel is planned for quitting the procedure of
reading-in the data file.
Reading-in Old Format Data Files
In case you wish to work with any of the previously created data files using our old programs
Tower and Planet, you need to click the mouse button over the arrow to the right of the
closed list File Type:, and to set the data files having the old extension: *.twr or *.plw
as active data files. After this operation, all data files having the selected extension, i.e. that
have been created using one of our old programs, will appear in the central window of the
dialog box for reading-in the data files.
Since the new version differs considerably from the old programs, you will have to generate
again the finite element mesh and to carry out the calculations again for the red-in old data
files.
438
After selecting the desired old format data file and activating the command field Open, the
content of the entire model, with which you can now continue to work, will appear in the
region of drawing, The temporarily assigned name Untitled will be present in the top of the
screen. The new format *.twp data file can be created by command Save or Save As.
After reading-in the data files created with old versions of the program, be sure to activate
command Geometry Control, since certain problems, resulting from the fact that the old
version of the program operated with accuracy 1E-04, while the new one operates with
accuracy 1E-07, may arise. For that reason, it may even happen that geometry control in the
old version of the program shows that there are no drawing errors, while the new version of
the program detects errors.
Note:
The data files can bead-in even without activating the command Open. Namely, the program
stores all names of the previous four data files that you have worked with and it writes their
names in the drop-down menu File. By simple click on the mouse button over one of the
names offered, the desired data file will be opened.
3.6.3
Saving the Changes in the Drawing (Save)
The basic role of the command Save is to save the current state of the drawing
that is being worked with into the data file under the same name under which it is red-in into
the program. In case when the generated finite element mesh, and possibly the calculation
results, exist for the given model, the program performs the control on the type of changes
made, and in case they influence these data, it issues an appropriate warning, as already
explained in Chapter 3.6.1.
Note:
This command should be activated from time to time, in order to prevent the loss of a larger
number of data due to power failure or some other unplanned incident.
3.6.4
Saving the Data Files under Another Name
The current content of a drawing is saved in a new data file under a completely new
name, while the existing data file remains unchanged by command Save As. This option is
most commonly used when several variants of a solution for the same model are made, or
when a completely new model can be created by small changes in the existing one.
When this command is activated, exactly the same dialog box as in command Open opens.
439
The new name of the data file is assigned in edit box File name, that is in the lower part of
the dialog box. When the new name is assigned and when the command field Save is
activated, this dialog box closes, and the newly formed data file within the current directory
becomes active, i.e. all further operations will refer to the new data file. If the finite element
mesh, and possibly the calculation results also existed, and the current state of the drawing
was such that it corresponded to them, then a data file *.twp_o will also be created, under a
newly assigned name. If that is not the case, the current content of the drawing will be saved
only in the data file with extension *.twp.
If a name that already exists is assigned as the new name of the data file, the program will
notify you about this by its message:
If the command field Yes is selected, the old data saved in the data file under the selected
name will be destroyed, i.e. the data on the current state of the drawing will be joined to
them, while selecting the command field No will denote quitting this operation and return to
the basic form of the dialog box of the command Save As.
3.6.5
Import
Command Import enables you to insert the content of any of the previously
created data files into the drawing. When this command is selected, exactly the same dialog
box as in command Insert, within the drop-down menu Levels (see Chapter 2.11.4),
opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for importing the arbitrarily selected data file
In addition, the course of the command is exactly the same as in command Insert. The only
difference is in that in command Insert the content of the selected data file is inserted into
the current level, while in case of this command the content of the selected data file is inserted
into an arbitrarily selected position in the drawing. Moreover, the content of the imported data
file can be placed into a completely arbitrary inclined position in regard to global coordinate
system of the current model. After selecting the data file to be inserted, the program will
require from the command bar the position of the global origin of coordinates of the data file
selected for import to be determined.
440
Coord. System Origin (Ref. Point / <0,0,0>):
This means that now a point in the drawing, in which the origin of coordinates of the model
that is being inserted will be positioned, needs to be selected. It is clear that the position of all
entities from the data file that is being inserted will be determined by their distance from the
origin of coordinates established in this way.
Since defining the position of the origin of coordinates is not necessarily always the most
convenient solution, the program enables the position of the reference point of the imported
model to be determined by selecting an arbitrary point in the drawing. Namely, by selecting
the sub-option Ref. Point, the command bar changes its content, so that the User is
expected to determine the position of the reference point of the imported model.
Ref. Point Position (Coord. System Origin / <0,0,0>):
In such method of determining the position of imported entities, it is understood that in the
model that is being imported, you have previously selected and saved as the reference point
that point which will easily determine the position of the imported elements in regard to the
elements of the current drawing. It should be mentioned that the position of the reference
point of the model is set by Reference Point (see Chapter 2.5.4).
Instead of selecting a point in the drawing, a click on the right mouse button will result in both
cases in accepting the option to position the origin of coordinates/reference point into the
origin of coordinates of the current model. In this way, the entire imported model is
translationally moved in such way that the origin of coordinates/reference point occupies the
position of the selected point.
A rotated position in reference to the global coordinate system of the current model, if
necessary, is determined by selecting a point which, together with the previously assigned
point, determines the direction of the global X coordinate axis of the imported model.
Point on Model X Axis (<Global X Axis>):
In case that the model does not need to be rotated, a click on the right mouse button will
position the imported global X-axis in direction of global X-axis of the current model.
Since an infinite number of planes can be established through the two previously assigned
points, in order to fully determine the position of the imported entities, the program requires a
point, that will determine the plane formed by global X and Y-axes of the imported model
together with the two previously assigned points, to be selected.
Point on Model XY Plane (<Global XY Plane>):
In case that the model does not need to be rotated, a click on the right mouse button will
position the imported XOY plane into XOY plane of the current model.
Since the position of all imported entities is fully determined in space by selecting the last
point, the program will open a dialog box for mapping the basic load cases.
441
Appearance of a dialog box for mapping the imported load cases

The sense and the way of operating with this dialog box is exactly the same as in command
Insert (see Chapter 2.11.4), and thus it will not be repeated here.
Application of this command is very wide when certain parts of the created structure can also
be applied in some other model. That means, in that case it is necessary to remove all
unneeded structural elements and to save, by command Save As, the content of only that
model that is to be imported later into some other model. Such logic almost completely
corresponds to AutoCADs method of operating with blocks of drawings.
3.6.6
Importing the Drawings from AutoCAD (DXF Import)
Disregarding the ease with which the model is drawn in the Tower program, this
option may be convenient if you already have the drawing of the model previously created in
the AutoCAD program (architectural base). It should be mentioned that in addition to planar
drawings, the program also supports the import of 3D geometry of the model. Since the
format of DXF data file is universal, the geometry of the models from other drawing programs
that support this format of data files can also be imported through it. In order that this option
be correctly used, we shall list some of the rules that must be obeyed in course of creating
DXF data files:
Be sure to explode all blocks in the drawing.
Delete visibility of all unneeded levels (Layer).
Delete visibility of all hatchings since the drawing may be overcrowded in course of
importing into Tower.
Scale the drawing in such way that one drawing unit in AutoCAD corresponds to the
selected length unit of measurement in the Tower program (command Functionality
Unit measure).
If the position of the entities is represented by large coordinates in the AutoCAD drawing,
translate them all into the proximity of the origin of coordinates (0,0,0) before exporting
into DXF, in order to avoid tolerance problems in Tower caused by large coordinates.
If you desire to insert the content of the DXF file into a certain place in the existing model,
you need to shift previously all entities in AutoCAD in such way that their coordinates
obtain the desired values.
Make sure to represent the linear entities only by a single line instead by double lines
(walls, beams, etc.).
When command DXF Import, contained in the drop-down menu File, is selected, a dialog
box, identical to the dialog box that opens when command Open is selected, opens.
442
Appearance of the dialog box for importing DXF data files

The only difference is in that that only data files with extension *.DXF are now presented in
the list. After selecting the desired DXF data file, the status in the selected file will be analysed
and a new dialog box will be opened by the program.
Appearance of the dialog box for mapping the layers/colors

Since the program enables the geometry of each of the layers to be transformed into another
type of entity, which of the layers will and which will not be imported needs now to be
determined. The presented list has that number of rows, as is the number of layers in the data
file that is being imported. All layers from the imported DXF file are presented in the left part
of the list, while data that will determine for each of these layers whether it will be imported or
not are in the right part of the list. The procedure is carried out as follows: click the mouse
button on the arrow , at the end of each row, to open a drop list and select from it the
type of entity which you desire to obtain the geometry from the given layer.
Drop list for selecting the type of entity
443
The content of the closed lists is the same within each layer. Option None is in the first
place, and it is followed by the list of all entities for which it is provided that they can take the
geometry of the given layer: slab, beam, area support, linear support, point support, layer 1,
layer 2, layer 3 and Layer 4. If option None is selected, it means that the content of the
layer presented in the given row will not be imported. If any other data from the list is
selected, will result in importing the content of the given layer, and its geometry will be joined
to the selected type of entities. It should be mentioned that in course of determining the
position of point supports, in addition to points, the centroid of a closed geometric figure
(square, circle, rectangle, etc.) by which it is represented in the DXF data file can also be
taken.
In addition to layer mapping, the program also supports differentiation of entity types by
colors. Namely, by setting the switch Color to switched-on state, that number of rows will
appear in the list, as is the number of defined colors in the file that is being imported.
By setting the switch Color to switched-on state,

The program was required to map the entities by colors
The operating logic is the same as when layers are mapped. This means that for each of the
colors it can be determined whether it will be imported or not, and if it is being imported,
which type of entities will take its geometry.
When command field OK is activated, the dialog box will disappear from the screen and the
process of reading the entities from the DXF data file will begin. It is clear that the program
will read in only entities from layers that are visible and that are not frozen. Soon after, the
content of the DXF data file, transformed into Tower entities in a way as assigned in the
previous dialog box, will appear in the screen. The current data set will be joined to all
structural elements, and you can subsequently join the desired numerical data set to all
entities easily by command Modify Sets. It should be mentioned that curved parts of the
model can also be imported by this command.
444
3.6.7
Exporting geometry to DXF format (DXF Export)
Using this command enables you to export the entire model geometry to DXF
format. This format is universal and is supported by a large majority of drawing programs (the
AutoCAD, for example). It is located in the drop-down menu File and once you have
activated it, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for exporting model

to DXF format - the layout
The database name and its position on the disc are assigned in the edit box. These data can be
assigned via the standard Windows dialog box for saving files, which opens up when you
activate the command field
.
Selecting the measurement units which are to be used during exporting models is performed
from the combo box.
Finally, it should be noted that only those structural elements which are currently visible are
exported. Each type of element is exported to a special layer. Slabs are exported to a
PLATE layer, beams to a BEAM layer and area, linear and point supports to
AREASUPPORT, LINEARSUPPORT and POINTSUPPORT layer, respectively. Slabs and linear
supports on curved surfaces are exported to special layers, PLATEMESH and
AREASUPPORTMESH where their curvature is represented by lines.
445
3.6.8
Project Description
Command Project Description enables various textual data that will be saved in
data file *.twp, together with all other data on the drawing, to be assigned.
Appearance of the dialog box for assigning the data on the project
The meaning of data that should be assigned in corresponding edit boxes is more than clear,
and their primary role is to be helpful in further reading-in of the data files into the program.
In addition to the presentation of the drawing, these data also will clearly indicate the content
of the given data file. Since data files created with the earlier versions of the program, which
operated with accuracy 1E-04, can be red-in the program, the information on tolerance
accuracy with which the data file is created is written by the program in the lower part of the
dialog box.
Locking a file by entering the password
Each Tower file can be protected from changing by setting the password which program will
ask for when the file is being loaded. In the part of the dialog "Protecting files from changing",
the current status of the file is written: The file is not protected, The file is protected and
unlocked and The file was locked.
Selecting the button "Password" opens a new dialog box where the password is set. Without
it further changes of the file will not be possible.
Password - edit box in which the password is set. The entered password must be at least 5
characters, which may be an arbitrary combination of letters, numbers and all the characters
that can be specified using the keyboard. When entering letters check if you are entering
capital or small letters, since when you unlock the file, all characters must be entered in
exactly the same way.
446
Confirm the password after you enter the password it is not possible to visually check your
input since characters are masked. In order to detect possible typing errors, password must be
entered once again in this edit box.
Selecting the "OK" button, the program checks entered password and if everything is ok it
closes the dialog. If entered passwords differ, an appropriate warning message is displayed:
An error message appears if the password is less than 5 characters:
In both cases, the current program does not close the dialog, until errors are corrected.
Loading a locked file
After opening a locked file, it will not be loaded right away. A dialog box will pop up:
Password - edit box in which the password is entered to unlock the file. After activating the
button "OK", the program checks the entered password and if it is the proper one, the chosen
model is loaded. If entered password is not correct, appropriate message is displayed:
Open file as Read Only - This button opens the file in a special mode, in which changes
cannot be saved, nor the report editor can be entered. After its selection, the appropriate
warning message is displayed:
447
and behind the name of the loaded model the designation "(R)" is written, which indicates that
the file is in read mode. In this mode, all commands will be available, except those whose
report is being changed, so all the results that have been saved in the file may be seen. Sizing
can be done, but the new results cannot be saved, and the program displays appropriate
message while changing the modules and trying to save changes.
Changing the passwords and removing the protection

To change a password or remove the protection from the protected file, it must be unlocked.
Both of these operations are performed in the same dialog box in which the protection is set.
Password is changed in the same way as it is set, by entering a new password in the edit box
"Password" and "Confirm password".
Protection is removed upon leaving the displayed dialog without making any changes, that is,
when the "OK" button is activated while both edit boxes are empty. After that the program
displays an appropriate notification:
448
3.6.9
Ending the Program Operation
You can exit the program either by selecting the command Exit within drop-down
menu File, or if you press the keys Alt and F4 together. In both cases, before you exit
the program, the current state of the drawing is analysed, and in case that it does not
correspond to the content of the data file (*.twp), a dialog box with an appropriate warning
appears, as already described in Chapter 3.6.1.
3.7
Transfer into Other Program Modules
As we have already said at the beginning of this manual, the program consists in
several modules, so transfer into those modules is enabled by selecting one of the options
offered within the drop-down menu Mode.
In this menu, direct transfer is not enabled only to into Structural Analysis module, since it
can be activated only from the Mesh Generation module.
When selecting any of the offered options, the current state of the drawing is analysed, and a
dialog box, identical as in command Open, with warning about the type of changes made
opens if necessary.
If a new model has been created, the logical move is to go to the module for forming the finite
element mesh.
449
4. FORMING THE FINITE ELEMENT

MESH
4.1
Basic Concepts
Since the calculations are performed by the finite element method, one of the key
operations in preparing the model for calculations is generating the finite element mesh. The
essence of the finite element method is to represent all structural elements by a set of
corresponding smaller elements.
The following three types of finite elements are planned by the program:
- Shell
- Beam and
- Boundary
The shape of the shell elements may be either triangular or quadrangular, and therefore the
entire plate with arbitrary geometry should be represented by a set of small triangles and
quadrangles. They must be adjacent only along their entire sides, and their dimensions should
be as unified as possible, i.e. the mesh should be as homogeneous as possible. In the
calculation itself, better results are obtained for quadrangular than for the triangular element,
while the best results are obtained for square elements. Therefore, triangular and
quadrangular, other than square, elements should be used only in positions where it is
impossible to describe the geometry by square elements.
The number of shell elements by which a plate or a wall is represented may be within a very
wide range, and it of course depends on the size of the plate/wall itself and on the complexity
of their contours. A smaller number of finite elements means shorter time of calculating but
poorer description of the model, and thus less precise results. In contrast, the model is
described more truly by a larger number of elements, but thus the calculating time increases.
Therefore, the optimal solution is somewhere in between: the number of elements should be
sufficient to describe the model, but not too large, since after a certain limit the gain in
accuracy is extremely small in regard to the time of calculating. In course of operating with the
program, you will very soon gain the experience and feeling for estimating the optimum
concerning the number of finite elements.
Beam elements may only be straight, which means that arched beams in the model are
replaced by a series of straight beams. The mesh density in beam elements within a plate
influences both the quality of describing the arcs, and the quality of diagram of influences in
beams which can be obtained in the Post-Processing module (diagrams are drawn on the
basis of calculated influences in the ends of generated beam elements). This rule does not
apply to beam elements that are outside the overall plate, and the finite element mesh need
not be generated for them. Therefore, the finite element mesh does not have to be generated
for models that do not contain plates within themselves (beam structures).
Boundary elements are arranged in places where point, linear and area supports are planned.
Both rigid and elastic supports are modelled with boundary elements. In linear and area
supports that are within the plate contour, the density of the mesh will also influence the
quality of model description.
From everything previously presented, it can be seen that generating a correct finite element
mesh is not that easy. In order to help you with this, we have developed a command which
enables generating the finite element mesh automatically.
450
4.2
Generating the Finite Element Mesh

Command Generate will be available to be activated only in those cases when
at least one area structural element (plate or wall) exists in the model. In the
opposite case, this command will be inactive, and you can directly activate the
command for calculating, without previously generating the finite element mesh.
After selecting the command for generating the finite element mesh, the program first
examines the regularity of the model, i.e. it automatically performs testing as in command
Input Data Control (see Chapter 3.3.5).
The structure must be stable and subjected to loading, and in case there are no theoretical
conditions for it to be calculated, forming the finite element mesh will not be allowed, and the
User will be warned.
Warning about inappropriateness of the model concerning the assigned input data
If this case occurs, detect all errors marked in the drawing by the program, and correct them
in the Data Input module.
If the formal conditions for the finite element mesh to be generated are fulfilled, the program
analyses the geometry of the model and opens a dialog box having the following appearance.
Appearance of the dialog box for generating

the finite element mesh.
You have two possibilities for determining the density of the finite element mesh, either to
assign the total number of nodes in the model as input data, or to assign the average size of
one finite element. Which of these two data will be assigned as the input data, depends solely
on the will of the User and his preferences. These data are assigned in corresponding edit
boxes, which operate simultaneously. Namely, by assigning the value in one edit box, the
451
corresponding value in the other edit box is automatically calculated and presented, and thus it
is irrelevant which of these data is assigned as the input data.
Default values offered by the program in edit boxes are within the interval of possible values.
The program obtained these values by analysing the size and the complexity of the model, as
well as on the basis of the limitation of the program concerning the theoretical maximal
number of nodes (300000). It should be mentioned that the set theoretical limitation of
300000 nodes does not necessarily mean that a model having this number of nodes can be
calculated. It simply depends on the complexity of the model and it cannot be explicitly said.
Moreover, the generated mesh with 300000 nodes can be reduced by the option of density
reduction to drastically smaller number of elements that is possible to be calculated.
The default values are set by the program according to the following rule. First, the average
size equal to 1m of one finite element is analysed to determine if it exists within the interval
set, and if that is the case, this value and the number of nodes corresponding to it are adopted
as the default value. If a regular finite element mesh cannot be generated with the 1m size
element (it is outside the intervals set), a larger/smaller values is offered for this parameter as
the default value.
You should be sceptical about the number of nodes recommended by the program since
reliable information on the required number nodes cannot be obtained prior to the process of
generating the finite element mesh. Therefore, a case may occur that the program offers a
mesh with 300000 nodes, a yet you may manage to generate it with 250000 nodes, let us say.
This means that in cases when a maximal number of nodes is offered, it is recommended that
you attempt to generate a mesh with a smaller number of nodes.
In addition to the possibility of assigning the average size of one finite element, i.e. the total
number of nodes in the model, you have the possibility to require from the program to
generate a mesh with the least possible number of nodes by setting the check box Min. Size
Mesh to switched-on state.
After assigning the parameters defining the density of the finite element mesh, activate
command field OK to start the process of generating the mesh in accordance with the
assigned criteria.
A dialog box indicating that some process is being carried out is present in the screen during
the course of generating.
Dialog box for monitoring the process

of generating the finite element mesh
If a regular finite element mesh cannot be generated by the assigned average size of the
element, the program will keep reducing this value all until it manages to generate a regular
finite element mesh. After a certain period of time, a message about successfully performed
procedure of generating a regular finite element mesh and information on the number of
generated nodes will appear n the screen.
452
When command field OK is activated, this dialog box will be closed, and the generated finite
element mesh will appear on the screen.
Generated mesh of finite elements

It should be mentioned that the number of nodes in the generated finite element mesh will not
correspond exactly to the assigned number, but will be as close to it as possible. This
impossibility of absolutely exact estimation results from the condition that the dimensions of
the finite elements should be as homogeneous as possible, while the geometry of the model
may be completely arbitrary. Information on number of the generated nodes in the finite
element mesh is constantly present at the beginning of the status bar.
If you are dissatisfied with the density and the shape of the finite element mesh, you can
repeat the generating procedure by assigning new input parameters all until you obtain a
satisfactory mesh.
For usual structures that you can meet in practice, the average size of one finite element
should be in within the range between 0.5m - 1.0 m. When then the total number of nodes in
the model is concerned, it should not be greater 50000 even for very complicated and large
models.
453
4.3
Errors that Interrupt the Generating Process
In case that you have been drawing inaccurately, a case may occur that the
program will not be able to generate the finite element mesh at all since the geometry of the
model is such that the number of nodes needed for generating the mesh is too large. If the
program comes to such conclusion, it issues a corresponding warning.
When command field OK is activated, this window will disappear from the screen, and the
program will automatically activate command Geometry Control (see Chapter 3.3.6).
Within this procedure, the program sets parameters 2D View Only and Visible Only to
switched-off state, which corresponds to 3D geometry control. Two cases may occur now.
If 3D geometry control detects drawing errors, a warning within command Geometry Control
will appear on the screen.
When command field OK is activated, this dialog box will be closed, and all drawing errors
will be marked in the model.
All drawing errors are marked by the performed 3D geometry control

Now you need to go to the Data Input module, and to correct all errors that have been
marked.
If the type of the drawing error is such that it cannot be detected by the 3D geometry control,
the program issues the following warning.
454
A warning that a drawing error exists

within the assembly of Level 18.00m
On the basis of the content of the warning it can be clearly seen in which assembly the
problem occurred. Now you need to go to the module for entering data and to set the stated
assembly as the current 2D View. If you activate command Geometry Control and set the
switch 2D View Only to switched-on state, the program will now be able to mark the drawing
errors.
Note:
To avoid errors that will disable the finite element mesh to be formed, and therefore
calculations of the model, in addition to accurate drawing, it is also necessary to model the
structure correctly. More exactly, whenever possible, the architectural drawing should be
reduced to a shape as regular as possible. Insisting on accuracy on a level of 10 or 20
centimetres makes no sense in attempt to improve the calculation results.
4.4
Quality Control of Generated Finite Element

Mesh
As for the assessment whether or not the generated finite element mesh describes
the model well, there are no clear criteria, so it is up to the User to make the assessment
himself. By comparing the obtained calculation results with the expected results, you will be
able to notice if the model is described well or not by the finite element mesh. Surely, in time
you will gain experience and develop the feeling for setting such criterion faster. In principle,
this assessment is obtained by visualising the mesh, and the mesh should satisfy the following
conditions:
The mesh should comprise as many square elements having same dimensions as possible.
Correct - homogeneous mesh
Poor non-homogeneous mesh
455
The number of finite elements should be sufficient to enable the function of influence
change to be sufficiently correctly described.
Correct sufficiently dense mesh
Poor insufficiently dense mesh
Quadrangular finite element the sides of which form an angle close to 180 should be
avoided, same as very elongated triangular element.
Poor quadrangular element
Poor triangular element
Since the program always generates a mesh with formally regular finite elements (irregular
five-sided elements will never appear), warning markers, indicating that those parts of the
model should be visually checked, may appear in some nodes of the finite element mesh (you
can adjust the color of these markers by command Settings). In case there are some
elements having shape that is not quite regular, the density of the mesh in that zone of the
model should be increased in a way described in the next Chapter, or the finite element mesh
should be generated again, but this time with a larger number of nodes.
4.5
Correcting the Generated Finite Element Mesh
In case that the generated finite element mesh is not completely to your
satisfaction, a series of commands which enable correction of the generated mesh are planned
in this program, and they will be described in this. If you are not quite experienced concerning
the assessment of the correctness of the finite element mesh, it would be the best not to use
any of these commands, but instead use the originally generated, sufficiently dense finite
element mesh.
4.5.1
Increasing the Mesh Density
It has been mentioned in the previous text that the density of the mesh influences
the accuracy of the results. In positions where the concentrated forces are applied, abrupt
changes of influences occur, which may not be processed correctly in an insufficiently dense
mesh, since the correct values of influences are obtained only in the nodes and in the finite
element centres. For that reason, by reducing the size of finite elements in those positions, the
distances between the points in which the influences are calculated are decreased and thus the
quality of the calculation results is improved. This provides that the density is not increased in
the entire mesh since this would result in extending the time of calculating, but only in certain
parts of the mesh, which increases the accuracy.
The User is not obligated to increase the mesh density, and it is up to him to use the
adjustment of the mesh density in accordance with his experience and feeling.
456
Seven schemes are panned for increasing the mesh density. They concern quadrangular shell
elements, and in triangular elements, which we may consider as a half of the quadrangle, the
density is increased only in that half.
The schemes of density increase divide one quadrangle into:
Two parts by one vertical line
Two parts by one horizontal line
Four parts by both one vertical and

one horizontal line
Two parts by right diagonal
Two parts by left diagonal
Four parts by both diagonals
The seventh scheme of density increase is the Capital increase, which increases the density
of the elements having a common node.
This type of density increase is recommended in the positions of columns, point
supports or in positions where the concentrated forces are applied.
All types of density increase may be combined.
Density increase is applied to already generated, regular finite element mesh in the following
way:
First, the icon representing the selected density increase scheme is activated, and next the
User will be required to mark that zone in the mesh of finite elements in which the density
is to be increased.
Higher Density Starting Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End>):
This procedure completely corresponds to the procedure of drawing the arbitrary closed
polygonal line (see Chapter 2.6). The density of all finite elements within the assigned
zone will be increased by the selected scheme of density increase.
457
When the density increase for capitals is used, after activating the corresponding icon, it is
necessary to select a node in the basic mesh (nodes obtained by any density increase
cannot be selected) by taking it in the small box on the pointer.
Higher Density for Capitel (<End>):
After selecting, the mesh density will be increased around that node.
After increasing the mesh density in each position, the information on the new number of
nodes in the finite element mesh will be written on the status bar. It is not possible to increase
the mesh density where it has already been increased, i.e. by increasing the mesh density
consecutively by the same scheme will not provide half-size finite elements.
Note:
Mesh density increase should be used only in those models in which this is objectively
necessary. In other cases, better results will be obtained for a homogeneous mesh. Increasing
the mesh density by diagonals should be especially avoided, since better results are obtained
for quadrangular than for triangular elements, as we have already said at the very beginning
of this Chapter. It is desirable to increase the density of only very irregular quadrangular
elements by diagonals.
4.5.2
Decreasing the Mesh Density
In case when the generated finite element mesh has a large number of nodes, and
that you desire to speed up the calculation process without influencing considerably the
accuracy, the program enables you to decrease the mesh in arbitrarily selected parts of the
model. When command Lower Density Mesh in the drop-down menu Modify is selected, a
message appears on the command bar requiring from the User to mark the zone in the finite
element mesh in which the density is to be decreased.
Lower Density Starting Point (Contour/Rectangle/cIrcle/Offset/<End>/Depth <1>):
At the end of the command bar, there is the sub-option Depth <1>, used to assign the
degree (depth) up to which the density needs to be decreased. If you click the mouse button
over this sub-option consecutively, it changes its name from which it can clearly be seen which
degree of decreasing the density has been selected. The degree of density decrease ranges
from 1to 5, i.e. from lower to higher density decrease.
458
When you have selected the density decrease degree, the procedure of defining the region is
exactly the same as in commands for mesh density increase. This means that an arbitrary
closed polygonal line is assigned. The density of all finite elements within the assigned zone
will be decreased in such way that all their unnecessary nodes will be removed wherever
possible (in this way the finite elements attain rhomb appearances).
Finite element mesh with decreased density

up to degree 1 of density decrease
Which zone will be selected for the density decrease depends only on your feeling what is and
what is not a correct finite element mesh. Those parts of the model, without supports and
concentrated loads that may cause abrupt changes of influences in their surrounding, are
usually selected for density decrease.
Surely, it is possible to require the density to be decreased in the entire model, if the basic
generated mesh is already sufficiently homogeneous.
Note:
It should be mentioned that by assigning a larger degree of density decrease a homogeneous
mesh cannot be obtained, so this possibility should only be used in cases when the models
have exceptionally large number of nodes, and you are not concerned about the accuracy of
the results in all its parts. A typical example of such application is in large buildings, when you
are not interested in influences in floor structures but instead only in foundations or vertical
assemblies due to horizontal loading. In such cases, influences in floor structures can be
calculated in separate data files, and the influences in the 3D model with maximally decreased
mesh density in floor structure. In that case, it is necessary to select all floor structures, for
maximal mesh density decrease, by sub-option contour Contour. In this way, you will
drastically reduce the number of nodes in the finite element mesh, and the calculation results
obtained will be quite correct for influences in vertical parts of the structure and in
foundations.
4.5.3
Node Displacement
By command Node Displacement, which is also within the drop-down menu

Modify, you have the possibility to correct the geometry of the elements having undesirable
(critical) shape (see Chapter 4.4) by displacing individual nodes in the mesh. After selecting
this command, the command bar obtains the following form:
Select Mesh Node (<End>):
459
The User is now expected to take the node to be displaced into the select box. In this
procedure it is not possible to select those nodes the position of which is fixed by the geometry
of structural elements and loadings. After selecting the node the position of which is not fixed,
a new message appears on the command bar.
New Position (<End>):
By moving the mouse pointer over the drawing, the program constantly draws in DRAG mode
the geometry of the adjacent elements having the common selected node, all until you assign
its new position by a click on the mouse button. The program will control the validity of the
new position, and a case that regular finite elements would not be obtained with this node
position it will not allow this operation.
4.6
Beam division out of slab
Sine the division of linear elements that are not within plates cannot be influenced
by the procedure of generating the finite element mesh, the program plans the command
Beam division out of slab. When this command is activated, a dialog box as the following
one opens.

the node density in beams that are not within plates
The length of the segments, into which the beams that are not within plates will be divided, is
defined in the edit box Finite element size. The state of the offered switches determines
whether all beams that are not within plates will or will not be divided in this way, or only
those for which such division is necessary. Division of the beams, which are not within plates,
is necessary only for supported beams (beams supported by linear supports), arched beams
and composite cross-section beams. In this way, intermediate nodes are inserted along the
given linear elements, so that their density will determine the accuracy of the results in these
linear structural elements. It should be mentioned that this parameter does not apply to
beams and linear elements that are within plates, since in that case their division will be
determined by the density of the finite element mesh.
Since the division of other beams that are not within plates is not necessary either, the
program sets the switch Only necessary to switched-on state in default. This is for the
reason that the division of all other beams would only unnecessarily increase the number of
nodes in the finite element mesh, without any influence on the accuracy of calculations in
accordance with the theory of I order.
However, since the program also offers the stability analysis, analysis in accordance with the
theory of order II, as well as the modal analysis procedure, in some models it may be in
interest to divide all beams that are not within the plates into a series of smaller parts. This
especially applies to linear structures in which such finer division would result in improvement
of accuracy in stability analysis and in analysis in accordance with the theory of II order.
Moreover, in modal analysis, such division in linear structures will result in considerably more
460
precise calculation of belonging masses in each newly added node in the beams that are not
within plates (see Chapter 6.1). This means that it is recommended to set the switch All
Beams to switched-on state in such models.
When command field OK is activated, this dialog box will be closed, and the program will
obey in subsequent calculations the division parameter set here. In case when the calculation
results already exist, but the division parameter is changed, the program will issue a
Selecting the command field Yes will result in loss of existing analysis results, while selecting
the command field No will denote returning to dialog box for defining the division parameter.
Whether all beams that are not within plates will be divided, or only those for which that is
necessary, depends only on you and your feeling about the expected accuracy of calculation
results. Some basic rules which can be helpful in decision making whether to set the switch
All Beams to switched-on state will be presented in continuation.
- If the analysis is performed only in accordance with the theory of I order, division of all
beams that are not within plates will have no influence on the accuracy of the calculations.
- Requirement for division of beams where not necessary will not result in any harmful
consequences concerning the accuracy of the calculations, but will only slow down the
calculations, since in this way unnecessary large number of nodes is obtained. Therefore, in
case you are not sure whether it is necessary or not to divide all beams that are not in
plates, and the number of nodes in the model is not to large, use this possibility.
- In modal analysis, the requirement for division of all beams that are not within plates
depends only on the type of structure represented by the model. In models representing
buildings, beams that are not within plates usually represent columns. Since their belonging
mass is considerably less than the masses concentrated in floor structures, a finer division
of columns will not result in significant improvement of calculation results. It is
recommended to divide all beams in linear structures, since these are small models anyway
which are calculated in a short time.
- It is recommended to assign division parameters in all beams in stability analysis and in
analysis in accordance with the theory of II order, since in that way you will obtain more
accurate calculation results.
Note:
Since the assigned parameter of beam division refers to all beams that are not in plates, in
case you wish this division to be different in various beams, do not assign the division by this
command but instead, in course of determining the position of the beams in the model, draw
the desired beams in several collinear segments. The program will have to obey the beamends of smaller beams assigned in this way, both in distributing the masses and in the
calculations.
461
4.7 Miscellaneous Commands

By command Reset, within the drop-down menu Mesh, all previously defined
increases and decreases of mesh density are automatically removed from the
model.
Commands Undo and Redo, function in exactly the same way as in the module for
entering the data, except that here returning one-step back/ forward refers exclusively to the
finite element mesh. Other commands, present in this module, have been previously already
defined in Chapter 2. The method of operating with these commands is identical with the
previously described procedure.
462
5. Stability Design
In the scope of the Stability menu, in the final elements network forming, there
is, for this construction analysis kind, a group of commands for results design and their
representation.
Menu with commands for stability results design and representation

Since the stability design is carried out in such a way as the defined variable reinforcement
intensity varies, until the first determinant zero value of the set second series theory equation
system is found, for this design, the same limitations are going to be in effect as well as for the
requirement for the second series theory design.
This means, that with the command frame Structural Analysis, that is in the scope of the
Stability menu, one may require from the program the critical force design and the buckling
length for all beams on the model. Since the stability design is done only for the given
combinations in the Data Input module, this command will be available only in case that
those reinforcement combinations have previously been given.
On condition that created combinations exist, after the command Stability Structural
Analysis, choice, the dialog box will open, where choice of combinations, for which the
stability design is carried out, is done.
463
Dialog box for defining input data for stability design

Since the stability design for bigger models can last considerably long, there is a possibility in
the right list box to choose only some combinations for the desired stability design. With a
consecutive mouse click on the column , the symbol is set, i.e. cancelled. The
existence of symbol in the column marks that the given combination is selected for
stability design.
The given symbols in the column indicate that the stability design
is required only for the second and fourth combination
In the left list box, all given basic reinforcement cases are given. Since the critical force is
obtained from the expression: N,cr = N,constant + N,variable, it is clear that during the
stability design, only variable reinforcements intensity varies, while the constant reinforcement
intensity stays unchanged. From that reason, it is necessary to determine each status of the
basic reinforcement cases according to its variable, i.e. constant character, in the column.
The existence of symbols in column indicates that the given reinforcement case has a
constant character, i.e. that its intensity will not vary during the stability design. In the
Coeff. column, one can, to every reinforcement, for which is defined that has the constant
character, give the multiplier, with which the basic reinforcement will go into the combination
during the stability design. Multipliers given during creating combinations alone have no role
during stability design, for they only present the safety coefficients during the stability design,
according to the first series theory, that is, the second series theory.
464
The given symbols in the column indicate that during stability design,
only the first case will have constant reinforcement character
Certainly, not all ample reinforcements can have constant character in the scope of chosen
combinations for stability design. At least, one of them has to be variable. In case that the
combination that has only fixed reinforcements, is chosen for the stability design, the program
will give the suitable warning.
In the lower part of this dialog box, two edit boxes are also given, according to which one can,
giving different values from the offered ones, affect the length and accuracy of the stability
design procedure.
Interval in which the coefficient value is sought
As the stability problem is solved iteratively, finding null function in an unknown interval, in
case the maximum coefficient is known, by which multiplication the variable reinforcement
will lead to the construction collapse, the design flow can considerably be accelerated.
The calculated coefficient sufficient exactness
This parameter practically determine when will the iterative design be terminated, that is,
when will the criterion for the sufficient design exactness be fulfilled. Certainly, this
parameter influences the design length.
Activating the command frame OK, the stability design will begin, and after its end, the
dialog box will show with the information about the successfully done task.
465
The current combination change, for which the stability design has been carried out, is done
using the command frame Critical Load, which is also located in the scope of the Stability
menu. Choosing this command, the dialog box of the following design, is opened.
Dialog box that is opened in the frame

of the command Critical Load
In the shown list, there are as many rows as combinations, for which the stability design is
carried out. In every of the shown rows, the numerical data about the parameter value,
presents a critical reinforcement factor, during which the system stability disturbance for the
given combination is acquired. Clicking the mouse on the any position in the scope of one of
the rows, that line becomes marked with a special color, what means, that by activating the
command field OK, the combination will become current.
The command Viewing Results, in the scope of the Stability menu, acts as a switch, that
is, it can be set to the switched-on or switched-off state. When it is set to the switched-on
state, the monitor will show in the middle of every beam the written axial force value during
critical value load N,cr, and in brackets there will be a bending coefficient data for system
critical load. These values are calculated according to the following formulas:
= l0/l = /l (EI/N,cr)1/2
N,cr = N,constant + N,variable
The used signs in the previous formulas have the following meanings:
lo lEI N,cr N, constant N, variable -
bending coefficient for critical system load

beam-bending length
the real beam length
Beam rigidity
axial force in the beam during the critical value load
axial force in the beam due to the reinforcement, whose intensity does not vary
axial force in the beam due to the reinforcement, whose intensity varies
critical reinforcement factor, during which system stability disturbance occurs
466
In this kind of work, the program, at the status line beginning, also copies the information
about the current set combination, for which the stability design results are shown on the
monitor.
467
6. MODE ANALYSIS
6.1
Calculation
Mode analysis serves for calculating the natural values and forms of structure
oscillation. Results obtained in this way are used as input data in subsequent seismic analysis
of the structure. In mode analysis, the structure is described by its rigidity and by distribution
of masses acting on it. In order to enable the calculating of modal analysis to be approached at
all, it is necessary that the model be created and that the finite element mesh be formed (it is
clear that for models consisting exclusively of linear elements, forming the finite element mesh
is not obligatory). Since all data describing geometry and rigidity of the model are known after
forming the finite element mesh, it is necessary to assign the position and the intensity of all
masses acting on the building for implementation of model analysis. The calculation itself, of
both mass intensities and determining their centroids, would be a long-lasting and strenuous
task, and thus we have developed a completely automatized procedure for determining the
masses belonging to each of the generated nodes in the finite element mesh.
When command Structural Anlysis, within drop-down menu Mode Analysis, is selected,
the program first examines whether the calculation results already exist, and if so, it opens a
Command field No is planned for quitting, while activating the command field Yes results in
repeating the calculations.
In case the calculation results do not exist, and the structure consists of linear elements only,
so that generating the finite element mesh for it previously is not needed, the program first
controls the regularity of the model, i.e. it automatically performs testing as in command
Input Data Control (see Chapter 3.3.5). The structure must be stable and subjected to
loading, and if there are not even theoretical conditions for it to be calculated, the calculating
will not be allowed and the User will be warned.
Warning about the incorrectness of the model with respect to the assigned input data
468
In this case, by command Input Data Control detect all errors that will be marked in the
drawing by the program and correct them in Data Input module.
If the model is correct with respect to the input data control, the program will check, for linear
structures only, if you have required the division of all beams into smaller segments by
command Beam division out of slab. If that is not the case, the program will issue the
following warning.
This warning does not represent an error, but serves only as a reminder that it is
recommended to divide all beams into smaller segments for this type of structures in mode
analysis. Command field No results in quitting, while selecting the command field Yes
results in continuing the command for dynamic analysis.
The need to divide all beams will be illustrated in a simple example of a cantilever beam,
subjected to loading due to self-weight. The cantilever beam is made of concrete, with
rectangular cross-section b/d=40/40 cm, and it is 10 m high. Since the masses are assigned at
the beginning and at the end of each beam in the model, in case that the beam had not been
divided into smaller segments, the masses will be placed only in its top and bottom. In this
way, only 50 % of its actual mass will be included in calculating, while the calculated oscillation
forms will not obtain realistic values. However, if the division of the beams is assigned to be,
let us say, at each meter, then the masses will be placed at each meter along its length, and
the oscillation formswill obtain correct values.
Beam division out of slab - OFF
Beam division out of slab - ON
If all formal conditions for carrying out the calculations are fulfilled, the program will open a
469
Appearance of the dialog box for calculation of mode analysis

In the combo box which is located in the upper part of the dialog box, there are as many rows
as there are basic load cases. In the column Coeff., you must now assign a multiplicator
which is going to be used during multiplying all assigned loads within a given basic load case
during calculating masses. In this way, you are allowed to adapt to certain seismic regulations
which define, in precise terms, which loads are to be reviewed during calculating the object
weight (for example, 100% of dead load, 100% of snow load and 50% of the projected useful
load). As for the dead weight, it will be reviewed only if it is assigned within a given basic load
case.
The check boxes Suppres oscilation in X,Y,Z direction are used for affecting degrees of
freedom for structure oscillation. In other words, filtering the obtained forms of oscillation are
now possible. For example, if oscillating in the Z direction is prevented, forms of oscillation will
not contain vertical oscillations, whereas if oscillating in the X or Y direction is prevented,
forms of oscillation will contain only vertical oscillations.
The desired number of modes, which cannot exceed 128 (restricted by the program), is
assigned in the edit box Modes Number:.
Activating the command field Advanced options of seismic analysis will result in opening
a dialog box in which it is possible to defiine the advanced options of seismic analysis.
470
The dialog box for defining the advanced options

of seismic analysis - the layout
Ways of grouping masses in a model can be the following:
-
Real distribution of masses a mass is found in each structural node, and the size
of each mass is calculated on the basis of vertical load component which is effective in
the node. This way of grouping masses is both an implicitly included one and analogous
to the way of grouping masses in the Tower 5 program.
Masses grouped in the selected ceilings levels in this way of grouping masses,
you can select horizontal levels (ceilings levels) in which you can concentrate masses.
All levels have been selected for grouping masses

except the level 0.00
471
In this way of grouping, masses from vertical structural elements (columns, walls) will be
added to ceilings and the program will perform this operation automatically. Selecting levels in
which masses will be grouped is performed by turning on the check boxes which are located in
the levels box.
Other advanced options of seismic analysis are used for affecting model properties which in
seismic analysis (Structural analysis and influence design in seismic load casess) differentiate
from model properties in structural analysis.
-
Stiffness of horizontal slabs to bending multiplicator using this parameter leads

to reducing stiffness of horizontal slabs to bending in seismic analysis. This multiplicator
ranges from 1.0 do 0.001 where, for multiplicator 1.0 slab properties remain unchanged
whereas for multiplicator 0.001 stiffness to bending reduces by 1000 times. This
reducing stiffness will not affect bed slabs that is, slabs under which area support is
located.
Stiffness to bending beams in horizontal slabs multiplicator - using this

parameter leads to reducing stiffness to bending beams in horizontal slabs. This
multiplicator ranges from 1.0 do 0.001 where, for multiplicator 1.0 beam properties
remain unchanged whereas for multiplicator 0.001 stiffness to bending around
directions 2 and 3 together with torsional stiffness reduce by 1000 times. This reducing
stiffness of beams will not apply to beams which are located in bed slabs that is, slabs
under which area support is located.
Stiffness of vertical walls to bending multiplicator using this parameter leads to

reducing stiffness to bending vertical walls in seismic analysis. This multiplicator ranges
from 1.0 do 0.001 and its meaning is exactly the same as in slab stiffness multiplicator.
Axial stiffness of vertical walls multiplicator using this parameter enables you to
reduce the axial stiffness of vertical walls during seismic analysis. The range of this
multiplicator goes from 1.0 to 0.001, and its meaning is exactly the same as in slab
stiffness multiplicator.
Axial stiffness of vertical columns multiplicator using this parameter enables

you to reduce the axial stiffness of vertical columns during seismic analysis. The range
of this multiplicator goes from 1.0 to 0.001.
Supports stiffness multiplicator using this parameter leads to increasing stiffness

of all supports in seismic analysis.
Walls - mutual interaction zone with perpendicular wals - this parameter is used
for defining the wall conjunction zone from another direction affecting the increase of
wall stiffness. The width of this wall conjunction zone (on one side) is assigned as
multiplicator (n) of the viewed wall thickness (d).
472
Wall conjunction zone

The assigned options of seismic analysis are also written in the command main dialog box.
Part of the dialog box in which the assigned advanced

options of seismic analysis are displayed
For models with non-linear elements, modal analysis will be carried out with disregarding nonlinearity, which will be followed by an appropriate warning message.
When the calculations are completed, the program offers both graphic and numerical result
processing of the performed mode analysis for the currently assigned current mode. When the
473
mouse pointer points the corresponding icon on the status bar, a small window, in which
information on the currently set current tone is written, appears.
Information on oscillation period of a structure for the current mode

Note:
If the geometry of the model is such that all structural elements belong to the same plane, and
the loading acts in the same plane or in a perpendicular plane, the program will declare such
model as a plane model in course of calculations. Consequently, all unnecessary degrees of
freedom will be deleted in the course of calculating, and thus the calculations will be much
faster. However, in case you desire to perform a spatial analysis of a plane model, it is
necessary to trick the program by adding a special load case within which a concentrated
force, the vector of which belongs neither to the plane of the structure nor to the plane that is
perpendicular to it, is assigned. Of course, you will ignore this load case when processing the
results. A typical example of space analysis application is when you wish to obtain oscillation
forms that are other than in the plane to which the model belongs.
Note:
In case when the model includes several construction stages, then the calculation of the mode
analysis will always refer to the last stage.
6.2
Errors Interrupting the Calculation Process
In course of calculating large models, a case may occur that the computer does not
have sufficient virtual memory. In the lower part of the dialog box for monitoring the
calculation process, the program constantly writes the information on currently available
virtual memory.
Space planned for presenting the currently available

virtual memory of the computer
474
In case that you run out of free virtual memory in the course of the program, the calculation
process will be interrupted, and the following warning will appear on the screen.
Now you need to provide sufficient available memory for calculation of the model in a way
described in Chapter 1.1.
Although the program performs the input data control immediately before the calculation
process, due to its flexibility in defining completely arbitrary structures, the errors made, if
any, which cause the lability of the system, can be detected reliably only in the procedure of
solving the system of equations. In this case, the program will interrupt the solving process
and it will issue a corresponding warning.
Now you have to return to the module for data input and to correct all erroneously assigned
data. When correcting this type of mistakes, the command Input Data Control will not be
helpful since it is not an obvious error which could have been detected by the program, and
yet the system is unstable.
475
6.3
The selection of the current tone
By running the command "Select Current Mode", which is located in the dropdown menu "Modal analysis", a dialog of the following appearance opens:
The displayed list has as many rows as many calculated oscillation forms exist. In each of
these rows, the numerical results of the calculation for a given tone are displayed. Data
columns have the following meaning:
N- ordinal number of the tone.
T [s] - the period of oscillation of the tone structure.
f [Hz] - oscillation frequency of the tone structure.
GPO [] - the main direction of oscillation of the tone structure.
FU[%] - engagement factor of the weight for a given direction of the seismic action.
FU +90[%] - engagement factor of the weight for a direction of the seismic action, which is
perpendicular to the given direction.
max dist. - The ratio of the node amplitude with the largest amplitude of oscillation according
to the average oscillation amplitude of the overall model. This value is used for the detection of
tones in which the locally oscillating of the model parts occurs. The emergence of local
oscillation indicates the irregularities in the modeling or the irregularity in mass groupings. As
the value is higher, fewer nodes are included in the oscillation and that will indicate a more
local type of oscillation.
Engagement masses factors can be calculated for a completely arbitrary direction of the
seismic action. The angle for defining the direction of the seismic action is entered in the edit
box "Direction of the seismic action" and the calculation itself shall be done after activating
the button "Structural Analysis". The obtained results for each tone are displayed in the
table, in the columns "FU[%]" and "FU +90[%]". The engagement mass sum of all tones
is displayed in "FU" for a given direction, or in the box "FU +90" for the direction which
476
is perpendicular to the set. These data are of great help in selecting the tones that are
applicable to seismic analysis, and in determining whether the calculation multimodal analysis
is done for a sufficient number of tones.
Often due to errors when creating the model, large local oscillation sometimes appear in some
nodes of the structure. Since locating these nodes is difficult in larger models, their automatic
detection and labeling is possible. Parameters required for the locating nodes with large local
oscillation are set in the section of dialog "Diagnosis of the oscillation forms."
Deviation limit - the program finds all nodes in the model whose amplitude relation to the
average amplitude of the oscillation of the overall model has greater value than the value that
is assigned in this edit box.
Number of nodes to be marked - in this edit box the number of nodes is assigned that will
be marked in the model. Out of all the nodes whose deviation is greater than the given one,
those with largest deviations are marked. These nodes are marked by the symbol of a small
square which is painted in the color selected in the dialog command "Parameters". Their
default color is red.
Assemblies containing nodes with deviation larger than limit: - the list where all names
of the sets are displayed, that belongs to at least one of the marked nodes. Any of these sets
can be very quickly displayed in current 2D view. First select the desired set from the list and
then activate the button "Apply". After activating this button, the drawing shows the symbols
with marked nodes, so before leaving the dialog, you can easily choose the assembly in which
they are the best seen.
Marked nodes with large local oscillations

If none of the assemblies is selected for displaying, or if marked nodes do not belong to any of
them, these symbols will appear in the drawing after exiting the dialog by activating the button
"OK".
In this way it is very easy to find nodes with large local oscillations, and correct errors in
modeling which created them.
477
6.4
Current Mode View
Command Current Mode View operates as a switch, i.e. it can be set to

switched-on or to switched-off state. When it is set to switched-on state, the deformed finite
element mesh, in accordance with the oscillation form for the current mode, is drawn in 3D
View window.
View of oscillation form for the current mode

In such operating regime, the program now writes the information on currently set current
mode and the value of its oscillation period and frequency at the beginning of the status bar.
6.5
Current Mode Animation
After selecting the command Current Mode Animation, the program will spend
some time in creating the AVI file and soon a dialog box with the following appearance will
appear in the screen. opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for current mode animation
478
Animation of oscillating of the structure for the current mode is presented in the opened dialog
box. You can adjust the parameters determining the creating of the animation (see Chapter
3.5.2) by command Functionality (card file Animation).
Command fields Play and Stop are used to start and stop the animation, while if you
select the command field Save you have the possibility to save the created animation on the
computer disk as an AVI file, which you can subsequently play as an independent animation
by Windows program Media Player outside the surrounding of the Tower program.
Tone for which the oscillation structure animation is displayed, can be changed in this dialog by
selecting one from the list, or by using the buttons
and
.
Command field Exit is used to exit the dialog box and to stop the animation of the current
mode.
6.6
Controlling the Established Masses
Since the procedure of calculating and establishing the masses is completely

automatized, the command Masses enables you to check whether this has been correctly
performed. When this command is selected, each mass generated will be marked by a smallcircle symbol in the model.
The intensity of the given mass is written beside each of the set symbols
After activating this command, the program enters the standard selecting procedure, and only
set symbols of masses will be available to be selected.
<0 sel.> Select (All / Window / Polygon / Deselect / Report / <End>):
When you have selected all masses the summed value of which you are interested in, a click
on the right mouse button will denote the end of the selecting procedure, and a dialog box
presenting the desired information will appear in the screen.
479
Namely, in this way you can obtain the information on the total sum of arbitrarily selected
masses.
By selecting the sub-option Report on the command bar, a dialog box in which it is possible
to sum up the masses by levels (horizontal planes) opens.
Appearance of the dialog box within sub-option Report

This dialog box almost completely corresponds to the dialog box for editing the levels (see
Chapter 2.11.1). The only difference is in that that the belonging mass, in addition to the
elevation coordinate and the name of the level, is written for each of the established levels in
the figure.
For each of the established levels, the mass belonging to it is written
480
The algorithm of calculating the belonging masses is carried out in that way that the mass of
the given level includes all masses that are between the horizontal planes established in the
middle of the difference of levels between the adjacent levels in addition to all masses having
the same Z coordinate as well as the level itself. If there are no levels above the given level,
then the mass of that level will include all masses having a larger elevation coordinate than the
given level. The same logic also applies in case there are no levels below the given level.
Therefore, if there is only one level in the model, the mass belonging to it will correspond to
the total mass of the entire model.
Information on total mass of the entire model is always written

at the bottom of the level drawing
When this command is first activated, the program assigns as default all levels that have been
previously created by the command for editing the levels. However, since these levels have
nothing to do with the levels previously established in the model, you are free to edit the
position of these levels by assigning new ones or by deleting the existing ones. In this way,
you have complete freedom to sum up, as you desire, the masses in relation to arbitrarily
established horizontal planes.
Since the complete drop-down menu Mode Analysis is also within the post-processing
module, you will have the possibility to enclose all data on the performed mode analysis with
the design documentation. By exporting the graphical blocks while the command Masses is
being executed, you will have the possibility to insert the drawings with denoted positions and
intensities of the masses into the design. Moreover, you can also add to the design the
presentation of all created levels together with information on the belonging masses. The
method of creating the design documentation will be presented in more detail in the chapter
referring to the post-processing module.
481
The dialog box Masses per levels - the layout

The particular way of viewing masses in each model can be adjusted in this dialog box. When
the check box Show one mass per level (at centroid) is on, instead of viewing masses in
each model node, a symbol of a single mass in each level centroid is viewed. The masses of
elements which are not found in the level plane are reallocated to the nearest levels.
Viewing masses in each model node
Show one mass per level (at centroid)
When this dialog box is started in the Post-Processing module, options for viewing rigidity
center and generating reports also become available.
482
The dialog box Masses per levels in the Post-Processing

module - the layout
When the check box Show levels center of rigidity is on, the program displays the
position of rigidity center in each level. The rigidity center is defined on the basis of the
arrangement and stiffness of indirect elements (columns and walls) for each level.
Viewing rigidity center in each level

Once you have activated the command field Parameters for rigidity center calculation, a
dialog box of the following layout will open up:
483
The dialog box for defining parameters

of calculating rigidity cente - the layout
The percentage with which wall stiffness is reviewed in course of determining rigidity center
can be defined in the edit box Participation factor for walls. If 0 value is entered for this
data, walls will be disregarded.
The percentage with which columns stiffness is reviewed in course of determining rigidity
center can be defined in the edit box Participation factor for columns. If 0 value is
entered for this data, columns will be disregarded.
The check box Disregard bending stifness in walls is used for disregarding stiffness of
wall to bending around weaker axis.
Using the command fields for generating reports will enable viewing in a table data on mass
size on every level, mass center coordinates on every level as well as rigidity center
coordinates on every level.
- the command field via which a report is generated and placed in the project
documentation
- the command field via which a report is generated and sent to print
484
7. CALCULATING THE MODEL

7.1
Module Operation Purpose and Description
The module for calculating according to the finite element method determines
influences in plate, beam and boundary elements. The procedure itself consists in preparation
of the data first, i.e. the content of the drawing with the defined data on structure and loading
is processed numerically. On the basis of the prepared data, a global matrix of the rigidity of
the system with corresponding free elements is formed, and for a system of linear equations
formed in this way, renumbering is first carried out and next the procedure itself of solving
(decomposition of the system of equations). From the obtained results, the program first
calculates the displacements, and next, from those displacements it obtains all required
section forces in the model.
Since the geometry of the structures may be arbitrary and complex, the system of equations
formed may have a large number of unknown values. In planar problems, there are three
unknown displacements in each node of the finite element mesh, while six unknown
displacements appear in each node in space structures.
For efficient calculation, especially when large models are concerned, it is necessary to have
sufficient available, both virtual and RAM memory. The method of adjusting these parameters
is described in detail in Chapter 1.1 Required Computer Configuration.
The Tower program has two analysis modules (solvers). The first one, the so-called
standard solver, is the same solver which is used in the Tower 5 program. It is a direct,
in-core solver, of great speed of calculation. The term in-core refers to the feature that the
whole system of equations is solved all at the same time which leads to restricting capacity.
The second one, the so-called large capacity solver, is an entirely new solver. It is a direct,
out-of-core solver. The term out-of-core refers to the feature that the system of equations
is solved in such a way that it is divided into a series of smaller systems of equations (blocks)
which are separately analyzed. The temporary databases on the disc are used for the purpose
of memorizing the results of factoring and decomposing these blocks. This solver has a far
larger capacity than the in-core solver but, due to a more elaborate procedure consisting of
several stages, the speed of calculation is somewhat smaller.
You can personally choose the solver with which you want to carry out the structural analysis
in the dialog box of the command Functionality within the chapter Structural Analysis.
485
Part of the dialog box Functionality in which

parameters of structural analysis are defined
If you choose the large capacity solver, you can restrict using it on big models only, that is
those models which are too big for a standard solver. Once you have selected the check box
Use only for models with more than 40,000 nodes, models with fewer than 40,000
nodes will be solved via the standard solver.
Solving systems of equations makes a large use of the computer resources. By adjusting the
priority levels of analysis, you determine its priority in course of using the processor and other
computer resources wtih regards to other processes simultaneously being active. Three levels
have been envisaged:
Normal priority
- analysis is executed in the greatest possible speed with maximum

possible use (occupancy) of processor.
Priority below normal - medium level of using the processor.

Low priority
- the least level of using the processor.
During normal priority, the lasting time of analysis is the shortest, and when the priority is the
lowest, it is possible to use your personal computer for operations with other programs during
the analysis.
In course of its operation, the large capacity solver saves large amount of data onto the disc
in the large files format, so it needs quite a lot of free space on the disc, even several
gigabytes. Once the analysis is completed, these files are deleted, and the space is no longer
taken on the disc. For placing these temporary files, the program uses the same directory
which has been envisaged for this purpose by the operating system (Windows). This directory
is now located in the same partition in which Windows has been installed. If it happens that
there is not enough space in that particular partition, you are allowed to define the directory
(and thus the partition, that is, the disc) for placing these large temporary files. When the
check box User-defined folder where large temporary files will be created is on, the
path to an existing folder can be entered in the edit box right below it.
486
When command Structural Analysis, within drop-down menu Mode is selected, the
program first examines if calculation results already exist, and if so, a dialog box with the
following appearance opens.
Command field No is planned for quitting, while activating the command Yes results in
calculating again.
In case the calculation results do not exist, and the structure consists of linear elements only
so that the finite element mesh does not need to be generated previously for it, the program
first examines the regularity of the model, i.e. it automatically performs testing as in command
Input Data Control (see Chapter 3.3.5). The structure must be stable and subjected to
loading, and if there are not even theoretical conditions for it to be calculated, the calculating
will not be allowed and the User will be warned.
Warning about the incorrectness of the model

concerning the assigned input data
If this case occurs, detect all errors, which will be marked in the drawing by the program, by
command Input Data Control, and correct them in the module Data Input.
If the formal conditions for performing the calculations are satisfied, the program will open a
dialog box having the following appearance.
Appearance of the dialog box within the command

for calculating the model
487
The method and type of calculating is determined in this dialog box by a series of offered
parameters. The meaning of these parameters will be explained in more details in the following
Chapters of this part of the manual.
The selected type of calculating starts by activating the command field OK. A dialog box
showing the progress of solving procedure will be constantly in the screen in the course of
calculating.
Command field Cancel is also present in this dialog box, and by selecting it you can quit
from the commenced calculations.
After completed calculations, the program creates a corresponding data file containing the
calculation results (*.TWP_O), on the computer disk, and automatically goes into the postprocessing module.
Note:
If the geometry of the model is such that all structural elements belong to the same plane, and
the loading acts in the same plane or in a perpendicular plane, the program will declare such
model as a plane model in course of calculations. Consequently, all unnecessary degrees of
freedom will be deleted in the course of calculating, and thus the calculations will be much
faster. However, in case you desire to perform a spatial analysis of a plane model, it is
necessary to trick the program by adding a special load case within which a concentrated
force, the vector of which belongs neither to the plane of the structure nor to the plane that is
perpendicular to it, is assigned. Of course, you will ignore this load case when processing the
results.
7.2
Errors Interrupting the Calculation Process
In course of calculating large models, a case may occur that the computer does not
have sufficient virtual memory. In the lower part of the dialog box for monitoring the
calculation process, the program constantly writes the information on currently available
virtual memory.
Space planned for presenting the currently available

virtual memory of the computer
In case that you run out of free virtual memory in the course of calculating, the calculation
process will be interrupted, and the following warning will appear on the screen.
488
Now you need to provide sufficient available memory for calculation of the model in a way
described in Chapter 1.1.
Although the program performs the input data control immediately before the calculation
process, due to its flexibility in defining completely arbitrary structures, the errors made, if
any, which cause the lability of the system, can be detected reliably only in the procedure of
solving the system of equations. In this case, the program will interrupt the solving process
and it will issue a corresponding warning.
The program can establish model instability in two occurrences:
1. When it fails to reach the solution to the system of equations due to the fact that
the stiffness matrix is singular
In this case, the program aborts the operation of analysis and issues an appropriate warning
message.
On the basis of the data on what equation is the actual cause of matrix singularity, you can
obtain information on the position of node and its degree of freedom which is the cause of
instability. The program marks the unstable node on the model and writes the given degree of
freedom mark (Xp, Yp, Zp, Xr, Yr i Zr).
The node on the right beam end is unstable, and the cause
of instability is the Xr degree of freedom
489
The unstable node symbol will also remain visible in the Post-Processing module in order to
facilitate removing the cause of instability. This symbol will disappear from the model either
during restarting the analysis or by activating the command Reset in the Post-Processing
module.
2. When deformations are extremely large
In this case, the program has solved the equation system, but nodes with extremely large
deformation that is obviously the result of a mistake have been found for certain load cases in
the model. Controling whether there are any extremely large deformations is carried out upon
the completion of analysis, during preparing the results in the Post-Processing module,
where the program issues an appropriate warning message.
It is possible that more than one node will have an extremely large deformation, but only the
first 5 or 6 will be listed and marked in the drawing. The limit for extremely large
deformation is either the node moving which is greater than the model surrounding rectangle
or the node rotation which is more than 90 degrees.
The nodes on the Yr beam beginning, Zp beam middle and

Yr beam end have large deformations
The unstable nodes symbols will be removed from the drawing by activating the command
Reset in the Post-Processing module.
490
7.3
Calculation Methods
As we have already said at the beginning of this part of the manual, various
methods of calculating can be required from the program by assigning the parameters offered
within the dialog box of the command Structural Analysis.
Appearance of the dialog box within the command

for calculating the model
The theory in accordance with which the calculating will be performed is selected by setting the
corresponding switch to switched-on state in the part Theory of the dialog box. Theory I and
Theory II are available.
The exclusion (reduction) of torsional influences in beams which are located in horizontal slabs
is now possible. If this option is selected, the program will automatically reduce, in the right
amount, torsional stiffness which will lead to a significant reduction in torsional moments in
those beams.
7.3.1
Theory I
Calculation in accordance with Theory I is performed for all assigned basic load
cases, while combinations of simultaneous action of basic load cases, if assigned, will only be
transferred into the module for processing the calculation results.
7.3.2
Theory II
Calculation in accordance with Theory II is performed in two steps. Calculation in

accordance with Theory I is performed in the first step, while calculation with the corrected
flexibility matrix of the system due to calculated deformations and normal forces in beam
elements is performed in the second step. The results obtained in the second step of the
calculations correspond now to influences according to Theory II.
Due to its specificity, Theory II calculating will be available only for usual structures, while it
will be unavailable for the exotic possibilities offered by the program. Here we have in mind
primarily those models that include construction stages, assigned moving load, requirement for
constructing the influence line, support displacements and temperature effects. Calculating in
accordance with Theory II will not be available either for those models that do not contain at
least one beam element.
If there is at least one beam that is not within a plate in the model, and if you have not
previously required all beams to be divided into smaller segments (see Chapter 4.6), by
command Beam division out of slab, after requirement for calculation, the program will
issue the following warning.
491
This warning does not represent an error, but serves only as a reminder that it is
recommended to divide all beams that are not within plates into smaller segments for this type
of calculation. Command field No results in quitting, while selecting the command field Yes
results in continuing the calculation in accordance with the Theory II. You will also be warned
in this way before the beginning of stability analysis, since it is also based on calculating in
accordance with the Theory II.
It should be mentioned that for calculating in accordance with the Theory II, it is necessary to
assign all needed combinations in module Data Input, since linear combinations cannot be
subsequently made from the results of calculating in accordance with the Theory II in the
module for processing the calculation results.
7.3.3
Structural analysis with non-linear elements
In case that a model contains an element with non-linear behavior (member,

support), once you have activated the command Structural Analysis, a dialog box with the
following layout will open up:
The dialog box for structural analysis with non-linear

elements - the layout
The upper part of the dialog box is identical to the dialog box which opens up upon starting the
structural analysis without non-linear elements.
492
In part of the dialog box Parameters of non-linear analysis, it is possible to assign the
following:
-
Maximal number of iterations it can affect the analysis duration length, but unless
a large number is entered, it may happen that there will be no solution.
Reduction quotient for one iteration it can affect the degradation of properties of
the element which in certain iteration is stressed by infleunces it cannot receive. The
0.05 value indicates that element properties, such as stiffness, will be reduced by 20
times (to the 5 percent of value in the previous iteration). It also affects the requred
number of iterations.
Tolerated stress exceeding in member maximum value of the stress with

uncorresponding symbol is assigned (for the member which receives only tension, this
is the maximum stress value of the pressure which the member can receive, but it is
still small enough to be disregarded). A very small value will affect the analysis duration
length and a total number of iterations.
Tolerated stress overflow in surface supports - edit box in which the maximum
stress value is assigned, which can be considered irrelevant in iterative-incremental
process of the calculation.
Tolerated force overflow in the point supports - edit box in which the maximum
value of force is assigned, which can be irrelevant in iterative-incremental process of
the calculation.
Tolerated moment overflow in point supports - edit box in which the maximum
value of moment is assigned, which can be considered irrelevant in iterativeincremental process of the calculation.
Tolerated force overflow in linear supports - edit box in which the maximum value
of distributed linear force is assigned, which can be considered irrelevant in iterativeincremental process of the calculation.
Tolerated moment overflow in linear supports - edit box in which the maximum
value of the distributed line moment is assigned, which can be considered irrelevant in
iterative-incremental process of the calculation.
When model contains entities with elastoplastic behavior, the calculation is done trough
iterations where in each iteration the load increases for certain percentage of the total load and
checks if plastification happened. Therefore, this kind of nonlinear calculation is called the
incremental-iterative calculation.
Percentage of load increasing is defined in the edit box "The load increment step". If, for
example, you enter 0.05, the load will in each iteration increase for the twentieth part of the
total load. This value affects the overall accuracy as well as the length of the calculation.
7.3.4
Seismic Analysis
In this part of the manual, we shall explain the way the program functions in course
of analysis of influences in structure due to action of seismic forces. Seismic analysis for
various standards is planned by the program. The program enables completely arbitrary
directions of earthquake action to be assigned, and therefore that number of new load cases
will be added to other load cases after the seismic analysis, as is the number of earthquake
action directions that has been assigned. Seismic load cases assigned in this way will be equal
to other load cases that have been created in the input data module. In other words, it is also
493
possible to create combinations of simultaneous action of seismic and other load cases in the
post-processing module.
All standards offered for the seismic analysis are based either on multi-mode analysis or on
method of equivalent static load. Multi-mode analysis represents a more accurate procedure,
but in contrast to the method of equivalent static load, the results are confused since they are
obtained by one of the statistic methods and thus they always have the same sign, i.e. they
always have a positive value.
Method of Equivalent Static Load
This method does not take into account the influences due to higher modes of structure
oscillating. The structure oscillation period from the first mode, which corresponds to
translatory displacement in the assigned direction of earthquake action, is assigned as the
input data. Based on this input data, and on other data defined by the given standard, the
equivalent static forces acting in the direction of the assigned earthquake on the entire model
are calculated. Thus, the seismic load cases that completely correspond to any other assigned
load in the model with respect to their character are obtained. The significant advantage of this
method is in that the calculated section forces have an appropriate sign and thus all calculated
diagrams of section forces obtain their expected form.
Since a completely arbitrary value can be assigned to the oscillation period of the structure,
this type of calculation does not require previously performed mode analysis. In that case, it is
understood that you have obtained the data on oscillating period of the structure in some other
way. Still, it is recommended that you previously carry out the mode analysis before this
method of seismic analysis also, and you will obtain an exact data on oscillating period of the
structure in the direction of the assigned earthquake.
Multi-mode analysis
The procedure can be roughly classified into two parts, into a part in which mode analysis is
performed and into a part in which the corresponding seismic forces are calculated on the basis
of the results from previously performed mode analysis. Therefore, mode analysis must be
carried out before the seismic analysis (see Chapter 6). On the basis of oscillating periods
and forms, for all previously calculated modes, and on the basis of input data in connection
with the given standard, the program calculates the corresponding intertial force for each of
the masses in the model. Each of the inertial forces calculated in this way acts in the direction
of structure oscillating within the given mode.
Since the sizes of the design seismic forces are calculated individually for each form of natural
oscillations of the structure, the program carries our internally the analysis for n independent
load cases, where the number n of load cases corresponds to the product of assigned
directions of earthquake action and the number of calculated natural values of the structure
oscillating. After completing the calculations, the program reduces all these internal load cases
to that number of load cases as is the number of assigned directions of earthquake action.
Governing section forces for each of the assigned directions of earthquake are obtained via one
of the statistical methods: CQC or SRSS.
CQC method of modal combining
This method of modal combining (Complete Quadratic Combination) is a more general method
than the SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of the Squares) which has been in use up till now.
The extreme value of the expected influence is calculated in the following way:
494
f
n
where
nm m
f n is the modal force referring to the n tone
The correlation coefficients
nm
where
nm
for CQC method with constant damping are:
8 (1 r )r
(1 r 2 ) 2 4 2 r (1 r ) 2
2
3/ 2
r n / m and must be less than or equal to 1.0, being damping.
In case that there is no damping,
0,
all out-of-diagonal coefficients
nm
are zero, and all
diagonal ones are equal to 1.0, so this method of modal combining tranforms to the SRSS
method.
2
n
Selecting the Standard
When the check box Seismics analysys is set to switched-on state,

you can require the seismic analysis of the structure also
The closed list used to select the regulations in accordance with which the seismic forces will
be calculated will be available only after setting the switch Seismics analysys to switchedon state. If the mode analysis has not been previously performed, you will be able to carry the
seismic analysis only for those standards that are based on the method of equivalent static
forces.
After activating the command field OK, depending on the selected standard, a corresponding
dialog box for defining the input data, which are necessary for the selected regulations, opens.
Advanced options of seismic analysis
The regulations in which seismic analysis is performed via the method of multi-mode analysis
(EUROCODE, SNIP, BULG, SIA262, JUS multi-mode, arbitrary spectral curve)
For these regulations, it is necessary to perform the multi-mode analysis prior to performing
seismic analysis. The advanced options of seismic analysis which have been selected during
modal annalysis will also be valid during analysis of seismic load cases.
The regulations in which seismic analysis is performed via the method of equivalent static load
(JUS, HRN-N, SIA).
495
For these regulations, the performed modal analysis is not a prerequisite for analysis, which is
why the advanced options of seismic analysis can be assigned at this place, right before the
seismic analysis.
The dialog box for seismic analysis

(Swiss Code) - the layout
The command field Advanced options of seismic analysis will activate the dialog box in
which it is possible to define the advanced options of seismic analysis.
The dialog box in which the advanced options of seismic analysis

are defined - the layout
496
Working with this dialog box has been described in detail in chapter 6. MODE ANALYSIS.
If modal analysis has already been performed, the parameters which have been assigned for
the modal analysis will be displayed in the dialog box. Although it is not necessary, it is highly
recommended that modal analysis and seismic analysis are performed using the same
parameters. If this is not possible, the program will issue an appropriate warning message
after exiting the dialog box.
7.3.4.1 EUROCODE
Seismic analysis in accordance with EUROCODE is based on multi-mode analysis of
the structure, while influence of all calculated modes from the mode analysis is taken into
account. When this option of seismic analysis is selected, a dialog box with the following
appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for seismic analysis

in accordance with Eurocode
The parameters that define the type of soil, the type of structure, the intensity of seismic
action, etc., are assigned in the upper part of the dialog box, while the direction of seismic
action is defined in a list in the lower part of the dialog box.
497
Eurocode 8 EN 1998-1 defines the horizontal elastic spectrum of responses, such as:
where
Se(T) - is the ordinate of the elastic spectrum of responses
T
is the oscillating period of linear system, with one degree of freedom
ag
is the projected acceleration of soil
TB
the lower limit for the oscillating period for the branch with constant spectral
acceleration
Tc -
the upper limit for the oscillating period for the branch with constant spectral
acceleration
TD
value defining the beginning of the spectrum area with constant movement
soil parameter, value directly dependent on soil type
corrective coefficient, dependent on damping, with reference value of 1.0 for viscous
damping of 5%
Note: The values of the characteristic oscillating periods (TB,TC,TD) can be defined by the
National Annex.
Eurocode 8 EN 1998-1 recommends using two types of spectrum: Type 1 and Type 2, which
have been defined for the types of soil A, B, C, D and E. Which of the two types of spectrum
will be selected entirely depends on the nature of the most likely earthquake.
Different spectrums of responses have been envisaged by the National Annex.
Soil category
Eurocode 8 EN 1998-1 defines types of soil as:
A - rock or other rock-like geological formations including 5m most of light material on the
surface
B - solid layers of sand, gravel or clay, thick at least a few dozens of meters with the
tendency of increasing gradually mechanical properties with depth
C - layers of sand or gravel of medium density, or clay of medium stiffness, with thickness
varying from several dozens to several hundred meters
D - layers of tenuous and cohesionless soil (with or without soft layers of cohesion)
E - soil consisting of layers of soil, types C and D, with thickness varying between 5 and 20
meters, and under which there is a more solid material
498
Importance factor
Eurocode 8 EN 1998-1 defines types of structure importance as:
I Buildings of minor importance for public safety, e.g. agricultural buildings, etc. (importance
factor = 0.8)
II - Ordinary buildings, not belonging in the other categories (important factor = 1.0)
III - Buildings whose seismic resistance is of importance in view of the consequences
associated with a collapse, e.g. schools, assembly halls, cultural institutions etc. (importance
factor = 1.2)
IV - Buildings whose integrity during earthquakes is of vital importance for civil protection, e.g.
hospitals, fire stations, power plants, etc. (importance factor = 1.4)
Note: Other values of factors of importance can be defined by the National Annex.
In order to avoid the explicit non-linear analysis bearing in mind the structure capacity for
the energy dissipation through mainly ductile behavior of its elements the linear analysis
(which is based on the spectrum of responses that is reduced with respect to the elastic
spectrum) is carried out. Such reduced spectrum is called the Project spectrum.
Eurocode 8 EN 1998-1 defines the Project spectrum for the linear analysis as:
Where
q is the behavior factor
is the lower limit of the elastic spectrum, and the recommended value is 0.2
Ratio ag/g
Ratio ag/g is the ratio of designed soil acceleration to gravitation constant.
Lower bound factor for design spectrum
The value for the lower limit of the elastic spectrum is assigned in this field. The
recommended value is 0.2, but other value can be defined by the National Annex.
499
Percentage of viscous damping (CQC)
The percentage of viscous damping is the entry data for the CQC statistical method of
combining. If 0 value is entered, CQC becomes equivalent to SRSS method of combining.
Type of spectrum
In addition to the two implicitly implied types of spectrum (Type 1 and Type 2) for which
the parameters values S, Tb(S), Tc(S) and Td(S) are automatically set for all types of
soil (A,B,C,D,E), the program has envisaged defining new elastic spectrums of acceleration in
accordance with the National Annexes.
The edit boxes enable defining all four parameters which are used to define a spectral curve.
Once you have entered the parameters which define a new spectral curve, activate the
command field for saving
, that is, if you want to permanently save it. The command field
has been envisaged for deleting some of the previously defined spectral curves.
Accidental torsion effects
In addition to the actual eccentricity, in order to cover the uncertainty in the position of the
masses and the spatial variation of seismic motion, calculated position of the mass center of
each ceiling "i" must be moved from its nominal position in any direction, for an additional
random eccentricity:
ei=0.05 Li
where:
ei - accidental eccentricity of storey mass "i" in relation to the nominal position of the mass
center, which is applied in the same direction (the route) for all floors.
Li = ceiling dimension perpendicular to the direction of seismic impacts.
To consider random torsion effects during the seismic calculation, it is necessary that the check
box "Take into account" is turned on. Then the edit box becomes available "ei =", in which
the ratio required for the calculation of the random eccentricity of storey mass is defined.
The program will automatically create two seismic loads when calculating - one with a positive,
"left" and the other with negative "right" eccentricity. In the module for data processing, these
seismic load cases will have the suffixes "(+ e)" and "(-e)" next to their names.
IMPORTANT: Tower 7 enables defining an earthquake direction by setting the angle that it
forms with the global X-axis. Accidental torsion effects are related to the given earthquake
direction, which means that the mass will displace the left and right from that direction.
Earthquake directional factors
In the list, which is located in the lower part of the dialog, any number of possible directions of
earthquake activity can be specified. The new route is inserted into the list by selecting the
button "
Add", while the selected direction is removed from the list using the " Delete".
Data that can be assigned to the earthquake direction have the following meanings:
Name in this column, an arbitrary name can be given to the earthquake direction
Angle [] In this column the earthquake direction is assigned by entering the angle that it
forms with the global X axis (angle of 0 corresponds the direction of the global X-axis).
500
k, - coefficient of the earthquake activity in assigned direction (it should always be 1.0)
k,+90 - coefficient of the earthquake activity in the direction perpendicular to assigned
direction
kz - coefficient of the earthquake activity in the direction of the global Z axis
IMPORTANT: The coefficients kx and ky, which in previous version of Tower allowed
assignment of the direction of earthquakes, were abolished and replaced by the coefficients
k,ik,+90 relative to the earthquake direction
Behav.fact. (q) In this column the maximum value of behavior factor of q structure is
assigned, for each action direction, especially earthquakes. Behavior factor is introduced as a
measure of the energy dissipation and cannot be less than 1.5. It is calculated according to the
following formula:
q=q kW 1.5
The used marks have the following meaning:
q0 - the fundamental value of behavior factor
kW - a factor which takes into account the prevailing type of structural systems with walls
The basic value of the behavior factor (q 0) depends on the type of structural system and
ductility classes:
Type of structural system
ductility classes
DCM
Frame system, dual system, coupled wall system
3.0
u/1
DCH
4.5
u/1
Uncoupled wall system
3.0
4.0 /1/1
Torsionally flexible system
2.0
3.0
Inverted pendulum system
1.5
2.0
1 and u are defined as:

1 - the value with the horizontal seismic forces is multiplied in order to first achieve flexural
strength of each element of the structure, while all other forces remain constant.
u - the value with the horizontal seismic forces is multiplied, in order to form a sufficiently
large number of plastic hinges that will cause instability of the whole structure, while all other
forces remain constant. This factor can be obtained using a "pushover" analysis.
If the exact value of the factor u/1 is not calculated, for specific types and subtypes of
structural systems following values can be used :
1) Frame or dual systems
One-storey buildings: u/1 = 1.1
Multistorey, one-bay frames: u/1 = 1.2
Multistorey, multi-bay frames: u/1= 1.3
501
2) Coupled wall system
Only two uncoupled walls per horizontal direction: u/1 = 1.0
Other uncoupled wall systems: u/1= 1.1
Wall-equivalent dual, or coupled wall systems: u/1 = 1.2
The maximum value of the factor u/1, which can be used in the calculation of behavior
factor, is 1.5 even if a higher value is produced by using a "pushover" analysis.
Factor that takes into account the prevailing type of fracture structural systems with walls (kW)
is adopted as follows:
kW = 1.0
kW = (1 +
for the approximately and dual dominantly binary system
0) / 3 1
for a system of walls, double system with the dominant walls and
the system with the core ( 0 is the dominant aspect of the walls
ratio of the constructural system - the ratio of height to the length
of the wall)
Value of the kW factors cannot be higher than 1.0 or less than 0.5.
For structures that are basically regular, behavior factor q is reduced by 20%:
q=0.8 q kW 1.5
The right click on the cell in column "Behav.fact.", opens a drop-down menu with options:
"Apply to all", "Behavior factor calculation" and "Manual input".
The list for selecting a way of setting structural behavior factors,

for each action direction of earthquake
By selecting the option "Manual input" opens a new dialog of the following appearance:
502
In the displayed edit box the desired value of the behavior factor is entered. By activating the
button "OK" the dialog box closes and the entered value is assigned to a given direction of the
earthquake and displayed in column "Factor P."
By selecting the option "Behavior factor calculation" opens a dialog, in which with the
selecting a number of structures characteristics, is determined the value of behavior factor.
Basic values of behavior factor (q) -By using parameters that are located in this part of
the dialog, the value of the basic factors of behavior is determined. From the first list the
selection of the structural system is done, out of the second class the ductility, and out of the
third sub-type of the structural system that determines the value of the coefficient u/1. If
from the third list is selected "Other", the edit box will become available in which an arbitrary
value of the coefficient u/1 can be defined.
Prevailing failure mode factor - a list from which you can select the type of structural
system with walls and thus determines the value of the coefficient of the prevailing failure
mode. If the option "System of walls, double system with the dominant walls and a system
with a core" is selected from the list, the edit box 0 became available (predominant size ratio
of the structural system walls).
Regularity in the plan - the list by which you can define whether the structure is regular in
basis or not.
Based on the given data, and according to the above described rules, the program calculates
the structural behavior factor and displays it in a part of the dialog "Behaviour factor:"
By activating the button "OK" dialog box closes, and the calculated value of the behavior factor
is assigned to a given direction of the earthquake and displayed in column "Behav.fact.". In
addition to this value in the table the symbol "*" is displayed, which means that it was
submitted by calculation. This marking method ensures that it can be immediately seen which
direction values were manually entered, and which directions are obtained by calculation.
503
Value factor obtained by the calculation

By selecting the option "Apply to all" value factors of behavior of that earthquake activity
direction is assigned to all other directions in the list. If the value of the behavior factor is
obtained by calculation, all directions will be assigned the data set in this calculation. This
means that the program will behave as if the behavior factor calculation is performed
individually for each of them.
When generating the seismic calculation report in the paper editor, the behavior factor is
written for each direction of the earthquakes action. If the behavior factor is determined by the
calculation, the report lists all given structure data on whose base the calculations have been
performed.
Type of spectrum By clicking mouse over the arrows that is located on the right end of
each cell in this column, a list opens in which there are always two default spectral curve "1
(Default EC8)" and "2 (Default EC8)", as well as the options "Arbitrary type". All previously
created spectral curve are displayed on the list next to them.
504
List for selecting the type of the spectrum

By selecting from the list, the type of spectrum is given to selected earthquake direction which
will be used in the seismic calculation. If the option "Arbitrary type" is selected, then during
seismic calculation the data that will be used is the one displayed in "Type of the spectrum"
part of the dialog. Each earthquake direction can be assigned a different spectral curve.
7.3.4.2 Russian Regulations (SNIP Code)

Calculation of seismic forces in accordance with Russian standards is also based on
multi-mode analysis.

in accordance with Russian regulations (SNIP)
505
Spectral curve the spectral curve that will be used in the seismic calculation is determined
by selecting from lists. The program provides three spectral curves: "SNIP II-7-81", "MGSN
4:19:05 - concrete construction" and "MGSN 4:19:05 - steel construction."
In the upper part of the dialog box the category of soil is selected, seismic zones, importance
categories, and the coefficient values are assigned "K0", "K1", "KA" and " K, and in the list at
the bottom of the dialog, an arbitrary number of directions of the earthquakes action is
assigned. In the following text, we summarize the formulas by which calculates the projected
seismic forces. Calculated seismic load "Sik" in the selected direction, set at point "k",
corresponding to the i-th tone of its own vibration structure, is determined by the formula:
Sik=K K1 Soik
Where:
K - coefficient of the object importance
K1 coefficient that covers allowed damage to structures
Soik - the value of seismic loads for the i-th free oscillations ton structure, which is determined
by the assumption of elastic deformations of the construction
Values of the coefficient KO are determined by the following table:
Construction name
1
Monumental buildings and other objects: a large theater, sports
and concert halls in that store more than 2000 people, public
administration buildings, radio stations with a transmitter capacity of
more than 500w in a single building.
2
Buildings and structures whose functioning is necessary for the
time of the earthquake and the elimination of the consequences
(government buildings, police and emergency services, systems for
the supply of electricity, gas and water supply, fire stations, etc.),
objects where a number of people can be found (hospital , schools,
pre-schools, railway stations, airports, etc.).
K
K=2.00
K=1.5
Objects that are not mentioned in 1 and 2.
K=1.00
Temporary buildings with a useful life up to 3 years.
K=0.75
506
Values of coefficients K1 are determined according to the following table:
Allowed damage in buildings and objects
Buildings and objects having structures in which non-elastic deformations
and damages are not allowed
Buildings and objects having structures in which those non-elastic
deformations and damages are not allowed that disturb normal
functioning, but provide safety for people and no damage to equipment,
which are built of:
- Reinforced concrete large-panel or monolithic structures
- Steel frames without vertical diaphragms or connections
- Steel frames with vertical diaphragms or connections
- Reinforced concrete frames without vertical diaphragms or connections
- Reinforced concrete frames with vertical diaphragms or connections
- Brick or stone blocks
Buildings and objects having structures in which significant non-elastic
deformations,
cracks,
damage
to
secondary
elements,
their
displacements, temporary stoppage of the function of the building while
providing safety for people can be allowed.
K1
K1=1.00
K1=0.22
K1=0.25
K1=0.22
K1=0.35
K1=0.25
K1=0.35
K1=0.12
The value of seismic load for the i-th mode of natural oscillations of the structure are
calculated from the following expression:
Soik = A KA i K
ik Gk
Value of coefficient A is adopted depending on the seismic zone:

Seismic zone VII => A = 0.10
Seismic zone VIII => A = 0.20
Seismic zone IX => A = 0.40
KA - coefficient that takes into account the combined computational seismic intensity of the
determined seismic zone. (Map OCP-97, A, B and C). Values range is 1.0 - 1.5.
Values of the coefficient KA are determined according to the following table:
N0
3
4
Intensity (on a scale MSK) on maps OSR-97

-97-A
-97-B
-97-C
7
8
9
7
8
9
7
8
9
7
8
7
8
9
7
8
9
8
9
10
8
9
7
8
9
8
9
10
8
9
10
9
10
Values of the
coefficient KA
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.5
507
Dynamic coefficient (i), which corresponds to i-th mode of natural oscillations of the
structure, depends on selected soil category and it is calculated from the following
expressions:
Soil category I and II:
For Ti <=0,1 sec =>
i = 1+15Ti
For 0,1 sec < Ti < 0,4 sec => i = 2,5
For Ti >= 0,4 sec =>
i = 2,5(0,4/ Ti)0,5
Soil category III:
for Ti <= 0,1 sec =>
i = 1 + 15 Ti
for 0,1 sec < Ti < 0,8 sec => i = 2,5
for Ti >= 0,8 sec =>
i = 2,5(0,8/ Ti)0,5
where Ti is the period of natural oscillations of the structure for the i-th mode. In all cases,
coefficient i muss not be less than 0.8.
Coefficient (ik) depends on the shape of natural oscillations of the structure and it is
calculated from the following expression:
where: Xi(Xk) and Xi(Xj) displacement of the structure in course of natural oscillations in the
I-th mode in the given point k and in all points j, and Qj weight of mass in point j.
The value of coefficient K is adopted from the following table:
Structure Characteristics
1. High structure with small base size (towers, separate lift shafts, etc).
Buildings with columns in the ground floor, with rigidity ratio of the ground
floor to the higher floors not less than 0.25.
2. Frame structures, in which panels in floors does not effect the deformability
of the building.
3. Buildings and objects that do not belong to items 1 and 2 except hydraulic
structures.
K=1.50
K=1.30
K=1.00

For this regulation it was also made possible to take into account the effects of accidental
torsion seismic. The meaning of all the parameters in this part of the dialog is the same as in
EUROCODE regulations (section 7.3.4.1).
508
Angle of earthquake action
button "
Add", while the selected direction is removed from the list using the "
Delete".
direction
k,ik,+90 relative to the earthquake direction.
When you activate command field OK, calculation of the structure, where that number of
load cases as is the number of assigned directions of earthquake action will be added to all
assigned basic load cases, begins.
509
7.3.4.3 Swiss Regulations (SIA)

Since this standard is based on the method of equivalent static forces, it is not
necessary to previously carry out the mode analysis. When this standard is selected, a dialog
box having the following appearance opens.

in accordance with Swiss regulations (SIA)
Total seismic force is calculated from the following expression:
S = Ck x Sk(T) x G
Soil category, seismic zone, category of the building and type of structure are selected in the
upper part of the dialog box, and on the basis of these data the program will adopt
corresponding coefficients that are used in the expression for calculating the total seismic force
that acts on the building.
Coefficient Ck is calculated from the expression Ck = 0.65 / K, where the value of
coefficient K depends on the category of the building and type of structure.
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
structure
structure
structure
structure
structure
structure
structure
structure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Structure category I
K = 2.5
K = 2.0
K = 1.7
K = 1.2
Structure category II
K = 2.0
K = 1.7
K = 1.4
K = 1.1
K = 2.5
K = 2.2
K = 1.0
Structure category III

K = 1.4
K = 1.3
K = 1.2
K = 1.0
K = 1.5
K = 1.4
K = 1.0
510
Structure category
II
III
Characteristics
- No mass people gathering
- No significant value of goods
and equipment
- No danger to surroundings
- Possible mass people
gathering
- Building with valuable
equipment and goods
- Important infrastructure
function of the building
- High degree of endangerment
of surroundings
- Vital importance of
infrastructure function
- High degree of endangerment
of surroundings
Standardised loading
- Possible significant damage
to load-bearing content, but
without collapse of the
building
- Medium damage
Proof
- Load-bearing
capacity
- Minor damage without

endangering the functionality
of the building
- Load-bearing
capacity
- Usability
- Load-bearing
capacity
- Usability, in
exceptional cases
Type of structure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Steel and rc frames

Bearing rc walls, steel structures
Timber structures
Masonry structures
Bridges with girders
Arched and prestressed concrete bridges
No movement bridge supports
On the basis of selected seismic zone and soil category, the regulations define eight shapes of
spectral curve.
Earthquake zone
-
Seismic
Seismic
Seismic
Seismic
zone
zone
zone
zone
1
2
3a
3b
Soil category
- hard
- average hard
511
Spectral curves in accordance with Swiss regulations

The value of coefficient Sk(T) corresponds to the ordinate of corresponding spectral curve for
given oscillating period of the structure.
Since the seismic forces are distributed along the height of the building according to
approximate expression:
Si = S x (Gi x Hi) / (Gi x Hi)
where:
Si - seismic horizontal force in i-th mass
Gi - weight of i-th mass
Hi - elevation of i-th mass in regard to the top edge of foundations
It is necessary to assign the height elevation, in regard to which heights of masses arranged
are calculated, in edit box Zd= (for this value, the program adopts as default the elevation
coordinate of the lowest assigned level in the building). All masses that are below the assigned
elevation will not be included in calculation of seismic forces.
Angle of earthquake action
In the list in the lower part of the dialog box, you have the possibility to assign an arbitrary
number of possible earthquake action (this list functions in exactly the same way as other lists
in the program). In addition to earthquake direction, which is defined by assigning the angle in
column () (the direction of global X-axis corresponds to angle 0), it is also necessary to
assign the oscillation period of the structure for that direction in column T, while you can
assign an arbitrary name to the given earthquake action direction in column Name. In case
you have previously carried out the mode analysis, if you right-click on column T, the list
with calculated oscillation periods of the structure for all required modes opens.
512
A click on the right mouse button within column T opens

the drop-down menu for selecting the calculated oscillation periods
By a simple click within the desired row, that numerical value will be written in column T. As
a very important issue we shall here mention that the oscillation period of the structure must
correspond to the mode in which the translatory oscillation in the given direction is dominant,
and in case there are several modes in which displacement in that direction is dominant, the
largest influence of the first mode for the given direction should be selected for the oscillation
period.
In the introductory part of this part of the manual, we have said that the method of equivalent
static load may be used even without previously performed modal analysis. For that reason, a
possibility of assigning a completely arbitrary value in column T has been provided for. Such
method of seismic analysis has several applications. The first and basic one is in exceptionally
large structures. In that case you have the possibility to first create a simpler model which will
sufficiently correctly describe the behavior of the structure in mode analysis, and to use the
oscillation periods calculated in this way as an input data for calculation of equivalent seismic
forces on the actual model. Of course, we do nor recommend this method, but the fact is that
this procedure also gives a solution which may be satisfactory for many buildings.
load cases, as is the number of assigned directions of earthquake action, will be added to all
In case that mode analysis had not been previously performed, the program will not have the
data on the weight of the structure, on the basis of which the forces are calculated. In such
cases, by activating the command field OK, the seismic analysis will not begin immediately,
but instead the program will open one more dialog box, where it is now necessary to
determine the method of calculating the weight of the building.
513
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the weight of the building
The list in the upper part of the dialog box, contains that number of rows as is the number of
basic load cases. It is now necessary to assign a multiplier in column Coeff., by which all
assigned loads within the given basic load case will be multiplied when calculating the weight
of the building. In this way, you have the possibility to adjust to the regulations which exactly
define which loads should be taken into account when calculating the weight of the building.
When command field OK is activated, the seismic analysis begins.
7.3.4.4 Any spectral curve

In addition to all previously described possibilities of seismic analysis in accordance
with certain standards, the option of creating the arbitrary spectral curve is also allowed by the
program. This option enables you to define the spectral curve yourself, and thus to perform
the seismic analysis according to any arbitrary standard. This method of seismic analysis is
based on the multi-mode analysis.
Appearance of the dialog box for seismic analysis,

by creating an arbitrary spectral curve
514
button "
Add", while the selected direction is removed from the list using the "
Delete".
direction
k,ik,+90 relative to the earthquake direction.
By selecting the command field Library, the procedure of defining a new spectral curve or
selecting any of the previously created spectral curves is enterd.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining an arbitrary spectral curve

In the right part of this dialog box, there is a list with all spectral curves created so far, while
to its left is a graphic interpretation of currently active curve from the list. Each spectral curve
is determined by its name and by a series of ordinates in the selected interval of oscillation
period. You can arrange your own base of spectral curves by command fields
Add and
Delete that are below the list. The role of the check box With Copy is exactly the same
as in other commands in the program, i.e. when this check box is set to switched-on state you
have the possibility to make a copy of the spectral curve which was currently active
immediately before activating the command field
Add.
The appearance of the curve is defined in the list in the lower left part of the dialog box. Its
appearance is defined by assigning the values of ordinates (data in column m/s2) for
arbitrarily selected number of points on the abscissa, which represents the oscillation period of
515
the structure (data in column T (s)). By command fields
Add and
Delete you add
and delete, respectively, the pair of data defining the shape of the spectral curve. Since the
connection between two points is linear, you have to define ordinates in several intermediate
points on curved parts of the spectrum, while it is sufficient to define ordinates only at the
beginning and at the end on the straight parts of the spectral curve.
When command field OK is selected, the program will return to the basic dialog box and it
will take all defined data for selected spectral curve from the base.
Part of the dialog box reserved for the name

of the selected spectral curve
The values of coefficients, by which the values of ordinates on the defined spectral curve will
be linearly multiplied, need to be assigned in edit box K=. This means that the value of this
coefficient represents the product of all coefficients determined by the given standard
depending on the seismic zone, category of the building, etc.
For this regulation it was also made possible to take into account the effects of accidental
torsion in the seismic calculation. The meaning of all parameters in this part of the dialogue is
the same as in EUROCODE regulations (section 7.3.4.1).
load cases, as is the number of assigned directions of earthquake action, will be added to all
516
8. POST-PROCESSING
8.1
Purpose and Description of Module Operation
The post-processing module enables an universal analysis of calculation results and

it prepares graphic and textual reports used in forming high quality design documentation.
Calculation results can be obtained for all structural elements, and they are presented by
isolines, diagrams of section forces, etc. The program also provides for dimensioning the
concrete, steel and timber structure automatically, on the basis of the calculated influences
and the selected standard.
The calculation results are presented in the 2D View window. Since arbitrarily selected parts
of the structure (frames, levels, auxiliary views) can be set within 2D View window as the
current view, the results presented in this window will be more than clear.
Way of displaying influences is the same for all entities. Influences are displayed immediately
after activating a suitable command. If influences have been displayed for the given entity in
course of operating with the program, it will display the one which was last selected, otherwise
the default influence for the given entity will be displayed (Mx for slabs, M3 for beams, etc).
Influences which are displayed during activating the command can subsequently be changed
using either the box for changing influences fast or the options from the command bar.
On the toolbar which is placed along the top edge of the screen, there is a combo box which is
used for selecting influences fast.
The combo box for selecting influences fast

This box can be used during viewing all types of influences: static influences in all structural
elements, influences in proxy entities, the results of concrete slabs and concrete beams
designing. The box contents depend on influences and entities which are being viewed. For
example, if Mx bending moment has been displayed, another static influence in slab can be
selected from the combo box.
517
The box contents when static influence

in slab are being viewed
Since for certain entities a great number of influences can be displayed, in the combo box,
there are only those influences which are most frequently used. Other influences can be
selected in the dialog box which opens up by selecting the option Others. In other words, by
selecting this option, the same dialog box will open up for each particular entity as when using
the command for displaying influences in a given entity.
The command Results, added within the drop-down menu in 3D View window, enables
the results to be obtained also in 3D View window. This command operates as a switch, i.e. it
can be set to switched-on or to switched-off state. When this command is set to switched-on
state (a symbol is placed before its name), the results for selected type of influences will
be presented on the entire model.
Presentation of results in 3D View window was required

from the program by command Results
The results presented in the 3D View window can be much clearer by activating the
command Current 2D View Only, that is within the drop-down menu 3D View (see
Chapter 2.13.7).
518
Setting the switch Current 2D View Only to switched-on state,

resulted in presenting the results in 3D View window
only for the current level of foundations
In "Tower" you can print numeric values of impacts on diagrams of linear entities, as well as
values of isolines of surface entities that are displayed in the "3D View". Displaying these
values is defined by check box "Show diagram values in 3D" which is located in dialog of
command "Functionality" in "Results" tab (section "3.5.2 Functionality").
Numerical data of influences in beam

have been displayed in the 3D View window
519
"3D view" shows numerical values of isolines in a panel

Since the results for the selected influence are presented only in the currently visible elements
of the structure, command Hiding enables you to group certain parts of the model into
wholes (see Chapter 2.10.2). In this way you can easily detect extreme values and present
results in related parts of the structure: in columns, in floor beams, in walls, in floor plates,
etc., more clearly.
For the currently visible group Columns,

The calculation results become even clearer
The visibility is deleted for types of entities in the same way as in the input data module, or by
command Visibility, or by a click on the right mouse button on the corresponding icon (see
Chapter 2.10.1).
520
A click on the right mouse button on one of the first 5 icons, results
in deleting the visibility of the corresponding structural element
Almost all commands described in Chapter 2. Graphic Interface, exist also in this program
module. The exception is only commands used to change the geometry of the structure and
the assigned load. For that reason, all commands, except command Edit, are removed from
menu Level (see Chapter 2.11). This command operates in exactly the same way, except
that in the post-processing module it is not allowed to delete and displace levels, which contain
structural elements. In case you attempt such action, the program will issue a corresponding
warning.
All commands that affect the geometry of the structure: Delete, Copy, Mirror, Move,
Rotate and Array (see Chapter 2.12) are removed from menu Disposition also.
Commands for operating with the symbols remained, so that you also have the possibility to
delete and place new symbols in the post-processing module.
All commands from the drop-down menus of the 2D View window and 3D View window,
exist also in the post-processing module and thus you can activate them in the same way as in
the data input module.
Commands for manipulating the elements of drawings are also present in the Modify menu,
(see Chapter 2.9). However, in the selecting procedure it will not be possible to select the
elements of the structure and loading, since that would result in loss of existing calculation
results. This group of commands is provided for manipulating the entities created in the postprocessing module (zones of placed reinforcement in plates, assigned section lines for drawing
the section forces diagram, etc.).
Since the commands from the drop-down menu Auxiliary level do not affect the geometry
of the model, they are present in the post-processing module also (see Chapter 3.4).
Since the project documentation is created only in the analysis data processing module, this
module also contains commands for processing the results of the carried out modal analysis
and stability analysis. Within the drop-down menu Influences, there are complete menus of
521
Mode Analysis and Stability, which are also contained within the module for forming
finite element mesh (see chapters 5 and 6). Once you have activated these commands,
within the analysis data processing module, you are enabled to include in the project the
results of the modal analysis and stability analysis. The same applies for the commands
Resultant, Prestress Losses and Moving Load Control, which have been taken over
from the module for entering data.
Finally, it should be mentioned that the command for changing the current construction stage
is not present in the menu, but it can only be activated by the corresponding icon (see Chapter
3.1.14.2).
Icon for changing the current construction stage
8.2
Selecting the Current Load Case
After completing the calculations, the program automatically goes to the postprocessing module, and it sets as the active load case that load case that was the current load
case in the input data module. The post-processing module can be entered even when
operating with the model that has not been calculated. It is clear that in this case nonexistent
calculation results cannot be analysed, but instead input data for printing can be prepared.
By selecting the command Load Case, within the drop-down menu Influences, a dialog
box with the following appearance opens.
522

for setting the current load case
All assigned basic load cases are presented in the list. The black arrow to the left side of the
list box indicates which load case was the current load case immediately before this command
was activated. The current load case is changed by a simple click on the mouse button over its
name, after which that row becomes denoted by a special color.
When command field OK is activated, the dialog box will be closed, and the program will be
ready to present the calculation results for the newly set current load case.
The current load case can also be selected from the closed list,
which is in the space provided for icons
523
8.2.1
Creating SRSS combinations
Within the command Load Case, it has been enabled to create SRSS load
combinations. Upon selecting the command field SRSS Combinations, a dialog box of the
following layout opens up:
The dialog box for creating SRSS combinations the layout

In the lower left corner of the dialog box, there is a list displaying all basic load cases which
have been assigned until that moment, whereas the upper part of the dialog box contains a list
with created SRSS combinations. Upon acitvating the command field
Add, a new row,
which has as many columns as there are basic load cases, is inserted in the list. A SRSS
combination is defined by assigning a multiplicator in those columns which have the same
ordinal number as the basic load cases entering a combination.
A SRSS combination has been created by assigning a multiplicator

to the third and fourth basic load case
An influence for a SRSS combination is calculated according to the following formula:
Ei2
524
where:
E influence
k multiplicator
i basic load case number
SRSS combinations are treated by the program in the same way basic load cases are treated,
which means that any change made in this dialog box will lead to deleting the results of
designing, that is if there are any. For this reason, if you need SRSS combinations, its
generally better that you perform defining them before you start working in the data
processing module. Since this command may be a destructive one, an appropriate warning
message will appear in the dialog box.
The command field
Delete has been envisaged for removing the selected SRSS
combination from the list, whereas the command fields
Up and
Down are used to
change the position of the currently selected combination in the list, by moving upwards or
downwards.
Once the command field OK has been activated, the program closes the current dialog box
and, after accepting all changes made in it, returns to the basic layout of the dialog box within
the command Load Case. Since SRSS combinations are treated by the program in the same
way as basic load cases, they will be displayed in this dialog box completely equally to other
basic load cases and will also be available for creating influence envelopes and standard load
combinations.
The created SRSS combination has been displayed in the dialog box Load Case
completely equally to other basic load cases
525
8.2.2
Creating the combinations
In addition to selecting the current load case, creating arbitrary combinations of

their simultaneous action is also enabled within command Load case. By selecting the
command field Combination, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for creating the combinations

The way of operating with this dialog box is exactly the same as with command Load
Combination in the input data module, so everything described in Chapter 3.2.2, also
applies here.
It should be mentioned that creating the combinations in the post-processing module will not
be possible only in case that the calculations have been carried out according to Theory II, and
in case that all assigned load cases apply to constructing the influence line.
8.2.3
Envelopes of Influences
In addition to displaying the results for the current load case, that is, the created
combination, the program may also be requested to display the extreme influence envelopes.
In this case, it is necessary first to turn on the check box Envelope and then, by clicking on
the column in the combo box, specify all basic load cases and combinations which will be
reviewed for the envelopes analysis of the extreme influences. By clicking intermittently on the
column , the symbol will keep appearing and disappearing. The existence of the
symbol means that that a given load case or combination will be included in the envelopes
analysis.
526
The placed symbols within the column clearly

indicate from which load cases and combinations
the influence envelope has been requested
Ordinal numbers of all load cases and combinations from which the influence envelope has
been requested are displayed in the edit box which is just below the check box Envelope.
Ordinal numbers of all load cases and combinations

from which the influence envelope has been requested
Selecting load cases and combinations for analyzing the influence envelopes can be performed
directly in this edit box by entering their ordinal numbers or the interval including the desired
ordinal numbers. If you are required, for example, to select the load case with ordinal number
1, you should enter the string 1 in the edit box, and when you are required to select the load
527
cases with ordinal numbers 1, 2 and 3, you should enter the string 1-3 in the edit box.v The
entered ordinal numbers, that is intervals, must be separated by commas.
The created envelope load case can be permanently remembered in the model. For this
purpose, the command field
Save has been envisaged, upon activating which the
following dialog box will open up:
The desired name is assigned in the edit box, whereas by activating the command field OK,
saving is performed. From that particular moment on, the assigned name will keep appearing
in the combo box and by selecting it, all data which has been added to it can be imported at
any moment.
The combo box from which all the previously saved

envelope load cases are selected
the box.
Delete, the current envelope load case is removed from
Once you have activated the command field OK, the program will close the dialog box and,
in the combo box for selecting load cases, display all the previously saved envelope load cases,
together with their names and ordinal numbers which have been selected for the envelopes
analysis of the extreme influence.
If the defined envelope load case has not been saved, once you have activated the command
field OK, text Env. will be displayed instead of the name in the combo box for selecting load
cases.
528
From the content of the closed list it can be clearly seen that the
envelope of extreme influences is set for the current load case
All results presented from that moment on within individual commands, in this case would
represent envelopes of extreme influences.
By entering again into the dialog box of this command, and by setting the check box
Envelope to switched-off state, you can require again the presentation of results for any of
the basic load cases or for arbitrarily created combination instead of the presentation of
envelopes.
In course of working with the model, it may also happen that some load cases or combinations
are deleted, so that there are not any ordinal numbers which should have been assigned
during creating envelopes. As a result, given envelopes will be preceded by the question mark
(?) in the combo box for selecting load cases and during attempting to select them, the
program will issue an appropriate warning message.
If such an envelope is selected from the combo box in the dialog box Load Case, the
program will offer the possibility of deleting it, as well as the possibility of deleting all other
irregular envelopes.
529
8.3
Deformed Model View
The command Deformed Model View, within the drop-down menu Influences,
operates as a switch, i.e. it can be set either to switched-on or to switched-off state. When it is
set to switched-on state (there is a symbol before its name), the 3D view of the deformed
finite element mesh for the set current load case, in addition to the currently visible structural
elements and loads is also presented in 3D View window.
The deformed model is presented only in 3D View window

In case you desire to view the deformed shape of a certain part of the model only, first you
need to set the content of that part of the structure as the current view within 2D View
window. Next, by setting the command Current 2D View Only, to switched-on state, the
deformed shape of the selected part of the model only will be displayed in 3D View window
The deformed shape of foundations only was required

from the program by command Current 2D View Only
If you desire only the deformed finite element mesh to be presented in the 3D View window,
you can delete the visibility of all elements in the drawing by command All Invisible, within
command Visibility.
530
View of deformed finite element mesh only is obtained

by deleting the visibility of all elements in the drawing
Finally, it should be mentioned that the view of the deformed finite element mesh cannot be
obtained if the view of envelopes of extreme influences was required from the program instead
of the current load case. The same also applies if moving load is assigned within the current
load case, since in that case the results are presented by the envelope of extreme influences
for various positions of the moving load.
As soon as the command Deformed Model Animation has been selected, the program will
take some time to create an AVI file and, soon afterwards, a dialog box of the following
layout will appear on the screen.
A deformed model animation for the current load case is shown in the opened dialog box.
Using the command Functionality (the sub-dialog box Animation), you are enabled to
customize the parameters defining the way an animation is created (see chapter 3.5.2).
The command fields Play and Stop enable you to start and end an animation, whereas the
command field Save enables you to save the created animation on your computer disc as an
AVI file which later you can play outside the Tower program as a separate animation, using
the Windows Media Player.
The command field Exit has been envisaged for exiting the dialog box and aborting the
animation of the current tone.
531
8.4
Reaction Sums
The accuracy of the assigned load intensity is controlled by command Reaction

Sums, within the drop-down menu Influences. When it is selected, a dialog box with the
following appearance opens.
The sums of assigned loading in the direction of global coordinate axes are presented in the
left part of the dialog box, while the corresponding sums of reactive loading for the current
load case are presented in the right part of the dialog box. Surely, in case of correctly
performed calculations, active and reactive loading must be in equilibrium.
The command for obtaining the reaction sums will not be active in the following cases:
- In case that the view of envelopes of extreme influences instead of the current load case
was required from the program.
- If moving load is assigned within the current load case, since in that case the results are
also presented by the envelope of extreme influences for various positions of the moving
load.
- If the current load case represents the seismic load that has been calculated by the method
of multi mode analysis. Presenting the reaction sums in such cases makes no sense, since
all support reactions are obtained by any of the statistical methods, and therefore they
always have a positive value.
532
8.5
Influences in Plate/Wall
After selecting the command Slab, which is located in the drop-down menu
Influences, the program will immediately display in the 2D view window the
results of the analysis in slab elements for the current load case.
used for fast selection of influences.
The combo box for fast selection of influences

The combo box contains only those influences which are most frequently used. Other
influences can be selected from the dialog box which opens up after selecting either the option
Others... on the toolbar or by selecting the sub-option Layout from the command bar.
Appearance of the dialog box for selecting

the influences in plates and walls
The region, in which the influences that will be presented in the screen are selected, is in the
left part of this dialog box. Since space models in addition to plane models can be solved by
the Tower 6 program, it is possible to demand any influence that originates due to combined
stressing of the plate to be presented. All section forces that may appear in a finite plate
element are presented in the following figure.
533
Section forces corresponding to plate bending (stressing perpendicular to the plane of the
plate) are presented in the left figure, while section forces corresponding to membrane
stressing (stressing in the plane of the plate) are presented in the right figure. The adopted
convention about the positive sense of section forces can also be clearly seen from this figure.
Results Type
The influences are selected by setting the corresponding switch to switched-on state. The
following switches are available:
Mx My Mxy Nx Ny Nxy Vz,x -
Vz,y -
bending moment in direction of local X-axis

bending moment in direction of local Y-axis
torsional moment
normal force in direction of local X-axis
normal force in direction of local Y-axis
shear force in the plate plane
shear force in direction of local Z axis (acting in plane defined by position of local Z
and X axes)
shear force in direction of local Z axis (acting in plane defined by position of local Z
and Y axes)
Local X and Y axes of each plate belong to the plane of the plate itself, while the local Z-axis is
in the direction perpendicular to the plate plane. Since the plate can have a completely
arbitrary position in space, in order to enable clear visualising of the local coordinate system of
plates a convention is introduced that it completely corresponds to the local coordinate system
for drawing in 2D View window. Therefore, if the current level is presented in 2D View
window, then the local coordinate system of plates belonging to the given level exactly
corresponds to the local coordinate system for selecting the points in 2D View window, when
the content of the current level is presented in that window. Exactly the same analogy applies
when a current frame is presented in 2D View window, or an arbitrarily defined inclined view.
In all these cases the local Z-axis is oriented toward the eye of the observer, i.e. the top edge
of the plate is closer to the observers eye.
In case of rotationally symmetrical bodies, for which a radial finite element mesh is generated
(sphere, cone, helix), the local X-axis is oriented in tangential, while the local Y axis is oriented
radial direction.
534
Local coordinate system of the plate for

radially generated finite element mesh
In addition to section forces, the calculation results also provide for principal stresses, and they
are presented separately for the top and the bottom side of the plate (the top edge of the plate
is oriented in positive sense of local Z-axis of the plate).
1,u 2,u ,u u,u 1,d 2,d ,d u,d ,u ,d -
stress for direction of principal axis 1, on the top edge of the plate
stress for direction of principal axis 2, on the top edge of the plate
shearing stress on the top edge of the plate due to Nxy and Mxy
combined stress on the top edge of the plate
stress for direction of principal axis 1, on the bottom edge of the plate
stress for direction of principal axis 2, on the bottom edge of the plate
shearing stress on the bottom edge of the plate
combined stress on the bottom edge of the plate
direction of action of principal stresses on the top edge of the plate
direction of action of principal stresses on the bottom edge of the plate
Since the principal stresses are calculated only on the top and bottom sides of the plate, and
the values of shearing stresses due to transversal forces in those points are equal to zero, the
stress image for combined stressing exactly corresponds to the plane stress state.
The principal stress 1 represents the maximal, while 2 represents the minimal stress value
in the given point, and these values are calculated for the plane stress state from the following
expressions:
The values of component stresses participating in the previously presented expressions are
calculated from the following expressions that also correspond to the plane stress state:
Surely, the corresponding component stresses should be included into the expressions for
calculating the principal stresses, depending on whether the principal stresses are calculated
on the top or on the bottom side of the plate.
535
A clear image of stress distribution for plane stress state in an arbitrary point in the model is
obtained from the Mohr-ov circle of stress.
The angle between the direction of stress 1 and the direction of global X-axis is determined
by the following expressions:
The planes to which the principal stresses belong are normal to each other.
The value of the combined stress is calculated from the Misss formula (hypothesis of largest
energy distortion):
When deformations are concerned, in combined stressing, the program presents the results of
all three displacements and all three rotations in the direction of global and local coordinate
axes.
Xd Yd Zd Xr Yr Zr u1 u2 u3 r1 r2 r3 -
displacement in direction of global X-axis

displacement in direction of global Y-axis
displacement in direction of global Z-axis
rotation about global X-axis
rotation about global Y-axis
rotation about global Z-axis
displacement in direction of local X-axis
displacement in direction of local Y-axis
displacement in direction of local Z-axis
rotation about local X-axis
rotation about local Y-axis
rotation about local Z-axis
536
Displacements and rotations have positive values if their vectors act in direction of positive
global/local axes.
Isolines Type
Since the isolines are the most convenient way to present the influences in surface elements,
in the upper right part of the dialog box there is a rectangular region, in which the type of
isolines by which the selected influences will be interpreted, are selected. The type of isolines
is selected by setting the corresponding switch to switched-on state. The following three types
of isolines are provided for by the program:
Empty isolines are lines connecting points on the plate having same intensity (potential).
The intensity of the line is written along each established line in the drawing. The zero-line
is denoted by a special color and thus it is clearly distinguished from other lines.
Empty isolines
Full isolines are graphically interpreted by colouring the region between two consecutive
isolines by a same color that determines the interval of influence between values of those
two isolines. Thus, the whole area of the plate/wall is filled by coloured areas, where a
certain influence interval corresponds to each color.
Full isolines
537
A table indicating the range of values for each of the set color of isolines is always placed in
the upper right corner of the 2D View window.
Smooth isolines, in contrast to full isolines, do not draw a clear boundary, but instead the
color gradually changes its shade, thus following the magnitude of the influence. In this
way, a plastic image of the influences is obtained.
Smooth isolines
The meaning of the table in the upper right corner of the 2D View window is the same as in
the view of full isolines.
3D - Check box is active only if switches "Full" or "Empty" are selected and by turning it
on you enable the relief display of isolines in 3D view.
Relief display of isolines in 3D window

When the results are displayed via isolines in any entity, the program may be requested to
paint the zones between them in two colors only, where different shades of one color are used
for positive values, whereas different shades of another color are used for negative values.
Color saturation increases from the smallest to the biggest value of isolines. In other words,
the zones between isolines with the smallest values are painted in lighter shades, whereas the
zones between isolines with the biggest values are painted in darker shades of the assigned
color.
538
Viewing results in two colors is selected in the dialog box of the command Functionality, in
the sub-dialog box Results by turning on the check box Two colors for isolines and
legends.
The results in slab have been displayed in two colors

Selecting colors to be used for displaying positive and negative values is performed in the
dialog box of the command Settings, within the branch Results Area Full Isolines.
Envelope
The switch in the part Envelope of the dialog box will be available to be selected only if the
view of the envelope of extreme influences was required by command Load Case, instead of
the results for the current load case, i.e. the created combination. The same applies to those
load cases within which moving load is assigned. Since it is not possible to present the
envelopes for both maximal positive and maximal negative influences at the same time in the
drawing, by selecting one of the switches: Max + and Max , for which values the isolines
will be drawn is defined.
In those parts of the plate where the extreme value of the selected influence
has the opposite sign, the isolines are not presented
539
Number of Isoline Divisions
The number of equal segments into which the interval from the maximal to the minimal value
of the selected influence will be divided can be assigned in edit box Div. Number, in the
lower right corner of this dialog box. This number of divisions practically determines the
density of the isolines, and it can be assigned within the range from 2 (lowest density) to 20
(highest density). The default value is 7 divisions. It should be mentioned that if the selected
influence has a zero-value, it will surely be included as one f the borders. Other intervals are
equally spaced.
In addition to this edit box, the division of isolines is also affected by the state of the switch
Whole Model. Namely, the top and the bottom borders of the whole range of possible
values of the selected influences are determined by this switch. If this switch is set to
switched-off state, the interval of the selected influence will be determined by its maximal and
minimal values in each assembly of the model individually (level, frame, auxiliary view, etc.).
This means that each of the assemblies in the model will have its own range of possible values.
However, if this switch is set to switched-on state, all plates and walls in the model will have a
common table of values, since the maximal and minimal values of the selected influence will
refer to the whole model. In this way, you have the possibility to obtain a unique division in all
plates and walls in the whole model. For example, the same interval of the selected influence
will be represented by green color in all plates and walls.
Since command Hiding (see Chapter 2.10.2) enables only certain parts of the model to be
set as visible parts, the term Whole Model, here means all plates and walls in the model that
are currently visible.
A typical example of such application of isolines is a building having typical floors. Since you
will probably reinforce all typical floors with same reinforcement, by deleting the visibility of all
other plates and walls, and by setting the switch Whole Model to switched-on state, in all
currently visible floors plates, the isolines will be set at same intervals. In this way, the same
interval of influences will be represented by same color in all floor plates. Moreover, you will
easily notice in which floor plate the extreme values appear.
All floor plates obtain the same denotation of the isolines when
the switch Whole Model is set to switched-on state
The switch Globally, which is found within the the dialog box for selecting influences in
slabs, can be activated only if the switch Whole model has been turned on before that.
Turning this switch on will lead to changing the content of the central part of the dialog box.
540
The dialog-box form for the influence choices that are

designed at one of the global axiss direction
This command is applied to plates that are skewed in space, so the influences are, designed to
the chosen global axis direction, but in such way that they belong only to the inclined plate
plain. In such way, the local coordinate skewed plates system is actually changed.
Mx,s a moment which vector coincides with the designed global X axis direction on the
inclined plate plain
Nx,s an axial force which vector coincides with the designed global X axis direction on the
Vx,s a transfer force which vector coincides with the designed global X axis direction on the
Mx,n a moment which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global X axis
direction on the inclined plate plain
Nx,n an axial force which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global X axis
Vx,n a transfer force which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global X axis
My,s a moment which vector coincides with the designed global Y axis direction on the
Ny,s an axial force which vector coincides with the designed global Y axis direction on the
Vy,s a transfer force which vector coincides with the designed global Y axis direction on the
My,n a moment which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global Y axis
Ny,n an axial force which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global Y axis
Vy,n a transfer force which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global Y axis
Mz,s a moment which vector coincides with the designed global Z axis direction on the
Nz,s an axial force which vector coincides with the designed global Z axis direction on the
Vz,s a transfer force which vector coincides with the designed global Z axis direction on the
Mz,n a moment which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global Z axis
Nz,n an axial force which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global Z axis
541
Vz,n
a transfer force which vector coincides with the normal on the designed global Z axis
Support Regions
The last data that can be assigned in this dialog box refers to parabolic rounding of the support
bending moments. Namely, when the switch Support Regions are set to switched-on state,
the program is required to round parabolically, depending on the assigned dimensions of
supporting elements, all peaks of bending moments in plates, in the positions in which they
are supported. It is clear that bending moments calculated in this way will also affect the
intensities of all other influences (stresses), the intensity of which is obtained on the basis of
the value of bending moments.
The moment diagram, obtained directly from calculating by finite element method, is
presented in figure on the left, in which all structural elements are modelled by dimensionless
finite elements.
However, since in reality a plate is not supported only in a point but along the whole width of
the given structural element, many standards allow parabolic rounding of the calculated
support moments, in a way as presented in the figure on the right. It can be clearly seen from
the figure that this moderation of support moments is directly affected by the width of the
structural element that supports the plate, in the lengthwise direction of the diagram. Namely,
the wider the structural element supporting the plate, the larger moderation of the bending
moment will be obtained by parabolic rounding.
In parabolic rounding of influences, in positions where the plate is supported by true point and
linear supports, a parameter joined within the set of their numerical data is used as the data
about their dimension. For linear supports this is the data d, while for point supports the
shape and the dimensions that are joined to it by command field Cross-section.
Display Results
When command field OK is activated, the dialog box will disappear, and the presentation of
the selected influences, in the way assigned in the dialog box, will appear in the screen. By
changing the current view in the 2D View window, the isolines will be presented for all plates
and walls belonging to the current assembly (level, frame, auxiliary view, etc.). It is clear that
the isolines will be common to all plates and walls within the given assembly. For example, let
us take a floor plate with capitals. In this case, the isolines will be set in such way that they
represent the division from largest to smallest value in all plates within the given assembly.
542
The field provided for writing the type of presented influences

and their extreme values
The name of the influence, for which the isolines are presented, and the information on its
extreme values are written on the status bar, in the end left field. If the switch Whole
Model was set to switched-off state, the presented extreme values will then correspond to
the current content in 2D View window, and if it was set to on-on state, then the presented
extreme values will always have the same value since that they refer to all plates and walls in
the model.
The field provided for presenting the influence value read by the mouse
The value of the selected influence in the position determined by the current position of the
mouse pointer is written in the end right field of the status bar. The command operates in such
way that the mouse pointer is moved along the surface parts of the model, while the value of
the active influence corresponding to the current position of the mouse pointer is written in the
end right field of the status bar reserved for information on the author of the program. This
option is intended for fast control of calculation results presented by isolines in surface
elements.
Disregarding the selected type of isolines, the program denotes the position of the local
systems in each of the presented plates.
543
The position of the extreme value in this part of the model

is marked by a small-triangle symbol
It should be mentioned that the local extreme values are only in the first and in the last
interval of isoline division.
Among all influences that can be presented in plates, only the directions of principal stresses
(switches ,u and ,d) are not presented by isolines but instead by arrows which clearly
illustrate the direction of their action. Namely, two orthogonal arrows in direction of action of
principal stresses will be placed in the centre of each finite element. Arrows that appear at the
ends of the lines that determine the action direction of principal stress 1, and principal
stress 2, are turned outward in case of tension, and in case of compression they are turned
inward. The presentation of crosses of principal stresses will not be possible if presentation of
the envelopes of principal stresses was required from the program, instead of current load
cases.
It should be mentioned that the influences of shearing forces will not always have the expected
shape in the zone where abrupt change of shearing force occurs. This will be illustrated in a
simple example of an elongated continuous beam with two spans, subjected to vertical load.
Diagram of shearing forces

Along the line of the middle support, an oblique ordinate is obtained instead of the expected
vertical one. The reason of such presentation is in the organisation of the data in the
544
presentation by isolines. Namely, in order that the influences in surface elements be presented
by isolines, it is necessary that there is only one value of the given influence in each point in
the model. For that reason, in each of the nodes the values are averaged with the values from
the surrounding nodes. This has no harmful consequence in other influences, however in
shearing forces this results in such phenomenon. In any case, a mesh with higher density will
result in better approximation of the diagram in the position of abrupt change of the shearing
force.
This problem can be solved by placing a fictitious line of joints over the middle support, via the
command Boundary conditions (see chapter 3.1.3). The term a fictitious line of joints
refers to placing a boundary condition over the middle support, without releasing a single
influence.
The diagram of transversal forces with placed fictitious line of joints

over the middle support
8.5.1
Denoting the Isolines (Legend)

As we have already previously said, the isolines are established in that way that
the total interval from the maximal to the minimal influence that is being analysed
is divided into assigned number of equal divisions. Command Legend, enables
you to adjust yourself both the number of isolines, and their spacing. When this
command is selected, the standard procedure of selecting is entered.
<0 sel.> Legend for influences in Slabs Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras /
It is now necessary to select one or more plates, the isoline division of which you desire to
edit. Since the isolines are common to all plates and walls of one assembly, by selecting one
plate, all other plates belonging to that assembly are automatically selected.
If you right-click, the end of the selecting procedure will be denoted, and the program will
open a dialog box having the following appearance.
545

the values of isolines
In case when command Legend is activated when isolines for all currently visible plates and
walls in the model are presented (the switch Whole Model, within command Plate, is set to
switched-on state), the program immediately opens this dialog box without previously
performed procedure of selecting the plates. The reason for this is that in such operating
regime, the established isolines have a common division and thus previous selecting is not
necessary.
All values of influences for which the isolines are drawn in the drawing are contained in the
presented list, while the extreme values of the given influence in all selected plates (first and
last values in the list) are written in the top right corner of the dialog box.
The density of isolines can be defined either by assigning the number of divisions, or by
assigning the value of the equidistance between the consecutive isolines (these two data are
assigned in edit boxes Step and Divisions Number). After assigning the desired value in
one of these two edit boxes, and by pressing the key Enter or Tab, the program will
automatically rearrange the list with values in accordance with the assigned criterion.
In addition to the previously described method of defining the densities and intensities of
isolines automatically, the program also enables editing of all values contained in the list box
individually.
If you click the mouse button on any value of the isoline in the list box, it becomes marked,
and it is now possible to assign a new value to it from the keyboard. Since the values of
isolines have to be in an ascending sequence, the program will automatically update their
sequence in the list after each change.
Any of the isoline values are removed from the list by a click on the mouse button over its
name (that row in the list box becomes specially marked) and then by activating the command
field Delete. Surely, the deleting will be disabled if there are only two values in the list,
which divide the whole interval of calculated influences into a minimal number of two divisions.
By activating the command field Add, a new isoline value can be inserted into the list, below
the active (marked) row. Adding new valued will be enabled all until the maximal value of 20
divisions is reached.
546
Same as in other dialog boxes, command field Cancel is provided for quitting from the
performed changes, while command field OK is provided for confirmation of all performed
corrections in the list. When you click on the command field OK, the dialog box disappears,
while new isolines, the intensities of which correspond to the assigned values, appear in the
drawing.
The possibility of selecting several assemblies in the model has a special application when you
desire to unify the isoline divisions in related parts of the structure (typical floor, walls, etc.).
The influences will then be presented in same intervals of isolines in all previously selected
assemblies.
Finally, it should be mentioned that the division of the isolines is remembered for each
assembly in the model separately. You can delete the previous editing of isoline values in the
whole model only by selecting the command Plate again, and by assigning a new number of
divisions.
8.5.2
Influences in Arbitrary Cross-section (Section)

This command, which enables the influences to be presented by a diagram for an
arbitrarily selected position of the cross-section, was developed for those Users,
which do not find the presentation of influences in surface elements by isolines
sufficiently clear.
Two cases may occur depending on whether the isolines of any influence are drawn on the
screen or not. In fact, the course of the command is always the same, but the difference is
only in the type of influence that is being presented. Namely, if the isolines are present in the
screen, then the diagram refers to those influences, while the assigned line of the section only
determines the position in which they act. In the opposite case, when there are no isolines in
the screen, a dialog box, for selecting the influences for which the cross-section diagrams need
to be drawn, opens before assigning the position of the cross-section.
Appearance of the dialog box for selecting the influences,

when isolines are not presented in the screen
547
The following influences are available:
Section forces:
Ms Mn Mns Ns Nn Nns Vs -
Bending moment acting in direction of assigned cross-section

Bending moment acting in direction of normal to the assigned line of cross-section
Torsional moment
Normal force acting in direction of assigned cross-section
Normal force acting in direction of normal to the assigned line of cross-section
Shearing forces in the plane of the wall
Shearing force for plane the normal to which is perpendicular to the assigned line of
cross-section
Shearing force for plane the normal to which is in direction of assigned crosssection
Vn Stresses:
s,u n,u ns,u u,u s,d n,d ns,d u,d -
Stress acting in direction of assigned cross-section (on the top side of the plate)
Stress acting in direction of normal to the assigned line of cross-section (on the top
side of the plate)
Shearing stress acting in direction of assigned cross-section (on the top side of the
plate)
Combined stress (on the top side of the plate)
Stress acting in direction of assigned cross-section (on the bottom side of the plate)
Stress acting in direction of normal to the assigned line of cross-section (on the
bottom side of the plate)
Shearing stress acting in direction of assigned cross-section (on the bottom side of
the plate)
Combined stress (on the bottom side of the plate)
Deformations:
Xd Yd Zd Xr Yr Zr u1 u2 u3 r1 r2 r3 -
Displacement in direction of global X-axis

Displacement in direction of global Y-axis
Displacement in direction of global Z-axis
Rotation about global X-axis
Rotation about global Y-axis
Rotation about global Z-axis
Displacement in direction of local X-axis
Displacement in direction of local Y-axis
Displacement in direction of local Z-axis
Rotation about local X-axis
Rotation about local Y-axis
Rotation about local Z-axis
Since influences in area supports can also be analysed by command Cross-section, stress in
soil is also provided for selecting the influences:
,soil -
Stress in soil
The role and the meaning of the switch Support regions are exactly the same as in the
dialog box in the command for presenting the influences in plates, i.e. when it is set to
switched-on state the program will parabolically round all peaks of support moments obtained
by calculating.
After selecting the desired influence and activating the command field OK, the dialog box will
disappear from the screen and the further course of the command will be the same as when
548
isolines of some influence are presented in the screen. Namely, a message requiring from the
User a completely arbitrary one-segment line to be drawn will appear in the command bar.
First Point (Circle / <End>:
After assigning the position of the first point, a new message will appear on the command bar,
requiring the second point of the section line to be selected.
Second Point (Arc / <End>):
By selecting the corresponding sub-options from the command bar, it is also possible to assign
both an arc and a circular shape of the section line in addition to the straight line. Assigning a
circular/arc section may be helpful when analysing the influences in rotationally symmetric
parts of the structure (sphere, circular plate, etc.).
When the position of the cross-section line is completely determined, the program will offer
from the command bar the possibility of assigning the band width in relation to the assigned
cross-section line.
Width (Moment Resistance) <0>:
It should be noted that the sub-option Moment Resistance will appear on the command bar
only if Nn, Ns or Nns have been selected as influences.
Several possibilities are now offered, depending on the type of diagram you wish to obtain
along the assigned cross-section line.
Diagrams without Assigning the Band Width
If you wish to obtain a simple diagram, without integrating along the assigned cross-section
width, right-click to accept the default band width 0, and the diagram along the assigned
cross-section line will appear on the screen.
Diagram of bending moments in direction of assigned cross-section line: Ms

This way of presenting the diagram is customary for all types of influences in surface parts of
the structure.
You will obtain the same diagram if you select the sub-option Moment Resistance from the
command bar. When this sub-option is selected, value 0 will again be adopted for the band
width, except that the program will also write, at the beginning of the assigned cross-section
549
line, the numerical values obtained by reduction of the influences along the assigned crosssection line to its centroid.
Diagram of normal forces Nn with option Moment Resistance

Normal force N=, represents the area of the diagram, where the positive/negative sign of
the influence is obeyed. In the centroid of each area of the diagram having the same sign, the
program places an arrow, the intensity of which represents the area of that part of the
diagram. The moment resulting from normal forces calculated in this way in reference to the
centroid of the assigned cross-section line, represents the calculated value M=.
This type of diagrams has special application in seismic walls subjected to horizontal forces. In
this way, by drawing the horizontal section line for selected influence Nn, you can obtain the
intensity of the total normal force and the bending moment that cause the horizontal forces in
the plane of the wall.
Diagrams with Assigning the Band Width
If you desire the influences to be integrated along the assigned section line on a certain width,
determine the desired band with either by selecting a point in the drawing or by assigning a
numerical value from the keyboard. Soon after, the following message will appear on the
command bar:
Diagram Type (Lever arm / Area / <average Value>):
New possibilities are now offered by selecting one of the sub-options offered on the command
bar. Whichever option you decide to use, the program will write the assigned band width b=
and denote the selected type of diagram at the beginning of the assigned cross-section line.
The sign for the average value is Av., for lever arm M, and for area T.
Selecting the sub-option average Value, will result in averaging the influences on the
assigned band width.
550
For influence Ms band width b=2.0 is assigned and

Sub-option average Value is selected
Each ordinate in the diagram represents the average value of the selected influence, along the
line normal to the assigned cross-section line, in a length corresponding to the assigned band
width. This type of diagram is used in analysis of bending influence in plates. In this way,
extreme values of influences are moderated by averaging them over the assigned width.
By selecting the sub-option Lever arm, the selected influence is integrated along the
assigned width, so that the assigned value represents a moment of a couple of forces, which
spread perpendicular to the assigned cross-section line, in each point of the assigned cross
section line.
For influence Ns, the band width corresponding to the complete width
of the wall is assigned and sub-option Lever arm is selected
This type of diagrams is most commonly used in walls subjected to horizontal forces. In this
way, by drawing a vertical section for selected influence Ns, a diagram of bending moments
in the plane of the wall as well as in the corresponding beam element is obtained.
The ordinates obtained in such diagram practically represent the M= value which would be
obtained by drawing a horizontal section for selected influence Nn, in the given position.
551
Series of horizontal sections for influence Nn, without assigning

the band width, using sub-option Moment Resistance
Sub-option Lever arm can also be used in walls with openings, subjected to vertical load. By
drawing a horizontal cross-section along the median line of the part of the wall above the
opening, a diagram which completely corresponds to the door lintel beam with both ends fixed,
can be obtained in this way.
For influence Ns, band width corresponding to depth of the door

lintel beam is assigned, and sub-option Lever arm is selected
By selecting the sub-option Area, the selected influence in integrated along the assigned
width in that way that the obtained value in each point of the assigned section line represents
the area of the diagram of forces, which spread normally to the assigned section line.
552
For influence Nns band width corresponding to whole width

of the wall is assigned, and sub-option Area is selected
This type of diagrams is most commonly used in walls subjected to horizontal forces. In this
way, by drawing a vertical section, for selected influence Nns (shearing forces in the plane of
the wall), a diagram of shearing forces, as well as in corresponding beam element, are
obtained.
Since the program enables an arbitrary number of diagrams to be drawn in one step, this
series of questions will keep appearing on the command bar all until you answer the question
about the first point of the section by a click on the right mouse button.
If the presentation of envelopes of extreme influences were required by command Load
cases, then two diagrams would appear along the assigned section lines, where one would
correspond to maximal positive, and the other to maximal negative influences. The same also
applies to a load case that includes moving load.
By selecting this command again, the previously drawn cross-sections will not be removed,
and by assigning new ones, you can add them to the existing drawing.
The assigned cross-section lines will be available to be selected within all commands from the
drop-down menu Modify. This means that the existing diagrams can be deleted, copied,
rotated, etc.
Note:
Whichever type of influences is selected, the cross-section diagrams are always drawn
normally to the plane of the plate/wall in 3D View window. This means that the plane in
which the section diagrams are presented do not always correspond to the plane in which the
given influences act.
8.5.3
Influences in Slabs for user defined LCS

Using this command enables you to define the slab local coordinate system in
relation to the influences which are to be viewed. Once you select the command
Influences in Slabs for user defined LCS which is located in the drop-down
menu Influences, the procedure of selecting slabs is started.
<0 sel.> Defining LCS for Slabs Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End> / Layout):
553
The program draws, simultaneously for each slab, the symbol which indicates the current
orientation of its local coordinate system.
In each slab, its LCS symbol is displayed by selecting

the command Influences in Slabs for user defined LCS
You can select the influence which is going to be displayed in slab, at any moment of working
with this command, by selecting the sub-option Layout. Once you have activated this
command, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for selecting slab influences - the layout

Selecting influences is performed in part of the dialog box Results Type, by turning on the
proper switch. These are available:
M1 M2 M12 V3,1 -
Bending moment in the direction of local axis 1

Bending moment in the direction of local axis 2
Torsional moment
Shear force in the direction of local axis 3 (works in the plane which is defined by the
position of local axes 3 and 1
V3,2 - Shear force in the direction of local axis 3 (works in the plane which is defined by the
position of local axes 3 and 2
N1 Axial force in the direction of local axis 1
N2 Axial force in the direction of local axis 2
N12 - Shear force in the slab plane
554
Using the check box Show symbol for LCS enables you to determine whether to draw the
symbols which display slab LCS orientation.
Other parameters have the same meaning as in the standard command for displaying slab
influences, which is why they will not be described here again.
display the selected influence.
Bending moment M1 in slab LCS has been displayed

Once you have selected the slabs whose LCS orientation is changed, the command bar will
obtain a new layout:
First point of axis 1 (Angle / Radial):
Now it is necessary that you either asssign the first point of the vector which will define the
new direction of the local axis 1 or select one of the options that are offered. Once you have
selected the first point, you must also assign the second point for axis 1 vector, by which its
orientation will be completely defined.
Second point of axis 1:
The LCS local axis 2 will have the direction which makes the angle of 90 with the local axis 1
direction.
Using the sub-option Angle enables you to define the local axis 1 direction by entering from
the keyboard the angle which the axis will create with the horizontal line in the current view
plane.
Angle <0>:
Using the sub-option Radial enables you to assign radial LCS to the selected slabs by
selecting the center point.
Center for radial LCS:
Regardless of which of the previously described ways you have used to define the selected
slabs LCS, the program will display the selected influences in relation to it.
555
The LCS of the upper slab has been changed in such a way that local axis 1
direction overlaps with the direction of the slab longer side. In this way,
the same influences have been obtained as in the lower slab.
Finally it should be noted that, using this command, influences for envelope load cases cannot
be displayed.
8.5.4
Relative deflection in slabs

After selecting the command Relative deflection in slabs, which is located in
the drop-down menu Influences, the isoline of deflection in slabs will be
displayed:
Isolines of the total deflection in slab without assigned reference points

At the same time, the following message appears on the command bar:
Referent points for relative deflection of slabs First Point (Layout / <End> ):
After selecting the sub-option Layout from the command bar, a dialog box of the following
556
The dialog box Relative deflection in slabs - the layout

In addition to the parameters for assigning the number of divisions and selecting the type of
isoline with which deflections will be viewed, this dialog box also contains a check box Show
referent points. The state of this check box defines whether the symbols of reference points
will be viewed in the drawing.
Now you are enabled to assign the first reference point for calculating the relative deflection in
slab. Reference points represent immovable points on the structure, which are most frequently
points on columns and walls. The user is allowed to select as reference points any points (from
the current 2D view) which are located in finite element mesh nodes, using the OSNAP
criterion. The assigned points refer to calculating the relative deflection in all slabs of the
current 2D view. Once the first reference point has been assigned, the command bar will
Referent points for relative deflection of slabs Second Point (Layout / <End> ):
At this moment, you may exit the command either by activating the right mouse key or by
selecting the sub-option End from the command bar. Then the relative deflection will be
displayed in the slab, calculated in relation to the assigned first reference point. Deflection in it
will be zero, and deflections in all other points in slab will be reduced for the deformation which
existed at the place of the reference point before it has been declared immovable.
The layout of the relative deflection wr in slabs,

after placing the reference point
557
Since the program allows assigning three reference points maximum, this command can be
continued by entering the second point, soon after which the command bar will obtain a new
layout:
Referent points for relative deflection of slabs Third Point (Layout / <End> ):
Even after entering the second reference point, you may have to end the command or assign a
third point, soon after which the command will automatically end. Since these three points
define the plane, it is obvious that they cannot all be located on one axis, which is why the
program will disable entering a third point which is collinear with the other two.
The layout of the relative deflection wr in slabs,

after placing three reference points
In order to enable much fuller understanding of the relative deflection term, we will illustrate
the results on a simple example of one thin slab supported by two columns. The slab is loaded
with dead weight and two concentrated forces in columns P1 and P2.
P2
P1
B
C1
C2
T1
X
T2
Let us assume that the total deflection in the slab has been marked with A and that it
represents an actual deformation, when columns as well become deformed. If we want to
diregard the undercuting of columns (C1 and C2), we need to place the reference points in
places of these columns (points T1 and T2), and thus they will be declared immovable points.
The relative deflection in these reference points will obviously be zero. In all other reference
points, relative deflection will be obtained, on the basis of reference points (C1 and C2)
moving, by creating a plane which will contain the axis going through points T1 and T2. The
formula for calculating the relative deflection in the slab middle is:
558
X= A B
X
the relative deflection in the slab has been obtained after placing referent
points in places of the columns, thus their deformation has been disregarded
total deformation of the slab before placing reference points
part of the deformation in the plane containing a straight line which goes
through the reference points of columns T1 and T2
C1 and C2 deformation of columns

Analogous to the deflection which is calculated in the slab middle, deflections in all other points
of the slab are also obtianed.
After selecting again the command Relative deflection in slabs, if previously all reference
points have been assigned, the command bar obtains a new layout:
Referent points for relative deflection of slabs First Point (Layout / Delete / <End> ):
After selecting the sub-option Delete from the command bar, all previously assigned
reference points are removed, soon after which the actual deflection of the slabs are displayed
again.
Finally, it is worth mentioning that, relative deflection in slabs cannot be displayed for envelope
load cases.
8.5.5
Additional marking influences in surface entities

Using the command Additional marking influences in surface entities,
which is located in the drop-down menu Values, will result in starting the
procedure of assigning additional points in which influences in surface entities will
be marked:
Placement of additional mark (Delete / <End>)

For additional marks, the user is allowed to select any points of the surface entity from the
current 2D view which are located in the finite element mesh nodes. After assigning all
additional points in which it is necessary to carry out marking, it is possible to exit the
command either by right-clicking or activating the sub-option End from the command bar. If
upon this you decide to call the command for displaying influences in surface entities,
additional marking influences will be carried out in all selected points, from which it follows
that in addition to the extreme values of influences all additional marks will be displayed too.
The program will display each point which has been selected for additional marking influences
using the same symbol which is used for marking local extremes in surface entities.
559
Influences in slabs are additionally marked

in all assigned points
It should be noted that it is also possible to display first influences in surface entities and only
then activate the command Additional marking influences in surface entities and select points
for additional marking.
Activating the sub-option Delete from the command bar will result in starting the procedure
of selecting additional marks which the user wishes to delete, upon which the command bar
will obtain the following layout:
<0 sel.> Deletion of additional marks Select (All / Window / Polygon / <End>):
Upon activating the sub-option End either from the command bar or by right-clicking, all
selected additional marks will be deleted from the screen, and the program will return to the
main dialog box of this command.
8.6
Influences in Beams
By selecting command Beam, diagrams of section forces in beams can be
obtained. It is clear that it will not be possible to select this command for models
that do not contain any beams.
After selecting the command, the program will immediately display in the 2D view window
the results of the analysis in beam elements for the current load case. To enable selecting, a
small square will appear on the pointer.
560

used for fast selection of influences. The Disp. option which allows displaying the beginning
and ending numbering of all beams in the model is the first in the box.
Numbering the beams by corresponding numbers of nodes

from the finite element mesh (disposition of beams)
Now you have two possibilities: either to require simultaneous view of several diagrams for the
selected beam (individual diagrams), or to require the diagrams of selected influences to be
presented for all beams (diagrams for all beams).
8.6.1
Individual Diagrams
The start and the end of each of the presented beams are numbered to identify the
beams and the individual diagrams that correspond to them in the drawing. Namely, each of
the presented individual diagrams also has a data on the start and the end node of the beam
for which it is drawn. This numbering is very convenient in forming the graphical design
documentation, since it enables to know exactly which drawn diagrams correspond to which
beams. When the disposition of beams with marked nodes at their ends is added to the design
documentation, their position is exactly determined in the model. Creating the design
documentation will be described in more detail in Chapter 8.21.
561
After activating the command Beam, the program writes a message on the command bar,
that one or more beams, for which presentation of individual diagrams is required, are
expected to be selected.
<0 sel.> Select Beam Select (Layout / Hide results / Section / <End>):
It is possible to select several beams only in case when they are interconnected. This means
that after selecting the first beam, the next beam that you can select must be connected it. In
addition to selecting individually the beams one by one, after selecting the first beam, suboption Co-linear will appear on the command bar. When this command is selected, all
beams that are collinear with the beam first selected will be automatically selected.
When you have selected all beams for which you desire the diagrams to be presented, you
need to denote the end of the selecting procedure by a click on the right mouse button, and
soon after, on the condition that the beams have been correctly selected, a dialog box with the
following appearance will appear in the screen.
The designation of the beams selected for individual presentation

of the diagrams are written in the top of the dialog box
When command field Set is selected, the dialog box for selecting the influences for which the
diagrams are to be drawn opens.
562
Appearance of a dialog box for selecting the influences for which

individual diagrams need to be presented simultaneously
By setting the corresponding check boxes, in the left part of the dialog box, to switched-on
state, diagrams that are to be presented at the same time in the dialog box are selected.
You can require the diagrams for the following influences to be drawn:
Section forces:
N1 V2 V3 M1 M2 M3 -
normal force in direction of local axis 1 of the beam

shearing force in direction of local axis 2 of the beam
shearing force in direction of local axis 3 of the beam
torsional moments about local axis 1 of the beam
bending moments about local axis 2 of the beam
bending moments about local axis 3 of the beam
Deformations:
u1 u2 u3 r1 r2 r3 Xd Yd Zd Xr Yr Zr -
displacement in direction of local axis 1 of the beam

rotation about local axis 1 of the beam
displacement in direction of global X-axis
displacement in direction of global Y-axis
displacement in direction of global Z-axis
rotation about global X-axis
rotation about global Y-axis
rotation about global Z-axis
Stresses:
,max - Maximal normal stress in a cross-section. The stress is calculated in all points in the
cross section and the largest obtained value is adopted as the result.
,min - Minimal normal stress in a cross-section. The stress is calculated in all points in the
cross section and the least obtained value is adopted as the result.
,0 Stress due to normal force in a cross-section. Since some seismic regulations limit
maximal axial stressing in seismic columns due to vertical loading, this data may be
useful.
,2 Shearing stress in direction of local axis 2
,3 Shearing stress in direction of local axis 3
563
,23 -
Average square value of shearing stresses
The following expressions are used in calculating the stresses:

,max/min = N1/A1 M2/W2 M3/W3
,0 = N1/A1
,2 = T2/A2
,3 = T3/A3
,23 = (,22 + ,32)1/2
According to the adopted convention, the section forces are positive if their vectors act in the
direction of positive senses of local coordinate axes of each of the beams, while the
deformations are positive if their displacement vectors and rotations act in the direction of
positive senses of local/global coordinate axes.
If the presentation of envelopes of extreme values was required by command Load Case
instead of current load case, than it will also be possible to select in this influence box the
influence for which the envelopes need to be constructed. This means that for the selected
influence in part Envelope, envelopes of extreme values will be constructed, while the
diagrams of corresponding values will be constructed for other influences. The same also
applies to the load case within which moving load is defined.
Since an arbitrary number of diagrams can be selected to be simultaneously presented, their
mutual position is determined by check box Automatic. If this check box is set to switchedon state, the diagrams will be arranged by the program, so that the space within the window
for viewing individual diagrams is occupied in an optimal way. However, in case you desire to
print these diagrams, such arrangement of diagrams determined by the program may not
always be suitable to you. In those cases, set the switch Automatic to switched-off state,
after which the edit box Number of Columns will be available for entering the data. As an
input data, you need to assign the number of rows in which the selected diagrams will be
presented in the dialog box. This means, that if you have selected five diagrams for example,
and you want them to be placed in one column, then you need to assign the number 5 as the
number of rows.
After activating the command field OK, all selected diagrams will simultaneously appear in
the screen.
564
Extreme values are marked and dimensioned and the type

of influences are denoted in all diagrams
Vertical position, instead of horizontal orientation, of the diagrams can be required by setting
the check box Vertical to switched-on state.
Vertical orientation of individual diagrams

This way of presenting is appropriate when columns are selected for presenting the individual
diagrams.
By check box Opposite, you can change the sense of diagram drawing, i.e. the sequence of
the beginning and the end of selected beams.
565
Changed sequence of beginning and end of selected beams

It might happen that the displayed diagrams are not clear enough to be printed. For example,
in case when the written numerical data of neighboring diagrams are overalpping, or in case
when influences in long beams are displayed, and everything looks rather crowded. In order to
prevent such occurrences, it is possible to customize the spacing between diagrams, together
with the diagrams size.
To enable any sort of customization, it is necessary that you place the focus by clicking on the
area envisaged for displaying the diagram. After this, a short description of possible
occurrences is displayed in the status bar which is placed along the bottom edge of the dialog
box.
566
Once you place the focus, a short description of possible

occurrences is displayed on the status bar
Customizing the spacing between diagrams is performed via arrows, from the keyborad:
- the arrow pointing up is used for increasing the vertical spacing between diagrams
- the arrow pointing down is used for decreasing the vertical spacing between diagrams
- the arrow pointing right is used for increasing the horizontal spacing between diagrams
- the arrow pointing left is used for decreasing the horizontal spacing between diagrams
Prior to customizing, there is numerical data

overlapping
Vertical spacing has been increased to avoid

numerical data overlapping
Customizing the diagram size is is performed from the keyborad, by pressing simultaneously
the Ctrl key and the appropriate arrow:
Ctrl+
- Vertical dimension of all diagrams is increased
Ctrl+
- Vertical dimension of all diagrams is decreased
567
Ctrl+ - Horizontal dimension of all diagrams is increased
Ctrl+ - Horizontal dimension of all diagrams is decreased
Diagrams before size adjusting
Horizontal dimension of all diagrams has been

increased
By pressing the Home key, all assigned changes are cancelled, and the diagrams spacing
and size are returned to the default state.
In case beams with composite cross-sections are selected, closed list for selecting individual
parts of composite cross-section, in the lower part of the dialog box, will also be available.
Closed list for selecting individual parts of composite cross-section

When one of the offered cross-sections in the list is selected, diagrams of influences belonging
to the selected part of the composite cross-section, instead of influences for the entire crosssection, appear in the screen.
568
Influence diagrams belonging to the desired section I 260,

within the defined composite cross-section
It should be mentioned that the bending moment diagram in individual sections will have sawtooth shape due to abrupt change of normal force in them. Abrupt change of forces appears in
places in which individual parts of composite section are connected and it depends on the
assigned parameter of division of beams which are not within plates (see Chapter 4.6). The
reason for the abrupt change of normal forces is the eccentric position of individual parts of the
composite cross-section in reference to the assigned system axis of the beam.
Printing the individual diagrams for selected beams is enabled by command fields in the lower
right corner of the dialog box.
Command fields for printing the individual diagrams
569
The method of creating the design documentation will be described in more detail in Chapter
8.21.
By activating the command field OK, the dialog box for presenting the individual diagrams
will be closed, and the disposition of the beams will be presented again in the screen. The
program will again expect you to either select some other beams for presenting their individual
diagrams, or to require from the program simultaneous presentation of diagrams for all beams
in the model.
8.6.2
Diagrams in all Beams
On the toolbar which is placed along the top edge of the screen, there is a combo
box which is used for fast selection of influences.

Appearance of the dialog box for selecting the diagrams in all beams
This dialog box is almost identical to the dialog box that opens by selecting the command field
Set within the dialog box for presenting the individual diagrams. The only difference is in that
now the switches in the left part of the dialog box do not operate as check boxes but instead
as radio buttons, i.e. simultaneous presentation of diagrams for only one influence can be
selected, instead of diagrams for several influences.
570
In addition to all previously described influences, switches N,av, M2D and V2D, having
the following meaning, also appear in this dialog box.
N,av -
By setting this switch to switched-on state, the program is required to write the
average value of normal force appearing in it in the middle of each beam, instead of
presenting the diagram of normal forces N1. Such way of presenting is very
convenient when the presentation of normal forces in trussed structures is desired.
M2D -
By setting this switch to switched-on state, the program is required to present the
diagram of bending moments in the plane of current 2D view. Namely, the bending
moments, calculated in reference to the local coordinate system of each of the beams
(M2 and M3), will be projected to the bending plane that corresponds to the current
V2D -
By setting this switch to switched-on state, the program is required to present the
diagram of shearing forces in the plane of current 2D view. Namely, the shearing
forces, calculated in reference to the local coordinate system of each of the beams (V2
and V3), will be projected to the bending plane that corresponds to the current view
When the desired influence is selected and the command field OK is activated, diagrams of
the selected influence will appear simultaneously on all beams.
Simultaneous presentation of M3 diagram on all beams

In case that the model consists of a large number of beams, the diagrams may be
overcrowded and thus unclear. By selecting the sub-option Hide results, that is present on
the command bar, you may require from the program not to present the results in some of the
beams. By selecting this sub-option, the standard procedure of selecting is entered (see
Chapter 2.8).
<0 sel.> Hide results Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
The program will immediately remove the diagrams from the selected beams, and it will
remain in the selecting procedure all until you return to the basic form of the command bar
within this command by a click on the right mouse button.
571
Only diagrams in foundation beams remained on the screen

by option of hiding the influences
It is clear that all previously hidden diagrams can be returned into the content of the drawing
by the procedure of deselecting. It should be mentioned that this option operates completely
independently from the option of hiding the structural elements (see Chapter 2.10.2).
Namely, the hidden structural elements will not be visible in the drawing at all, and therefore
the diagrams in them will not be drawn.
8.6.3
Diagrams in Cross-section
In addition to presenting individual diagrams, and the possibility of drawing the

diagrams in all beams, the program also enables the distribution of stresses in the plane of the
selected cross-section to be drawn. This procedure is entered by selecting the sub-option
Section, which is constantly present in the command bar. When this sub-option is selected,
the program first requires from the command bar a beam, the stress distribution in which you
desire to be presented, to be selected.
<0 sel.> Beam on which cross section is requested Select (<End>):
It should be mentioned that in the selecting procedure, only beams with defined cross-section
will be available. For beams defined as Any, selecting will be disabled.
After selecting the desired beam, the program will require from the command bar a point that
belongs to the previously selected beam, and that will determine the position of cross-section,
to be selected.
Point on the beam:
Selecting the point on the selected beam will result in opening of the dialog box, with
presented stress distribution in the given cross-section.
572
Dialog for box presenting the stress distribution

in a selected beam cross-section
In the central part of the dialog box, the program draws the diagram of stress distribution in
reference to the assigned section lines. In the cross-section drawing, the local axes of the
beam are denoted by black color, while the position of the cross-section, in reference to which
the stress diagram is being drawn, is denoted by red color. In default, the position of the
cross-section corresponds to the position of local axes. The position of the cross-section is
translated by assigning the desired value in one of the edit boxes: Use translated axis 3
and Use translated axis 2.
Translated position of the cross-section in reference

to local axis 3 is assigned
These two edit boxes operate as switches also, so if you click the mouse button over them,
you can delete one of the presented diagrams from the screen.
573
Only view of the diagram in reference to local axis 3 was required

When the mouse pointer points at the inside of the cross-section, the program writes the
information both on the current value of stress in that point, and on the distance between that
point and the local axes of the beam, in the bottom of the dialog box.
Information on the current distance between the mouse pointer

and the local axes and on the stress intensity in that point
Information on the distance between the mouse pointer and the local axes will be very useful
for determining the value that needs to be assigned in edit boxes for translation of the crosssection. In this way, without remembering the cross-section dimensions, you can easily select
the desired position of the section.
If the model consists of several construction stages, the program will draw the stress
distribution diagrams for all shapes of selected cross-sections in those stages.
574
Stress diagram in beam cross-section,

in all defined construction stages
In that case, check box All stages will also be available. When this check box is set to
switched-on state, you can require the stress distribution only for the assigned current
construction stage to be presented.
View of stress diagram only for the current construction stage

In case diagrams for all defined construction stages are simultaneously presented, edit box
Number of Columns, which regulates the method of arranging the cross-sections in the
dialog box, will also be available. This data has exactly the same sense as in presenting the
diagrams in beams individually (see Chapter 8.6.1).
Printing of the stress distribution in cross-section is enabled by command fields in the bottom
right corner of the dialog box.
575
Command fields for printing the diagrams in selected cross-section

The method of creating the design documentation will be described in more detail in Chapter
8.21.
8.6.4
Presenting the Influences in Beams by Isolines

(Legend)
If after completion of command Beam, the beam cross-section diagrams remain

in the screen, command Legend will also be available. When this command is activated, the
following message appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Beam Legend - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Recent selection / Deselect /<End>):
The User is now expected to select all beams, which he wants to be presented by isolines.
After selecting the first beam, a new sub-option Legend will be added to the command bar.
<1 sel.> Beam Legend Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Recent selection / Deselect / End / <Legend>):
When you have finished the selecting procedure, right-click to denote selecting the command
Legend, and a dialog box with the following appearance will open.
576

the values of isolines in beam structural
This dialog box almost exactly corresponds to the dialog box for editing the isolines in surface
elements of the structure. In the top right corner of the dialog box the program writes the
extreme values of the given influences in all selected beams (first and last values in the list).
The only difference is in that the part Envelope is added, which will be active only in case
that the envelope is set as the current case, or when moving load is assigned within the
current load case. Since envelopes both for maximal positive and for maximal negative
influences cannot be presented by isolines in a drawing simultaneously, selecting one of the
switches: Max + and Max , defines for what values will the isolines be drawn.
Command field Set is also added in this dialog box. When it is activated, a dialog box for
selecting the influences in beams opens.
Appearance of a dialog box for selecting the influences

for which isolines need to be set in beams
After selecting the desired influence, and activating the command field OK, the program will
establish a list of possible values of the selected influence for all previously selected beams, in
the basic dialog box.
577
List of possible values of isolines for newly

established influence N1
After selecting the desired influence, and adjusting the number of divisions and the values of
isolines, by activating command field OK, this dialog box will be closed, while in the drawing
all previously selected beams will be coloured in corresponding colours, where each of the
colours set will determine the interval of the selected influence.
Isolines are established only in the previously selected roof beams

A table indicating the range of values of established colours of isolines is always placed in the
top right corner of the 2D View window.
The program will still be in the procedure of selecting new beams, while all previously selected
beams remain selected. This means that if you wish to select a new group of beams, you first
have to deselect the previously selected beams. This method of processing the results in
beams will be available all until you select sub-option End from the command bar. When this
command is selected, coloured beams will be replaced by diagrams that were presented in the
screen immediately before activating the command Legend.
578
This method of processing the results in beams has multiple use, and it is most commonly
used for detecting the extreme values of certain influences in the whole model. When the
possibility of grouping the familiar structural elements into wholes (see Chapter 2.10.2), and
when all those beam elements are selected, this command becomes especially efficient. The
information on the position of the bending moments that exceed some assigned value in all
floor beams in the model for example, the position of extreme normal compression forces in all
columns, position of compresses and tensioned bars in trussed structures, etc. can be easily
obtained.
All columns in the model in which normal force exceeding 50 kN
8.6.5
Additional marking influences in linear entities

Using the command Additional marking influences in linear entities, which
is located in the drop-down menu Values, will result in starting the procedure of
selecting linear entities in which diagrams of influences will be additionally
marked.
<0 sel.> Linear entity for additional marking Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section /
eXtras / selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End>):
The user is now expected to select first all linear entities whose influences he wishes to mark
additionally and then all points in which he wants to carry out marking, upon which the
command bar will obtain the following layout:
Placement of additional mark (Delete all / Uniformly / <End>):
For additional points, it is possible to choose any points belonging to the selected entities. If
you need to mark diagrams in points which are located at a certain distance from one another,
you should choose the sub-option Uniformly from the command bar, upon which the
command bar will get a new layout.
Distance <1>:
The user is now expected to assign distances at which additional marks will be located. The
distance will be expressed in meters and its current value will be written in square brackets.
After assigning all additional points in which the user wants to mark influences, it is possible to
exit the command either by right-clicking or activating the sub-option End from the
579
command bar. If upon this you decide to call the command for viewing influences in linear
entities, the diagrams of influences will be additionally marked in all assigned points.
Diagrams of influences in beams without

assigning additional marks
Diagrams of influences in beams with

uniformly assigned additional marks
It should be noted that it is also possible to enter additional marks first by displaying
influences in one of the linear entities and then by activating the command Additional marking
influences in linear entities and by further selecting the desired points for marking.
If you select the sub-option Delete all, all previously assigned additional marks will be
removed from the selected linear entities.
8.6.6
Relative beam deflection
The program allows displaying relative deflection of beams by selecting reference

points that user assigns himself, and which present indivertible points of the beam. That way
the total actual deflection of the beam before assignment of reference points, will be reduced
for that part of deformation in the plane which contains the line routed through the reference
points.
Absolute deflection of the beam
Relative deflection of the beam
By selecting the command "Relative beam deflection" which is located under

the menu "Actions", the command line gets the following form:
Relative beam deflection - Selecting (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End> / Set):
User is expected to select all beams for which he wants to display relative deflection, and then
the command line gets a new format:
Reference points for relative deflection of beams - First Point (<End>):
580
Now you have the option to assign the first reference point for the calculation of relative
deflection of beams. Reference points represent the indivertible points on the construction, and
they are usually points located on pillars or walls. User can select any point in current 2D view
as a reference point, if it is located in a node of the finite element net, using OSNAP criteria.
Selected points are related to the calculation of relative deflection in all selected beams. After
selection of the first reference point, the command line gets a new look:
Reference points for relative deflection of beams Second Point (<End>):
At this moment, the command can be finished by activating the right mouse button or by
selecting the sub-option "End" from the command line. Then all beams will display relative
deflection calculated in relation to the first given reference point. Its deflection will be zero,
and deflection in all other beams will be reduced by deformation that existed in the area of the
reference point before we declared it as indivertible.
Since the program allows assignment of maximum three reference points, you can continue
entering the second points, and then the command line gets a new look:
Reference points for relative deflection of beams Third point (Display / <End>):
After entering another reference point, the command can either be finished or the third point
should be set now, and after that, a diagram of relative deflection of the beam will be
displayed on the drawing. Since these three points define a plane, it is clear that they cannot
be placed on one axis, so program disables entry of the third point that is collinear with the
first two. Also, assignment of a vertical plane it is not allowed.
Relative deflection in beams after assigning two reference points

After selecting sub-option "Set" from the command line, a dialog will open:
581
Dialog "Relative deflection - Colours"

Since the command doesnt select only one beam but more of them, which are then all
assigned indivertible points for calculation of relative deflection, they all belong to one group of
beams. Each group has its own color, which will be used for displaying reference points on a
drawing. Dialog table displays all defined groups of beams and their colors.
N
The column with ordinal numbers of beam groups. Status of the check box in
the last column specifies whether relative deflection of beams will be
displayed for that group or not. If the check box is turned on, the relative
deflection is displayed on the drawing.
Display
This column is used for selecting color for each group of beams. This is the
color in which reference points of that group will be painted on the drawing.
The program generates colors trying to make them as diverse as possible for
each group, but user can manually select color for each group himself.
Clicking the mouse over the arrow on the right of the "color box"
opens a dialog for color selection
Paper
This column is used for selecting color for each group of beams. This is the
color in which reference points of that group will be printed in report. The
program generates colors assigning each group a different shade of gray. It is
also made possible to select color of your choice for each group.
582
Generate colors
This button enables you to specify the basic color for a palate that will be
generated. You first need to select the appropriate column "Screen" or "Paper"
and by left mouse click select a cell in a given column, and then activate
"Generate colors".
Dialog for generating color palette

Undertone - Check box that assigns different shades of selected basic color to all groups of
a given column.
After pressing the "OK" button, the program will return to the basic dialog layout and all
groups will have newly generated colors in the appropriate column ("Display" or "Paper").
Paint girders, also
Since the drawing can
which reference point
turning this check box
This way the group of
the same color.
have many groups of beams, for better distinguishing

belongs to which group of beams, it is possible, by
on, to assign the color of reference points to a beam.
beams and their reference points will be displayed in
Delete
Button that removes selected groups of beams and their reference points from
the list.
Delete all Button that removes all groups of beams and their reference points from the
list.
After pressing the "OK" button, dialog will be closed and the program will display relative
deflection of beams in accordance with the set parameters.
8.7
Influences in Area Supports (soil)

In case of foundations on elastic base, you can obtain the information on soil
stress and support settlement by command Area Support. It is clear that this
command will be available to be activated only when area support is established in
the model.
used for fast selection of influences.
583


the influences in area supports
This dialog box is very similar to the previously described dialog box for selecting the
influences in plates and walls. The only difference is in the type of influences for which the
results need to be presented by isolines. In area supports, the following influences are
available:
,soil
s,soil
R1 R2 -
Soil stress (reactions in direction of local axis 3 of the area support)

Settlement of soil (displacement in direction of local axis 3 of the area support)
reactions in direction of local axis 1 of the area support
reactions in direction of local axis 2 of the area support
The convention on local coordinate system of area supports is exactly the same as in plates
and walls, so everything previously presented applies here also. In accordance with the
adopted convention, the stress in soil has a positive value if it represents compression
(reaction acts in the direction of positive local axis 3). The settlement is also positive if it acts
in the direction of positive local axis 3.
584
The meaning of all other parameters offered in this dialog box is exactly the same is in
command for selecting the influences in plates/walls.
Displaying settlement of soil via full isolines

Surely, the isolines will be presented only when an area support is presented in 2D View.
Therefore, after activating this command, you need to set an assembly, which contains an area
support, as the current view 2D View window.
The method in which commands Section and Legend, which enable clearer presentation
of the influences in area structural elements, function is exactly the same as when isolines for
influences in plates/walls are presented in the screen.
8.7.1
Reaction resultant of surface support

In practice there is often a need to display surface support reaction in
dimensioning of single foundations, so by selecting the command "Reaction
resultant of surface support" which is located in the drop-down menu
"Impact", you can display the location and intensity of the surface support
reaction.
After activating the command, the program immediately displays the resultant of surface
supports for the current load case in the "2D view":
585
Resultant of surface supports displayed in "2D view"

At the same time, on the command line, the following message appears:
Reaction resultant of surface support (Layout / Defining the placement / <End>):
Selection of sub-option "Layout" from the command line opens the following dialog:
Layout of the dialog for selection

of the reaction that will be displayed
By using switches that are located in the dialog you can select the reaction of surface supports
that will be shown in the drawing. These switches operate as a checkboxes so they can be
turned on and off independently. They have the following meaning:
R1 - surface support reaction in the direction of its local axis
M1 - entrapment moment of the surface support for rotation
"1"
"2"
"3"
around its local axis "1"
According to adopted convention, the surface supports reactions are positive if their vectors act
in the positive directions of local axes of surface supports.
586
After selecting the type of reaction and activating the "OK" button, resultant of surface
supports will be displayed.
If using the command "Load case" user demanded displaying envelopes of the extreme
leverage instead of the current load case, then two reactions will be displayed, where one will
correspond to the maximally positive, and the other to the maximally negative value. The
same applies to the load case within which the moving load is assigned.
Check box for selecting the way of displaying

surface support reactions for envelope load-cases
Max/min
Check box is available only for the envelope load-cases. If it is turned on,
extreme values of all selected reactions will be displayed at the same time. If
it is turned off, in the part "Envelope" extreme values will be displayed for the
selected reaction, while for all others, reactions that do not correspond to
these extremes will be displayed.
Shrunk view Turning this check box on enables you to display surface supports reactions by
graphic symbols, but without the mark of an impact.
Display of reactions with marks
Display of reactions without marks
Without arrows
Turning this check box on activates maximally compact display of surface
supports reaction - without rendering graphical symbols.
587
Surface support reactions without symbols

Without a position symbol
Check box that determines whether the symbol of the position of support
surface resultant will be displayed in the drawing.
The program according to the "default" presents the resultant of the surface load in its center
of gravity, but the user has the option to select the point compared to which the resultant will
be reduced. Selecting box "Defining the placement" on the command line, a new message
will appear:
<0 sel.> Area support - Select (<End>):
Now user is required to select to which surface support he wants to change the position of the
resultant, and then the command line gets a new look:
Resultant position (Centroid / <Back>):
User can select any point from the current 2D view as position of the resultant, which is
located in the node of the finite element net, using OSNAP criteria. With right-clicking after
selecting the point, the program will display the resultant of surface support in a given point.
If you want to place the resultant in the focus, you need to select the sub-option Centroid
on the command line.
588
8.8
Influences in Linear Supports

By selecting the command Linear Support, the distribution of influences along
linear supports is analysed.
The command operates exactly the same as the command described in Chapter 8.6, used to
analyse the influences in beams. The only difference is in the type of influences for which the
results can be presented. When cub-option Layout is selected from the command bar, a
dialog box with the following appearance opens.

for selecting the influences
in linear supports
The diagrams of the following influences are drawn in linear supports:
r1 r2 r3 m1 ,soil s,soil -
Support reaction in direction of local axis 1 of the linear support

Fixed-end moment about local axis 1 of the linear support
Stress in soil for case of foundations on elastic base
Settlement of soil for case of foundations on elastic base (displacement in direction
of local axis 2 of the linear support).
For linear supports, to which data on belonging width of foundation band has been joined to
their set of numerical data, (switch soil is set to switched-on state) the presented value of
stress in soil will represent the coefficient of the reaction R2 and the assigned belonging band
width b=.
,soil = r2/b
According to the adopted convention, the reactions are positive if their vectors act in direction
of positive senses of local axes of linear supports.
It should be mentioned that the influences for constructing the envelopes cannot be selected in
this dialog box, but in case that an envelope is established for the current case, the selected
type of influence will also represent the envelope of its influences at the same time. This
means that, in contrast to beams, the corresponding influence diagrams cannot be obtained for
arbitrarily selected influence of the envelope. The same also applies when moving load is
assigned within the current load case.
589
The method of presenting the influences in linear supports exactly corresponds to the
previously described procedure for beams, so that both individual and simultaneous diagrams
of selected influences can be obtained in linear supports.
Diagrams for selected linear supports presented individually
Diagram ,soil presented simultaneously on all linear supports

Moreover, the option of presenting influences by isolines (command Legend) is also available
for linear supports. In this way, the information on positions in which the stresses exceed the
assigned value, the positions of largest settlement, etc. can easily be obtained in linear
supports also.
590
All positions in linear supports in which the stress in soil exceeds

30 kN/m2 are marked by the program
8.9
Support Reactions
When command Reactions is selected, corresponding reactions will be written
next to all point and linear supports in the drawing.
Presentation of support reactions in the screen

By selecting the sub-option Layout, which is present on the command bar, a dialog box with
as the following one appears in the screen.
591
Appearance of the dialog box for selecting the reactions

that are to be presented in the screen
The reactions, which will be presented in the drawing next to corresponding point and linear
supports, are selected by switches in the dialog box. These switches also operate as check
boxes, i.e. several switches can be set to switched-on state at the same time, and they have
the following meaning:
R1 R2 R3 M1 M2 M3 r1 r2 r3 m1 -
point support reaction in direction of its local axis 1

fixed-end moment of point support for rotation about its local axis 1
average distributed reaction of linear support in direction of its local axis 1
average distributed moment of linear support for rotation about its local axis 1
According to the adopted convention, the reactions of point and linear supports are positive if
their vectors act in direction of positive senses of local coordinate axes of point/linear supports.
After selecting the types of reactions and activating the command field OK, all selected types
of reactions next to all point and linear supports will appear in the screen.
If the presentation of envelopes of extreme values was required by command Load Case
instead of current load case, then two by two reactions will be presented in the drawing, where
one will correspond to maximal positive and the other to the maximal negative value. The
same also applies to the load case within which moving load is defined.
592
The check box for selecting the way of viewing

reactions for envelope load cases
When this check box is on, two values are displayed for each reaction in the drawing, where
one reaction corrresponds to the maximum value of a given reaction and the other to the
minimum value of a given reaction.
Point support reactions have been displayed when

the check box Max/min has been turned on
When the check box Max/min is off, the radio buttons which are located in the continuation
of the dialog box Envelope become available for editing too. These radio buttons are used for
selecting the reaction for which the envelope is being viewed. In other words, extreme values
will be displayed for the selected reaction, whereas for other reactions the values which
correspond to these extremes will be displayed.
593
Reactions extreme values have been

displayed
Reactions of the selected influence R3 have

been displayed
When the check box Shrunk view is on, you are allowed to display the support reactions
without symbols. In this way, you make the drawing less crowded and you also increase its
visibility.
Reactions with symbols have been displayed
Reactions without symbols have been

displayed
The direction of the symbol of reactions which are located in the current view plane clearly
indicate which reactions are in question, whereas, for those reactions which are not located in
the current view plane, the symbol is contained in parentheses after the displayed value.
Turning on the check box Without arrows will lead to obtaining an extremely compact view
of point supports reactions, without the need to draw any graphic symbols. As a result,
reactions values are now written with a symbol, and the minus sign (-) indicates that the
direction of a given reaction is opposite to the direction of the corresponding point support
local axis.
Reactions without symbols have been displayed
594
8.10
Influences in Secondary Elements
Command Indirect Elements Results serves for simultaneous presentation of

influences in structural element that do not belong to current view plane in 2D View window,
but instead they penetrate it. This means that the secondary elements are beams, plates and
walls that penetrate the current view plane in 2D View window.
This method of presenting is especially convenient when a level is set as the current view in
the 2D View level. Then, the arrangement of normal forces due to vertical load in all columns
and walls, or arrangement of moments in columns and walls if the seismic load case is
concerned, can be seen in one drawing at the same time. In any case, this command has
multiple applications. When it is selected, the command bar obtains the following form.
Indirect elements results (Layout / <End>):
Since calculating these influences for the entire model may take some time, they are
presented only after sub-option Layout is selected from the command bar. This means, that
the part of the structure containing the secondary elements, the influences in which you are
interested in, first needs to be set as the current view in the 2D View window, and only then
sub-option Layout should be activated. When sub-option set is selected, a dialog box with
the following appearance opens.

the influences in secondary elements
The dialog box contains parameters used for selecting the influence which will be viewed in
indirect elements. The following influences are available:
Influences in indirect beam elements (Columns/Beams)
N
Vx
Vy
Mt
Mx
My
- influences in indirect beams in the direction which is perpendicular to the current 2D

view plane
- influences in indirect beams in the direction of the local axis x of the current 2D view
- influences in indirect beams in the direction of the local axis y of the current 2D view
- torsional moment in the direction which is perpendicular to the current 2D view plane
- torsional moment around the local axis x of the current 2D view
- torsional moment around the local axis y of the current 2D view
595
Influences in indirect slab elements (Walls/Slabs)
M
T
- Bending moment in the plane of the wall/slab, in the position of intersection with the
current view plane in 2D View window (the moment vector is normal to the plane of
the wall).
- Shearing force in the plane of the wall/ slab, in the position of intersection with the
current view plane in 2D View window. The direction of the shearing force action is
determined by the line along which the plate/wall intersects with the current view
- Normal force in the plane of the wall/ slab, in the position of intersection with the
current view plane in 2D View window The force vector belongs to the plane of the
wall and it is normal to line along which the plate/wall intersects with the current view
Influences in indirect proxy entities

N
Vx
Vy
Mt
Mx
My
- influences in indirect proxy entities in the direction which is perpendicular to the

current 2D view plane
- influences in indirect proxy entities in the direction of the local axis x of the current
2D view plane
- influences in indirect proxy entities in the direction of the local axis y of the current
2D view plane
- torsional moment in the direction which is perpendicular to the current 2D view plane
- bending moment around the local axis x of the current 2D view
- bending moment around the local axis y of the current 2D view
Check boxes located on the left side of names of the indirect elements ("Columns/Beams",
"Walls/Slabs", "Proxy entities") are used to turn on or off the display of the whole group of
impacts of the given entity. Changing the state of these check boxes maintains the state of
check boxes of individual impacts. For example, if in the moment of the turning on check box
"Columns/Beams" that group had shown effects N and Vx, they will be displayed again when
this check box is turned back on.
Regardless of the fact what is currently being displayed in the 2D View window (level, frame
etc.), the local axis x of the view is always horizontal and the local axis y is always vertical.
Local axes in the 2D View window
596
Shrunk view
Turning this check box on, you can display impact on indirect elements by
drawing the graphic symbols, but without the impact mark. Direction of
reactions symbol that are in the plane of the current view clearly indicates
what reaction operates, while, for the reactions that are not in the current
view plane, a mark is written in the brackets, behind displayed values.
Short overview - turned off
Short overview - turned on
Without arrows
Turning this check box on, a maximally compact display of impacts on indirect
elements will be activated, without drawing the graphical symbols.
Impact on indirect elements without symbols

Since the influences in secondary beam elements usually have an abrupt change in the
position where they intersect the current view plane in 2D View window, the position in which
the influences selected to be presented act is determined by the following group of switches.
Above/Afore -
The program will present the selected influences in secondary beam

elements immediately above/in front of the current view plane in 2D View
window. A typical example is, if the view of normal forces in columns due
to vertical loading, immediately above the plane to which the set current
level in 2D View window belongs, is desired. This means, without the load
acting in the plane of current level.
Below/Behind - The program will present the selected influences in secondary beam
elements immediately below/behind the current view plane in 2D View
window. A typical example is, if the view of normal forces in columns due
to vertical loading, immediately below the plane to which the set current
597
level in 2D View window belongs, is desired. This means, including the
load acting in the plane of current level.
Difference -
The program will present the difference of selected influences in secondary

beam elements immediately above (in front), and immediately below
(behind) of the current view plane in 2D View window. A typical example
is, if the view of normal forces in columns due to vertical loading, acting
exactly in the plane of current level, is desired.
When command field OK is activated, the dialog box will close, and the values of selected
influences will be written next to all currently visible secondary elements.
The view of normal forces in all columns and walls

was required at the level of the foundation plate
The influences presented by the program in secondary walls and plates correspond exactly to
the values which would be obtained by command Section. As an example, let us take the
influences in the right end wall due to seismic action in X direction, in the position where it
intersects the foundation plate.
Influences in a wall, in the position where it is fixed to the foundation

plate, obtained by command Indirect Elements Results
598
The same values of influences would be obtained by command Section, by drawing a crosssection in the given wall, in the line of contact with the foundation plate. For the type of
influences, Nn needs to be selected, while the sub-option Moment Resistance should be
selected from the command bar.
Influences in a wall, in the position where it is fixed to the foundation

plate, obtained by command Section
It should be mentioned that by drawing the same cross-section, the influence Nns should be
selected for obtaining the shearing force in the position where the wall is fixed to the
foundation.
Significant advantage of command Secondary Elements Results is in that influences in all
structural elements that penetrate the given view plane can be obtained simultaneously in one
drawing.
When writing the influences in secondary elements, the current state of their visibility is taken
into account by the program. Namely, if the visibility of secondary beam elements is deleted
by command Visibility (check box Beam, within part Section Symbols, is set to
switched-off state), then the influences for indirect beam elements will not be written. The
same also applies to plates and walls, and to command Hiding, used to delete the visibility
selectively only to a certain group of elements.
Note:
Influences in indirect surface elements for multi-mode seismic load cases are now analyzed by
combining statistically influences of all tones (CQC scheme).
8.11
Proxy entity
Proxy entity is a linear entity which is used for reducing the influences in several
parallel structural elements into one axis in order to enable their further mutual viewing and
analysing. The elements whose influences are reduced can be both area (slabs/walls) and
linear (beams/columns).
The commands for creating proxy entities and viewing influences in proxy entities are located
in the Post-Processing module, within the drop-down menu Influences.
599
8.11.1 Creating the proxy entity

Activating the command Proxy entity will result in starting the procedure of
selecting slabs and beams which are going to be added to the proxy.
<0 sel.> Proxy entity Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
It should be noted that, in the 2D View window, besides slabs and beams which are
currrently located in it, it is also possible to select slabs and beams which penetrate the
current view plan, that is indirect elements too.
In course of selecting, make sure that the entities which are added to the proxy entity meet
certain geometric conditions. In other words, straight-lined beams must be parallel with proxy
entitywhereas arc beams must be located in planes which are parallel with the plane where
proxy entityis located. The only prerequisite for this is that their centers are located on the
same perpendicular line to the the plane (that is, their arcs must be concentric). As for slabs,
they must be planar and they also must be parallel with the plane where proxy entity is
located.
Once you have selected the desired entities, you must assign the proxy entity geometry by
drawing an arbitrary polyline.
First point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End> / Density):
This procedure is the same as drawing any polyline, which is why it will not be described here.
Since calculating influences in the proxy entity can be quite time-consuming (depending on the
density of finite element mesh), the user is allowed to influence the density of the proxy entity
digram via the sub-option Density. This way the user will also influence the duration of the
analysis. Once the sub-option Density has been selected, the program will request from the
command bar to enter density.
Density (<Default>):
The density is assigned in meters and its current value is written in square brackets. It is
obvious that duration of the analysis will be shorter if the value for density assigned by the
user is larger. If the sub-option Default is selected from the command bar, the density of
the proxy entity digram will be calculated on the basis of the density of finite element mesh.
<-> First point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End > /Density <1>):
When defining the geometry of the proxy entity has been completed, the program will check,
for each selected entity, whether it meets the previously mentioned geometric conditions.
Those entities that do not meet given geometric conditions are discarded from the selection,
which is followed by an appropirate warning message.
600
If the proxy entity can be created from all selected entities, once you have completed the
selection, the sub-options Centroid and Rigidity center will also appear on the command
bar.
First Point (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset / <End> / Density / Centroid / Rigidity
center):
These sub-options make sense only in case when al least some of the selected entities can be
viewed in cross section in the 2D View window. If this is the case, the program will specify
the centroid, that is, the stiffness center of all their sections together with the current plane,
and on the basis of the geometry of all selected entities, define the geometry of the proxy
entity so that it contains the specified point. In case that several proxy entities can be placed
through the specified point, the program will select the one which is perpendicular to the
current plane in the 2D View window.
If none of the selected entities can be viewed in cross section in the 2D View window, once
you have activated one of these sub-options, the program will issue an appropriate warning
message.
Regardless of the fact which way you have used to define the geometry of the proxy, upon the
completion of the command, it will be displayed in the drawing.
The proxy entity is displayed in the drawing

It should also be noted that, new entities can be added to the proxy, but also previously added
entities can be deselected using the command Modify Sets. This command also enables
changing the density of the proxy entity diagram.
601
8.11.2 Influences in the proxy entity

By activating the command Influences in the proxy entity, the program will
reduce all influences from the entities which have been added to the proxy entity
to the assigned axis. If the command has been started for the first time, the
diagram of the default influence (M3) will be displayed, whereas if the command
has already been started before, the diagram of the last selected influence will be
displayed.
The diagram of influence M3 has been displayed

in the proxy entity
At the same time, the following message appears on the command bar:
Influences (Layout / <End>)
Once you have activated the sub-option Layout, a dialog box of the following layout will
open up:
The dialog box for selecting influences

in the proxy entity the layout
Selecting influences which will be displayed in the proxy entity is performed by turning on the
proper switch. These are available:
602
N1 V2 V3 M1 M2 M3 -
Axial force in the direction of the local axis 1 of the proxy entity
Shear force in the direction of the local axis 2 of the proxy entity
Shear force in the direction of the local axis 3 of the proxy entity
Bending moments around the local axis 1 of the proxy entity
display the diagram of the selected influence in the proxy entitty.
Influence V2 has been selected for viewing

Influences in proxy entities which penetrate the plane which has been displayed in the 2D
View window can be viewed using the command Indirect elements results (see chapter
8.10).
It should finally be noted that influences in proxy entities cannot be displayed for envelope
load cases.
8.12
Influence Line
Once you have selected the command Influence Line, the program will write a
message on the command bar, requesting that you select one or more beams
along which the moving load is moved.
<0 sel.> Beams exposed to movable loads Select (Deselect / load Pattern / <End>):
In addition to single selection of one beam at a time, Once you have selected the first beam,
the sub-option Co-linear will appear on the command bar. Once you have activated it, all
beams which are co-linear with the first selected beam will automatically be selected.
<1 sel.> Beams exposed to movable loads Select (Deselect / Co-linear / load Pattern /
criTical position / <End>):
Once you have selected all beams exposed to movable loads, the influence line for the
corresponding type of influence will be displayed on the screen.
603
The influence line for the M3 bending moment

The program also enables you to define the moving load pattern for the influence line which
consists of vehicle (arbitrarily defined moving load) and pedestrians (uniformly distributed
load), which can optionally be in front of but also behind the vehicle, of an arbitrary length and
an arbitrary order.
Once you have selected the sub-option load Pattern from the command bar, the following
dialog box will open up:
The dialog box for defining the moving load pattern

for the influence line the layout
The moving load pattern for the influence line is defined by assigning concentrated and linear
forces and continuous load.
604
Point load
The data on concentrated forces are assigned in the displayed combo box in the upper left
corner of the dialog box, where the data in each row correspond to a single concentrated force.
Part of the dialog box envisaged for assigning

concentrated forces
A new row is inserted in the combo box via the command field
Add , whereas the
selected row is removed from the box via the command field
Delete . The concentrated
force position and intensity are assigned directly in the box, by entering numerical values in
appropriate columns:
X [m]
- the coordinate of point in which concentrated force is effective
Pz [kN]
- concentrated force intensity
In order to facilitate and accelerate the process of entering data, the convention for the force
symbol is also reverse to the standard one, so the + sign indicates the downward force
effect. The program directs the assigned forces in the direction of the global Z axis of the
entire model.
605
Linear load
The data on linear load are assigned in the combo box which is located in the upper right
corner of the dialog box.

linear force
The displayed columns have the following meaning:
X1 [m]
- the coordinate of the line starting point in which linear force is effective
X2 [m]
- the coordinate of the line end point in which linear force is effective
P1 [kN/m] - linear force intensity at the beginning

P2 [kN/m] - linear force intensity at the end
Same as in concentrated forces, the convention for the force symbol is also reverse to the
standard one, so the + sign indicates the downward force effect. The program directs the
assigned forces in the direction of the global Z axis of the entire model.
In the most frequent cases in practice, it is necessary to assign the uniformly distributed load.
For this reason, the program automatically places the value which has been assigned in the
edit box P1 in the edit box P2 too. Of course, when necessary, in this edit box, you can also
assign the value which differs from the one which has been assigned in the edit box P1.
The purpose of the command fields
Add and
Delete is the same as when entering
concentrated force. In other words, these command fields are used for adding a new row of
data that is, deleting the currently selected one.
Continuous load in front of and behind
Part of the dialog box Continuous load in front of and behind is used for defining the
pedestrians which may be located in front of and/or behind the vehicle. The pedestrians
intensity is assigned in the edit box Intensity, whereas its position is defined by free space
to the vehicle (arbitrarily defined moving load), the length of which is entered in the edit box
606
Gap. The convention for the force symbol is also reverse to the standard one, so the +
sign indicates the downward force effect.

continuous load
All loads which have been assigned in tables and edit boxes are graphically displayed in the
lower right corner of the dialog box. In order to facilitate controling the entered data in tables,
those loads whose data are contained within the current rows of given tables are represented
in a different color in the drawing.
Part of the dialog box envisaged for controling graphically

the assigned moving load pattern for the influence line
607
Library of moving load patterns for the influence line
In practice it quite often happens that the same moving load patterns for the influence line are
applied. In order to avoid unnecessary repetition of defining the same or similar schemes, it is
possible to save the created schemes in the database and, if necessary, subsequently import
them.
Part of the dialog box envisaged for working with library

of moving load patterns
Once you have defined the moving load pattern for the influence line, if you want the program
to permanently memorize it, you must activate the command
Save .
Once you have assigned the desired name and activated the command field OK, all entered
data will be saved in the library of moving load patterns. From this moment on, the assigned
name will keep appearing in the combo box and, by selecting it, all data which have been
added to it will be taken over and displayed in the dialog box. The command field
Delete
has been envisaged for deleting the selected scheme which has previously been placed in the
database.
A report may be generated for the saved load patterns.
608
The command fields for generating the report

- the command field via which the report is generated and placed in the project
documentation
- the command field via which the report is generated and sent to print
- the command field via which the report is generated and saved in a text file
The report consists of moving load pattern name, the drawing (same as in the dialog box) and
tables with numerical data which have been used to define the assigned loads.
The generated report - the layout

If the load attern has not been saved, once you have exited the dialog box and activated the
command field OK, a warning message The selected load pattern has not been saved.
Would you like to continue? will appear and you will be able to use this scheme only until you
exit the program.
609
It should be noted that generating report is not possible for the scheme which has not been
saved.
The command field Reset is used for removing at the same time all previously defined data
on the current load pattern.
Critical position
The way in which the load critical position is calculated is defined by using the combo boxes
which are located on the left of the moving load pattern graphic display.
The combo boxes for defining the way in which

the load critical position is analyzed
One of the three options which are being offered can be selected from the first combo box:
Analysis of both load orderings the load moving in both directions is analysed.
Analysis of L-R load ordering only the load moving in one direction only (left to right) is
analysed. In addition to the results which have been obtained by analysing load ordering I, the
symbol which indicates the load moving direction (-->) is also placed in the drawing.
Analysis of R-L load ordering only the load moving in one direction only (right to left) is
analysed. In addition to the results which have been obtained by analysing load ordering II,
the symbol which indicates the load moving direction (<--) is also placed in the drawing.
It should be noted that selecting the load ordering makes sense only if the assigned load is
asymmetrical considering that, in symmetrical loads, the results for both directions of moving
are identical.
610
By selecting one of the options (Maximum and minimum, Maximum only, and
Minimum only) which are offered in the second combo box, it is possible to define for which
extreme values the critical position is being requested.
Once you have selected the sub-option Critical position from the command bar, extreme
values together with their position for the current moving load pattern will be displayed in the
drawing.
The influence line with the displayed critical position
8.13
Scaling the Influences
This command is used to affect the calculated results and the way that they are
written in the drawing. When command Scale Results, which is within the drop-down menu
Values, is selected, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for result scaling

Multipliers, by which calculation results are to be linearly multiplied, are in edit boxes in the
left part of the dialog box. Whichever the structural elements for which the results are
analysed, all corresponding results will be multiplied by the assigned multipliers, and they are
differentiated only by their character:
Forces -
All cross-section forces in plates, beams as well as the support reactions will be
multiplied linearly by the assigned multiplier.
Stresses -
All stresses in plates, as well as stresses in soil, in case of foundations on elastic

base, will be multiplied linearly by the assigned multiplier.
Deflections - All deformations in plates and beams, as well as soil settlement in soil, in case of
foundations on elastic base, will be multiplied linearly by the assigned multiplier.
611
Surely, one of the most significant applications of these scaling factors is to transfer the results
from one measuring system into another. If the meter was used as the unit of measure while
drawing the model, assigning the value 1000 in edit box Deflections will resulting
presenting the calculated displacements in millimetres.
The clarity of writing the numerical calculation results in the drawing and the appearance of
the diagram of cross-section forces can be affected in this dialog box in addition to assigning
the scaling factor.
Decimal Points - The accuracy, i.e. the number of decimal numbers used to present the
calculation results is defined in this edit box. If the value 0 is assigned, all
results, whatever they may represent and whichever structural element they
refer to, will then be presented as integers.
Lower Limit -
Since most calculation results are presented by diagrams in which the

ordinates of extreme values are also written, in some cases the drawing may
become unclear. In such cases, you have the possibility to assign an arbitrary
number in this edit box and to require from the program not to dimension the
values having the absolute value less than the assigned one. The value
assigned in this edit box also applies to the presentation of point support
reactions, i.e. only those reactions with absolute intensity value greater than
the assigned lower limit (assigning the value 0 means presenting all values).
Technical Zero - By assigning the desired value you have the possibility that the program
assigns a zero value to all values that are less that the assigned value. In this
way, the program will not even present the values less than the assigned one.
Activating the command field OK will denote the end of this command, and the program will
obey all assigned parameters in its further operation.
8.14
Scaling the Diagrams
The appearance of diagrams in linear structures can also be adjusted by scaling the
values of ordinates in the diagram. If you press the function key F5, the ordinates are
increased proportionally, and if you press keys Alt and F5 simultaneously, they are
reduced. During scaling of the linear entities diagram using the F5 and Alt + F5, minimum
value of scaling is 0.02, so minimum value of the diagram ordinate can be 0.04m. In addition
to changing the scale in which the diagrams are drawn, the function key F6 enables the
density of hatching in the diagrams to be adjusted. If you press the function key F6, the
density of the hatching is increased, Alt and F6 simultaneously, the density is reduced.
Function key F7 is provided for deleting all previously assigned scaling in the diagrams, and
to return to the initial scale assigned by the program.
The diagrams of influences in linear entities can even be viewed without pattern, that is,
without internal ordinates. By pressing the Ctrl key and the function key F6
simultaneously, viewing ordinates is disabled, whereas by pressing again the same keys it is
enabled.
612
A diagram with ordinates the layout
A diagram without ordinates the layout

All previously described does not apply only to diagrams in linear structural elements but also
to cross-section diagrams in surface structural elements, arrow symbols that indicate the
reactions of point supports, presentation of deformed model and presentation of the current
oscillation form of the structure. Here also, function key F5 is provided for scaling, while
function key F7 is provided for deleting the scale.
8.15
Bill of quantities
Using the command Bill of quantities enables yo to generate automatically the
textual report with the required quantities of material for the selected beams and
slabs of the model. This command is located in the drop-down menu Values and
its activating will result in starting the standard procedure of selecting.
<0 sel.> Bill of quantities Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Right-clicking will mark the end of the procedure of selecting and the dialog box with the
textual report for all the previously selected beams and slabs will appear on the screen.
613
The dialog box for displaying the textual report - the layout
Slabs - bill of quantities
The table with a bill of quantities for slabs
614
Bill of quantities for slabs consists of a table in which the following data are displayed for each
set of slabs:
Set set ordinal number
d [m]/Material - slab thickness is written in the first row, whereas the material from which
the slabs of a given set are created is written in the second row.
[kN/m3] bulk density of material
P [m2] area of all slabs of a given set
V [m3] volume of all slabs of a given set
m [T]
mass of all slabs of a given set
The data on area, volume and mass of all selected slabs are displayed in the last row of the
table Total.
Beams - bill of quantities
The table with a bill of quantities for beams

Two kinds of tables have been envisaged for the report on the bill of quantities for beams. The
table Beams - bill of quantities by sets is always displayed and, in it, the selected beams
are grouped by sets. The table Beams - bill of quantities by cross sections is displayed
in cases when there are some beams among the selected ones which have the same cross
sections and the same numerical data but still belong to different sets. In this table, beams are
grouped by cross sections and it does not contain the column Set. Other columns are the
same in both tables:
Set set ordinal number
Cross sect/Material - the description of beam section is written in the first row, whereas
the material from which given beams are created is written in the
second row
[kN/m3] bulk density of material
L [m] length of all beams of a given set/section
615
V [m3] m [T]
volume of all beams of a given set/section

mass of all beams of a given set/section
The data on length, volume and mass of all selected beams are displayed in the last row of the
table Total. The numerical data displayed in this row must be the same in both tables.
Recapitulation of materials quantities
The table with the recapitulation of materials quantities

The recapitulation of quantities of all materials which have been used for creating the selected
beams and slabs is displayed in this table. The following data are displayed for each material:
Material [kN/m3] V [m3] m [T] -
the material name is displayed in this column

bulk density of material
volume of all beams and slabs which have been created from a given material
mass of all beams and slabs which have been created from a given material
The generated report of bill of quantities can be exported to the project documentation (
press (
) or text file (
corner of the dialog box.
),
) via the command fields which are located in the lower right
616
The command fields for exporting the report
8.16
Structural Design Results Textual

Representation
Besides the project, adding possibility related to drawings with graphical

representation of the design results, the program also enables creating textual reports, in
which, through table forms, the numerical results of the carried out design can be obtained.
Choosing the command Text report, which is in the results processing module in the scope
of the Values menu, the program will require one to select the entities, in which one is
interested in the numeric design results.
<0 sel.> Entity Selection Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups
/ Recent selection / Deselect / <End>):
Since the numeric results can, in a moment, be observed only for one entity type (plains,
beams, etc), it will determine the first entity choice and what entities can further be selected.
This means, if one wants to observe the numeric results in plates, it is necessary, in the first
step, to select only one of the desired plates, then the rest of them. If the different entities are
selected in the first step, the program alone will decide which one to take, and the other
entities will be deleted from the selection. After the selection has been completed, the program
will, depending on the entity-selected type, open the appropriate dialog box.
617
Dialog box for representing numeric design results in slabs and walls
The way of handling this command is completely the same for all constructive elements types,
and the only difference is in the influence kind, which can be obtained for some construction
elements. Due to this, the way of creating textual reports for plate influences will be shown in
further text. All mentioned will also be applied to other construction elements.
Slabs
The dialog box for generating textual reports in slabs

and walls - the layout
Selecting the load for which it is necessary to create the textual report is performed in the
lower left corner of the dialog box Loads. The displayed options have the following meaning:
618
Current load case -
The report is generated for the load case which has been
selected from the combo box which becomes available
only after selecting this switch. All basic load cases, all
combinations and all envelopes which have been
previously created for the given model are located in the
combo box. Any of these load cases can be selected for
generating the report.
Treat anvelope as a single loadcase

Check box that allows generation of reports for the current
load case when current load case is an envelope load case.
It works as if user selected load cases, for which he wants
to get report, with envelope.
All basic load cases -
The report is generated for all basic load cases.
All load case combinations -
The report is generated for all load combinations.
All loads -
The report is generated for all loads.
Part of the dialog box for selecting loads

In the upper part of the dialog box, there are three tables which will be either active or
inactive, depending on the state of the switches found at the top.
619
Switches defining which type of influence will be displayed

in the textual report and which not
Depending on the state of the switches Section forces, Deflection LCS and Deflection GCS
the lower part of suitable tables will be either available or unavailable.
The way to work with these tables is exactly the same. We will explain working with table for
section forces, and the same will apply for the other two tables.
By setting the switch, that is on the left side of the influence name, to the switched-on state, it
is determined whether these results would be in the textual report or not.
Switches that determine the number of columns in the report

The switches that are on the right side of the given influence name, will be available for a
change only if the switch Extreme is set to the switched-on state.
620
Switches that determine the textual report type

Using the switch Extreme, the textual report type is being determined, i.e. whether one
wants to show only the determined number of the chosen influence maximum value, or even
the results in all selected construction elements. If the switch Extreme is set to a switchedoff state, then the created table will include as many rows as there are knots on the final
elements network In the selected plates, the number of columns will determine the selected
influence representation number. However, if the switch is set to a switched-on state, then it is
necessary for one to choose for what influences one is seeking extremes.
Part of the dialog box for extreme number and kind choice
In every of the shown eight rows, the parameters are defined for the given kind of the
transferred force. In the scope of every row, in the edit box n, the number of extreme
values, that are to be shown, is given, and setting the switches in columns +, - and ,
to the switched-on state, the results sorting criterion is determined. Namely, it is determined
whether the results have to present the maximum positive values, maximum negative, or even
maximum values according to the absolute sign. These switches will certainly be active only in
the rows that are related to the chosen influences for representation. According to it, for every
621
chosen influence, the desired extreme numbers according to one or even to more chosen
sorting criteria can be sought. In the scope of one row, all three switches can be set to the
switched-off state that will determine that no extremes will be sought for that influence, but
will be presented only as suitable values during finding the other extreme values.
This means that the number of the set switches on the left side of the influence name will
determine the number of columns, and the number of the set switches on the right side of the
influence name will determine the number of tables. Every table will contain as many rows as
the required extreme values of the given influence (data in n column).
When the current model contains construction stages, the combo box which is located in the
lower right corner of the dialog box Stage Construction becomes available for editing too.
Selecting from this box will result in defining the construction stage for which the report is
being generated. In this combo box, there is also an option called All stages, upon selecting
which the report is generated for all construction stages.
Using the check box Separated by sets enables you to request from the program to group
the report results by sets. Each result group is preceded by the ordinal number and description
of a given set. This option becomes available only when the report is generated for the
assigned number of extreme values of the selected influences, that is, when the check box
Extreme is on.
Since one will often change the report type depending on the current needs, by
activating this command, certain switch states are enabled to be recorded.
Namely, when a state, that is rather a typical one, is set for a report, activate this
icon.
It is necessary to give the textual description into the edit box now. The textual description will
associate to the chosen textual report type and activate the command field OK.
The closed list that is in the lower left corner of this dialog box is predicted for choosing some
of the previously recorded report types.
622
The closed list for choosing some of the previously recorded report types
When the textual report type has been chosen, as well as its columns and rows, by activating
the command field OK, the program will open the dialog box with the created textual report
contents.
Dialog box with the created textual report contents

There is a possibility, as along with other procedures in the program, where different textual
reports are generated, by choosing the appropriate command field to decide oneself to the
direct printing or placing the report into the main project.
Icon for including the TXT report in the main project
Icon for printing the TXT report directly
Icon for exporting the TXT report into txt database
623
By activating the command field OK, the program will, in the scope of this command be put
back to the basic dialog box form.
The basic dialog box form for creating textual reports with results in plates
Now there is a possibility whether to choose the new report type for same selected entities, or
by choosing the command field Cancel, to return to the basic command bar in the scope of
this command.
<0 sel.> Entity Selection Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups
The program will be in the new entities selection procedure, until by choosing the sub-option
End, the end of this command is determined.
624
Beams
The dialog box for generating textual reports in beams

and columns - the layout
The report with the key values of the selected influences can be generated for beams and
columns. The term key values refers to values in all characteristic beam points, that is,
points in which local extremes appear.
By selecting one of the switches which become available only when the check box Extreme
is off, the report contents are defined:
Key values Only those values which are found in key points of the selected
beams/columns are displayed in the report.
Key values + dx In addition to these key values, the values in points which have been
defined by the interval assigned in the edit box dx are also displayed in the report.
625
Parameters which are used for defining generating the report

with key values in the selected beams
If an envelope is placed for the current load case and the check box Extreme is turned off,
you will be able to select influences for which an envelope will be searched.
Parameters which are used for defining generating

the report for envelope load cases
626
Point support
The dialog box for generating textual reports

in point supports - the layout
If, among the selected load cases for generating the textual report in point supports, there is
an envelope load case, parameters in part of the dialog box Envelope become available for
editing too.
Parameters which are used for defining generating

the report for envelope load cases
When the check box Max/min is on, two values, the maximum one and the minimum one,
will be written in the report for each selected reaction and envelope load case.
If this check box is off, using the other check boxes will enable you to select the reactions for
which the envelope load case is requested. In other words, extreme values will be displayed in
the report for the selected reactions, whereas, values which correspond to these extremes will
be displayed for other reactions.
Finally, it should be noted that, everything that has been previously said will also apply to the
command which is used for generating the report with the results of structural analysis for the
entire model. This command is located in the page editor, in the menu which opens up upon
right-clicking on the chapter title Structural analysis.
627
Surface support
"Tower" enables receiving report about surface support resultants for the current load case. It
should be emphasized that the textual report for surface support resultant can only be
obtained for the current load case set in the post-processing mode.
Part of the dialog related to displaying

surface support resultants in a text report
628
8.17
Generating the report for entity groups
Using this command enables you to generate the entire report for the selected
entity groups in a fast and easy way. Such report may contain textual and graphic blocks with
the structural analysis results, as well as textual and graphic blocks with the design results, for
all types of structural elements.
Once you have selected the command Generating the report for entity groups which is
located in the drop-down menu Values within the Post-Processing module, a dialog box of
the following layout will open up:
The dialog box which opens up when you activate the command
Generating the report for entity groups - the layout
The mere procedure of working with this dialog box can be divided into two parts. In the first
part, by using the offered parameters, you can select textual and graphic blocks which are to
be included in the report, and also save their current state in the configurations database for
further reference. In the second part, you can create entity groups and generate reports for
them.
629
Defining configurations
Selecting textual and graphic blocks with the structural analysis results is performed in part of
the dialog box Static influences.
Part of the dialog box for selecting textual and graphic blocks
with the structural analysis results
It is possible to define the layout of the report for slabs, beams, area supports, linear supports
and supports reactions. Two check boxes and two command fields have been added to each
entity. Those on the left of the entity name have been envisaged for working with textual
reports, whereas those on the right of the entity name have been envisaged for working with
graphic blocks.
If any of the check boxes on the left of the entity name is turned on, the command field next
to it also becomes available. Once you have activated this command field, the program will
open a dialog box which is used for selecting influences to be included in the composition of
the textual report of a given entity.
630
The dialog box for selecting influences to be included in

the composition of the slab textual report - the layout
Working with the dialog boxes for textual reports is much the same as in the command Text
report. The only difference is that the part for selecting the load case and construction stage
is unavailable, considering that their selection is performed in the command main dialog box.
Activating the command fields on the right of the entity name will result in opening suitable
dialog boxes for selecting influences for generating graphic blocks.
The dialog box for selecting graphic blocks in the slab

to be included in the composition of the report - the layout
Working with these dialog boxes is the same as in the commands for displaying static
inluences in corresponding entities.
631
Selecting textual and graphic blocks with the design results is performed in the dialog boxes
which open up when you activate the corresponding command fields in the Design part.
The dialog box for selecting textual and

graphic blocks with the concrete slabs
design results - the layout
Once you have selected all textual and graphic blocks, you must remember to save the curent
state of parameters in the configuration database. For this purpose, the command field
has been envisaged, upon activating which the following dialog box will open up:
Once you have assigned the desired name and activated the command field OK, all the
assigned data will be saved and the assigned name will appear in the combo box for selecting
configurations.
In the combo box, there is also a configuration called Default in which all parameters have
been turned off, so selecting it will lead to canceling all entered changes in the fastest possible
way.
632
Creating entity groups and generating the report
Once you have selected the command field Level, which is located in part of the dialog box
Defining new groups, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for selecting levels

the layout
All levels which are located in the model are displayed in the dialog box. Now, you must select
the levels for which you want to generate the report and insert them in the box by activating
the command field OK.
The selected levels have been inserted in the combo box
633
Selecting the command field Frame will result in closing the dialog box and starting the
procedure of selecting frames in the Disposition window, and the command bar will obtain
the following layout:
<0 sel.> Frames Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Right-clicking will mark the end of the procedure of selecting, upon which the dialog box will
open up again, and all selected frames will be displayed in the combo box.
Using the command field Custom View enables you to insert auxiliary views in the combo
box.
The dialog box for selecting

auxiliary views the layout
The groups for which the report is being generated can also be created by selecting linear
entities (beams and linear supports) from the drawing. In other words, activating the
command field Linear entities will result in closing the dialog box and starting the
procedure of selecting linear entities.
<0 sel.> Linear entities Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
It is important to remember that it is not possible to create groups in which beams and linear
supports are at the same time located, which is the reason why the entity which was first
selected is going to define which entities will be included in the selection.
Right-clicking will mark the end of the procedure of selecting, upon which the dialog box will
open up again, and the group named Beams group, if beams have been selected, that is,
Linear support group, if linear supports have been selected from the drawing, will be
inserted in the combo box.
634
By selecting beams in the drawing, a beam group

has been inserted in the combo box
The title of the chapter in which the report is inserted, for the entities belonging to the given
group, is assigned in the combo box, in the column Name. It is selected simply by clicking
on any group name and it can be modified by entering a new name from the keyboard.
In the column Configuration, for each entity group, there is a combo box from which any of
the previously saved configurations can be selected. From this it follows that, the report is not
generated for the current state of parameters but for the saved configuration which has been
added to the given entity group.
If the report is generated with the same configuration for all groups, it is necessary first to add
it to one entity group, and then, to select the command Apply to all from the drop-down
menu which opens upon right-clicking on its name. In this way, the selected configuration will
be added to all entity groups.
635
The command for adding the same configuration

to all entity groups
The state of the check box which is located at the end of each row defines whether the report
is going to be generated for a certain entity group. Right-clicking on any of these check boxes
will lead to opening the drop-down menu with items All on and All off. If you select one of
these, all check boxes will be selected, that is, deselected at the same time. Entity groups can
also be selected by entering their ordinal numbers in the edit box Select entities, which is
located right below the combo box.
636
The check boxes which are on indicate that the report

is going to be generated for these entity groups
Up and
Down enables you to change the sequence of
entity groups in the box. The procedure is performed first, by clicking on the row in which the
group whose position you want to change in the box is located, and then by activating the
proper button.
All selected groups are removed from the combo box via the command
Delete .
It is worth mentioning that all created groups are saved in the database during saving the
model, and thus remain permanently remembered for further use.
Also, all configurations which have been added to groups are saved in the database. In course
of activating the command, the program compares these configurations with configurations
which have been saved in the database. If it happens that the database does not contain a
configuration which has been added to a group, an asterisk (*) is written next to its name,
indicating that it has not been saved in the database, but can be used at the given project.
If there are construction stages in the model, selecting from the combo box Stage
Construction will enable you to define the construction stage for which the report is
generated. If you select All stages, the report is going to be generated for all construction
stages.
The combo box which is located in part of the dialog box Visibility has been envisaged for
selecting any of the previously saved visibility states with which genereating graphic blocks will
be performed. Next to this combo box, there are two icons.
637
Selecting this icon will result in opening the dialog box Visibility which enables
you to regulate the visibility state for each structural element and load separately.
The selected visibility state is short-term, which means it will last only until you
exit the dialog box Generating the report for entity groups, when the previous
visibility state, which was set up in the Post-Processing module, will be returned.
Selecting this icon will result in opening the dialog box which enables you to
customize the properties of the blocks which are being generated. This dialog box
is exactly the same as the dialog box which opens upon right-clicking on the
Export the block icon in the Post-Processing module, which means that all
changes made to the parameters will be remembered even after you exit the
current command.
Part of the dialog box Loads is used for selecting loads for which the reports with the
structural analysis results are generated. Besides a single load case which is selected from the
combo box, the report can also be generated for: All basic load cases, All load case
combinations and All loads.
Part of the dialog box which is used for selecting loads

for which the reports are generated
"Anvelope as a unique load case" - Check box that allows generation of reports for the
current load case when current load case is an envelope load case. It works as if user selected
load cases, for which he wants to get report, with envelope.
It should be noted that the selected load, construction stage and visibilty are not saved in the
configuration but are redefined every time the report is generated.
When all required parameters have been assigned, generating the report may commence. In
this case, you should check whether any of the previously saved configurations has been
selected for each entity group in the column Configuration, because the report is going to be
generated based on it, and also whether the corresponding check box has been turned on for
each entity group for which the report is going to be generated.
638
Generate the entire report - Selecting this command field will result in generating
and exporting the report to the project documentation.
Generate the entire report - Selecting this command field will result in generating
and exporting the report directly to print.
Using the check box Arrange reports by name enables you to define the position of
generated blocks in the project documentation. When this check box has been turned off, the
program will automatically place each block in the corresponding chapter. Thus, for example,
the program will place the blocks with the results of designing steel beams in the Design
(steel) chapter. When this check box is on, the program will, for each entity group, create a
new chapter with the title which has been assigned in the column Name and place in it all
blocks which have been created for the entities of a given group.
Blocks which are exported can be sorted in multiple ways. Selecting the type of sorting is
performed from the combo box which is located on the right of command fields for generating
reports.
Sort Algorithm 1 (by load cases) is performed according to the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Construction stage number

Group number in the box
Load case number
Type of entity
Type of influence
Sort Algorithm 2 (by type of entity) is performed according to the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Type of entity
Load case number
Type of influence
Sort Algorithm 3 (by type of influence) is performed according to the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Type of entity
Type of influence
Load case number
In order to facilitate creating configurations and contoling the entered data, it is now possible
to generate reports even for the current state of parameters. Thus, right-clicking on the
selected groups in the combo box will result in opening the drop-down menu from which you
can select some of the offered options for generating the report.
639
The contents of the drop-down menu for generating

the report with the current state of parameters
You can generate either the entire report or some of its parts, for example, the textual report
with the results of slabs structural analysis or the report on designing concrete beams. The
contents of this menu are not always the same, but they rather depend on the fact which
textual and graphic blocks have been selected for generating. Thus, for example, unless the
check boxes related to designing have been turned on, the options for generating the design
report will not be contained in the menu. Once you select one of the menu items, the report is
generated and displayed on the screen.
Finally, it should be noted that, the reports which have been generated for the current state of
parameters cannot be exported to the project documentation. Their chief purpose is controling
the entered data during creating configurations.
8.18
Removing the Presented Influences from the

Screen Instantly (Reset)
When some of the influences are presented in the screen, by selecting another
command for processing the results, they are removed and are replaced by new ones.
However, a need often arises to remove the presented influences from the screen without
activating any command for processing the results. This need arises for example, when input
data for design documentation is to be prepared, or when the accuracy of the input data is to
be controlled.
When command Reset is selected, the results are removed from the screen, and
only the input data drawing remains in the screen.
640
8.19
Numbering the Finite Element Mesh Nodes
In case you desire to add textual reports, which refer to numbers of nodes on the
finite element mesh in presentation of input data and calculation results, to the design
documentation, then you will surely need a drawing in which all nodes on the finite element
mesh are numbered.
The numbering of the nodes on the finite element mesh is presented by setting the check box
Node Numbers, within the command Visibility, to switched-on state. Of course, setting
this check box to switched-on state will make no sense if the finite element mesh is not set as
visible (check box FEM).
8.20
Set Control
When the command Set Control is started in the Post-Processing module, the
sub-option Report will appear on the command bar.
<All> Set control Slab/Wall (Select / <End >/ Report ):
Once you have selected this sub-option, a dialog box from which generating reports on
controling the sets is performed will open up:
The dialog box for generating the report

on controling the sets - the layout
In part of the dialog box View, there are two radio buttons Report for the current 2D
view and Report for the 3D view, which are used for selecting the view for which the
report is generated.
641
The command fields for selecting views

In case that the project documentation is printed on a black-and-white printer, exporting
graphic blocks in color would not make any sense. For this reason, in part of the dialog box
View, there is a check box Use black color for highlighted which is used to request from
the program to display all sets in graphic blocks only in black color.
By turning on appropriate check boxes in part of the dialog box Entities, you are allowed to
select structural elements and loads for which the report on controling the sets is generated.
Part of the dialog box envisaged for selecting

entities for generating the report
The check boxes of entities which are not located in the current model are disabled, and, as a
result, they cannot be selected for generating the report.
Part of the dialog box Load Case will be unavailable for editing as long as at least one load
is selected for generating the report. In this part of the dialog box, it is possible to define, via
the offered radio buttons, whether graphic blocks will be generated for all basic load cases or
for the current one only.
642
Part of the dialog box envisaged for selecting load

Activating the command field Generate the entire report, in which the icon
is located,
will result in exporting graphic blocks to the project documentation, whereas selecting the
same-named command field with the icon
print.
will result in exporting graphic blocks directly to
The command fields for generating the report
Generated graphic blocks with area load sets
643
Finally, it is important to rememeber that graphic blocks with numerical data sets of structural
elements are placed in the chapter Structure, whereas graphic blocks with numerical data
sets of loads are placed in the chapter Load.
8.21
Creating the Design Documentation
Since the entire program is graphically oriented, the group of commands described
in this part of the manual enables easy preparation high quality design documentation. Each
Towers input file has a card file having the same name with extension *.TWP_D, which
serves for creating textual and graphical reports. Therefore, it is possible to create only one
design documentation for each model. When entering the post-processing module, this
document becomes active and ready to store arbitrarily selected presentations in the screen,
whatever they may represent: input data or calculation results. Moreover, various textual
reports can be included in this document, and it is also possible to generate them
automatically.
When command Edit paper, within drop-down menu File, is selected, a window having the
appearance of the design documentation opens.
Appearance of the window for operating with the design documentation

The branched tree, which classifies the whole design documentation into smaller wholes, is in
the left part of the window, while the appearance of the currently active page of the document
is in the right part. The information on the serial number of the design documentation current
page is written in the status bar, at the bottom of the screen.
On the left side of the window, under the report tree, there are parameters for adjusting
characteristics of selected blocks. All these parameters are also in dialogue "Block properties"
and their meaning is explained in section 8.21.1.
8.21.1 Export of Graphic Blocks

The drawings are exported into design documentation from the basic surrounding of
the program, in the post-processing module. Since the content of any window can be exported
at any moment, it is very important to focus the desired window before exporting the image.
644
Since the Disposition window is focused, the disposition of the frames

will be added to the design when command Export the block is selected
Default Characteristics of Blocks to be Exported
Although the size of the exported graphic blocks can be subsequently changed,
within the window of command Edit paper, it is desirable to set the default
characteristics of the blocks that are to be exported immediately before exporting
the drawing. This is achieved by a click on the right mouse button over the icon
Export the block, after which a dialog box with the following appearance
opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for adjusting the default

characteristics of blocks that are to be exported
In the right part of the dialog box, the defined appearance of the typical paper and the
arrangement of graphic blocks corresponding to the currently set parameters in this dialog box
are presented. In the part Block size of dialog box, the default size of the blocks, which will
further on be exported, is determined. In order to provide the appearance of the design
documentation as clear as possible, the size of the graphic blocks is determined by the size of
the space in the paper obtained by dividing it into assigned number of rows and columns. By
assigning the data in edit box Rows the free area of the printing paper is divided along the
645
horizontal into assigned number of equal parts. In the same way, by assigning the data in edit
box Columns, the free area of the printing paper is divided along the vertical into assigned
number of equal parts.
The default size of graphic blocks is determined by

assigned number of rows 3 and columns 2
Therefore, if you want the graphic block to be on the whole size of the paper, you need to
assign 1 for number of rows and columns. This means that the size of the exported blocks
does not depend on the current scale of the drawing, but on the defined data about the part of
the typical paper in which they should be placed.
In the part Margins of the dialog box, you have the possibility to assign the size of the free
space around the drawing. Before we explain the role of the parameters used to adjust the size
of the free space around the drawing, we shall explain the basic concept of the program
concerning the scale and the overall size of the drawing. Namely, the physical size of the
drawing, which is exported, is determined by the program from its overall size and the
available printing space, assigned in the part Block size of the dialog box. Since the size of all
texts is assigned in millimetres in the program, they are not taken into account when
determining the overall size of the drawing. From all previously said, it results that none of the
texts which are outside the overall size of the drawings will be included in their content when
the drawings are exported. In order to avoid this, you can assign an arbitrary percentage
increase of the actual overall size of the drawing in both directions in edit boxes X and Y,
and thus ensure that all texts along the edge of the drawing be placed in free space formed in
this way. Which percentage of increase will be assigned depends on the type of the drawing
and on the assigned size of texts in millimetres. It is recommended not to change the default
data 5%, since you will have the possibility to increase the free space around the drawing in
the window of command Edit paper only to those blocks where it is necessary.
By entering a value in the edit box "Inner margin, you have the option to specify a white
box around the content of the drawings. Frame width is specified in millimeters on the paper
and it is measured from the edges of the block to its interior. This framework is used for visual
separation of the adjacent drawings when their content is spread to the very edges of their
footprint. Such situations often occur during the use of the command "Export the block visible
part", which is explained in detail in this section, and also during the use of the command
"zoomed view", which is explained in chapter 8.21.10.
646
Graphic blocks before setting an interior margin
Graphic blocks after setting an interior margin

The next two check boxes Begin with new page and Begin in new line are in
connection with the page break in design documentation. Namely, it can be assigned for each
graphic block to begin on a new page, or in a new row, respectively. It is recommended that
these check boxes should be set to switched-off state in default, and that only after the design
documentation creating is finished, such parameters are joined only to some of the blocks.
Page break will be dealt with in more detail later.
Since the program will by default automatically break narrow textual reports into multiple
columns, the Tower program further makes it possible to select viewing them in a single
column.
647
The check box Single column which is used to regulate whether the
textual report will be viewed in a single column
Namely, by setting the switch Border around block, all exported blocks will be bordered
further.
Edit box "Resolution" refers only on the option of exporting current display to the "clipboard"
(this option of exporting blocks will be described in detail later on, in the chapter). By
assigning the desired value in this edit box, you select the resolution of the bitmap which will
be created.
The edit box for defining the bitmap resolution

If you want exported blocks to be in the assigned scale, you must first turn on the switch in
part of the dialog box Scale and then assign the desired scale in the edit box.
648
Part of the dialog box for assigning the blocks desired scale
It should be noted that, in course of exporting blocks, the program will control the assigned
scale. If it happens that the given block cannot be exported in the assigned scale, it will
restrict the block size on the entire sheet of paper.
From the combo box "Orientation" you can select the default block orientation: "Vertical" or
"Horizontal".
Horizontal orientation of blocks is selected

Since each exported block contains a title and a signature, in the part of the dialogue Block
signature you can set the alignment of the text. Adjusting the alignment is done by selecting
one of the options "Lleft", "Center" or "Right", from the combo box "Title" and "Signature". It
should be mentioned that the title here means the text that is written at the top of the block,
while signature means here the part of the text that is written at the bottom of the block. By
setting the check box Vertical text to switched-on state, the position of the title and the
signature are changed, in such way that the title is placed along the left while the signature is
placed along the right border of the block.
649
Central writing of the title and the signature is selected,

along the lateral sides of the block
By activating the command field OK, the program will accept all assigned parameters, and it
will obey them in export of graphic blocks.
What default size of exported blocks you will assign, and whether they will be upright or
horizontal depends exclusively on the selected format of paper and the complexity of the
geometry of the model that you are operating with.
Export of Graphic Blocks
The export of graphic blocks themselves is achieved either by selecting the
command Export the block, within drop-down menu Tools, or by a click on
the mouse button on this icon. Since the operation of block export is relatively
frequent, it can also be achieved by pressing the function key F2.
After block export is required, the program will add the current content of the window, which is
focused, to the design documentation. Block export will be possible at any moment of
operating with the program, disregarding whether any of the calculation results or input data
are currently presented. It should be mentioned that the current state of the zoom does not
influence the content of the block, since the complete content of the window is always
exported. In case when you wish to add an enlarged part of the model to the design, a special
command is provided for this purpose, within the window of command Edit paper. We shall
discuss this command in more detail later on. This means that in cases like this, the whole
block is exported, and then it is subsequently enlarged.
Depending on what is contained in the exported block, it will be placed in the tree of the
document with a corresponding subtitle. In case the results were not presented in block
export, then two cases may occur. If no load entity is presented in the window the content of
which is exported, such block will then be joined to the subtitle Input Data Structure. If at
least one load entity is visible, the block will then be joined to subtitle Input Data - Loading.
If any of the calculation results, including the presentation of the deformed model, are
presented on the screen, the block will be joined to the subtitle Structural analysis. Exported
drawings of the current mode will be joined to the subtitle Mode analysis, while all
dimensioning results will be joined to the corresponding subtitle which applies to dimensioning
for the given material. Only export of the content of the Disposition window will always result
in same content of the block.
650
Exporting the block visible part
Once you have selected the command Export the block visible part either
from the drop-down menu Tools or by clicking on this icon, the graphic block
with part of the model which is currently visible in the window (on which the focus
has been placed) will be exported to the project documentation. Therefore, the
current state of the zoom affects the block contents, meaning this way, you are
able to export the magnified part of the model. Since this operation happens to be
quite frequent, it can also be performed by pressing simultaneously Shift and
F2 keys.
Since the focus is on 2D View window, selecting the command

Export the block visible part will result in exporting the zoomed
part of the model from this window to the project documentation
All rules which apply to exporting the entire window contents via the command Export the
block also apply to this command.
651
8.21.2 Exporting blocks from dialog boxes

In addition to the previously described way of exporting graphic blocks, the
program also allows placing blocks which are generated in dialog boxes of certain commands in
the project documentation.
This command field is contained in most of dialog boxes and its activation results
in exporting a block to the project documentation.
Depending on the contents of the given dialog box, the program will export either a graphic or
a textual block.
8.21.3 Defining the Paper Format (Page format)

Before any operating with the design documentation, you need to define the size
and the appearance of one page of the document. When this icon is selected, a
dialog box as the following one opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for adjusting the paper format

Due to a large number of data, this dialog box is organised by card files. You have the
possibility to define the size of a page of the document in card file Page format. Depending
on the output printing device that you possess, select one of the paper formats offered in the
closed list. In case that the list does not contain the desired format, set the switch Any
format to switched-on state, which will enable you to assign completely arbitrary paper
dimensions in edit boxes Width and Height. The condition is, of course, that your output
printing device supports the assigned paper format.
652
Edit boxes for assigning arbitrary paper dimensions

The paper orientation can be selected by setting one of the two offered switches: Vertical or
Horizontal to switched-on state.
Since the project documentation contains a large number of textual blocks, in order to
facilitate working with them, displaying the contents of the blocks which are selected in the
report tree with a special background color has been made possible.
The selected textual report has been displayed

with the selected background color
The background color of the selected textual reports can be changed via the color box
Background color for selected report.
653
After clicking over the arrow on the right of the color box,
a dialog box for selecting the color will open up
"Draw border at the page margins" - Report allows displaying the frame (all four or only
certain lines) on the page margins. Left mouse click on a dashed line in the page preview of
this dialogue makes it solid, and that means that a frame line will be displayed in that place on
every report page. Dashed line indicates that frame line will not be displayed.
Part of the dialog for adjusting the display of the page frame.
654
Defining the Margins
The net area of the printing paper is defined within card file Margins.
The sub-dialog box Margins the layout

The selected paper format is presented in the central part of the dialog box. You have the
possibility to define the corresponding margins with four edit boxes on the top, bottom, left
and right sides to the paper format. Be careful when assigning these values, since each output
device has limitations concerning the net printing area. In this procedure, the program will
allow a completely arbitrary value to be assigned, but when printing the document the driver
may not be able to print in that part of the border space. In such cases, the requirement for
printing will be followed by a corresponding warning.
The only limitation concerning when assigning the margins will be in the edit box Down,
since the signature of the author of the program has to be in the footer of each paper. The
minimal value for the bottom margin, limited by the program, is 8 mm.
In case that each page of your document needs to contain a header, then it is necessary to
assign its dimension in edit box Header height. If you do not want a header, assign value
0 in this edit box.
655
Within the sub-dialog box Margins, there are four edit boxes which are used for entering an
arbitrary text to be written in the header, i.e. footer of each report page:
The sub-dialog box Margins with four edit boxes

for entering a text in the header and footer
Up - Left: -
the text from the edit box will be placed in the header, along the left
margin
Up- Right: -
the text from the edit box will be placed in the header, along the right
margin
Down - Left: -
the text from the edit box will be placed in the footer, along the left
margin
Down - Right: -
the text from the edit box will be placed in the footer, along the right
margin
Selecting this icon, which is located on the right of each of the previoulsy
described edit boxes, will result in opening the drop-down menu for including
automatically predefined texts. The following texts are available:
#p - Current page number
#n - Total number of pages
#t - Current time
#d - Current date
The included predefined texts are represented by the # symbol and an appropriate letter in
the edit box.
656
Defining the Appearance of the Title Block
The appearance of the title block, which will be printed at the top of each page of the
document, is defined within the card file Title block.
Appearance of the card file Title block

The default appearance of the title block delivered with the program represents only an
example to be followed in the procedure of forming it. The current appearance of the created
title block is presented in the top part of the dialog box. The width of the title block table is
determined by the paper width reduced by the left and right margins, while the height is
determined by the data assigned in edit box Header height, within card file Margins. The
title block table is divided into a series of cells (rectangular regions), and if you click the mouse
button on each of them, the content of the currently active cell is presented in the lower part
of the dialog box.
The content of the currently active cell provided for presenting the title
of the project is presented in the lower part of the dialog box
657
Completely arbitrary content can be inserted into any of the cells. The procedure of editing the
content of the currently active cell exactly corresponds to the procedure of operating with text
processors, such as WordPad provided for by the program. The font type and size are
selected from the closed lists, which are above the field provided for editing the content of
currently active cell.
Closed lists for selecting the font type and size

The following group of icons affects the appearance and content of the currently active cell.
The selected text is removed from the cell and moved to the clipboard.
The selected text is moved to the clipboard without being removed from the cell.
The text previously stored in clipboard is inserted into the cell, into the place determined
by the current position of the cursor.
Switched-on state of this icon determines bold writing of the selected text.
Switched-on state of this icon determines italic writing of the selected text.
Switched-on state of this icon determines underlined writing of the selected text.
When this icon is selected, a drop-down list for selecting the color to be joined to the
selected text opens.
Switched-on state of this icon determines left alignment of the selected text.
Switched-on state of this icon determines central alignment of the selected text.
Switched-on state of this icon determines right alignment of the selected text.
When this icon is selected, the selected text is marked as an item in a list of a series of
data.
658
When this icon is selected, a dialog box for setting the outside border of the cell opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for

setting the outside border of the cell
By setting the offered switches to switched-on state, the borderline is set on the corresponding
side of the cell. The denotation for switched-on state is concave appearance of the icon, while
in the central part of the dialog box, the borderline is set on the corresponding side. When the
switch Assign to All is set to switched-on state, you have the possibility to join the selected
sides for placing the border to all other cells in the header. For most common cases in practise,
when all cells need to be bordered, set all switches offered in this dialog box to switched-on
state, which will result with the desired effect.
When this icon is selected, a dialog box for inserting the images from the computer disk
opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for inserting

the images into the title block cell
When one of the selected options offered in the closed list File Type is selected, the content
of metafiles, in addition to bit maps, can be inserted into the cell. After selecting the desired
file, and activating the command field OK, the content of the inserted image will appear in
the position of the cursor. In case the format of the image is large, click the mouse button on
it, and bring one of its corners by scroll bars into the position to be visible in the space
provided for the cell presentation.
659
By selecting the inserted bit map, small-square symbols,

by which the image dimension is changed, appear
in its corners and in the middle of all sides
Bring the mouse pointer into position to point at a small square placed in the corner of the
image, and by dragging it inward, bring the image size to desired dimensions.
Reduced size of the inserted image

When this icon is selected, a drop-down menu for inserting automatically the texts
defined by the program opens. The following texts are available:
#p #n #t #d -
Current page number

Total number of pages
Current time
Current date
660
Inserted texts defined by the program are marked in the cell by a symbol # and by a
corresponding letter.
In order to define the arrangement of the cells that corresponds to your title block, you first
need to assign the desired paper format, to determine the margins and the height of the title
block. In addition, you also need to cancel the default title block delivered as an example to be
followed. You will achieve this by widening the end left cell to the maximal size of the title
block.
Stretching the right border of the end left cell

along the whole width of the title block
This means that when the mouse pointer is brought into position to point at the right border of
the end left cell, stretch this border to the end right cell of the title block. In this way, the title
block will consist of only one cell.
Appearance of the title block consisting of only one cell
661
By selecting the bitmap in the lower part of the dialog box provided for editing the content of
the currently active cell, and by pressing the key Del, remove this bitmap from the content
of your title block.
Completely empty content of the title block

In the bottom left corner of each of the cells, there is a small upright rectangle by which each
of the cells can be divided into two new cells in vertical sense. The small horizontal rectangle in
the top right corner of each of the cells serves for dividing the cells in horizontal sense. When
the mouse pointer points at one of these small rectangles, the cursor changes its shape into a
corresponding shape which at the same time indicates the sense of possible action.
Rectangles for dividing the cells into smaller parts

You can carry out the operation of dividing the cells by pressing the mouse button on the
desired small rectangle, and while holding it down bring it into the position of the desired
vertical/horizontal division.
662
By stretching the top right rectangle downward, a new cell is obtained

In the bottom left and top right corners in the newly added cell, there are also small rectangles
for dividing it into smaller parts, if needed. Let us add one more cell in the upper part of the
header.
By stretching the bottom left rectangle of the top cell

to the right, a new cell is obtained
This procedure needs to be repeated all until you obtain the desired number and arrangement
of cells. If you bring the pointer into position to point at the centre of one of the inside borders
of the cell, you can subsequently change the dimensions of the given cell.
663
Inside borders of the cells that can be stretched

Since you cannot determine the exact dimensions when stretching by the mouse, assigning the
dimensions of each of the cells numerically is also provided by the program. If you click the
mouse button within any of the cells, it becomes currently active, and its current dimensions
are shown in edit boxes Width and Height.
Edit boxes for numerical assigning of the dimensions of currently active cells
Since the title block has a limited, previously assigned dimension, changing the dimensions of
one cell affects the dimensions of other cells. It is adopted that the dimensions of the cells are
changed from right to left and from top downward. For that reason, when one of the end cells
is selected, the corresponding edit box for adjusting the dimensions of the cell will be inactive.
664
It is not possible to change the width of the selected top right cell
When you have adjusted the position and the number of cells in the title block, there is only
left for you to assign the appropriate content in each of them in the previously presented way.
Defining the Texts on Paper
Within the card file Text, you have the possibility to define all data on type, color and size of
the texts that are written on paper.
Appearance of card file Text

The data concerning the printing of the chapter titles are defined in the part Paper of the
dialog box. Namely, since the graphical document is divided into smaller wholes, the title of
the chapter is automatically written at the top of the page on which the given chapter beings:
Basic model properties, Input Data Structure, Input Data - Loading, Seismic analysis,
etc. By the check box Print title, you determine whether the chapter titles will be printed or
not. If this check box is set to switched-on state, by setting one of the two switches offered
665
Only on first page and On every page, to switched-on state you determine the
frequency of its repetition. This means that the chapter title may appear either at the top of its
first page, or at the top of all pages of that chapter. It is recommended that the title be written
only on the first page of the chapter.
The way of aligning the title is determined

by these three icons that operate as switches
Arbitrary font type and size, used for writing the chapter titles, can be selected from the closed
list, which is at the top of this part of the dialog box. In addition to defining the bold, italic and
underlined writing of the title, you can also select both the color of the text itself and the color
of its background.
Command fields for selecting the color of the text and its background
The first command field serves for selecting the color of the text itself, and the second one for
selecting the color of the background. In this way, you can obtain shaded chapter titles.
666
The edit box Page counter starts from allows you to change the ordinal number of the first
document page.
The edit box for defining the ordinal number

of the first document page
Changing the ordinal number of the first document page will affect writing the ordinal page
number only on the paper.
Parameters that will be used by the program in creating various textual reports are in the part
Text report of the dialog box.
Part of the dialog box for adjusting the fonts in textual reports
In textual reports, all texts are classified into three groups:
Main text:
The parameters assigned will apply to all texts within the report, including the
headers of the tables.
667
Drawings text:
The parameters assigned will apply to figure dimensions and to denotations in

the drawings which are created within some of the textual reports. For
example, drawings of beam cross-sections within sets of their input data, etc.
Table title:
The parameters assigned will apply to the title of each of the created tables
within textual reports. For example the title of table: Table of materials, etc.
For titles and table headers, selecting the color of the background, in addition to the color of
the font itself, is enabled. In this way, the table titles, as well as their headers, can be shaded.
Command fields for selecting the color

of the title background and table headers
The parameter determining the footer of graphic blocks is in the lower part of the dialog box.
Part of the dialog box for selecting the font type and size
in which the graphic block footers will be written
668
Namely, each of the exported images has a space provided for writing its meaning. For
example: Deformed model, Frame V_1, etc. The export of graphical blocks and the
meaning of their footers will be explained in further text in more detail.
Edit box located in front of this icon is used to adjust font height.
Edit box located in front of this icon is used to adjust font width.
Saving the Assigned Data on Paper
When you have adjusted all data needed, you need to save the appearance of the typical
paper in the base. By selecting the command field Save, a dialog box with the following
appearance opens.
Now you need to assign a textual description that will associate you to the defined data on
paper, and to assign the command field OK. In case you have assigned a name that already
exists in the list of paper types, the program will issue a corresponding message.
If command field Yes is selected, it will mean a confirmative answer, and the previous paper
parameters that have been saved under the assigned name will be lost. Selecting the
command field No will result in quitting the saving operation.
The closed list in the bottom left corner of the dialog box is provided for selecting any of the
previously saved configurations.
669
Closed list for selecting one of the previously saved paper types
If you click on the arrow to the right of this closed list, the content of the list opens, and now it
is sufficient to click the mouse button on the row containing the description of the content of
the paper which you desire to select. It should be mentioned that the list always contains the
Default paper defined by the program, which cannot be deleted.
Command
Delete enables deleting any paper arbitrarily selected from the list. The
procedure is performed by first clicking the mouse button on the paper in the list to be deleted,
and by activating the command field Delete.
The paper type latest selected is saved, and thus when creating new models, their design
documentations will have the same paper characteristics as the latest document that you have
operated with. More over, the program enables subsequent change of all previously assigned
data on paper. This means that you can create design documentation for one paper format,
and later, by changing the data in this dialog box, you can page-break it into a completely
different format.
Taking over the saved configuratons from another user (Import)
The program also enables you to take over the saved configurations containing the data on
page from another user. For this purpose, the command field
Import has been
envisaged.
670
The command field
Import for taking over configurations

from another user
Once you have selected this command field, a new dialog box will open up:
The dialog box for importing configurations

containing the data on page the layout
The parameters configurations are during saving placed in the database Tower.$har. When
the desired database has been selected, clicking on the command field Open will result in
taking over the configurations containing the data on page. From this moment on, all imported
configurations will be displayed in the combo box for selecting configurations fast, and any one
of them will be able to be set as the current one. If it happens that some of the imported
configurations have the same name as the existing configurations in the combo box, the
asterisk symbol * will be added to them (at the end of their name).
671
8.21.4 Structure of Graphical Document

The design documentation consists of a series of blocks that can be either textual
or graphical. Since the number of blocks may be large, the whole document is divided into
smaller wholes to enable clarity. The organisation of this division is presented in the tree in the
left part of the window for operating with the design documentation.
Structure of design documentation

The whole document is always divided into the following wholes, i.e. chapters:
-
Preamble
Contents
Basic model properties
Input Data
Results
Annex
The branch Input Data is divided into two new divisions depending on whether the input
data concern the structural geometry or the assigned load. The branch Results also has its
sub-division, depending on what the presented results involve: Mode Analysis, Seismic
analysis, Structural analysis, Stability or Design.
Since both textual and graphic blocks can be included in the design, the program will place
each of them into a corresponding branch, depending on the nature of the given block. All
blocks inserted into the design documentation are saved as such, so subsequent changes of
the model or repeated calculations will not result in automatic updating. In such cases, all
blocks previously inserted which do not correspond to the new content of the model, have to
be deleted first and then inserted into the design again.
In order to facilitate organizing the project documentation, it is possible to add new chapters in
the report tree. As the last branch of the report tree, there is the chapter Annex. Upon
right-clicking on this chapter, the menu with the New folder menu item will open up.
672
Right-clicking on the chapter title Annex will result in

opening the menu with the menu item New folder
Once you have selected this menu item, the dialog box for assigning the new chapter title will
open up:
Once you have activated the command field OK, the new chapter will be placed in the branch
Annex with the assigned title.
In case you want to either change the title of the newly-added chapter or delete it entirely
from the tree, you must select a corresponding command from the drop-down menu which
opens up by right-clicking on the chapter title.
The drop-down menu which opens up upon right-clicking

on the new chapter title
673
Once you have selected the command Rename, the same dialog box will open up again, and
now you can asign the new chapter title in it. If you activate the command Delete, the
chapter is removed entirely form the documentation. If the chapter contains some graphic or
textual blocks, and you still activate the command Delete, an appropriate warning message
will appear:
The added chapters are completlely equal to the existing ones, which means that all
commands which have been envisaged by the program for inserting blocks (inserting an empty
block, moving and copying blocks, etc.) apply to them as well.
Unlike other chapters, chapters which are located in the Annex directory are available for
changing their position. In other words, when any of these chapters is selected, icons which
are used for changing the position of blocks become available.
When this icon is selected, the currently active chapter is moved in the tree, one
place upward.
When this icon is selected, the currently active chapter is moved in the tree, one
place upward.
Changing the chapter position can be performed only within the Annex directory, i.e. it is not
possible to move a chapter to another directory.
8.21.5 Generating the Textual Reports

In addition to textual and graphical blocks which can be exported into the design
from the post-processing module, the program also enables textual reports to be generated
automatically, from the surrounding of the window for operating with the design
documentation. Namely, if you right-click over one of the chapter titles in the tree, a dropdown menu opens.
If you right-click over the chapter title

Input Data - Structure, a drop-down menu opens
674
Within all drop-down menus that open by a click on the right mouse button over the title of the
corresponding title, the command Generate the report is also included. When this
command is selected, the procedure of generating the given textual report is entered. If
generating of already existing reports is required, then the earlier reports will be deleted, and
the new ones will be inserted into the design. In case that the model has not been calculated,
those parts of the report for which the data from calculations are needed, will not be generated
at all.
Generating the Contents
If you right-click over the chapter title Contents, and if you select the command
Generate, the contents of the design documentation is automatically inserted into its
content. The chapter titles and serial numbers of pages on which the given chapters start are
written in the contents. Since the contents is constantly updated, depending on the number
and size of inserted textual and graphical blocks, it is quite the same when you are going to
generate it.
Generating the Basic Model Properties
If you right-click over the chapter title Basic model properties, and if you select the
command Generate, basic information on the model is automatically inserted into its
content.
Appearance of generated basic model properties

At the beginning of this report, the data that have been joined by command Project
Description (see Chapter 3.6.8.) are presented. If you have not assigned these data, then
they will be omitted in the textual report. In the further text of this report, the program writes
the name of the data file and the date of the performed calculations.
In the part of the report where the title of calculations is written, the program will place a sign
either 3D or 2D in continuation, depending on whether the model is planar or spatial. In
case when plane calculation is concerned, in addition to information 2D, the program will
write in brackets the number of unstrained displacements, which will denote at the same time
the plane in which the calculations have been carried out. In this part of the report, the
program denotes by a symbol X those types of analyses that have been performed.
The size of the model is described by the number of nodes in the finite element mesh, and by
the number of corresponding types of finite elements.
675
At the end of the report, the program also writes the information on the units of measure that
have been set as current by command Functionality (see Chapter 3.5.2). Pay attention
before generating this report, that the current units of measure in the program are matched
with the units in which other parts of the design documentation have been created.
Generating the Input Data on Structure
If you right-click over the chapter title Structure, and if you select the command Generate
the report, the dialog box with the following appearance opens.

the input data on the structure
The textual blocks that will be included in the content of the design documentation are selected
by setting the corresponding switches to switched-on state.
List of construction stages This check box will be available only for those models that
have defined construction stages within themselves. Names of all assigned construction stages
will be written in the list.
Level scheme This check box will be always available, since each model has to contain at
least one level within itself. A table with all data that you have assigned by the command for
editing the levels (see Chapter 2.11.1) will be presented in this textual block. .
Node coordinates These data can be presented in two ways. Namely, it can be required
that coordinates of all nodes in the model be presented, or only of those nodes that are on the
contours of structural elements and loadings. The way of presenting the node coordinates is
determined by setting one of the two offered switches All nodes and Only boundaries to
switched-on state. It should be mentioned that in those models in which boundary conditions
in plates or walls are defined, a larger number of nodes with same coordinates appears (see
Chapter 3.1.3). The reason for this is that the boundary conditions are modelled by
averaging the displacements in nodes having the same position in space, but belong to
different structural elements. In such cases, information on serial number of the first and the
last node in the series, having the same coordinates, will appear within one row of data.
676
If the model contains more than 5000 nodes, and you have selected all nodes to be presented,
when command field OK is activated, the program will issue a corresponding warning.
The reason for such warning is more than clear, since printing of all node coordinates for large
models would require extremely large number of pages of the document. Since the program is
graphically oriented and that you have the possibility to present the model geometry and loads
by images, it is recommended not to include at all the presentation of node coordinates in the
content of your design documentation.
Numerical data set In this part of the dialog box, switches only for those structural
elements that are contained in the model will be available. It should be mentioned that a
unique table of materials used is created for the entire model, and thus instead of material
characteristics, only their serial numbers corresponding to the numbering in the table of
materials will be presented with the sets of structural materials. The table of materials contains
of course all data that define one type of material. Since this type of input data cannot be
presented by exporting graphical blocks, it is recommended that your design documentation
contains numerical data sets for all structural elements. However, if you do not want the
numerical data sets to be presented, set the check box Numerical data set to switched-off
state after which the program will ignore the state of other switches in this part of the dialog
box.
Contours- In this part of the dialog box, switches only for those structural elements that are
contained in the model will be available. Data on the position of structural elements are
described in tables, individually for each structural element. These tables contain that number
of rows, as is the number of entities of that type in the model. The contour of an entity is
described by a series of serial numbers of nodes on its contour. In case of arc segments, a
node that denotes a point on the arc is connected to other nodes by a symbol ~. Since the
position of structural elements is described by serial number of nodes on the finite element
mesh, in case that you decide to present the input data in this way, it would be convenient to
add the coordinates of the contour nodes or of all nodes to your design. Since the program is
graphically oriented and that you have the possibility to present the geometry of the model
and loads by images, it is recommended not to include at all such input data in the content of
your design documentation.
In part of the dialog box Graphics blocks, a set of switches defining which graphic block will
automatically be created has been placed.
3D View -
when this check box is on, the radio buttons which are located just
below it become available for selection too.
Wireframe -
when this radio button is selected, the graphic block willl be created
with the wireframe three-dimensional model.
Render -
when this radio button is selected, the graphic block willl be created
with the rendered three-dimensional model.
Levels -
Setting this switch to the switch-on state, the graphic blocks will be
created in which content all horizontal assemblies (levels) on the
model will be found. This means, as many blocks will be created as
many horizontal levels there are on the model.
677
Frame disposition -
when this check box is on, the graphic block willl be created with the
disposition of all model frames.
Frames
created in which content all vertical assemblies (frames) on the
model will be found. This means, as many blocks will be created as
many vertical frames symbols there are in the Layout window. In
addition, this program will compulsory also create graphic blocks from
vertical assemblies, which contain in themselves walls, no matter
their position in the Layout window is defined by the symbol or not.
Custom View
created in which content all defined auxiliary views on the model will
be found (see Chapter 2.14.3). This switch will certainly be activated
only in the case that the auxiliary views are created on the given
model.
In the frames of all these graphic blocks, the loading will never show, while the other elements
visibility will be defined by the current visibility state in the module for processing estimate
results. This is the reason why there is a closed list for visibility state change in this dialog box.
The closed list for visibility choice, which is to define the graphic blocks content
That means, that one can in such way define whether the ordinal set number of numeric data
would be presented with the visible constructive elements, whether the auxiliary axis would be
shown or not, whether the auxiliary lines would be seen on the spot level, etc.
Selecting this icon will result in opening the dialog box Visibility which enables
you to regulate the visibility state for each structural element separately. The
selected visibility state is short-term, which means it will last only until exiting the
dialog box Generate input data.
678
Selecting this icon will result in opening the dialog box which enables you to
customize the properties of the blocks which are being generated. This dialog box
is exactly the same as the dialog box which opens upon right-clicking on the
Export the block icon in the Post-Processing module, which means that all
changes made to the parameters will be remembered even after you exit the
current command.
In model cases that are defined in construction stages, on the bottom of the dialog box there
is a closed list, which helps to define whether the graphic blocks would be generated for all
construction stages or only for a specified one.
The closed list for construction stage choice,

which geometry would be exported
By activating the command field OK, the program will, apart from all other data input, also
automatically generate all chosen graphic blocks that define geometry construction data input.
The program has placed all previously generated textual

and graphic blocks in part of the tree Structure
679
Generating the Loading Input Data
If you right-click over the chapter title Load, and if you select the command Generate the
report, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.

the loading input data
Turning appropriate switches on will enable selecting blocks which will be inserted in the
project documentation. Anyway, it is recommended that you include the list of all basic load
cases in the project documentation, together with possibly created combinations of their
simulatenous actions. When the switch Load cases list has been turned on, the switch
External forces sum total will also become available. When this switch has been turned
on, sums of the assigned load in the direction of global coordinate axes will be written in the
table, next to the names of all basic load cases. The exception are load cases with moving
load, seismic load cases analyzed by the multi-mode analysis and influence lines. The same
data will be written for all combinations which contain neither moving load nor seismic load
analyzed by the multi-mode analysis.
Table containing load cases with displayed sum of external forces
680
In order to generate graphic blocks automatically, it is necessary to set the switch Load
position on the switch-on state.
In cases of models that are defined in construction stages, there is a closed list at the bottom
of the dialog box, according to which you are able to define whether the graphic boxes would
generate for all construction stages or only for a chosen construction stage.
It should be noted that, everything that has been previously said about placing visibility and
the size of graphic blocks will also apply here the (see the part of generating the entry data on
construction).
By activating the command field OK, the program will also automatically generate graphic
blocks that define the position of the given loading in frames of all basic loading cases.
Automatic generated graphic blocks with loading position

Arrow symbol size that presents the surface, linear and point load activity, is defined by a
current scale factor that is set in the estimate results input by function keys F9, F10 and
F11 (see Chapter 3.2).
We shall note that the graphic blocks are created only for structures where at least one load
entity is seen. Along with all presented loads, their intensity is always written.
In the part of the dialogue "Numerical data sets" there are check boxes that determine if
program should generate text reports for all sets of point and moving loads as for area loads
that were set by the option "Wizard". Only check boxes for the loads that exist in the model
will be available.
681
"Point loads" - Check box that turns on generating text report for point loads.
Text report for point loads

"Moveable loads" - Check box that turns on generating text report for moving loads.
Text report for moving loads
682
"Surface loads - wizard" - Check box that turns on generating text report for (wizard)
surface loads.
Text report for (wizard) surface loads

Generating the Textual Report on Performed Mode Analysis
If you right-click over the chapter title Mode Analysis, and if you select the command
Generate the report, a textual report containing both input data and the results of
performed mode analysis is automatically inserted into the content of design documentation.
Appearance of the generated mode analysis report

It should be mentioned that the content of the table, in which the distribution of masses along
the height of the building is presented, exactly corresponds to the content of the dialog box,
which opens by selecting the sub-option Report within the command Masses (see Chapter
6.6). In case you have not edited the levels by command Masses, their position will
correspond to the assigned position of the levels in the model itself (command Edit).
683
Generating the Textual Report on Performed Seismic Analysis
If you right-click over the chapter title Seismic analysis, and if you select the command
Generate the report, a textual report containing both input data and the results of
performed seismic analysis is automatically inserted into the content of design documentation.
Appearance of the generated seismic analysis report

In addition to the assigned input data, the program creates a table of distribution of seismic
forces along the height of the building for each assigned direction of earthquake action. The
arrangement of levels in these tables corresponds exactly to the arrangement of levels defined
by selecting the sub-option Report, within command Masses (see Chapter 6.6). In case
you have not edited the levels by command Masses, their position will correspond to the
assigned position of the levels in the model itself (command Edit).
In case of seismic analysis base on multi-modal analysis, calculated seismic forces for each of
the calculated modes will be presented within these tables. At the end of the report, the
program will also create a table with participation factors, from which participation of each of
the modes, in calculating the seismic forces can bee seen.
Generating the textual report on performed structural analysis
If you right-click over the chapter title Structural analysis and select the command
Generate the report, a dialog box of the following layout will open up.
The dialog box for generating the numerical

results of structural analysis the layout
684
Selecting the load for which the textual report is going to be generated is performed in the
right part of the dialog box (Loads). The displayed options have the folowing meaning:
Current load case -
the report is generated for the load case that has been
selected from the combo box which becomes available only
when this switch is selected. The combo box contains all
basic load cases, all combinations and all envelopes that
have been previously created for the given model. Any of
these load cases can be selected for generating the report.
"Treat anvelope as a single loadcase"

Check box that allows generation of reports for the current
load case when current load case is an envelope load case.
It works as if user selected load cases, for which he wants
to get report, with envelope.
All basic load cases -
the report is generated for all basic load cases.
All load case combinations -
the report is generated for all load combinations.
All loads -
the report is generated for loads.
Part of the dialog box for selecting the load

When the current model contains construction stages, the combo box which is located in the
lower right part of the dialog box (Stage Constructions) also become available for change.
Selecting from this box leads to defining the construction stage for which the report is being
generated. There is also option All stages in this box. After selecting it, the report is
generated for all construction stages.
In the left dialog box part, there are command fields with constructive elements names that
are supported in the program. It is certain that only construction elements that are in the
model, that is currently running, will be available. On the left hand side of every constructive
elements names, there are switches, by which setting them to a switched-on state, one
regulates whether their results would be in the structure of the generated textual report or
not.
685
Switches that regulate whether the results for the given

constructive element would be generated or not
By choosing any command field, the dialog box opens for defining the contents of the textual
report, which will relate to the results in the given constructive element.
Dialog box for contents defining of the textual report

with results in plates and walls
The way to work with these dialog boxes is exactly the same as with dialog boxes within the
command for generating textual reports by selecting (see chapter 8.16).
When all necessary data is given in the dialog box, by choosing the command field OK the
basic dialog box form will return, in the scope of the command for whole model structural
design numeric results generating.
Besides results for chosen constructive elements, in the scope of this command, a possibility of
table generating with knots deflections with the final elements network is offered. By choosing
the command field Knots Deflection, the following dialog box is opened.
686
Dialog box for contents defining of textual report

concerning knots deflections
The way of work with this dialog box is completely the same as along with constructive
elements, only the influence kind that can be selected for representation, is changed. Here the
knots deflections from the final elements network in global coordinate system are predicted for
representation.
As along with the command for creating the textual reports by selecting, and in the scope of
this command, a recording in the current switch state basis is also possible.
The closed list for the choice of any of the previously recorded report types
These bases are mutually matched, i.e. the configuration recorded in the scope of this
command contains a series of sub-configurations that relate to certain constructive elements.
By activating the command field OK this dialog box will be closed, and in the project
documentation part, which is reserved for the structural design results, as many textual blocks
will be set as many one has chosen in this dialog box.
687
In the trunk part Structural analysis, the program has generated

all previously chosen textual blocks
Generating the textual report on performed stability analysis
If you right-click over the chapter title Stability and select the command Generate the
report, the textual report which contains both entry data and results of the performed
stability analysis will automatically be inserted in the project documentation.
The layout of the generated textual report on critical load

Optional deleting the existing generated blocks during re-generating them
In course of generating the report, the program checks whether there are textual or graphic
blocks in the project documentation which have been previously generated with the same
command. If it happens that there are some, the program will issue an appropriate warning
message which enables a user to delete these blocks from the report.
688
Once you select the affirmative reply, all previously generated blocks are deleted, whereas by
selecting the negative reply, all previously generated blocks are retained, and new blocks are
added in the project documentation.
When the check box do not ask me again. is on, the program will remember the last given
reply (Yes or No) and will use it during generating blocks in the future, which means that
the warning message will never appear again. In case that you would like to cancel the
remembered reply, that is, to enable displaying the warning messages again, you should
activate the command field Automatic answers reset in the dialog box of the command
Functionality (Setup Functionality).
8.21.6 Commands for Operating with Blocks in Tree

All generated textual reports and exported graphic blocks are placed in the design
documentation tree, into the region of subtitle to which they belong by their content.
Appearance of the design documentation tree with exported blocks

Since the textual and graphic blocks are treated differently by the program, they are denoted
by different icons in the tree.
Icon denoting textual block in the tree
Icon denoting graphic block in the tree
In continuation of these icons, the program also writes the title of the given block, which
indicates its content. It should be mentioned that the block title do not influence the content
of the design on paper, but they only serve to enable easier identification of their content.
Since the space for presenting the tree of the document has limited size, you can change its
current content in the screen by horizontal and vertical scroll bars in the tree.
689
Scroll Bars for changing the current content of the tree

The space available for presenting the tree can be changed in horizontal sense. Namely, by
stretching its right border, this space can be enlarged or reduced.
The dimension of the space provided for presenting the tree

can be changed by stretching its right border
It is clear that by enlarging the field provided for presenting the tree will result in reducing the
space for presenting the document page.
Changing the Current Block
In every moment of operating with the design documentation, one block is always currently
active (the title of the current block is denoted by a special color). The current block is
changed by a simple click on the mouse button over its title in the tree. After that, that page
which contains the currently active block is set as the current page of the design, in the right
part of the screen.
690
Graphic block within subtitle Structural analysis is currently active

In case of textual blocks that occupy several pages, that page on which the given textual block
begins will be set as the active page. In this way, the current block is always brought into
accord with the view of the current page of the design, which enables easy positioning to the
desired part of the document. The current block can also be changed by cursor arrows.
Multiple Selection of Blocks
Since some commands in the program may simultaneously refer to several blocks, multiple
selection of blocks by keys Shift and Ctrl is enabled in the tree. If you press and hold
down the key Ctrl and click the mouse button on any of the blocks, that block will be selected
while the previously selected block will remain selected. In this procedure, if you click the
mouse button on a previously selected block, that block will be deselected. Multiple selection of
blocks by key Shift is performed similarly as the previously described procedure by key
Ctrl, except that here a click on the block does not only select the given block but also all
other blocks in the list which are between the previously selected one and the one that has
been just selected. It should be mentioned that by multiple selection it is possible to select
blocks from different. Multiple selection will be applied in command fore deleting the blocks
and in command for adjusting the block characteristics.
All blocks in the document are selected by multiple selection
691
Changing the block name
Right-clicking over the selected block in the tree will result in opening the drop-down menu
where the command Rename is located. If you activate this command, a dialog box in which
you can assign a new name for the previously selected block will open up.
The dialog box for changing

the block name the layout
Block Deleting
The selected blocks can be deleted either by selecting this icon or by directly
pressing the key Del. Moreover, if you right-click when the pointer points the
title of the selected block in the tree, a drop-down menu opens, in which
command Delete is always present.
Drop-down menu that opens by a click on the right mouse button over the block title
Block Characteristics
Selecting this icon, or command "Block properties" from the drop down menu that
opens with the right mouse click on the block name in the report tree, a dialog for
adjusting characteristics of the selected block will be opened. In case this
command is activated when a textual block is selected, all options in it, except the
switch Begin with new page and Single column, will be inactive.
692
Appearance of the dialog box for adjusting the characteristics

of the selected textual block
This dialog box exactly corresponds to the previously described dialog box for setting the
default characteristics of exported blocks (see Chapter 8.21.1). The only difference is in that
here the assigned parameters are not used as default values, but instead they are joined only
to the selected block.
If command is started while a graphic block is selected, instead of the parameter "Single
column" dialog will display parameter "Last in line".

of the selected graphic block
This option makes the selected block last in its line, so block behind him moves to the next
line. At the same time, the combo box becomes available from which the alignment of the
selected block can be changed. The available options for the alignment are: Left, Center, and
Right. It should be emphasized that the alignment applies only to the area from the beginning
of the selected block to the end of its row; not the total width of the row.
693
Layout of the graphic blocks before alignment
The property "Last in line" is turned on for every other block,

and their alignment is "Right".
In case of multiple selection of graphic blocks, only those parameters that are common to all
selected blocks will be available.
694

of several selected graphic blocks
In such cases, data that are not common to all selected blocks will be undefined, i.e. empty.
By assigning only a certain group of data, and by activating the command field OK, only
those data which were previously set in the dialog box will be joined to all selected blocks,
while all others will remain unchanged.
In case when graphic and textual blocks are simultaneously selected, only the parameter,
which determines the beginning of the block on a new page, will be available to be changed.
Changing the Block Position
Each newly added block is automatically placed at the end of the group of blocks that are in
connection with the given chapter title.
When this icon is selected, the currently active block is moved in the tree, one
place upward.
When this icon is selected, the currently active block is moved in the tree, one
place downward.
In addition to selecting one of the icons offered, the position of the block can also be changed
by dragging. This procedure is carried out in the following way: select the block to be moved
by the mouse, and while holding down the left mouse button, drag it to the new position in the
tree. After releasing the left mouse button, the previously selected block will be placed
immediately below the block into place of which it has been dragged. A conclusion can be
drawn from the previously presented that if you wish to place a block in the first position
within the given region, you will not be able to perform this action in one step. In such case,
first you will have to place the selected block into the second place, and next you will have to
move the first block in the list to the second position.
When changing the position of the blocks, consider the blocks for which it has been assigned to
start on a new page or in a new line. This will be discussed in more detail in the chapter, which
describes the page break in the document.
As it has been previously desribed, blocks can be moved only underneath the same title.
695
Copying and moving blocks within project documentation
In the drop-down menu that is opened by the right mouse clicking on the name of selected
block in the report tree, there are commands that are used for copying and moving blocks
from one place to another within the project documentation. There are no limitations in usage
of these commands, so blocks can be copied / moved within the same chapter or, to any place
in another chapter.
"Copy selected blocks"
This command copies selected blocks to the clipboard which is only valid
within the paper editor. These blocks can be inserted into a report multiple
times, as long as they are not replaced in the clipboard by new ones, or until
you exit paper editor. The keyboard shortcut for this command is (Ctrl + C).
"Move selected blocks"
This command prepares selected blocks to be moved and copies them to the
clipboard. They will be visible in their original place until they are finally
moved to another location. The keyboard shortcut for this command is
(Ctrl + X).
"Insert copied blocks above"
This command becomes active when a block is copied and there currently is a
selected block. After selecting this option, previously copied block will be
inserted above currently selected one. User can insert copied block in several
places of the report. After inserting a block, this command becomes inactive,
which means that block can be inserted in only one place. If a chapter is
currently highlighted instead of a block, a different option will appear: "Insert
copied blocks at the beginning of the chapter". This option inserts copied
blocks at the beginning of a given chapter.
"Insert copied blocks below"
This command becomes active when a block is copied and there currently is a
selected block. After selecting this option, previously copied block will be
inserted below currently selected one. User can insert copied block in several
places of the report. After inserting a block, this command becomes inactive,
which means that block can be inserted in only one place. If a chapter is
currently highlighted instead of a block, a different option will appear: "Insert
copied blocks at the end of a chapter". This option inserts copied blocks at the
end of the chapter.
TXT blocks within the project documentation
Since, during creating the project documentation, besides tables and drawings, there is quite
often a need for editing various texts (titles, comments, load analyses, etc), it has been
enabled to insert empty blocks which could be used for this purpose. Blocks can be inserted in
the project documentation by selecting appropriate commands from the menu which opens up
upon right-clicking on the chapter title in the tree:
Make a new block at the chapter's beginning by selecting this command from the
menu, the empty block is inserted at the beginning of a given chapter
Make a new block at the chapter's end by selecting this command from the menu, the
empty block is inserted at the ending of a given chapter
696
The commands for inserting the empty block

at the beginning, that is, ending of a given chapter
Blocks can also be inserted either by activating appropriate icons or by selecting commands
from the menu which opens up upon right-clicking on the name of any already inserted block.
Either by activating this icon or by selecting the command Create the new
block above from the menu, a block is inserted just above the currently selected
block.
Either by activating this icon or by selecting the command Create the new
block below from the menu, a block is inserted just below the currently selected
block.
The commands for inserting the empty block above,

that is, below the currently selected block
Once you have inserted the block in the report by using one of the previously described
commands, the program will automatically open the dialog box in which the block contents are
entered:
697
The dialog box for entering the inserted

block contents - the layout
Working with this dialog box is exactly the same as during the procedure of defining the
header of the project custom page. In addition to the possibility of defining an arbitrary size
and contents of columns and rows, it is also possible to copy an arbitrarily selected text from
Word via clipboard to the inserted block contents.
Load analysis has been copied from Word

to the block contents
Once you have activated the command field OK, the inserted block contents will appear in
the composition of the project documentation.
698
The inserted block contents

The size of the inserted blocks is predefined, but still it can be subsequently changed by
stretching the border lines which have been placed on its edges.
By stretching the bottom edge, the block has obtained the right size
The inserted textual block is completely equal to other graphic and textual blocks, which
means that all operations envisaged by the program (changing its position, deleting, etc.) can
also be performed on it.
Editing of text block
In the menu that opens by the right mouse click on the name of the block in the report tree,
there is a command "Editing of text block". This command enables editing inserted and text
reports. If you select inserted block and choose this option, a dialog will appear that is exactly
the same as when inserting a block.
699
Dialog for editing inserted blocks

If a text report is selected, a dialog with the contents of the report displayed in the form of
editable matrix will be shown. The original report format will be preserved.
Dialog for editing text blocks

The content of the selected text report is displayed in the table. Each cell can be edited
completely free.
700
Delete
The button whose activation removes the selected row from the table. It will
be active only if selected row is not empty.
Add
The button whose activation adds a new row under selected one. New row will
have the same data as the original. The button will be active only if selected
row is not empty.
By activating the "OK" button, the dialog will close, and all changes will be accepted and
visible in the paper editor.
Exporting the graphic block to AutoCAD (DXF)
After selecting either this icon or the command Export to DXF from the dropdown menu which opens after right-clicking over the selected graphic block in the
tree, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for exporting the currently selected

graphic block to DXF format the layout
The edit box is used for entering the database name and its position on the disc. These data
can also be assigned via the standard Windows dialog box for saving databases, which opens
up upon activating the command field
.
In the lower part of the dialog box, there is a combo box ACU length which is used for
selecting measurement units to be used in course of exporting blocks.
During this type of exporting, a database is saved with the .dxf extension and each type of
element is exported to a special layer. Structural elements are exported to the
CONSTRUCTION layer, finite elements mesh to the FENET layer, legend to the LEGEND
layer and results to the RESULTS layer.
Exporting the graphic block to clipboard
After selecting either this icon or the command Export the block to the
clipboard from the drop-down menu which opens after right-clicking over the
selected graphic block in the tree, the program will copy the contents of the
selected graphic block to clipboard:
Exporting the block to TXT
After selecting this icon, the dialog box for exporting the selected textual block to
TXT format will open up.
701
Now you need to assign the desired file name and, by activating the command field Save,
perform its saving in the selected directory.
All textual reports generated by the program can be exported to a separate file which has a
*.txt extension. Reports are generated in the same form in which they are displayed in the
program (for example, in a tabular form), so they are convenient for importing to other
programs which support the same file format, above all to Excel.
8.21.7 Graphic Block Signatures

As we have already stated, in exporting the graphic blocks, texts that indicate the
content of a block are automatically joined to the content of the drawing. Namely, each
graphic block has its own title and signature. In the bottom of the window for operating with
design documentation, the program writes all these data for the currently active block, in
corresponding edit boxes.
Edit boxes in which the title and the signature of the graphic block are written
The program itself creates these texts, depending on what the given block represents. The
following convention for creating these texts is adopted in the program.
- If the model contains defined construction stages within itself, then the name of the current
construction stage is always written in the first row of the title, while the current load case
702
is written in the second row, on the condition that the graphic block belongs by its content
either to Chapter Input Data Load or to Chapter Structural analysis.
- If the model does not contain defined construction stages, then the current load case is
written in the first row on the condition that the graphic block belongs by its content either
to Chapter Input Data Load or to Chapter Structural analysis. In all other cases, the
title will be empty.
- The name of the part of the model contained in the graphic block (the name of the frame,
level, auxiliary view, name of the current state of visibility, etc.) is written in the first row of
the signature, while the second row is written only in case when the graphic block
represents calculation results. The name of the influences, for which the results and their
extreme values are presented, is then written. In all other cases, the second row of the
signature will be empty.
The title and the signature are constituent parts of the drawing, and you can change them
according to your wish. When editing both block title and signature, you can assign more than
two planned rows. If you bring the mouse pointer to the end of the current row, and if you
press the key Enter, the program will move to the next row of the given edit box. The
change of the content of these text will be shown on a sheet of paper only when you change
the focus from that edit box, by pressing the key Tab.
The block title and signature do not influence the overall size of the graphic block itself, but
instead they are written within inside of the block, in the position that is determined by the
alignment parameters within command Block properties. In case that the block title or
signature overlap any part of the drawing, by selecting some other way of aligning, they can
almost always be placed on an empty part of the drawing.
8.21.8 Commands for Operating with Paper Sheets

The actual appearance of the currently active page of the document is always
presented in the right part of the window for operating with the design documentation. The
information on the serial number of the current page and the data on total number of pages in
the document are always written at the bottom of the screen, in the status bar.
Field provided for writing the current page of the document

We have already said that by changing the current block in the document the page that
contains the given block is automatically updated. However, the current page can also be
703
changed by pressing the keys PgUp and PgDn, as well as by selecting the corresponding
icons.
By selecting this icon, the first page before the currently active one is set as the
current page.
By selecting this icon, the first page behind the currently active one is set as the
current page.
In case that the document contains a large number of pages, the scroll bar that is placed along
the right border of this window, can also be used for fast setting the current page.
Scroll bar for fast change of the current page

The usual way of presenting the actual appearance of the document is when only one page is
presented. However, sometimes it may be needed to present several pages of the document at
the same time.
By selecting this icon, the view of the current page of the document is replaced by
simultaneous presentation of several pages.
Simultaneous presentation of two pages of the document
704
Which number of pages will be simultaneously presented is determined by selecting on the
options offered in the closed list, that opens by a click on the arrow to the right side of the icon
for presenting several pages of the document simultaneously. Presentation of maximum six
pages at the same time is limited by the program.
Closed list for selecting the number of pages of the document

that will be presented simultaneously
By selecting this icon, simultaneous view of several pages is replaced by
presentation of only one page.
Commands for zooming the paper content operate in exactly the same way as in other
modules in the program. This means that they can be activated either by selecting the
corresponding icon, or by pressing the key Ctrl and the corresponding mouse button
(see Chapter 2.7).
Zoomed part of the current page of the document

Zoom to page height
This icon displays full height of the report page. Right-clicking this icon displays
the entire height of the document page, without margins.
705
Zoom to page width
This icon displays full width of the report page. Right-clicking this icon displays
the entire width of the document page, without margins.
If a report page is currently zoomed to its full width, keyboard keys "Page Up" and "Page
Down" will move the view to the top/bottom of the current page or the bottom/top of the
previous/next page.
In the window for operating with the design documentation, the system for restoring the
content of the design is also supported. The icons Undo and Redo function in exactly the
sane way, except that there is a limitation that the undo buffer cannot be refreshed after
generating the textual reports. Namely, at the moment of generating any of the textual
reports, the program first has to save the database, and thus the program cannot return to the
previous state after this operation. However, when in course of operating with the design
documentation textual reports are not generated, the entire system for restoring the drawings
will fully function.
8.21.9 Page Break in Design Documentation

Page break in design documentation is performed automatically, obeying both the
sizes of graphic blocks and the defined data on fonts in generated textual reports. Textual and
graphic blocks can be placed in continuation, one after the other, in a sequence determined in
the document tree. Graphic blocks may be one next to the other, if their sizes allow it. The
same applies to textual blocks. If their width is such that they may fit into several columns
then they are placed in that way on a sheet of paper. This means that the condition is that the
space on the paper be maximally occupied. The only limitation is in that the textual and the
graphic block cannot be next one another. The reason for this is that the textual reports do not
have a rectangular overall shape and thus this would represent a far too complicated
requirement for the page break algorithm. Both graphic and textual blocks are always aligned
along the left border of the page of the document.
In page break, the program obeys the assigned block characteristics concerning the
requirements that they should begin on a new page or in a new line. All blocks, to which such
characteristics have been assigned, are denoted by special icons in the tree.
Icon denoting a textual block to which it has been assigned to begin on a new page
Icon denoting a graphic block to which it has been assigned to begin on a new page
Icon denoting a graphic block to which it has been assigned to begin in a new row
It should be mentioned once again that it cannot be assigned to textual blocks to begin in a
new row.
Although page breaking is completely automatized, however, changing the characteristics to
individual blocks concerning their size and the data if they should start on a new page (in a
new row) can influence the page break of the document. Anyway, the program automatically
assigns the characteristic to each block that is first to be inserted in one of the regions of
subtitles that it begins on a new page. You can delete this parameter of course, but the design
will have a much clearer appearance if each chapter begins on a new page.
In the operation of changing the sequence of the blocks take care about the blocks to which
the parameter to begin on a new page/new row has been assigned.
706
8.21.10 Commands for Operating with Graphic Blocks on

Paper
Some of the previously described commands for working with blocks in the tree
can be activated on the paper as well. In other words, after right-clicking over the displayed
block on the paper, the drop-down menu which contains these commands will open up.
After right-clicking over the graphic block,

the drop-down menu opens up
Changing the Graphic Block Dimensions
Only graphic blocks can be selected on a sheet of paper, and only one of them can be currently
active. A frame having small squares, used for changing the dimensions of the block, in its
corners and in the middle of each side is set around the currently active block.
Squares for changing the dimensions of the currently active graphic block
This means that the dimensions of the active block can also be changed by stretching its
corners. In order to achieve this, you need to bring the pointer into position to point at one of
the corners of the block. In that position the pointer will obtain a shape of two-sided arrow by
which the program indicates that it is ready for this type of operation. Press the left mouse
button now, and while holding it down bring the selected corner of the block into the desired
707
position, and only after that release the mouse button. In this way, the ratio width/height of
the block remains unchanged.
By stretching the diagonal corners, the ratio

block height/width remains unchanged
In addition to stretching the block corners, the program enables stretching its sides. The
procedure is carried out in exactly the same way, except that now a small square in the middle
of the desired side of the boarder needs to be selected instead of the corner square. In this
way, the ratio width/height of the block is changed.
By stretching the bottom side of the block upward,

the ratio block width to block height is changed
This method of changing the block dimensions may be very convenient in drawings having one
dimension exceptionally pronounced. In that way, the unneeded blanks will be eliminated in
them.
When changing the dimensions of a block subsequently, you need to know that this will
influence the position of the blocks that are behind it. Moreover, the program will immediately
make a new page break of the pages in the document.
708
Changing the text of a graphic block
The purpose of this command is final adjusting of the block content before
printing. Its selection starts the procedure of changing current text of a graphic
block.
The icon stays pressed down for the duration of this command, or until user exits it. The same
effect can be achieved by double-clicking mouse. Specifically, a double mouse click on a
graphic block of currently displayed document page presses the icon "Editing of texts in
graphical blocks" down. Duration this command, the program is constantly in the process of
selecting texts. Editing text implies only changing their position or their possible deletion
(diagram quotes, numerical values, ordinal set numbers, etc.).
In course of the procedure of block editing, multiple texts selection is possible. Selecting texts
is performed according to the following rules:
1. Clicking on a text will select the given text, and all previously selected texts remain
selected.
2. If there is no text under the cursor and you still click, the program will start the procedure
of selecting via the window.
3. Clicking on a selected text will deselect the given text, while the Shift key is pressed on
the keyboard.
4. If there is no text under the cursor and you still click while pressing the Shift key on the
keyboard, the program will start the procedure of deselecting via the window.
5. Right-clicking is used to perform deselecting of all previously selected texts
To move a text, you need to position the cursor directly over some of the previously selected
texts and press the left mouse button, after which the selected texts are brought into their
new position and only then you may release the mouse button.
By pressing the Del key, all selected texts are deleted.
View of text selected for moving/deleting
709
It should be mentioned that the complete legend table of full isolines can also be selected for
moving and deleting. In this way, in case that it overlaps any part of the model, you have the
possibility to place it on a free space of the drawing.
Pressing the "OK" button exits the current command accepting all changes.
Pressing the "Cancel" button exits the current command without accepting
changes.
Adding new texts
Selecting this command, you can insert new arbitrary text in a random place on
the graphic block.
This command is available only when editing of a graphic block is turned on. Activating it, user
is expected to select with a simple mouse click where he wants to insert new text, after which
a dialog will be opened:
Dialog for inserting new texts in a graphic block

"Text"
Edit box for entering new arbitrary text.
"Alignment"
Part of the dialog with six fields that determine aligning of the text relative to
the point that user has selected from a graphic block.
"Font"
The list for selecting font, as well as edit boxes for entering font height and
width.
"Angle"
Edit box for entering the angle that the text will have relative to the horizontal
direction.
Selecting the "OK" button closes the dialogue and adds new text with given parameters to the
graphic block.
710
This command is circular, so user is expected again to select the position of a new text. The
command icon will be active for the duration of the command. You can exit the command by
clicking the right mouse button or by pressing the "Esc" keyboard key. After this you will be
returned to the previous graphic block editing mode.
Zoomed view
Selecting this command, you have the option to display only one part of the
project instead of the entire content of the block.
After activating the command "Zoomed view" the program expects you to select two points
on the drawing that will define a rectangular zoom area. After completion of the command, the
contents of the given rectangular area will be expanded to fill the total space of a given block.
Display of enlarged part of a drawing

Icon that indicates that current block is zoomed in. Right-clicking this icon cancels
the zoom.
Icon that indicates that current block is not zoomed.
Pressing the "OK" button exits the current command accepting all changes.
Pressing the "Cancel" button exits the current command without accepting
changes.
711
The enlarged part of the block is added to the content

of the design documentation
This command has special application when the drawing is large and thus cannot fit into the
selected paper format.
8.21.11 Importing graphic blocks and textual reports from

other projects
Using the command Import enables you to insert graphic blocks and textual
reports from other projects in the composition of the project documentation. Once
you have selected this command, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for importing graphic blocks and

textual reports from other projects - the layout
The name of the current directory is located at the top of the dialog box, in the combo box
Look in. Since the created project documentation is saved in the file which has the same
name as the file containing the input data and with the extension *.twp_d, only the files with
the same extension, which are located in the current directory, are displayed in the central
part of the dialog box.
You are now required to select the desired file by clicking and activate the command field
Open soon after which a new dialog box opens up:
712
The dialog box for selecting blocks for importing

All graphic blocks and textual reports which are located in the selected file are displayed in the
combo box. For each of them, the name is written as well as the title of the chapter to which it
belongs. Selecting blocks to be imported in the project documentation is performed by turning
on appropriate check boxes.
The command fields in the lower part of the dialog box are used for the following purpose:
All
- once you have activated this command field, all graphic and
textual blocks in the combo box are selected.
None
- once you have activated this command field, all previously selected
blocks are deselected.
Selection inversion
- once you have activated this command field, all selected blocks are
deselected whereas all deselected blocks are selected.
Blocks can also be selected by activating commands from the menu which opens up upon
right-clicking on the title of the chapter to which a given block belongs.
The menu which opens up upon right-clicking on the chapter title
713
Select the chapter
- all blocks which belong to a given chapter are selected
Deselect the chapter - all blocks which belong to a given chapter are excluded from the
selection.
Activating the command field OK will result in closing the dialog box and all selected blocks
are inserted in the appropriate branch of the project documentation.
8.21.12 Saving the project documentation

Activating this icon will enable you to save the current contents of the project
documentation at any time during the process of working with it.
8.21.13 Printing the Design Documentation

When this icon is selected, a dialog box for entering the parameters for adjusting
the printing method opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for document printing

Whether you desire to print the whole document or only its individual pages is defined in the
part Print range of the dialog box. If you set the switch All to switched-on state, the
program is required to print the whole document, while if you set the switch Pages to
switched-on state, you can assign in the edit boxes to the right of this switch the serial
numbers of the first and the last pages that determine the part which is to be printed.
In edit box Number of copies you have the possibility to assign the number of copies to be
printed, while by setting the check box Print to file to switched-on state, you have the
possibility to create a data file that can be printed outside the surroundings of the program
instead of direct output to the printer.
By activating the command field OK, the printing process will start.
714
8.21.14 Export into RTF

By selecting the command Export into RTF, you have the possibility to transfer
the entire graphic document (*.twd file) into *.rtf format, which is readable for
almost all Windows text processors, including also Word. When this command is
activated, a dialog box having the following appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for export into RTF

A completely arbitrary name of the *.rtf data file that is being created can be assigned in edit
box Database, while whether you desire to export the whole report or only certain pages is
regulated in the Export options part of the dialog box. Since the size of the created RTF file
also depends on the quality of the images that are being exported, you have the possibility to
influence this parameter by slider Quality of images. It is clear that high quality of the
image will result in creating a considerably larger RTF file.
By activating the command field OK the export process will begin, and the duration of this
process will depend solely on the complexity and the size of design documentation. By
subsequent reading into Word, or some other text processor, you are free to edit the content
of design documentation exported in this way. This command can also be used when you
desire to send the design documentation to your business partners in digital form, although
printing in PDF format, which is also supported by the program within command Print, can
also be used for this purpose.
Note:
Since there are no technical possibilities to convert the content of the heading into
corresponding texts and tables, the heading is exported as an image (meta file). The
negative consequence of the former is that it is not possible to update the number of pages, if
established in the Tower heading. In such cases, it is better to create the appearance of the
standard heading in the Word itself and to exclude the heading from the Tower heading.
There is one more solution, not to insert the number of pages within the Tower heading but
instead to do this in Word.
Note:
Make sure that the margins assigned in Tower be harmonized with the maximal printing area
that is enabled in Word or any other text processor, into which the exported RTF file will
subsequently be read. Namely, Word, especially earlier versions, cannot print on the entire
paper area defined by the driver of the given printer. This means that Tower can print on a
larger area. For that reason, you may encounter a case that the created RTF file, when read
into Word, does not have all parts of the document printed along the edges of a page.
715
8.21.15 Returning to Post-processing Module

This command enables returning to the post-processing module. When activated,
the program first controls if any changes have been made in the document, and if
so, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.
If you select the command field Yes, all previously made changes will be saved in the
design, command field No will denote that you do not want the changes made to be saved,
while if you select command field Cancel, it will mean quitting the attempt to return into the
post-processing module.
8.21.16 Recovering corrupted documents

If for some reason your documents get corrupted and as a result fail to reopen,
there is a command envisaged for their recovering while still retaining the blocks. In other
words, by pressing simultaneously Ctrl and D keys in the Post-Processing module, a
dialog box of the following layout opens up:
Once you have selected the affirmative reply, defragmentation will be performed, that is the
report will be recovered, whereas selecting the negative reply will result in closing the dialog
box without having recovered the document previously.
If the check box do not ask me again. is on, the program will remember the last given
reply (Yes or No) and will use it during calling this command in the future, without opening
the dialog box.
8.21.17 Current Report Language

Since in practice a case may occur that you design for a foreign market, it would
surely be very convenient to have the design documentation in the given language. By
command Functionality, within the drop-down menu Setup, you have the possibility to
select the report language (see Chapter 3.5.2).
716
Closed list for selecting the report language

After changing the current report language, there will be no changes in the existing design
documentation, but all textual reports, as well as signatures of all graphic blocks generated
from then on will be written in the newly selected language. This means that the program
cannot translate automatically the previously created design from one language into another.
The reason for this is that the block signatures can be edited by the User and thus it is
impossible to translate them automatically. When the textual reports that are generated
automatically are concerned, there are no difficulties when the report language is changed,
since new generating will first delete the earlier reports, and then the new reports will be
generated in the current language.
Since the language in which the textual report/block signature was last generated is saved in
the document itself, in case of changing the report language, when the first attempt to export
the graphic block or to generate the textual report is made, the program will issue a warning
about the currently active language.
This warning serves as a reminder that texts in different languages will appear in the content
of one design.
717
8.21.18 Exporting the block to the clipboard

The graphic block with the current contents of the window on which the focus has
been placed can be transferred to the clipboard for some later use in another
program. For this purpose, the command Export the block to the clipboard
has been envisaged, which is located in the drop-down menu Tools within the
Post-Processing module. Similarly, this command can be activated either via the
displayed icon or by pressing simultaneously Ctrl and F2 keys. It is important
to remember that, the current state of the zoom will not affect the block contents.
However, the entire window contents will be exported.
The block is remembered in the clipboard as a bitmap. The bitmap size and resolution are
assigned in the dialog box which opens up upon right-clicking on the icon.
The dialog box which opens up upon right-clicking on the icon - the layout
This is the same dialog box as the dialog box which opens up upon right-clicking on the icon
Export the block. The bitmap size is assigned either by entering the desired value in the edit
boxes Rows/Columns, or by assigning the desired scale in the edit box Scale, whereas
the bitmap resolution is assigned by entering value in the edit box Resolution.
The usefulness of this command is immense. If, in the Word, for example, you are putting
the project documentation in order, by using the clipboard, you can include the desired graphic
block in the document.
Exporting the block to the clipboard can also be performed from the page editor,
by activating the displayed icon. This command operates in much the same way as
the command which is located in the Post-Processing module. The only
difference is that via this command, instead of the window contents, the selected
graphic block is exported to the clipboard.
718
8.21.19 Exporting the block visible part to the clipboard

The graphic block with part of the model which is currently displayed in the
window on which the focus has been placed can also be transferred to the
clipboard. Exporting the magnified part of the model to the clipboard is performed
either by selecting the command Export the block visible part to the
clipboard from the drop-down menu Tools or by clicking on the displayed icon.
Similarly, this command can be activated by pressing simultaneously Ctrl, Shift
and F2 keys.
All rules which apply to exporting the entire window contents to the clipboard via the command
Export the block to the clipboard also apply to this command.
8.21.20 Exporting the block to Bitmap or AutoCAD .DXF

Using the command Export the block to Bitmap or DXF enables you to save
the current view in the window on which the focus has been placed either in the
DXF format or as a bitmap of the assigned resolution. Exporting the block will be
enabled at every moment of operating with the program, regardless of the fact
whether some of the analysis results or the input data are currently displayed.
Once you have selected this command either from the drop-down menu Tools or
by clicking on the displayed icon, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for exporting the block to DXF

format or a bitmap - the layout
The radio buttons Export to BMP and Export to DXF are used for defining the type of
exporting.
The database name and its position on the disc are assigned in the edit box. These data can be
assigned via the standard Windows dialog box for saving files, which opens up when you
activate the command field
.
Exporting the block to bitmap or AutoCAD .DXF can be performed using either the parameters
which have been defined via the command Setup Settings for displaying the drawing on
the screen or the parameters which have been defined for displaying the drawing on the paper.
Which parameters will be used in course of exporting the block is defined by selecting one of
the two offered radio buttons: Export using printer parameters and Export using
display parameters.
719
The radio buttons which are used for selecting

parameters for exporting
If the radio button Export to DXF is selected, the combo box ACU length which is used
for selecting measurement units to be used in course of exporting blocks will also become
available for change.
The combo box for selecting measurement units

to be used in course of exporting to DXF
During this type of exporting, the database is saved with the dxf extension and each type of
element is exported to a special layer. Structural elements are exported to the
CONSTRUCTION layer, finite elements mesh to the FENET layer, legend to the LEGEND
layer and results to the RESULTS layer.
Exporting the block to the DXF format can also be performed from the page editor,
by activating the displayed icon. This command operates in the same way as the
command located in the data processing module. The only difference is that now
instead of the window contents it is used to export the selected graphic block to
FXF format.
When the radio button Export to BMP is selected, the lower part of the dialog box will
720
The dialog box for exporting the block

to a bitmap - the layout
The edit boxes Width and Height are used for entering the image width and height in
pixels. If the assigned dimension of an image is too big, you can subdivide it to an arbitrary
number of parts, by entering certain values in the edit boxes Number of Col. and Number
of Rows. Each of these parts is saved into a separate database.
Each picture is subdivided into four parts (two columns and two rows),
where each of them is placed in a separate database.
During this type of exporting, the database is saved with the assigned name and the .bmp
extension. If the picture is subdivided, each database name is formed by adding the row
number and the column number (in which the given part of the picture is located) to the
assigned name.
721
8.21.21 Exporting textual results to the file with *.txt

extension
All textual reports which have been generated in the program can be exported to
a separate file with *.txt extension. The reports are exported in the same format in which
they have been displayed in the program (in tables, for example), which makes them suitable
for importing into other programs that support the same file format, above all into Excel.
Exporting to a file with *.txt extension can be carried out from any dialog box in
which it is possible to generate textual reports, that is, which contains the
command field with the displayed icon. Activating this command field will result in
opening the standard dialog box for saving files.
The dialog box for saving files the layout

Now you must assign the desired name to the file and by activating the command field Save
perform the action of saving it in the selected directory.
In addition to the single export of textual reports, saving reports which have previously been
exported to the project documentation in the file with *.txt extension is also possible. For
this purpose, the command field has been envisaged, which is, in the page editor, placed
along the right edge of the screen. In other words, first you must select the textual block
which is exported, and then, by activating this command field, perform the action of saving it
in the *.txt file.
8.21.22 Printing Individual Drawings Directly

In this chapter, we shall explain the method of individual printing, i.e. the
procedure of printing only one graphic block without creating the design documentation. In the
previous part of the manual, we have explained the procedure of creating complete design
documentation. However, in course of operating with the program you may need to print only
one drawing, outside the surrounding of the design documentation. For such cases, command
Print, within drop-down menu File is provided. It is important which window is focused in
this command also, since the content of that window will be prepared for printing. After
selecting this command, a window similar to the window for operating with the design
documentation, opens.
722
Appearance of the window for individual printing

Practically, the graphic block, the content of which corresponds to the content of the window
that was focused immediately before activating this command, is exported by this procedure.
The size and orientation of the block are taken from the parameters for default characteristics
of graphic blocks, while the paper format exactly corresponds to the format selected for the
design documentation. Such operating regime exactly corresponds to the state of a design,
which contains only one graphic block. It is clear that the command for operating with the tree
will not be available, while the method of operating with other commands is exactly the same
as in the procedure of creating complete design documentation.
The program enables direct printing of blocks which are generated in the dialog box of certain
commands.
Majority of dialog boxes contain this command field, upon activating which its
contents are directly printed, regardless of the fact whether the contents of the
dialog box are graphic or textual.
723
9. Concrete Design
One of the very significant possibilities of this program is automatic design of
concrete sections on the basis of the calculated influences in the structure and the selected
standard. The program provides both design of surface elements (plates, walls) and design of
linear elements (columns, beams). It is clear that in the design procedure, only those
elements, to which the material type Concrete (see Chapter 3.1.1.) had been joined within
the input data, will be treated. The commands for changing the codes and for defining the
scheme of load combining are common to all concrete elements in the structure, while the
procedure of defining the input data, the design procedure and presenting the required
reinforcement are classified according to types of structural elements.
Note:
The design results, same as the data on adopted reinforcement are automatically saved only
when exiting the program and when going to other program modules. For that reason, it is
recommended to activate the command Save from time to time, in order to avoid
undesirable loss of design results due to power failure, or some other accident.
Note:
In case of the repeated structural analysis of the whole model, those elements which have
already been designed (beams, columns, slabs and walls) will retain their input data of
combining, designing and adopting reinforcement unless they have suffered changes of
geometry or cross sections.
9.1
Selecting the Codes for Design (Codes)
Before entering the design procedure itself, a standard in accordance with which
the calculation of the required reinforcement will be performed, needs to be selected. When
command Codes within the drop-down menu Design Concrete is selected, a dialog box
as the following one opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for selecting the current code

The current standard is changed by selecting simply from the closed list in the left part of
dialog box. When command field OK is activated, the dialog box will disappear from
screen, while the selected codes will be valid further on. In case that for some parts of
model, design results in accordance with some other standard already exist, the program
issue the following warning.
the
the
the
will
724
By activating the command field OK, all existing design results will be lost. That means that
all concrete sections in one model can be designed only in accordance with a same standard.
In this dialog box, in addition to the desired standard, it is also possible to define the global
parameters, which will be used by the program in its operation. Primarily they concern the
material characteristics (command fields Concrete and Reinforcing steel), and they are
kept separately for each of the offered standards. This means that you can define different
types of both concrete and reinforcing steel for each of the standards offered.
When command field Concrete is selected, a dialog box for defining the concrete
characteristics opens.
The presented list contains data for various concrete classes, while the working diagram of
concrete for the selected standard is presented in the right part of the dialog box. The concrete
characteristics are determined by its design pressure strength fck and by its design tensile
strength rd (data rd is only used in the part of calculating the reinforcement for accepting
the shearing stresses in beams and columns). You can change any of the data offered, while
you can arrange this list according to your desire by command fields
Add and
Delete.
When command field Reinforcing steel is selected, a dialog box for defining the
reinforcement characteristics opens.
725
"Name"
fyk
a column with types of reinforcement.

distension limit of steel.
volume density of steel.
This dialog box functions in exactly the same way as the dialog box for defining the concrete
quality.
9.2
Defining the Load Combining Pattern
In addition to all other input data, which need to be assigned immediately before
the design, the ruling static influences for reinforcement calculation surely need to be
determined. In the option of designing the concrete structural elements, the program offers
two possibilities: you can either set the ruling combination for the current load case, i.e. the
envelope of selected influences, according to your desire, or you can use the option of
combining the load automatically by the program. The option of combining the load
automatically by the program is surely much better and more convenient since in that case
you do not need to take care either of the partial safety coefficients or of the number of
possible combinations of simultaneous action of basic load cases. Since the program enables
each concrete structural element to be designed either for the current load case or for the
defined combining pattern, both procedures will be presented in the following text.
Design for the Current Load Case
It is understood by this method of determining the governing static influences that the
governing combination for the current load case needs to be set by command Load Case,
which is within the drop-down menu Influences, prior to designing the given concrete
structural element. In this method of defining the governing static influences for the design, it
is customary to regulate the values of safety coefficients by assigning the multipliers in load
combinations.
726
By command Load Case, combination:

1.35xI+1.5xII is set as the current load case
In addition to the possibility of calculating the reinforcement for the set current load case, the
program can also perform the design for several selected load cases. Namely, in that case you
need to set the switch Envelope to switched-on state by command Load Case, and to set
the symbol in column for all those load cases, i.e. for all those combinations, for
which you desire the design to be performed by the program.
By command Load Case, the envelope for all created

combinations is set for the current load case
In such operating mode, the required reinforcement for all selected loads will be calculated by
the program, and the result will surely be the maximal required reinforcement.
727
Defining the Load Combination Pattern Automatically
Command Load combinations scheme, which is contained within the drop-down menu
Design Concrete, will be available only in case that the standard, for which defining the
pattern of combining the basic load cases automatically is planned, is selected as the current
regulation.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the pattern of load combining
A list containing all basic load cases for which the structure has been calculated (the
combinations, if created, are not taken into account) is in the upper left part of the dialog box.
Other data presented in this dialog box always apply to the currently active load case, i.e. to
the row in this list box that is marked by a special color.
When this dialog box is entered for the first time, the program automatically joins as default
the character Undefined loading to all assigned basic load cases, which practically means
that the calculated influenced due to that load case will not be taken into account in calculating
the required reinforcement. If you click the mouse button over the arrow to the right of the
closed list, which is in the upper right part of the dialog box, a list containing all types of loads
that are planned for the set current standard opens.
Closed list for selecting the type of load
728
When you have assigned the corresponding character for the currently active basic load case,
you need to define whether the character of that load is alternative or not by selecting the
corresponding switch in the part Alternative load of the dialog box (in default, the program
sets the switch Yes to switched-on state only for seismic loading, while in all other cases the
switch No is active in default).
Switches that determine whether the selected loading is alternative or not

In case that, in addition to calculating the required reinforcement you also want to perform the
analysis of fissures and deflections, you will need to define the nature of all basic load cases,
with respect to the length of their duration.
The combo box for selecting the length of load duration

You will need to mark all the loads that you do not want to treat during the analysis of fissures
and deflections as Non-defined.
In case that the assigned basic loads have such character that some of them cannot act
simultaneously with other loads, you can additionally define such combining conditions (a
typical example is when in one load case wind action from left to right is analysed, and from
right to left in the other case) by command Do not combine with. Then one of these loads
needs to be selected and command field Do not combine with should be activated.
729
Dialog box for combining load cases

that cannot act simultaneously
The presented list contains all assigned basic load cases (arrow
will be present before the
row containing the load for which this dialog box has been opened), and now it is sufficient to
mark all loads that cannot act simultaneously with the selected one by a click on the mouse
button. If you click the mouse button over the load in the list that cannot act simultaneously
with the load for which this type of data is being defined, a symbol will be placed. The
previously selected load case is deselected by a click over its name, which is followed by
removal of the symbol
.
When you have selected all loads that cannot act simultaneously with the load for which the
conditions are being set, activate the command field OK after which this dialog box will be
closed. It should be mentioned that for seismic load cases, defining such data is not needed
since it is determined by the program that several seismic loads cannot act simultaneously.
Activating the command field Always combine with will result in opening the dialog box for
selecting loads without which the current load case cannot appear in a combination.
730
Working with this dialog box is exactly the same as within the command Load combination
(see chapter 3.2.2).
Dialog for defining load combination scheme allows selection of multiple load cases, with the
goal of assigning them the same criterion for combining: the type of load, duration,
alternation, and the criteria "Always combine with" and "Do not combine with". Selection is
done as in all other commands, using the Shift and Ctrl keys and the left mouse button.
Multiple load case selection in the dialogue for combination scheme

After selecting the command field Report, you may request from the program to display the
list of all combinations for which designing will be performed.
731
The dialog box for displaying created combinations

by the combination scheme the layout
As in majority of other dialog boxes, here as well, you are allowed either to export this textual
report to the project documentation, or send directly to print or export to TXT report by
selecting appropriate icons.
After pressing the button "Combination" the program converts automatically generated
combinations to load cases. If there are no previously created combinations, after activation of
this button program will display the following information:
Button "OK starts the conversion while "Cancel" cancels it.

If there are previously created combinations, after activation of the button "Combination", a
dialog of the following appearance will be displayed:
732
Button "Change" converts the combination scheme to load cases and deletes the existing
combinations, while the button "Add" converts them without the deletion.
When you have joined corresponding input data to all basic load cases, exit the dialog box for
defining the pattern of load combining by activating the command field OK. Since the
character of each of the basic load cases is now exactly known, in the course of the design the
program will know to create itself all possible combinations of simultaneous action of basic load
cases and it will know to join corresponding partial safety coefficients to basic load cases
automatically.
In case that structural elements that have already been designed for a previously defined
combining pattern exist in the model, changing any of the input data about the combining
pattern after exiting this dialog box will result in the following warning.
If command field OK is activated, all design results will be lost, in all parts of the model that
have been designed with the earlier combining pattern.
Note:
Design for the set current load case should be used only in case that creating automatically the
pattern of load combining is not provided for the selected standard. For those standards for
which creating automatically the pattern of load combining is provided, the combining pattern
for all structural elements except for floor slabs should be used. Since these structural
elements are usually subjected to pure bending due to vertical load, the governing load
combination can be easily predicted for them. In this way, you will considerably save time
required for design of floor structures. Namely, in slab design the required reinforcement is
calculated in all points in the finite element mesh, so a number of combinations of
simultaneous action of basic load that is to large in each designed point in the finite element
mesh may last very long.
9.3
Slab Design
Automatic design of area structural elements is reflected in that, that in each point
of the slab/wall the reinforcement area required by calculation is determined for each direction
of placing the reinforcement. The command for designing the area parts of the model (slabs,
walls) are within the drop-down menu Design Concrete Slabs. In order to make the
selection of commands from this menu easier, the icon Concrete: Slab design is provided,
which when selected, opens a menu with this group of commands.
733
Icon for fast selecting the commands from the drop-down menu
Design Concrete Slabs
In the further text of this manual we shall only use the term slab, while everything presented
will apply both to slabs and to walls.
9.3.1
Input Data
In order to fully determine the reinforcement design assignment, in addition to

choosing the codes and the governing loading, a series of other input data such as: concrete
quality, type of reinforcement, distance between the centroid of the tensioned reinforcement
and the edge of the section, way of reinforcing, etc. also need to be assigned. All these input
data will determine the way of calculating the required reinforcement in slabs. Since the
program also enables various input data for each slab individually to be assigned, two
commands are available. One of them is used to join same data to all slabs (Input data
Global), while the other serves to join same data only to a selected group of slabs (Input data
Local).
734
9.3.1.1 Input data Global

When this command is selected, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.

for defining the global input data
The input data that define the material characteristics and the distance between the centroid of
the reinforcement and the edge of the section are assigned in the left part of the dialog box.
The concrete and the reinforcement are selected from the closed lists the content of which is
determined by defined names of materials for the selected current code. As we have already
said at the beginning of this manual, both the content of the list of materials and their
corresponding characteristics can be defined for each of the standards within command
Codes, by command fields Concrete and Reinforcing steel. Type of reinforcing steel and
the distance from the section edge are defined separately for the top zone and for the bottom
zone. This means that, for instance, you have the possibility to place mesh reinforcement in
the bottom zone and deformed steel bars in the top zone. It should be mentioned that in walls,
the term top zone applies to that side of the wall that is closer to the observers eye when the
given wall is presented in the2D View window.
You can influence the method of determining the governing bending moments in slabs by
switches in the right part of the dialog box. The switches offered have the following meaning:
Support Regions When this switch is set to switched-on state, the program is required to
parabolically round all bending moment peaks in slabs in the positions of their supports
depending on the assigned dimensions of these supports.
Mxy When this switch is set to switched-on state, the program is required to also take into
account the influences due to twist moment Mxy in course of calculating the bending
moments. Now the Eurocod 2 suggested algorithm is applied. It also amounts to the increasing
of the competent bending moments Mx and My for the needed reinforcement design,
depending on their mutual relation, as well as the Mxy moment size, that acts in the observed
plate point. This algorithm consequence is the bending moment increasing on the tensile plate
as well as the arithmetical needed reinforcement obtaining on the plates opposite side. For the
ultimate moment bearing capacity, the following algorithm has been applied.
735
The convention that in the observed point My Mx is adopted in the presented block scheme.
The positive moment stretches the lower plate part and the reinforcing directions coincide with
the global coordinate axis directions. The algorithm is certainly to be considered in other cases
also, during which the influence signs My and Mx change their places, and they generally relate
to the bending moments that act in the given reinforcing direction l, i.e. in the reinforcing 2
direction.
The used signs in the algorithm have the following meaning:
Mx
arithmetical obtained bending moment in the observed plate point in the global X-axis
direction
My
arithmetical obtained bending moment in the observed plate point in the global Y-axis
direction
Mxy arithmetical obtained twisting moment in the observed plate point
Mdx authoritative bending moment for the necessary reinforcing design in the global X axis
direction, on the stretched plate side
Mdy authoritative bending moment for the necessary reinforcing design in the global Y axis
direction, on the stretched plate side
Mdx authoritative bending moment for the necessary reinforcing design in the global X axis
direction, on the pressed plate side
Mdy authoritative bending moment for the necessary reinforcing design in the global Y axis
direction, on the pressed plate side
We do not recommend this method of static influences determining, except in case of special
structures, in which neglecting the twist moments would result in considerable error. In any
case, it is up to the User to decide if these moments will also be introduced into calculating the
required reinforcement.
"LCS of plate determines the default reinforcing direction" - Check box that determines
if dimensioning of panels will be done according to a given local coordinate system of a panel
(set in command "Impacts on a panel in a given LCS"). This way, even without setting
reinforcement, you can display numerically required reinforcement in desired direction.
736
When command field OK is activated, the assigned input data will be joined to all slabs in the
model. Since the program allows various input data to be assigned to each of the slabs, you
may encounter a case that when this command is activated, in case that you have previously
assigned other input data to some of the slabs by command Input data Local, some of the
fields remain empty, i.e. the switches are misted.
Empty field for Concrete indicates that same concrete quality

has not been joined to all slabs in the model
Misted appearance of the switch Support Regions indicates

that moderation of support bending moments was required
for some slabs while it was not required for others
In such cases, activating the command field OK will result in changing only those input data
that are clearly written in the dialog box.
In case that slabs, for which design has already been performed, exist in the model,
subsequent change of input data will result in issuing the following warning when command
field OK is activated.
737
Selecting the command field OK will result in loss of design results in all previously designed
slabs.
9.3.1.2 Input data Local

When this command is selected, the standard selecting procedure is entered.
<0 sel.> Input data for slabs - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End >):
Namely, all slabs, for which input data need to be changed, now need to be selected. Upon
completed selection, the program will open a dialog box with the following appearance.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the local input data
This dialog box is almost the same as the dialog box for defining the global input data except
that now three new switches have been added:
Symmetrical reinforcement When this check box is set to switched-on state, symmetrical
reinforcement is required from the program. This option makes sense only in walls, and thus
the program sets this switch to switched-on state in default only in vertical walls.
Bending only When this switch is set to switched-on state, a faster algorithm for calculating
the required reinforcement can be required from the program. Namely, in such mode of
program operation, the program will consider only the bending moments, while the normal
forces will be completely ignored. It is clear that it makes sense to set this switch to switchedon state only in horizontal slabs subject to vertical loading.
Apply to all panels of the same set - Check box that allows assigning one input data to all
panels of the same set.
738
Since the change of input data automatically results in loss of previous design results, the
information whether the selected slabs are designed or not is written in the lower right corner
of the dialog box.
The part of the dialog box in which the information

whether the selected slabs are designed or not is written
In case that selected slabs have already been designed, subsequent change of input data will
result in issuing the following warning when command field OK is activated.
Selecting the command field OK will result in loss of design results in all previously selected
slabs for which the input data are changed.
Note:
Default input data are set by the program in accordance with the following rule:
- The switch Support Regions is set in default to switched-on state for all slabs and walls in
the model.
- The switch Mxy is set in default to switched-off state for all slabs and walls in the model.
- The switch Symmetrical reinforcement is set in default to switched-on state only for
vertical walls in the model.
- The switch Bending only is set in default to switched-on state only for horizontal slabs in
the model.
- The material quality is written in the Registry every time it is newly assigned, so when
designing new models, the data for the given standard that have been immediately
previously assigned are set in default.
739
9.3.2
Calculating the Required Reinforcement
When you have assigned all input data, first the standard selecting procedure is
entered by selecting the command Design.
<0 sel.> Slab design - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Recent selection / Deselect / <End >):
Namely, you are now expected to select all slabs for which you desire the required
reinforcement to be calculated. After completing the selecting procedure, the program will first
check if the selected slabs have already been previously designed, and if so, it will issue a
Warning about the status of selected slabs

You are now expected to select the governing loading for all selected slabs that need to be
designed. Therefore, for the design, it is necessary to select only those slabs that you want to
design for same governing loading. This means that you have the possibilities either to
perform the design for the set current load case or for the defined pattern of load combination.
In case that within the command Load combinations all loads have Undefined loading
character, this switch will be inactive. The command field OK will also be inactive all until you
clearly define one of the two possible ways of selecting the governing load by a click on the
mouse button. When command field OK is activated, the design procedure in all points in the
finite element mesh of the previously selected slabs will begin. After completed design, the
program will be ready for post processing, which will be dealt with in the following chapter.
Note:
Once again it shall be mentioned that when floor structures are concerned, it is recommended
that immediately before the design, the combination of vertical load simultaneous action with
corresponding partial safety coefficients is set as the current load case. Within the input data,
select pure bending as the calculating method and demand the design for the set current load
case. In this way, you will save considerable time required for calculating the required
reinforcement. In addition, in case of large models, the option of designing the selected parts
of the model only can also considerably save time. If we take as an example a large building
with repeating geometry of the typical floor, you can select only one of the typical floors in
order to save time.
740
9.3.3
Presenting the Design Results
After selecting the command Viewing results, the program will immediately
display in the 2D view window the required reinforcement area in designed slabs and walls.
used for changing fast the reinforcement type to be viewed.
The combo box for changing fast the reinforcement type

The combo box contains only those reinforcement types which are most frequently used. Other
otpions can be selected from the dialog box which opens up after selecting either the option
To enable better visibility of the design results, and because of the possibility of double
reinforcement, i.e. the possibility of having reinforcement both in the top and in the bottom
zones in one point in the slab, the required reinforcement is presented either in the top or in
the bottom zone (switches Top and Bottom) in one step.
In the part Reinforcement direction of the dialog box, you have the possibility to demand
the view of results in one of the two possible directions (switches Direction 1 and
Direction 2), or you can demand simultaneous view of required reinforcement for both
directions (switch Both directions) for the selected zone. In default, the program sets the
reinforcement directions in direction of local axes of the given slab, in such way that direction
1 corresponds to local X-axis, and direction 2 corresponds to the local Y-axis. In case you want
741
to adopt some other direction for the reinforcement direction, command Adopting
reinforcement needs to be activated (see Chapter 9.3.4).
The meaning of the edit box Div. Number as well as the combo box for selecting saved
configurations is quite the same as when the command Legend, whci will be explained in
more detail later on, is activated. Therefore, the role these two parameters have is to allow
viewing the required reinforcement isolines in the desired format, without calling the command
Legend.
If only one reinforcement direction is required to be viewed, the results are then presented by
isolines, and thus you have the possibility to select the type of isolines (switches Empty and
Full) in the part Isolines Type of the dialog box.
3D - Check box is enabled only if isoline type is set to "Full" or "Empty". It enables relief
displaying of isolines in 3D view.
"Show symbol for LCS" - This check box is enabled only if in the global input data, check box
"LCS panels determine the default direction of reinforcement" is turned on. It determines
whether or not symbols that show orientation of the LCS of a panel will be drawn.
When command field OK is activated, this dialog box will be closed, and you will obtain the
view in the required way of design results in the screen. It is clear that the design results will
be presented only in the previously designed parts of the model.
The symbol that displays orientation of the LCS of a panel
742
Presentation of required reinforcement in the bottom zone

for Direction 1, by empty isolines

for Direction 1, by full isolines
View of necessary reinforcement in the bottom zone for Direction 1",

relief display of isolines in 3D view
743
In case you desire simultaneous presentation of required reinforcement for both directions,
then you need to set the switch Both Direction to switched-on state. Since isolines are not
used for presenting in this way, but instead the reagions are hatched by lines in corresponding
colours, the switch Empty will be inactive.
Simultaneous presentation of required reinforcement

in the bottom zone for both reinforcement directions
The set hatching lines correspond to the assigned reinforcement directions, and they are set
only in those places where reinforcement in that direction is required by calculations. In those
parts of the slab where these two hatchings overlap, reinforcement is required in both
directions. The color of set hatching lines corresponds to the intensity of the required design
reinforcement in the given point, while the maximal value presented in the legend corresponds
to the greater design reinforcement required in one of the directions (for example, the
maximal required reinforcement for direction 1 is: 3.86 cm2/m, and for direction 2: 6.68
cm2/m, then 6.68 will be set in the legend as the extreme value).
Disregarding which way of presenting the required reinforcement is selected, by isolines or by
hatching, the option of reading the value of the required reinforcement by moving the mouse
will also be available. This information is written by the program in the bottom right corner of
the screen, and it is intended for quick inspection of the design results.
Space provided for presenting the design reinforcement, in the position

determined by the current position of the mouse pointer
744
In case that only one reinforcement direction is required to be presented, the program will
write only one value that corresponds to the required reinforcement in the given direction,
while in the option of presenting the results simultaneously for both directions, the first
number will represent the required reinforcement for direction 1 while the second number will
represent the required reinforcement for direction 2.
In the procedure of processing the results of calculated required reinforcement,
the command Legend has a very significant role disregarding whether you have
decided the results to be presented for one of the directions or simultaneously in
both directions.
This command operates exactly the same as in analysis of static influences in area structural
elements. Namely, when it is selected, when the design results are presented in the screen,
you have the possibility to select all slabs for which you desire to edit the list of possible
reinforcement design values.
<0 sel.> Key to reinforcement Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
The possibility of selecting several slabs in the model has a special application when you desire
to unify the division of design reinforcement in related parts of the structure (typical floors,
walls, etc.). The influences will then be presented in same isoline intervals in all previously
selected slabs. It should be mentioned that in this procedure you will only be able to select
those slabs that have already been designed. After completed selection, a dialog box in which
the values of calculated required reinforcement, instead of static influences, will now be
presented.
Appearance of the dialog box for editing

the calculated required reinforcement
This means that by command Legend you have the possibility to divide the interval of
isolines into segments the values of which exactly correspond to the adopted reinforcement. If
for example, you wish to place some minimal reinforcement 8/20 (Aa=2.50 cm2) everywhere
in the bottom zone, and to cover only places where it is really necessary by stronger
reinforcement, then the interval of the isolines needs to be divided in the following way:
745
When command field OK is activated, the program will denote by particular colours all places
in the model where minimal reinforcement 8/20 is adopted, slightly stronger reinforcement,
let us say 8/10 (Aa=5.00 cm2), and finally reinforcement for covering the extreme values
10/10 (Aa=7.90 cm2).
The Tower program enables creating and saving configurations with assigned prospective
values of isolines of the required reinforcement and description of each of them.
The dialog box for editing the value of

the required reinforcement - the layout
For this purpose, the command field
Library has been envisaged, upon selecting which,
a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
746
The dialog box for creating legend

configurations - the layout
The dialog box is divided into two parts. The left part is used for assigning prospective values
of isolines of the required reinforcement in the bottom zone (positive values), whereas the
right part is used for assigning prospective values of isolines in the top zone (negative values).
Adding a new row to the combo box is performed by activating the command field
. The new
row is inserted in the combo box right after the currently active one, and adding is possible
until the maximum number of 20 divisions is reached.
A new row has beed added to the combo box

The selected row is removed from the combo box via the command field
The value of the required reinforcement isoline is assigned in the column [cm2/m], whereas
the desired description is entered in the column Description. Since the values of isolines
must be in the growing order upon each change, the program will automatically update their
sequence in the table.
747
The values of isolines and descriptions corresponding

to Q meshes have been assigned
The field Description enables entering simply a letter of the Greek alphabet .which is
frequently used for marking the reinforcement section. To enable viewing this letter in the
field, you must enter %f and the program will automatically substitute those two signs with
the letter of the Greek alphabet.
If one table only has been created and a second one should contain identical or similar data, in
order to prevent repeating unnecessarily the same procedure, the program enables their
copying from one to another table. For this purpose, the command fields
and
have been
envisaged.
The data from the left part have been copied to the right
part of the dialog box via the command field
Since in practice it quite often happens that the same values of isolines are used, the program
enables saving them in the database. For this purpose, the command field
Save has
been envisaged, upon activating which a dialog box for assigning the name of the created
configuration will open up:
748
Once you have selected the command field OK, the program will close the dialog box and
save the configuration in the database. From this moment on, the assigned name will keep
appearing in the combo box and, by selecting it, the assigned data can be imported at any
time.
The combo box for selecting saved configurations

The command field
from the combo box.
Delete has been envisaged for removing the current configuration
Once you have activated the command field OK, the program will return to the main dialog
box of this command, accepting all the assigned data. Unless the configuration has been
saved, upon exiting the dialog box, an appropriate warning message will apear and it will be
possible to use the configuration only until exiting the program.
The name of the current configuration is now displayed in the combo box in the main dialog
box of this command, whereas the prospective values for isolines of the required reinforcement
are displayed in the left part of the dialog box. If the reinforcement from the bottom zone is
displayed in the selected slabs, these values are taken from the left table, whereas if the
reinforcement from the top zone is displayed, the values are taken from the right table.
749
The values of isolines saved in the current

configuration have been displayed
It should be noted that all the assigned values for isolines will not be displayed in the box, but
only those which are less than the maximum value of the required reinforcement in the
selected slabs. Maximum value of the required reinforcement is displayed in the last row in the
combo box when the reinforcement in the bottom zone is displayed, that is, in the first row
when the reinforcement in the top zone of the selected slabs is displayed.
The check boxes View the value and View the description are available for editing only
when a saved configuration has been selected from the combo box. These check boxes are
also used for adjusting viewing the legend table on the screen. The state of the check box
View the value defines whether values of the required reinforcement will be displayed in the
table, whereas the state of the check box View the description defines whether the assigned
descriptions will be displayed. It is important to remember that at least one of these two check
boxes must be turned on at all times.
750
The check boxes for defining viewing

the legend table on the screen
Activating the command field OK will result in closing the dialog box and displaying the
required reinforcement on the screen in accordance with the assigned parameters.
The reinforcement in the slab bottom zone for both directions

has been displayed
The combo box for selecting the saved configurations is located in the dialog box of the
command Viewing results, so that the required reinforcement can be displayed in the desired
format even without calling the Legend command.
751
The combo box for selecting saved configurations

within the dialog box Viewing results
In case that the presentation of required reinforcement by isolines is not
sufficiently clear and visible to you, then you have the possibility to present the
arrangement of the required reinforcement by diagrams in arbitrarily selected
sections by command Section.
It should be mentioned that the command Section will be available to be activated only if in
the selected reinforcement zone the view of design reinforcement for one of the two possible
directions was required. In case that simultaneous presentation of required reinforcement for
both directions was required, then command Section will not be available.

for reinforcement direction 2, by section diagram
When drawing the diagram of required reinforcement the program presents only the
reinforcement required by calculations in the corresponding zone, i.e. all ordinates in the
diagram are on the same side. The option of assigning the section width, which will result in
simplifying the required design reinforcement on the assigned band width, will also be
available within command Section.
In case you have assigned in certain zones of the model reinforcement directions that do not
coincide with the directions of local axes of the given slab by command Adopting
reinforcement, then arrow symbols, indicating the adopted reinforcement directions in a
752
given region, will be placed within those regions by the program. In the remaining parts of the
model, the adopted default reinforcement direction corresponding to direction of local axes of
the given plate is applied.
The placed arrow symbols clearly indicate the adopted reinforcement

direction in the marked parts of the model
If simultaneous presentation of results for both directions is required, then the placed hatching
lines in those regions will be in the adopted reinforcement directions. In any case, disregarding
if view of only one or simultaneous view of both reinforcement directions was required, the
values of required reinforcement in each point of the model correspond to the performed
design for assigned reinforcement directions.
Note:
The dialog box for presenting the calculation results also contains the switch Adopting
reinforcement. Namely, when this switch is set to switched-on state, the regions of adopted
reinforcement will be established in the screen, and the isolines will represent the difference
between the required and the adopted reinforcement. The role of this switch is to bring the
program into that state which corresponds to the view on the screen when command for
adopting reinforcement is activated. The method of reinforcement adopting will be dealt with in
more detail in the following chapter.
9.3.4
Adopting the Reinforcement
The command Adopting reinforcement is intended for two purposes. One of

them is to adopt concrete reinforcement in accordance with the design results, while the other
is when you desire to change the default assigned reinforcement directions in certain parts of
the model. The option of reinforcement adopting is surely not indispensable, but in case that
the geometry of the model is such that it is necessary to assign reinforcement angles different
than those assigned in default, then you will surely have to define the parts of the model in
which these angles are different by this command. The regions assigned by this command are
common to both purposes. Namely, they determine both the adopted reinforcement and the
selected reinforcement directions. When this command is selected, the command bar attains
the following appearance.
<_> First point of reinforcing region Bottom zone (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle / Offset /
<End> / Set / Layout / Radial):
The User is now expected to assign the region in which same reinforcement will be placed in
assigned directions. The procedure of drawing the closed polygonal line corresponds exactly to
753
the procedure of drawing other surface entities in the program. Since the reinforcement can be
adopted either in the top or in the bottom zone, a comment clearly indicating if the top or the
bottom zone is currently being dealt with is written in the command bar. The current zone is
changed by selecting the sub-option Layout which is constantly present on the command
bar. When this sub-option is selected, a dialog box having the following appearance opens.
This dialog box exactly corresponds to the dialog box that opens within the command for
presenting the design results. The only difference is in that that this dialog box also contains
the switch None. When this switch is selected, the results of required design reinforcement
will not be presented at all for the selected reinforcement zone. This means that by selecting
the sub-option Layout, the current zone for which the reinforcement regions are being
adopted is changed, and the way in which the required reinforcement is to be presented on the
screen is regulated. By activating the command field OK, the program will return to the
procedure of assigning the regions, and the results of reinforcement design will be presented
on the screen in the selected way.
After assigning the geometry of the region in which same reinforcement needs to be adopted,
the program will require from the command bar the directions of reinforcement in the given
region to be determined.
Direction 1 Angle (Inherit LCS) <0>:
"Inherit LCS" - Sub-option appears on the command line only if in the global input data,
check box "LCS of plate determines the default reinforcing direction" is turned on. After its
activation, the program will automatically set the direction of reinforcement in direction of the
local coordinate systems of panels.
The angle can be assigned either from the keyboard in angles or by selecting two points in the
drawing. A click on the right mouse button will denote acceptance of the default value 0. After
selecting the reinforcement direction 1, the program will require from the command bar the
reinforcement direction 2 to be determined.
Direction 2 Angle <90>:
Regardless of the way directions of reinforcement were set (using the option "Inherit LKS" or
by setting the angle), after defining them a dialog of the following appearance will be
displayed.
754
Appearance of the dialog box for adopting the reinforcement

in the assigned region in the model
By this dialog box, the exactly adopted reinforcement is joined to the assigned region. The list
presented in the dialog box functions in exactly the same way as any other list in the program
for joining numerical data sets. In the top of the dialog box, the program presents the extreme
values of required design reinforcement found in the assigned region. Data As,reqd= relates
to direction 1, while data As,reqd= relates to assigned direction 2 of reinforcing. Areas
As,prov= and As,prov= that correspond to the current data set and which are calculated
from the assigned data in columns: 1, e1, 2, e2 and n are presented in the row
below the previous data.
1 e1 2 e2 n-
diameter of adopted reinforcement for reinforcement direction 1

bar spacing in adopted reinforcement for reinforcement direction 1
diameter of adopted reinforcement for reinforcement direction 2
bar spacing in adopted reinforcement for reinforcement direction 2
reinforcement area multiplicator this value is multiplied by the adopted reinforcement
area, and it will be included in the mark contents if it is different from 1
In column Name, you can also assign a textual description of the given data set, which will
later be written in the dimension of the given region as information on adopted reinforcement.
Since either welded meshes or always a certain number of same profiles are mostly used in
practice, you can create your own library of typical reinforcement to avoid assigning constantly
the same data. By selecting the command field Library, a dialog box for defining the desired
reinforcement types opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for editing the typical reinforcement library
755
You can arrange this library in accordance with your own desire and needs by command fields
Add and
Delete. Since the program enables existence of several reinforcement
libraries, the title of the currently active library: Tower.$net is written in the heading of this
dialog box. To create a new library of typical reinforcement, you first need to create a copy of
the existing library by command field
Save As.
Assign the new name of the library in edit box File Name, and activate command field
Save. After returning to the basic dialog box for editing the typical reinforcement library,
perform all necessary changes and you will obtain the desired content of the new library. A
dialog box for reading in any of the previously created reinforcement libraries is opened by
command field Open.
The assigned current library of typical reinforcement will be respected by the program in its
operation, and thus all reinforcement from the set current library will be offered in the lists for
selecting the typical reinforcement.
Almost the same logic is applied in selecting typical reinforcement as with libraries of materials
used in the program for structural elements. Namely, when command field OK is selected,
this dialog box closes, and the data from the current row are joined to the current set of
reinforcement.
756
Characteristics of selected typical reinforcement from the library

are joined to the current data set
When you have selected the reinforcement set that will be joined to the assigned region in the
model, activate command field OK, and soon after the program will place a diagonal line
between two furthermost points on the contour of the assigned region, and it will write on it
the information on the adopted reinforcement and on assigned directions of placing the
reinforcement.
Dimension line placed in the assigned reinforcement region

In case you have assigned any text within the selected reinforcement set in column Title, the
program will write only the assigned title instead of the reinforcement radius and spacing. The
position of the dimension line can be subsequently changed by command Dimension, which
will be dealt with in more detail in Chapter 9.3.6.
In case you have adopted reinforcement larger than maximally required reinforcement in the
assigned region, the hatching will then completely disappear from that region, which means
that no reinforcement is needed any more within that region. If you have adopted less
reinforcement than maximally required, the program will mark by corresponding hatching only
those parts in which reinforcement adopted in this way is not sufficient. When the mouse
pointer is moved along the parts of the newly set hatching, the program will present on the
status bar those values that represent the difference between the maximally required and the
adopted reinforcement in that point as the required reinforcement area.
757
The newly placed hatching clearly indicates that the adopted reinforcement
is not sufficient in all parts of the given region
The same also applies if only one reinforcement direction is selected to be presented, i.e. if the
presentation of required reinforcement by isolines is required. The set isolines will represent
the difference between the design reinforcement and the adopted reinforcement.
The set isolines represent the difference between the design reinforcement
and the adopted reinforcement in the given region
When you have adopted the required reinforcement in the assigned region, the program will
continue requiring from the command bar a new reinforcement region to be assigned all until
you mark the end of this command by a click on the right mouse button. This means that the
previously described procedure needs to be repeated all until you adopt the required
reinforcement in all parts of the model in both zones.
758
View of completely adopted reinforcement in the bottom zone
View of completely adopted reinforcement in the top zone

In case that this command is used only to change the default reinforcement directions, it is
clear that only regions in which the reinforcement directions are different than the directions
set as default then need to be assigned. In regions assigned in this way, it is makes no
difference which reinforcement will be adopted, since this command is used only to obtain the
design reinforcement in assigned directions.
If in the procedure of adopting the reinforcement you set the switch None to switched-on
state by sub-option Layout, the program will not open automatically the dialog box with sets
of adopted reinforcement but instead it will join the current data set to the assigned region.
The data on the current set of adopted reinforcement is constantly written at the beginning of
the command bar, and you can call the dialog box for selecting the current set of adopted
reinforcement by selecting the sub-option Set, which is also present at the command bar.
The program will also behave in the same way in case you have activated the command for
adopting the reinforcement immediately prior to the procedure of reinforcement design.
When establishing the reinforcement regions that overlap completely or partially, the principle
of superposition applies. That is, in the overlapped parts, the reinforcement from both regions
is superposed and it participates in covering the reinforcement required by the design in that
part of the model. A typical example of justifying the superposition is when reinforcement is
placed in the top zone above columns.
759
View of required reinforcement in the top zone

On the basis of the established hatching, it can clearly be seen that reinforcement in both
directions is required only above the internal columns, while reinforcement only in the
corresponding direction of bearing is required in other parts of the model. For that reason,
reinforcement only in the direction of global Y-axis is adopted above the horizontal beam, while
reinforcement only in the direction of global X-axis is adopted above the vertical beams. In this
way, the design reinforcement above the internal columns is covered by adopted
reinforcement in both directions.
View of adopted reinforcement in the top zone

If you desire to establish a region over a previously assigned one, but in such way that the
principle of superposition does not apply, but instead that only reinforcement from the newly
established region is adopted in the overlapped part, first you need to establish a hole in the
existing region by command Hole, and then to define a region with the newly adopted
reinforcement along the contour of the hole. Command Hole will be dealt with in more detail
in the next chapter.
760
Note:
It should be mentioned that all options as in drawing the arbitrary polygonal line are available
when drawing a region. Pay attention to sub-option Band which appears on the command
bar as an option in drawing a polygonal line. This method of drawing a polygonal line may be
very convenient when reinforcement is placed in the top zone above linear supports and
beams. When establishing a region, you should have in mind that a region can also be
assigned outside the overall size of the slab, i.e. over a hole in the slab, and the program itself
will remove the surpluses established in this way and correct the geometry of the assigned
region. In this way, you can considerably speed up drawing of the region without taking the
exact geometry of the slab contour into account.
Radial Adopting of the Reinforcement in Plates
Selecting the sub-option Radial, which is located on the command bar right after selecting
the command Adopting reinforcement will result in starting the procedure of radial
reinforcing.
<-> First point of reinforcing region Bottom zone Radial (Contour / Rectangle / cIrcle /
Offset / <End> / Set / Layout / Parallel)
The sub-option choice returns to the basic command bar shape for reinforcement adopting i.e.
to the ordinary (non radial) reinforcement adopting procedure. The action of adopting the
radial procedure is developed in such way that the field, where the reinforcement surface is to
be set, is defined first both in the central and radial direction. When the contour of the desired
reinforcing field is defined, the program will from the command bar give a request for
assigning a central point, from which the radial reinforcing begins.
Center of radial reinforcement:
If panel reinforcing is made according to the local coordinate system of the panel which has a
radial LCS, the program will provide the option for setting the center of the radial LCS as the
central point from which the radial reinforcement will start. After setting geometry of the area
in which it is necessary to adopt reinforcement, the command line will show:
Center of radial reinforcement (Inherit the center of LCS):
"Inherit the center of LCS" - Sub-option appears on the command line only if in the global
input data, check box "LCS of plate determines the default reinforcing direction" is turned on.
After its activation, the program will automatically position the central point from which radial
reinforcement starts to the center of radial LCS of a panel.
After choosing the central point, the problem will be completely defined, i.e. the program will
be able to calculate, within the assigned field, the maximum needed reinforcement both in
tangential and radial direction.
761
Dialog box for radial reinforcement adopting

This dialog box is very similar to the dialog for normal reinforcement adopting, although the
radial reinforcement adopted sets are completely independent from normal reinforcement
adopted sets.
The necessary tangential reinforcement is expressed by a necessary surface along the length
unit in radial direction, while the radial reinforcement cannot be expressed in such way, since
its surface by the length unit in tangential direction varies from circle center moving. This is
why the radial reinforcement is expressed by the total necessary surface onto the entire circle.
The facts on necessary surface of the tangential (As, reqd.) and radial
(As, reqd) reinforcement are copied in the dialog box top.
The necessary tangential reinforcement is adopted by choosing the bar diameter (column 1)
and assigning their mutual distance (column e1). The radial reinforcement is adopted by a
chosen bar diameter (column 2) and by bars numbers on the complete circle (column
n/2)
762
The adopted reinforcement is 16/15cm cm in the tangential

direction and 5616 in the radial direction.
By choosing the command field OK, the program will, in the assigned field, set the adopted
radial reinforcement.
In the spot level content, for radial direction reinforcement, a central angle
fact that is formed by radial bars is copied along with the number of its pieces
In the case that the assigned radial reinforcing field does not present a complete circle, the
complete circle radial reinforcement bars numbers are then adopted in the dialog box, and the
exact bars number, which is needed on the circle part that is defined by the assigned geometry
field, will be copied on the spot level.
763
The program copied on the spot level that 2916 has been
adopted for the assigned field, although it has been assigned in the given data
set that it is necessary to adopt 5616 for a complete circle
9.3.5
Generating Automatically the Areas with Adopted

Reinforcement in Slabs
Since the procedure of defining the area in which the same type of reinforcement
needs to be adopted may take quite some time, we have created a command by which this
procedure can be completely automatized. When command Generate areas of
reinforcement is selected, a message that the User is expected to select the slabs for which
he desires the areas to be automatically generated appears on the command bar.
<0 sel.> Generate regions of reinforcement - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras
/ selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End>):
After the selection has been completed, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for generating automatically

the areas with adopted reinforcement in selected slabs
The switchesTop zone and Bottom zone are used for selecting the zone for which you
want generating area autiomatically. This means that, you are allowed to request from the
program to generate the area either in both zones or in just one zone.
The value assigned in the edit box Width represents the band area width in the top zone, on
one side of the support. By assigning a decimal number in the edit box 2 x Lo x, you are
enabled to increase width of the area to be generated for part of the span, on the given side of
the support. It should be noted that, the assigned decimal number will be multiplied by the
764
light-colored opening of the Lo span, i.e. the given span reduced for the dimensions of the
supports defining the given field.
Switch Foundations is used to regulate whether floor structure or foundation plate is
considered. Namely, if this switch is set to switched-on state, it means that a foundation plate
is considered, and thus the concepts top zone and bottom zone will obtain the opposite sense.
This is very significant since the adopted rules for generating the areas refer separately to the
top and separately to the bottom zone. When the command field OK is activated, the process
of area generating will begin in accordance with the following rules:
- In case that any of the previously set reinforcing areas already exists in the selected slabs,
the program will first remove it and next it will generate new areas. The reason for this is in
the fact that the principle of superposition applies in course of adopting the reinforcement in
slabs, and undesired errors, i.e. doubling the areas with adopted reinforcement, are thus
avoided.
- When generating the areas in the bottom zone, a rule applies that they be bordered by
beams and supports, i.e. that the zone is not bisected by any of these linear entities. Angles
0 and 90 are always adopted as reinforcing directions.
- Areas in the top zone are always rectangular, and they are established above all beams and
linear supports/walls. The directions of these linear entities determins the middle line of a
band rectangular area, and its width is determined by the assigned data Width in the
dialog box. The direction normal to the direction in which the linear entity, above which the
influences are being covered, spreads is always adopted as the main reinforcing direction,
while direction 2 is always normal to direction 1.
Presentation of automatically generated reinforcing areas in the bottom zone

To all areas generated in this way the program automatically joins the reinforcement defined
by the current data set, so you only need to join subsequently to these areas that
reinforcement, which is needed to completely cover the calculated required reinforcement, by
command Modify Sets.
Since it is quite difficult to establish automatically the expected reinforcing areas in the top
zone, and in addition, this procedure does not include the influences above point
supports/walls, we recommend that you use this command only for establishing the areas in
the bottom zone. Surely, you can also require the areas in the top zone to be generated if the
geometry is such that a good operation result can be expected from this command.
765
9.3.6
Manipulating the Reinforcement Regions
When the adopted reinforcement regions are presented on the screen, and none of
the commands is active, the program offers a series of options for manipulating them. To bring
the program into such operating mode, you need to activate the command Adopting
reinforcement and to exit it, or to set the switch Adopting reinforcement to switched-on
state by command Viewing results.
Program status when commands for manipulating

the adopted reinforcement regions are available
The program will remain in this operating mode all until you activate the command Reset or
any other command for processing the results, which will remove the established regions of
adopted reinforcement from the screen.
All commands from the drop-down menu Modify operate in exactly the same way as in the
data input module, except that here only assigned reinforcement regions can be selected for
manipulation. This means that instead of drawing each reinforcement region individually, you
have the possibility to adopt the reinforcement in all parts of the model in a much faster and
easier way by commands for manipulation (copy, mirror, rotation, delete, etc.).
By command Copy, the previously assigned region

is also established in other parts of the model
766
It should be mentioned that the command Modify sets is contained both in the menu
Modify and in the menu Design Concrete Slabs. It is the same command, but since it
is relatively frequently used, it is placed in both menus.
In addition to commands from the menu Modify, command Hole will also be available to be
activated in this operating mode of the program. This command operates in exactly the same
way as in the data input module, except that here the holes are placed only within the
assigned regions in the currently presented reinforcement zone (top/bottom). Since the
principle of superposition applies in establishing the region with adopted reinforcement,
existence of such command is indispensable, when within a previously assigned region you
desire replacement instead of superposition of reinforcement.
If in addition to the region with adopted reinforcement, islones of missing reinforcement are
also presented in the screen, due to operating speed the program will not update them after
each of the commands for manipulating the regions but only upon explicit demand by the
User.
If you right-click over the icon Concrete: Slab design, the presented isolines
will be updated to correspond to the current state of the reinforcement region in
the model. The isolines of required reinforcement are updated automatically only
by activating the commands Adopting reinforcement and Viewing results.
If in the course of assigning the reinforcement region, the position of its dimension line is
automatically determined, you have the possibility to change it by selecting the command
Dimension. When this command is activated, the command bar obtains the following
appearance.
<0 sel.> Dimension Select (<End>):
The User is now expected to select the region in which he desires to change the position of the
dimension line. After completed selection, the program will require from the command bar two
points that will determine the new position of the dimension line to be selected.
First point:
Second point:
These points can be selected completely freely, except that the newly assigned dimension line
must be within the given region and it always spreads to the end borders of the region in the
assigned direction. The text on the dimension line is always written in the middle of the
dimension line assigned in this way.
9.3.7
Creating the Textual Report
In addition to graphic presentation of reinforcement design results by

isolines/hatching, the program also enables textual reports to be created. Since the design is
performed in all nodes on the finite element mesh, surely it would not be acceptable to
generate reports for all nodes in the model. For that reason, the procedure of selecting the
points for which the textual report is desired to be created is entered by command Report.
Points for report Calculated reinforcement (Deselect / <End> / Extreme / Layout):
To simplify your decision-making about the selection of points for the textual report, you can
require one of the methods provided by the program for presenting the design results by suboption Layout.
767
This dialog box is exactly the same as the dialog box within the command for viewing the
results of designing. The only difference is that a switch Adopted reinforcement has been
added to the TXT report part. In other words, this switch enables you to select the contents
of the textual report, i.e. whether adopted reinforcement will be displayed in the textual report
in addition to the required reinforcement. When this switch is on, adopted reinforcement will
be displayed in the textual report in addition to the required reinforcement.
It should be mentioned that in case of presenting the results by isolines, it is possible to select
points that represent local extremes of the required reinforcement by the OSNAP criterion.
Presented local extremes can be selected by OSNAP criterion

In order to simplify your work in selecting the governing points as much as possible, suboption Extreme is also present on the command bar. When selected, the command bar
obtains the following appearance.
<0 sel.> Slab selection Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Recent selection / Deselect / <End >):
The User is now expected to select all slabs in which he desires the points with extreme values
of required reinforcement to be selected by the program. After completed selection, the
program will mark by small circle symbols the points having the extreme values of required
reinforcement in each of the previously selected slabs and it will return to the basic form of the
command bar within this command. For each of the reinforcement zones, the program finds
768
the position of maximum required reinforcement in both reinforcement directions, so that in
general case maximally four different points can be found for each of the selected slabs.
All previously presented methods of selecting the points can be mutually combined, but surely
the easiest way is to require from the program to mark all positions with the maximum
required design reinforcement in both zones and for both reinforcement directions by suboption Extreme. It should be mentioned that any previously selected point can be
deselected by sub-option Deselect in case a point has been erroneously selected for the
report.
Every point which has been selected for generating the report is marked by the program by
the symbol of a circle with a small cross inside of it and a ordinal number.
All selected points have been marked by symbols and numbers

When you have selected all points for the report, a click on the right mouse button will denote
the end of the point selecting procedure and a dialog box with the textual report for all
previously selected points will appear on the screen.
769
Appearance of the dialog box for textual presentation of design results

Since it is possible to select points from several different slabs in the point selecting procedure,
the program sorts the textual report by slabs. At the beginning of the report, the input data
are written for each of the slabs, followed by the design results for all points that belong to the
given slab. The position of each of the assigned points is determined by three coordinates,
which singularly determine its position. In general case, for each point there are four results
for required reinforcement: Top zone Direction 1, Top zone Direction 2, Bottom zone
Direction 1, Bottom zone Direction 2. If any of these four results shows that design
reinforcement is not required, that result will not be written for the reason of better visibility.
770
Icons for direct printing and block export into design documentation
In addition to direct printing, export of this report into design documentation is also provided
for by the program. All points assigned in one sance will belong to one textual report, so it is
up to you to determine the way of grouping the selected points.
Presentation of textual report with slab design results

within design documentation
Since the textual reports may be quite long, they are created in several columns, where the
number of columns depends only on the selected font and its size.
771
9.3.8
Exporting the Adopted Reinforcement into ArmCAD
In addition to considerable ease with which the reinforcement details and

corresponding bar schedules can be created, a great advantage of the ArmCAD program is
also the possibility of reading-in the data files exported from the Tower program. Namely,
Naime, ArmCAD is capable to itemise the reinforcement adopted in the Tower program and
to create both the forms plan and real reinforcement details. The rules in accordance with
which the reinforcement details are created are stated in the manual for operating with
ArmCAD program.
When a slab with adopted reinforcement is selected as the current view in the 2D View
window, then the program can be required to export the adopted reinforcement in the given
slab. When command Export in ArmCAD is selected, a dialog box with the following
appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for exporting

the adopted reinforcement in slabs
The name of the data file in which all necessary data on adopted reinforcement in slabs will be
saved needs to be assigned in edit box Database, while activating the command field
enable you to quickly position yourself into the desired place on the disk of your computer. The
name of the data file can be completely arbitrary, while a default name *.pa3 or *.pa4 is
provided for the data file type, which you can also change if you desire.
In edit box Comment, you have the possibility to write an arbitrary comment into the data
file, which will simplify to determine its content when subsequently reading it into ArmCAD.
The switches in the left part of the dialog box are used to choose the elements of a drawing
that need to be exported. These switches have the following meaning:
Form
The forms are exported, i.e. the appearance of all structural elements in their
actual size and they are being placed into the layer having a default name
A3_OP. The forms are exported by entities called regions in AutoCAD, so
in case you desire to transform these regions into simple lines, you need to
activate AutoCAD command Explode. It should be mentioned that the
program itself will adopt default dimensions for those structural elements for
which the appearance of the cross-section has not been selected.
Bottom zone
The reinforcement adopted in the bottom zone is exported and it is placed in a

layer having a default name A3_DZ.
772
Top zone
The reinforcement adopted in the top zone is exported and it is placed in a

layer having a default name A3_GZ.
By selecting arbitrarily the status of these check boxes, you can regulate yourself whether you
will have both the top and the bottom zones in a same file or you may decide to to export
these reinforcements separately. In any case, the program offers both possibilities. In case
you desire to place the exported reinforcement into previously drawn forms obtained from
architectural base drawn in AutoCAD, then you can export only the adopted reinforcement
without the forms plan by setting the switch Form to switched-of state.
Since on the basis of the adopted reinforcement in slabs it can not be explicitly concluded
whether mesh or bar reinforcement is concerned, you can clearly denote to the program,
within both reinforcing zones, whether mesh reinforcement is or is not concerned by switch
Mesh.
In case you export mesh reinforcement in the bottom zone, then you need to assign the size of
the mesh reinforcement overlap in the bottom zone over the support in edit box da=.
It should be noted that, this edit box will not be displayed in the dialog box if it has been
assigned to perform exporting from the ArmCAD 2005 program, within the command
Functionality (see chapter 3.5.2).
The size of the cover needs to be assigned in edit box a0= (as default the program adopts
as this value 1.5 cm), while the switch Foundations is used to regulate whether a floor
structure or a foundation plate is considered. Namely, if this switch is set to switched-on state,
it means that a foundation plate is considered, and thus the concepts top zone and bottom
zone will obtain the opposite sense. This is very significant since the adopted rules for
generating the areas refer separately to the top and separately to the bottom zone.
rt of the dialog box Secondary reinforcement refers exclusively to slabs in which bar
reinforcement is adopted. Namely, since you have the possibility not to place reinforcement in
the other direction in the set of adopted reinforcement, which is especially convenient when
the top zone reinforcement is being adopted in parts where the areas cross at a right angle, so
the program will place reinforcement defined in this part of the dialog box as secondary
reinforcement in all parts of adopted reinforcing areas in which the reinforcement in the other
direction has not been adopted. Surely, the program will check if secondary reinforcement
assigned in this way satisfies the condition that the area of the secondary reinforcement is not
less than 20% of the main reinforcement area, and if this condition is not satisfied, it will
either adopt smaller bar spacing or larger diameter instead of the reinforcement assigned in
this dialog box in order to satisfy this condition.
Selecting the command field OK will denote the end of this command, i.e. the adopted
reinforcement will be exported into the data file under the assigned name. In case you have
selected a data file having a name that already exists, the program will issue a corresponding
warning.
A confirmative answer will result in saving the new data into already existing data file, while a
negative answer will denote quitting from saving the newly assigned data in the already
existing data file.
773
Note:
Whether exporting the adopted reinforcement will be in the format of ArmCAD 2000 (*.pa3)
or ArmCAD 2005 (*.pa4) depends on the state of the placed switches within the command
Functionality (see chapter 3.5.2). If you opt for exporting to the ArmCAD 2005 program,
the dialog will not contain the edit box da=.
9.3.9
Plates Fissures Design
The plates fissures design procedure itself as well as the results representation is
nearly the same as in their needed reinforcement design. By choosing the command Fissures
Calculating, which is in the scope of the Design Concrete Slabs, one enters, first, into
the standard selecting procedure.
<0 sel.> Slab Fissure Calculating Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Namely, it is now expected to select all plates, which are meant for fissures design. After
finishing the selecting procedure, the following dialog box will show on the monitor.
In the upper dialog box part, there are edit boxes, where input data is given that is necessary
for fissures design
x - concrete ageing coefficient
- concrete flowing coefficient
s - concrete contraction coefficient
By setting the one of the two offered switches in the lower dialog box part to the switched-on
state, authoritative reinforcement for fissure design is determined. In case one decides for a
complete scheme, the long or short-term influences values will be single-valued determined
according to the input data that are given in the scope of the command Load combinations
scheme. Since the fissures design is carried out for exploitation load, the partial coefficient
values will certainly be ignored.
In case one decides to do the fissures design for the current reinforcement case, the edit box
will be available for change, where one can give proportional participation of a short-term
reinforcement.
774
Edit box, whose value defines the short-term relation

according to the total exploitive reinforcement
By activating the command field OK, the fissures design procedure will begin in all points
from the previous selected plates final elements network. After the done design, the program
will be ready for data processing.
By choosing the command Fissures Review, the showed results will appear in the monitor
in contour lines form, and the command bar will be of a following form.
Points for report (Deselect / <End> / Extreme / Layout):
By choosing the sub-option Layout, the dialog box for influence choice is opened, which will
be shown on the monitor.
This dialog box is very similar to the dialog box for dimensioning process plates results
representation. Since the contour lines are shown at the same time for both reinforcing zones,
only the influence choice is carried out in this dialog box, that is, the fissures value in the
moment T = 0 and T = . The other parameter meaning is completely the same as in the
dialog box for results dimensioning process representation. By activating the command field
OK, this dialog box will be closed, and the fissures design results will be shown, in a required
way, on the monitor.
775
Fissures representation in T = for the direction 1,

through whole contour lines
It is certain that the commands Section and Legend will also be available. With the
Legend command, by editing the designed values list, it is easy to locate all places in the
model in which the fissures value is bigger than the allowed one.
The program has located all places in the model in which the fissures
value is bigger than the ultimate value a = 0.15mm
Along with the graphical representation of the fissures value results with contour lines, that is,
a hatch, this program also predicts textual reports. This procedure is also nearly the same as
in the case of results representation of the carried out design of the needed reinforcing. This
means there is a possibility of choice of any chosen points, or even one can require from the
program, using the sub-option from the command bar Extreme, to determine the
authoritative points by itself.
When all points have been chosen, by clicking the right mouse button, the points choice
procedure will stop, and the dialog box with textual report for all previously chosen points, will
show on the monitor.
776
Textual report with the carried out fissures design
9.3.10 Plates Flexion Design

Since the flexion design cannot be done for each section independently, the results
representation using contour lines is not possible. Namely, during the design, the relative
flexions are treated, that is, it is necessary to carry out the section curve integration along the
given line. By choosing the command Flexion Calculating, which is in the scope of the
menu Design Concrete Plates, the program will require, from the command bar, to
determine the desired line, along which the flexion diagram is obtained.
Starting point (Delete / Report / Layout / <End>):
After choosing the starting point, the program will require the final point choice of the required
line.
Endpoint:
777
The 1 and 2 points choice determined the line along

which the flexion diagram will be shown
It is expected now to determine all support points along with the given line, that is all points,
in which the flexion value is zero.
Support Point (<Choice>):
The program will, from the command bar, constantly demand the input of new points of
support, until clicking the right mouse button marks the procedure end. Along with the
individual choice of the points of support, using sub-option Choice, one can enter the points
choice procedure by selecting (see Chapter 2.5.6). After that, the program will open the dialog
box for input data defining, that will determine the flexion design way along the given line.
This dialog box is completely the same as in the fissure design case, and all already mentioned
is here applicable. By activating the command field OK, the flexion diagram will show along
the given line on the monitor.
778
The flexion diagram in the moment T = 0 along the given line

At this moment, the command bar obtained its basic form in the scope of this command, that
is, the starting point of the new section line input is expected.
Starting point (Delete / Report / Layout / <End>):
The program will, from the command bar, still require the next section line input, until by
clicking the right mouse button, the meant sub-option End is marked.
By choosing the sub-option Layout, the dialog box for influence choice that will show on the
monitor, is opened.
By setting one of the two offered switches to the switched-on state, one may require from the
program the flexion representation, either in the T = 0 moment, either in the T = moment.
The flexion diagram in the T = moment, along the given line
779
The sub-option Delete stands for deleting some of the previously given section lines, and
sub-option Report stands for creating textual reports about the carried out flexion design.
By choosing the sub-option Report, the program will, from the command bar, require the
points choice along the previously given lines, on which the flexion diagram is shown.
Points for report (Layout / Extremes / Complete Section / <End>):
This procedure completely corresponds to the previously described procedure for creating the
textual report with the designed necessary reinforcing in beams (see Chapter 9.4.5). The
analogy is absolute, except that the command here does not relate to the beams, but to the
given section lines.
When all points for a report have been chosen, clicking the right mouse button will mark the
end of the points choice procedure and the dialog box for all previously chosen points will
appear on the monitor.
The textual report form for the carried out flexions design
We will state that the results of the carried out flexion design along the given section lines do
not get recorded into the file, but are only once used, when one is in the module for design
data processing.
780
NOTE:
Since the quantity of the adopted reinforcing influences the designed flexions value, and the
flexions are designed along the given section line, one can come into the situation where one
can in the same plate point for different reinforcing, obtain the different flexion values. This
will be explained with an example of a square plate, which is symmetrically loaded.
In the X-axis direction, a 8/10 and in the Y-axis direction,

a 8/20 has been adopted
By designing the flexion in two orthogonal directions, in this case one will obtain different
flexion sizes in the middle plate point.
This seems as a paradox, but is actually completely expected, according to the carried out
algorithm and valid standards.
9.3.11 Slab punching verification

For slabs directly supported by columns without capitel, as well as for slabs loaded
with concentrated force, you need to secure them against punching. The program has
envisaged performing an analysis which determines slab resistance to punching as well as the
quantity of reinforcement required to secure a slab against punching. This calculation can be
carried out according to the following rules: EUROCODE (EN 1992), TPBK and PBAB 87.
The command Slab punching verification is located in the menu Design
Concrete, and once it is activated, the command bar will obtain the following
layout:
<0 sel.> Indirect column selection - Select (Delete / Report / Calculator / <End>):
781
The user is now expected to select the point for the control of penetration at which the panel
relies on the beam (indirect beam), point support or a short wall (the wall with the dimensions
of the pillars), or to select one of the following sub-options from the command line. The
selection is done in the 2D view only if panel is displayed in the layout. That means that beams
and short walls are displayed in intersection as indirect elements, while point pillars are
displayed in plan view). Since command steps are the same for all three entities, we will
explain it for a case when control of penetration is done at the point where the panel relies on
a beam.
Selecting the indirect beam

The mere procedure of selecting is carried out in the following way: you move the mouse
pointer over the symbol of the beam in cross section and press the left mouse button. We
would like to draw your attention to the fact that, in the slab numerical data set, you must
place concrete as the material, and that the selected beam mustnt be of an arbitrary cross
section. If these conditions are not met, the program will issue an appropriate warning,
whereas, if they are met, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
782
The dialog box for slab punching verification the layout

The combo box Codes is used for selecting the code based on which slab punching
verification will be carried out. The selected code does not have to be in compliance with the
currently placed code for designing concrete. Unlike the selected code, the concrete grade and
type of reinforcement to be used during slab punching verification always correspond to the
currently placed code for designing concrete.
In the upper left part of the dialog box, there is a field which is used for displaying a complete
report on slab punching verification. In course of changing any of the parameters, the report is
not updated automatically. It is however, necessary to activate the command field Calculate
which leads to repeating the procedure of analysis and generating a new report.
In the lower left part of the dialog box, there are parameters which are used for defining the
existing reinforcement in the slab at the place where slab punching verification is carried out.
Switching on suitable radio buttons results in selecting one of the three offered ways of
defining such reinforcement:
Use currently adopted reinforcement - for the sake of the analysis, the program takes
over the data on the adopted reinforcement from the reinforcement area which is placed at
the place where slab punching verification is carried out.
Known reinforcement - selecting from the mesh database, the user adopts
reinforcement in the top and bottom zone of the slab, and, enters the direction of spreading
of the selected reinforcement in the displayed edit boxes Angle.
Known reinforcement ratio - the user enters the percentage of slab reinforcement for
both directions. This percentage will be used during the analysis of slab resistance to
punching.
Reinforcement type - From the combo box user can select the type of the reinforcement
before bending, where offered types are in accordance with the current regulations for
concrete design.
783
It should be emphasized that for the regulation PBAB 87 minimum percent of the
reinforcement used in calculation is = 0.5%, while for the regulations EUROCODE and TPBK
there are no restrictions.
The slab data which are necessary for the analysis are assigned in the central part of the
dialog box.
Concrete - this combo box is used for selecting the concrete grade of the slab. The offered
grades are in compliance with the currently active code for designing conrete, and not in
compliance with the currently active code for slab punching verification.
Distance from the slab edge to the steel centroid - this data referes to the tensile zone.
Position of critical perimeter - this data defines the position of the critical perimeter and
depends on the code, but the program enables its modification. The default value for
EUROCODE is 2.0, for TPBK its 1.5, and for PBAB 87 its 0.5. The distance between the
critical perimeter and a column edge is calculated as the result of this coefficient and the
static height of the slab (hs).
Foundation slab enables differentiating between slab punching upwards and
downwards. In other words, on the basis of this data, the program infers which slab zone is
tensile at the place where slab punching has taken place. If this check box is on, the program
will infer that the slab bottom zone is tensile, and vice versa, if the check box is off, the
program will infer that the slab top zone is tensile.
Substitute with column with circular cross section the user is allowed to choose
between two ways of defining the shape of the control cross section. Model of the substitute
circular column is the default model for PBAB 87 code. For rectangular but also for all other
non-circular cross sections, the diameter of the substitute circular column is calculated
according to the following formula:
d s 1.13 b d
ds
- diameter of the substitute circular cross section
b i d - the surrounding rectangle sides of the column cross section
If one side of the cross section surrounding rectangle is more than 1.5 times longer than the
other side, the shorter side length multiplied by 1.5 will be used instead of its real value for the
analysis. Thus, in rectanglular cross section b/d=40/80cm, the value d=1.5*b=60cm would be
used for the longer side length.
If the model of the substitute circular column is not used, the program defines the control
cross section based on the real geometry of the column cross section, minimizing the length of
the the control cross section at appropriate distance from the column edge. This way is the
default for EUROCODE.
784
Critical cross section for subsititute circular

column model (PBAB 87, b/d=40/50cm)
Critical cross section based on the real

geometry of the column cross section,
(PBAB 87, b/d=40/50cm)
Part of the dialog box Settings is used for assigning coefficients which are necessary for the
analysis by EUROCODE.
The data on reinforcement to be used for security against punching are defined in part of the
dialog box Punching shear reinforcement. The combo box is used for selecting the type of
reinforcement to secure, and the offered types are in compliance with the currently active code
on designing concrete.This data is used during the analysis according to both codes, whereas
the other two data Inclination angle and Bar spacing in radial direction are used only
durint the analysis by EUROCODE.
The slab punching verification can be performed on the basis of two data sources for section
forces/stress. The first data source is transversal forces from the slab at control cross section
places, whereas the second data source is section forces in the column at the slab punching
verification place. From the combo box which is located in part of the dialog box Source of
the influences and stresses, the user can choose the data based on which he is going to
perform the analysis.
Note:
Method with transversal forces in the slab (slab shear force)
This method, on the basis of shear stress in every slab point at the control cross section place,
determines whether there has been stress exceeding, and in case there hasnt, whether
reinforcement is required for security against punching. This method will automatically
consider possible force eccentricity due to the presence of the bending moment, but also
favourable effects of load inside the control cross section. The only drawback lies in the fact
that accuracy is very much dependent upon the density of finite element mesh and that less
precise results will be obtained for a mesh which is larger than the column dimensions.
Method with section forces in the column (column axial force)
This method defines shear stress in the control cross section on the basis of axial force in the
column at the section place (if the column is both over the slab top and bottom zone, then the
axial force difference of the two columns is taken into account). This method does not consider
force eccentricity in the column, nor favourable effects of load inside the control cross section.
The effects of asymmetric slab stressing are entered manually, by assigning eccentricity
factor (EUROCODE), i.e. by assigning Stress amplification coefficient due
eccentricity (PBAB 87 and TPBK). The advantage of this method might lie in the fact that its
accuracy is not much dependent upon the density of finite element mesh.
785
Method using an arbitrary force (arbitrary force)
This method defines shear stress in the control cross section on the basis of the force assigned
by the user, by entering its intensity in the edit box Column force. This method does not
consider column force eccentricity, nor favourable effects of load inside the control cross
section. The influence of asymmetric slab stressing is entered manually by assigning either
Eccentricity factor (EUROCODE) or Stress amplification coefficient due to
eccentricity (PBAB 87 and TPBK).
Perimeter length to inner column perimeter length ratio using the coefficient which
is entered in this edit box enables editing the perimeter length of columns which are either on
the slab edge or in its corner. Whether the check box Substitute with column with circular
cross section is off or the method with transversal forces in slab is used as a source of
information, this edit box will be unavailable. For the two remaining methods, it is necessary to
turn on the check box next to this edit box, upon which the edit box will become available for
editing.
According to the PBAB 87 regulation, it has been defined that, depending on the column
position, editing the perimeter length Okp is performed in the following manner:
-
in middle columns 1.0xOkp
in end columns 0.6xOkp
in corner columns 0.3xOkp
The radio buttons Current load case and Complete scheme are used for selecting load
cases which will be taken into consideration. Obviously, these radio buttons are meaningless
and thus non-existent in the dialog box when the option arbitrary force is selected as the
source of the influences and stresses.
In the upper right part of the dialog box, there is a list of control cross sections in which we
want the program to perform slab punching verification. It has been defined by the codes that
this verification always needs to be carried out in the same two places which are: along the
column edge and at the critical section.
In addition to the critical section which is compulsory, an arbitrary number of new sections in
which verification will be performed can be added to the list by activating the command field
Add. The distance between the control cross section and the outer side of the beam cross
section is assigned directly in the list, in the Lh [m] column. If more than one control cross
section is assigned, the critical section will be clearly marked in the list.
786
In addition to the critical section which is defined by the code,

three more control sections have been added to the list
For removing the selected control section from the list, there is the command field
Delete.
If it has been found in course of the procedure that reinforcement is required for security
against punching, in one control section, it is necessary to locate the farthest control section
for which reinforcement is not required for security against punching. In this way, the distance
between the outer side of the beam cross section is determined.
The program has also envisaged a graphic representation of slab punching verification. Upon
exiting the dialog box, the column cross section is drawn on the screen with its actual
dimensions, whereas the check box Draw perimeters enables the user to affect the layout
of the graphic symbol of slab punching verification.
When the check box Draw perimeters is off, the following may be written together with the
drawing of the beam cross section:
nothing if all conditions have been met and the slab has been secured against
punching without the additional reinforcement.
the additional reinforcement surface - if all conditions have been met but additional
reinforcement is necessary for security against punching. The displayed value for the
reinforcement surface for slab security against punching refers to the total
reinforcement surface one needs to distribute equally over the control section volume.
exclamation marks !!! - if there has been a failure to meet some of the conditions.
787
Graphic representation of slab punching verification.

the check box Draw perimeters is off
When the check box Draw perimeters is on, the control cross sections will be written in
addition to the drawing of the beam cross section. The following may be written together with
each control section:
nothing if all conditions have been met and the slab has been secured against
punching without the additional reinforcement. In this case, the control section will be
drawn with an intermittent line.
the additional reinforcement surface - if all conditions have been met but additional
reinforcement is necessary for security against punching. The displayed value for the
reinforcement surface for slab security against punching refers to the total
reinforcement surface one needs to distribute equally over the control section scope.
exclamation marks !!! - if there has been a failure to meet some of the conditions.
Graphic representation of slab punching verification.

the check box Draw perimeters is on
Next to each symbol of slab punching verification, the program also writes its ordinal number.
This number is also written in the textual report of slab punching verification. If a graphic block
788
with these symbols is exported to the project documentation together with textual reports, it
will be quite easy to notice which report belongs to which slab point via ordinal numbers.
As it has been previously mentioned, the analysis is not performed automatically after
changing some of the parameters in the dialog box, because it is necessary to activate the
command field Calculate in order to perform the analysis.
The analysis procedure EUROCODE
Slab punching will not occur if the characteristic shear force is less than or equal to the
projected slab resistance at the control section:
vEd vRd,max
and if it is less than the projected slab resistance with reinforcement for security against
punching:
vEd vRd,cs
vEd
vRd,max
vRd,cs
- the project value of the characteristic shear force

- the project value of the maximal punching force along the control section
- the project value of the slab resistance against punching, with reinforcement for
security against punching
vEd
VEd
ui d
the factor with which additional stress is added in the analysis, due to the eccentric
sttressing
EUROCODE assumes that the critical section is at a distance of 2hs from the column edge.
hs - static height of the slab

The project value of the slab resistance against punching, without reinforcement for security
against punching, has been given as:
vRd ,c CRd ,c k (100 f ck )1/ 3 k1 cp (vmin k1 cp )

In case when
vEd vRd ,c
it is necessary to distribute the reinforcement for security against
punching along the control section. The quantity of the required reinforcement is calculated
according to the following formula:
vRd ,cs 0.75 vRd ,c 1.5
d Asw f ywd ,ef

sin
sr
u1d
789
The analysis procedure PBAB

Shear stress at the critical section is calculated as follows:
Tmax
Okp hs
where:
Tmax
Okp
hs
the biggest transversal force at the critical section during exploitation load
the critical circular section volume
the average static height of the slab, for two adopted reinforcement directions at the
critical section
If the column cross section has a shape of a rectangle with b and d sides, a substitute circular
column with diameter
d s 1.13 b d
is added in the analysis, with a restriction that the
longer side is 1.5 times most bigger than the shorter side.
The influence of slab eccentric supporting on the shear stress size does not have to be
specifically defined if the shear stress
If the shear stress
is increased by at least 40%.
meets the condition at the critical section:
2
1 a
3
a specific reinforcement is not required for receiving tensile forces due to the action of
transversal force Tmax.
If the shear stress
is within the limits:

2
1 a 2 b
3
a specific lateral reinforcement msut be added for receiving tensile forces due to the action of
transversal force Tmax
The state where:
2 b
is not allowed.
Coefficients 1 and 2 are defined via the formula:
1 1.3 a ;
2 0.45 a
790
where
represents the average value of reinforcing percentage for compressed reinforcement
from two perpendicular directions.
Coefficient
is 1.0 for GA 240/360, 1.3 for RA 400/500 and 1.4 for MA 500/600
Aak
The required quantity of reinforcement
which is placed at an angle of
45 90 with
respect to the slab middle plane is calculated according to the following formula:
Aak
0.75 Tmax
T
1.35 max
v / 1.8
v
Calculation procedure - TPBK

Condition of the load for the punching:
vSd vRd
vSd VSd
p
ucr
vSd
- computational shear force per unit of critical volume
vRd
VSd
ucr
- computational load on the penetration per unit of the critical volume
- computational penetration force of external load

- volume of critical sections
- factor of correction that takes into account the eccentrically acting of the
penetration forces compared to the critical-section
p 1.0
- for symmetric stressed pillars
p 1.15 - for interior columns asymmetrically stressed

p 1.4 - for the pillars on the edge
p 1.5 - for the pillars in the corner
Reinforcement for the insurance from the penetration will be required if the condition is met:
vSd vRd 1 Rd k (1.2 40 l ) d
Rd
k
d
- computational strength of the main diagonal tension

- coefficient of the height section of the panel
- medium static height of the panel section
d (d x d y ) / 2
791
- coefficient of the panels reinforcement
l lx ly
0.5% l 1.5%
If the above condition is not satisfied, it is necessary to control the load on the pressure and
calculate the transverse reinforcement:
vSd vRd 2 1.6 vRd 1
- "pressed sticks" capacity in the panel
vSd vRd 3 vRd 1 ASw f yd
sin
ucr
- transverse
reinforcement
capacity
for
the
insurance from the penetration
ASw
- total shear reinforcement

- shear reinforcement angle of the slope according to the plane of the panel
Minimum shear reinforcement is calculated according to the following formula:
ASw,min
w,min ( Acrit Aload )

sin
w,min 0.6 min ( min -minimum coefficient. reinforcement on the shear force)
Acrit
Aload
- surface within the critical section

- area of the load
Icons found in the lower right part of the dialog box - same as in all other commands are
used for exporting the report either to the project documentation, directly to printing or to TXT
document.
If data in the dialog box have been modified and the analysis has not been started yet, after
the command field OK is activated, the program will first perform the analysis for the current
state of parameters and then close the dialog box.
Upon exiting the dialog box, the program will display on the screen the graphic symbols in all
slab points in which slab punching verification has been performed,
792
Slab punching verification has been displayed on the screen

while the program will still be in the procedure of selecting indirect beams.
The sub-option Report is used for generating the report on slab punching verification, in all
points in which verification hasnt been earlier performed. Once this command has been
selected, the report is generated and displayed in a new dialog box.
The dialog box for exporting the report

In this dialog box, there are only those command fields which are used for exporting the
generated report to the project documentation, directly to printing or to TXT document.
793
The sub-option Delete is used for removing the graphic symbols of slab punching
verification. After selecting this sub-option, the standard procedure of selecting is started:
<0 sel.> Delete - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Secton / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
After either activating the sub-option End or right-clicking, all selected symbols will be
deleted from the screen,a dn the program will return to the basic layout of the commnad bar
within this command.
Activating the sub-option Calculator from the command bar leads to opening a dialog box
which allows the user to perform slab punching verification for an arbitrarily assigned cross
section of the column and an arbitrarily assigned force in the column:
The dialog box which opens upon selecting the sub-option

Calculator from the command
In addition to the data assigned in the standard dialog box of the command Slab punching
verification, this dialog box is used for defining data which would otherwise be taken from the
real entity in the structure.
Activating the command field Change cross section will result in opening the dialog box
which is used for defining the desired shape and dimensions of the column cross section.
794
The dialog box for changing cross section

This dialog box operates in exactly the same way as the dialog box within the command for
defining the beam cross section in the module for data processing. For each selected type of
cross section from the list, appropriate dimensions must be assigned in the edit boxes. Since
the centroid of cross section is automatically placed in the coordinate beginning, which is
defined by the section of the given beam local axes 2 and 3, by assigning values in the edit
boxes 3 (distance between the section centroid and local coordinate beginning in the
direction of the local axis 3) and 2 (distance between the section centroid and local
coordinate beginning in the direction of the local axis 2), the section can be moved
translatorily in relation to the beam local coordinate system. Once the command field OK has
been activated, the program takes over all assigned data on cross section and returns to the
main dialog box within this command.
The edit box Column force allows the user to assign the intensity of the force to be included
in the analysis of the slab punching verification.
Slab thickness, which is expressed in meters, is assigned in the edit box Slab thickness.
The user is allowed to define the column position in the slab, by selecting one of the nine
offered switches. Columns can be placed in the slab middle, on its edge or in its corner.
The symbol of a red square on the selected switch indicates

that a column has been placed on the slab left edge
795
Activating the command field Calculate will lead to carrying out the slab punching
verification for the assigned data and generating the report.
If you select the command fields
,
and
, the generated report will be exported to the
project documentation, sent directly to print or saved in a text file.
9.4
Beam Design
Automatic beam design is reflected in calculating the required reinforcement in all

beam elements in the structure. In general case, the calculation is carried out for completely
arbitrary stressing and it comprises calculation of required both longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement. In order to carry out the beam design, it is understood that a corresponding
cross-section has been joined to beam elements in the module for data entering. The program
carries out the design only for single-part sections having the following shapes: rectangular,
T-section, I-section, trapezoidal, triangular, circular, pipe, box, opened and asymmetrical
I-section. Designing will also be available for all massive sections, if their reinforcement way
has been previously defined (see chapter 3.1.8). All other types of cross-sections will be
ignored in this part of the program.
The commands for beam and column design are contained within the drop-menu Design
Concrete Beams. In order to simplify the selection of commands from this menu, the icon
Concrete: Beam design is provided, and when this icon is selected, a menu with this group
of commands opens.
Icon for quick selecting the commands from the drop-down menu
Design Concrete Beams
9.4.1
Input Data
In order to fully determine the reinforcement design assignment, in addition to

choosing the codes and the ruling loading, a series of other input data such as: concrete
quality, type of reinforcement, distance between the centroid of the tensioned reinforcement
and the edge of the section, way of reinforcing, etc. also need to be assigned. All these input
data will determine the way of calculating the required reinforcement in beams. Since the
program also enables various input data for each beam individually to be assigned, two
commands are available. One of them is used to join same data to all beams (Input data
Global), while the other serves to join same data only to a selected group of beams (Input
data Local).
796
9.4.1.1 Input data Global

When this command is selected, a dialog box with the following appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the global input data
The input data that define the material characteristics are assigned in the upper part of the
dialog box. The concrete and the reinforcement are selected from the closed lists the content
of which is determined by defined names of materials for the selected current code. When
command field OK is activated, the assigned input data on material quality will be joined to
all beams in the model. Since the program allows various input material characteristics to be
assigned to each of the beams, you may encounter a case that when this command is
activated, in case that you have previously assigned other material characteristics to some of
the beams by command Input data Local, some of the fields remain empty.
Empty field for Concrete grade indicates that same concrete quality
has not been joined to all beams in the model
797
In such cases, activating the command field OK will result in changing only those input data
that are clearly written in the dialog box.
In case that beams, for which design has already been performed, exist in the model,
subsequent change of input data will result in issuing the following warning when command
field OK is activated.
Selecting the command field OK will result in loss of design results in all previously designed
beams.
Part of the dialog box Mode of displaying the area of shear reinforcement enables selecting
one of the two offered ways of viewing the area of stirrups in the program.
The first way Classic - nominal area of double shear stirrup is the common one and has
been used in all previous versions of the program. In this case the area of stirrups is expressed
as a nominal area of double shear stirrup. For instance, the area of double shear stirrup 8 / 20
would be calculated as follows:
8 / 20(m 2) (0.82 / 4) (100 / 20) 2.513cm2

When this way of viewing the area of stirrups is used, (m=2) is written next to the value for
required area of stirrups.
The second way Total area of steel in the longitudinal section displays the area of
stirrups as the total area of steel bars in the longitudinal section, on a 1m long segment. For
instance, the area of double shear stirrups 8 / 20 would be calculated as follows:
8 / 20(m 2) (0.82 / 4) (100 / 20) 2 5.027cm2

When this way of viewing the area of stirrups is used, (m=1) is written next to the value for
required area of stirrups.
As it can be seen, the area of stirrups expressed in this way will always be twice the size of the
classic way. In course of adopting reinforcement on the basis of the required area, the results
will always be the same at the end and will correspond to the same physically adopted
reinforcement, regardless of the way.
The illustration of two ways of viewing the area of stirrups the report on designing with
adopting reinforcement:
798
(first way - Classic)
(second way - Total area of steel in the

longitudinal section)
T2u =
160.00 kN
T3u = -160.00 kN
M3u = -400.00 kNm
T2u =
160.00 kN
T3u = -160.00 kN
M3u = -400.00 kNm
b/a = -3.500/3.266
Aa1 =
10.23 cm2
Aa2 =
26.96 cm2
Aa3 =
0.00 cm2
Aa4 =
0.00 cm2
Aa,br =
7.17 cm2/m (m=2)
[Adopted Aa,br = 10/10(m=2)
cm2/m]
b/a = -3.500/3.266
Aa1 =
10.23 cm2
Aa2 =
26.96 cm2
Aa3 =
0.00 cm2
Aa4 =
0.00 cm2
Aa,v = 14.34 cm2/m (m=1)
[Adopted Aa,br = 10/10(m=2) = 15.71
cm2/m]
7.85
As it can be clearly seen, the end results of adopting reinforcement is the same: in both cases,
shear stirrups 10 / 10 which cover the required reinforcement have been adopted. At the place
of writing the adopted stirrups (m=2) marks the adopted cutting (number of vertical
segments of a stirrup) and not the way of viewing the area of stirrups.
The check box Taking into account additional tensile force in longitudinal
reinforcement due to shear enables you to request from the program to form lines of
tensile forces by moving the M/z line along the girder axis for the assigned value which
depends on the girder static height. The program will automatically calculate and display
additonal reinforcement for accepting main tensile stresses. Also, when this check box is on,
adopting reinforcement and distribution of longitudinal reinforcement iterations is carried out
according to the moved envelope of acting tensile force.
Placing reinforcement along the girder axis according to

the moved envelope of acting tensile force
The common state is that moving the envelope of acting tensile force is carried out for beams,
and the value of moving is 0.75 x hs (where hs is the girder static height). The value of
moving for any other beam can be changed in the dialog box for defining local entry data (see
chapter 9.4.1.2).
"Dividing distancen" - Edit box that allows user to adjust density of points in which
dimensioning of beams will be done.
799
The other data that are defined in this dialog box apply to the method of calculating all slender
elements in the model, and thus they represent global input data in general sense. It is clear
that these data will influence the design method only for those beams to which buckling
influences are assigned to be taken into account within local input data. The stability control in
slender elements is primarily conditioned by the data on horizontal moveability of the
structure. Furthermore, the calculation procedures differ significantly. Since the possibility of
algorithmic structure moveability control for general case does not exist, it is up to the User to
declare the structure as movable (structure with movable nodes) or nonmovable (structure
with nonmovable nodes). In addition, the User is referred to recommendations for design of
certain types of structures defined by current technical regulations and accompanying
comments on it.
Switches used to determine whether the structure is movable or not

It is understood that a nonmovable structure is a structure having horizontally nonmovable
nodes in both directions. In situations when the structure has different behavior in two
directions concerning the node moveability, the structure should be declared movable.
Nonmovable Structures
In case of nonmovable structures, the reinforcement in compressed slender elements is based
on analysis of a column separated from the structure. The buckling length of a nonmovable
column is either equal to the column length or is close to it (the buckling length of a
nonmovable column is often conservatively adopted as the column length, disregarding the
contour conditions). Taking all these relatively small differences in consideration, a solution
that locates the buckling length centred along the column height is applied. Discrepancy from
the actual location of buckling length is such that the errors in final results can be neglected
and are on the safety side (owing to setting the minimal value of buckling length factor to
0.85).
The stability of a compressed slender element is ensured by increasing the first order bending
moment due to inaccuracy in construction (imperfection) and second order influences. The
cross-sections of elements are then designed for influences increased in this way. Here, the
bending moments are conservatively increased independently in two orthogonal directions
directions defined by cross section local axes.
800
Selecting the calculation method of increased bending moments

for moderately and extremely slender parts of the model
The following procedures for calculating the increased bending moments are supported by the
program:
Additional eccentricity method
The additional eccentricity method is provided for application in moderately slender
elements. The second order influences are represented as direct functions of geometry of
the elements and the first order influences.
Column-model method, where the cross-section curvature in the fixed end is approximated.
The column-model procedure provides higher degree of accuracy, and thus it can be applied
in all regions of element slenderness. The approximate form of this method is based on
direct assessment of the section curvature as a function of section geometry and the level
of axial loading.
The default method of calculating the additional influences is the additional eccentricity method
in region of moderately slender elements, and the column-model procedure in the region of
extremely slender elements. However, a possibility to select one of the calculation methods
offered for both slenderness regions is available to the User. The border between moderately
slender and extremely slender elements is assigned in the edit box lambda,cr=.
801
The data determining the border between moderately slender

and extremely slender structural elements
This means that you can arbitrarily choose any type of the offered calculation procedures both
for moderately and extremely slender structural elements. In this way, selecting the illogical
calculation procedures is also enabled such as selecting the additional eccentricity method for
calculating extremely slender elements. Such choice cannot be justified in technical standards,
which define the stability control of elements. However, in this way, experienced users can
obtain rough approximation of the more exact behavior of the structure.
It should be mentioned that the differences in the results of the approximate and the exact
column-model method are often negligible. Since the calculation by the approximate procedure
is considerably faster, application of the exact procedure is rarely justified although the
results provided by this method have better accuracy.
Movable Structures
In case of movable structures the analysis of columns separated from the structure does not
obtain sufficiently accurate results, and for that reason most technical standards in this case
require more complex calculation methods, which require analysis of the whole structure
subject to second order influences to be used. The regulations of technical standards that
regulate this field provide insufficient instructions for calculating these structures. In addition,
the instructions are in a form that cannot be presented algorithmically for general case of
irregular space structure. Therefore, three approximate calculation procedures are
implemented by the program.
1. Calculation of static influences in accordance with Theory II
Before calculating the static influences in accordance with Theory II, all governing
combinations for the design need to be defined since it is not possible to subsequently
combine the results obtained by Theory II. In the procedure of assigning the local input
data, taking into account the buckling influences should be excluded in all columns. Before
the design itself, the envelope of all previously defined combinations needs to be
established by command Load Case. In this way, the slender structural elements will be
designed without additional increase of the obtained bending moments, i.e. only on the
basis of the results obtained by Theory II.
802
It should be mentioned that the actual bending moments are underestimated by the
described procedure. The reason for this is that neither the material nonlinearly nor the
imperfection of the structure are taken into account by the previously described
calculations. The User is instructed to bear this in mind when adopting the reinforcement in
elements subject tot compression.
2. Calculation of static influences in accordance with Theory II + Analysis of separated column
This procedure is exactly the same as the previous one from the aspect of determining the
static influences in according to Theory II. The only difference is in that here, within the
local input data, taking into account the buckling influences should be not excluded for
columns. In this case, the structure should be selected as nonmovable, i.e. design as for
nonmovable structures for new, smaller values of slenderness should be required.
It should be mentioned that the described procedure has no justifications in the current
technical standards, and thus it is recommended only in case rough assessment of actual
behavior of the structure is needed.
3. Calculation of static influences in accordance with Theory I + Analysis of separated column
This procedure is based on the results according to Theory I. This means that the procedure
is the same as in nonmovable structures, separating the column from the structure and
treating it individually, except that within the global input data it should be assigned that
the structure is movable. Since elements with movable ends are concerned, the buckling
lengths of these columns are greater than the column lengths. It is adopted conservatively
that the whole column length is within the middle part of the buckling length. With these
assumptions, the increase of the bending moments is performed in accordance with the
previously described approximate column-model procedure.
It should be mentioned that the described procedure has no justifications in the current
technical standards either, and thus it is recommended only in case rough assessment of
actual behavior of the structure is needed. The obvious advantages of a procedure defined
in this way are in its speed, taking the imperfections into account and the possibility of
superposing the influences. In addition, the characteristics of material nonlinearity of
reinforced concrete also influence the solution.
9.4.1.2 Input data - Local

When this command is selected, the program enters the standard selecting
procedure.
<0 sel> Input data for beam Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Namely, all beams to which same input data need to be joined should be selected. After
completed selection, the program will open a dialog box having the following appearance.
803
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the local input data
Since the selecting procedure has no limitations, i.e. it is possible to select a completely
arbitrarily chosen group of beams, some of the data in this dialog box may be written as
inactive. This means at the same time that this group of data is not common to all selected
beams. In such cases, when command field OK is activated, only those input data that are
clearly written in the dialog box will be changed.
Empty field for Concrete grade indicates that all previously

selected beams do not have the same concrete quality
Since heterogeneous input data (material quality, reinforcing method, buckling lengths) are
assigned in this dialog box, the concept enables the desired group of input data only to be
easily changed. This means that if you desire to assign only new buckling lengths, for example,
804
to some of the beams, then, disregarding the other data in this dialog box, all beams that are
to have the same buckling length need to be selected. The same applies to other input data
that need to be changed.
In case that you have selected beams with different input data sets for input data changing,
the image of cross-section will not be present in the dialog box, and the closed list for selecting
the reinforcing scheme will not be available to be changed, since it depends on the shape of
the cross section.
The dialog box without the image of the cross section indicates
that beams with various cross-sections shapes have been selected
Distance between the Reinforcement and the Section Edge
A sketch of cross-section in which the reinforcements, the values of which are to be calculated
in the design procedure are schematically denoted, is in the right part of the dialog box, while
the distances between reinforcement centroids and the corresponding cross-section edges are
defined in four presented edit boxes in the top left corner of the dialog box. The default value
of this distance is adopted by the program as 10% of the corresponding dimension, but you
can of course assign any completely arbitrary value.
805
The part of the dialog box for defining the distance between
the reinforcement and the cross-section edge
Material
The data about the materials, which you have defined within the global input data, are in the
bottom left corner of the dialog box, and they are present there in case you desire to join
different materials to some of the beams. Namely, when command field OK is activated, all
data assigned in this dialog box will be joined only to selected beams.
Part of the dialog box for assigning the material quality
806
Reinforcing Method
In the central left part of the dialog box there are two groups of switches that are
interconnected and which are used to select the design method.
Part of the dialog box for defining the design method

Since in general case the program solves stressing due to asymmetrical bending (M2, M3, N1)
and stressing due to shearing stress (T2, T3, and M1), the following options for resisting the
influences due to bending are available:
Both directions symmetrical. In this case, the section is reinforced in both directions
symmetrically by four lines of distributed reinforcement (Aa1=Aa2 and Aa3=Aa4), while the
optimal ratio of reinforcement quantities Aa3/Aa1, which results in minimum quantity of
total reinforcement in the section, is algorithmically searched for.
Greater moment. In this method of reinforcing you have the possibility to define which
influence is the dominant one (M3 or M2) by two switches below, i.e. whether the
influences will be accepted by reinforcements Aa1 and Aa2 (switch: Around axis 3
(Aa1, Aa2)) or by reinforcements Aa3 and Aa4 (switch: Around axis 2
(Aa3/Aa4)). Below these two switches which switch off each other, there is also a switch
Second moment not considered which operates as a check box, i.e. it can either be set
to switched-on or to switched-off state. If this switch is set to switched-on state (a symbol
should be present in the small rectangle), then the program will completely ignore the
moment in the other direction in course of calculating the reinforcement, while if it is set to
switched-off state the program will consider both influences in course of calculating, but
they will be accepted only by two reinforcements that have been selected. This method of
reinforcing is recommended by the program for all beams in the model.
Any, when this method of reinforcing is chosen, you have the possibility to assign
completely arbitrary ratio for each of the four possible reinforcements with respect to total
reinforcement in the section. The only condition here is that the sum of these ratios has to
have a value 1.00.
807
Torsion moment not considered. By setting this switch to switched-on state, you have
the possibility to require from the program to neglect the torsion influences in course of
calculating the required reinforcement. This option is used in design of beams within slabs,
where these influences are objectively accepted by the slab itself.
As default, the reinforcing method Greater moment Around axis 3 (Aa1, Aa2) is
adopted by the program for all beams, while Any is adopted for all columns, while the
participation of individual reinforcements is determined from the condition that the
reinforcement is distributed homogeneously along the cross-section. It should be mentioned
that in circular and hollow sections the reinforcing method cannot be selected, but instead it
has been adopted in default that only one reinforcement Aa1, which is uniformly arranged
along the section circumference, is calculated in the entire cross-section.
Reinforcing Schemes
Part of the dialog box for selecting the reinforcing scheme

The final data that determines the reinforcing method is selecting one of the offered reinforcing
schemes. The reinforcing schemes depend on the shape of cross-section and for: T-sections, Isections, box sections opened sections and asymmetrical sections two reinforcing schemes are
provided, in which only the position of lateral reinforcements: Aa3 and Aa4 are varied. For all
other sections, except for the rectangular sections, there is only one reinforcing scheme and
thus this data does not influence the method of their design. For rectangular sections, which
are most commonly used in practice, the possibility of assigning one of the previously defined
arrangements of reinforcement bars in a section is provided in addition to the reinforcing
scheme by reinforcement lines.
808
Scheme 1
Scheme 2
Scheme 3
Scheme 4
Scheme 5
Selection of one of the offered reinforcing schemes, with previously defined arrangement of
bars in the section, has special application in columns, since in this way less required
reinforcement is obtained by calculating than in case reinforcement lines are used. In addition,
the problem of corner bars is also surmounted in this way. Namely, when the scheme with
reinforcement lines is selected, the corner bars belong exclusively to the main reinforcements:
Aa1 and Aa2. It is clear that in reinforcing schemes with exactly adopted arrangement of bars
in the cross-section we understand that all bars within the section have same radiuses. When
processing the results for columns designed in this way, the results will also be presented by
diagrams of corresponding reinforcement lines (Aa1, Aa2, Aa3, Aa4), although the design
result gave the total required area of reinforcement: Aa,uk. The ordinates in diagrams
presented in this way will be calculated as follows:
Scheme
Scheme
Scheme
Scheme
2:
3:
4:
5:
Aa1=Aa2=2/4Aa,uk;
Aa1=Aa2=2/6Aa,uk;
Aa1=Aa2=3/6Aa,uk;
Aa1=Aa2=3/8Aa,uk;
Aa3=Aa4=0
Aa3=Aa4=1/6Aa,uk
Aa3=Aa4=0
Aa3=Aa4=1/8Aa,uk
Buckling Influences
Part of the dialog box for defining the input data on slender elements
809
The switch Buckling is used to determine if the selected beams will be treated by the
program as slender elements or not. In default, this switch is set to switched-on state for all
columns, while for other beam elements in the model this switch is set to switched-off state in
default. If this switch is set to switched-on state, then you will have the possibility to assign
the corresponding slenderness factors in edit boxes Buckling length quotient around axis
3 and Buckling length quotient around axis 2. The value 1 is adopted in default for
these factors, and it is up to the User to correct these values himself.
The buckling length of individual elements is determined approximately, according to
recommendations by most of the technical standards, in a way that introduces the geometry of
the element and conditions of its connection with the adjacent elements (in fact the degree to
which the column ends are fixed into the remaining part of the structure). The expressions for
calculating the buckling length of an unmovable column significantly differ from those for
movable columns. The buckling length of an element of a nonmovable structure (except
cantilevers) is maximally equal to the column length, while in case of a movable structure it is
minimally equal to the column length.
Buckling lengths of columns with horizontally nonmovable nodes
Buckling lengths of columns with horizontally movable nodes

Switches S (Start) and E (End) are used to determine the support conditions at column
ends, in direction of both local axes. Namely, if the switch S is set to switched-on state, it
denotes that the start of the bar is laterally restrained in direction of the given local axis, while
if it is set to switched-off state, this denotes that the given bar end is free. The same also
applies to the state of the switch E. The state of these switches practically determines
whether the given bar end is or is not in the central buckling length of the column. The easiest
way to see what is the bar start and what is its end is to set the local beam axes to be visible
by command Visibility. Namely, the positive sense of local axis 1 is always oriented from
the bar start to its end.
810
Moment curve shifting
Part of the dialog box for defining the moment curve shifting
The program has envisaged possibility to assign values of the moment curve shifting. This
value is equal to the product of girder static height and the coefficient assigned in the edit box.
The moment curve shifting is calculated independently for each of the two bending axes. If 0.0
is assigned as the coefficient value, this means that the moment curve shifting will not be
used. This is the default value for columns, whereas the coefficient default value for beams is
0.75.
"Apply to all beams of the same set" - Check box that allows assigning one input data to
all beams of the same set.
Note:
In case of sections, the local axes of which are rotated in the input data, in the design module
they are always positioned in such way to be brought into the position of principal axes of the
given section (cross-section is always upright). Surely, here the static influences in the section
are also reduced to the newly set position of the local axes.
Rotated position of the section assigned by

input data
Reduced position of the section in the design

module
811
9.4.2
Calculating the Required Reinforcement
When you have assigned all input data, the standard selecting procedure is entered
first by selecting the command Design.
<0 sel.> Beam design - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Namely, you are now expected to select all beams and columns for which you desire the
required reinforcement to be calculated. After completing the selecting procedure, the program
will first check if the selected beams have already been previously designed, and if so, it will
issue a corresponding warning.
Part of the dialog box with warning messages

Since the previously adopted reinforcement in beams is not automatically removed, after the
repeat procedure of designing, you will be allowed to request it from the program via the
switch Reset data for adopted reinforcement in newly calculated beams.
You are now expected to select the governing loading for all selected beams and columns that
need to be designed. Therefore, for the design, it is necessary to select only those beams and
columns that you want to design for the same governing loading. This means that you have
the possibilities either to perform the design for the set current load case or for the defined
pattern of load combining. In case that within the command Load combinations all loads
have Undefined loading character, this switch will be inactive. The command field OK will
also be inactive all until you clearly define one of the two possible ways of selecting the
governing load. When command field OK is activated, the design procedure in all points in
the finite element mesh of the previously selected beams and columns will begin. After
completed design, the program will be ready for post processing, which will be dealt with in the
following chapter.
Note:
It should be mentioned that in the procedure of beam and column design it is desirable to use
option Complete scheme, since this method is much more convenient for you do neither
need to take into account the partial safety factors nor the number of possible combinations of
basic load case simultaneous action. The option of design for the current load case should be
used only for those standards in which the pattern of combined load is not supported.
812
9.4.3
Presenting the Design Results
To view the beam and column design results the command Viewing results
needs to be selected. Working with this command is more or less the same as with the
command Beam which is used for displaying the section forces in beams. The only difference
lies in the fact that here section forces are not displayed, but the diagrams of required
reinforcement along beams (the ordinates are calculated in cm2 of required reinforcement at
the given section).
used for changing fast the reinforcement type. The Disp. option which allows displaying the
beginning and ending numeration of all beams in the model is the first in the box.
Beam numbering by corresponding numbers of the nodes

in the finite element mesh (beam disposition)
Since both in presenting the individual diagrams and in design textual report the program
refers to the serial number of the beam for which the design results are being presented, it
would surely be convenient to start the design report with the beam disposition, in which the
serial numbers of nodes are marked at their starts and at their ends. Export of such a block
into the design, which will be placed into chapter Design (concrete), will enable easier
interpretation of the position of the beam, for which the design results are being presented,
within the model. By selecting the command Viewing results, the following message appears
on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Select Beam Select (Layout / Hide results / <End>):
After selecting the sub-option Layout from the command bar, a dialog box of the following
813

the diagrams of required reinforcement
The diagram that is to be presented in the drawing is practically selected by setting one of the
offered switches to switched-on state.
Aa2Aa1Aa2/Aa1Aa3Aa4Aa3/Aa4Aa,br-
Aa-
only reinforcement Aa2 is presented

reinforcements Aa2 and Aa1are simultaneously presented
reinforcements Aa3 and Aa4 are simultaneously presented
presentation of required area of stirrups per linear meter of the beam, for accepting
the shearing stresses (as provided by the program, the shearing stresses are
accepted only by stirrups without erection bars). The results are always presented
for two-sided stirrups, and for example, for accepting the calculated value equal to:
5,00 cm2/m in the diagram, it is necessary to adopt two-sided stirrups: 8/10cm.
total longitudinal reinforcement in a section (Aa1+Aa2+Aa3+Aa4) is presented
When the check box Show envelope of acting tensile force is on, the selected diagrams
of obtained reinforcement and the diagram of required reinforcement according to the moved
envelope of tensile forces will be viewed simultaneously.
By selecting one of the offered switches, and by activating the command field OK, the results
of calculated reinforcement will be presented by the program in the form of the selected
diagram.
814
View of diagram of required reinforcement Aa2/Aa1

It should be mentioned that only for circular and hollow section beams, only diagram Aa1 is
presented instead of all four diagrams of required longitudinal reinforcement. For such shapes
of cross-section, only one reinforcement, which is symmetrically placed in the cross-section, is
obtained as a result.
Since only in calculating the shearing stresses a case may occur that the calculated influences
cannot be accepted by the reinforcement, in such cases, the only solution is either to change
the material quality or to enlarge the beam cross-section. Such beams will be clearly marked
in the drawing by red color.
Other options offered in this command, such as: hiding the influences and viewing individual
diagrams for selected beams, are exactly the same as in the command for viewing the section
forces in beams.
9.4.4
Since the programs by Radimpex are graphically oriented and they constantly
strive for largest possible automation, and the end goal of each structural analysis are the
workshop drawings, and case of concrete structures the reinforcement details drawings, we
have provided the procedures of adopting and leading the reinforcement along all beam
elements as a natural continuation of the design procedure. After selecting the command
Adopting reinforcement, the program will require from the command bar the beams for
which you desire to adopt the reinforcement to be selected.
<0 sel.> Select Beam - Select (Layout / Hide results / Copying iterations / Equalizing iteration
/ <End>)
Individual selection is planned in this procedure, where after selecting the first beam, all other
beams that are connected with the previously selected one, and having the same numerical
data set are allowed to be selected. This means that the beams selected for adopting the
reinforcement must have the same numerical data set and must be interconnected. A click on
the right mouse button will denote the end of the selecting procedure, and soon a dialog box
having the following appearance will appear in the screen.
815
Appearance of the dialog box for adopting the reinforcement in beams

Diagrams
The diagrams of calculated reinforcement along the selected beams are presented in the lower
part of the dialog box. To avoid overcrowding the drawings by figure dimensions of numerical
values, and in order to provide better visibility, when the mouse pointer is moved along
arbitrary parts of this area, it is provided that the read values: x= and Aa= are presented
immediately below the diagram.
816
Part of the dialog box for reading the values of ordinates

in the diagram of required reinforcement
Data x= represents the horizontal distance in meters between the beginning of the diagram
and the current position of the mouse pointer, while data Aa= represents the ordinate in the
diagram (cm2 of required reinforcement), which is the closest one to the position of the mouse
pointer. Since the diagram has value both on the top side (reinforcement Aa2), and on the
bottom side (reinforcement Aa1), the value of the top or of the bottom ordinate will be
presented depending on whether the mouse pointer is in the top or in the bottom part of the
diagram, respectively. Since the size of the part of the dialog box for presenting the diagram is
fixed, while the dimensions of the diagram can be arbitrary, in this part of the dialog box
zooming is enabled by pressing the key Ctrl and a corresponding mouse button.
In the central part of the dialogue, there is a table with displayed data about adopted
reinforcement.
817
A list with data on adopted reinforcement and working with iterations

Since for each beam there are three types of reinforcement diagrams (Aa2/Aa1, Aa3/Aa4 and
Aa,br) left mouse click on the column title selects corresponding column names (shown in
blue), which clearly indicate what diagrams will be displayed in the dialog. In the upper left
corner, above diagram of reinforcement calculation there is also a name of diagram type that
is currently being displayed.
No
Column with ordinal numbers of the iterations.
Aa1
Column with data on adopted reinforcement "Aa1" in the corresponding

iteration. This column is automatically updated when user sets reinforcement
in the transverse section. With left mouse click on the column title, dialog will
display a diagram of reinforcement Aa2/Aa1.
Aa2

Aa3

Aa4

818
Aa,br
Column with data on adopted transverse reinforcement "Aa,br" in the

corresponding iteration. With left mouse click of on the column title, dialog
will display a diagram of reinforcement Aa,br.
Cross-section
A space for presenting the cross-section for which the reinforcement is being adopted is
provided in the upper right part of the dialog box. Sine the cross-sections also can have
various shapes and arbitrary dimensions, while the space for presenting them is fixed, in this
part of the dialog box also zooming is enabled by pressing the key Ctrl and a corresponding
mouse button.
Zoomed part of the cross-section drawing

Placing the Longitudinal Reinforcement in the Cross-section
Longitudinal reinforcement is placed by a simple click on the mouse button in the proximity of
the small red cross that determines the possible position of bars in the cross-section.
819
Two bars =16 in diameter are placed in the top zone. At the same time the content of the
table is automatically refreshed, namely the data in column "Aa2"
The part of the dialogue "Placing of reinforcement bars" there is an edit box "=", that
sets the diameter of the beam you want to place. It should be emphasized that all parameters
in this part of the dialog will be unavailable if the column name "Ah,br" is selected in the table.
820
Edit box for selecting the bar that is currently being placed in the cross-section
The procedure of removing the erroneously placed bar is exactly the same, i.e. if you click the
mouse button in the proximity of a bar that has already been placed it will be removed from
the cross-section, and a red cross will reappear in that position. As default, the program
determines all corners of stirrups as possible position of bars in cross section, but of course,
you can affect their arrangement yourself. Namely, you can place any arbitrary number of
intermediate crosses along each segment of the stirrup. You can perform this if you click the
mouse button on the desired stirrup segment so that it turns into red, and if you assign the
desired number of bars in edit box n=, which will not be available for editing until then.
When you press the key Enter or Tab, the program will accept the assigned number and
exactly the same number of crosses will be placed along the previously selected segment of
the stirrup.
821
Three new intermediate crosses are inserted along the top segment of the stirrup
All crosses will be equally spaced, so in case you desire to have the bars placed bars
unsymetrically along the given segment it is clear that you need to assign a larger number of
divisions, and in course of placing the bars you will place them only over the crosses
corresponding to the desired position of the bar.
In case when that quantity of reinforcement needs to be adopted which cannot be placed into
one row, reinforcing in several rows is also enabled. Parts Aa1 and Aa2 of the dialog box
are provided for this purpose. Namely, the desired number of reinforcement rows needs to be
assigned in edit box n=, and this entering needs to be confirmed by pressing the key Enter
or Tab. At that moment edit box e=, in which you can assign the center to center distance
between reinforcement rows will also be available for editing, and a second row of crosses,
corresponding to the bar arrangement in the first row in longitudinal sense, will appear in the
cross-section image.
822
Reinforcing in two rows of reinforcement at center to center

distance 3 cm is assigned in the top zone
In the case you left-click the mouse on columns called "Aa3" or "Aa4", and thus select
displaying of the diagram of the lateral reinforcement "Aa3/Aa4", then the above-described
components of the dialog box for defining the reinforcement in multiple rows will get new
names: "Aa3" or "Aa4 ", and logically these data will be related to lateral reinforcement "Aa3"
and "Aa4 ". It should be mentioned that corner bars always belong to reinforcements
Aa1/Aa2.
Placing the Longitudinal Reinforcement Symmetrically
In case you have symmetrical reinforcing, it is sufficient to define the exact position of bars for
only one reinforcement, let us say for reinforcement Aa2, while you can automatically copy
the other one, in this case Aa1.
823
Command for adopted reinforcement axial symmetrical copying

You can carry out this procedure if you select by the mouse that part of the stirrup along which
the reinforcement has already been placed, so that it turns red, and if you then right-click.
From a drop-down menu opened in this way you need to activate the command
Symmetrical and the program will axially copy the previously placed reinforcement to the
appropriate segment of the stirrup automatically.
824
The previously placed reinforcement in the top zone is also placed

into the bottom zone by option Symmetrical
Since the placed bars are not dimensioned in the cross-section drawing, and surely, you are
interested to know at each moment in the course of working which bar diameter you have
placed in which position, the procedure of identification of placed bars has been developed. In
fact it is enough to get the mouse near the beams whose diameter you are interested in and it
will be displayed in the box "=".
825
Part of the dialog box in which the diameter of the bar, into proximity
of which the mouse pointer is brought, is written
The previously described procedure of placing the longitudinal bars in the cross-section applies
to all cross-section shapes except to the circular and hollow cross-sections. Namely, when a
circular or hollow section beam is selected for reinforcement adopting, the same dialog box
opens, but this time the red crosses determining the possible positions of bars in cross-section
do not appear, but instead the reinforcement placed by the program itself as default appears
straight away.
826
Appearance of the dialog box for adopting reinforcement

in circular cross-section
Since we started from the assumption that the reinforcement such cross-section shapes will be
placed homogeneously along the circumference, the method of placing the reinforcement
provided here is considerably faster and simpler that in other shapes of cross-sections.
Namely, it is sufficient to only assign the desired number and diameter of bars in edit boxes
n= and =, and the bars will be placed homogeneously along the cross-section
circumference automatically.
Placing the Stirrups in Cross-section
In order to adopt the stirrups in the selected beam, first you must left-click the mouse on a
column called "Aa,br" in the table, and turn on the display of diagrams of the required
transverse reinforcement.
827
Clicking the mouse on a column called "Aa,br" in the table,

starts the procedure of transverse reinforcement adoption
The part Aa,brof the dialog box will now also be available for editing. Namely, by assigning
the desired values in edit boxes =, e= and m=, the diameter of the stirrup, the spacing
of the stirrups and their cutting (number of vertical segments of a stirrup) is adopted, which
makes all data necessary for the transverse reinforcement known.
828
Edit boxes for selecting the diameter, spacing and cutting

of the adopted stirrups
You can assign the size of the cover, i.e. the distance between the edge of the cross-section
and the external edge of the stirrup, in edit box a0=. This data is unique for the entire
section and it directly influences both the position of the stirrups and the position of the bars in
the cross-section.
829
Edit box for assigning the size of the cover

If this data or/and the stirrup diameter are subsequently changed, the new position of
previously placed bars in the cross-section will be automatically calculated without any
consequences.
Leading the Reinforcement along the Beam
In the previous part of the manual we have explained the way of placing the reinforcement in
the cross-section, so now a question is posed which are the sections along the length of the
selected beams for which this reinforcement applies, i.e. how far lengthwise the reinforcement
placed in this way spreads. Since each of the bars placed in the cross-section (except the
constructive bars) belongs to one of the four possible reinforcements (Aa1, Aa2, Aa3 or Aa4),
its area will be included in the sum of the corresponding reinforcement. The current values of
these four reinforcements are presented in the dialog box to the left of the cross-section
drawing.
830
Presentation of areas of adopted reinforcement in a cross-section

You have surely noticed that after placing the bars in the cross-section, horizontal lines appear
on the top and bottom sides of the diagram of required reinforcement, the distance of which
from the diagram axis corresponds to the area of corresponding placed reinforcement. This line
spreads along the entire diagram and it denotes that the reinforcement placed in the crosssection applies along the entire lengths of all selected beams. Since surely you will not
reinforce the entire beam with maximal required reinforcement, the procedure of adopting the
reinforcement is carried out in iterations. Namely, a certain minimal reinforcement running
along the entire beam length is usually placed in the first iteration, while new reinforcement,
which, as a rule, has to be larger than the reinforcement adopted in the previous iteration, is
added in the following iterations. The number of iterations needed to cover the diagrams of
required reinforcement depends solely on the Users desire and habits.
831
Presentation of longitudinal reinforcement adopted in two iterations

Everything previously presented about leading the longitudinal reinforcement along the beams
also applies to transverse reinforcement stirrups.
Operating with Iterations
When you have placed the minimal reinforcement in the first iteration, in most cases a new
iteration needs to be added (it is clear that in selected beams that are not subject to loading,
in which all diagrams of required reinforcement are covered by reinforcement from the first
iteration, there is no need to add a new iteration). If you right-click on an arbitrary position
within the area planned for drawing the diagram of required reinforcement, a menu containing
commands for operating with iterations opens.
832
Drop-down menu with commands for operating with iterations

The following commands are available:
Next iteration -
This command is used to change the current iteration, i.e. the next
iteration is set as the current iteration (the command will be
available only if there is more than one iteration).
Previous iteration This command is used to change the current iteration, i.e. the
previous iteration is set as the current iteration (the command will
be available only if there is more than one iteration).
First iteration This command is used to change the current iteration, i.e. the first
Last iteration This command is used to change the current iteration, i.e. the last
Add the iteration This command is used to add a new iteration, which obtains a
serial number that is greater by one than the number of the
immediately previous iteration (the program automatically takes
the already placed reinforcement from the immediately previous
iteration and joins it to the newly formed iteration).
Add the iteration after the current
This command adds a new iteration after the current one. It gets
ordinal number one higher than the current iteration, and ordinal
numbers of all subsequent iterations are automatically updated.
The program automatically takes over already set reinforcement
833
Delete current iteration -
from the current iteration and joins it to the newly formed

iteration.
Since this iteration is destructive, make sure not to activate it by
mistake (this command also will be available only if there is more
than one iteration).
It should be emphasized that in addition to changing the current iteration by previously

described commands, some keyboard keys can be used: "PgUp", "PgDn", "Home" and "End"
which will only work when the focus is on the part of the dialog box provided for displaying a
diagram of reinforcement (focus is set by simple clicking within its area), or on the table. Also,
the change in the current iteration can be made by clicking the left mouse button over any cell
in the row of the chosen iteration. The current iteration is highlighted with a distinct color.
Information about the current number of iteration is presented immediately above the diagram
of required reinforcement: Current iteration 1/2. The first number denotes the serial
number of the current iteration while the second number denotes the total number of
iterations.
Reinforcement adopted in first iteration

In addition, the horizontal line of covering that corresponds to the current iteration is drawn in
red color, while the reinforcement in the cross-section drawing always corresponds to the
current iteration. Therefore, the reinforcement, which you place in the cross-section, is always
joined to the current iteration.
834
Reinforcement adopted in second iteration

On the basis of established lines of adopted reinforcement in the diagram of required
longitudinal reinforcement, it can clearly be seen that the reinforcement from the added
iteration applies in all those parts of the selected beams in which the reinforcement from the
first iteration does not apply.
Commands for working with iterations are in the drop-down menu that opens with the right
mouse click on the column title or over any other field in the table.
835
Drop-down menu with commands for working with iterations

Assign to all afterward -
Using this command user can assign reinforcement from the

current iteration to all subsequent iterations. Assigning of
reinforcement is done separately for each of the five types of
reinforcement: Aa1, Aa2, Aa3, Aa4 and Aa,br. Which
reinforcement will be assigned to the following iteration depends
on the position of the mouse at the time of opening of the
command menu. If, for example, mouse pointer was above a cell
in the column "Aa1", displayed reinforcement in this cell will be
assigned to all cells in the column "Aa1" under it. This command is
not available if the drop-down menu is opened by right mouse click
on the column title or over a cell in the last row of the table.
Other commands in this menu have the same meaning as the corresponding commands in the
menu that opens by the right mouse click on the area intended for drawing diagrams of
reinforcement.
836
Important:
It should be mentioned that iterations are unique for all reinforcements, both by number and
by their content. For example, if you have created three iterations, it will means that the
diagram Aa1/Aa2 and the diagram Aa3/Aa4 and the diagram Aa,br will each contain
three iterations, disregarding if a smaller number of iterations is sufficient in any of these
diagrams. Since it is important for the regularity of iterations that each of the iterations has
the area of corresponding reinforcement not less or equal to the area in the previous iteration,
it means that the reinforcements in which the number of required iterations is less than the
number of totally created iterations, in iterations that are surplus, must have the same area as
in the previous required iteration. For this reason, when adding a new iteration the program
always copies the content of the reinforcement from the previous iteration. All iterations in
which any reinforcement area is less than in the previous iteration is marked by broken lines
by the program.
Broken line in the diagram of required reinforcement clearly indicates

that within the second iteration, in the top zone, less reinforcement
is adopted than in the first iteration
Calculation of Bars
Since in the course of adopting the longitudinal reinforcement the most frequently needed data
is the information on which diameter and what number of bars of certain reinforcement
corresponds to the required area of reinforcement, we have created the command
Calculation of bars. This command is activated from the menu that opens by a click on the
right mouse button over the diagram of required reinforcement. It is not all the same in which
position you will right-click within the area provided for presenting the required reinforcement.
Namely, the position of the mouse pointer will also determine the quantity of required
reinforcement to be adopted.
837
Immediately before a click on the right mouse button, the pointer

is brought into position to point at the extreme value
of required reinforcement in the top zone
This procedure is carried out in exactly the same way as the previously described procedure for
reading the values from the diagram of required reinforcement. This means that you need to
right-click and activate the command Calculation of bars but not until you have brought the
mouse pointer into the proximity of the desired ordinate in the diagram, in such way that the
actual value is read immediately above the diagram, and information Aa= is written.

command Calculation of bars
The presented table is divided into columns Retained And Needed, and only those data
that are not shaded in blue can be changed within it (edit boxes = and n=). The area of
reinforcement corresponding to the assigned values in edit boxes = (bar diameter in mm)
and n= (number of bars) is presented in row Aa2=, within column Adopted, while the
area read form the diagram (determined by the position of the mouse pointer immediately
before activating this command) is presented within the column Needed. In case that in that
838
part of the diagram some bars have already been previously placed, then that number will
represent the difference between the value read from the diagram and the area of already
adopted bars. Practically, that number denotes the area of required reinforcement that needs
to be added in that section in order that it becomes fully covered.
On the basis of the assigned diameter and the number of bars in edit boxes = and n=,
some other useful information, which depends on the current state of values in these edit
boxes, is also presented in column Needed. Namely, for the assigned diameter two numbers
are presented in the column Needed, within row n=. The first of these two numbers
represents the number of bars needed to obtain the required area with the assigned diameter,
while the second number, which is in brackets, represents the maximal number of bars that
can fit into one row. The second number is calculated from the section geometry, assigned
diameter and from the minimal clear distance between two adjacent bars in one row. The data
about the minimal clear distance between adjacent bars can also be assigned in this dialog
box, in edit box e=.
Following the same analogy, the opposite information is also needed, i.e., which bar diameter
is required for the assigned number of bars to obtain the required area of reinforcement. This
data is also presented in column Needed, but now within row =. Which of these two
groups of data will be presented in column Needed depends exclusively on whether you have
assigned the diameter or the number of bars as the input data.
From everything previously presented, it can be concluded that practically the role of this
command is to behave as an intelligent calculator that provides useful information. However,
in addition to that purpose, this command can also be used for placing the bars in crosssection. Namely, when the check box Total reinforcement is set to switched-on state,
command field Place the bars also becomes available to be activated. When the check box
Total reinforcement is set to switched-on state, the total required reinforcement is always
presented in column Needed within row Aa2=, disregarding whether or not reinforcement
in cross-section already exists in that iteration. After activating the command field Place the
bars, the program will first remove all previously placed bars in the given iteration (clearly,
only those that belong to the given reinforcement, depending on which value has been read
from the diagram immediately before activating this command), and on the basis of the newly
assigned data about the diameter and the number of bars it will join new reinforcement to the
given iteration. It is clear that only bars having the same diameter and that are equally spaced
can be placed in this way. If the assigned number of bars exceeds the maximal possible
number of bars in one row, the program will place them in two rows.
This command can also be activated when the diagram of required area of stirrups is
presented in the dialog box. The logic of positioning the mouse pointer is exactly the same as
in previously described calculation of longitudinal reinforcement, except that now command
Bridle calculation can be activated by a click on the right mouse button.

command Bridle calculation
839
The presented table functions in almost the same way as in calculating the bars, except that
now three rows exist within it: = (diameter of stirrups in mm), e= (data about spacing
between stirrups in cm) and m= (data about the cutting of adopted stirrups). Auxiliary
information is also presented in column Needed, either the required spacing of stirrups for
the assigned diameter and the cutting, or the required diameter of the stirrup for assigned
spacing and the cutting. When command field Place the bars is activated, the program joins
the assigned diameter, spacing and cutting of the stirrups to the current iteration.
Deleting the Segments of Iteration
A case may often occur that certain segments of some iterations in longitudinal sense apply
only along a very short length, so to simplify the construction it would be better to adopt the
reinforcement from the next iteration in that part, although its area is greater than required.
The reason for this may either be the shape of the diagram of required reinforcement (very
steep) or excessive detailing in course of adopting the reinforcement, i.e. unnecessarily large
number of iterations.
A segment in the proximity of the right end

of the beam that is possible to be deleated
As an example, let us observe the reinforcement placed in the bottom zone of the presented
beam. It can be noticed clearly that for the reason of simplicity, we could adopt the
reinforcement from the second instead from the first iteration at its right end. The procedure of
deleting the iteration segment is carried out by a simple click on the mouse button over it,
upon which it becomes marked by blue color and not until then the key Del is pressed. The
program will remove the selected segment without any warning, and along that part, it will
lengthen the line corresponding to the next iteration. Deleting selected segment can be done
by selecting the command "Delete current segment" from the menu that opens by the right
mouse click on the area intended for drawing diagrams of reinforcement. If we delete the
840
segments of the first iteration at the right end of the previously presented beam, the diagram
of adopted reinforcement will obtain the following appearance.
By deleting the segment, the reinforcement from the second iteration

is lengthened to the right end of the beam
Since the reinforcement from the next iteration is placed on the deleted iteration segment, it
can be clearly concluded that the segments of the last iteration cannot be selected to be
deleted.
This possibility of the program should be used at the very end of the procedure of adopting the
reinforcement, i.e. not until you have already adopted the exact position of bars in all
iterations, since each intervention on the adopted reinforcement from any of the iterations will
restore the deleted segments.
Changing the iteration segment length
In course of adopting reinforcement, the program automatically defines places of iteration
beginning and ending on the basis of the conditions of covering the required reinforcement
diagram. Now it is possible to affect any iteration segment length. First, you must select, by
clicking, the iteration segment whose length you want to change. The selected that is, the
current segment is drawn in blue color.
841
The selected iteration segment

In the menu which opens up by right-clicking within the area envisaged for drawing the
required reinforcement diagram, there is an option Changing the segment length which is
used for changing the length of the currently active iteration segment.
842
The drop-down menu with commands for working with iterations

Once you have selected this command, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for changing the current

segment length - the layout
The distance of the left and right segment apex from the beam beginning is displayed in the
first and second edit box, whereas the distance of the left and right segment apex from the
beam end is displayed in the third and fourth edit box. Entering new value in any of these four
edit boxes will enable you to change the selected segment length.
843
The field Segment length is used for controling the entered changes and the current
segment length is written in it.
The distance of the left segment apex in relation to the beam beginning
(and thus its length) has been changed by entering value 130 in the first edit box
Adding computationally unnecessary reinforcement
While adopting reinforcement, program automatically determines the starting and ending
locations of iteration segments, based on the conditions of reinforcement coverage diagram. If
there is a need, user can set the computationally unnecessary reinforcements himself by
adding a new segment to the iteration. It is necessary first to set for the current iteration in
which the segment is added, and then from the drop-down menu, that opens with the right
mouse click on the area intended for drawing a diagram, choose one of two commands:
New segment of iteration - above Command for adding the segment of unnecessary
computational reinforcement in iteration from the upper side of the diagram.
New segment of iteration - under - Command for adding the segment of unnecessary
computational reinforcement in iteration from the bottom side of the diagram.
844
Commands for adding new segments to iteration

If the diagram of transverse reinforcement is displayed, the drop-down menu will only have
one command for adding new iteration segment: "New segment of iteration".
Regardless of the selected command, the same dialog will always be opened:
The parameters in this dialog box have the same meaning as in the dialog for changing the
length of the segment, so we will not explain them again.
845
Adding segments of computationally unnecessary reinforcement is mostly used when, due the
seismic effects to the ends of beams, plastic hinges form. In these situations, it is necessary to
adopt larger stirrups surface than calculated at the ends of beams. As the program determine
start and end of the iterations segments, according to the terms of the coverage diagram of
reinforcement, the only way to do this is adding segments of unnecessary computational
reinforcement. Take for example a beam 500cm long, in which computationally required
transverse reinforcement is covered in the first iteration of the stirrups 8/20.
Computationally required reinforcement is covered by the stirrups 8/20

If we just added a new iteration with the stirrup 8/10, it would be extended along the entire
beam and the program would draw it in a dotted line, indicating that it is unnecessary and will
not be shown in the drawings or text reports.
846
Unnecessary iterations of reinforcement displayed in a dialog

By using the command "New segment of iteration" we will add two new segments 100cm
long at the beginning and the end of the beam. The first segment is set by entering the value
100 in edit box "Right side node" while the segment at the end of the beam is set by entering
the value 400 in box the "Left side node" and the value of 500 in the "Right side node".
New segment of iteration at the beginning of

the beam
New segment of iteration at the end of the

beam
847
At the beginning and at the end of the beam 2 new segments are set,
in the second iteration, with transverse reinforcement 8/10
Transverse reinforcement adopted this way will be displayed in the drawing and in the text
reports.
Control of Retained Reinforcement
This command is contained within the menu that opens by a click on the right mouse button
over the space provided for presenting the diagram of required reinforcement. It makes no
sense to activate this command if all diagrams of required reinforcement are covered, and it is
planned for control in cases when, for some reason, you have changed the assigned way of
reinforcing for which the required reinforcement was calculated, and thus some parts of the
diagram remained uncovered.
848
Drop-down menu from which the command for control of

adopted reinforcement can be activated
After this command has been activated, the program will control if the adopted reinforcement
is satisfactory in all sections, and it will issue a message to inform you about the result of the
analysis. In case when the adopted reinforcement is not satisfactory in one section at least, in
the corresponding diagrams the program will mark by thick red line ordinates in all sections in
which the control has not been satisfied.
It should be emphasized that the control of adopted reinforcement is performed for the
currently valid input data, i.e. for those input data with which the required reinforcement has
been calculated. The only difference is in that the calculation of required reinforcement is not
carried out now for replacing reinforcement lines, but instead for exactly adopted position of
each of the bars in the section.
Exiting the Dialog Box for Adopting the Reinforcement
Same as in all other dialog boxes, the command field Cancel is provided for quitting all
performed actions in the dialog box, while after selecting the command field OK, control of
regularity of adopted reinforcement in all iterations is first performed. If in any of the iterations
it is proved that the area of any reinforcement is not greater or at least equal to the area of
the corresponding reinforcement from the previous iteration, the program will issue a
849
If the area of adopted reinforcements in all iterations stands in an ascending sequence, after
activating the command field OK, the program will close the dialog box and it will return to
the basic form of the command bar in this command, while the diagrams of adopted
reinforcements will appear in the screen.
Presentation of diagrams of adopted reinforcement

Exactly specified adopted reinforcement which applies on that length is presented as ordinates
in these diagrams, while the data about the length of bars at that part of the iteration is
written in brackets (in case adopted stirrups are presented, the calculated number of stirrups
required along that length of iteration segment instead of the length is written in brackets).
Beams in which not all diagrams of required reinforcement are covered will be clearly denoted
by red color.
Here, same as when design results are presented, suboption Layout also is constantly
present on the command bar, and when it is selected a dialog box for selecting the diagrams
to be presented in the screen opens.
850

the diagram to be presented on the drawing
Check box Calculated reinforcement is also present in this dialog box, and when it is set
to switched-on state the program can be required to simultaneously present the diagrams both
of the adopted and the required reinforcement.
Simultaneous presentation of calculated required and adopted reinforcement

Adopting Simultaneously the Reinforcement in all Beams of the Same Set
In the procedure described so far, the procedure of adopting the reinforcement only in selected
beams has been described. However, the procedure of adopting the reinforcement can be
considerably speeded up in a way that will be described in this part of the manual. Namely, it
is sufficient to select only one beam having a numerical data set for which you desire to adopt
the reinforcement simultaneously, and to set the check box All beams, in the opened dialog
box, to switched-on state.
851
Switched-on state of the switch All Beams results in presenting

the diagram of required reinforcement with extreme values
corresponding to all beams in the model of the given set
In this operation mode, the shapes of the diagrams are always triangular with the extreme
value in the middle of the diagram, since this is the only way to present a diagram common to
all beams in the model of the same set. The further procedure of adopting the reinforcement is
carried out in exactly the same way as if the reinforcement were being adopted only for the
selected beams. This means that you need to create that number of iterations which is needed
to cover all diagrams of required reinforcement. By activating the command field OK, the
program will join the adopted reinforcement to all beams in the model having the given
numerical data set.
852
Presentation of simultaneously adopted reinforcement in all beams

having the same numerical data set
Surely, in beams that are not subject to loading, the program will adopt reinforcement only
from the first iteration, more exactly, where it is not needed, it will not adopt reinforcement
greater than required calculated reinforcement.
Although two iterations were assigned in course of adopting the reinforcement

in beams of this set simultaneously, only reinforcement from the first iteration is placed
in the presented beam, since it completely covers the required reinforcement in it
Copying and equalizing iterations
The command bar of the command Adopting reinforcement also contains the sub-options:
Copying iterations and Equalizing iterations.
Using the option Copying iterations enables you to copy the data on adopted reinforcement
(iterations) from one to several other selected beams. Activating this sub-option will result in
starting the procedure of selecting the beam whose iterations will be copied:
<0 sel.> Source beam Select (<End>):
853
Only the beam which has been designed can be selected during this procedure. Once you have
selected the source beam, the program will request that you select beams on which the
adopted reinforcement iterations will be copied.
<1 sel.> Destination beams Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
Once the selection has been completed, the program will perform copying iterations. The
iteration lengths will be automatically defined for each particular beam. The precondition for
copying iterations successfully is that the source beam and the destination beam have the
same cross section.
Using the option Equalizing iterations enables you to obtain identically adopted
reinforcement for several beams which have the same cross section and are of the same
length. A unique iteration sequence which includes iterations of all selected beams (iteration
union) will be obtained as the result of equalizing iterations. This will save time and effort in
constructing the structure but only on the account of certain increase in the total quantity of
used reinforcement.
Once you have activated this sub-option, the program will request that you select one beam
only (the reference one):
<0 sel.> First beam Select (<End>):
Once the first beam has been selected, it will be possible to select other beams for which it is
necessary to perform equalizing iterations:
<1 sel.> Other beams Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
During this procedure, it is possible to select an arbitrary number of beams of different cross
sections and lengths, but equalizing iterations will be performed only for those beams whose
cross sections and lengths are identical to the beam which was first selected.
Reinforcement in beams before equalizing

iterations
9.4.5
Reinforcement in beams after equalizing

iterations
Generating the textual report
The Tower program has envisaged a separate command Report for creating a
textual report with the results of designing concrete beams. Once you have selected this
command, the command bar will obtain the following layout:
Points for report Calculated reinforcement (Deselect / <End> / Extremes / Layout /
Complete beam):
854
Since the report may be generated both for the required and adopted reinforcement, the
information on the type of report which is currently active, that is on the type of report which
is being generated, will be written on the command bar. Changing the report and changing the
type of diagram which is displayed in the drawing is performed via the sub-option Layout.
Once you have selected this option from the command bar, a dialog box of the following layout
will open up:
The dialog box for customizing parameters during

generating the textual report the layout
Turning on one of the offered switches enables you to select the diagram of the required
reinforcement which will be displayed in the drawing.
The check boxes which are located in part of the dialog box Reinforcement are used for
defining the way of viewing the selected diagram.
- The calculated reinforcement will be displayed only when the check box Calculated has
been turned on.
- The adopted reinforcement will be displayed only when the check box Adopted has been
turned on.
- Both the required and adopted reinforcement will be displayed when both check boxes have
been turned on.
- Beam disposition will be displayed when none of the check boxes has been turned on. In
other words, all beam ends will be numerated by corresponding numbers of nodes from the
finite element mesh.
When the required reinforcement is shown and the check box Show envelope of acting
tensile force is on, the selected diagrams of obtained reinforcement and the diagram of
required reinforcement according to the moved envelope of tensile forces will be viewed
simultaneously.
The state of the check box Adopted reinforcement defines whether the report will be
generated for the required or adopted reinforcement.
Once you have activated the command field OK, the dialog box will close and the selected
diagram will be displayed in the drawing. Also, in case when the type of report is changed, the
command bar will change its layout:
855
Points for report - adopted reinforcement (Deselect/<End>/Extremes/Layout/Complete beam):

The text displayed on the command bar indicates that the report is being generated for
adopted reinforcement.
The user is now expected to assign the position of points in beams for which he wishes to
create the textual report. In order to facilitate selecting governing points, the program has
envisaged the sub-option Extremes which is located on the command bar. Upon selecting it,
the command bar obtains a new layout.
<0 sel.> Beam selection Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups
Now, the user is expected to select all beams in which he wishes the program to choose points
with extreme values of the required reinforcement. Once the selection ends, the program will
first mark with section symbols and ordinal numbers the points in which extreme values of the
required reinforcement are located, on each previously selected beam, and then it will return
to the basic layout of the command bar of this command.
In case you want a more thorough design report, you are able to start the procedure of
selecting beams and columns for which you wish to create the design report, via the suboption Complete beam. When you select this sub-option, the program will start the same
procedure of selecting as when the sub-option Extremes is activated.
<0 sel.> Beam selection Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups
The only difference is that, now, on all selected beams, points for the report will be placed at
every half a metre and in all places on the beam where the influence increase occurs. If the
selected beam is located on a slab, this way of selecting points will certainly be affected by the
size of finite elements mesh.
All previously described ways of selecting points can be mutually combined. The easiest way
would be to request from the program, via the sub-option Extremes, to mark by itself those
places with the largest quantity of required reinforcement. We would like to remind you that, if
you select by mistake points for the report, you can deselect any previously selected point via
the sub-option Deselect.
Once you have selected all points for the report, right-clicking will mark the end of the
procedure of selecting points and a dialog box containing the textual report for all previously
selected points will appear on the screen.
856
A dialog box for the textual report on the results

of designing the layout
Since during the procedure of selecting points it is possible to select points from several
different points, the program will sort the textual report by beams. At the beginning of the
report, first the entry data are written for each separate beam, and then the results of
designing for all points belonging to the given beam. The position of each assigned point is
defined by its distance from the beginning of the given beam.
The command fields which are located in the lower right corner of the dialog box enable
exporting the generated report either to the project documentation (
or a text file (
), directly to print (
).
857
The command fields for exporting the report

The check box Split the report is used for defining the way of exporting and it is located in
this dialog box only in case when points are selected from several beams. When this check box
is off, all selected points will belong to a single textual report, whereas when it is on, the
program will, during exporting, generate a separate report for each beam to which the
selected points belong to.
Split the report - off
9.4.6
Split the report - on
Exporting the Adopted Reinforcement into ArmCAD
The reinforcement adopted in beams and columns is exported in a similar way as in

slabs. Namely, for linear structural elements also, writing data about the adopted
reinforcement into a data file is provided, and on the basis of the content of such data file
ArmCAD is capable of creating real reinforcement details. Since beams can be found both
within levels (floor structures) and within frames, two commands, which operate in a similar
way but where beams and columns selected for export are presented in different projections,
have been created. This means that the same beam can be exported into ArmCAD once in a
side view and another time in view from the top.
858
Export in ArmCAD (base)
This command is provided for exporting the adopted

reinforcement in beams that are presented within level/floor
structure in 2D View window. Then the adopted reinforcement
in beams is exported with the side view, i.e. with view that is
normal to the plane of the current 2D view.
Export in ArmCAD (frames) - This command is provided for exporting the adopted
reinforcement in beams and columns that are presented within
frames in 2D View window. Then the adopted reinforcement in
beams is exported with a view that corresponds to the plane of
current 2D view.
The following conclusions result on the basis of the previously stated:
- Since the plane of the current 2D view also determines the projection plane in which the
selected beams will be exported, within both of these commands for exporting the adopted
reinforcement, only those beams and columns that are currently presented in the 2D View
window can be selected. On the contrary, the program will issue the following warning.
- By exporting the adopted reinforcement in a same beam, when it is presented within a

same assembly (level or frame), you will obtain its side view with one command, and its
view from above with the other command.
- By exporting a beam presented within a level, by command Export in ArmCAD (base), you
will obtain the same result from the program as if you were to export the same beam by
command Export in ArmCAD (frames), but when it is presented within a corresponding
frame.
Export in ArmCAD (base)
When command Export in ArmCAD (base) is selected, diagrams of adopted reinforcement
will appear along all beam elements in 2D View window, and the command bar will obtain the
following appearance:
<0 sel.> Select Beam - Select (View / <End>):
Since the program enables several beams to be selected (the only condition is that the beams
must be interconnected), this message will remain on the command bar all until you denote
the end of the selecting procedure by a click on the right mouse button. Soon after, a dialog
box very similar to the dialog box used for exporting the adopted reinforcement in slabs will
appear in the screen.
859
Appearance of the dialog box for exporting the adopted reinforcement

in beams that belong to the current level
The name of the data file in which all necessary data about adopted reinforcement in selected
beams will be saved needs to be assigned in edit box Database, while by activating the
command field you have the possibility to quickly position yourself into the desired
position on the disk of your computer. Same as in exporting the adopted reinforcement in
slabs, the name of the data file can be completely arbitrary, while a default name *.pa3 is
planned for the type of the data file, which you can also change if you desire to de so.
In edit box Comment, you have the possibility to write into the data file any arbitrary
comment which will determine its content more easily when reading it into ArmCAD 2000
later on.
When the check box Form is set to switched-on state, in addition to adopted reinforcement
the forms are also exported, more exactly, the appearance of all selected beams in their actual
size, and they are placed onto the layer having a default name A3_OP.
The switch Foundations is used to regulate whether foundation beam is or is not concerned.
Namely, if you set this switch to switched-on state, it will mean that a foundation beam is
concerned and thus the concepts top zone and bottom zone will obtain the opposite sense.
This is very important since the rules adopted for shaping the reinforcement separately apply
to the top and separately to the bottom zone.
By selecting the command field OK the end of this command will be denoted, i.e. the
adopted reinforcement will be exported to the data file under the assigned name.
In the following text, we shall present some basic rules, which the program obeys in course of
exporting the adopted reinforcement in beams:
- If several connected beams are selected for exporting the adopted reinforcement, the
program treats them as one whole, and thus the bars that osculate in a same point at the
connection of these beams, and the diameters of which are the same, will be joined into one
reinforcement item.
- Beams that belong to inclined parts of the model are exported in their actual longitudinal
appearance at the angle determined by the assigned inclined plane to which they belong.
- Selected arch beams are exported in developed form. In ArmCAD, the longitudinal
reinforcement is presented by representatives having straight shape, while the actual
(curved) shape of the arch bar is presented in the bar schedule. At the ends of arch beams,
the program does not shape vertical endings for anchoring, since in that way a space shape
of the bar would be obtained. In case when the width of the end support is not sufficient to
provide correct anchoring only by the straight part, it is necessary that you yourself
860
subsequently intervene in such way that you will change the geometry of the given
reinforcement item in ArmCAD.
- When exporting the reinforcement, the program does not take the bar lengths into
consideration concerning the transport conditions, so in case you have spans greater than
12m, it is necessary that you yourself subsequently intervene in such way that you will
make two new items from one item in ArmCAD, carefully choosing the optimal position of
the splice (least stressed zone).
- The program has clear rules for leading the reinforcement along the girder, as well as rules
in accordance with which the reinforcement is ended at its ends. Since exporting several
connected beams is enabled, here the overall size of all selected beams is understood by
ends.
- For the method of leading the longitudinal reinforcement along the beam elements, the
arrangement of supports that are on that beam has an important role. By supports, all point
and linear supports that intersect the selected beams or that are along them are
understood. The program will also treat as supports the beams from the other direction that
intersect the selected beam for exporting the adopted reinforcement.
The previously described command refers to exporting to ArmCAD 2000 program. If
exporting to ArmCAD 2005 has been placed as the current one via the command
Functionality (see chapter 3.5.2), then this dialog box will not contain the switch
Foundations. Instead of it, the following two switches will be available.
- Replace complex stirrups with rectangular. This switch will be active only if T section,
I section, box, open or asymmetrical I-section is selected for the beam cross section. After
turning this switch on, instead of one stirrup series, the geometry of which corresponds to
the cross section shape, as many series of stirrups with rectangular shape will be exported
as there are rectangular parts in a given section. For example, two series of stirrups will be
exported for T section. One stirrup will be placed in the flange and the other in the web.
- 3D View. After turning this switch on, the program will export the complete geometry as
three-dimensional.
Export in ArmCAD (frames)
Same as in previously described command, When command Export in ArmCAD (frames)
is selected, diagrams of adopted reinforcement will appear along all beam elements in 2D
View window. The command bar will now obtain the following appearance:
< sel.> Select Beam - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
Recent selection / Deselect / <End> / Layout):
861
Since by this command the adopted reinforcement is exported in the same view in which it is
currently presented in 2D View window, there are no limitations concerning the connection of
beams in course of selecting. The only condition is that all beams selected for export must
belong to the current frame. Upon completed selection, the program will open a dialog box
with the following appearance.
Appearance of the dialog box for exporting the adopted reinforcement

in beams and columns that belong to the current frame
This dialog box is almost the same as within the command for exporting the adopted
reinforcement in beams when they belong to floor structures. The only difference is in that
here check box Foundations does not exist since both usual and foundation beams can be
selected for export at the same time, and the program is capable to recognize itself which
beam is and which is not a foundation beam. Namely, in order that a beam is a foundation
beam, either linear or area support must exist beneath it.
It makes sense to assign data in edit box t= only in case when point and linear supports
exist in the model. Namely, in that case, the program does not have the data about the
dimensions of point and linear supports and it cannot shape correctly either the forms or the
geometry of the reinforcement.
In the following text, we shall present some basic rules, which the program obeys in course of
exporting the adopted reinforcement in frame structures:
- The program also takes into account those structural elements that do not belong to the
observed frame but which influence the arrangement of reinforcement in it.
- All beam elements in a model are classified into beams and columns and the program treats
differently structural elements grouped in this way. All horizontal beam elements are
treated as beams, while the vertical ones arte treated as columns. Inclined beam elements
are treated as columns if symmetrical reinforcing is applied in them or if the angle of their
inclination with respect to the horizontal is greater than 45. In all other cases inclined
beam elements are treated as beams.
- Collinear beams and columns are grouped into wholes and in course of shaping the
reinforcement the program sets rules for leading the reinforcement along beams/columns
and rules for shaping the reinforcement on beam/column ends.
- Appearance of the exported reinforcement does not depend on which beam elements are
selected for export. Only forms can differ, since only the beginnings of forms of beam
elements that are not selected are presented. A typical example is when only reinforcement
in a series of columns that are a part of some frame structure is exported.
-
When exporting cylindrical frames, you will be able to select only vertical columns, while the
previously described command Export into ArmCAD (base) is provided for exporting arch
beams.
862
- Column forms are always presented symmetrically with respect to the centroid axis
disregarding whether the cross-sections differ or not.
The previously described command refers to exporting to ArmCAD 2000 program. If
exporting to ArmCAD 2005 has been placed as the current one via the command
Functionality (see chapter 3.5.2), then this dialog box will not contain the edit box d=.
Instead of it, the switches Replace complex stirrups with rectangular and 3D View
will be available.
The meaning of these switches is exactly the same as in exporting from base.
9.4.7
Beams Fissure Design
The beams fissure design procedure, as well as results representation, is nearly the
same as in the case of the needed reinforcing design in them. By choosing the command
Fissures Calculating, that is in the scope of the menu Design Concrete Beams, one
enters the standard selecting procedure first.
<0 sel.> Beam Fissure Calculating Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras /
selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End> / Layout):
Namely, all beams, for which the fissures design is to be done, should now be selected. After
finishing the selecting procedure, the following dialog box will show on the monitor.
The dialog box is completely the same as in the plates fissure design case, and all previously
mentioned is here applicable. By activating the command field OK, the previous selected
863
beams fissures design procedure will start. After the finished design, the program will be ready
for data processing.
9.4.8
Beams Flexion Design
Since the flexion design cannot be independently done for each section, as the
fissure design, the contemporary flexion design for all selected beams is not possible. For that
reason, by choosing the command Flexion Calculating, which is located in the scope of the
menu Design Concrete Beams, the program will, from the command bar, require a
selection of one or more connected beams.
<0 sel. > Beams Choice for the Flexion Calculating Select (Layout / <End>):
A click on the right mouse button will mark the selection procedure end, and the program will,
from the command bar, require the determination of all points of support, i.e. all points in
which the flexion value is zero, along with the selected beam.
Support Point (<Choice>):
The program will, from the command bar, constantly require new points of support input, until
by clicking the right mouse button this procedure is marked to stop. After that, the program
will open the dialog box for input data defining, and they will determine the design flexion way
for the previous selected beam.
The dialog box is completely the same as in the plates flexions design case, except that the
switch Bending around Axis 3 is here added. Namely, if the flexion design is carried out
only for one axis bending, using this switch one can determine whether the bending around
axis 3 or axis 2 is taking place.
By activating the command field OK, along with the selected beam, the flexion diagram will
show on the monitor.
864
The flexion diagram in the T = moment,

along with the previous selected beam
In this moment, the command bar obtained its basic form in the scope of this command, that
is, the new beam selection is expected for flexion design, until by clicking the right mouse
button, the meant sub-option choice End is marked.
9.4.9
Beams Flexions and Fissures Representation
By choosing the command Fissure and Flexion Review, which is in the scope of
the menu Design Concrete Beams, one enters the representation procedure of the
designed beams flexions and fissures.
<0 sel. > Select Beam Select (Layout / Hide results / Report / <End>):
The way of work with this command is completely the same as with the command for
dimensioning process results representation in beams. The only difference is that instead of
the needed reinforcing surface here, the designed beams fissures and flexions values are
represented. By choosing the sub-option Layout, the dialog box of the following form is
being opened.
Dialog box for diagram choice

that will be showed on the monitor
By setting the one of the offered switched to the switched-on state, the contemporary diagram
representation for a chosen influence will be on the monitor.
865
Contemporary fissures representation in beams in the T = moment

As the procedures for designing fissures and flexions are separated, and the command for
result representation is mutual for both designs, only designed influences will be available for
results representation.
By choosing the sub-option Report, one enters the points choice procedure, whose results
would be entered into the project. This procedure is also completely the same as in the scope
of the command for beams results dimensioning process representation.
Points for report (Deselect / <End> / Extremes / Layout /Complete beam):
When all points for the report have been chosen, a click on the right mouse button will mark
the points choice procedure end and the dialog box with a textual report for all previously
chosen points will show on the monitor.
866
The dialog box for textual representation

of flexions and fissures design results
If the fissures and flexions design is, in the given beam, carried out, in the scope of he textual
report, both design results will be found. In case that one of these procedures has not been
carried out, only existing results will be shown.
With the command Legend, while the fissures and flexions diagrams are shown on the
monitor, one can easily require from the program to mark all places, in which the designed
values have exceeded the permitted ones.
The program has located all places on beams, on which the

fissures value is bigger than the ultimate a = 0.15 mm value.
867
9.4.10 Interaction diagram of the beam

Using this command, it is possible to generate interaction diagrams, as well as the
capacity control of reinforced concrete pillars and beams. The command "Beam's interaction
diagram" is in the " Design Concrete Beams", and after activating it the command line
gets the following layout:
Section line defining (eXtremes / Layout / Complete beam / <End>):
Changing the displayed diagram type is done by using a sub-option "Layout". Its selection
from the command line opens the dialog box of the following appearance:
Dialog for adjusting the display of the diagram type

This dialogue is the same as the one that opens from the command for creating a report of
adopted reinforcement in beams (see Section 9.4.5), so it will not be explained again.
You are expected to select the position of the cross-section on beams for which you want to
generate interaction diagram. To make the selection as easy as possible, command line has a
sub-option "Extremes". After selecting it, the command line gets the following layout:
<0 sel.> Select Beam Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
You are now expected to select beams for which you want the program to select sections with
extreme values of adopted reinforcement for each iteration. After completing the selection, the
program will mark points of extreme values of adopted reinforcement on each previously
selected beam and return to the basic form of the command line. If a beam has no adopted
reinforcement, the program will set points in all places where calculation of dimensioning of
beams has been done.
If you want to generate interaction diagrams of beams in all sections in which the calculation
of dimensioning of beams has been done, you can select the sub-option "Complete beam".
Selecting this sub-option starts the exact same procedure for selecting as sub-option
"Extremes" does:
<0 sel.> Select Beam Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups /
868
When you have selected all sections in which you want to generate interaction diagrams,
clicking the right mouse button will mark the end of the section selection procedure, and the
command line will get a new form:
Select a section for the report [1-n] (new Points / Delete points / Layout / <End>):
You are now expected to select one of given sections (1 to n) for which you want to create a
report, by simply entering its ordinal number by keyboard and pressing "Enter", or by its
selection from the drawing using OSNAP criteria.
If you want to generate interaction diagrams for additional sections, you need to select suboption "New points" from the command line, after which the section selection procedure will
begin again.
Sub-option "Delete Points" enables you to delete some of the sections with generated
interaction diagram. The command line gets the following form:
Point deletion [1-n] (All / <End>):
You are expected to select one of given sections (1 to n) that you want to delete, by simply
entering its ordinal number from the keyboard and pressing "Enter", or by its selection from
the drawing using OSNAP criteria.
Selecting the sub-option "All" deletes all sections with generated interaction diagrams. After
this the program will again enter the procedure of setting section:
Section line defining (eXtremes / Layout / Complete beam / <End>):
After selecting one of given sections for which you want to create a report, a dialog of the
following appearance will appear:
Interaction diagram dialog

Dialog title shows the ordinal number of selected section.
In the upper left corner of the dialog there is a display of cross-section of the beam with
adopted reinforcement, or with required reinforcement if the section has no adopted
reinforcement.
869
In the lower left part of the dialogue a "3D interaction diagram" is displayed for this section.
It shows the points that represent values of the impact from the load combinations for which
the sizing has been done. If the points are green it means that the section with its
reinforcement can withstand those impacts, while red color indicates that the section is not
able to withstand the impact.
In the upper right part of the dialogue the 2D interaction diagrams are displayed. Depending
on what is selected from a combo box below it, different types of diagrams can be displayed:
"diagram M2-M3 (N1 = const)", "diagram N1-M3 (M2 = 0)", "diagram N1-M2 (M3 =
0)", "diagram N1-M (M2/M3 = const)" and "Diagram of limit eccentricity".
"Diagram M2-M3 (N1 = const)"
Interaction diagram that presents sections through the 3D interaction diagram in different
planes corresponding to different values of the normal force N1. In it, as well as 3D interaction
diagram you can display points that present values of impact of the load combination for which
the sizing is done. As noted above, if those points are green it means that the section with
reinforcement can withstand those impacts, while red color indicates that the section is not
able to withstand impact.
You can set value of the force N1 in the part of the dialogue "Ordinate of normal force". In
the displayed list, there are all values of normal force and under it there is a list of its extreme
values, that is, the first and last value from the list.
Ordinates of the normal force can be defined either by setting the number of divisions or by
setting a value of equidistance of the equal distances between neighbor ordinates (this two
numbers are entered in the edit boxes "Step" and "Divisions Number"). After setting the
desired values in one of two edit boxes, and pressing "Enter" or "Tab", the program will
automatically reorder the list with the values of the parameters according to the set criteria.
In addition to previously described auto-defining density and intensity of the normal force, you
can individually edit of all values in the list. By clicking on any normal force value in the list, it
becomes marked and then it is possible to set a new value for it. Since values must be in
ascending order, program will automatically update their order in the list.
Delete
Button for removing values of the normal force from the list. You first need to
select the value by clicking the mouse on it (that line in the list becomes
especially marked) and then activate this button. Certainly, the deleting will
not be possible if there are only two values on the list for which the entire
interval of the calculated impacts is divided into a minimum of two divisions.
Add
Button for adding a new value of the normal force under selected (marked)
line. Adding new values is allowed until their number reaches a maximum of
20 divisions.
By selecting values of normal force N1 from the list, that row becomes particularly marked,
and on 3D interaction diagram, the section diagram with the plane containing that ordinate will
be marked in red, while on the 2D interaction diagram M2-M3 will be displayed the value of
that force. Turning these check boxes on, located on the right of the value of the normal force
in the list, more interaction diagrams will be displayed that represent sections through 3D
interaction diagram in the planes corresponding to all of the involved values of the normal
force N1. A diagram of the current value of the force is in black, while the gray is for the
interaction diagram for the force which check boxes we turned on. On 3D interaction diagram,
as we have already explained, red color will mark the section of the diagram with the plane
containing the current value of the force, while the black color presents the section of the
diagram with the plane containing the value of the force whose check box is turned on. Right
870
mouse click on a column with check boxes opens the drop-down menu with options "All on"
and "All off" that turn on or off all of check boxes in the list.
Interaction diagram when force N1 = 0.0 is selected

and check box for the force N1 = 500kn is turned on
Bringing the mouse to position above the interaction diagram, the program displays
information about impact values at a given point of displayed interaction diagram.
Information about impact values at a given point of interaction diagram

"Diagram N1-M3 (M2 = 0)"
Interaction diagram that represents a section of 3D interaction diagram through the plane for
which the value of the moment M2 is zero. Also please note that in this type of interaction
diagram selection of the axis of the normal force does not make sense, so check boxes are
removed from this list. All previously discussed matters for the interaction diagram M2-M3, are
valid in this diagram.
871
"Diagram N1-M2 (M3 = 0)"
Interaction diagram, which represents a section of 3D interaction diagram through the plane
for which the value of the moment M3 is zero. Also please note that in this type of interaction
diagram selection of the axis of the normal force does not make sense, so check boxes are
removed from this list. All previously discussed matters for the interaction diagram M2-M3, are
valid in this diagram.
"Diagram N1-M (M2/M3 = const)"
Interaction diagram, which represents a section of 3D interaction diagram through the plane
for which the given ratio has the value M2/M3. In the edit box, the user enter the
corresponding angle which defining the relationship M2/M3. Also please note that in this type
of interaction diagram selection of the axis of the normal force does not make sense, so check
boxes are removed from this list. All previously discussed matters for the interaction diagram
M2-M3, are valid in this diagram.
"Diagram of limit eccentricity"
A diagram of the boundary eccentricity is a variant interaction diagram representing sections
through the 3D interaction diagram in different segments of the plane corresponding to
different values of the normal force N1, with all values of moments M2 and M3 of the reduced
value of the normal force N1 in that plane. As a result, the diagram represents a boundary
eccentricity (dimension is meter). Diagram of boundary eccentricity limits the area within
which the resultant normal force must be in. At the same time it can show diagrams of
eccentricity for multiple-axis normal force. Selection of ordinate of a normal force, for which
the diagrams will be displayed, is done by check boxes from the list.
In the part of the dialogue named "View", user has the ability to adjust display of interaction
diagrams by setting appropriate parameters:
"Desirable number of axes"
Edit box for entering the number of axes to be displayed on 2D interaction
diagrams.
"Div. Number"
Edit box for entering a value that influences subtlety of 3D as well as 2D
interaction diagrams. The entered value corresponds to the number of
diagram divisions in one quadrant.
" Show load-combination points"
Check box that determines whether the interaction diagrams will display
points that present values of the impact from the load combinations for which
the dimensioning is done.
"Wide Report" Check box that can provide clearer presentation of report.
872
"Wide Report" on
"Wide Report" off
"Add to report"
Button located below the 3D display of interaction diagram. It is used to insert
currently displayed 3D interaction diagram in report; while the button located
below the 2D display of interaction diagrams is used for inserting currently
displayed 2D interaction diagram in report.
Two keys by whose selection the current interaction diagrams

are inserted into the report
After pressing the button "Add to report", the name of created report will automatically be
displayed in the table located at the bottom right part of the dialog.
873
A new report named 3D interaction diagram has been created
Button that moves currently selected row, and therefore a diagram in the
report, one place up.
Button that moves currently selected row, and therefore a diagram in the
report, one place down.
Button that deletes currently selected row.
"Report preview"
Button that opens a window reserved for displaying report of interaction
diagrams:
874
Display of interaction diagrams report

It should be emphasized that points displayed on interaction diagrams will appear as full circles
in a report if they were green in the diagrams in the dialogue, or as full squares if they were
red.
Using buttons
,
and
created report can be exported to project documentation, sent
directly to printing, or saved to a text file.
9.5
Designing the Earthquake Walls
This design method is provided only for earthquake walls that are predominantly
subject to combined bending in the plane of the wall itself. Then the design is performed as for
corresponding rectangular section in which the section width corresponds to the wall thickness,
and the height of the section corresponds to the assigned length of the section. It should be
emphasized that results of conducted dimensioning are saved in the file and can later be
edited by appropriate commands. Same as in beams, the design can be performed either for
the current load case, i.e. for the envelope of created combinations, or the program can be
required to create itself the critical combinations for the design by command Design
Concrete Load combinations scheme.
Upon selecting the command Design Concrete Earthquake walls, the program will
require from the command bar the first point of the section line to be determined,
First point (Delete / Report / Edit /<End>):
and immediately after the end point to be determined.
Second Point:
875
By selecting points 1and 2, the section line for design is determined

After assigning the section line, the program will open a dialog box with the following
appearance.
Appearance of a dialog box for design of seismic walls in assigned section

Since the earthquake walls are mainly stressed in their own plane, i.e. the governing results in
them are presented by influences: Nx, Ny and Nxy, the same procedure as in slabs, to
determine as single-valued the required reinforcement in each point of the wall and to present
it by isolines, cannot be applied in course of designing the earthquake walls, but the procedure
is reduced to design of a corresponding rectangular section the width of which is determined
by the wall thickness, while the height is determined by the first and end points of the section
line.
The corresponding rectangular section that is being designed is presented schematically in the
upper right corner of the dialog box, while the information about its dimensions (b/d) and
gross section area (Ab) is written under this image.
876
Schematic presentation of corresponding rectangular section

Since the algorithm for earthquake wall design is reduced to rectangular cross-section beam
element design, the influences due to combined bending are accepted by vertical
reinforcement grouped in wall corners (Aa1 and Aa2) and by vertical reinforcement that is
placed uniformly along the lateral sides of the wall (Aav). Influences due to shear stresses are
accepted by horizontal reinforcement (Aah), which is also placed uniformly along the lateral
sides of the wall.
The position of these reinforcements is determined by the distance between their centroid and
the external edge of the concrete section, and you can assign these data in edit boxes a1=,
a2= and a3=, which are to the left of the figure in which the cross-section is schematically
presented.
Edit boxes for defining the distance between the centroid of all four reinforcements
and the corresponding section edges
877
Influences Governing the Design
A list, in which section forces (M, T, N) for each of the basic load cases are presented along the
assigned section line in the wall, is in the right part of the dialog box.
The list with presented section forces for all defined basic load cases
Influences M and N are governing for designing the section subject to combined bending in
plane of the wall, while the influence T is governing for accepting the shearing stresses. The
program calculates the influences M and N by integrating the diagram of normal forces
acting in the plane of the wall, normally to the assigned section line, and reduces them to the
centroid of the section, while the program calculates the value of influence T by integrating
the diagram Nns.
In multi-mode seismic load cases, the signs of all influences (M and N sign) are always
positive. The program designs such load cases for all four combinations of these two influences
symbol - M>0 i N>0, M>0 i N<0, M<0 i N>0, M<0 i N and, as a result, adopts the
reinforcement from the least favourable case.
Depending on the new way of modal combining (CQC instead of SRSS), it will be possible to
turn on or turn off modal combining of influences by turning on or turning off the check box
CQC (Damping quot.), or if the damping coefficient is equal to zero, then SRSS.
878
The check box used for turning on/off modal combining of influences
The switches in the lower part of the dialog box are used for selecting whether the design will
be carried out for the current load case or for the defined combining scheme.
Switches for selecting the governing loading

In case when all loadings have a character Undefined loading within command Load
combination, the switch Complete scheme will be inactive.
Results
Information on governing static influences for which the procedure of calculating the required
reinforcement is carried out is written in the upper part of the dialog box Results. In
continuation of each of the presented influences, the program writes the information about
which combination did this influence result from, and it is clear that the governing combination
is that combination which gives the largest calculated required reinforcement.
879
Presentation of governing influences on the basis of

which the calculated required reinforcement is obtained
You can obtain yourself the values of influences governing the design if for each of the
combinations that is being considered you require from the program, by command Section,
to integrate the corresponding diagrams of section forces along the assigned section line, and
to reduce them by option Moment Resistance to the centroid of that section. You will obtain
values Md and Nd if you require diagram Nn to be integrated, while the value Td is
obtained by integrating the diagram Nns.
In the lower part of the dialog box Results, the results of performed design are written for
default-adopted method of reinforcing and default selected material quality. Calculated
required corner reinforcement (Aa1 and Aa2) is expressed as total required area, while the
longitudinal vertical (Aav) and horizontal (Aah) reinforcements are expressed per linear meter,
and it is understood that they are placed along both sides of the wall.
Presentation of calculated required reinforcement in assigned section
880
In continuation of each of the calculated required reinforcements, information on minimal

required reinforcement, which resulted from minimal reinforcing percentages that can be
separately defined for each of the standards, is presented.
Minimal Reinforcing Percentages
When command field Settings is selected, a dialog box having the following appearance
opens.

the minimal reinforcing percentages
In the offered edit boxes, you can regulate the minimal reinforcing percentages depending on
the gross area of concrete section.
Aa1
Aa2
Aav
Aah
L/ -
- minimal percentage of reinforcing by corner reinforcement

- minimal percentage of reinforcing by corner reinforcement
- minimal percentage of reinforcing by vertical longitudinal reinforcement
- minimal percentage of reinforcing by horizontal longitudinal reinforcement
the length of the wall along which the corner vertical reinforcement must be grouped is
assigned in this edit box, where l is the length of the wall. This data is regulated by
seismic codes and it influences only the procedure of adopting and correctly placing the
corner reinforcement.
It should be mentioned that these data are joined to the current standard and that different
minimal reinforcing percentages can be defined for each of the standards provided by the
program.
Method of Reinforcing
Since in design of sections subject to combined bending, the equilibrium of forces can always
be obtained for completely arbitrarily assigned mutual relationships of vertical reinforcements
(Aa1, Aa2, and Aav), the program provides two basic procedures for defining the reinforcing
method. Which of these two procedures will be used depends on the state either of the switch
Known Aav, which can be set either to switched-on or to switched-off state.
881
Known Aav ON
The switch Known Aav is set to switched-on state

If you want to place certain reinforcement along the length of the wall (mesh reinforcement
with known characteristics are most commonly placed here in practice) and to cover the
remaining influences by corner reinforcement (Aa1 and Aa2), then you need to set this
check box to switched-on state, while by assigning arbitrary values in edit boxes
Aa1/Aa= and Aa2/Aa= you need to regulate the mutual relationship of the corner
reinforcements. As default, the program proposes symmetrical way of reinforcing, but
surely you can arrange their relationship as you wish, clearly on the condition that the total
sum of these coefficients must be 1.00.
When calculating for the first time, the program adopts the minimal required longitudinal
reinforcement determined by the minimal reinforcing percentage as the known vertical
longitudinal reinforcement (Aav). Now, on the basis of the performed calculations, also
having in mind the calculated required area of horizontal longitudinal reinforcement for
accepting the shear stresses, by activating the command field Library you can
simultaneously adopt both horizontal and vertical longitudinal reinforcement.
This dialog box is the same as when command field Library is activated in the procedure of
adopting the reinforcement in slabs. It is clear that you can arrange this library as you desire
882
and that it is unique both in the procedure of adopting the reinforcement in slabs and in this
procedure of adopting reinforcement in walls. When the desired reinforcement is selected and
the command field OK is activated, the program will return to the basic dialog box and it will
take the data selected from the library as the known vertical reinforcement. Now you need to
carry out the new design by activating again the command field Structural Analysis, while the
program will obey the newly adopted area of vertical longitudinal reinforcement.
Greater moment
Check box that allows dimensioning of masonry walls by the "Greater moment" (resulting
reinforcement will not be symmetric) and calculation of reinforcement for receiving shear
forces under the rules for beams (taking account of the bearing capacity of concrete shear
forces). In this mode of dimensioning, edit boxes for setting vertical reinforcement
relationships are disabled. It should be emphasized that this switch is available only if switch
"Known Aav" is turned on.
Switch "Greater moment" is turned on
883
Known Aav OFF
The switch Known Aav is set to switched-off state

If this switch is set to switched-off state, then you have the possibility to determine yourself
the way of reinforcing by assigning completely arbitrary mutual relationships of vertical
reinforcements in offered edit boxes.
Aa1/Aa Aa2/Aa Aav/Aa -
ratio of corner reinforcement Aa1 to total area of vertical reinforcement in the

entire section
ratio of corner reinforcement Aa2 to total area of vertical reinforcement in the
entire section
ratio of longitudinal reinforcement to total area of vertical reinforcement in the
entire section.
Here also, the only condition is that the total sum of all coefficients assigned be 1.00.
884
Material Quality
Deo dijalog box-a za izbor kvaliteta materijala

The material characteristics are defined using closed lists: Corner reinforcement, Main
reinforcement and Concrete grade, and the analogy is exactly the same as in beam
design.
Calculating the Reinforcement
By activating the command field Calculate, the program always designs the given section
again, obeying all parameters assigned in this dialog box.
In this part of the dialog box, you have the possibility to adopt concrete reinforcement in the
given section on the basis of the results of the performed design. If the check box Known
Aav is set to switched-on state, only corner reinforcement Aa1 and Aa2 will be available to be
adopted, since in this method of design both horizontal and vertical longitudinal reinforcements
are adopted from the library of meshes. However, if this check box is set to switched-off state,
longitudinal reinforcements will then also be available to be adopted. By activating the
command field ! next to corresponding corner reinforcement, a dialog box having the
following appearance opens:
Appearance of the dialog box for adopting

the corner reinforcement
885
The analogy of operating with this dialog box is exactly the same as in the procedure of
adopting the reinforcement in beams when command Calculation of bars is activated. The
only difference is in way of placing the corner reinforcement. Namely, in this procedure the
corner bars must be placed along the assigned length determined by seismic codes for the
given standard (data L/ that is assigned by command Settings in this dialog box), so that
the data on quantity of bars that can fit onto a certain length is calculated from calculated
length and assigned clear distance between bars in edit box e=.
Since it is adopted by the program that the bars are placed only along the edge of the wall, the
calculated quantity of reinforcement that can be placed is doubled.
For example, let the length of the wall be 3m, while it is regulated by the codes that the corner
reinforcement must be placed along length L/10. Therefore, for adopted diameter 16 and
assigned clear distance between bars e=3 cm, along that length in one row 6 bars can be
placed: 30/(3+1.6)=6.52. Since the bars are placed on both sides, total of 12 bars can be
placed along that length (data that is written in column Needed in brackets).
By selecting the command field Place the bars, this dialog box will be closed while the
information on the adopted reinforcement will be written in the main dialog box. In case that
you desire to cancel the previously adopted reinforcement, you need to assign value 0 in edit
box n= and to activate command field Place the bars.
For adopting the longitudinal vertical and horizontal reinforcement, almost the same analogy
applies as in adopting the stirrups in beams, when command Stirrup calculation is activated.
886
Appearance of the dialog box for adopting

the transverse reinforcement
Since the longitudinal reinforcement is calculated per linear meter of the wall, the procedure of
adopting the reinforcement is carried out in the same way. This means that on the basis of the
assigned diameter the needed spacing of reinforcement is calculated, while the required bar
diameter is calculated on the basis of assigned spacing. By selecting the command field Place
the bars, the information about the adopted reinforcement will be written in the main dialog
box.
It should also be mentioned that in cases that the minimal required reinforcement is greater
than the calculated required reinforcement, the program will always write the larger value in
the column Needed.
Control of Adopted Reinforcement
When command field Control of retained reinforcement is activated, the program controls
whether the adopted reinforcement satisfies and it issues a corresponding warning.
In addition to the report which contains the design results, (Report with reinforcement) it
is also possible to obtain the report which contains only the table of influences in the selected
wall section by load cases (Report with influences) as well as the the report which
contains both of these (Report with reinforcement and influences).
887
The combo boxes for selecting the report which is to be generated

When command field OK is activated, the procedure of assigned section design will be
completed and the program will mark the previously assigned section in the drawing, and it
will require from the command bar the new section for designing to be defined.
The previously designed section is clearly marked in the drawing

Editing the Sections
Selecting the sub-option "Edit" from the command line, user is able to edit both - sections
obtained by the command for the dimensioning of the seismic walls, and sections obtained by
dimensioning commands for a series of walls and for the tension control in the masonry walls.
Depending on the chosen section, one of three dialogs will be opened: "Seismic Walls",
"Dimensioning of a series of walls" or "Tension control in masonry walls" (see sections 9.6 and
9.8). By selecting the sub-option Edit from the command bar, the program will require any
of the previously assigned sections to be selected.
<0 sel.> Edit Select (Window / Polygon / Section / <End>):_
888
If you select a cross section obtained by the command for dimensioning seismic walls, a dialog
will be displayed, same as the one in the process of dimensioning that section.
Appearance of the edit box for editing the previously designed section
All parameters offered are now available to be changed and for new design.
Deleting the Section
When sub-option Delete is selected, the program will require from the command bar all
previously assigned sections, which you want to be removed from the drawing.
<0 sel.> Delete - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / Deselect / <End>):
Creating the Textual Report
After selecting the sub-option "Report" program opens a window reserved for the display of
the text report, in which all conducted dimensioning in all sections obtained by the command
for the seismic walls, as in all sections obtained by the command for the dimensioning of a
series of walls, is displayed (see section 9.6).
889
Appearance of the dialog box for presenting the textual report

If reinforcement is adopted, it is now displayed on the drawing in the report.
This window is operated with in exactly the same way as in other command in the program in
which textual reports are created.
9.6
Dimensioning a series of walls
"Tower" introduces automation of dimensioning of seismic walls by dimensioning

multiple walls at once (e.g. multiple floors). With the command "Dimensioning a series of
walls", program automatically dimensions an arbitrary number of walls, taking care of the
holes in the wall, and it automatically determines the most authoritative sections for which the
report should be displayed. User has the option to insert additional sections in report. Please
note that the results of the conducted dimensioning of a series of walls are saved in the file.
After selecting command "Design Concrete Concrete design - the array
of walls", command line enters the procedure of selecting panel-walls:
<0 sel.> Concrete design - the array of walls Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section /
eXtras / selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End> / Direction<vertical> /
Density<Default> / Edit):
When selecting, make sure that all panels and walls belong to the same current 2D view;
otherwise the program will display a warning:
890
Since dimensioning a series of walls can take quite a while depending on the density of the
finite elements net, using the sub-option "Density" the user has the ability to affect the
density of the places on which a series of dimensioning of walls will be carried out, and thus to
affect the length of calculation. After selecting this sub-option from the command line, you will
be required to input density of the finite elements net:
Density is specified in meters, and the current value is printed between cornered brackets. It is
clear that the length of the calculation will be shorter as the value that user sets for the
density is higher. If we select sub-option "Default" from the command line, sections will be
calculated on the positions of finite elements net.
In addition to dimensioning an arbitrary number of walls by height (setting a vertical direction
of dimensioning), user can set the horizontal and oblique direction of dimensioning. Command
line has a sub-option "Direction<vertical>" whose title indicates the direction of
dimensioning walls. By repeatedly selecting this sub-option, it will change its name and get
one of three possible forms:
"Direction <vertical>"
When the command line has this sub-option, it means that the direction of
dimensioning of walls is going to be vertical. Upon completion of the
command, the drawing will display vertical dimensioning axis.
"Direction <horizontal>"
When the command line has this sub-option, it means that the direction of
dimensioning of walls is going to be horizontal. Upon completion of the
command, drawing will display horizontal dimensioning axis.
"Direction <inclined>"
When the command line has this sub-option, it means that that the direction
of dimensioning of walls is going to be oblique. After selection of walls, the
command line will display a message for defining oblique axis of
dimensioning:
First point of dimensioning direction (Density / <End>):
User is now expected to set the first point of dimensioning axis, and then the second point:
Second point:
This defines the direction of dimensioning.
After selecting the desired wall and activating the right mouse button a dialog will open:
891
Dialog for dimensioning a series of walls

In the upper right corner, dialog contains a table with all sections in which dimensioning of
walls has been done, while the drawing below this table displays all selected walls, as well as
all reliable sections which were automatically determined by the program. The current section
from the table is displayed in red on the drawing, while the critical one is displayed in black.
Section number that appears in the table depends on the given density.
N
The column with all sections for which dimensioning has been done. If the
icon appears in this column it means that these sections are critical and a text
report will be displayed for them.
- given section is critical for bending and shearing.
- given section is critical for bending.
- given section is critical for shearing.
All sections with ordinal number in this column will be displayed in the report.
"Position"
The column with position of the sections, in coordinates x, y and z if it is in

the direction of the global axis. If it is not, then it prints the position relative
to the beginning of the local coordinate system.
Column with check boxes whose state determines whether to create the
report text for that section. In this way, the user, in addition to reliable
section, can create reports for any section that is in the table. Since report is
always created for the critical section, there is no check box for it. All sections
that will be displayed in the report are numbered and their ordinal number will
be displayed in the column "N". Right-click on this column opens a menu
with the following options:
"All on" - all check boxes will be turned on (all sections from the table will be
displayed in the report).
"All off" - all check boxes will be turned off (only critical sections will be
displayed in the report).
"Adopted reinforcement assign to all selected sections" - by activating
this option, adopted reinforcement from the currently selected section will
automatically be applied to all sections for which the check box is turned on.
"Adopted reinforcement assign to all sections" - by activating this option,
adopted reinforcement from the currently selected section will automatically
be applied to all sections from the table.
892
"Density"
Edit box in which user can later enter a new value for the density of position
of section. The program will automatically do the calculation of dimensioning.
If the user enters zero, it means that the program will work with the default
density. All previously said for giving of the density by calling the option
"Density" from the command line, also applies here.
"Show axis mark"

Check box whose turning on means displaying the axis mark of the
dimensioning after exiting the dialogue. On the right side of this check box is
an edit box in which user can enter arbitrary text for the axis mark.
"Select plates/walls"
This button temporarily closes the dialogue and re-enters the plate selecting
process so user can later insert or remove some walls from the dimensioning.
After completion of the changes in selection, the program returns to the
dialogue for dimensioning a series of walls.
Other data contained in this dialog box is the same as data in the dialog for seismic
dimensioning of walls, so it will not be explained here again (see section 9.5).
"Report"
Button that opens a window reserved for displaying text report. It displays
conducted dimensioning in all critical sections as well as in sections which user
explicitly included in the report:
Dialog for displaying text reports

Working with this dialog is the same as in other commands of the program that create a text
report.
Activating the button "OK" in the dialog for dimensioning a series of walls, dimensioning
procedures will be completed and the program will mark the dimensioning axis and all sections
that were selected in the dialog:
893
The drawing shows the axis of dimensioning and sections selected in the dialog.
Each section contains the dimensioning axis mark, defined by the user in the dialogue.
Edit
Selecting the sub-option "Edit" from the command line, user is able to edit both sections
obtained by the command for dimensioning seismic walls and sections obtained by commands
for dimensioning a series of walls, and for the tension control in the masonry walls. The
command line gets the following form:
<0 sel.> Edit - Select (Window / Polygon / Section / <End>):
After selecting dimensioning axis the program will open the same dialogue, with all previous
data given in the process of dimensioning of a series of walls:
Dialog for editing a series of previously dimensioned walls

All offered parameters are now available for changing implementation of a new dimensioning
procedure.
If user selects previously given section which was obtained using the command for
dimensioning seismic walls, a dialog same as the one in the process of dimensioning that
section will open:
894
Dialog for editing previously dimensioned section

If user selects dimensioning axis obtained by the command for the tension control in masonry
walls, the same dialogue will be opened as in the process of implementing the tension control
of masonry walls:
All offered parameters are now available for changing and implementation of new tension
controls in masonry walls (see section 9.8).
895
9.7
Cross-section Calculation
With this command, which is within the drop-down menu Design Concrete, the
required reinforcement for arbitrary cross-section and for arbitrarily assigned static influences
can be calculated. Namely, when command Cross-section calculation is selected, a dialog
box, which functions as a completely independent part of the program, opens while the
required reinforcement is calculated for a selected standard.
Closed list for selecting the standard in accordance

with which the design will be performed
The desired shape and dimensions of the cross-section are defined in the upper half of the
dialog box. This part of the dialog box functions in exactly the same way as the dialog box for
defining the beam cross-sections in the input data module (for a selected type of crosssections, corresponding dimensions are assigned in edit boxes).
A rectangular cross-section b/d=20/40 cm is selected
896
In the lower left corner of the dialog there is a list in which users enters static impacts that
strain that section. Each row corresponds to one load case. The last column in the table
contains a check box whose state determines whether dimensioning of a section will be made
for a given load case.
Part of the dialog with a series of impacts for which dimensioning of sections will be done
"
Add"
Button that adds a new row below the last one.
"With Copy"
Check box that determines if newly added row will have the same data (static
impacts) as a row that was active in the moment of pressing the "Add"
button.
"
Button that removes the selected row from the table.
Delete"
When command field Way of reinforcement is selected, a dialog box in which you can
define both the material quality and the way of reinforcing.
897
Appearance of the dialog box that opens after selecting

the command filed Way of reinforcement
The content and the way of operating with this dialog boxes exactly the same as when
command Design Concrete Beams Input data Local is activated. In this part of the
dialog box, only the part that refers to calculation of buckling influences will be inactive, since
this problem is not solved on the level of a section but on the level of a whole member. By
closing this dialog box, it returns to the basic dialog box, and all assigned data, both about the
way of reinforcing and about the adopted material, are joined to the section for which the
required reinforcement needs to be calculated. By activating the command field Calculate,
the required reinforcement is calculated for the assigned input data and for the selected code,
and the results are written in the part Results of the dialog box.
Part of the dialog box in which the results of performed calculation

of required reinforcement are presented
898
Calling the commands for interaction diagrams is possible from the dialogue for calculation of a
section.
"Interaction diagram"
This button enters the "Interaction diagram" dialog which allows generating
the interaction diagram, as well as the control of beams load of an arbitrary
section for a given impact. This button is enabled only if the reinforcement
calculation has been done. Working in this dialogue has already been
explained (see Section 4.9.10), so it will not be explained here again.
The icons for block export and direct printing will not be available all until the calculation
results are presented in the dialog box. When one of these two icons is selected, the program
will form the textual report, which contains all data about the performed design.
Appearance of the textual report formed by command Cross-section calculation

The report will begin with an arbitrarily assigned text which you have assigned in edit box
Project, immediately before activating one of the commands offered. This command may
have multiple applications, especially when performing the control of somebody elses designs.
9.8
Masonry wall stress control
"Tower" enables the control of normal tension and shear forces in the masonry
walls defined by regulation EUROCODE.
After selecting commands "Design Concrete Masonry wall stress control"
the program enters the procedure of selecting masonry walls:
<0 sel.> Masonry wall stress control - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras /
selection Groups / Recent selection / Deselect / <End> / Density<Default> / Edit):
Since tension control can take quite a while depending on the net density, using the sub-option
"Density" user can affect the density of the section in which the analysis will be done, and
thus affect the length of the calculation. After selecting this sub-option, the program requires
inputting a new density:
899
Density is specified in meters. Current value is displayed between corner brackets. It is clear
that the length of the calculation is shorter as density is higher. If you select sub-option
"Default", tension control will be carried out in locations of finite elements.
After selecting masonry walls (walls whose material is from the group "Masonry") and right
clicking the mouse, a dialog box of the following appearance will open:
Dialog for the tension control in masonry walls

At the top of the dialog there is a box that displays the complete report of the tension control
in masonry walls. As you change parameters the report does not update automatically. It is
necessary to activate button "Calculate" which leads to repeating calculation and generating a
new report.
The lower part of the dialogue displays parameters for defining values needed for the tension
control in masonry walls:
fb [MPa]
Edit box for entering the characteristic strength of masonry unit.
fk [MPa]
Edit box for entering the characteristic compressive strength.
fvk0 [MPa]
Edit box for entering the characteristic shear strength under zero compressive
stress.
fvk,ult [MPa]
Edit box for entering the ultimate characteristic shear strength.
900
Safety factor for material
Edit box for entering the safety factor for material.
The characteristic shear strength fvk [MPa] is determined in one of the following ways:
1.
f vk f vko 0.4 d
where:
f vk 0 [MPa ] - characteristic shear strength under zero compressive stress
d [MPa ] - operating voltage of pressure perpendicular to the shear direction

2.
f vk 0.065 f b f vk 0
where:
f b [MPa ] - characteristic strength of masonry unit

f vk 0 [MPa ] - characteristic shear strength under zero compressive stress
"Current load case"
Switch that determines whether calculation will be done for the current load
case.
"Complete scheme"
Switch that determines whether calculation will be done for a defined load
scheme. This switch is disabled if in command "Load combinations scheme" all
loads have the character "Undefined load".
"Calculation"
Button that does re-calculation and generates a new report, taking into
account all parameters set in the dialog box.
"Include the assembly picture in the report"

Check box that determines whether the report of the tension control will
display all selected walls, and not just walls with critical sections.
901
Check box "Include the assembly picture in

the report" is on
Check box "Include the assembly picture in

the report" is off
Selecting buttons
,
and
created report can be exported to the project documentation,
sent directly to the print or saved in a text file.
Activating the "OK" button, tension control procedures of the masonry walls will be finished
and the program will mark the axis of the dimensioning on the drawing as well as critical
sections.
The drawing shows the axis of dimensioning

and critical sections for each selected wall
Edit
Selecting the sub-option "Edit" from the command line, user can edit axis of the dimensioning
set in the command for tension control in masonry walls. The command line gets the following
form:
902
<0 sel.> Edit - Select (Window / Polygon / Section / <End>):

After selecting the axis of dimensioning, the program will open the same dialogue with all data
previously given in the process of doing tension control in masonry walls:
All parameters are now editable and ready for doing new tension control in masonry walls.
903
10. Steel Section Design

This module offers you the possibility to design steel structures, for all types of
stressing and for almost all shapes of single-part and multi-part steel sections. Commands for
steel section design are contained within the drop-down menu Design Steel. In order to
simplify the selection of commands from this menu, icon Steel: Design is provided, and
when it is selected the menu with this group of commands opens.
Icon for fast selecting the commands from drop-down menu

Design Steel
Note:
Since the design is performed only for the selected combinations of simultaneous action of
basic load cases, the command for steel section design will be inactive if at least one
combination has not been previously defined. This means that, before the design procedure
itself you need to define all governing combinations from which the static influences for the
design will be taken by the program. In case when the model does not contain any created
combinations, after selecting any of the commands from the menu Design Steel, the
program will issue the following warning.
904
10.1
Selecting the Codes for Design
Before beginning with the design procedure itself, the standard in accordance with
which the steel design will be performed needs to be selected. When command Codes, which
is within the drop-down menu Design Steel is selected, a dialog box with the following
appearance opens.
Appearance of the dialog box for selecting the current code

The current standard is changed simply by selecting from the closed list in the left part of the
dialog box. When command field OK is activated, the dialog box will disappear from the
screen while the selected codes will be valid from then on. In case that design results in
accordance with some other standard already exist for some parts of the model, the program
will issue the following warning.
When command field OK is activated, all existing design results will be lost. This means that
all steel sections in one model can be designed only in accordance with a same standard.
In this dialog box, in addition to selecting the desired standard, it is also possible to define the
global parameters that will be used by the program in its operation. The allowed percentage of
exceeding the allowable stresses is defined in edit box Tolerance. Namely, if the effective
stresses in a section are very close to allowable stresses (within the limits of the assigned
tolerance) these members will be treated in commands Stress verification and Stability
control as regular members by the program.
The allowable steel yield point v will be determined by selecting the steel type from the
closed list in the upper right part of the dialog box. In edit boxes M0 =, M1 = and
M2 =, you have the possibility to define the partial safety factors and the value of factor
vec=.
905
10.2
Governing load
EUROCODE
When this command is activated, a dialog box for selecting which combination,
among all previously created combinations, will be treated in steel section design.
Appearance of the dialog box f

or selecting the critical load
The presented list box contains that number of rows, as is the number of combinations defined
by command Load Case. The serial number of the given combination is written in column
N, the assigned title is written in column Name, while the last column is provided for
selecting whether the given combination would or would not be considered in the design.
Existence of symbol in this column means that the given combination is taken into
account, while empty field means that the given combination will not be taken into account in
the design.
The Tower program enables generating and exporting reports with governing combinations
to the project documentation. For this purpose, the command field
Report has been
envisaged, which is located in the dialog box of the command Governing load.
906
The command field for generating the report

with governing combinations
Once you have selected this command field, a dialog box with generated report will open up:
The dialog box containing the generated textual report

on governing load- the layout
The command fields which are located in the lower right corner of the dialog box are used for
exporting the report with governing load combinations either to the project documentation,
directly to print or a text file.
907
10.3
Stress control
When this command is selected, the program will perform the stress control, and
soon after all members in the model will be coloured either green or red. All members that
satisfy the stress control will be coloured green, while those that do not satisfy the stress
control will be coloured red. The calculation is carried out for normal, shearing and combined
stresses, according to the following expressions:
stv = N/Ax + My/Wy + Mz/Wz
stv = Ty(z) /Ay(z)
u = (,stv2 + 3,stv2)1/2
Both for the normal stress and for the shearing stress, the program will calculate the
corresponding section yield factor, i.e. the ratio of allowable to effective stresses, and it will
write the maximal value of the calculated section yield factor in the middle of each member. In
continuation of this value, the serial number of combination from which the maximal yield
resulted will be written in brackets. Although it is probably clear, it should be emphasized that
the perfect value of this factor when stresses are concerned is 1.00, while all members that
do not satisfy will have a value > 1.00, and those members that do satisfy < 1.00. It
should be mentioned that members with yield > 1.00, will be coloured green, if the
exceeding remains within the tolerance assigned by command Codes.
View of yield factor concerning the allowable stresses

After activating the command Stress control, the cursor obtains the form of a select box,
and a message indicating that the User is expected to select a beam for which he desires to
obtain a more detailed presentation of performed stress control, appears in the command bar.
<0 sel.> Stress control Select (Report / <End>):
After selecting the desired beam, the program will open a dialog box with a detailed
presentation of the performed stress control.
908
Appearance of the dialog box for presenting

the performed stress control
The presented list box contains that number of rows, as is the number of combinations defined
by command Load Case. The serial number of the given combination is written in column
N, while the values of calculated stresses for the given combination are written in other
columns. The program marks by a special color the extreme stress values, i.e. the stress
corresponding to the maximal section yield, since sometimes even a smaller stress may be
critical, if the corresponding allowable stress is decreased.
A report can also be generated for the performed stress control of the selected beam. For this
purpose, the command field Report has been envisaged, upon activating which a dialog box
of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box with the generated report

on stress control
909
The generated report is displayed in the central part of the dialog box. The set and description
of the selected beam is written in the first row, and calculated stress control for all load
combinations is written in all other rows. The column Description is used for displaying
node numbers of finite elements meshes in the first and last beam point, as well as the item
type, if it has been defined for the given beam. Ordinal numbers of load combinations for
which stress control has been performed are displayed in the LC column, whereas calculated
values of normal, shear and comparative stresses for each combination are written in all other
columns. Stress values corresponding to the maximal section utilization are marked in a
special way.
Using the command fields which are located in the lower right part of the dialog box enable
you to export the report to the project documentation, directly to printing or to a textual
document.
The report can simultaneously be generated for an arbitrary number of selected beams. For
this purpose, the command field Report has been envisaged, which is activated from the
command bar:
<0 sel.> Stress control - Select (Report / <End>):
After selecting this sub-option, the program starts the standard procedure of selecting entities:
<0 sel.> Report - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
Now you need to select all the beams for which you want to create the report on stress control.
As soon as selecting is over, the program will generate the report and display it in the same
dialog box as when creating the report from the dialog box for stress control.
The dialog box with the generated report

on stress control
910
The report format is exactly the same as in the report which is generated from the dialog box
for stress control. However, this time it displays the stress values which correspond to the
maximal section utilization for each of the selected beams.
When the command field OK is activated, this dialog box closes, and the program will require
from the command bar the next beam to be selected, all until you denote the end of this
command by a click on the right mouse button.
10.4
Input Data
EUROCODE
This command serves for defining the input data that will be used by the program
in the stability control procedure. When selected, the program enters the selecting procedure,
and the following message appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Input data for beam - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
The selecting procedure is exactly the same as in other commands in the program, and the
program will be in the selecting procedure all until you right-click, which is followed by opening
of the dialog box for defining the input data.
Appearance of the dialog box for defining the input data

Which data can be assigned in the dialog box depends solely on the type of section (whether it
is single-part or multi-part, and if multi-part whether welded or not) and on whether only one
member or several members are selected. We shall first explain the meaning of each of the
input data.
Buckling length coefficients (to be assigned for all shapes of member cross-sections)
The slenderness factors about the local Z and local Y axes of a member are assigned in edit
boxes z and y respectively (if L sections are concerned, slenderness factors about the
principal / axes of the section are assigned). In default, value 1 is adopted for these
values, ant it is up to the User to correct these values himself. In addition to assigning
buckling lengths in the relative sense (by assigning the buckling length coefficient), it is also
possible to assign the member buckling length in the absolute amount. In other words, once
911
you activate the
icon, the edit box name is changed to Buckling length and the absolute
value of the buckling length is written in it.
Buckling curves (to be assigned for all shapes of member cross-sections)
Depending on the shape of the member cross-section, the program accurately adopts the
corresponding buckling curve in accordance with the standard, both for z-z and for y-y
axes, but it also offers you the possibility to adopt any other buckling curve from the closed
list, which opens by a click on the arrow to the right of the corresponding edit box.
Spacing of lateral restraints (to be assigned for all shapes of member cross-sections)
This data is necessary for calculation of lateral buckling, and in default, the program adopts
the actual length of the member as its value. It should be mentioned that the calculation of
lateral buckling can be excluded if you assign value 0 for this data.
Stiffeners spacing (to be assigned only for single-part welded sections)
This data is necessary for calculation of lateral buckling, and it will be available only if a
member with welded cross-section is selected. For other types of cross-sections, the whole
length of the member is adopted as the stiffeners spacing in the design.
Slenderness factor (to be assigned for all shapes of member cross-sections)
This data is necessary for calculation of lateral torsional buckling, and it applies to rotation of
the end section in the plane.
Torsional buckling factor (to be assigned for all shapes of member cross-sections)
This data is necessary for calculation of lateral torsional buckling, and it applies to distortion of
the end section.
Net section area factor (to be assigned for all shapes of member cross-sections)
This factor reduces the gross section area in course of calculating.
Load position (to be assigned for all shapes of member cross-sections)
The position of the loading is defined by setting one of the three switches offered to switchedon state. This data is used for calculating the lateral buckling.
Steel type
By selecting one of the options offered in the combo box, it is possible to change steel type, so
now it is also possible to analyse structures made from various steel types.
Bar type (to be assigned only for multi-part sections)
This group of input data will be available only if a member having a multi-part section is
selected. By setting one of the two offered switched to switched-on state, you define whether
frame member or truss member is being considered.
Frame member
Distance between splice plates
The program adopts as default one third of the actual member length as this value, so it is
up to you to assign the actual distance between the splice plates in edit box Distance:.
Width
The dimension of the splice plate in the lengthwise direction of the member is assigned in
edit box Width:.
Thickness
The thickness of the splice plate is assigned in edit box Thickness:.
912
Truss member
Distance between web members
The program adopts as default one third of the actual member length as this value, so it is
up to you to assign the actual distance between the nodes in the truss web in edit box
Distance:.
Design area
Depending on the system of web members, according to the valid standard, the design area
of the diagonal Ar needs to be assigned in edit box Area:.
Radius of gyration
The value of the radius of gyration for the weaker axis of web member needs to be assigned
in edit box Radius of gyration:.
Loading shape dependant parameters It is possible to affect the way of defining
parameters which are dependent upon the diagram shape. When the check box Arbitrary is
on, C1, C2, C3, and M.LT factor, which will be used during controling stability, can be
entered. When this check box is off, the program will automatically define factors for each load
case separately, according to its moment diagram shape.
The report on controling each member stability can now contain the table of member utilization
factors by all combinations. Including this table in the report is performed via the check box
Include the table of utilization factors by loads in the report.
Disregarding influences
Controling stability can be conducted with disregarding one or more influences. It is completely
up to the user to specify the type of influence and also to make sure not to make any mistakes
while doing it.
Apply to all beams of the same set
Check box with whose turning on allows assigning the same input data to all beams belonging
to the same set.
As we have already said at the beginning of this part of the manual, the group of data
available to be entered will depend both on the cross-section type of the selected member and
on whether only one member or several members have been selected. If only one member has
been selected, only data provided for the given type of cross-section will be available in the
edit box, so it is sufficient to activate the command field OK after assigning the desired input
data. However, since the model may consist of a large number of members, surely it is much
more practical to select several members having at least one part of the input data the same,
which considerably speeds up the procedure of assigning the input data. In that case, only
those data that are common to all selected members will be available.
Since the design is performed for several combinations of simultaneous action of basic load
cases, some input data may be excessive in the stage of defining the input data since the
stressing region is not known at that moment, and it is quite possible that, for example, a
same member is subject to compression in one combination, and subject to tension in another.
There is even a more drastic example, that the program always requires the member buckling
lengths as an input data, while the given member is not subject to compression in any of the
combinations. In such cases the excessive input data will not influence the design, so it make
no difference which value is joined to them.
913
10.5
Stability Control
When you have defined all input data, first the standard selecting procedure is
entered by selecting the command Stability control.
<0 sel.> Stability control - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups
Namely, now you are expected to select all members for which you desire the design to be
performed. After completing the selecting procedure, the program will first control if the
selected members have previously already been designed, and if so, it will issue a
In this case, you have the possibility either to quit, or to continue the command design of all
previously selected members by selecting the command field OK. After completed design,
the program will be ready for processing the design results, which will be dealt with in more
detail in the next chapter.
10.6
Viewing results
When this command is selected, the program will color all members, for which the
stability control has been previously performed, either green or red. The slenderness factor is
written above the member, and its meaning is exactly the same as in command Stress
control. Namely, the perfect value is 1.00, while all members that do not satisfy have a
value > 1.00 and those members that do satisfy have a value < 1.00. After activating the
command Viewing results, the following message appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Viewing results - Select (Filter / <End>):
User is now expected to select an arbitrary beam, or to select one of sub-options from the
command line.
In "Tower" it is possible to use filters for displaying dimensioned beams to display only those
beams of a given set that have utilization in a given range as well as beams with extreme
efficiency. This way the program will paint blue all beams of a given set, for which stability
control was conducted, and which do not meet the given filter. Otherwise, if they meet given
filters, beams will be painted green if they have a coefficient of utilization "<1.00", or red if
they have a coefficient of utilization "> 1.00". Non-dimensioned beams will be paint white.
After activating the sub-option "Filter", a dialog in which user can specify the filter for
displaying dimensioned beams will be displayed:
914
Dialog for defining filters for displaying dimensioned beams

"Active"
Check box that determines if all defined filters in this dialog affect the display
of dimensioned beams.
"Set"
The column with ordinal numbers of sets of steel sections from the file.
"Name"
The column with descriptions of sets of steel sections from the file. Behind
this column is the column with check boxes that determine for which set of
beams will the filter be applied. Right-clicking this column opens a drop-down
menu with the options "All on" and "All off". With them you can turn on or
off filter for all sets.
"Filter"
Clicking on the arrow located on the right of the cell, opens a menu with
offered filters: "All", "Only n extremes", "Only with the yield larger than
", "Only with the yield less than".
"All" - indicates that all beams of the set will be displayed without using a
filter.
"Only n extremes" - indicates that only n beams of one set will be displayed,
with the highest utilization level. In the edit field "n" the user specifies the
number of beams.
"Only with the yield larger than " - indicates that for each set of beams,
only those will be displayed that have a utilization greater than the one user
specified in edit box "".
"Only with the yield less than" - indicates that for each set of beams, only
those will be displayed that have a utilization less than the one user specifies
in edit box "".
Activation of button "OK" closes the dialog and applies all given filters to the model by
displaying beams in the appropriate color.
915
User selected a filter for displaying beams with utilization coefficient

greater than 1 that makes beams with the utilization coefficient
smaller than 1 painted in blue.
After selecting a beam from the drawing, a dialog will be displayed:
Appearance of a dialog box for detailed presentation of design results

The lower part of the dialog box contains all input data for the selected member, while
slenderness factors () for each of the assigned combinations individually are presented as
orientation values in the right part of the dialog box. The upper part of the dialog box contains
a detailed presentation of the performed design procedure. The current content of this dialog
box can be changed by the scroll bar on its right side, while keys PgUp, PgDn, as well as
cursor arrows , can also be used, but only on the condition that that window is focused.
In case these keys do not react, it is sufficient to click the mouse button anywhere within the
window for viewing the design results, which will result in change of the focus, and the
scrolling keys will start operating again.
916
In case you desire to change the data for the given member, you do not need to exit this
command and to start the command Input Data again, but instead it is sufficient to perform
all necessary changes in this dialog box and next to activate the command field
Calculate. After this operation the program will carry out new calculations for the
selected member, taking into account all changes performed in input data. A conclusion can be
drawn from this that it is not necessary to use the command Input Data if you want to
design the members one by one. In that case, it is sufficient to activate the command
Stability control, without previously activating the command Input Data, and disregarding
the performed design in the first step, you can select members one by one, assign the needed
input data in this dialog box, and perform the repeated design.
If the member does not satisfy, in such way that by changing any of the input data that
applies to structural solving of the problem (e.g. changing the distance between the laterally
restrained points, changing the distance between splice plates, etc.) it cannot satisfy all
necessary controls, then the solution is surely in changing the cross-section of the member.
Since the change of the cross-section of the member will result in redistribution of static
influences in the entire model, in those cases it is necessary to return to the input data
module, to change the cross-section of the member, to carry out the calculation of static
influences again, and of course, to design again all members in the model. However, if you
estimate that the change of the cross-section will not result in significant redistribution of static
influences in the entire model, the program offers you the possibility to change the crosssection even without calculating the structure again. For that purpose, command field New
section is provided. When this command field is activated, a dialog box, identical to the
dialog box for defining the beam cross-sections in the input data module, opens. There you
can change the cross-section, and next you can require the selected member to be designed
again, for earlier static influences, but with new cross-section characteristics, by command
field
Calculate. It should be mentioned that a cross-section changed in this way will be
treated only in the module for steel design, while in all other commands, the program will deal
only with the original section, which was assigned in the input data module, and for which the
static influences have been calculated. In case you desire to quit changing the cross-section, it
is sufficient to activate the command field Original. When this command field is activated,
the previously changed cross-section will be replaced by the original section.
It is possible to generate the report on controling stability in the selected section. The edit box
Section distance from the member beginning is used for entering the section position in
which the design report is requested, whereas by activating the command field Generate the
report, it is possible to generate the report which is related to the given section. Selecting
the command field
Clalculate will result in viewing again the report on controling stability
for the whole member.
By selecting the command fields
and
, each viewed report can be either exported to the
project documentation or sent directly to print.
When command field OK is activated, all changes in the input data, if performed, as well as
the results of repeated design for the selected member will be permanently saved, while the
command field Cancel is provided for quitting all performed changes.
917
10.7
Report
Since this command is planned for creating the textual reports on paper, it makes
sense to select it only after the stability control procedure has been performed. When this
command is selected, a well-known message, stating that the User is expected to select one or
more members, appears on the command bar.
<0 sel.> Report - Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
selection / Deselect / <End > / Filter):
Using filters for displaying dimensioned beams, user can, for each set of beams, display only
those beams that have utilization in a given range and beams with extreme utilization. For
beams that meet set filters user can easily create a report by their automated insertion in
selection, but there is a possibility to insert additional beams in report.
After activating sub-option "Filter" a dialog will be opened in which user can specify the filter
for displaying dimensioned beams:
Dialog for defining filters for displaying

dimensioned beams under the report command
Working with this dialogue has been explained before (see section 10.6), so it will not be
explained here again.
"Select for the report"
Check box that selects all beams that meet the criteria. This way user can
quickly and easily create a report for them.
After you have selected all beams for which you want to create a text report, clicking the right
mouse button will mark the end of selection procedure and a dialog with a text report will be
displayed.
918
Appearance of the dialog box for textual presentation of design results

At the beginning of the report, input data are written for each of the beams, and next the
design results of the performed design.
Icons for direct printing and block export into design documentation
919
In addition to direct printing, the program also provides export of this report into design
documentation. All members assigned in one sance will belong to one textual report, and thus
it is up to you to determine the way of grouping the selected members.
Presentation of a textual report with the steel design results

within the design documentation
Since the textual reports may be quite long, they are created in several columns, where the
number of columns depends only on the selected font and its size.
10.8
Report for a single section
This command has been envisaged for obtaining the report in a specific place of the
member for which controling stability has been conducted. Selecting it will mark the start of
the procedure of selecting member:
<0 sel.> Beam on which cross section is requested Select (<End>):
Once you complete the selection, you are expected to choose a point on the selected member
for which you want to obtain the report on controling stability:
Point on the beam:
Once you have selected a point on the beam, a dialog box containing the report will open up:
920
10.9
Stability control - calculator
Controling stability and generating the report for an arbitrarily defined member with
arbitrarily assigned influences is now possible within the program. Once you have activated
this command, a dialog box quite similar to the one for viewing results will open up. (As it is
analogous with other regulations, we shall describe this command only for the regulation
EUROCODE).
The dialog box for controling the single member stability - the layout
921
In this dialog box, in addition to the fields for entering the standard input data, which are also
located in the dialog boxes for input data and viewing results, there are also fields for
enteringn those data which would otherwise be taken over from a real entity member in the
structure.
Steel type - by selecting one of the options offered in the combo box, it is possible to
change steel type.
Length - this edit box is used for entering member length.
Influences - in this part of the dialog box, there are edit boxes for entering influences
(forces) which are effective along the member.
Load shape dependant parameters - It has been assumed that influences of constant
intensity are effective along the whole member, and the effects of various shapes of moment
diagrams can be assigned via C1, C2, C3, and M.LT factors.
The command field Pick is used for preparing the data in this dialog box, on the basis of the
selected member from the structure.
Activating this command field will result in taking directly from the drawing, and the command
bar will obtain the following layout:
<0 sel.> Single member Select (<End>):
You may select a single member, upon which the program will return to the main dialog box.
You can take the cross section, length and input data for controling stability from the selected
member.
The command field New section is used for changing the member cross section. Once you
have activated it, the dialog box for selecting and defining cross section will open up.
Analysing and generating the report is performed by activating the command field
Clalculate. Maximum utilization factor is written in the field Utilisation factor.
922
11. Wood Constructions

Dimensioning process
Using this module, one has the possibility to size the construction elements wood
bars: straight bars, bent bars with cross-section constant dimension, straight bars with crosssection variable dimension, multipart wooden bars, for all stretching kinds. The command for
wooden construction elements dimensioning process is in the scope of the menu Design
Timber. In order to make the choice from this menu easier, the icon Timber: Design has
been predicted, by which choice, the menu with this command group is being opened.
Icon for a quick command choice from the menu Design Timber
NOTE:
Since the dimensioning process is carried out only for the chosen combinations of
contemporary acting of basic cases load, the commands for wooden construction elements
dimensioning process would be inactive, if at least one combination has not previously been
defined. This means that, before the very dimensioning process procedure, it is necessary to
define all authoritative components, from which the program is going to take all dimensioning
process structural influences. In case, the model does not contain any created combination,
after choosing any command from the menu Design Timber, the program will issue the
following warning.
923
11.1
Dimensioning process Regulation Choice
Before entering the dimensioning process procedure itself, it is necessary to choose

the standard, according to which the dimensioning process is going to take place. By choosing
the command Codes, which is in the scope of the menu Design Timber, the dialog box of
the following form is being opened.
Dialog box for the current regulation choice

The current standard change is done by a simple choice from the closed list, which is on the
upper dialog box part. In the edit box Tolerance, the permitted percent of the permitted
stresses exceed is defined. Namely, if the real stresses in the section are too close to the
permitted (in the given permitted proportional exceed limit), the program will treat these bars,
in the command Stability control as regular. By activating the command field OK, the
dialog box will disappear from the monitor, and the chosen regulations will still be valid.
EUROCODE
For EUROCODE, prior to any designing, it is necessary to define the timber material database.
For this purpose, the command field Material has been envisaged, which will be disabled if
DIN code is selected.
The command field Material which is used for

defining the timber material database
924
After activating the command field Material, a dialog box of the following layout will open up:
The dialog box for defining the timber material database

with the current database - the layout
A list containing all timber material databases which are currently stored in the configuration
file is displayed in the left part of the dialog box. Three default material databases are
delivered with the program. The first one in the list is the currently used database, preceded
by an arrow (
). We would like to point out that the data from the current timber material
database will be taken over from dialog boxes Input data, Viewing results and Stability
control - calculator.
The user is allowed to change the current database at all times. The procedure is performed by
selecting the desired database from the list and activating the command field Set current.
This command field is active whenever a timber material database, except the current one, is
selected from the list.
The current material database has been changed

via the command field Set current
Adding a new timber material database is performed by activating the command field
Add. If the check box With Copy is on, the added database represents a copy of the
925
database which was selected at the moment of activating this command field and the name of
which contains label 1.
A copy of the selected database has been inserted in the list

Add
If the check box With Copy is off, an empty row to which the user allocates the name will be
added in the list. Such a database is completely empty, so you need to assign all the required
parameters.
The name of any material database from the list can be easily changed: first, using the mouse,
you need to mark the field in the column Name and then enter the desired name from the
kayboard.
The command field
Delete has been envisaged for removing the selected database. Since
this command is a destructive one, the program will issue an appropriate warning message:
An affirmative reply will result in deleting the selected database, whereas a negative reply will
result in quitting the command.
The command fields
Up and
Down will be active only if there are more than one
material database in the list. These command fields are used for changing the position of the
currently selected material database by moving upwards or downwards.
Activating the command field Edit will result in opening a new dialog box which enables you
to define all required data for the currently selected material database.
926
The dialog box for defining parameters for diffferent

high-quality timber classes - the layout
In addition to the name of the dialog box, the name of the timber material database which is
crrently being edited is also written. In the upper left corner of the dialog box there are three
radio buttons which refer to three timber classes: Solid timber - softwood, Solid timber
- hardwood and Glued Laminated Timber. Selecting one of these three buttons enables
the user to define (in the table located in the central part of the dialog box) all high-quality
timber classes which will belong to that class. As a result, each of these three timber classes
will have its own table containing high-quality classes and their parameters. In the displayed
table, one timber class characteristics correspond to each row. Each high-quality timber class
has been defined by its name and the numerical data set assigned in appropriate columns. In a
column header, the data label is written, whereas its measurement unit is written in the row
above. Obviously, all data in tables can be edited. If some of the parameters havent been
assigned, upon activating the command field OK, the program will issue an appropriate
warning message.
The command field

Add enables you to add a new high-quality timber classes in the
table. The new timber class will be positioned below the row which was selected before
activating the command field
Add and actually it will represent a copy of that row. From
this it follows that, it will have the same name and all other data as the timber class which was
previously selected. Also, you need to rename the newly-added timber class since several
timber classes mustnt have the same names. Otherwise, upon activating the command field
OK, the program will issue the following warning:
927
The command field
Delete enables removing the selected high-quality timber class,
whereas the command fields
Up and
Down enable you to arrange classes in the
table according to your personal preferences.
11.2
Governing load
DIN
By activating this command, the dialog box for corrective coefficients input, for
previously created combinations, is being opened.
Dialog box for corrective coefficients input

for authoritative combinations
In the shown list box, there are as many rows as combinations defined using the command
Load case. In the N column, the ordinal combination number is put; while the last two
columns are predicted for corrective coefficients input Ko and Kd. These coefficients are
used for the permitted stresses correction.
The coefficient Ko depends on the basic reinforcement case character that is put into the
given combination.
Ko = 1.00
Ko = 1.15
Ko = 1.50
for basic reinforcement

for basic + additional reinforcement
for basic + additional reinforcement + special reinforcement
The coefficient Kd depends on the reinforcement lasting.

Kd = 1.00
Kd = 0.90
for short-term reinforcements

for permanent useful reinforcement useful reinforcement or snow act without
stopping more than 3 months
Since all given combinations using the command Load case are being took over in this dialog
box, it could happen that one does not want to do the dimensioning process for all previously
defined combinations. In that case, using this dialog box for corrective coefficients (data in the
Ko or Kd column) give to all combinations that are not supposed to be considered during
dimensioning process, the 0 value.
928
The Tower program enables generating and exporting reports with governing combinations
to the project documentation. For this purpose, the command field
Report has been
envisaged, which is located in the dialog box of the command Governing load.
The command field for generating the report

with governing combinations
Once you have selected this command field, a dialog box containing the generated report will
open up:
The dialog box containing the generated textual report

on governing load- the layout
The command fields which are located in the lower right corner of the dialog box are used for
exporting the report with governing load combinations either to the project documentation,
directly to print or a text file.
929
EUROCODE
After selecting the command Governing load, a dialog box of the following layout will open
up:
The dialog box Governing load EUROCODE the layout

All basic load cases which have been created since entering the dialog box are displayed in the
lower list box. The N column is used for writing the ordinal number of a basic load case, the
Name column is used for writing the assigned name, whereas the last two columns Type
and Duration are used for assigning the type of load and its duration. For each basic load
case, you are allowed to select one of the two offered types of load: basic or exceptional. This
is done by moving the mouse pointer over the field in the column Type and right-clicking,
soon after which the drop-down menu containing the options basic and exceptional will
open up. Selecting one of the offered options enables you to change the type of load into a
desired one, after which the selected type of load will be written in the column Type.
930
The drop-down menu which opens up after right-clicking

over the field in the column Type
Depending on the assigned type of load and type of material, the partial coeffiecient is
calcluated for the characteristics of m material which is used for correcting characteristic
strengths (this will be explained in more detail alter on, in chapter Stability Control).
In the same way, to each basic load case, you are allowed to add appropriate duration. In
other words, right-clicking in the column Duration results in opening, for each basic load
case, a drop-down menu with the options permanent, long-term, medium-term, shortterm and instantaneous.
The drop-down menu which opens up after right-clicking

over the field in the column Duration
931
Selecting one of the offered options enables you to change the load duration into a desired
one, after which the selected load duration will be written in the column Duration.
A list of all load combinations, which has as many rows as there are combinations defined via
the command Load case is displayed in the upper list box. The N column is used for
writing the ordinal number of the given load combination, the Name column is used for
writing the assigned name, whereas the next column is used for determining whether the
given combination will be taken into account during designing or not. The existence of
symbol in this column indicates taking the given combination into account during designing,
and it will be displayed in the report. On the other hand, the empty field indicates that the
given combination will not be taken into account during designing, from which it follows that
there will be no need for displaying it in the report. Right-clicking over some of these check
boxes will result in opening a drop-down menu with the options All on and All off.
Choosing one of these options two enables selecting, i.e. deselecting simultaneously all check
boxes. The last column Duration is used for writing the duration of each combination based
on the duration of basic load cases entering the given combination.
The correctional coefficient Kmod affecting the correction of the characteristic material
strengths (this will be explained in more detail alter on, in chapter Stability Control) is
defined on the basis of the allocated load duration.
The command field
Report, which is located in the lower left part of the dialog box,
enables you to create and insert a report with governing load combinations in the project
documentation. After selecting this command field, a dialog box with the created textual report
will open up:
The dialog box with the generated textual report

on governing load
Two tables are displayed in the report: the first one contains all basic load cases, and the other
one contains all load combinations which will be taken into account during designing (the
existence of symbol in the dialog box Governing load). In the column Type, next to
932
each load combination, its type basic or except. is also displayed, depending on the types
of basic load cases entering the given combination.
Using the command fields which are located in the lower right part of the dialog box enable
you to export the report with governing load combinations to the project documentation,
directly to printing or to a textual document.
11.3
Input Data
DIN
This command is used for defining input data, which the program uses in the
stability control procedure. By choosing it, the program enters the selection procedure, and the
following message appears on the command bar:
<0 sel.> Input Data for beam Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
The procedure itself is completely the same as in other program commands, and the program
will be in the selection procedure, until there is a click on the right mouse button, after what
the dialog box for input data defining will open.
Dialog box for input data defining

What data it is possible to give, depends exclusively on section kind (whether it is a one-sided
or double-sided, of massive wood or of laminated wood, is of constant cross section dimension,
or of a variable height of a cross rectangular section, if only one bar is selected or many of
them). First, we will explain the meaning of every input data.
Buckling length quotient (is given for all bar cross sections shapes)
In the edit boxes 3 and 2, the selected bar bending length coefficient around the local
axis 3, i.e. local axis 2 is given. For these values, the program value l is adopted, and the
user has to correct these values by himself.
By a consecutive click on the mouse button over this switch, one may, from the
program, require either the dimensionless coefficient, either the real meter
bending length. Since it is possible, in a input data given procedure, to select more
bars that have different lengths, the values given over the dimensionless
933
coefficient and meter bending lengths are not mutually connected. During stability
control, a data concerning bending length, that is currently visible, will be
respected.
The Corrective Net/Gross Section Coefficient (is given for all bar cross sections shapes)
This coefficient reduces the gross section surface during longitudinal stresses t design from
the tensile force, as well as during stress from the cross force.
Maximum Bar Slimness max (is given for all bar cross sections shapes)
The maximum bar slimness in the combo box for the selected bar, as one of the offered
possibilities, is given, depending on it if it is a main or a secondary construction element and in
what way the max value is defined.
- The Main Construction Element (approximately Lk) max Lk = 120
- The Main Construction Element (exactly Lk) max Lk = 150
- The Secondary Construction Element max Lk = 175
Material (is given for all bar cross sections shapes)
The material quality is given for the selected bars. One of the offered combinations is chosen
in the combo box:
Type of material:
- Solid wood
- High-Density Plywood
Of a different botanical classification:
- Deciduous
- Conifers
According to class:
- Class I
- Class II
- Class III (only for massive wood, conifers)
Apart from the wooden bar material choice, according to the material type, botanic
classification, and class, it is necessary to enter the wood humidity during exploitation: for
massive wood basis stress for humidity is of 18%, and for the laminated wood 15%. In case
that the humidity differs, the permitted stresses are corrected using coefficients Kf.
Corrective coefficient is entered depending of the construction elements exposedness to
atmosphere influences, and values from 0.85 to 1.00 can be entered, according to the
following table.
934
Types of buildings and

their exposedness degree
to the atmosphere
influences
Completely opened
buildings with nonprotective structure,
imposed to atmosphere
influences or
permanently high air
humidity in closed space
Partially opened
buildings, mostly from
one lateral side, with a
non-protected structure
and partially exposed to
atmosphere influences
Main supporting
structure elements
NonSupervised
supervised
and
and nonmaintained
maintained
Secondary
structure
Nonsupervised
and nonmaintained
supporting
elements
Supervised
and
maintained
0.85
0.90
0.90
1.00
0.90
0.95
0.95
1.00
In all other cases, for the corrective exposedness coefficient, 1.00 is to be entered.
Multi Segment
Distance Between the Connection Elements
The distance is given between the connection elements (wooden insertions or splice bars), a
maximum distance between the connection elements must be less than one third of the bar
length.
Corrective Connection Coefficient (in multi segment bar cases):
This is given depending on the connection between the independent elements and connecting
means, according to the following table:
Connection element
Wooden insertion
Splice bars wooden

joint plates
Connecting
means
Glue
Pins, links
Nails, mandrels
and screws
Glue
Nails, mandrels
and screws
Connection
corrective
coefficient K
1.00
2.50
3.00
3.00
4.50
The corrective coefficient K is used for bar slimness design around the intangible axis.
For bars that are of laminated wood, the following input data is defined:
Number of Adhesion Stages:
An Adhesion Phase:
when all bays are mutually parallel (laminating at once)
Many Adhesion Stages:
when there are more bonding plains, possible among bars with a
variable cross section rectangular height (laminating more times)
935
For bays direction (I bonding phase), one of the three given directions can be chosen:
- in the Axis Bar Direction
- parallely to top edge
- parallely to bottom edge
Depending on one bonding phases number and basic phase bay bonding direction (I phase),
the design procedure, as well as the corrective coefficient K, is defined.
Lamination thickness
For bars that are bent, and which have the relation *, a permitted direct stress reduction is
done, while for the * relation, a bay thickness in function of bent, is done.
The report on controling each member stability can now contain the table of member utilization
factors by all combinations. Including this table in the report is performed via the check box
Include the table of utilization factors by loads in the report.
Controling stability can be carried out with disregarding one or more influences. It is
completely up to the user to specify the type of influence and also to make sure not to make
any mistakes while doing it.
Apply on all belonging on the same set
Check box with whose turning on allows assigning the same input data to all beams belonging
to the same set.
In case of the repeated structural analysis of the whole model, those members which have
already been designed will retain their input data for designing unless they have suffered
changes of geometry or cross sections.
NOTE:
Base permitted stresses depending on material types, botanic classification, and classes, are
reduced by the following corrective coefficients:
Ko character of basic supporting elements that are entered into the given combination
Kd depends on the reinforcement lasting time
Ki depends on the construction element exposedness to atmosphere influences during
exploitation
Kf depends on wood humidity during exploitation
K - among construction elements from laminated wood depending on the angle between
bonding plains and force direction
The total corrective coefficient K is obtained as a product of all previously corrective
coefficients.
EUROCODE
This command is used for defining the entry data to be used by the program during the
procedure of stability control. After selecting it, the program will start the procedure of
selecting, and the following message appears on the command bar:
<0sel.> Input data for beam Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection
The mere procedure of selecting is exactly the same as in all other commands in the program.
The program will still be in the procedure of selecting until you either select the sub-option
End or right-click, soon after which a dialog box for defining the entry data will open up:
936
The dialog box for defining the entry data the layout
The left part of the dialog box has been envisaged for defining material for all selected
members, in the process of which you will use data from the database which is placed as the
current one in the dialog box Timber material database (see chapter Choosing a code for
designing).
Material
Type of material is defined by selecting one of the offered radio buttons:
-
Solid timber - softwood

Solid timber - hardwood
Glued Laminated Timber
To each of these types of material belong corresponding high-quality timber classes, which the
user may choose by himself from the combo box. The contents of the combo box corresponds
to the list of high-quality timber classes which is stored in the current timber material
database, so obviously, it will change depending on the selected current databse.
Laminated
In members which are made from glued laminated timber, bay thickness and direction are
defined.
For bay direction, one of the two offered directions can be chosen from the combo box
Direction.
-
parallely to top edge

parallely to bottom edge
The edit box Lamination thickness is used for entering the bay thickness in centimeters
(cm).
Service class
For all types and high-quality tumber classes, it is necessary to select one of the three offered
exploitative classes:
-
Service class 1 - with timber damp corresponding to the temperature of 20 and

relative air humidity of 65%
937
-
Service class 2 with timber damp corresponding to the temperature of 20 and air
humidity which exceeds 85% a few weeks per year
Service class 3 when timber damp is bigger than in exploitative class 2
Buckling
In the upper right part of the dialog box, the following buckling length coefficients.
For the selected member, in the edit boxes Buckling length coefficient 3 and Buckling
length coefficient 2, the buckling length coefficients around member local axis 3 and
local axis 2 are assigned. Value 1 is assigned for these values by the program, and it is
completely up to the user to correct these values.
If you click repeatedly several times in a row over this switch, you will be able to
request from the program either to enter a dimensionless coefficient, or the actual
buckling length in meters. Since, during the procedure of assigning entry data,
you are allowed to select several members having different lengths, the values
assigned via a dimensionless coefficient and buckling lengths in meters are not
mutually related. In other words, during the stability control, the data on buckling
length, which is currently visible in the dialog box, will be respected.
The Corrective Net/Gross Section Coefficient is assigned for all shapes members cross
sections. This coefficient reduces the cross section gross surface during the stress verification
from tensile force,a swell as duirng the shear stress verification.
Lateral buckling length coefficient is used for proving the lateral stability of elements.
Value 1 is automatically assigned for this value by the program, and it is completely up to the
user to correct these values.
If you click repeatedly several times in a row over this switch, you will be able to
request from the program either to enter a dimensionless coefficient, or the actual
spacings of laterally supported points perpendicular on local axis 2 direction, in
meters.
Stability control can be performed with disregarding one or several influences. It is completely
up to the user to determine which influences are those, and to take special care not to make
any mistake.
Include the table of utilization factors by load combinations in the report
The report on stability control of each member may also contain a table of utilization factors by
load combinations. Including this table in the report is performed via this check box.
11.4
Stability Control
When all input data is defined, by choosing the command Stability control, a
standard selection procedure is entered.
<0 sel.> Stability control Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups
Namely, all bars, for which the required dimensioning process is to take place, should be
selected. After the procedure end, the program will, at first, check whether the selected bars
have previously been dimensioned, and in that case will issue the following warning:
938
In that case, one has the possibility to abandon the procedure, or by choosing the command
field OK continue with the dimensioning process command all previously selected bars. In
the stability control scope, a maximum distance of side holding points design is carried out.
After the finished dimensioning process, the program will be ready for results design
processing, about which, we will discuss in the next chapter.
Design Way DIN
In the case of a bearer with a constant dimension of a cross rectangular section, the stress
design is done according to the following formulas:
For longitudinal direct stresses:
m3
M3
'
W3 m
,
dop
m2
M2
'
W2 m
and
dop
t n
Aneto
'
t dop
that is
cn
N
'
c dop
A
For shearing stresses:
1.5
'
m dop
Mt
'
;
Wp dop
Longitudinal stress interference is carried out in the following way:

If an direct stress force acts upon a section:
m3 m 2 c n
'
1.00
m' dop
c dop
or if an axial tensile force acts upon a section:
m3 m2 t n
'
1.00
m' dop
t dop
Shearing stress interference is carried out in the following way:
m 2 m dop
'
m3
if torsion moment acts upon the section:
'
dop
939
The bent bearers stress design, with a cross-rectangular section height (which is formed in one
phase) and a intersection point change, is done, according to the following formulas:
For longitudinal direct stresses:
m3
km
M3
'
W3 m
dop
m2
M2
'
W2 m
dop
t n
kn
Z
'
t dop that is
Aneto
cn
kn
N
'
c dop ;
A
For cross stresses:
m 3
k m
M3 , i
W3
k n
Z that is
Aneto
n k n A
N
The bent bearers stress design, with a cross-rectangular section height in which, all bays are
parallel, is done, according to the following formulas:
For direct stresses:
m3
M3
'
W3 m
,
dop
m2
M2
'
W2 m
i
dop
t n
Aneto
'
t dop
that is
cn
N
'
c dop ;
A
For cross stresses:
m 3
k m
M3 , i
W3
k n
Z that is
Aneto
k n
N;
A
For longitudinal shearing stresses:
m3
km
M3 , i
W3
Z
N
that is
kn ;
n
Aneto
A
The combined stress state control on a inclined edge is done according to the following
formula:
2

1

2.66
dop
c

dop
c
If 0
1
2
1
t 1

1.33
1.25 t dop
dop
dop
If 0
1
dop
During stability design, attention was paid to the following specifications:

- Defining the bars bending length with a variable cross section dimension
- Section reductions in bent bars cases, when the developed bays length is less than 4.0 m,
in bearers cases that are formed in one phase (laminated at once)
- Defining the K coefficient (the angle between the force direction and laminating direction)
- In bent bars cases, which bending relation is =R/h in 2 10 relation and is designed as
bent bars, if > 10, they are designed as straight bars (with no bending influences)
The bars that could not be designed, in the scope of the command for results representation
are marked as !!!. This means that some of the following conditions have been exceeded:
940
- Buckling, > max (defined in input data),
- In bent bars cases if the bending relation =R/h is less than 2 (<2),
- Bars that are formed in the I phase (laminated at once) if the final bays wedges do not
satisfy the regulated criteria,
- The angle between the axial force (bar axis) and laminated bays direction.
Designing timber structures according to EN 1995-1-1:2004
The following exploitative classes have been defined:
-
Service class 1 - with timber damp corresponding to the temperature of 20 and relative air
humidity of 60%
Service class 2 with timber damp corresponding to the temperature of 20 and air
humidity which exceeds 85% a few weeks per year
Service class 3 when timber damp is bigger than in exploitative class 2
The corrective coefficient for different load duration kmod is defined as:
Load duration/Expl.
class
Permanent
Long-term
Medium-term
Short-term
Instantaneous
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
0.5
0.55
0.65
0.7
0.9
The partial coefficient for material characteristics m is defined as:

-
For basic load combination, for solid timber m = 1.3

For basic load combination, for glued laminated timber m = 1.25
For exceptional load combination m = 1.0
za boundary utilization state m = 1.0
Corresponding strengths fm,d , ft,0,d , ft,90,d , fc,0,d , fc,90,d , fv,d are obtained when tabular values
fm,k , ft,0,k , ft,90,k , fc,0,k , fc,90,k , fv,k p are multiplied by corrective coefficient of load duration
class and exploitative class kmod and then divided by partial coefficient for material
characteristics m.
f x .d f x.k
k mod
m
Way of calculating:
a) bending without axial force (N = 0) , both conditions must be met:
km
m,3,d
f m,3,d
m,3,d
f m,3,d
km
m , 2 ,d
f m , 2 ,d
m, 2,d
f m, 2,d
100
t
100
Where:
t
- permitted tolerance in %
941
km
1.00
fm,3,d i fm,2,d
m,3,d i m,2,d
- shape factor for rectangular section
km = 0.70, for all other sections km =
- corresponding strengths to bending

- calculated bending stresses (M/W)
b) ecccentric tension (N > 0) , both conditions must be met:
t , 0 ,d
m,3,d
km
f t , 0 ,d
t , 0 ,d
f t , 0 ,d
f m,3,d
m,3,d
f m,3,d
km
m , 2 ,d
f m , 2 ,d
m , 2 ,d
f m , 2 ,d
100
t
100
where:
t
km
fm,3,d , fm,2,d , ft,0,d
m,3,d , m,2,d
t,0,d
- permitted tolerance in %
- shape factor for rectangular section km = 0.70, for all other sections
km = 1.00
- corresponding strengths to bending, unless they exist it is fm,d (if a
section has small dimensions, it differs from fm,d )
- calculated bending stresses (M/W) same as for DIN (corresponding
axes)
- calculated longitudinal stresses (N/A neto) as previously
c) eccentric pressure
L3
i3
L2
i2
slendernesses L3 i L2 are buckling lengths, whereas i3 i i2 are cross section inertia radiuses
c ,crit ,3
rel.3
2 E0,05
32
f c , 0 ,k
c ,crit ,3
c ,crit , 2
rel.2
2 E0,05
22
f c , 0 ,k
c ,crit , 2
critical buckling stress
relative slenderness
if rel,3 0.3 and rel,2 0.3, then these two conditions must be met:
c , 0 ,d
f
c , 0 ,d
k m m,3,d m, 2,d 1 t
f m,3,d
f m, 2,d 100
942
2
c , 0 ,d
f
c , 0 ,d
m,3,d
m , 2 ,d
t

f m,3,d
f m, 2,d 100
In all other cases, the following two conditions must be met:
c , 0 ,d
k c , 2 f c , 0 ,d
c , 0 ,d
k c , 3 f c , 0 ,d
km
m,3,d
f m,3,d
m,3,d
f m,3,d
km
m , 2 ,d
f m , 2 ,d
m , 2 ,d
f m , 2 ,d
100
t
100
where :
k c ,3
k c,2
k 3 k 32 2rel ,3
1
k 2 k 22 2rel , 2
and
k3 0.5 1 c rel.3 0.3 2rel.3

c
k 2 0.5 1 c rel.2 0.3 2rel.2
- starting imperfection with respect to straight member (for monolithic timber c = 0.20,
and for Glued Laminated timber c = 0.10)
d) transversal force influence
2 ,d
1.5
Q2
Aneto
3, d
1.5
Q3
Aneto
stresses from transversal force
The following condition must be met:
2
2,d
f v ,d
2
3,d
1 tol
where:
Q3 i Q2
Aneto
- transversal force
- net cross-sectional area
943
e) torsional influence
Stress from torsional influence is calculated as follows:
tor, 3, d
Mt
Wp 3
tor, 2 , d
Mt
Wp 2
The following two conditions must be met:
tor, 3, d
fv,d
tor, 2 , d
fv, d
1 tol
1 tol
In the case of simultaneous actions of torsional moment and transversal force, the following
two conditions must be met:
2, d tor,3, d 1 tol
f v, d
3,d tor, 2,d 1 tol
f v ,d
f)
single tapered girders
On tapered edge, the bending strength is modified as:

For compressive stresses parallel to the tapered edge:
f m, , d
f m, d
2
f m, d
f
1
tan m, d tan2
1.50 f
f
v, d
c,90, d
For tensile stresses parallel to the tapered edge:
f m, , d
f m, d
2
f m, d
f m, d
1
tan
tan2
0.75 f v, d
f t ,90, d
944
Control is the same as for the straight member, but the number of conditions to be met now
has increased to four due to different bending strengths on a straight and tapered edge.
Section utilization in the zone where bays are parallel to the member edge
utilisatio n by
k m m,3,0,d m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m ,d
f m , 2 ,d
and
utilisatio n by m,3,0,d
k m m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m ,d
f m , 2 ,d
Section utilization in the zone where bays are not parallel to the member edge
utilisatio n by
k m m,3, ,d m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m, ,d
f m , 2,d
and
utilisatio n by m,3, ,d
k m m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m, ,d
f m , 2,d
g) bent girders of constant cross section
The following two conditions must be met:
utilisatio n by
k m m,3,d m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m ,d k r
f m , 2 ,d
and
utilisatio n by
m,3,d k m m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m ,d k r
f m , 2 ,d
Bending stress for axis 3 (the axis around which girder is bent ) is calculated as follows:
m , 3, d k l
k1 1
M3
W3
k2 0.35
k3 0.6
k4 0
945
2
h
h
h
h
h
kl k1 k2 k3 k4 1 0.35 0.6
r
r
r
r
r
Reduction factor kr is introduced, due to bending bays during the work:
if
rin
240
kr 1
t
if
rin
r
240
kr 0.76 0.001 in
t
t
In case that the stress in the outer edge with repect to the curve center from the moment
influence is pressure, it is necessary to perform the lateral tensile stresses verification and to
meet the following condition:
t ,3,90,d
V
k dis 0
V
1 tol
0.2
f t ,90,d
kdis - factor for distribution of stress in bent girders with constant height, with value 1.4
t ,3,90,d k p
M3
W3
V0 - comparative volume of 0.01 m

V - volume of the bent girder part, maximum value V=2/3 Vb
Vb - girder total volume (girder volume between two pinned joints equals to girder total value,
as general value)
k6 0.25
h
h
k p k6 0.25
r
r
h) bent tapered girders
The following four conditions must be met:
Section utilization at the non-tapered edge :
utilisatio n by
k m m,3,0,d m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m ,d k r
f m , 2,d
and
946
utilisatio n by m,3,0,d
k m m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m ,d k r
f m , 2,d
Section utilization at the tapered edge:
utilisatio n by
k m m,3, ,d m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m, ,d k r
f m , 2 ,d
and
utilisatio n by
m,3, ,d k m m, 2,d 1 tol
axial force
f m, ,d k r
f m , 2 ,d
Bending stress for the axis 3 (the axis around which girder is bent ) is calculated as follows:
For grains parallel to the member edge:
m,3,0, d kl 1 4tg 2
6M 3
bh2
For grains on tapered edge:
m,3, , d kl 1 4tg 2
5M 3
bh2
- angle of the taper
Reduction factor kr is introduced, due to bending bays during the work:
if
if
rin
240
kr 1
t
rin
r
240
kr 0.76 0.001 in
t
t
Bending strength is modified on the inclined edge, as follows:

If tapered edge is compressed by the moment:
f m, ,d
f m,d
f m,d
f c ,90,d
sin 2 cos 2
947
If tapered edge is tensioned by the moment:
f m, ,d
f m,d
f m,d
sin 2 cos 2
f t ,90,d
The coefficient kl is calculated as follows:

2
h
h
h
kl k1 k2 k3 k4
r
r
r
k1 1 1.4tg 5.4tg 2
k2 0.35 8tg
k3 0.6 8.3tg 7.8tg 2

k4 6tg 2
In case that the stress in the outer edge with repect to the curve center from the moment
influence is pressure, it is necessary to perform the lateral tensile stresses verification and to
meet the following condition:
t ,3,90,d
V
k dis 0
V
kdis
V0
V
Vb
1 tol
0.2
f t ,90,d
factor for distribution of stress in bent girders with constant height, with value 1.4
comparative volume of 0.01 m
volume of the bent girder part, maximum value V=2/3 Vb
girder total volume (girder volume between two pinned joints equals to girder total value,
as general value)
t ,3,90,d k p
M3
W3
h
h
k p k5 k6 k7
r
r
k5 0.2tg
k6 0.25 1.5tg 2.6tg 2

k7 2.1tg 4tg 2
948
i)
Proof of the element lateral stability
In case that girder is exposed to bending moment, with or without pressure force
the following condition must be met:
m,3, d
kkrit f m, d
1 tol
relative slenderness is defined as follows:
m,3, d
kkrit f m, d
1 tol
relative slenderness is defined as follows:
f m ,k
rel ,m
m,crit
Critical bending stress is calculated as follows:
m,crit
M 3,crit E0,05I 2G0,05I tor
W3
ef W3
Based on the value rel,m, kkrit is defined as follows:

if
if
if
rel,m 0.75
0.75 < rel,m 1.40
1.40 < rel,m
kkrit = 1
kkrit = 1.56 - 0.75 rel,m
kkrit = 1/rel,m2
E0,05 - 5% E module fraction parallel to grains

G0,05 - 5% shear module fraction
Itor
- torsional moment of inertia
ef
- the spacings of laterally supported points perpendicular on the direction of local axis 2
949
11.5
Results Representation
By choosing this command, the program colors all bars, for which the stability
control has been carried out, in green, i.e. in red. From the upper bars side, the maximum
value is written of the designed using section coefficient for: direct, shearing stress, control of
the combined stress state on the tapered edge, as well as in the intersection point section.
Since it is obviously clear that the ideal value of this coefficient is 1.00, we will state anyway
that all bars that do not satisfy, will have the value > 1.00 and those that do, will have the
value < 1.00. We will state that the bars that have the coefficient use > 1.00 will be
colored green, if the stress exceeding matches the tolerance, given using the command
Regulations.
After activating the command Viewing results, the message will appear on the command
bar:
<0 sel.> Viewing results Select (Filter / <End> / Side reserved dots diagram):
User is now expected to select an arbitrary beam, or to select one of sub-options from the
command line.
In "Tower" it is possible to use filters for displaying dimensioned beams to display only those
beams of a given set that have utilization in a given range as well as beams with extreme
efficiency. This way the program will paint blue all beams of a given set, for which stability
control was conducted, and which do not meet the given filter. Otherwise, if they meet given
filters, beams will be painted green if they have a coefficient of utilization "<1.00", or red if
they have a coefficient of utilization "> 1.00". Non-dimensioned beams will be paint white.
After activating the sub-option "Filter", a dialog in which user can specify the filter for
displaying dimensioned beams will be displayed:

"Active"
Check box that determines if all defined filters in this dialog affect the display
of dimensioned beams.
"Set"
The column with ordinal numbers of sets of steel sections from the file.
"Name"
The column with descriptions of sets of steel sections from the file. Behind
this column is the column with check boxes that determine for which set of
950
beams will the filter be applied. Right-clicking this column opens a drop-down
menu with the options "All on" and "All off". With them you can turn on or
off filter for all sets.
"Filter"
Clicking on the arrow located on the right of the cell, opens a menu with
offered filters: "All", "Only n extremes", "Only with the yield larger than
", "Only with the yield less than "
"All" - indicates that all beams of the set will be displayed without using a
filter.
"Only n extremes" - indicates that only n beams of one set will be displayed,
with the highest utilization level. In the edit field "n" the user specifies the
number of beams.
"Only with the yield larger than " - indicates that for each set of beams,
only those will be displayed that have a utilization greater than the one user
specified in edit box "".
"Only with the yield less than " - indicates that for each set of beams,
only those will be displayed that have a utilization less than the one user
specifies in edit box "".
After selecting a beam from the drawing, a dialog will be displayed:
The dialog box for the detailed results dimensioning process representation
All input selected data for the selected bar is in the lower dialog box part, in the lower right
dialog part, as approximate values, the section use coefficients (), for each of the given
combiantion, are shown. In the upper dialog box part, a detailed carried out dimensioning
process procedure is given. This window current contents change can be done by using scroll
tapes from the right hand side, and the buttons PgUp, PgDn, as well as cursor arrows ,
, can also be used, but on the condition that the focus is in this window. If these buttons do
not react, it is sufficient to click on any place inside the window, predicted for dimensioning
process results representation. This will lead the focus change, and also the scroll buttons will
start working. In case one requires a change the input data for the given bar, it is not
necessary to exit this command and start the command Input data once again, but to carry
out all necessary changes inside this dialog box, and then activate the command field
951
Calculate. After this operation, the program will, for the selected bar, once again carry out
the design, taking into account all done changes in input data. The conclusion is that it is not
necessary to use the command Input Data, if one requires dimensioning process the bars
one by one. In that case, it is sufficient to activate the command Stability Control, and not
paying attention to the carried out dimensioning process, select the bars one by one, in this
dialog box, give all necessary input data and do the dimensioning process once again.
If the bar does not satisfy the requirements, and it cannot pass all necessary controls by
changing any of the input data, which lead to the structural problem solving, it is then
necessary to change the bar cross section. Since that change will lead to the structural
influences redistribution on the whole model, it is necessary to return to the input data model,
to change the bar cross section, to carry out the structural influences design once again, and
certainly to size all bars on the model. If one estimates that changing the cross section will not
lead to the significant structural influences redistribution, the program offers the possibility to
change the cross section without the construction redesign. The predicted command field, for
this, is New Section. By activating it, the dialog box that is identical to the dialog box for
cross section beams defining, is opened. The cross section can there be changed and using the
command field
Calculate, require new dimensioning process of the selected bar, for old
structural influences, but with new cross section characteristics. We will state that this changed
cross section will be treated only in the module for wooden construction elements
dimensioning process, while the program will, in all other commands, handle only with the
original section that is given in the input data module, and for what the structural influences
have already been designed. In case one requires abandoning the cross section change, it is
sufficient to activate the command field Original. By choosing this command field, the
previously changed cross section will be replaced by the original one. We state that in case of
the variable cross section in beams, the changing cross section dimension option will be
unavailable.
It is possible to generate the report on controling stability in the selected section. The edit box
Section distance from the member beginning is used for entering the section position in
which the designing report is requested, whereas by activating the command field Generate
the report, it is possible to generate the report which is related to the given section.
Selecting the command field
Clalculate will result in viewing again the report on
controling stability for the whole member.
By selecting the command fields
and
, each viewed report can be either exported to the
project documentation or sent directly to print.
By activating the command field OK, all eventually carried out input data changes, as well as
the results that have been once again carried out, will be permanently memorized for the
selected bar, while the command field Cancel is predicted for abandoning all carried out
changes.
By choosing the sub-option Side reserved dots diagram, which is present on the command
bar, the diagram representing maximum side clinging points distance is shown, representing
the reciprocal values of the clinging points maximum distance for all reinforcement
combinations, for every construction wooden element, mutually for the lower and the upper
bar edge, as given in the following picture.
952
Side reserved dots diagram

Note:
The option of displaying the diagram of laterally supported points is available only for the
stability analysis by DIN.
11.6
Report
Since this command is predicted for creating textual reports on the paper, its choice
has the meaning only after the carried out stability control procedure. By choosing this
command, the well-known message is shown on the command bar, which expects from the
user to select one or more bars.
<0 sel.> Report Select (All / Window / Polygon / Section / eXtras / selection Groups / Recent
selection / Deselect / <End> / Filter):
Using filters for displaying dimensioned beams, user can, for each set of beams, display only
those beams that have utilization in a given range and beams with extreme utilization. For
beams that meet set filters user can easily create a report by their automated insertion in
selection, but there is a possibility to insert additional beams in report.
After activating sub-option "Filter" a dialog will be opened in which user can specify the filter
for displaying dimensioned beams:
953

under the report command
Working with this dialogue has been explained before (see section 11.5), so it will not be
explained here again.
Select for the report - Check box that selects all beams that meet the criteria. This way user
can quickly and easily create a report for them.
After you have selected all beams for which you want to create a text report, clicking the right
mouse button will mark the end of selection procedure and a dialog with a text report will be
displayed.
Dialog box for the textual dimensioning process results representation
954
At the beginning of he report, input data is inserted for every beam, and then the
dimensioning process carried out results.
Apart from the direct print, this program, also predicts the report export into the project
documentation. All bars chosen during one sance will belong to one textual report, so its up
to teuser to define the way the chosen bars would be classified.
11.7
One Section Report
Since for every of the carried out analysis, an appropriate place on the beam is
defined automatically, using the previously described command, one can not obtain the results
representation in the required place. This is because, this place is not critical for the given
analysis. Therefore, the command Report for a single section has been made, by which
there is a possibility to obtain the textual results dimensioning process report, exactly on the
required place. By choosing it, the program will, at first, from the command bar, require to
select the beam in which scope the required section is to be observed.
<0 sel.> Beam on which cross section is requested Select (<End> / Side reserved dots
diagram):
After choosing the required beam, the program will, from the command bar, require the choice
of a point that previously belong to the selected beam, and which will define the section place.
Point on the beam:
By choosing the point on the selected beam, the dialog box will open showing the carried out
dimensioning process in the chosen section.
The dialog box for dimensioning process results

representation in the chosen section
955
11.8
Stability control - calculator
Controling stability and generating the report for an arbitrarily defined member with
arbitrarily assigned influences is now possible within the program. Once you have activated
this command, a dialog box quite similar to the one for viewing results will open up.
The dialog box for controling the single member stability - the layout
In this dialog box, in addition to the fields for entering standard input data, which are also
located in the dialog boxes for input data and viewing results, there are also fields for entering
those data which would otherwise be taken over from a real entity member in the structure.
The parameters group Geometry enables defining a member geometry. The edit box
Length is used for entering a member length and in case that it is necesssary to design a
member with arc geometry, you can turn on the check box Arc geometry and enter the arc
radius in the edit box Radius. If this happens to be the case, you can also customize the
orientation of the member local coordinate system whether local axis 2 is oriented towards
the center or away from the curve centre.
Influences - in this part of the dialog box, there are edit boxes for entering influences
(forces) which are effective along the member.
The command field Pick is used for preparing the data in this dialog box, on the basis of the
selected member from the structure.
Activating this command field will result in taking directly from the drawing, and the command
bar will obtain the following layout:
<0 sel.> Single member Select (<End>):
You may select a single member, upon which the program will return to the main dialog box.
You can take the cross section, length and input data for controling stability from the selected
member.
956
The command field New section is used for changing the member cross section. Once you
have activated it, the dialog box for selecting and defining cross section will open up.
Analysing and generating the report is performed by activating the command field
Calculate. Maximum utilization factor is written in the field Utilisation factor.

Tower 7 - Build 7041 - Manual - ENG PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tower 7 - Build 7041 - Manual - ENG PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Application for static and dynamic structural analysis,

Copyright (c) Radimpex * http://www.radimpex.rs * e-mail: info@radimpex.rs * Tel. 011 3809-158

Required Computer Configuration .............................................................. 1

Program Installation ................................................................................. 6

Local Program Installation .............................................................................. 7

Network Installation .................................................................................... 15

Program Uninstallation ........................................................................... 21

Starting the Program .............................................................................. 22

Basic Concept and Organisation of the Program ......................................... 23

2. GRAPHIC INTERFACE ............................................................................... 24

Screen Appearance ................................................................................ 24

Arrangement and Size of Windows for Drawing .......................................... 26

Operating with windows.......................................................................... 29

Activating Commands ............................................................................. 31

Repeating and Interrupting Commands.......................................................... 32

Choosing subcommands from command bar................................................... 32

Transparent Commands ............................................................................... 33

Operating with Dialog Boxes ........................................................................ 33

Selecting Points ..................................................................................... 42

Free Point Selecting .................................................................................... 45

Orthogonal and polar points selection ............................................................ 45

Relative entering of a point by assigning a single coordinate ............................ 47

Point Selecting by Assigning Coordinates ....................................................... 48

Point Selecting by Precise Targeting (OSNAP Criteria) ................................... 50

Choosing Points by Selecting ........................................................................ 53

Drawing the Polygonal Line ..................................................................... 53

Drawing the Arbitrary Polygonal Line ............................................................. 55

Drawing the Rectangle ................................................................................ 56

Drawing the Circle ...................................................................................... 58

Zooming Parts of Drawings ..................................................................... 61

Zoom Window ............................................................................................ 61

Zoom previous ........................................................................................... 62

Copyright (c) Radimpex * http://www.radimpex.rs * e-mail: info@radimpex.rs * Tel. 011 3809-158

Zoom Dynamic ........................................................................................... 63

Zoom All .................................................................................................... 63

Mouse Wheel Dynamic Zoom ........................................................................ 64

Selecting the elements of a drawing ......................................................... 64

Commands for Manipulating the Elements of Drawings ............................... 73

2.9.10 3D Array .................................................................................................... 80

2.10 Visibility ............................................................................................... 83

Copyright (c) Radimpex * http://www.radimpex.rs * e-mail: info@radimpex.rs * Tel. 011 3809-158

2.12.7 Generating the frames ................................................................................ 123

2.13 3D Graphic Control (menu 3D View) .................................................... 124

2.14 Commands for Changing the Current Presentation in 2D View Window

3. ENTERING DATA .................................................................................... 145

Structure ............................................................................................ 145

Slab/Wall .................................................................................................. 149

Hole ......................................................................................................... 156

Boundary Conditions .................................................................................. 156

Beam ....................................................................................................... 170

Releasing the Influences ............................................................................. 217

Editing of influence releases ........................................................................ 225

Bypassing Beams ....................................................................................... 226

Database of massive and thin-wall cross sections .......................................... 227

Generate thin-wall section girder ................................................................. 232

3.1.10 Area Support ............................................................................................. 235

Sphere .............................................................................................. 251

Cone ................................................................................................. 252

Tunnel ............................................................................................... 253

Copyright (c) Radimpex * http://www.radimpex.rs * e-mail: info@radimpex.rs * Tel. 011 3809-158

Helix ................................................................................................. 253

Existing Surface .................................................................................. 254